Dell Latitude E6530 English Manuels
Dell Latitude E6530 English Manuels
-> Accéder au site Dell
-> Accéder aux CODES PROMO et Bons de réduction Dell
-> Voir d'autres manuels Dell
Revenir à l'accueil
ou juste avant la balise de fermeture -->
Latitude E6530
More Languages
More Languages
-> Commander sur Dell.com, Cliquez ici
Autres manuels :
![[TXT]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/icons/text.gif)
Dell-PowerEdge-T710-..> 10-May-2013 14:23 2.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-T420-..> 10-May-2013 14:23 3.2M
Dell-UPS-500T-Manuel..> 10-May-2013 14:22 3.4M
Dell-PowerConnect-55..> 10-May-2013 14:22 4.5M
Dell-UPS-500- Englis..> 10-May-2013 14:21 4.6M
Dell-UPS-500T-Españ..> 10-May-2013 14:20 1.7M
Dell-OptiPlex-330-Ma..> 10-May-2013 14:20 2.2M
Dell-Inspiron-1520-E..> 10-May-2013 14:20 1.9M
Dell-Latitude-E6530-..> 10-May-2013 14:19 2.4M
Dell-Latitude-E6530-..> 10-May-2013 14:19 2.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-T605-..> 10-May-2013 13:46 2.8M
Dell-7330dn-Mono-Las..> 10-May-2013 13:41 2.8M
Dell-Alienware-X51-M..> 10-May-2013 13:41 2.7M
Dell-Comment-utilise..> 10-May-2013 13:41 2.7M
Dell-Latitude-D630-M..> 10-May-2013 11:17 4.7M
Dell-Precision-690-M..> 10-May-2013 11:16 3.2M
Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 10-May-2013 11:16 3.9M
Dell-Precision-M40-M..> 10-May-2013 11:15 3.9M
Dell-Precision-360-M..> 10-May-2013 11:15 4.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-R320-..> 10-May-2013 11:14 4.4M
Dell-Precision-450-M..> 10-May-2013 11:13 4.6M
Dell-Intel-Active-Ma..> 10-May-2013 11:13 4.7M
Dell-OptiPlex-755-Ma..> 10-May-2013 11:12 5.5M
Dell-PowerVault-NX30..> 10-May-2013 11:12 5.6M
Dell-Precision-M4500..> 10-May-2013 11:10 6.1M
Dell-OptiPlex-SX280-..> 10-May-2013 11:10 6.0M
Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 10-May-2013 10:30 3.2M
Dell-PowerEdge-T100-..> 10-May-2013 10:22 3.0M
Dell-Vostro-270s-Man..> 10-May-2013 10:21 3.1M
Dell-Precision-T7600..> 10-May-2013 10:21 3.2M
Dell-Precision-M4400..> 10-May-2013 10:20 3.3M
Dell-Precision-M4700..> 10-May-2013 10:20 3.4M
Dell-Precision-M4600..> 10-May-2013 10:19 3.4M
Dell-Precision-390-M..> 10-May-2013 10:19 2.0M
Dell-Precision-610-M..> 10-May-2013 10:18 2.3M
Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 10-May-2013 10:18 2.3M
Dell-Precision-M20-M..> 10-May-2013 10:17 2.8M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 10-May-2013 10:17 2.8M
Dell-Precision-370-M..> 10-May-2013 10:16 3.2M
Dell-PowerEdge-T100-..> 10-May-2013 10:22 3.0M
Dell-Vostro-270s-Man..> 10-May-2013 10:21 3.1M
Dell-Precision-T7600..> 10-May-2013 10:21 3.2M
Dell-Precision-M4400..> 10-May-2013 10:20 3.3M
Dell-Precision-M4700..> 10-May-2013 10:20 3.4M
Dell-Precision-M4600..> 10-May-2013 10:19 3.4M
Dell-Precision-390-M..> 10-May-2013 10:19 2.0M
Dell-Precision-610-M..> 10-May-2013 10:18 2.3M
Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 10-May-2013 10:18 2.3M
Dell-Precision-M20-M..> 10-May-2013 10:17 2.8M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 10-May-2013 10:17 2.8M
Dell-Precision-370-M..> 10-May-2013 10:16 3.2M
Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 10-May-2013 10:16 3.2M
Dell-XPS-M1210-Owner..> 08-May-2013 10:57 2.9M
Dell-Windows-8-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:54 5.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 08-May-2013 10:52 4.3M
Dell-Inspiron-1521-M..> 08-May-2013 10:51 2.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 08-May-2013 10:50 3.1M
Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:50 3.2M
Dell-XPS-630-Manuels..> 08-May-2013 10:49 3.6M
Dell-XPS-M1730-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:49 3.9M
Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48 4.5M
Dell-Vostro-410-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48 4.1M
Dell-Vostro-1700-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:47 4.8M
Dell-Inspiron-m301z-..> 08-May-2013 10:47 4.8M
Dell-Studio-Slim-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:45 5.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 08-May-2013 08:46 4.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R200-..> 08-May-2013 08:46 2.6M
Dell-Inspiron-640M-M..> 08-May-2013 08:46 3.7M
Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:45 2.6M
Dell-Studio-Desktop-..> 08-May-2013 08:44 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-1000-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:44 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-15-Int..> 08-May-2013 08:44 3.0M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 08-May-2013 08:43 3.1M
Dell-DR4000-Manuels.htm 08-May-2013 08:43 3.4M
Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 08-May-2013 08:42 3.3M
Dell-Latitude-XT2-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:42 3.5M
Dell-Latitude-E5520-..> 08-May-2013 08:41 3.5M
Dell-OptiPlex-745-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:40 3.9M
Dell-Inspiron-1525-M..> 08-May-2013 08:40 3.9M
Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39 4.2M
Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39 2.8M
Dell-Inspiron-510m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:38 3.2M
Dell-Inspiron-Duo-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:38 3.0M
Dell-Vostro-1550-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:37 3.4M
Dell-Precision-T5600..> 08-May-2013 08:37 3.3M
Dell-Dimension-8300-..> 07-May-2013 22:03 2.5M
Dell-Latitude-Cpi-Ma..> 07-May-2013 22:01 3.2M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 07-May-2013 22:01 3.2M
Dell-Latitude-D620-M..> 07-May-2013 22:00 2.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-1950-..> 07-May-2013 22:00 2.2M
Dell-Precision-T5600..> 07-May-2013 21:30 3.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R720x..> 07-May-2013 21:26 3.1M
Dell-Inspiron-500m-M..> 07-May-2013 21:26 2.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 07-May-2013 21:25 2.8M
Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 07-May-2013 21:25 2.8M
Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:24 2.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-R610-..> 07-May-2013 21:24 2.9M
Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:23 3.0M
Dell-Studio-1555-15-..> 07-May-2013 21:23 3.1M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 07-May-2013 21:22 3.0M
Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 07-May-2013 21:22 3.1M
Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 07-May-2013 21:21 2.0M
Dell-Aztech-MDP3900-..> 07-May-2013 21:21 2.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-M905-..> 07-May-2013 21:21 2.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-400SC..> 07-May-2013 21:21 2.1M
Dell-Precision-M4500..> 07-May-2013 21:20 2.2M
Dell-Vizioncore-Manu..> 07-May-2013 21:20 2.1M
Dell-Inspiron-1520-2..> 07-May-2013 21:19 2.5M
Dell-Guide-Utilisate..> 07-May-2013 21:19 2.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-R510-..> 07-May-2013 21:18 2.7M
Dell-Manuel-d-Utilis..> 07-May-2013 21:18 2.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-300-M..> 06-May-2013 19:33 4.7M
Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 06-May-2013 19:32 4.3M
Dell-PowerVault-110T..> 06-May-2013 19:31 4.4M
Dell-Inspiron-620-Ma..> 06-May-2013 19:10 3.2M
Dell-Dimension-5100-..> 06-May-2013 19:10 3.4M
Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09 3.7M
Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09 3.5M
Dell-1130-Dell-1130n..> 06-May-2013 18:42 3.1M
Dell-Controleurs-RAID-Dell-PowerEdge-PERC-H310-H710-H710P-et-H810-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Laser-MFP-Dell-3333dn-et-3335dn-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance-Powered-by-Symantec-Backup-Exec-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-XPS-015-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-REFERENCE
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-depannage
Dell-Commutateur-de-consoles-2161DS-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-d-OSCAR-et-du-materiel
Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-C8000XD-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-OptiPlex-755-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3200i-et-MD3220i-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Latitude-E5400-et-E5500-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-Set-Up-Your-Computer
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730-Manuel
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Getting-Started-With-Your-System
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-SUSE-Linux-Enterprise-Server-10-Instructions-d-installation
Dell-Utilitaires-de-gestion-du-Dell-OpenManage-Baseboard-Management-Controller-Version%204.6-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Guide-d-installation-de-la-version-7.1
Dell-Systeme-Dell-DR4000-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge%20Red-Hat-Enterprise-Linux-6-x86_64-x86-Instructions-d-installation-et-informations-importantes
Dell-Integrated-Dell-Remote-Access-Controller-7-iDRAC7-Version-1.20.20-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Management-Plug-In-pour-VMware-vCenter-Version-1.5-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Projecteur-7700FullHD-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1420X-1430X-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-PowerEdge-Express-SSD-PCIe-Flash-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Update-Packages-DUP-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route-Manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-R320-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R510-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Precision-M4400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-SCSI-Dell-EqualLogic-PS-Series-a-clusters-de-basculement-Microsoft-Windows-Server-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage-du-materie
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Guide-de-mise-en-route-du-systeme
Dell-Moniteur-a-ecran-plat-Dell-U2713HM-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-P1913-P1913S-P2213
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-E1913S-E1913-E2213
Dell-Systems-Service-and-Diagnostics-Tools-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation-rapide
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2740L-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION
Dell-Dimension-Serie-8300
Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-C8000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel
Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.1-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-M915-M910-M820-M710HD-M710-M620-M610x-M610-M520-et-M420-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation
Dell-Inspiron-15R-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3200-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-S110-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4-1-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Vostro-470-Manuel-du-proprietaire
/Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerVault-NX3500-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-Latitude-E6420-XFR-Guide-technique
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-S2240M-S2340M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel
Dell-Vostro-470-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-Projecteur-Dell-M110-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Upgrading-to-BackupExec-2012-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance
Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerConnect-5500-Series-CLI-Reference-Guide
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-14-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1900-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R815-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-and-R720xd-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4.0-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel
Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerEdge-C6220-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-14R-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Guide-de-l-Utilisateur-de-l-Ecran-Large-Dell-IN1940MW
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2440L-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Alienware-X51-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-MANUAL
Dell-Emplacement-des-cavaliers-de-la-carte-systeme-des-systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R310-Mise-a-jour-des-informations
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-6950-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Alienware-M17x-R4-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-XPS-13-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-HBA-SAS-Dell-PowerEdge-6-Gb-s-et-Internal-Tape-Adapter-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Mise-a-jour-des-informations
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T610-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
/Dell-PowerEdge-R905-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-2350d-et-Dell-2350dn
Dell-XPS-430-Guide-de-reference-rapide
Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-H700-et-H800-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Lifecycle-Controller-2-Version-1.00.00-User-s-Guide
Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manue
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-V525w
Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Adaptateurs-Brocade-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-reference
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-NX3600-NX3610-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T410-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-OptiPlex-360-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-PowerEdge-R810-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Guide-d-installation-des-systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Modular-Disk-3000
Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-2230d-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6105-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Imprimante-personnelle-a-jet-d-encre-Dell-J740-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-2130cn-IMPRIMANTE-LASER-COULEUR
Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-T3400
Dell-1235cn-Imprimante-Multifonction-Mode-d-emploi
Dell-Vostro-1310-1510-1710-et-2510-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-APC-Smart-UPS-750VA-1000VA-1500VA-100-120-230-V-CA-2U-Montage-en-baie-Onduleur
Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-Modele-TL24iSCSIxSAS%201Gb-iSCSI-a-SAS
Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-1130-et-Dell-1130n
Dell-Precision-M6400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-M770mm-Color-Monitor-Quick-Set-up
Dell-Carte-de-gestion-reseau-AP9617-AP9618-AP9619-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-demarrage-rapide
Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1410X-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Imprimante-couleur-Dell-1350cnw
Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050-Manuel
Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-620
Dell-3D-VISION-MANUEL-D-UTILISATION
Dell-Inspiron-600m-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R805-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R900-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2970-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6145-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Francais-manuel
Dell-Inspiron-660-manuels
Dell-Serveur-de-sauvegarde-sur-disque-Dell-PowerVault-DL-optimise-par-CommVault-Simpana-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-manuel
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-PORTABLE
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-de-Dell-PowerEdge-M905-M805-M600-et-M605
Dell-Inspiron-One-2330-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-1100-B110-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Station-de-travail-mobile-Dell-Precision-M4700-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-8500-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-1230c-Imprimante-laser-couleur-mode-d-emploi-Manuel
Dell-Client-Management-Manuel
Dell-Studio-XPS-Setup-Guide-Manue
Dell-Adaptateur-hote-Dell-PCIe-SCSI-Ultra320-monocanal-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel
Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-SETUP-GUIDE-Manuel
Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION-Manuel
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Inspiron-M4040-14-N4050-Manuel
Dell-Guide-de-l-administrateur-de-Dell-PowerVault-705N-Manuel
Dell-Vostro-420-220-220s-Guide-de-Configuration-et-de-Reference-Rapide-Manuel
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Series-Guide-de-deploiement-Manuel
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-l-administrateur-Manuel
Dell-Latitude-D430-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel
Dell-Studio-XPS-Guide-de-configuration-Manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R300-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes%20-Dell%20PowerEdge-T110-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower
Dell-Inspiron-531-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU-Francais
Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Projecteur-Dell-1201MP-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-C521-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T605-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Mobile-Jamz
Dell-Inspiron-530-Series-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuels
Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1.1-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Storage-Arrays-Manuels
Dell™ Ekran Yöneticisi Kullanıcı Kılavuzu
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Guide-de-mise-en-route
DELL-POWERVAULT-MD1200-et-MD1220-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK
Console-de-gestion-multi-onduleurs-Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration
DELL-OPTIPLEX580-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK-INSIDE-THE-OPTIPLEX-580
Dell-Inspiron-1720-manuels
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-E5430-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell™ S2240L/S2340L Monitör Kullanıcı Kılavuzu
Dell PowerEdge Sistemleri İçin Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Önemli Bilgiler Kılavuzu
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-S2240L-S2340L
Dell™ S320/S320wi Projektör Kullanım Kılavuzu
Dell-%20Vostro-270-Manuels
Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Francais
Dell-Inspiron-9200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Inspiron-2600-et-2650-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Axim-X30-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Vostro-2520-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1721-Manuel
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T710-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T5600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Dimension-3000-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R210-Technical-Guide
Dell-Inspiron-Manuels
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Vostro-1700
Dell-Clavier-sans-fil-et-souris-Dell-KM713-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur
Dell-Systeme-de-navigation-GPS-Dell-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur
Dell-Logiciel-de-gestion-de-l-onduleur-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration
Dell-Demarrage-rapide-du-moniteur-couleur-M990
Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-370
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2800-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage
Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-du-systeme-Dell-OptiPlex-SX280
Dell-Vostro-1440-1450-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Photo-Printer-540-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Streak-7-Francais-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Venue-Pro-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Imprimante-laser-personnelle-Dell-P1500-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-C5125-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Latitude-D630-Manuels
Dell-Vostro-400-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T100-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7010-compact-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault%20NX3200-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1200-et-2200-Manuel-de%20l-utilisateur
Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-8600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault-Baie-de-stockage-MD1120-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-E521-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-9100-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-3360-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T300-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-One-2710-manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-1150-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-E5530-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-660-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Acceder-au-site-Dell
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG-Francais
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-Tout-en-un-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-3560-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T110-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-server-poweredge-m710-tech-guidebook_fr
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-5420-E5420-E5420m-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Latitude-E6320-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Francais
Dell-server-poweredge-r610-tech-guidebook_fr
Dell-server-poweredge-t710-technical-guide-book_fr
Dell-server-poweredge-m1000e-tech-guidebook_fr
Dell-server-poweredge-m610-tech-guidebook_fr
Dell-poweredge-r210-technical-guidebook-en_fr
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Beats-By-dr.dre-Manuel-et-Garantie
Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Slim-Tower
Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU
Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1-1-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel
Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire
AlienwareArea-51Area-51ALX
Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/AlienwareAurora-R3
AlienwareAurora-R4
lienwareAuroraAuroraALXAurora-R2
Chassis-RAID-Dell-PowerVault-MD3000i-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Baie-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD1000-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Boîtier-Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-9200-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-E520-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi
Dell-Imprimante-laser-multifonction-Dell-1600n-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-13z-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-700m-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-9300-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire
http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire.htm
Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-XT3-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Liste-des-manuels-et-de-la-documentation-Dell
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-francais
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE
Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050
Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-du-Dell-XPS-420
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520
Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320
Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-XPS-M1330
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Inspiron-1721
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-964-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer%20942-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T7600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Streak-7-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R210-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire%20-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T310-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T620-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel
Dell-Vostro-3750-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-V131-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel-du-proprietair
Dell-moniteur-D1920-Manuel-du-proprietaire
DellDimension1100Series
Imprimante-Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-922-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-S2500-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Imprimante-personnelle-Dell-AIO-A960-Manuel-du-proprietaire
alienwareX51
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730
Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One
Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050
Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110
Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500
Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE
Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320
Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG
Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 08-May-2013 10:52 4.3M
Dell-Inspiron-1521-M..> 08-May-2013 10:51 2.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 08-May-2013 10:50 3.1M
Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:50 3.2M
Dell-XPS-630-Manuels..> 08-May-2013 10:49 3.6M
Dell-XPS-M1730-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:49 3.9M
Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48 4.5M
Dell-Vostro-410-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48 4.1M
Dell-Vostro-1700-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:47 4.8M
Dell-Inspiron-m301z-..> 08-May-2013 10:47 4.8M
Dell-Studio-Slim-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:45 5.1M
Dell-Windows-8-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:45 5.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 08-May-2013 08:46 4.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R200-..> 08-May-2013 08:46 2.6M
Dell-Inspiron-640M-M..> 08-May-2013 08:46 3.7M
Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:45 2.6M
Dell-Studio-Desktop-..> 08-May-2013 08:44 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-1000-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:44 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-15-Int..> 08-May-2013 08:44 3.0M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 08-May-2013 08:43 3.1M
Dell-DR4000-Manuels.htm 08-May-2013 08:43 3.4M
Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 08-May-2013 08:42 3.3M
Dell-Latitude-XT2-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:42 3.5M
Dell-Latitude-E5520-..> 08-May-2013 08:41 3.5M
Dell-OptiPlex-745-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:40 3.9M
Dell-Inspiron-1525-M..> 08-May-2013 08:40 3.9M
Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39 4.2M
Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39 2.8M
Dell-Inspiron-510m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:38 3.2M
Dell-Inspiron-Duo-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:38 3.0M
Dell-Vostro-1550-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:37 3.4M
Dell-Precision-T5600..> 08-May-2013 08:37 3.3M
Dell-Dimension-8300-..> 07-May-2013 22:03 2.5M
Dell-Latitude-Cpi-Ma..> 07-May-2013 22:01 3.2M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 07-May-2013 22:01 3.2M
Dell-Latitude-D620-M..> 07-May-2013 22:00 2.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-1950-..> 07-May-2013 22:00 2.2M
Dell-Precision-T5600..> 07-May-2013 21:30 3.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R720x..> 07-May-2013 21:26 3.1M
Dell-Inspiron-500m-M..> 07-May-2013 21:26 2.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 07-May-2013 21:25 2.8M
Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 07-May-2013 21:25 2.8M
Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:24 2.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-R610-..> 07-May-2013 21:24 2.9M
Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:23 3.0M
Dell-Studio-1555-15-..> 07-May-2013 21:23 3.1M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 07-May-2013 21:22 3.0M
Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 07-May-2013 21:22 3.1M
Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 07-May-2013 21:21 2.0M
Dell-Aztech-MDP3900-..> 07-May-2013 21:21 2.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-M905-..> 07-May-2013 21:21 2.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-400SC..> 07-May-2013 21:21 2.1M
Dell-Precision-M4500..> 07-May-2013 21:20 2.2M
Dell-Vizioncore-Manu..> 07-May-2013 21:20 2.1M
Dell-Inspiron-1520-2..> 07-May-2013 21:19 2.5M
Dell-Guide-Utilisate..> 07-May-2013 21:19 2.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-R510-..> 07-May-2013 21:18 2.7M
Dell-Manuel-d-Utilis..> 07-May-2013 21:18 2.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-300-M..> 06-May-2013 19:33 4.7M
Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 06-May-2013 19:32 4.3M
Dell-PowerVault-110T..> 06-May-2013 19:31 4.4M
Dell-Inspiron-620-Ma..> 06-May-2013 19:10 3.2M
Dell-Dimension-5100-..> 06-May-2013 19:10 3.4M
Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09 3.7M
Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09 3.5M
Dell-1130-Dell-1130n..> 06-May-2013 18:42 3.1M
Code-Promo-Dell.htm 04-Feb-2013 09:17 1.0M
Sony-NV-U83N-Manuels..> 02-Feb-2013 09:00 5.0M
Dell-Sansa-Clip-MP3-..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15 3.0M
Dell-TSi-500-TSi-400..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15 1.0M
Dell-Vostro-3360-Man..> 27-Nov-2012 09:10 2.6M
Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09 3.1M
Dell-1815dn-Manuel ..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09 3.5M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:08 1.7M
Dell-Multifunktionsp..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07 2.4M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07 2.0M
Dell-Inspiron-1150-M..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07 2.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07 2.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 09:06 2.5M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:06 1.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 07:42 3.0M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40 3.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40 3.8M
Dell-Console-de-gest..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40 3.9M
Dell-Logiciel-de-ges..> 27-Nov-2012 07:26 2.9M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 27-Nov-2012 07:20 2.6M
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 27-Nov-2012 07:18 2.5M
Dell-Dimension-9150-..> 27-Nov-2012 07:07 2.3M
Lien-Manuels-Utilisa..> 19-Nov-2012 07:12 92K
Dell-XPS-600-francai..> 19-Nov-2012 06:29 2.1M
Dell-XPS-430-francai..> 19-Nov-2012 06:24 1.8M
Dell-XPS-420-francai..> 18-Nov-2012 21:25 3.8M
Dell-XPS-410-Anglais..> 18-Nov-2012 21:25 3.4M
Dell-Dimension-9200C..> 18-Nov-2012 21:03 3.1M
Dell-Dimension-1000-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:57 2.9M
Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:49 2.3M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:45 1.8M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44 1.9M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44 1.9M
Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44 1.9M
Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:43 2.3M
Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:43 2.2M
Dell-OpenManage-Remo..> 14-Nov-2012 22:12 4.9M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 14-Nov-2012 22:12 5.0M
Dell-Media-Center-Gu..> 14-Nov-2012 22:11 1.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 21:42 3.2M
Dell-E-Legacy-Extend..> 14-Nov-2012 21:40 2.8M
Dell-Dimension-XPS-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:39 3.0M
Dell-Adaptateurs-Del..> 14-Nov-2012 21:39 3.1M
Dell-Axim-X3-Guide-d..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38 3.4M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38 4.1M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38 3.7M
Dell-Latitude-D531-G..> 14-Nov-2012 21:36 4.7M
Dell-Latitude-D430-G..> 14-Nov-2012 21:36 4.4M
Dell-Inspiron-1501-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:06 5.1M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 14-Nov-2012 21:05 2.6M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:05 3.6M
Dell-PowerEdge-T110-..> 14-Nov-2012 21:04 3.6M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:03 4.1M
Dell-XPS-M1710-Manue..> 14-Nov-2012 21:03 4.4M
Dell-Ordinateurs-por..> 14-Nov-2012 21:02 4.8M
Dell-Studio-GUIDE-DE..> 14-Nov-2012 21:01 5.5M
Dell-Inspiron-1420-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:01 5.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 21:00 2.4M
Dell-Latitude-D830-G..> 14-Nov-2012 20:59 2.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 20:59 2.4M
Dell-Dimension-1100-..> 14-Nov-2012 12:08 3.6M
Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 14-Nov-2012 12:08 3.7M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 14-Nov-2012 12:07 3.8M
Dell-Photo-All-in-On..> 14-Nov-2012 12:06 4.0M
Dell-Carte-de-gestio..> 14-Nov-2012 12:05 4.0M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 12:05 4.3M
Dell-XPS-M1710-Manue..> 13-Nov-2012 09:56 3.4M
Dell-Inspiron-6400-E..> 13-Nov-2012 08:20 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Nov-2012 08:19 3.4M
Dell-Inspiron-1300-B..> 13-Nov-2012 08:19 3.1M
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18 1.7M
Dell-Laser-Printer-5..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18 1.9M
Dell-XPS-710-H2C-Man..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18 2.5M
Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:17 2.9M
Dell-Inspiron-1721-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:17 3.2M
Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 13-Nov-2012 08:16 3.3M
Dell-XPS-M2010-Manue..> 13-Nov-2012 08:16 3.7M
Dell-Inspiron-1000-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:15 3.9M
Dell-Inspiron-8500-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:14 4.1M
Dell-Inspiron-640M-E..> 13-Nov-2012 08:13 4.5M
Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 13-Nov-2012 08:12 4.7M
Dell-Inspiron-300m-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:12 2.0M
Dell-Inspiron-XPS-Ge..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11 2.2M
Dell-Inspiron-5160-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11 2.4M
Dell-Inspiron-8600-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11 2.7M
Dell-PowerVault-DL20..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11 2.9M
Dell-Imprimante-pers..> 13-Nov-2012 08:10 3.0M
Dell-Vostro-410-Guid..> 12-Nov-2012 17:26 2.4M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 12-Nov-2012 17:07 2.6M
Dell-Dimension-serie..> 12-Nov-2012 17:07 1.9M
Dell-xps-13-l321x_se..> 12-Nov-2012 17:00 1.9M
Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-d..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59 1.9M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59 2.1M
Dell-Inspiron-2600-e..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59 2.3M
Dell-PowerVault-NX33..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58 2.6M
Dell-Pave-Tactile-Sa..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58 2.6M
Dell-poweredge-r520-..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-5423-O..> 12-Nov-2012 16:57 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-3500-P..> 12-Nov-2012 16:57 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-3000-S..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-270-Owne..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56 2.8M
Dell-server-poweredg..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56 2.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-C6220..> 12-Nov-2012 16:55 3.2M
Dell-2145cn-Impriman..> 12-Nov-2012 16:55 3.6M
Dell-Dimension-Serie..> 12-Nov-2012 16:54 3.8M
Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6..> 12-Nov-2012 16:53 4.1M
Dell-Configuration-d..> 12-Nov-2012 16:53 4.1M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51 2.1M
Dell-ALIENWARE-M18x-..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51 2.2M
Dell-MANUEL-DE-L-ORD..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51 2.3M
Dell-Carte-de-Gestio..> 06-Nov-2012 18:45 2.0M
Dell-Studio-XPS-1640..> 06-Nov-2012 18:40 2.7M
Dell-Studio-XPS-GUID..> 06-Nov-2012 18:40 2.3M
Dell-Storage-Center-..> 06-Nov-2012 11:43 3.7M
Dell-PowerEdge-T300-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:33 2.3M
Dell-Manual-del-prop..> 06-Nov-2012 07:33 2.4M
Dell-Manual-del-prop..> 06-Nov-2012 07:32 2.5M
Dell-PowerEdge-Syste..> 06-Nov-2012 07:32 2.7M
Dell-PowerEdge-R710-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31 3.0M
Dell-S2440L-Monitor-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31 3.0M
Dell-P1913-P1913S-P2..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31 2.0M
Dell-U2713HM-Flat-Pa..> 06-Nov-2012 07:30 2.0M
Dell-U2713HM-Flat-Pa..> 06-Nov-2012 07:30 2.0M
Dell-E1913S-E1913-E2..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29 2.1M
Dell-Latitude-ST-Kul..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29 2.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R310-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29 2.4M
Dell-Storage-Center-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29 2.7M
Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ow..> 06-Nov-2012 07:28 1.7M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 06-Nov-2012 07:28 1.8M
Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27 1.9M
Dell-Inspiron-14z-N4..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27 2.0M
Dell-Module-de-venti..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27 2.0M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 06-Nov-2012 07:26 2.6M
Dell-Points-d-acces-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:26 2.0M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 18:31 4.2M
Dell-Boitiers-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14 1.4M
Dell-Studio-One-GUID..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14 1.5M
Dell-Vostro-1310-151..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14 1.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13 1.9M
Dell-Modules-optique..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13 1.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13 2.2M
Dell-Latitude-E6520-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13 2.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-2900-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:12 2.4M
Dell-Point-d-acces-D..> 05-Nov-2012 18:12 2.5M
Dell-B1260dn-Mode-d-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:11 2.7M
Dell-B1160-Dell-B116..> 05-Nov-2012 18:11 2.9M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 05-Nov-2012 18:10 3.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-T310-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:10 3.6M
Dell-PowerEdge-R410-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:09 3.8M
Dell-Inspiron-Guide-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:08 1.3M
Dell-Guide-de-soluti..> 05-Nov-2012 17:29 3.8M
Adaptateurs-Brocade-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:05 3.6M
Dell-PowerEdge-R415-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01 1.7M
Dell-PowerVault-MD-S..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01 1.7M
Dell-PowerEdge-2950-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01 1.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R710-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00 1.9M
Dell-Server-PRO-Mana..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00 2.0M
Dell-PowerVault-NX20..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00 2.0M
Dell-PowerVault-MD11..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00 2.0M
Dell-SAS-RAID-Storag..> 05-Nov-2012 14:59 2.2M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 05-Nov-2012 14:59 2.2M
IOGEAR-Guide-d-insta..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58 2.3M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58 2.4M
Dell-Guide-d-install..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58 2.8M
Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57 2.6M
Planification-du-dep..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57 3.1M
Dell-Vizioncore-vRep..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57 3.0M
Dell-Server-Deployme..> 05-Nov-2012 14:56 3.7M
Dell-Latitude-XT2-XF..> 05-Nov-2012 14:54 3.7M
Dell-Deploiement-de-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15 2.6M
Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15 2.6M
Dell-PowerQuest-Data..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15 2.6M
Dell-Controleurs-Del..> 05-Nov-2012 12:14 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 12:14 2.9M
Dell-Guide-de-demarr..> 05-Nov-2012 12:13 2.9M
Dell-Guide-de-config..> 05-Nov-2012 12:13 3.0M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 12:12 3.0M
Dell-1250c-Color-Pri..> 05-Nov-2012 12:12 3.0M
Dell-XPS-600-Manuel-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:11 3.3M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 05-Nov-2012 12:11 3.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 12:10 3.8M
Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 05-Nov-2012 12:10 3.6M
Dell-Studio-XPS-Setu..> 05-Nov-2012 12:09 1.3M
Dell-XPS-13-Kullanı..> 05-Nov-2012 12:09 1.4M
Dell-XPS-13-Chinois-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:08 1.6M
Dell-XPS-13-Arabe-Ma..> 05-Nov-2012 12:08 1.5M
Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08 1.9M
Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08 1.9M
Dell-Vizioncore-vCon..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08 2.4M
Dell-Cartes-controle..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08 2.0M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 09:06 1.9M
Dell-Bandotheques-De..> 05-Nov-2012 09:03 2.1M
Dell-S320-S320wi-Pro..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02 1.7M
Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02 2.4M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02 2.2M
Dell-Vizioncore-vRan..> 05-Nov-2012 09:01 2.6M
Dell-Cartes-d-extens..> 05-Nov-2012 09:01 2.6M
Dell-Guide-technique..> 05-Nov-2012 09:00 3.2M
Dell-Onduleur-en-Bai..> 05-Nov-2012 09:00 2.7M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 08:59 3.7M
Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 08:59 3.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 08:58 4.2M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 08:58 4.1M
Dell-M5200-Carte-de-..> 05-Nov-2012 07:58 1.6M
Dell-XPS-L412z-Manue..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38 2.0M
Dell-XPS-GUIDE-DE-CO..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38 2.1M
Dell-Studio-XPS-8100..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38 2.1M
Dell-XPS-One-GUIDE-D..> 05-Nov-2012 07:37 2.2M
Dell-INSPIRON-Setup-..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32 2.3M
Dell-Inspiron-14R-M4..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32 2.4M
Dell-XPS-M1210-Owner..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-6000-M..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31 2.9M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31 3.5M
Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31 3.8M
Dell-Adaptateurs-Del..> 05-Nov-2012 07:30 3.9M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 07:29 4.2M
Dell-DX-Object-Stora..> 04-Nov-2012 11:04 2.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-T620-..> 04-Nov-2012 11:04 2.8M
Dell-Guide-d-install..> 04-Nov-2012 11:03 2.9M
Dell-Dimension-XPS-G..> 04-Nov-2012 11:03 3.1M
Dell-Latitude-E6500-..> 04-Nov-2012 11:02 3.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-Expan..> 04-Nov-2012 11:02 3.5M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 04-Nov-2012 11:01 3.6M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 04-Nov-2012 11:01 3.7M
Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 04-Nov-2012 11:00 2.7M
Dell-PowerVault-Encr..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41 2.5M
Dell-APC-Smart-UPS-A..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41 2.6M
Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41 2.6M
Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 03-Nov-2012 21:47 2.0M
Dell-EqualLogic-Stor..> 03-Nov-2012 21:47 2.1M
Dell-Latitude-E4300-..> 03-Nov-2012 21:46 2.3M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 21:46 2.2M
Dell-OptiPlex-755-Gu..> 03-Nov-2012 21:12 5.7M
Dell-PowerEdge-C8000..> 03-Nov-2012 18:23 2.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-T420-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:19 2.1M
Dell-Commutateur-de-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:19 2.3M
Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:16 2.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:15 2.4M
Dell-XPS 15-Manuel-d..> 03-Nov-2012 18:15 2.4M
Dell-PowerVault-DL-B..> 03-Nov-2012 18:12 2.6M
Dell-Laser-MFP-Dell-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:12 3.2M
Dell-Controleurs-RAI..> 03-Nov-2012 18:11 3.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-Expre..> 03-Nov-2012 18:11 1.7M
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 03-Nov-2012 18:10 2.1M
Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 18:10 1.8M
Dell-Projecteur-7700..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09 2.2M
Dell-Management-Plug..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09 2.5M
Dell-Integrated-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09 3.1M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:08 2.6M
Dell-Systeme-Dell-DR..> 03-Nov-2012 18:08 3.6M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 18:07 3.3M
Dell-Utilitaires-de-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:06 3.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:06 3.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 03-Nov-2012 18:05 4.0M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:05 4.3M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 03-Nov-2012 18:04 4.6M
Dell-Set-Up-Your-Com..> 03-Nov-2012 18:04 4.6M
Dell-Latitude-E5400-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:02 4.7M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 18:02 4.9M
Dell-Dimension-Serie..> 03-Nov-2012 18:01 5.1M
Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:09 3.0M
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 11:09 3.1M
Dell-Systems-Service..> 03-Nov-2012 11:08 3.1M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 03-Nov-2012 11:07 3.1M
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 11:07 3.2M
Dell-Moniteur-a-ecra..> 03-Nov-2012 11:06 3.2M
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 03-Nov-2012 11:06 3.3M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 11:05 3.4M
Dell-Precision-M4400..> 03-Nov-2012 11:05 1.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04 1.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R320-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04 1.5M
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04 2.0M
Dell-Update-Packages..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04 1.9M
Dell-Micrologiciel-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:46 2.9M
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 03-Nov-2012 08:45 3.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:44 3.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 08:44 3.0M
Dell-Inspiron-15R-Ma..> 03-Nov-2012 08:43 3.5M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 08:43 3.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-M1000..> 03-Nov-2012 08:42 3.7M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 08:42 3.7M
Dell-PowerEdge-C8000..> 03-Nov-2012 08:30 2.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-R820-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:30 2.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 03-Nov-2012 08:29 2.5M
Dell-PowerEdge-R420-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:29 2.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:28 2.8M
Dell-Precision-Works..> 03-Nov-2012 08:28 2.6M
Dell-PowerEdge-T320-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27 2.8M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27 3.0M
Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27 3.0M
Dell-Systeme-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07 3.4M
Dell-Vostro-470-Manu..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07 3.5M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07 3.4M
Dell-XPS-14-Manuel-d..> 02-Nov-2012 17:36 3.1M
Dell-Inspiron-One-20..> 02-Nov-2012 17:23 3.0M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 02-Nov-2012 17:22 3.0M
Dell-PowerConnect-55..> 02-Nov-2012 17:22 3.8M
Dell-PowerVault-NX33..> 02-Nov-2012 17:21 1.7M
Dell-Upgrading-to-Ba..> 02-Nov-2012 17:21 1.4M
Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20 1.8M
Dell-Vostro-470-Owne..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20 1.7M
Dell-Inspiron-14R-Ma..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20 2.2M
Dell-Systeme-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20 2.1M
Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 02-Nov-2012 17:19 2.6M
Dell-PowerEdge-R820-..> 02-Nov-2012 17:19 2.5M
Dell-Inspiron-660s-M..> 02-Nov-2012 17:18 2.7M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 17:18 2.8M
Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 02-Nov-2012 17:17 2.9M
Dell-Micrologiciel-D..> 02-Nov-2012 16:35 2.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:34 2.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:34 3.1M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:33 3.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:33 1.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R905-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32 2.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32 2.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:31 2.9M
Dell-HBA-SAS-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 16:31 2.9M
Dell-XPS-13-Owner-s-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:30 3.0M
Dell-Alienware-M17x-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:30 3.1M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:29 3.4M
Dell-Emplacement-des..> 02-Nov-2012 16:29 3.1M
Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:28 3.5M
Dell-Alienware-X51-O..> 02-Nov-2012 16:28 3.4M
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 16:27 3.6M
Dell-Guide-de-l-Util..> 02-Nov-2012 16:27 3.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 11:45 2.0M
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 02-Nov-2012 11:24 1.7M
Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 02-Nov-2012 11:23 3.8M
Dell-OptiPlex-360-Gu..> 02-Nov-2012 11:23 3.4M
Dell-Adaptateurs-Bro..> 02-Nov-2012 11:22 2.8M
Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-d..> 02-Nov-2012 11:22 2.9M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 02-Nov-2012 11:21 3.2M
Dell-Solutions-NAS-D..> 02-Nov-2012 11:21 3.2M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 02-Nov-2012 11:20 3.7M
Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 02-Nov-2012 11:20 3.5M
Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 02-Nov-2012 10:08 2.4M
Dell-XPS-430-Guide-d..> 02-Nov-2012 10:08 2.4M
Dell-Imprimantes-las..> 02-Nov-2012 10:07 2.4M
Dell-Imprimantes-las..> 02-Nov-2012 10:07 2.4M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06 2.5M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06 2.4M
Dell-Vostro-1310-151..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06 2.6M
Dell-1235cn-Impriman..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06 3.0M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:05 3.4M
Dell-2130cn-IMPRIMAN..> 02-Nov-2012 10:05 3.0M
Dell-Imprimante-pers..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44 2.7M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44 3.1M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44 2.9M
Dell-Guide d-install..> 02-Nov-2012 09:43 2.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R810-..> 02-Nov-2012 09:43 2.0M
Dell-Inspiron-660s-M..> 02-Nov-2012 09:42 2.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:42 2.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:41 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:41 3.1M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:40 3.6M
Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 02-Nov-2012 09:40 3.3M
Dell-3D-VISION-MANUE..> 02-Nov-2012 09:39 1.8M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 02-Nov-2012 09:39 1.7M
Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38 1.9M
Dell-Imprimante-coul..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38 1.9M
Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38 2.0M
Dell-M770mm-Color-Mo..> 02-Nov-2012 09:37 2.1M
Dell-Precision-M6400..> 02-Nov-2012 09:37 2.1M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 01-Nov-2012 19:14 2.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 01-Nov-2012 19:02 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 01-Nov-2012 19:02 2.7M
Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-..> 01-Nov-2012 19:00 2.3M
Dell-Precision-Works..> 01-Nov-2012 18:46 3.3M
Dell-P513w-User-s-Gu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:46 2.8M
Dell-Serveur-de-sauv..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42 1.9M
Dell-Inspiron-660-ma..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42 2.0M
Dell-P513w-User-s-Gu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42 2.3M
Dell-Studio-XPS-Guid..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41 2.9M
Dell-Latitude-D430-G..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41 3.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41 2.7M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 01-Nov-2012 18:40 1.9M
Dell-Vostro-420-220-..> 01-Nov-2012 18:40 2.0M
Dell-Guide-de-l-admi..> 01-Nov-2012 18:39 2.2M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 01-Nov-2012 18:39 2.1M
Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-GU..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38 2.2M
Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-SE..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38 2.3M
Dell-Adaptateur-hote..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38 2.3M
Dell-Studio-XPS-Setu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38 2.4M
Dell-Client-Manageme..> 01-Nov-2012 18:37 2.5M
Dell-1230c-Imprimant..> 01-Nov-2012 18:37 2.6M
Dell-XPS-8500-Manuel..> 01-Nov-2012 18:36 2.7M
Dell-Station-de-trav..> 01-Nov-2012 18:36 2.3M
Dell-Inspiron-530-Se..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41 1.9M
Dell-Mobile-Jamz.htm 29-Oct-2012 07:41 1.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41 2.2M
Dell-Dimension-C521-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41 1.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R910-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:40 2.6M
Projecteur-Dell-1201..> 29-Oct-2012 07:40 2.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-R520-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:39 3.0M
Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUE..> 29-Oct-2012 07:39 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-531-Ma..> 29-Oct-2012 07:38 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 29-Oct-2012 07:38 2.4M
Dell-Systemes -Dell ..> 29-Oct-2012 07:37 3.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 29-Oct-2012 07:37 3.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 29-Oct-2012 07:36 3.2M
Dell-Latitude-E5430-..> 26-Oct-2012 17:29 1.6M
Console-de-gestion-m..> 26-Oct-2012 14:51 3.3M
DELL-POWERVAULT-MD12..> 26-Oct-2012 14:50 3.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-R520-..> 26-Oct-2012 14:50 3.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 26-Oct-2012 14:49 3.3M
Dell-Ekran-Yönetici..> 26-Oct-2012 14:49 3.4M
Dell-PowerVault-MD36..> 26-Oct-2012 14:48 2.4M
Dell-PowerVault-MD36..> 26-Oct-2012 14:48 2.8M
Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWE..> 26-Oct-2012 14:47 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-3460-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:47 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-3460-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:46 2.7M
Dell- Vostro-270-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:46 2.8M
Dell-S320-S320wi-Pro..> 26-Oct-2012 14:45 2.9M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 26-Oct-2012 14:45 2.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-Siste..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44 1.4M
Dell-S2240L-S2340L-M..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44 1.5M
Dell-Vostro-1540-155..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44 2.2M
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:33 2.5M
Dell-Inspiron-1720-m..> 25-Oct-2012 18:32 2.9M
DELL-OPTIPLEX580-TEC..> 25-Oct-2012 18:32 2.9M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 25-Oct-2012 18:31 3.3M
Dell-Inspiron-Manuel..> 25-Oct-2012 18:31 3.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-R210-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:30 3.6M
Dell-Dimension-3000-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:30 3.5M
Systemes-Dell-PowerE..> 25-Oct-2012 18:29 2.8M
Dell-Solutions-NAS-D..> 25-Oct-2012 18:29 2.7M
Dell-Precision-Works..> 25-Oct-2012 12:10 2.0M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 12:10 2.3M
Dell-Inspiron-1721-M..> 25-Oct-2012 12:09 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-2520-Man..> 25-Oct-2012 12:09 2.8M
Dell-Axim-X30-Manuel..> 25-Oct-2012 12:08 3.0M
Dell-Inspiron-2600-e..> 25-Oct-2012 12:08 3.2M
Dell-Inspiron-9200-M..> 25-Oct-2012 12:07 3.4M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 25-Oct-2012 12:07 2.1M
Dell-Venue-Pro-Manue..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06 2.4M
Dell-Streak-7-Franca..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06 2.3M
Dell-Photo-Printer-5..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06 2.6M
Dell-Vostro-1440-145..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05 2.5M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05 2.9M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05 3.1M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 25-Oct-2012 12:04 2.8M
Dell-Demarrage-rapid..> 25-Oct-2012 12:04 2.4M
Dellâ„¢ Logiciel-de..> 25-Oct-2012 12:03 2.8M
Dell-Systeme-de-navi..> 25-Oct-2012 12:02 3.2M
Dell-Clavier-sans-fi..> 25-Oct-2012 12:02 3.0M
Dell-Inspiron-1200-e..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48 2.4M
Dell-PowerVault NX32..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48 2.7M
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48 2.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 09:47 2.0M
Dell-Vostro-400-Manu..> 25-Oct-2012 09:47 2.3M
Dell-Latitude-D630-M..> 25-Oct-2012 09:46 2.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-C5125..> 25-Oct-2012 09:46 2.5M
Dell-Inspiron-660-Ma..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15 2.3M
Dell-Latitude-E5530-..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15 2.4M
Dell-Inspiron-1150-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15 2.6M
Dell-XPS-One-2710-ma..> 24-Oct-2012 09:14 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 24-Oct-2012 09:14 3.1M
Dell-Inspiron-9100-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:13 2.6M
Dell-Dimension-E521-..> 24-Oct-2012 09:12 2.9M
Dell-PowerVault-Baie..> 24-Oct-2012 09:12 3.0M
Dell-Inspiron-8600-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:11 3.2M
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-T..> 24-Oct-2012 07:54 2.3M
Dell-Dimension-3100C..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42 2.7M
Dell-Beats-By-dr.dre..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42 2.7M
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42 2.9M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 24-Oct-2012 07:41 2.4M
Dell-poweredge-r210-..> 24-Oct-2012 07:41 2.5M
Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:40 2.5M
Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:40 2.6M
Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39 2.3M
Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39 2.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39 2.1M
Dell-Latitude-E6320-..> 24-Oct-2012 07:38 2.1M
Dell-Latitude-5420-E..> 24-Oct-2012 07:38 2.1M
Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37 1.9M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37 2.2M
Dell-Vostro-3560-Man..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37 1.9M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 24-Oct-2012 07:36 2.2M
Acceder-au-site-Dell..> 24-Oct-2012 06:36 1.0M
Dell-Vostro-360-Prop..> 19-Oct-2012 07:42 1.7M
Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWE..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41 1.9M
Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUE..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41 2.0M
Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41 2.4M
Dell-Precision-Works..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41 2.1M
Dell-Streak-7-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13 2.9M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13 3.6M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13 2.9M
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 18-Oct-2012 17:12 3.1M
Dell-Inspiron-9300-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:12 3.3M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 18-Oct-2012 17:11 3.6M
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 18-Oct-2012 17:11 3.9M
Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 18-Oct-2012 17:10 3.1M
Dell-Precision-Works..> 18-Oct-2012 17:09 3.2M
Dell-Inspiron-13z-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 17:09 3.3M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:08 3.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:08 2.6M
Dell-Boîtier-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:07 2.7M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 17:07 3.1M
DELLmanuelsutilisate..> 18-Oct-2012 17:06 12M
Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 18-Oct-2012 17:05 4.4M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 18-Oct-2012 17:04 4.1M
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 18-Oct-2012 17:03 4.1M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 18-Oct-2012 17:02 3.9M
Dell-Laser-Printer-3..> 18-Oct-2012 17:02 3.8M
Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:01 3.7M
Dell-Liste-des-manue..> 18-Oct-2012 17:01 3.5M
Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:00 3.5M
Dell-Vostro-V131-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:59 3.4M
DellDimension1100Ser..> 18-Oct-2012 16:59 3.4M
Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:58 3.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:58 3.4M
Imprimante-personnel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:57 3.4M
Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:56 3.3M
Dell-PowerVault-NX40..> 18-Oct-2012 16:56 3.2M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:55 3.3M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 18-Oct-2012 16:55 3.2M
Dell-Dimension-9200-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:54 3.2M
AlienwareAurora-R3.htm 18-Oct-2012 16:54 3.2M
Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:53 3.2M
Imprimante-laser-de-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:53 3.2M
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:52 3.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:52 3.2M
AlienwareAuroraAuror..> 18-Oct-2012 16:51 3.1M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 18-Oct-2012 16:51 3.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 18-Oct-2012 16:50 3.0M
Dell-Dimension-E520-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:50 3.0M
Chassis-RAID-Dell-Po..> 18-Oct-2012 16:49 3.0M
Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:49 3.0M
AlienwareAurora-R4.htm 18-Oct-2012 16:48 2.9M
Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:48 2.9M
Dell-Inspiron-700m-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:47 2.9M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 18-Oct-2012 16:47 2.9M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:46 2.9M
Dell-Photo-Printer-7..> 18-Oct-2012 16:46 2.8M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 18-Oct-2012 16:45 2.8M
Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:45 2.8M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:44 2.8M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:44 2.8M
Dell-moniteur-D1920-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:43 2.7M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:43 2.8M
Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:42 2.7M
AlienwareArea-51Area..> 18-Oct-2012 16:42 2.7M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:41 2.7M
Dell-Baie-de-stockag..> 18-Oct-2012 16:41 2.7M
Dell-Streak-Manuel-d..> 18-Oct-2012 16:40 2.7M
Imprimante-Dell-Phot..> 18-Oct-2012 16:39 2.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:39 2.6M
Dell-Clavier-Axim-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38 2.6M
Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38 2.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38 2.5M
alienwareX51.htm 18-Oct-2012 16:37 2.5M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:37 2.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:36 2.5M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:36 2.5M
Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35 2.3M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35 2.2M
Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35 2.3M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 18-Oct-2012 16:34 2.2M
Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:34 2.2M
Dell-Inspiron-1100-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33 2.2M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33 2.1M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33 2.1M
Dell-Inspiron-9400-E..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32 2.0M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32 1.9M
Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32 1.6M
Dell-Inspiron-1525-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31 1.5M
Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31 1.2M
Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31 1.0M
Dell-Dimension-3100-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31 906K
Dell Latitude E6530
Owner's Manual
Regulatory Model: P19F
Regulatory Type: P19F001Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the
problem.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.
© 2012 Dell Inc.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, Dell Precision™, Precision ON™,ExpressCharge™, Latitude™, Latitude ON™,
OptiPlex™, Vostro™, and Wi-Fi Catcher™ are trademarks of Dell Inc. Intel®, Pentium®, Xeon®, Core™, Atom™, Centrino®, and Celeron®
are registered trademarks or trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. AMD® is a registered trademark and
AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™, AMD Sempron™, AMD Athlon™, ATI Radeon™, and ATI FirePro™ are trademarks of Advanced Micro
Devices, Inc. Microsoft®, Windows®, MS-DOS®, Windows Vista®, the Windows Vista start button, and Office Outlook® are either
trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Blu-ray Disc™ is a trademark
owned by the Blu-ray Disc Association (BDA) and licensed for use on discs and players. The Bluetooth® word mark is a registered
trademark and owned by the Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such mark by Dell Inc. is under license. Wi-Fi® is a registered
trademark of Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance, Inc.
2012 - 06
Rev. A00Contents
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings...................................................................................................2
1 Working on Your Computer.......................................................................................................7
Before Working Inside Your Computer.....................................................................................................................7
Turning Off Your Computer.......................................................................................................................................8
After Working Inside Your Computer........................................................................................................................8
2 Removing and Installing Components...................................................................................11
Recommended Tools..............................................................................................................................................11
Removing the Secure Digital (SD) Card..................................................................................................................11
Installing the Secure Digital (SD) Card...................................................................................................................11
Removing the ExpressCard.....................................................................................................................................12
Installing the ExpressCard......................................................................................................................................12
Removing the Battery.............................................................................................................................................12
Installing the Battery..............................................................................................................................................13
Removing the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) Card...........................................................................................13
Installing the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) Card............................................................................................13
Removing the Base Cover.......................................................................................................................................13
Installing the Base Cover........................................................................................................................................14
Removing the Keyboard Trim..................................................................................................................................14
Installing the Keyboard Trim...................................................................................................................................15
Removing the Keyboard..........................................................................................................................................15
Installing the Keyboard...........................................................................................................................................17
Removing the Hard Drive........................................................................................................................................17
Installing the Hard Drive.........................................................................................................................................18
Removing the Optical Drive....................................................................................................................................19
Installing the Optical Drive.....................................................................................................................................20
Removing the Memory............................................................................................................................................21
Installing the Memory.............................................................................................................................................21
Removing the Processor.........................................................................................................................................22
Installing the Processor..........................................................................................................................................22
Removing the Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Card...................................................................................22
Installing the WLAN Card.......................................................................................................................................23
Removing the Heat Sink..........................................................................................................................................23
Installing the Heat Sink...........................................................................................................................................24
Removing the Bluetooth Card.................................................................................................................................25
Installing the Bluetooth Card..................................................................................................................................26Removing the Modem Card....................................................................................................................................26
Installing the Modem Card.....................................................................................................................................27
Removing the Speakers..........................................................................................................................................28
Installing the Speakers...........................................................................................................................................29
Removing the Coin-Cell Battery..............................................................................................................................29
Installing the Coin-Cell Battery...............................................................................................................................30
Removing the ExpressCard Cage............................................................................................................................30
Installing the ExpressCard Cage.............................................................................................................................31
Removing the Power-Connector Port.....................................................................................................................31
Installing the Power-Connector Port......................................................................................................................32
Removing the Power LED Board.............................................................................................................................32
Installing the Power LED Board..............................................................................................................................33
Removing the Input/Output (I/O) Board..................................................................................................................34
Installing the Input Output (I/O) Board....................................................................................................................34
Removing the Hard-Drive Support Plate.................................................................................................................35
Installing the Hard-Drive Support Plate..................................................................................................................36
Removing the Palmrest...........................................................................................................................................36
Installing the Palmrest............................................................................................................................................38
Removing the WiFi-Switch Board...........................................................................................................................38
Installing the WiFi-Switch Board............................................................................................................................39
Removing the System Board...................................................................................................................................39
Installing the System Board....................................................................................................................................43
Removing the Modem Connector...........................................................................................................................43
Installing the Modem Connector............................................................................................................................45
Removing the Display Assembly.............................................................................................................................45
Installing the Display Assembly..............................................................................................................................47
Removing the Display Bezel...................................................................................................................................48
Installing the Display Bezel.....................................................................................................................................49
Removing the Display Panel...................................................................................................................................49
Installing the Display Panel....................................................................................................................................50
Removing the Display Assembly.............................................................................................................................50
Installing the Display Assembly..............................................................................................................................52
Removing the Display-Hinge Caps..........................................................................................................................53
Installing the Display-Hinge Caps...........................................................................................................................54
Removing the Display Hinges.................................................................................................................................54
Installing the Display Hinges..................................................................................................................................55
Removing the Camera.............................................................................................................................................56
Installing the Camera..............................................................................................................................................57
Removing the LVDS and Camera Cable..................................................................................................................57
Installing the LVDS and Camera Cable...................................................................................................................58
3 Additional Information..............................................................................................................59Docking Port Information........................................................................................................................................59
4 System Setup.............................................................................................................................61
Boot Sequence.......................................................................................................................................................61
Navigation Keys......................................................................................................................................................61
System Setup Options.............................................................................................................................................62
Updating the BIOS .................................................................................................................................................69
System and Setup Password..................................................................................................................................70
Assigning a System Password and Setup Password......................................................................................70
Deleting or Changing an Existing System and/or Setup Password..................................................................71
5 Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................73
Enhanced Pre-Boot System Assessment (ePSA) Diagnostics...............................................................................73
6 Troubleshooting Your Computer.............................................................................................75
Device Status Lights...............................................................................................................................................75
Battery Status Lights..............................................................................................................................................76
7 Technical Specifications.........................................................................................................77
8 Contacting Dell .........................................................................................................................8361
Working on Your Computer
Before Working Inside Your Computer
Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from potential damage and to help to ensure your
personal safety. Unless otherwise noted, each procedure included in this document assumes that the following
conditions exist:
• You have performed the steps in Working on Your Computer.
• You have read the safety information that shipped with your computer.
• A component can be replaced or--if purchased separately--installed by performing the removal procedure in
reverse order.
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For
additional safety best practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/
regulatory_compliance
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform
troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or
telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically
touching an unpainted metal surface, such as a connector on the back of the computer.
CAUTION: Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a
card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a processor by its edges, not by its
pins.
CAUTION: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its pull-tab, not on the cable itself. Some
cables have connectors with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs
before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any
connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned.
NOTE: The color of your computer and certain components may appear differently than shown in this document.
To avoid damaging your computer, perform the following steps before you begin working inside the computer.
1. Ensure that your work surface is flat and clean to prevent the computer cover from being scratched.
2. Turn off your computer (see Turning Off Your Computer).
3. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked) such as the optional Media Base or Battery Slice,
undock it.
CAUTION: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug the
cable from the network device.
4. Disconnect all network cables from the computer.
5. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets.
76. Close the display and turn the computer upside-down on a flat work surface.
NOTE: To avoid damaging the system board, you must remove the main battery before you service the
computer.
7. Remove the main battery.
8. Turn the computer top-side up.
9. Open the display.
10. Press the power button to ground the system board.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before
opening the display.
CAUTION: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal
surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal
surface to dissipate static electricity, which could harm internal components.
11. Remove any installed ExpressCards or Smart Cards from the appropriate slots.
Turning Off Your Computer
CAUTION: To avoid losing data, save and close all open files and exit all open programs before you turn off your
computer.
1. Shut down the operating system:
– In Windows 7:
Click Start , then click Shut Down.
– In Windows Vista :
Click Start , then click the arrow in the lower-right corner of the Start menu as shown below, and then
click Shut Down.
– In Windows XP:
Click Start→ Turn Off Computer → Turn Off . The computer turns off after the operating system shutdown
process is complete.
2. Ensure that the computer and all attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not
automatically turn off when you shut down your operating system, press and hold the power button for about 4
seconds to turn them off.
After Working Inside Your Computer
After you complete any replacement procedure, ensure you connect any external devices, cards, and cables before
turning on your computer.
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the computer, use only the battery designed for this particular Dell computer. Do not
use batteries designed for other Dell computers.
1. Connect any external devices, such as a port replicator, battery slice, or media base, and replace any cards, such
as an ExpressCard.
2. Connect any telephone or network cables to your computer.
8CAUTION: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network device and then plug it into the
computer.
3. Replace the battery.
4. Connect your computer and all attached devices to their electrical outlets.
5. Turn on your computer.
9102
Removing and Installing Components
This section provides detailed information on how to remove or install the components from your computer.
Recommended Tools
The procedures in this document may require the following tools:
• Small flat-blade screwdriver
• Phillips screwdriver
• Small plastic scribe
Removing the Secure Digital (SD) Card
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Press in on the SD card to release it from the computer.
3. Slide the SD card out of the computer.
Installing the Secure Digital (SD) Card
1. Slide the SD card into its slot until it clicks into place.
2. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
11Removing the ExpressCard
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Press in on the ExpressCard to release it from the computer.
3. Slide the ExpressCard out of the computer.
Installing the ExpressCard
1. Slide the ExpressCard into its slot until it clicks into place.
2. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Battery
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Slide the release latches to unlock the battery and flip the battery out of the computer.
12Installing the Battery
1. Slide the battery into its slot until it clicks into place.
2. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) Card
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove the battery.
3. Remove the SIM card from the computer.
Installing the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) Card
1. Slide the SIM card into its slot.
2. Install the battery.
3. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Base Cover
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove the screws that secure the base cover to the computer.
133. Lift the base cover to remove it from the computer.
Installing the Base Cover
1. Place the base cover to align with the screw holes on the computer.
2. Tighten the screws to secure the base cover to the computer.
3. Install the battery.
4. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Keyboard Trim
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove the battery.
3. Using a plastic scribe, pry under the keyboard trim to release it from the computer.
4. Pry the keyboard trim along the sides and bottom.
5. Lift up to remove the keyboard trim from the unit.
14Installing the Keyboard Trim
1. Align the keyboard trim to its compartment.
2. Press along the sides of the keyboard trim until it snaps in place.
3. Install the battery.
4. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Keyboard
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
b) keyboard trim
3. Remove the screws that secure the keyboard to computer.
4. Remove the screws that secure the keyboard to the palmrest assembly.
5. Lift and turn the keyboard to access the keyboard cable.
156. Disconnect the keyboard cable from the system board.
7. Remove the keyboard from the computer.
8. Peel back the adhesive tape securing the keyboard connector.
9. Remove the keyboard cable from the keyboard.
16Installing the Keyboard
1. Connect the keyboard cable and secure it to the keyboard using the tape.
2. Connect the keyboard cable to the system board.
3. Slide the keyboard into its compartment and ensure that it clicks into place.
4. Tighten the screws to secure the keyboard on the palmrest.
5. Flip the computer and tighten the screws to secure the keyboard.
6. Install:
a) keyboard trim
b) battery
7. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Hard Drive
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove the battery.
3. Remove the screws that secure the hard drive to the computer.
4. Slide the hard drive out of the computer.
175. Remove the screw that secures the hard-drive caddy to the hard drive.
6. Remove the hard-drive caddy from the hard drive.
7. Remove the hard-drive isolation from the hard drive.
Installing the Hard Drive
1. Install the hard-drive isolation on the hard drive.
2. Attach the hard-drive caddy to the hard drive.
183. Tighten the screws to secure the hard-drive caddy to the hard drive.
4. Slide the hard drive into the computer.
5. Tighten the screws to secure the hard drive to the computer.
6. Install the battery.
7. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Optical Drive
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove the battery.
3. Press the optical-drive latch to release the optical drive from the computer.
4. Pull the optical drive from the computer.
5. Remove the screw that secures the optical-drive latch to the optical drive assembly.
6. Push the optical-drive latch forward and remove it from the optical-drive assembly.
197. Remove the screws that secure the optical-drive latch bracket to the optical-drive assembly
8. Remove the latch bracket from the optical drive.
9. Remove the optical-drive door from the optical drive.
Installing the Optical Drive
1. Secure the optical-drive door to the optical drive.
2. Install the latch bracket to the optical drive.
203. Tighten the screws to secure the optical-drive latch bracket to the optical drive assembly.
4. Secure the optical-drive latch to the optical drive assembly.
5. Tighten the screw to secure the optical drive latch.
6. Slide the optical drive into its slot.
7. Flip the computer, and push in the eject latch to secure the optical drive.
8. Install the battery.
9. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Memory
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
b) base cover
3. Pry the securing clips away from the memory module until it pops up.
4. Remove the memory module from its connector on the system board.
5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to remove the second memory module.
Installing the Memory
1. Insert the memory module into the memory socket.
2. Press the securing clips to secure the memory module to the system board.
3. Install:
a) base cover
b) battery
4. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
21Removing the Processor
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
b) base cover
c) heat sink
3. Rotate the processor cam lock in a counter-clockwise direction.
4. Remove the processor from the computer.
Installing the Processor
1. Align the notches on the processor and the socket, and insert the processor into the socket.
2. Rotate the processor cam lock in a clockwise direction.
3. Install:
a) heat sink
b) base cover
c) battery
4. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Card
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
b) base cover
223. Disconnect the antenna cables from the WLAN card.
4. Remove the screw that secures the WLAN card to the computer.
5. Remove the WLAN card from its slot on the system board.
Installing the WLAN Card
1. Insert the WLAN card into its connector at a 45–degree angle into its slot.
2. Connect the antenna cables to their respective connectors marked on the WLAN card.
3. Tighten the screw to secure the WLAN card to the computer.
4. Install:
a) base cover
b) battery
5. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Heat Sink
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
23a) battery
b) base cover
3. Disconnect the heat-sink cable.
4. Remove the screws that secure the heat sink to the system board.
5. Remove the heat sink from the computer.
Installing the Heat Sink
1. Slide the heat sink into its original position in the system board.
2. Tighten the screws to secure the heat sink to the system board
3. Connect the heat-sink cable to the system board.
4. Install:
a) base cover
b) battery
5. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
24Removing the Bluetooth Card
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove the:
a) battery
b) base cover
3. Remove the screw that secures the bluetooth card to the computer.
4. Disconnect the bluetooth cable from the system board.
5. Remove the bluetooth card from the computer
6. Disconnect the bluetooth cable from the bluetooth card.
25Installing the Bluetooth Card
1. Connect the bluetooth cable to the bluetooth card.
2. Connect the other end of the bluetooth cable to the system board.
3. Place the bluetooth card in its location in the computer.
4. Tighten the screw to secure the bluetooth card to the system board.
5. Install:
a) base cover
b) battery
6. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Modem Card
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove the:
a) battery
b) base cover
3. Remove the screw that secures the modem card to the computer.
4. Lift the modem card to release the tab from the connector on the back of the card.
265. Disconnect the modem cable from the modem card.
6. Grasp the modem card and remove the it from the computer.
Installing the Modem Card
1. Insert the modem card in its slot
2. Seat the modem card, to ensure that the tab on the back of the card is engaged.
3. Connect the modem cable to the modem card.
4. Tighten the screw to secure the modem card.
5. Install:
a) base cover
b) battery
6. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
27Removing the Speakers
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
b) base cover
c) hard drive
d) keyboard trim
e) keyboard
f) display assembly
g) palmrest
h) media board (available in E6430/E6430 ATG only)
i) ExpressCard cage
j) bluetooth card
k) system board
3. Remove the screws that secure the speakers to the computer.
4. Remove the speaker cable from the routing channel.
5. Remove the speakers from the computer.
28Installing the Speakers
1. Align the speakers in the original position and connect the speaker cables.
2. Tighten the screws to secure the speakers.
3. Install:
a) system board
b) bluetooth card
c) ExpressCard cage
d) media board (available in E6430/E6430 ATG only)
e) palmrest
f) display assembly
g) keyboard
h) keyboard trim
i) hard drive
j) base cover
k) battery
4. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Coin-Cell Battery
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
b) base cover
3. Disconnect the coin-cell battery cable.
4. Pry the coin-cell battery upward and remove it from the computer.
29Installing the Coin-Cell Battery
1. Place the coin-cell battery in its slot.
2. Connect the coin-cell battery cable.
3. Install:
a) base cover
b) battery
4. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the ExpressCard Cage
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
b) base cover
c) hard drive
d) bluetooth card
e) keyboard trim
f) keyboard
g) display assembly
h) palmrest
3. Remove the screws that secure the ExpressCard cage to the computer.
4. Remove the ExpressCard cage from the computer.
30Installing the ExpressCard Cage
1. Place the ExpressCard cage into its compartment.
2. Tighten the screws to secure the ExpressCard cage to the computer.
3. Install:
a) palmrest
b) display assembly
c) keyboard
d) keyboard trim
e) bluetooth card
f) hard drive
g) base cover
h) battery
4. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Power-Connector Port
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
b) base cover
3. Disconnect the power-connector cable from the system board.
4. Remove the screw that secures the power-connector bracket to the computer.
5. Remove the power-connector bracket from the computer.
316. Remove the power-connector cable from the computer.
Installing the Power-Connector Port
1. Connect the power-connector cable to the computer.
2. Install the power-connector bracket to its position in the computer.
3. Tighten the screw to secure the power-connector bracket to the computer.
4. Connect the power-connector cable to the system board.
5. Install:
a) base cover
b) battery
6. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Power LED Board
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
b) base cover
c) hard drive
d) bluetooth module
e) keyboard trim
f) keyboard
g) display assembly
h) display bezel
i) display panel
3. Disconnect the power LED board cable.
324. Remove the screw securing the power LED board to the display assembly.
5. Remove the power LED board from the display assembly.
Installing the Power LED Board
1. Place the power LED board in its compartment in the display assembly.
2. Tighten the screw to secure the LED board to the display assembly.
3. Connect the power LED board cable to the display assembly.
4. Install:
a) display panel
b) display bezel
c) display assembly
d) keyboard
e) keyboard trim
f) bluetooth module
g) hard drive
h) base cover
i) battery
335. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Input/Output (I/O) Board
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
b) base cover
c) hard drive
d) optical drive
e) bluetooth card
f) keyboard trim
g) keyboard
h) display assembly
i) palmrest
j) media board (available in E6430/E6430 ATG only)
k) ExpressCard cage
l) system board
3. Remove the screw that secures the I/O board to the computer.
4. Remove the I/O board from the computer.
Installing the Input Output (I/O) Board
1. Place the I/O board in its compartment.
2. Tighten the screws to secure the I/O board.
3. Install:
a) system board
b) ExpressCard cage
34c) media board (available in E6430/E6430 ATG only)
d) palmrest
e) display assembly
f) keyboard
g) keyboard trim
h) bluetooth card
i) hard drive
j) optical drive
k) base cover
l) battery
4. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Hard-Drive Support Plate
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove the:
a) battery
b) base cover
c) hard drive
d) optical drive
e) keyboard trim
f) keyboard
g) display assembly
h) palmrest
3. Remove the screw that secures the hard-drive support plate to the computer.
4. Lift the hard-drive support plate from the computer.
35Installing the Hard-Drive Support Plate
1. Place the hard-drive support plate in its compartment.
2. Tighten the screw to secure the hard drive support plate to the computer.
3. Install the:
a) palmrest
b) display assembly
c) keyboard
d) keyboard trim
e) optical drive
f) hard drive
g) base cover
h) battery
4. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Palmrest
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
b) base cover
c) hard drive
d) bluetooth card
e) keyboard trim
f) keyboard
3. Remove the screws that secure the palmrest assembly to the base of the computer.
4. Flip the computer over and remove the screws that secure the palmrest assembly to the computer.
365. Disconnect the media board cable (available in E6430/E6430 ATG only).
6. Disconnect the touchpad cable.
7. Disconnect the fingerprint reader cable.
8. Lift and remove the palmrest from the computer.
37Installing the Palmrest
1. Align the palmrest assembly to its original position in the computer and snap it into place.
2. Connect the following cables:
a) media board (available in E6430/E6430 ATG only)
b) touchpad
c) fingerprint reader
3. Tighten the screws to secure the palmrest to the computer.
4. Install:
a) keyboard
b) keyboard trim
c) bluetooth module
d) hard drive
e) base cover
f) battery
5. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the WiFi-Switch Board
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove the:
a) battery
b) base cover
c) hard drive
d) optical drive
e) keyboard trim
f) keyboard
g) palmrest
3. Disconnect the WiFi-switch board cable from the system board.
4. Remove the screw that secures the WiFi-switch board.
385. Peel of the adhesive tape on the back of the WiFi-switch board and remove the WiFi-switch board.
Installing the WiFi-Switch Board
1. Fix the adhesive tape on the back of the WiFi-switch board and place the board in its slot.
2. Tighten the screw to secure the WiFi-switch board.
3. Connect the WiFi-switch board cable to the system board.
4. Install:
a) palmrest
b) keyboard
c) keyboard trim
d) optical drive
e) hard drive
f) base cover
g) battery
5. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the System Board
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
b) base cover
c) hard drive
d) optical drive
e) bluetooth card
f) keyboard trim
g) keyboard
39h) WLAN card
i) modem card
j) heat sink
k) processor
l) palmrest
m) ExpressCard cage
3. Disconnect the power-connector cable from the bottom side of the system board.
4. Remove the screws that secure the LVDS support bracket.
5. Remove the LVDS support bracket from the computer.
6. Disconnect the LVDS cable from the system board.
407. Remove the antenna cables from the routing channel.
8. Disconnect the coin-cell battery cable.
9. Disconnect the speaker cable from the top side of the system board.
10. Disconnect the WiFi-board cable.
4111. Remove the screws that secure the system board.
12. Lift the edge of the system board to a 45–degree angle.
13. Release the system board from the ports and connectors.
14. Lift the system board from the computer.
42Installing the System Board
1. Place the system board on the chassis.
2. Tighten the screws to secure the system board to the computer.
3. Connect the following cables to the system board:
a) WiFi-switch board
b) speaker
c) coin-cell battery
d) LVDS
4. Route the antenna cables through the routing channels.
5. Install the LVDS support bracket in its position in the computer.
6. Tighten the screws to secure the LVDS support bracket to the computer
7. Connect the power connector cable to the system board.
8. Install the:
a) ExpressCard cage
b) palmrest
c) processor
d) heat sink
e) modem card
f) WLAN card
g) keyboard
h) keyboard trim
i) bluetooth card
j) optical drive
k) hard drive
l) base cover
m) battery
9. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Modem Connector
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
b) base cover
c) hard drive
d) bluetooth card
43e) keyboard trim
f) keyboard
g) display assembly
h) palmrest
i) media board (available in E6430/E6430 ATG only)
j) ExpressCard cage
k) system board
3. Disconnect the modem-card cable from the modem card.
4. Remove the modem cable from the routing channel.
5. Remove the screw that secures the modem-connector bracket to the computer.
6. Remove the modem-connector bracket from the computer.
447. Remove the modem connector from the computer.
Installing the Modem Connector
1. Place the modem connector in its compartment.
2. Place the modem-connector bracket on the connector.
3. Tighten the screw to secure the modem-connector bracket.
4. Route the modem connector cable.
5. Connect the modem-card cable to the modem card.
6. Install:
a) system board
b) ExpressCard cage
c) media board (available in E6430/E6430 ATG only)
d) palmrest
e) display assembly
f) keyboard
g) keyboard trim
h) bluetooth card
i) hard drive
j) base cover
k) battery
7. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Display Assembly
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working On Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
45b) base cover
3. Remove the screws that secure the LVDS support bracket to the system board.
4. Remove the LVDS support bracket from the system board.
5. Disconnect the LVDS cable.
6. Disconnect the camera cable from the system board.
7. Remove the LVDS cable from the routing channel.
468. Remove the screws to release the display assembly on both sides.
9. Lift the display assembly and pull the LVDS and the antenna cables through the opening of the computer.
10. Remove the display assembly from the computer.
Installing the Display Assembly
1. Place the display assembly onto the computer.
2. Insert the LVDS and wireless antenna cables through the holes on the base chassis and connect them.
473. Tighten the screws on both corners to secure the display assembly.
4. Route the antenna and the LVDS cables through the routing channel.
5. Connect the following cables to the computer:
a) LVDS
b) camera
6. Connect the LVDS support bracket in its position on the computer.
7. Tighten the screw to secure the support bracket to the computer.
8. Install:
a) base cover
b) battery
9. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Display Bezel
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove the battery.
3. Pry up the bottom edge of the display bezel.
4. Pry up the left, right and top edges of the display bezel.
5. Remove the display bezel from the display assembly.
48Installing the Display Bezel
1. Place the display bezel onto the display assembly.
2. Starting from the top corner, press on the display bezel and work around the entire bezel until it clicks onto the
display assembly.
3. Press on the left and right edges of the display bezel.
4. Install the battery.
5. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Display Panel
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
b) display assembly
c) display bezel
3. Remove the screws that secure the display panel to the display assembly.
4. Flip the display panel over.
495. Peel off the LVDS cable connector tape and disconnect the LVDS cable from the display panel.
6. Remove the display panel from the display assembly.
Installing the Display Panel
1. Connect the LVDS cable and stick the LVDS cable connector tape.
2. Flip the display and place it in the display assembly.
3. Tighten the screws to secure the display panel to the display assembly.
4. Install:
a) display bezel
b) display assembly
c) battery
5. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Display Assembly
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working On Your Computer.
2. Remove:
50a) battery
b) base cover
3. Remove the screws that secure the LVDS support bracket to the system board.
4. Remove the LVDS support bracket from the system board.
5. Disconnect the LVDS cable.
6. Disconnect the camera cable from the system board.
7. Remove the LVDS cable from the routing channel.
518. Remove the screws to release the display assembly on both sides.
9. Lift the display assembly and pull the LVDS and the antenna cables through the opening of the computer.
10. Remove the display assembly from the computer.
Installing the Display Assembly
1. Place the display assembly onto the computer.
2. Insert the LVDS and wireless antenna cables through the holes on the base chassis and connect them.
523. Tighten the screws on both corners to secure the display assembly.
4. Route the antenna and the LVDS cables through the routing channel.
5. Connect the following cables to the computer:
a) LVDS
b) camera
6. Connect the LVDS support bracket in its position on the computer.
7. Tighten the screw to secure the support bracket to the computer.
8. Install:
a) base cover
b) battery
9. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Display-Hinge Caps
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
b) base cover
c) hard drive
d) bluetooth card
e) keyboard trim
f) keyboard
g) display assembly
3. Rotate the left and right hinges upwards to a vertical position.
4. Pry loose the edge of hinge cap from the hinge and remove the hinge caps from the display assembly.
53Installing the Display-Hinge Caps
1. Slide the left hinge cap on the display panel.
2. Rotate the hinge downward to secure the hinge cap to the display panel.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the right hinge cap.
4. Install:
a) display assembly
b) keyboard
c) keyboard trim
d) bluetooth card
e) hard drive
f) base cover
g) battery
5. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Display Hinges
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
b) base cover
c) hard drive
d) bluetooth card
e) keyboard trim
f) keyboard
g) display assembly
h) display bezel
i) display panel
3. Remove the screws that secure the display hinge plates to the display assembly.
4. Remove the display hinge plates.
545. Remove the screws that secures the display hinges to the display assembly.
6. Remove the display hinges from the display assembly.
Installing the Display Hinges
1. Place both the display hinges on the panel.
2. Tighten the screws to secure the display hinges to the display assembly.
3. Place the display hinge plates on the hinges.
4. Tighten the screws to secure the display hinge plates to the display assembly.
5. Install:
a) display panel
b) display bezel
c) display assembly
d) keyboard
e) keyboard trim
f) bluetooth card
g) hard drive
h) base cover
55i) battery
6. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the Camera
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
b) display assembly
c) display bezel
d) display panel
3. Disconnect the LVDS and camera cable from the camera.
4. Remove the screw that secures the camera to the display assembly.
5. Remove the camera from the display assembly.
56Installing the Camera
1. Install the camera in its slot on the display panel.
2. Tighten the screw to secure the camera to the display assembly.
3. Connect the LVDS and the camera cable to the camera.
4. Install:
a) display panel
b) display bezel
c) display assembly
d) battery
5. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
Removing the LVDS and Camera Cable
1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
2. Remove:
a) battery
b) base cover
c) hard drive
d) bluetooth card
e) keyboard trim
f) keyboard
g) display assembly
h) display bezel
i) display panel
j) display hinges
3. Disconnect the LVDS and camera cable from the camera.
4. Peel back the adhesives securing the LVDS and camera cable to the display assembly.
575. Remove the LVDS and camera cable from the display assembly.
Installing the LVDS and Camera Cable
1. Route the LVDS and camera cable on the display assembly.
2. Fix the adhesive the tape to secure the cable.
3. Connect the LVDS and camera cable to the camera.
4. Install:
a) display hinges
b) display panel
c) display bezel
d) display assembly
e) keyboard
f) keyboard trim
g) bluetooth card
h) hard drive
i) base cover
j) battery
5. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer.
583
Additional Information
This section provides information for the additional features that are part of your computer.
Docking Port Information
The docking port is used for connecting the laptop to a docking station (optional).
1. Docking Port
59604
System Setup
System Setup enables you to manage your computer hardware and specify BIOS‐level options. From the System Setup,
you can:
• Change the NVRAM settings after you add or remove hardware
• View the system hardware configuration
• Enable or disable integrated devices
• Set performance and power management thresholds
• Manage your computer security
Boot Sequence
Boot Sequence allows you to bypass the System Setup‐defined boot device order and boot directly to a specific device
(for example: optical drive or hard drive). During the Power-on Self Test (POST), when the Dell logo appears, you can:
• Access System Setup by pressing key
• Bring up the one-time boot menu by pressing key
The one-time boot menu displays the devices that you can boot from including the diagnostic option. The boot-menu
options are:
• Removable Drive (if available)
• STXXXX Drive
NOTE: XXX denotes the SATA drive number.
• Optical Drive
• Diagnostics
NOTE: Choosing Diagnostics, will display the ePSA diagnostics screen.
The boot sequence screen also displays the option to access the System Setup screen.
Navigation Keys
The following table displays the system setup navigation keys.
NOTE: For most of the system setup options, changes that you make are recorded but do not take effect until you
restart the system.
Table 1. Navigation Keys
Keys Navigation
Up arrow Moves to the previous field.
Down arrow Moves to the next field.
61Keys Navigation
Allows you to select a value in the selected field (if applicable) or follow the link in the field.
Spacebar Expands or collapses a drop‐down list, if applicable.
Moves to the next focus area.
NOTE: For the standard graphics browser only.
Moves to the previous page till you view the main screen. Pressing in the main screen
displays a message that prompts you to save any unsaved changes and restarts the system.
Displays the System Setup help file.
System Setup Options
NOTE: Depending on your computer and its installed devices, the items listed in this section may or may not
appear.
Table 2. General
Option Description
System Information This section lists the primary hardware
features of your computer.
• System Information
• Memory Information
• Processor Information
• Device Information
Battery Information Displays the charge status of the battery.
Boot Sequence Allows you to change the order in which the
computer attempts to find an operating
system. All the below options are selected.
• Diskette Drive
• Internal HDD
• USB Storage Device
• CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive
• Onboard NIC
You can also choose the Boot List option. The
options are:
• Legacy (Default Setting)
• UEFI
Date/Time Allows you to set the date and time.
Table 3. System Configuration
Option Description
Integrated NIC Allows you to configure the integrated
network controller. The options are:
62Option Description
• Disabled
• Enabled
• Enabled w/PXE (Default Setting)
Parallel Port Allows you to define and set how the parallel
port on the docking station operates. You can
set the parallel port to:
• Disabled
• AT
• PS2
• ECP
Serial Port Identifies and defines the serial port settings.
You can set the serial port to:
• Disabled
• COM1 (Default Setting)
• COM2
• COM3
• COM4
NOTE: The operating system may allocate
resources even if the setting is disabled.
SATA Operation Allows you to configure the internal SATA
hard-drive controller. The options are:
• Disabled
• ATA
• AHCI
• RAID On (Default Setting)
NOTE: SATA is configured to support
RAID mode.
Drives Allows you to configure the SATA drives on
board. The options are:
• SATA-0
• SATA-1
• SATA-4
• SATA-5
Default Setting: All drives are enabled.
SMART Reporting This field controls if the hard drive errors for
the integrated drives are reported during
system startup. This technology is part of the
SMART (Self Monitoring Analysis and
Reporting Technology) specification.
63Option Description
• Enable SMART Reporting - This option
is disabled by default.
USB Configuration Allows you to define the USB configuration.
The options are:
• Enable Boot Support
• Enable External USB Port
Default Setting: both the options are enabled.
USB PowerShare Allows you to configure the behavior of the
USB PowerShare feature. The option is
disabled by default.
• Enable USB PowerShare
Keyboard Illumination Allows you to choose the operating mode of
the keyboard illumination feature. The options
are:
• Disabled (Default Setting)
• Level is 25%
• Level is 50%
• Level is 75%
• Level is 100%
Stealth Mode Control Allows you to set the mode that will turn off all
light and sound emissions from the system.
The option is disabled by default.
• Enable Stealth Mode
Miscellaneous Devices Allows you enable or disable the various on
board devices. The options are:
• Enable Internal Modem
• Enable Microphone
• Enable eSATA Ports
• Enable Hard Drive Free Fall Protection
• Enable Module Bay
• Enable ExpressCard
• Enable Camera
• Enable Media Card
• Disable Media Card
Default Setting: All devices are enabled
64Table 4. Video
Option Description
LCD Brightness Allows you to set the panel brightness when the ambient sensor is Off.
Optimus Allows you to enable or disable the NVIDIA Optimus technology.
• Enable Optimus - Default Setting.
Table 5. Security
Option Description
Intel TXT (LT-SX) Configuration This option is disabled by default.
Admin Password Allows you to set, change, or delete the administrator (admin) password.
NOTE: You must set the admin password before you set the system or hard
drive password.
NOTE: Successful password changes take effect immediately.
NOTE: Deleting the admin password automatically deletes the system
password and the hard drive password.
NOTE: Successful password changes take effect immediately.
Default Setting: Not set
System Password Allows you to set, change or delete the system password.
NOTE: Successful password changes take effect immediately.
Default Setting: Not set
Internal HDD-0 Password Allows you to set, change or delete the administrator password.
Default Setting: Not set
Strong Password Allows you to enforce the option to always set strong passwords.
Default Setting: Enable Strong Password is not selected.
Password Configuration You can define the length of your password. Min = 4 , Max = 32
Password Bypass Allows you to enable or disable the permission to bypass the System and the
Internal HDD password, when they are set. The options are:
• Disabled (Default Setting)
• Reboot bypass
Password Change Allows you to enable the disable permission to the System and Hard Drive
passwords when the admin password is set.
Default Setting: Allow Non-Admin Password Changes is not selected
Non-Admin Setup Changes Allows you to determine whether changes to setup option are permitted when an
administrator password is set. The option is disabled.
• Allows Wireless Switch Changes
TPM Security Allows you to enable the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) during POST.
Default Setting: The option is disabled.
CPU XD Support Allows you to enable the Execute Disable mode of the processor.
65Option Description
Default Setting: Enable CPU XD Support
Computrace Allows you to activate or disable the optional Computrace software The options
are:
• Deactivate (Default Setting)
• Disable
• Activate
NOTE: The Activate and Disable options will permanently activate or disable
the feature and no further changes will be allowed
CPU XD Support Allows you to enable the Execute Disable mode of the processor.
Default Setting: Enable CPU XD Support
OROM Keyboard Access Allows you to set access to enter the Option ROM Configuration screens using
hotkeys during boot process. The options are:
• Enable (Default Setting)
• One Time Enable
• Disable
Admin Setup Lockout Allows you to prevent users from entering Setup when an Administrator password
is set.
Default Setting: Disabled
Table 6. Performance
Option Description
Multi Core Support This field specifies whether the process will
have one or all cores enabled. The
performance of some applications will
improve with the additional cores. This option
is enabled by default. Allows you to enable or
disable multi-core support for the processor.
The options are:
• All (Default Setting)
• 1
• 2
Intel SpeedStep Allows you to enable or disable the Intel
SpeedStep feature.
Default Setting: Enable Intel SpeedStep
C States Control Allows you to enable or disable the additional
processor sleep states.
Default Setting: The options C states, C3, C6,
Enhanced C-states, and C7 options are
enabled.
Intel TurboBoost Allows you to enable or disable the Intel
TurboBoost mode of the processor.
Default Setting: Enable Intel TurboBoost
66Option Description
Hyper-Thread Control Allows you to enable or disable the
HyperThreading in the processor.
Default Setting: Enabled
Table 7. Power Management
Option Description
AC Behavior Allows the computer to power-uon automatically, when AC adapter is plugged. The
option is disabled.
• Wake on AC
Auto On Time Allows you to set the time at which the computer must turn on automatically. The
options are:
• Disabled (Default Setting)
• Every Day
• Weekdays
USB Wake Support Allows you to enable the USB devices to wake the computer from standby mode.
The option is disabled
• Enable USB Wake Support
Wireless Radio Control Allows you to control the WLAN and WWAN radio. The options are:
• Control WLAN radio
• Control WWAN radio
Default Setting: both the options are disabled.
Wake on LAN/WLAN This option allows the computer to power up from the off state when triggered by a
special LAN signal. Wake-up from the Standby state is unaffected by this setting
and must be enabled in the operating system. This feature only works when the
computer is connected to AC power supply.
• Disabled - Does not allow the system to power on by special LAN signals
when it receives a wake-up signal from the LAN or wireless LAN. (Default
Setting)
• LAN Only - Allows the system to be powered on by special LAN signals.
• WLAN Only
• LAN or WLAN
Block Sleep Allows you to block the computer from entering into the sleep state. Option is
disabled by default.
• Block Sleep (S3)
Primary Battery Configuration Allows you to define how to use the battery charge, when AC is plugged in. The
options are:
• Standard Charge
• Express Charge
• Predominantly AC use
• Auto Charge (Default Setting)
67Option Description
• Custom Charge — you can set the percentage to which the battery must
charge .
Battery Slice Configuration Allows you to define the how to charge the battery. The options are:
• Standard Charge
• Express Charge (Default Setting)
Table 8. POST Behavior
Option Description
Adapter Warnings Allows you to activate the adapter warning messages when certain power
adapters are used. The option is enabled by default.
• Enable Adapter Warnings
Mouse/Touchpad Allows you to define how the computer handles the mouse and touchpad input. The
options are:
• Serial Mouse
• PS2 Mouse
• Touchpad/PS-2 Mouse (Default Setting)
Numlock Enable Specifies if the NumLock function can be enabled when the computer boots. This
option is enabled by default.
• Enable Numlock
Fn Key Emulation Allows you to match the key feature of PS-2 keyboard with the
key feature in an internal keyboard. The option is enabled by default.
• Enable Fn Key Emulation
Keyboard Errors Specifies whether keyboard related errors are reported when it boots. This option
is enabled by default.
• Enable Keyboard Error Detection
POST Hotkeys Specifies whether the sign-on screen displays a message, that displays the
keystroke sequence required to enter the BIOS Boot Option Menu.
• Enable F12 Boot Option menu - This option is enabled by default.
Fastboot Allows you to speed up the boot processes. The options are:
• Minimal
• Thorough (Default Setting)
• Auto
68Table 9. Virtualization Support
Option Description
Virtualization This option specifies whether a Virtual Machine Monitor (VMM) can utilize the
additional hardware capabilities provided by Intel Virtualization technology.
• Enable Intel Virtualization Technology - Default Setting.
VT for Direct I/O Enables or disables the Virtual Machine Monitor (VMM) from utilizing the additional
hardware capabilities provided by Intel Virtualization technology for direct I/O.
• Enable Intel Virtualization Technology for Direct I/O - Default Setting.
Table 10. Wireless
Option Description
Wireless Switch Allows you to determine which wireless device can be controlled by the wireless
switch. The options are:
• WWAN
• Bluetooth
• WLAN
All options are enabled by default.
Wireless Device Enable Allows you to enable or disable the wireless devices. The options are:
• WWAN
• Bluetooth
• WLAN
All options are enabled by default.
Table 11. Maintenance
Option Description
Service Tag Displays the service tag of your computer.
Asset Tag Allows you to create a system asset tag if an asset tag is not already set. This
option is not set by default.
Table 12. System Logs
Option Description
BIOS events Displays the system event log and allows you to clear the log.
• Clear Log
Updating the BIOS
It is recommended to update your BIOS (system setup), on replacing the system board or if an update is available. For
notebooks, ensure that your computer battery is fully charged and connected to a power outlet
1. Restart the computer.
2. Go to support.dell.com/support/downloads.
693. If you have your computer's Service Tag or Express Service Code:
NOTE: For desktops, the service tag label is available on the front of your computer.
NOTE: For notebooks, the service tag label is available on the bottom of your computer.
a) Enter the Service Tag or Express Service Code and click Submit.
b) Click Submit and proceed to step 5.
4. If you do not have your computer's service tag or express service code, select one of the following:
a) Automatically detect my Service Tag for me
b) Choose from My Products and Services List
c) Choose from a list of all Dell products
5. On the application and drivers screen, under the Operating System drop-down list, select BIOS.
6. Identify the latest BIOS file and click Download File.
7. Select your preferred download method in the Please select your download method below window; click Download
Now.
The File Download window appears.
8. Click Save to save the file on your computer.
9. Click Run to install the updated BIOS settings on your computer.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
System and Setup Password
You can create a system password and a setup password to secure your computer.
Password Type Description
System password Password that you must enter to log on to your system.
Setup password Password that you must enter to access and make changes to the BIOS settings of your
computer.
CAUTION: The password features provide a basic level of security for the data on your computer.
CAUTION: Anyone can access the data stored on your computer if is not locked and left unattended.
NOTE: Your computer is shipped with the system and setup password feature disabled.
Assigning a System Password and Setup Password
You can assign a new System Password and/or Setup Password or change an existing System Password and/or Setup
Password only when Password Status is Unlocked. If the Password Status is Locked, you cannot change the System
Password.
NOTE: If the password jumper is disabled, the existing System Password and Setup Password is deleted and you
need not provide the system password to log on to the computer.
To enter a system setup, press immediately after a power-on or reboot.
1. In the System BIOS or System Setup screen, select System Security and press .
The System Security screen appears.
2. In the System Security screen, verify that Password Status is Unlocked.
3. Select System Password , enter your system password, and press or .
70Use the following guidelines to assign the system password:
– A password can have up to 32 characters.
– The password can contain the numbers 0 through 9.
– Only lower case letters are valid, upper case letters are not allowed.
– Only the following special characters are allowed: space, (”), (+), (,), (-), (.), (/), (;), ([), (\), (]), (`).
Re-enter the system password when prompted.
4. Type the system password that you entered earlier and click OK.
5. Select Setup Password, type your system password and press or .
A message prompts you to re-type the setup password.
6. Type the setup password that you entered earlier and click OK.
7. Press and a message prompts you to save the changes.
8. Press to save the changes.
The computer reboots.
Deleting or Changing an Existing System and/or Setup Password
Ensure that the Password Status is Unlocked (in the System Setup) before attempting to delete or change the existing
System and/or Setup password. You cannot delete or change an existing System or Setup password, if the Password
Status is Locked.
To enter the System Setup, press immediately after a power-on or reboot.
1. In the System BIOS or System Setup screen, select System Security and press .
The System Security screen is displayed.
2. In the System Security screen, verify that Password Status is Unlocked.
3. Select System Password, alter or delete the existing system password and press or .
4. Select Setup Password, alter or delete the existing setup password and press or .
NOTE: If you change the System and/or Setup password, re-enter the new password when promoted. If you
delete the System and/or Setup password, confirm the deletion when promoted.
5. Press and a message prompts you to save the changes.
6. Press to save the changes and exit from the System Setup.
The computer reboots.
71725
Diagnostics
If you experience a problem with your computer, run the ePSA diagnostics before contacting Dell for technical
assistance. The purpose of running diagnostics is to test your computer's hardware without requiring additional
equipment or risking data loss. If you are unable to fix the problem yourself, service and support personnel can use the
diagnostics results to help you solve the problem.
Enhanced Pre-Boot System Assessment (ePSA) Diagnostics
The ePSA diagnostics (also known as system diagnostics) performs a complete check of your hardware. The ePSA is
embedded with the BIOS and is launched by the BIOS internally. The embedded system diagnostics provides a set of
options for particular devices or device groups allowing you to:
• Run tests automatically or in an interactive mode
• Repeat tests
• Display or save test results
• Run thorough tests to introduce additional test options to provide extra information about the failed device(s)
• View status messages that inform you if tests are completed successfully
• View error messages that inform you of problems encountered during testing
CAUTION: Use the system diagnostics to test only your computer. Using this program with other computers may
cause invalid results or error messages.
NOTE: Some tests for specific devices require user interaction. Always ensure that you are present at the
computer terminal when the diagnostic tests are performed.
1. Power-on the computer.
2. As the computer boots, press the key as the Dell logo appears.
3. On the boot menu screen, select the Diagnostics option.
The Enhanced Pre-boot System Assessment window is displayed, listing all devices detected in the computer. The
diagnostics starts running the tests on all the detected devices.
4. If you wish to run a diagnostic test on a specific device, press and click Yes to stop the diagnostic test.
5. Select the device from the left pane and click Run Tests.
6. If there are any issues, error codes are displayed.
Note the error code and contact Dell.
73746
Troubleshooting Your Computer
You can troubleshoot your computer using indicators like Diagnostic Lights, Beep Codes, and Error Messages during the
operation of the computer.
Device Status Lights
Table 13. Device Status Lights
Turns on when you turn on the computer and blinks when the computer is in a power management mode.
Turns on when the computer reads or writes data.
Turns on steadily or blinks to indicate battery charge status.
Turns on when wireless networking is enabled.
The device status LEDs are usually located either on the top or left side of the keyboard. They are used to display the
storage, battery and wireless devices connectivity and activity. Apart from that they can be useful as a diagnostic tool
when there's a possible failure to the system.
The following table lists how to read the LED codes when possible errors occur.
Table 14. LED Lights
Storage LED Power LED Wireless LED Fault Description
Blinking Solid Solid A possible processor failure has occurred.
Solid Blinking Solid The memory modules are detected but has encountered an
error.
Blinking Blinking Blinking A system board failure has occurred.
Blinking Blinking Solid A possible graphics card/video failure has occurred.
Blinking Blinking Off System failed on hard drive initialization OR System failed in
Option ROM initialization.
Blinking Off Blinking The USB controller encountered a problem during
initialization.
Solid Blinking Blinking No memory modules are installed/detected.
Blinking Solid Blinking The display encountered a problem during initialization.
Off Blinking Blinking The modem is preventing the system from completing POST
Off Blinking Off Memory failed to initialize or memory is unsupported.
75Battery Status Lights
If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the battery light operates as follows:
Alternately
blinking amber
light and white
light
An unauthenticated or unsupported non-Dell AC adapter is attached to your laptop.
Alternately
blinking amber
light with steady
white light
Temporary battery failure with AC adapter present.
Constantly
blinking amber
light
Fatal battery failure with AC adapter present.
Light off Battery in full charge mode with AC adapter present.
White light on Battery in charge mode with AC adapter present.
767
Technical Specifications
NOTE: Offerings may vary by region. The following specifications are only those required by law to ship with your
computer. For more information regarding the configuration of your computer, click Start → Help and Support and
select the option to view information about your computer.
Table 15. System Information
Feature Specification
Chipset Mobile Intel 7 series chipset (Intel QM77)
DRAM bus width 64-bit
Flash EPROM SPI 32 MB, 64 MB
PCIe Gen1 bus 100 MHz
External Bus Frequency DMI (5GT/s)
Table 16. Processor
Feature Specification
Types • Intel Core i3 series
• Intel Core i5 series
• Intel Core i7 series
L3 cache up to 8 MB
Table 17. Memory
Feature Specification
Memory connector two SODIMM slots
Memory capacity 1 GB, 2 GB, or 4 GB
Memory type DDR3 SDRAM (1600 MHz)
Minimum memory 2 GB
Maximum memory 16 GB
Table 18. Audio
Feature Specification
Type four-channel high-definition audio
Controller IDT92HD93
77Feature Specification
Stereo conversion 24-bit (analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog)
Interface:
Internal high-definition audio
External microphone-in/stereo headphones/external speakers connector
Speakers two
Internal speaker amplifier 1 W (RMS) per channel
Volume controls keyboard function keys, program menus
Table 19. Video
Feature Specification
Type integrated on system board
Controller • Intel HD Graphics
• NVidia Discrete Graphics
Table 20. Communications
Features Specification
Network adapter 10/100/1000 Mb/s Ethernet (RJ-45)
Wireless internal wireless local area network (WLAN) and wireless wide
area network (WWAN)
Table 21. Ports and Connectors
Features Specification
Audio one microphone/stereo headphone/speakers connector
Video • one 15-pin VGA connector
• 19-pin HDMI connector
Network adapter one RJ-45 connector
USB 2.0 • one 4-pin USB 2.0-compliant connector
• one eSATA/USB 2.0-compliant connector
USB 3.0 two
Memory card reader one 8-in-1 memory card reader
Docking port one
Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card one
78Table 22. Contactless Smart Card
Feature Specification
Supported Smart Cards/Technologies ISO14443A — 106 kbps, 212 kbps, 424 kbps, and 848 kbps
ISO14443B — 106 kbps, 212 kbps, 424 kbps, and 848 kbps ISO15936
HID iClass FIPS201 NXP Desfire , HID iClass FIPS201 NXP Desfire
Table 23. Display
Feature Specification
Type • HD(1366x768), WLED
• HD+(1600 x 900)
• FHD (1920 x 1080)
Size
Latitude E6430 14.0"
Latitude E6530 15.6"
Latitude E6430 ATG 14.0"
Dimensions:
Latitude E6430:
Height 192.50 mm (7.57 inches)
Width 324 mm (12.75 inches)
Diagonal 355.60 mm (14.00 inches)
Active area (X/Y) 309.40 mm x 173.95 mm
Maximum resolution • 1366 x 768 pixels
• 1600 x 900 pixels
Maximum Brightness 200 nits
Latitude E6530:
Height 210 mm (8.26 inches)
Width 360 mm (14.17 inches)
Diagonal 394.24 mm (15.60 inches)
Active area (X/Y) 344.23 mm x 193.54 mm
Maximum resolution • 1366 x 768 pixels
• 1600 x 900 pixels
• 1920 x 1080 pixels
Maximum Brightness 220 nits
Latitude E6430 ATG:
79Feature Specification
Height 192.5 mm (7.57 inches)
Width 324 mm (12.75 inches)
Diagonal 355.60 mm (14.00 inches)
Active area (X/Y) 357.30 mm x 246.50 mm
Maximum resolution 1366 x 768 pixels
Maximum Brightness 730 nits
Operating angle 0° (closed) to 180°
Refresh rate 60 Hz
Minimum Viewing Angles:
Latitude E6430 / Latitude E6530:
Horizontal +/- 40°
Vertical +10°/-30°
Latitude E6430 ATG:
Horizontal +/- 50°
Vertical +/- 40°
Pixel pitch:
Latitude E6430 0.2265 mm x 0.2265 mm
Latitude E6530 0.252 mm x 0.252 mm
Table 24. Keyboard
Feature Specification
Number of keys United States: 86 keys, United Kingdom: 87 keys, Brazil: 87 keys,
and Japan: 90 keys
NOTE: Numeric keypad is available for Latitude E6530.
Layout QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji
Table 25. Touchpad
Feature Specification
Active Area:
X-axis 80.00 mm
Y-axis 45.00 mm
80Table 26. Battery
Feature Specification
Type • 4-cell (40 WHr) Lithium-ion battery with Express Charge
(selected countries only)
• 6-cell (60 WHr) Lithium-ion battery with Express Charge
• 9-cell (97 WHr) Lithium-ion battery with Express Charge
• 9-cell (87 WHr) Lithium-ion battery
Dimensions:
4-cell / 6-cell:
Depth 48.08 mm (1.90 inches)
Height 20.00 mm (0.79 inches)
Width 208.00 mm (8.18 inches)
9-cell:
Depth 71.79 mm (2.83 inches)
Height 20.00 mm (0.79 inches)
Width 214.00 mm (8.43 inches)
Weight:
4-cell 240.00 g (0.53 lb)
6-cell 344.73 g (0.76 lb)
9-cell 508.02 g (1.12 lb)
Voltage:
4-cell 14.80 VDC
6-cell / 9-cell 11.10 VDC
Temperature range:
Operating 0 °C to 35 °C (32 °F to 95 °F)
Non-Operating –40 °C to 65 °C (–40 °F to 149 °F)
Coin-cell battery 3 V CR2032 lithium coin cell
Table 27. AC Adapter
Feature Specification
Type 65 W STD and 65 W BFR/PVC free d90 W adapter
Input voltage 100 VAC to 240 VAC 100 VAC to 240 VAC
Input current (maximum) 1.50 A 1.60 A
Input frequency 50 Hz to 60 Hz 50 Hz to 60 Hz
81Feature Specification
Output power 65 W 90 W
Output current 3.34 A (continuous) 4.62 A (continuous)
Rated output voltage 19.5 +/– 1.0 VDC 19.5 +/– 1.0 VDC
Temperature range:
Operating 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Non-Operating –40 °C to 70 °C (–40 °F to 158 °F) –40 °C to 70 °C (–40 °F to 158 °F)
Table 28. Physical
Feature Latitude E6430 Latitude E6530 Latitude E6430 ATG
Height 26.90 mm to 32.40 mm (1.06
inches to 1.27 inches)
28.40 mm to 34.20 mm (1.11
inches to 1.35 inches)
29.50 mm to 37.70 mm (1.16
inches to 1.48 inches)
Width 352.00 mm (13.86 inches) 384.00 mm (15.12 inches) 359.20 mm (14.14 inches) with
port cover
Depth 241.00 mm (9.49 inches) 258.00 mm (10.16 inches) 247.40 mm (9.74 inches) with
port cover
Weight 2.02 kg (4.45 lb) 2.47 kg (5.44 lb) 2.74 kg (6.04 lb)
Table 29. Environmental
Feature Specification
Temperature:
Operating 0 °C to 35 °C (32 °F to 95 °F)
Storage –40 °C to 65 °C (–40 °F to 149 °F)
Relative humidity (maximum):
Operating 10 % to 90 % (non condensing)
Storage 5 % to 95 % (non condensing)
Altitude (maximum):
Operating –15.24 m to 3048 m (–50 ft to 10,000 ft)
Non-Operating –15.24 m to 10,668 m (–50 ft to 35,000 ft)
Airborne contaminant level G1 as defined by ISA-71.04–1985
828
Contacting Dell
To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or customer service issues:
1. Visit support.dell.com.
2. Verify your country or region in the Choose a Country/Region drop-down menu at the bottom of the page.
3. Click Contact Us on the left side of the page.
4. Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need.
5. Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you.
83
Dell Latitude E6530
Manuel du propriétaire
Modèle réglementaire: P19F
Type réglementaire: P19F001Remarques, précautions et avertissements
REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser
l'ordinateur.
PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique
comment éviter le problème.
AVERTISSEMENT : Un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle
ou de mort.
© 2012 Dell Inc.
Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo DELL logo, Dell Precision™, Precision ON™, ExpressCharge™, Latitude™,
Latitude ON™, OptiPlex™, Vostro™ et Wi-Fi Catcher™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. Intel®, Pentium®, Xeon®, Core™, Atom™, Centrino®
et Celeron® sont des marques ou des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. AMD® est une
marque déposée et AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™, AMD Sempron™, AMD Athlon™, ATI Radeon™ et ATI FirePro™ sont des marques
d'Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft®, Windows®, MS-DOS®, Windows Vista®, le bouton Démarrer Windows Vista et
Office Outlook® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays.
Blu-ray Disc™ est une marque de la Blu-ray Disc Association (BDA) et est sous licence pour une utilisation sur des disques et des
lecteurs. La marque Bluetooth® est une marque déposée et appartient à Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. et toute utilisation d'une telle marque par
Dell Inc. se fait dans le cadre d'une licence. Wi-Fi® est une marque déposée de Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance, Inc.
2012 - 06
Rev. A00Table des matières
Remarques, précautions et avertissements..............................................................................2
Chapitre 1: Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur........................................................7
Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur.........................................................................................................................7
Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur.............................................................................................................................8
Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.................................................................................................8
Chapitre 2: Retrait et installation des composants.................................................................11
Outils recommandés...............................................................................................................................................11
Retrait de la carte SD (Secure Digital)...................................................................................................................11
Installation de la carte SD (Secure Digital)............................................................................................................11
Retrait de la carte ExpressCard..............................................................................................................................12
Installation de la carte ExpressCard.......................................................................................................................12
Dépose de la batterie..............................................................................................................................................12
Pose de la batterie..................................................................................................................................................13
Retrait de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module)............................................................................................13
Installation de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module).....................................................................................13
Dépose du cache de base......................................................................................................................................13
Pose du cache de base..........................................................................................................................................14
Retrait du cadre du clavier.....................................................................................................................................14
Installation du cadre du clavier..............................................................................................................................15
Dépose du clavier...................................................................................................................................................15
Pose du clavier.......................................................................................................................................................17
Dépose du disque dur.............................................................................................................................................17
Pose du disque dur.................................................................................................................................................18
Dépose du lecteur optique.....................................................................................................................................19
Pose du lecteur optique..........................................................................................................................................20
Dépose de la mémoire............................................................................................................................................21
Pose de la mémoire................................................................................................................................................21
Dépose du processeur............................................................................................................................................22
Pose du processeur................................................................................................................................................22
Dépose de la carte réseau sans fil WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network)...........................................................22
Pose de la carte de réseau sans fil WLAN.............................................................................................................23
Dépose du dissipateur de chaleur..........................................................................................................................24
Pose du dissipateur de chaleur..............................................................................................................................24
Retrait de la carte Bluetooth...................................................................................................................................25
Installation de la carte Bluetooth...........................................................................................................................26Retrait de la carte modem......................................................................................................................................26
Installation de la carte modem...............................................................................................................................27
Dépose des haut-parleurs......................................................................................................................................28
Pose des haut-parleurs..........................................................................................................................................29
Dépose de la pile bouton........................................................................................................................................29
Pose de la pile bouton............................................................................................................................................30
Retrait du bâti de la carte ExpressCard..................................................................................................................30
Installation du bâti de la carte ExpressCard...........................................................................................................31
Retrait du port du connecteur d'alimentation.........................................................................................................31
Installation du port du connecteur d'alimentation.................................................................................................32
Retrait de la carte LED de l'alimentation................................................................................................................32
Installation de la carte LED de l'alimentation.........................................................................................................33
Retrait de la carte d'entrées/sorties (E/S)..............................................................................................................34
Installation de la carte d'entrées/sorties (E/S).......................................................................................................34
Retrait de la plaque de support du disque dur........................................................................................................35
Installation de la plaque de support du disque dur................................................................................................36
Dépose du repose-mains........................................................................................................................................36
Pose du repose-mains............................................................................................................................................38
Retrait de la carte du commutateur WLAN............................................................................................................38
Installation de la carte de du commutateur WiFi...................................................................................................39
Dépose de la carte système...................................................................................................................................39
Pose de la carte système.......................................................................................................................................43
Retrait du connecteur du modem...........................................................................................................................43
Installation du connecteur du modem....................................................................................................................45
Dépose de l'ensemble écran..................................................................................................................................45
Pose de l'ensemble écran......................................................................................................................................47
Dépose du cadre d'écran.......................................................................................................................................48
Pose du cache de l'écran.......................................................................................................................................49
Dépose du panneau d'écran..................................................................................................................................49
Pose du panneau d'écran.......................................................................................................................................50
Dépose de l'ensemble écran..................................................................................................................................50
Pose de l'ensemble écran......................................................................................................................................52
Retrait des capuchons de charnière d'écran.........................................................................................................53
Installation des capuchons de charnière d'écran..................................................................................................54
Retrait des charnières d'écran...............................................................................................................................54
Installation des charnières d'écran........................................................................................................................55
Dépose de la caméra..............................................................................................................................................56
Pose de la caméra..................................................................................................................................................57
Retrait du câble LVDS et de caméra.......................................................................................................................57
Installation du câble LVDS et de caméra...............................................................................................................58
Chapitre 3: Informations complémentaires..............................................................................59Informations du port d'accueil................................................................................................................................59
Chapitre 4: Configuration du système.......................................................................................61
Séquence de démarrage........................................................................................................................................61
Touches de navigation............................................................................................................................................61
Options du programme de configuration du système............................................................................................62
Mise à jour du BIOS ...............................................................................................................................................71
Mots de passe du système et de configuration.....................................................................................................71
Définition d'un mot de passe système et d'un mot de passe de configuration...............................................72
Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration..........................................72
Chapitre 5: Diagnostics...............................................................................................................75
Diagnostisc ePSA (Enhanced Pre-Boot System Assessment)...............................................................................75
Chapitre 6: Dépannage de l'ordinateur....................................................................................77
Voyants d'état de l'appareil....................................................................................................................................77
Voyants d'état de la batterie...................................................................................................................................78
Chapitre 7: Caractéristiques techniques..................................................................................79
Chapitre 8: Contacter Dell ..........................................................................................................8761
Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur
Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur
Suivez les recommandations de sécurité ci-dessous pour protéger votre ordinateur et vos données personnelles de
toute détérioration. Sauf indication contraire, chaque procédure mentionnée dans ce document suppose que les
conditions suivantes sont réunies :
• Vous avez exécuté les étapes de la section Intervention sur votre ordinateur.
• Vous avez pris connaissance des informations de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur.
• Un composant peut être remplacé ou, si acheté séparément, installé en exécutant la procédure de retrait dans
l'ordre inverse.
AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur, lisez les informations de sécurité fournies avec
l'ordinateur. D'autres informations sur les meilleures pratiques de sécurité sont disponibles sur la page d'accueil
Regulatory Compliance (Conformité réglementaire) accessible à l'adresse www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance
PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance
agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de
votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et
d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre
garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit.
PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la terre à l'aide d'un bracelet
antistatique ou en touchant une surface métallique non peinte, par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière
de l'ordinateur.
PRÉCAUTION : Manipulez avec précaution les composants et les cartes. Ne touchez pas les composants ni les
contacts des cartes. Saisissez les cartes par les bords ou par le support de montage métallique. Saisissez les
composants, processeur par exemple, par les bords et non par les broches.
PRÉCAUTION : Lorsque vous déconnectez un câble, tirez sur le connecteur ou sa languette, mais pas sur le câble
lui-même. Certains câbles sont dotés de connecteurs avec dispositif de verrouillage. Si vous déconnectez un câble
de ce type, appuyez d'abord sur le verrou. Lorsque vous démontez les connecteurs, maintenez-les alignés
uniformément pour éviter de tordre les broches. Enfin, avant de connecter un câble, vérifiez que les deux
connecteurs sont correctement orientés et alignés.
REMARQUE : La couleur de votre ordinateur et de certains composants peut différer de celle de l'ordinateur et des
composants illustrés dans ce document.
Pour ne pas endommager l'ordinateur, procédez comme suit avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur.
1. Assurez-vous que la surface de travail est plane et propre afin d'éviter de rayer le capot de l'ordinateur.
2. Mettez l'ordinateur hors tension (voir la section Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur).
3. Si l'ordinateur est connecté à une station d'accueil, telle qu'un périphérique d'accueil ou une extension de batterie
en option, déconnectez-le.
7PRÉCAUTION : Pour retirer un câble réseau, déconnectez-le d'abord de l'ordinateur, puis du périphérique
réseau.
4. Déconnectez tous les câbles externes du système.
5. Débranchez du secteur l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques qui y sont connectés.
6. Fermez l'écran et retournez l'ordinateur sur une surface plane.
REMARQUE : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie principale avant de
dépanner l'ordinateur.
7. Retirez la batterie principale.
8. Remettez l'ordinateur à l'endroit.
9. Ouvrez l'écran.
10. Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour raccorder la carte système à la terre.
PRÉCAUTION : Pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours l'ordinateur de la prise
électrique avant d'ouvrir l'écran.
PRÉCAUTION : Avant de toucher un élément dans l'ordinateur, raccordez-vous à la terre en touchant une
surface métallique non peinte, telle que le métal à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Pendant l'intervention, touchez
régulièrement une surface métallique non peinte pour éliminer l'électricité statique qui pourrait endommager
les composants.
11. Retirez les ExpressCard ou cartes à puce installées des logements appropriés.
Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur
PRÉCAUTION : Pour ne pas perdre des données, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les
programmes ouverts avant de mettre hors tension l'ordinateur.
1. Arrêtez le système d'exploitation :
– Dans Windows 7:
Cliquez sur Démarrer , puis cliquez sur Arrêter.
– Dans Windows Vista :
Cliquez sur Démarrer , puis sur la flèche dans l'angle inférieur gauche du menu Démarrer, comme
indiqué ci-dessous, puis sur Arrêter.
– Dans Windows XP:
Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Arrêter l'ordinateur → Éteindre . L'ordinateur s'éteint à la fin de la procédure
d'arrêt du système d'exploitation.
2. Vérifiez que l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques connectés sont hors tension. Si l'ordinateur et les périphériques
connectés n'ont pas été mis hors tension automatiquement lorsque vous avez arrêté le système d'exploitation,
appuyez sur le bouton Marche/Arrêt et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant quatre secondes environ pour les mettre
hors tension.
Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur
Une fois les procédures de réinstallation terminées, n'oubliez pas de brancher les périphériques externes, cartes,
câbles, etc. avant de mettre l'ordinateur sous tension.
8PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter d'endommager l'ordinateur, utilisez uniquement la batterie conçue pour cet ordinateur
Dell spécifique. N'employez pas de batteries conçues pour d'autres ordinateurs Dell.
1. Branchez les périphériques externes, par exemple réplicateur de port, extension de batterie ou périphérique
d'accueil, et remettez en place les cartes comme l'ExpressCard, le cas échéant.
2. Branchez les câbles téléphoniques ou de réseau sur l'ordinateur.
PRÉCAUTION : Pour connecter un câble réseau, branchez-le d'abord le périphérique du réseau et sur
l'ordinateur.
3. Réinstallez la batterie.
4. Branchez l'ordinateur et tous ses périphériques sur leur prise secteur.
5. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension.
9102
Retrait et installation des composants
Cette section fournit des informations détaillées sur le retrait ou l'installation des composants de l'ordinateur.
Outils recommandés
Les procédures dans ce document peuvent nécessiter les outils suivants :
• petit tournevis à tête plate
• tournevis cruciforme
• petite pointe en plastique
Retrait de la carte SD (Secure Digital)
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Appuyez sur la carte SD pour l'extraire de l'ordinateur.
3. Sortez la carte SD de l'ordinateur.
Installation de la carte SD (Secure Digital)
1. Faites glisser la carte SD dans son logement jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic.
2. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
11Retrait de la carte ExpressCard
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Appuyer sur la carte ExpressCard pour la dégager de l'ordinateur.
3. Faites glisser la carte ExpressCard hors de l'ordinateur.
Installation de la carte ExpressCard
1. Faites glisser la carte ExpressCard dans son emplacement jusqu’à ce que vous l'entendiez s'enclencher.
2. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Dépose de la batterie
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Faites glisser les loquets pour déverrouiller la batterie et retourner la batterie de l'ordinateur.
12Pose de la batterie
1. Faites glisser la batterie dans son logement jusqu’à ce que vous l'entendiez s'enclencher.
2. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module)
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez la batterie.
3. Retirez la carte SIM de l'ordinateur.
Installation de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module)
1. Faites glisser la carte SIM pour l'insérer dans son logement.
2. Posez la batterie.
3. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Dépose du cache de base
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les vis de fixation du cache de fond à l'ordinateur.
133. Soulevez le cache de fond pour le retirer de l'ordinateur.
Pose du cache de base
1. Placez le cache de fond en alignant les orifices des vis sur l'ordinateur.
2. Serrez les vis de fixation du cache de fond à l'ordinateur.
3. Posez la batterie.
4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait du cadre du clavier
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez la batterie.
3. Munissez-vous d'un objet en plastique et sous le cadre du clavier écartez le cadre pour le libérer de l'ordinateur.
4. Ecartez le cadre du clavier des bords et du fond.
5. Soulevez le cadre pour le retirer.
14Installation du cadre du clavier
1. Alignez le cadre du clavier sur son compartiment.
2. Appuyez sur les côtés du cadre du clavier pour l'installer.
3. Posez la batterie.
4. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Dépose du clavier
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) l'habillage du clavier
3. Retirez les vis de fixation du clavier à l'ordinateur.
4. Retirez les vis qui fixent le clavier à l'ensemble de repose-mains.
5. Soulevez et faire pivoter le clavier pour accéder au câble du clavier.
156. Débranchez de la carte système le câble du clavier.
7. Retirez le clavier de l'ordinateur.
8. Retirez la bande adhésive fixant le connecteur du clavier.
9. Retirez le câble du clavier de ce dernier.
16Pose du clavier
1. Connectez le câble du clavier et fixez-le au clavier avec la bande.
2. Connectez le câble du clavier à la carte système.
3. Faites glisser le clavier dans son compartiment et veuillez à ce qu'il s'enclenche.
4. Serrez les vis de fixation du clavier au repose-mains.
5. Retournez l'ordinateur et serrez les vis de fixation du clavier.
6. Posez :
a) l'habillage du clavier
b) la batterie
7. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Dépose du disque dur
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez la batterie.
3. Déposez les vis de fixation du disque dur à l'ordinateur.
4. Sortez le disque dur de l'ordinateur en le faisant glisser.
175. Retirez la vise de fixation du chariot du disque dur au disque dur.
6. Retirez le chariot du disque dur du disque dur.
7. Retirez l'isolation du disque dur.
Pose du disque dur
1. Installez l'isolation du disque dur.
2. Fixez le chariot du disque dur au disque dur.
183. Serrez les vis de fixation du chariot du disque dur au disque dur.
4. Faites glisser le disque dur dans l'ordinateur.
5. Serrez les vis de fixation du disque dur à l'ordinateur.
6. Posez la batterie.
7. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Dépose du lecteur optique
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez la batterie.
3. Appuyez sur le loquet du lecteur optique pour libérer le lecteur optique de l'ordinateur.
4. Sortez le lecteur optique de l'ordinateur.
5. Retirez la vis de fixation du loquet du lecteur optique.
6. Poussez le loquet du lecteur optique vers l'avant puis retirez-le de l'ensemble lecteur optique.
197. Retirez les vis de fixation du loquet du lecteur optique de l'ensemble lecteur optique.
8. Retirez le support du loquet du lecteur optique.
9. Retirez le cadre du lecteur optique.
Pose du lecteur optique
1. Fixez le cadre du lecteur optique au lecteur optique.
2. Installez le support du loquet au lecteur optique.
203. Serrez les vis pour fixer le support de loquet du lecteur optique à l'ensemble lecteur optique.
4. Fixez le loquet du lecteur optique à l'ensemble lecteur optique.
5. Serrez la vis de fixation du loquet du lecteur optique.
6. Faites glisser le lecteur optique dans son logement.
7. Faites pivoter l'ordinateur et poussez le loquet d'éjection pour fixer le lecteur optique.
8. Posez la batterie.
9. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Dépose de la mémoire
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
3. Dégagez les clips de fixation du module de mémoire jusqu'à ce qu'ils s'éjectent.
4. Retirez le module de mémoire de son connecteur situé sur la carte système.
5. Répétez les étapes 2 et 3 pour retirer le deuxième module.
Pose de la mémoire
1. Insérez le module de mémoire dans son connecteur.
2. Appuyez sur les clips de fixation pour fixer le module de mémoire à la carte système.
3. Posez :
a) le cache de base
b) la batterie
4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
21Dépose du processeur
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
c) le dissipateur de chaleur
3. Faites pivoter le verrou de la came du processeur dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d'une montre.
4. Retirez le processeur de l'ordinateur.
Pose du processeur
1. Alignez les encoches du processeur et du support puis insérez le processeur dans le support.
2. Tournez la verrou à came du processeur dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre.
3. Posez :
a) le dissipateur de chaleur
b) le cache de base
c) la batterie
4. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Dépose de la carte réseau sans fil WLAN (Wireless Local Area
Network)
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
22b) le cache de base
3. Débranchez les câbles d'antenne de la carte WLAN.
4. Retirer la vis de fixation de la carte WLAN à l'ordinateur.
5. Retirez la carte WLAN de son emplacement sur la carte système.
Pose de la carte de réseau sans fil WLAN
1. Insérez la carte WLAN dans son connecteur à 45 degrés dans son logement.
2. Branchez les câbles d'antenne sur leurs connecteurs respectifs marqués sur la carte WLAN.
3. Serrez la vis de fixation de la carte WLAN à l'ordinateur.
4. Posez :
a) le cache de base
b) la batterie
5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
23Dépose du dissipateur de chaleur
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
3. Débranchez le câble du dissipateur de chaleur.
4. Retirez les vis qui fixent le dissipateur de chaleur sur la carte système.
5. Retirez le dissipateur de chaleur de l'ordinateur.
Pose du dissipateur de chaleur
1. Faites glisser le dissipateur de chaleur vers sa position d'origine dans la carte système.
2. Serrez les vis qui fixent le dissipateur thermique à la carte système.
3. Connectez le câble du dissipateur de chaleur à la carte système.
4. Posez :
24a) le cache de base
b) la batterie
5. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait de la carte Bluetooth
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
3. Retirez la vis qui fixe la carte Bluetooth à l'ordinateur.
4. Débranchez le câble Bluetooth de la carte système.
5. Retirez la carte Bluetooth de l'ordinateur.
6. Débranchez le câble Bluetooth de la carte Bluetooth.
25Installation de la carte Bluetooth
1. Connectez le câble Bluetooth au module Bluetooth.
2. Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble Bluetooth à la carte système.
3. Placez la carte Bluetooth dans son emplacement dans l'ordinateur.
4. Serrez la vis de fixation de la carte Bluetooth à la carte système.
5. Posez :
a) le cache de base
b) la batterie
6. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait de la carte modem
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
3. Retirez la vis de fixation de la carte modem à l'ordinateur.
4. Soulevez la carte du modem pour libérer la patte du connecteur à l'arrière de la carte.
265. Déconnectez le câble du modem de la carte du modem.
6. Maintenez la carte du modem puis retirez-la de l'ordinateur.
Installation de la carte modem
1. Insérez la carte modem dans son logement
2. Installez la carte modem, pour vous assurer que la patte à l'arrière de la carte est enclenchée.
3. Branchez le câble du modem à la carte du modem.
4. Serrez la vis de fixation de la carte modem.
5. Posez :
a) le cache de base
b) la batterie
6. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
27Dépose des haut-parleurs
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
c) le disque dur
d) l'habillage du clavier
e) le clavier
f) l'ensemble écran
g) le repose-mains
h) la carte média (disponible uniquement pour les modèles E6430/E6430 ATG)
i) le bâti de la carte ExpressCard
j) la carte Bluetooth
k) la carte système
3. Retirez les vis de fixation des haut-parleurs à l'ordinateur.
4. Débranchez le câble modem du passage de câbles.
5. Retirez les haut-parleurs de l'ordinateur.
28Pose des haut-parleurs
1. Alignez les haut-parleurs dans leur position d'origine et connectez leurs câbles.
2. Serrez le vis de fixation des haut-parleurs.
3. Posez :
a) la carte système
b) la carte Bluetooth
c) le bâti de la carte ExpressCard
d) la carte média (disponible uniquement pour les modèles E6430/E6430 ATG)
e) le repose-mains
f) l'ensemble écran
g) le clavier
h) l'habillage du clavier
i) le disque dur
j) le cache de base
k) la batterie
4. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Dépose de la pile bouton
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
3. Déconnectez le câble de la pile bouton.
4. Soulevez la pile bouton puis retirez-la de l'ordinateur.
29Pose de la pile bouton
1. Placez la pile bouton dans son logement.
2. Branchez le câble de la pile bouton.
3. Posez :
a) le cache de base
b) la batterie
4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait du bâti de la carte ExpressCard
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
c) le disque dur
d) la carte Bluetooth
e) l'habillage du clavier
f) le clavier
g) l'ensemble écran
h) le repose-mains
3. Retirez les vis de fixation du bâti de la carte ExpressCard à l'ordinateur.
4. Retirez le bâti de la carte ExpressCard de l'ordinateur.
30Installation du bâti de la carte ExpressCard
1. Insérez le bâti de la carte ExpressCard dans son compartiment.
2. Serrez les vis de fixation du bâti de la carte ExpressCard sur l'ordinateur.
3. Posez :
a) le repose-mains
b) l'ensemble écran
c) le clavier
d) l'habillage du clavier
e) la carte Bluetooth
f) le disque dur
g) le cache de base
h) la batterie
4. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait du port du connecteur d'alimentation
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
3. Débranchez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation de la carte système.
4. Retirez la vis de fixation du support du connecteur d'alimentation de l'ordinateur.
5. Retirez le support du connecteur d'alimentation de l'ordinateur.
316. Retirez du câble du connecteur d'alimentation de l'ordinateur.
Installation du port du connecteur d'alimentation
1. Connectez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation à l'ordinateur.
2. Installez le support du connecteur d'alimentation dans son emplacement dans l'ordinateur.
3. Serrez la vis de fixation du support du connecteur d'alimentation à l'ordinateur.
4. Branchez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation sur la carte système.
5. Posez :
a) le cache de base
b) la batterie
6. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait de la carte LED de l'alimentation
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
c) le disque dur
d) le module Bluetooth
e) l'habillage du clavier
f) le clavier
g) l'ensemble écran
h) le cadre d'écran
i) le panneau d'écran
3. Débranchez le câble de la carte LED d'alimentation.
324. Retrait de la vis de fixation de la carte LED pour l'ensemble d'écran.
5. Retirez la carte LED d'alimentation de l'ensemble écran.
Installation de la carte LED de l'alimentation
1. Placez la plaque de la carte LED dans son compartiment dans l'ensemble écran.
2. Serrez la vis pour fixer la carte LED à l'ensemble écran.
3. Branchez le câble de la carte LED à l'ensemble écran.
4. Posez :
a) le panneau d'écran
b) le cadre d'écran
c) l'ensemble écran
d) le clavier
e) l'habillage du clavier
f) le module Bluetooth
g) le disque dur
h) le cache de base
i) la batterie
335. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait de la carte d'entrées/sorties (E/S)
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
c) le disque dur
d) le lecteur optique
e) la carte Bluetooth
f) l'habillage du clavier
g) le clavier
h) l'ensemble écran
i) le repose-mains
j) la carte média (disponible uniquement pour les modèles E6430/E6430 ATG)
k) le bâti de la carte ExpressCard
l) la carte système
3. Retirez la vis de fixation de la carte E/S à l'ordinateur.
4. Retirez la carte d'E/S de l'ordinateur.
Installation de la carte d'entrées/sorties (E/S)
1. Placez la carte d'E/S dans son compartiment.
2. Serrez les vis de fixation de la carte d'E/S.
3. Posez :
a) la carte système
b) le bâti de la carte ExpressCard
34c) la carte média (disponible uniquement pour les modèles E6430/E6430 ATG)
d) le repose-mains
e) l'ensemble écran
f) le clavier
g) l'habillage du clavier
h) la carte Bluetooth
i) le disque dur
j) le lecteur optique
k) le cache de base
l) la batterie
4. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait de la plaque de support du disque dur
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
c) le disque dur
d) le lecteur optique
e) l'habillage du clavier
f) le clavier
g) l'ensemble écran
h) le repose-mains
3. Retirez la vis de fixation de la plaque du support du disque dur à l'ordinateur.
4. Soulevez la plaque du support de disque dur de l'ordinateur.
35Installation de la plaque de support du disque dur
1. Mettez en place la plaque du support du disque dur dans son logement.
2. Serrez la vis de fixation de la plaque du support de disque dur à l'ordinateur.
3. Posez :
a) le repose-mains
b) l'ensemble écran
c) le clavier
d) l'habillage du clavier
e) le lecteur optique
f) le disque dur
g) le cache de base
h) la batterie
4. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Dépose du repose-mains
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
c) le disque dur
d) la carte Bluetooth
e) l'habillage du clavier
f) le clavier
3. Retirez les vis qui fixent l'ensemble du repose-mains à la base de l'ordinateur.
4. Retournez l'ordinateur et retirez les vis qui fixent l'ensemble repose-mains à l'ordinateur.
365. Débranchez le câble de la carte média (uniquement pour les modèles E6430/E6430 ATG).
6. Débranchez le câble du pavé tactile.
7. Débranchez le câble du lecteur d'empreintes digitales.
8. Soulevez et retirez le repose-mains de l'ordinateur.
37Pose du repose-mains
1. Alignez l'ensemble repose-mains dans sa position d'origine dans l'ordinateur et installez-le.
2. Raccorder les câbles suivants :
a) la carte média (disponible uniquement pour les modèles E6430/E6430 ATG)
b) pavé tactile
c) lecteur d'empreintes digitales
3. Serrez les vis de fixation du repose-mains sur l'ordinateur.
4. Posez :
a) le clavier
b) l'habillage du clavier
c) le module Bluetooth
d) le disque dur
e) le cache de base
f) la batterie
5. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait de la carte du commutateur WLAN
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
c) le disque dur
d) le lecteur optique
e) l'habillage du clavier
f) le clavier
g) le repose-mains
3. Débranchez le câble de la carte du commutateur WiFi de la carte système.
4. Retirez la vis qui fixe la carte du commutateur WiFi.
385. Retirez la bande adhésive de l'arrière de la carte du commutateur WiFi puis retirez la carte WiFi.
Installation de la carte de du commutateur WiFi
1. Collez la bande adhésive sur l'arrière de la carte du commutateur WiFi et placez la carte dans son logement.
2. Serrez la vis de fixation de la carte du commutateur WiFi.
3. Branchez le câble de la carte du commutateur WiFi à la carte système.
4. Posez :
a) le repose-mains
b) le clavier
c) l'habillage du clavier
d) le lecteur optique
e) le disque dur
f) le cache de base
g) la batterie
5. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Dépose de la carte système
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
c) le disque dur
d) le lecteur optique
e) la carte Bluetooth
f) l'habillage du clavier
g) le clavier
39h) la carte réseau sans fil WLAN
i) la carte modem
j) le dissipateur de chaleur
k) le processeur
l) le repose-mains
m) le bâti de la carte ExpressCard
3. Débranchez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation du côté inférieur de la carte système.
4. Retirez les vis qui fixent le support gauche.
5. Retirez le support LVDS de l'ordinateur.
6. Débranchez le câble LVDS de la carte système.
407. Retirez les câbles d'antenne du chemin d'acheminement.
8. Déconnectez le câble de la pile bouton.
9. Débranchez le câble du haut-parleur du dessus de la carte système.
10. Débranchez le câble de la carte WiFi.
4111. Retirez les vis de fixation de la carte système
12. Soulevez le bord de la carte système de 45 degrés.
13. Libérez la carte système des connecteurs de port.
14. Soulevez la carte système de l'ordinateur.
42Pose de la carte système
1. Mettez en place la carte système sur le châssis.
2. Serrez les vis qui fixent la carte système à l'ordinateur.
3. Connecter les câbles suivants à la carte système :
a) la carte du commutateur WiFi
b) le haut-parleur
c) la pile bouton
d) LVDS
4. Faites passer les câbles d'antenne dans les rainures d'acheminement.
5. Installez le support LVDS en place dans l'ordinateur.
6. Serrez les vis de fixation du support LVDS sur l'ordinateur.
7. Branchez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation à la carte système.
8. Posez :
a) le bâti de la carte ExpressCard
b) le repose-mains
c) le processeur
d) le dissipateur de chaleur
e) la carte modem
f) la carte réseau sans fil WLAN
g) le clavier
h) l'habillage du clavier
i) la carte Bluetooth
j) le lecteur optique
k) le disque dur
l) le cache de base
m) la batterie
9. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait du connecteur du modem
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
c) le disque dur
d) la carte Bluetooth
43e) l'habillage du clavier
f) le clavier
g) l'ensemble écran
h) le repose-mains
i) la carte média (disponible uniquement pour les modèles E6430/E6430 ATG)
j) le bâti de la carte ExpressCard
k) la carte système
3. Débranchez le câble de la carte modem de cette dernière.
4. Retirez le câble du modem du chemin d'acheminement.
5. Retirez la vis de fixation du support du connecteur du modem à l'ordinateur.
6. Retirez le support du connecteur du modem de l'ordinateur.
447. Retirez le connecteur du modem de l'ordinateur.
Installation du connecteur du modem
1. Placez le connecteur du modem dans son compartiment.
2. Placez le support du connecteur du modem dans le connecteur.
3. Serrez la vis de fixation du support du connecteur du modem.
4. Acheminez le câble du connecteur du modem.
5. Connectez le câble du connecteur du modem à la carte du modem.
6. Posez :
a) la carte système
b) le bâti de la carte ExpressCard
c) la carte média (disponible uniquement pour les modèles E6430/E6430 ATG)
d) le repose-mains
e) l'ensemble écran
f) le clavier
g) l'habillage du clavier
h) la carte Bluetooth
i) le disque dur
j) le cache de base
k) la batterie
7. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Dépose de l'ensemble écran
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
45b) le cache de base
3. Retirez les vis qui fixent le support LVDS à la carte système.
4. Retirez le support LVDS de la carte système.
5. Débrancher le câble LVDS.
6. Débranchez le câble de la caméra de la carte système.
7. Retirez le câble LVDS du chemin de routage.
468. Retirez les vis pour libérer l'ensemble écran des deux côtés.
9. Soulevez l'ensemble écran et tirez les câbles LVDS et d'antenne à travers l'ouverture de l'ordinateur.
10. Retirer l'ensemble d'écran de l'ordinateur.
Pose de l'ensemble écran
1. Mettez en place l'ensemble écran dans l'ordinateur.
2. Insérez les câbles LVDS et d'antenne sans fil à travers les orifices de la base du châssis et branchez-les.
473. Serrez les vis situées sur les deux coins pour fixer l'ensemble écran.
4. Acheminez les câbles d'antenne et LVDS à travers le chemin d'acheminement.
5. Branchez les câbles suivants à l'ordinateur :
a) LVDS
b) caméra
6. Connectez le support LVDS en place dans l'ordinateur.
7. Serrez la vis pour fixer le support à l'ordinateur.
8. Posez :
a) le cache de base
b) la batterie
9. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Dépose du cadre d'écran
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez la batterie.
3. Ecartez doucement le bord inférieur du cache d'écran.
4. Ecartez les bords gauche, droit et haut du cadre de l'écran.
5. Retirez le cadre de l'écran de l'ensemble écran.
48Pose du cache de l'écran
1. Placez le cache d'écran sur le bloc écran.
2. En partant de l'angle supérieur, appuyez sur tout le cadre d'écran jusqu’à ce qu'il s'enclenche dans l'ensemble
écran.
3. Appuyez sur les bord gauche et droit du cache d'écran.
4. Posez la batterie.
5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Dépose du panneau d'écran
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) l'ensemble écran
c) le cadre d'écran
3. Retirez les vis qui fixent le panneau d'écran à l'ensemble écran.
4. Retournez le panneau d'écran.
495. Retirez l'adhésif du connecteur du câble LVDS et débranchez le câble LVDS de l'écran.
6. Retirez le panneau de l'écran de l'ensemble écran.
Pose du panneau d'écran
1. Branchez le câble LVDS et collez la bande adhésive du câble LVDS.
2. Retournez l'écran et placez-le dans l'ensemble de l'écran.
3. Serrez les vis pour fixer le panneau d'écran à l'ensemble de l'écran.
4. Posez :
a) le cadre d'écran
b) l'ensemble écran
c) la batterie
5. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Dépose de l'ensemble écran
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
50a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
3. Retirez les vis qui fixent le support LVDS à la carte système.
4. Retirez le support LVDS de la carte système.
5. Débrancher le câble LVDS.
6. Débranchez le câble de la caméra de la carte système.
7. Retirez le câble LVDS du chemin de routage.
518. Retirez les vis pour libérer l'ensemble écran des deux côtés.
9. Soulevez l'ensemble écran et tirez les câbles LVDS et d'antenne à travers l'ouverture de l'ordinateur.
10. Retirer l'ensemble d'écran de l'ordinateur.
Pose de l'ensemble écran
1. Mettez en place l'ensemble écran dans l'ordinateur.
2. Insérez les câbles LVDS et d'antenne sans fil à travers les orifices de la base du châssis et branchez-les.
523. Serrez les vis situées sur les deux coins pour fixer l'ensemble écran.
4. Acheminez les câbles d'antenne et LVDS à travers le chemin d'acheminement.
5. Branchez les câbles suivants à l'ordinateur :
a) LVDS
b) caméra
6. Connectez le support LVDS en place dans l'ordinateur.
7. Serrez la vis pour fixer le support à l'ordinateur.
8. Posez :
a) le cache de base
b) la batterie
9. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait des capuchons de charnière d'écran
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
c) le disque dur
d) la carte Bluetooth
e) l'habillage du clavier
f) le clavier
g) l'ensemble écran
3. Faites pivoter les charnières gauche et droite vers le haut, en position verticale.
4. Ecartez le bord du capuchon de la charnière et retirez les capuchons de l'ensemble écran.
53Installation des capuchons de charnière d'écran
1. Faites glisser le capuchon de charnière gauche dans le panneau d'écran.
2. Faites pivoter la charnière vers le bas pour fixer le capuchon de la charnière dans le panneau d'écran.
3. Répétez les étapes 1 et 2 pour le capuchon de la charnière droit.
4. Posez :
a) l'ensemble écran
b) le clavier
c) l'habillage du clavier
d) la carte Bluetooth
e) le disque dur
f) le cache de base
g) la batterie
5. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait des charnières d'écran
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
c) le disque dur
d) la carte Bluetooth
e) l'habillage du clavier
f) le clavier
g) l'ensemble écran
h) le cadre d'écran
i) le panneau d'écran
3. Retirez les vis de fixation des plaques de la charnière de l'écran sur l'ensemble écran.
4. Retirez les plaques de charnière d'écran.
545. Retirez les vis qui fixent les charnières de l'écran à l'ensemble d'écran.
6. Retirez les charnières d'écran de l'ensemble écran.
Installation des charnières d'écran
1. Placez les deux charnières d'écran sur le panneau.
2. Serrez les vis pour fixer les charnières d'écran à l'ensemble de l'écran.
3. Placez les plaques de charnière d'écran dans les charnières.
4. Serrez les vis pour fixer les plaques de charnière d'écran à l'ensemble de l'écran.
5. Posez :
a) le panneau d'écran
b) le cadre d'écran
c) l'ensemble écran
d) le clavier
e) l'habillage du clavier
f) la carte Bluetooth
g) le disque dur
h) le cache de base
55i) la batterie
6. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Dépose de la caméra
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) l'ensemble écran
c) le cadre d'écran
d) le panneau d'écran
3. Débranchez le câble LVDS et de caméra de la caméra.
4. Retirez la vis de fixation de la caméra sur l'ensemble écran.
5. Retirez la caméra de l'ensemble de l'écran.
56Pose de la caméra
1. Installez la caméra dans son logement sur le panneau de l'écran.
2. Serrez la vis pour fixer la caméra à l'ensemble d'écran.
3. Connectez le câble LVDS et de caméra à la caméra.
4. Posez :
a) le panneau d'écran
b) le cadre d'écran
c) l'ensemble écran
d) la batterie
5. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait du câble LVDS et de caméra
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Déposez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de base
c) le disque dur
d) la carte Bluetooth
e) l'habillage du clavier
f) le clavier
g) l'ensemble écran
h) le cadre d'écran
i) le panneau d'écran
j) les charnières de l'écran
3. Débranchez le câble LVDS et de caméra de la caméra.
4. Retirez les parties adhésives qui fixent les câbles LVDS et de caméra à l'ensemble écran.
575. Retirez les câbles LVDS et de caméra de l'ensemble écran.
Installation du câble LVDS et de caméra
1. Acheminez les câbles LVDS et de caméra à l'ensemble écran.
2. Fixez l'adhésif pour fixer le câble.
3. Connectez le câble LVDS et de caméra à la caméra.
4. Posez :
a) les charnières de l'écran
b) le panneau d'écran
c) le cadre d'écran
d) l'ensemble écran
e) le clavier
f) l'habillage du clavier
g) la carte Bluetooth
h) le disque dur
i) le cache de base
j) la batterie
5. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
583
Informations complémentaires
Cette section fournit des informations sur les fonctions supplémentaires de l'ordinateur.
Informations du port d'accueil
Le port d'accueil est utilisé pour connecter l'ordinateur portable à une station d'accueil (en option).
1. Port d'accueil
59604
Configuration du système
La configuration du système permet de gérer le matériel de l'ordinateur et de définir les options du BIOS. Dans la
configuration du système, vous pouvez :
• Changer les paramètres NVRAM après avoir ajouté ou supprimé des matériels.
• Afficher la configuration matérielle du système
• Activer ou désactiver les périphériques intégrés
• Définir les seuils de performance et de gestion de l'alimentation
• Gérer la sécurité de l'ordinateur
Séquence de démarrage
La séquence de démarrage permet d'ignorer l'ordre des périphériques d'amorçage définis par la configuration du
système et de démarrer directement depuis un périphérique donné (lecteur optique ou disque dur, par exemple). Lors du
test à la mise sous tension (POST), lorsque le logo Dell s'affiche, vous pouvez :
• Accéder à la configuration du système en appuyant sur la touche
• Afficher le menu de démarrage à affichage unique en appuyant sur la touche
Ce menu contient les périphériques depuis lesquels vous pouvez démarrer, y compris l'option des diagnostics. Les
options du menu de démarrage sont les suivantes :
• Removable Drive (Unité amovible (si disponible))
• STXXXX Drive (Unité STXXXX)
REMARQUE : XXX correspond au numéro d'unité SATA.
• Optical Drive (Lecteur optique)
• Diagnostics
REMARQUE : Si vous choisissez Diagnostics, l'écran ePSA diagnostics (Diagnostics ePSA) s'affiche.
L'écran de séquence de démarrage affiche également l'option d'accès à l'écran System Setup (Configuration du
système).
Touches de navigation
Le tableau suivant répertorie les touches de navigation dans la configuration du système.
REMARQUE : Pour la plupart des options de configuration du système, les modifications que vous apportées sont
enregistrées, mais elles ne sont appliquées qu'au redémarrage de l'ordinateur.
61Tableau 1. Touches de navigation
Touches Navigation
Touche Haut Passe au champ précédent.
Touche Bas Passe au champ suivant.
Permet de sélectionner une valeur dans le champ sélectionné (si applicable) ou de suivre le lien
dans le champ.
Barre d'espacement Développe ou réduit une liste déroulante, si applicable.
Passe à la zone suivante active.
REMARQUE : Pour la navigateur graphique standard uniquement.
Passe à la page précédente tant que vous affichez l'écran principal. Si vous appuyez sur
dans l'écran principal, un message demande d'enregistrer les modifications non
enregistrées et le système redémarre.
Affiche le fichier d'aide de la configuration du système.
Options du programme de configuration du système
REMARQUE : Selon l'ordinateur et les périphériques installés, les éléments énumérés dans cette section peuvent
ne pas apparaître.
Tableau 2. Généralités
Option Description
System Information (Informations sur le système) Cette section énumère les principaux
éléments matériels de l'ordinateur.
• System Information (Informations sur
le système)
• Memory Information (Informations sur
la mémoire)
• Processor Information (Informations
sur le système)
• Device Information (Informations sur
les périphériques)
Battery Information (Informations sur la batterie) Affiche l'état de charge de la batterie.
Boot Sequence (Séquence d'amorçage) Vous permet de modifier l'ordre dans lequel
l'ordinateur tente de trouver un système
d'exploitation. Toutes les options ci-dessous
sont sélectionnées.
• Diskette Drive (Lecteur de disquette)
• Internal HDD (Disque sur interne)
• USB Storage Device (Périphérique de
stockage USB)
• CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive (Lecteur
CD/DVD/CD-RW)
• Onboard NIC (Carte réseau intégrée)
Vous pouvez également choisir l'option de
liste d'amorçage. Les options sont :
62Option Description
• Legacy (Default Setting) (Mode hérité
[Paramètre par défaut])
• UEFI
Date/Time (Date/heure) Vous permet de régler la date et l'heure.
Tableau 3. System Configuration (Configuration du système)
Option Description
Integrated NIC (Carte réseau intégrée) Permet de configurer le contrôleur réseau
intégré. Les options sont :
• Disabled (Désactivé)
• Enabled (Activée)
• Enabled w/PXE (Default Setting)
(Activé avec PXE [paramètre par
défaut])
Port parallèle Vous permet de définir et de régler le port
parallèle sur la station d'accueil en
fonctionnement. Vous pouvez régler le port
parallèle sur :
• Disabled (Désactivé)
• AT
• PS2
• ECP
Port série Identifie et définit les paramètres de port
série. Vous pouvez définir le port série comme
suit :
• Disabled (Désactivé)
• COM1 (Default Setting) (COM1
(paramètre par défaut))
• COM2
• COM3
• COM4
REMARQUE : Le système d'exploitation
peut allouer des ressources, même si le
paramètres est désactivé.
SATA Operation (Fonctionnement SATA) Permet de configurer le contrôleur de disque
dur SATA interne. Les options sont :
• Disabled (Désactivé)
• ATA
• AHCI
• RAID On (Default Setting) (RAID activé
[Paramètre par défaut])
63Option Description
REMARQUE : SATA est configuré pour
prendre en charge le mode RAID.
Drives (Lecteurs) Permet de configurer les lecteurs SATA
intégrés. Les options sont :
• SATA-0
• SATA-1
• SATA-4
• SATA-5
Paramètre par défaut : All drives are enabled
(Tous les lecteurs sont activés).
Smart Reporting (Rapports SMART) Ce champ indique si les erreurs de disques
durs intégrés sont signalées lors du
démarrage du système. Cette technologie
s'intègre dans la spécification SMART (Self
Monitoring Analysis and Reporting
Technology)
• Enable SMART Reporting (Activer les
rapports SMART) - Cette option est
désactivée par défaut.
USB Configuration (Configuration USB) Permet de définir la configuration USB. Les
options sont :
• Enable Boot Support (Activation
support d'amorçage)
• Activation port USB externe
Default Setting (Paramètre par défaut) : les
deux options sont activées.
USB PowerShare Vous permet de configurer le comportement
de la fonction USB PowerShare. L'option est,
par défaut, désactivée.
• Enable USB PowerShare (Activer USB
PowerShare)
Keyboard Illumination (Eclairage du clavier) Vous permet de choisir le mode de
fonctionnement de la fonction d'éclairage du
clavier. Ces options sont les suivantes :
• Disabled (Default Setting) (Désactivé
(Valeur par défaut))
• Level is 25% (Niveau de 25 %)
• Level is 50% (Niveau de 50 %)
• Niveau de 75%
• Niveau : 100 %
Stealth Mode Control (Commande du mode furtif) Vous permet de régler le mode qui éteint les
lumières et les sons de votre système. Par
défaut, cette option est désactivée.
64Option Description
• Enable Stealth Mode (Activer le mode
furtif)
Miscellaneous Devices (Périphériques divers) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver les
différents périphériques installés. Les options
sont les suivantes :
• Enable Internal Modem (Activer le
modem interne)
• Enable Microphone (Activer le
microphone)
• Enable eSATA Ports (Activer les ports
eSATA)
• Enable Hard Drive Free Fall Protection
(Activer la protection contre la chute
du disque dur)
• Enable Module Bay (Activer la baie du
module)
• Enable ExpressCard (Activer
ExpressCard)
• Enable Camera (Activer la caméra)
• Enable Media Card (Activer le lecteur
de carte)
• Disable Media Card (Désactiver le
lecteur de carte)
Paramètre par défaut : tous les périphériques
sont activés
Tableau 4. Vidéo
Option Description
LCD Brightness (Luminosité LCD) Vous permet de régler la luminosité du panneau lorsque le capteur ambiant est
réglé sur Off(Arrêt).
Optimus Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver la technologie NVIDIA Optimus.
• Enable Optimus (Activer Optimus)- Paramètre par défaut.
Tableau 5. Security (Sécurité)
Option Description
Intel TXT (LT-SX) Configuration
(Configuration Intel TXT (LT-SX))
Cette option est désactivée par défaut.
Admin Password (Mot de passe
d'administrateur)
Permet de définir, changer ou de supprimer le mot de passe administrateur
(admin).
REMARQUE : Vous devez définir le mot de passe de l'administrateur avant le
mot de passe du système ou du disque dur.
REMARQUE : Les modifications de mots de passe sont appliquées
immédiatement.
65Option Description
REMARQUE : La suppression du mot de passe de l'administrateur supprime
automatiquement le mot de passe du système et le mot de passe du disque
dur.
REMARQUE : Les modifications de mots de passe sont appliquées
immédiatement.
Default Setting: Not set (Paramètre par défaut : Non défini)
System Password (Mot de passe
du système)
Permet de définir, changer ou de supprimer le mot de passe administrateur.
REMARQUE : Les modifications de mots de passe sont appliquées
immédiatement.
Default Setting: Not set (Paramètre par défaut : Non défini)
Internal HDD-0 Password (Mot de
passe disque dur-0 interne)
Vous permet de définir, modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe de l'administrateur
Default Setting: Not set (Paramètre par défaut : Non défini)
Strong Password (Mot de passe
renforcé)
Permet d'appliquer l'option de toujours définir les mots de passe.
Default Setting: Enable Strong Password (Paramètre par défaut : Activer les mots
de passe complexes n'est pas sélectionné).
Password Configuration
(Configuration de mots de passe)
Vous pouvez définir la longueur du mot de passe. Min = 4 , Max = 32
Password Bypass (Ignorer le mot
de passe)
Permet d'activer ou de désactiver l'autorisation d'ignorer les mots de passe
système et HDD Interne lorsqu'ils sont définis. Les options sont :
• Disabled (Default Setting) (Désactivé (Paramètre par défaut))
• Reboot bypass (Ignoré redémarrage)
Password Change (Changement
de mot de passe)
Permet d'activer l'autorisation de désactivation des mots de passe Système et
Disque dur quand le mot de passe administrateur est défini.
Default Setting: Allow Non-Admin Password Changes (Paramètres par défaut :
Autoriser les modifications de mot de passe non admin) n'est pas sélectionné
Non-Admin Setup Changes
(Modifications de configuration
non-admin)
Vous permet de déterminer si les modifications de réglage des options sont
autorisées lorsque le mot de passe administrateur est défini. L'option est
désactivée.
• Permet les modifications du commutateur sans fil
TPM Security (Sécurité TPM) Permet d'activer TPM (Trusted Platform Module) au cours du POST.
Default Setting (Paramètre par défaut : L'option est désactivée.
CPU XD Support (Prise en charge
de CPU XD)
Permet d'activer le mode Execute Disable du processeur.
Défault Setting: Enable CPU XD Support (Paramètre par défaut : Activer le support
CPU XD)
Computrace Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le logiciel Computrace en option. Les options
sont :
• Deactivate (Defaut Setting) (Désactiver) (Paramètres par défaut)
• Disable (Désactiver)
• Activate (Activer)
66Option Description
REMARQUE : Les options Activate et Disable activent ou désactivent la
fonction de façon permanente et aucune modification ultérieure n'est
autorisée
CPU XD Support (Prise en charge
de CPU XD)
Permet d'activer le mode Execute Disable du processeur.
Défault Setting: Enable CPU XD Support (Paramètre par défaut : Activer le support
CPU XD)
OROM Keyboard Access (Accès
au clavier OROM)
Vous permet de définir l'accès pour entrer dans les écrans de configuration de
l'option ROM en utilisant des touches rapides lors du démarrage. Les options
sont :
• Enable (Activé [Paramètre par défaut])
• One Time Enable (Activation unique)
• Disable (Désactiver)
Admin Setup Lockout (Verrouillage
de la configuration admin)
Permet d'empêcher les utilisateurs d'entrer dans la configuration lorsqu'un mot
de passe Administrateur est défini.
Default Setting : Disabled (Paramètre par défaut : désactivé)
Tableau 6. Performances
Option Description
Multi Core Support (Prise en charge multicœur) Ce champ indique si le processus aura un ou
plusieurs coeurs activés. Certaines
applications seront plus performantes avec
des coeurs supplémentaires. Cette option est
activée par défaut. Permet d'activer ou de
désactiver le support multicoeurs pour le
processeur. Les options sont :
• All (Default Setting) (Tous (paramètre
par défaut))
• 1
• 2
Intel SpeedStep Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction
Intel SpeedStep.
Default Setting: Enable Intel SpeedStep
(Paramètre par défaut : Activer Intel
SpeedStep)
C States Control (Contrôle des états C) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver les états
supplémentaires de veille du processeur.
Default Setting: The options C states, C3, C6,
Enhanced C-states, and C7 options are
enabled (Paramètre par défaut : les options
des états C, C3, C6, états C améliorés, et C7
sont activées.)
Intel TurboBoost Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le mode
Intel TurboBoost du processeur.
67Option Description
Default Setting: Enable Intel TurboBoost
(Paramètre par défaut : Activer Intel
TurboBoost)
Hyper-Thread Control (Contrôle hyperthread) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction
HyperThreading dans le processeur.
Default Setting : Enabled (Paramètre par
défaut : Activé)
Tableau 7. Power Management (Gestion de l'alimentation)
Option Description
AC Behavior (Comportement CA) Permet à l'ordinateur de se mettre sous tension automatiquement, lorsque
l'adaptateur en CA est branché. L'option est désactivée.
• Wake On AC (Réveil sur CA)
Auto On Time (Heure de
démarrage auto)
Permet de définir l'heure de mise sous tension automatique de l'ordinateur. Les
options sont :
• Disabled (Default Setting) (Désactivé (Paramètre par défaut))
• Every Day (Tous les jours)
• Weekdays (Jours de la semaine)
USB Wake Support (Prise en
charge d'éveil USB)
Vous permet d'activer les périphériques USB pour réveiller l'ordinateur du mode
veille. L'option est désactivée
• Enable USB Wake Support (Activer le support de réveil USB)
Wireless Radio Control
(Commande radio sans fil)
Vous permet de contrôler la radio WLAN et WWAN. Les options sont les
suivantes :
• Control WLAN radio (Contrôler la radio WLAN)
• Control WWAN radio (Contrôler la radio WWAN)
Paramètre par défaut : les deux options sont désactivées.
Wake on LAN/WLAN (Eveil
réseau)
Cette option permet d'activer l'ordinateur hors tension avec un signal LAN spécial.
L'activation à partir de la veille n'est pas affectée par ce paramètre et elle doit être
activée sur le système. Cette fonction fonctionne uniquement lorsque l'ordinateur
est connecté à une alimentation CA.
• Disabled (Désactivé) - Empêche le système d'être mis sous tension par des
signaux spéciaux LAN lorsqu'il reçoit un signal d'activation du LAN ou d'un
LAN sans fil. (Paramètre par défaut)
• LAN Only (LAN uniquement) - Permet au système d'être mis sous tension
par des signaux LAN spéciaux.
• WLAN Only (WLAN uniquement)
• LAN or WLAN (LAN ou WLAN)
Block Sleep (Bloquer mise en
veille)
Vous permet d'empêcher à l'ordinateur de passer en veille. L'option est désactivée
par défaut.
• Block Sleep (S3) (Bloquer la veille [S3])
68Option Description
Primary Battery Configuration
(Configuration de la batterie
principale)
Vous permet de définir comment utiliser la charge de la batterie, lorsque le cordon
d'alimentation est branché. Les options sont les suivantes :
• Standard Charge (Chargement standard)
• Express Charge
• Predominantly AC use (Utilisation prédominante du CA)
• Auto Charge (Chargement automatique) (Paramètre par défaut)
• Custom (Chargement personnalisée) : vous pouvez régler le pourcentage
auquel la batterie doit se charger.
Battery Slice Configuration
(Configuration de tranche de
batterie)
Vous permet de définir le type de chargement de la batterie. Les options sont les
suivantes :
• Standard Charge (Chargement standard)
• Express Charge (Chargement expresse) (Paramètre par défaut)
Tableau 8. POST Behavior (Comportement de l'autotest de démarrage)
Option Description
Adapter Warnings
(Avertissements adaptateur)
Vous permet d'activer les messages d'avertissement de l'adaptateur lorsque
certains adaptateurs lorsque certains adaptateurs d'alimentation sont utilisés?
L'option est activée par défaut.
• Enable Adapter Warnings (Activer les avertissements relatifs à
l'adaptateur)
Mouse/Touchpad (Souris/Pavé
tactile)
Vous permet de définir la façon dont le système gère la souris et le pavé tactile.
Les options sont :
• Serial Mouse (Souris série)
• PS2 Mouse (Souries PS2)
• Touchpad/PS-2 Mouse (Pavé tactile/Souris PS-2) (Paramètre par défaut)
Numlock Enable (Activer le
verrouillage numérique)
Spécifie s'il est possible d'activer la fonctionnalité VerrNum lors de l'amorçage du
système. Cette option est activée par défaut.
• Enable Numlock (Activer VerrNum)
Fn Key Emulation (Emulation
touche Fn)
Vous permet de faire correspondre la fonction de la touche du clavier
PS-2 avec la fonction de la touche d'un clavier interne. L'option est activée
par défaut.
• Enable Fn Key Emulation (Activer l'émulation de la touche Fn)
Keyboard Errors (Erreurs clavier) Indique si les erreurs liées au clavier sont signalées à l'amorçage. Cette option est
activée par défaut.
• Enable Keyboard Error Detection (Activer la détection des erreurs clavier)
POST Hotkeys (Touches
d'autotest au démarrage)
Indique si l'écran d'ouverture affiche un message indiquant la séquence de
touches nécessaire pour entrer dans le menu d'option de démarrage du BIOS.
• Enable F12 Boot Option menu (Activer le menu d'options d'amorçage F12) :
cette option est activée par défaut.
69Option Description
Fastboot Vous permet d'accélérer les processus de démarrage. Les options sont les
suivantes :
• Minimal
• Thorough (Complet) (Paramètre par défaut)
• Auto
Tableau 9. Virtualization Support (Prise en charge de la virtualisation)
Option Description
Virtualization (Virtualisation) Cette option indique si un moniteur de machine virtuel (VMM) peut utiliser les
capacités matérielles supplémentaires offertes par la technologie de virtualisation
Intel.
• Enable Intel Virtualization Technology (Activer la technologie Intel
Vrtualization) : Default Setting (paramètre par défaut).
VT for Direct I/O (Technologie de
virtualisation pour E/S directes)
Autorise ou empêche le moniteur VMM (Virtual Machine Monitor) (VMM) d'utiliser
les fonctions métérielles supplémentaires fournies par la technologie de
virtualisation Intel pour les E/S directes.
• Enable Intel Virtualization Technology for Direct I/O (Activer la technologie
Intel Virtualization : paramètres par défaut.
Tableau 10. Wireless (Sans fil)
Option Description
Wireless Switch (Commutateur
sans fil)
Vous permet de déterminer les périphériques sans fil qui peuvent être commandés
par le commutateur sans fil. Les options sont les suivantes :
• WWAN
• Bluetooth
• la carte WLAN
Toutes les options sont activées par défaut.
Wireless Device Enable (Activer
les périphériques sans fil)
Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver les périphériques sans fil. Les options sont
les suivantes :
• WWAN
• Bluetooth
• la carte WLAN
Toutes les options sont activées par défaut.
Tableau 11. Maintenance
Option Description
Service Tag (Numéro de service) Affiche le numéro de service de l'ordinateur.
Asset Tag (Numéro d'inventaire) Permet de créer un numéro d'inventaire système si aucun numéro de service n'est
défini. Cette option n'est pas définie par défaut.
70Tableau 12. System Logs (Journaux du système)
Option Description
BIOS Events (Evénements du
BIOS)
Affiche le journal d'événements du système et permet de l'effacer.
• Clear Log (Effacer le journal)
Mise à jour du BIOS
Il est recommandé de mettre à jour le BIOS (configuration du système) lors du remplacement de la carte système ou
lorsqu'une mise à jour est disponible. Pour les ordinateurs portables, vérifiez que la batterie est complètement chargée
et que l'ordinateur est connecté au secteur.
1. Redémarrez l'ordinateur.
2. Accédez au site support.dell.com/support/downloads.
3. Si vous disposez du numéro de service ou du numéro de service express de l'ordinateur :
REMARQUE : Pour les ordinateurs de bureau, le numéro de service se trouve sur l'étiquette sur la face avant
de l'ordinateur.
REMARQUE : Pour les ordinateurs portables, le numéro de service se trouve sur le fond de l'ordinateur.
a) Entrez le numéro de service ou le numéro de service express et cliquez sur Submit (Envoyer).
b) Cliquez sur Submit et passez à l'étape 5.
4. Si vous ne disposez pas de ces numéros, sélectionnez l'unr des options suivantrs :
a) Automatically detect my Service Tag for me (Détecter automatiquement le numéro de service)
b) Choose from My Products and Services List (Choisir dans la liste Mes produits et services)
c) Choose from a list of all Dell products (Choisir dans la liste de tous les produits Dell)
5. Dans l'écran de l'application et des pilotes, sous la liste déroulante Operating System (Système d'exploiration),
sélectionnez BIOS.
6. Identifiez le dernier fichier BIOS et cliquez sur Download File (Télécharger le fichier).
7. Sélectionnez le mode de téléchargement préférentiel dans Please select your download method below window
(Sélectionner le mode de téléchargement dans la fenêtre ci-dessous) et cliquez sur Download Now (Télécharger
maintenant).
La fenêtre File Download (Téléchargement de fichier) s'affiche.
8. Cliquez sur Save (Enregistrer) pour enregistrer le fichier sur l'ordinateur.
9. Cliquez sur Run (Exécuter) pour installer les paramètres BIOS actualisés sur l'ordinateur.
Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent.
Mots de passe du système et de configuration
Vous pouvez définir un mot de passe système et un mot de passe de configuration pour protéger l'ordinateur.
Type de mot de passe Description
Mot de passe
système
Mot de passe que vous entrer pour ouvrir un session sur le système.
Mot de passe de
configuration
Mot de passe que vous devez entrer pour accéder aux paramètres du BIOS de l'ordinateur et
les changer.
71PRÉCAUTION : Les fonctions de mot de passe fournissent un niveau de sécurité de base pour les données de
l'ordinateur.
PRÉCAUTION : N'importe quel utilisateur peut accéder aux données de l'ordinateur s'il n'est pas verrouillé et qu'il
est laissé sans surveillance.
REMARQUE : L'ordinateur est fourni avec la fonction de mot de passe système et de configuration désactivée.
Définition d'un mot de passe système et d'un mot de passe de configuration
Vous pouvez définir un nouveau mot de passe système et/ou mot de passe de configuration ou changer un mot de passe
système et/ou mot de passe de configuration uniquement lorsque l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé. Si l'état de mot
de passe est Verrouillé, vous ne pouvez pas changer le mot de passe système.
REMARQUE : Si le cavalier des mots de passe est désactivé, le mot de passe système et le mot de passe de
configuration sont supprimés et vous n'avez pas à fournir de mot de passe système pour ouvrir une session.
Pour entrer dans une configuration système, appuyez sur immédiatement après la mise sous tension ou un
redémarrage.
1. Dans l'écran System BIOS (BIOS du système) ou System Setup (Configuration du système) sélectionnez System
Security (Sécurité du système) et appuyez sur .
L'écran System Security s'affiche.
2. Dans l'écran System Security, vérifiez que Password Status est Unlocked.
3. Sélectionnez System Password, entrez le mot de passe du système et appuyez sur ou la touche .
Suivez les instructions pour définir le mot de passe système :
– Un mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 32 caractères.
– Le mot de passe peut contenir des nombres de 0 à 9.
– Seules les minuscules sont acceptées.
– Seuls les caractères spéciaux suivants sont valides : espace, (”), (+), (,), (-), (.), (/), (;), ([), (\), (]), (`).
Entrez de nouveau le mot de passe lorsqu'un message le demande.
4. Tapez le mot de passe système que vous avez entré précédemment et cliquez sur OK.
5. Sélectionnez Setup Password, tapez le mot de passe système et appuyez sur ou la touche .
Un message demande de retaper le mot de passe de configuration.
6. Tapez le mot de passe de configuration que vous avez entré précédemment et cliquez sur OK.
7. Appuyez sur ; un message demande d'enregistrer les modifications.
8. Appuyez sur pour les enregistrer.
L'ordinateur redémarrage.
Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration
Vérifiez que l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé (dans la configuration du système) avant de supprimer ou de
changer un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration. Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer ou changer un mot de passe
système et/ou de configuration si l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé.
Pour entrer dans la configuration du système, appuyez sur immédiatement après la mise sous tension ou un
redémarrage.
721. Dans l'écran System BIOS (BIOS du système) ou System Setup (Configuration du système), sélectionnez System
Security (Sécurité du système) et appuyez sur .
L'écran System Security s'affiche.
2. Dans l'écran System Security, vérifiez que l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé.
3. Sélectionnez System Password, modifiez ou supprimez le mot de passe système existant et appuyez sur
ou la touche .
4. Sélectionnez Setup Password, modifiez ou supprimez le mot de passe de configuration existant et appuyez sur
ou la touche .
REMARQUE : Si vous changez le mot de passe système et/ou le mot de passe de configuration, entrez de
nouveau le nouveau mot de passe lorsqu'un message le demande. Si vous supprimez l'un ou l'autre des mots
de passe ou les deux, confirmez la suppression quand un message le demande.
5. Appuyez sur ; un message demande d'enregistrer les modifications.
6. Appuyez sur pour les enregistrer et quitter la configuration du système.
L'ordinateur redémarrage.
73745
Diagnostics
En cas de problème avec l'ordinateur, exécutez les diagnostics ePSA avant de contacter l'assistance technique de Dell.
Les diagnostics visent à tester le matériel de l'ordinateur sans équipement supplémentaire ou risque de perte de
données. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre le problème vous-même, le personnel de maintenance et d'assistance
peut utiliser les résultats des diagnostics pour vous aider à le résoudre.
Diagnostisc ePSA (Enhanced Pre-Boot System Assessment)
Les diagnostics ePSA (également appelés diagnostics système) vérifient complètement le matériel. ePSA est intégré au
BIOS et il est démarré par le BIOS en interne. Les diagnostics système intégrés fournissent des options pour des
périphériques ou des groupes de périphériques spécifiques pour :
• Exécuter des tests automatiquement ou dans un mode interactif
• Répéter les tests
• Afficher ou enregistrer les résultats des tests
• Exécuter des tests rigoureux pour présentent des options de tests supplémentaires pour fournir des
informations complémentaires sur un ou des périphériques défaillants
• Afficher des messages d'état qui indiquent si les tests ont abouti
• Afficher des messages d'erreur qui indiquent les problèmes détectés au cours des tests
PRÉCAUTION : Utilisez les diagnostics système pour tester l'ordinateur. L'utilisation de ce programme avec
d'autres ordinateurs peut générer des résultats non valides ou des messages d'erreur.
REMARQUE : Certains tests de périphériques nécessitent l'interaction de l'utilsateur. Veillez à toujours être à côté
de l'ordinateur lorsque vous exécutez les tests de diagnostic.
1. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension.
2. Lorsque l'ordinateur démarre, appuyez sur la touche lorsque le logo Dell apparaît.
3. Dans l'écran du menu de démarrage, sélectionnez l'option Diagnostics.
La fenêtre Enhanced Pre-boot System Assessment s'affiche avec la liste de tous les périphériques détectés sur
l'ordinateur. Le programme de diagnostics lance les tests sur tous les périphériques détectés.
4. Si vous voulez lancer un test de diagnostic sur un périphérique donné, appuyez sur ; cliquez sur Yes (Oui)
pour arrêter le test de diagnostic.
5. Sélectionnez le périphérique dans le panneau de gauche et cliquez sur Run Tests (Exécuter les tests).
6. En cas de problèmes, des codes d'erreur s'affichent.
Notez les codes d'erreur et contactez Dell.
75766
Dépannage de l'ordinateur
Vous pouvez dépanner l'ordinateur en utilisant les indicateurs, tels que les voyants de diagnostic, les bips et les
messages d'erreur lors de l'utilisation de l'ordinateur.
Voyants d'état de l'appareil
Tableau 13. Voyants d'état de l'appareil
S'allume lorsque vous allumez l'ordinateur et clignote lorsque l'ordinateur est en mode d'économie
d'énergie.
S'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données.
S'allume ou clignote pour indiquer l'état de charge de la batterie.
S'allume lorsque le réseau sans fil est activé.
Les voyants d'état du périphérique se trouvent généralement sur le dessus ou le côté gauche du clavier. Ils sont utilisés
pour afficher la connectivité et l'activité du stockage, de la batterie et des périphériques sans fil. En dehors de cette
utilité, ils peuvent servir d'outil de diagnostic lorsqu'il existe une panne dans le système.
Le tableau suivant explique comment comprendre les codes des voyants lorsqu'une erreur survient.
Tableau 14. Lumière des voyants
Voyant de
stockage
Voyant
d'alimentation
Voyant sans fil Description de l'erreur
Clignotant Uni Uni Possible défaillance du processeur.
Uni Clignotant Uni Les modules de mémoire sont détectés mais ont rencontrés
une erreur.
Clignotant Clignotant Clignotant Défaillance de la carte système.
Clignotant Clignotant Uni Défaillance probable de la carte graphique/vidéo.
Clignotant Clignotant Éteint Défaillance système de l'initialisation du disque dur OU
défaillance du système lors de l'initialisation ROM en option.
Clignotant Éteint Clignotant Le contrôleur USB a rencontré un problème pendant
l'initialisation.
Uni Clignotant Clignotant Aucun module de mémoire n'est installé/détecté.
Clignotant Uni Clignotant L'écran a rencontré un problème pendant l'initialisation.
Éteint Clignotant Clignotant Le modem empêche le système d'achever l'auto-test de
démarrage.
77Voyant de
stockage
Voyant
d'alimentation
Voyant sans fil Description de l'erreur
Éteint Clignotant Éteint L'initialisation de la mémoire a échoué ou la mémoire n'est
pas prise en charge.
Voyants d'état de la batterie
Si l'ordinateur est branché à une prise secteur, le voyant d'état de la batterie fonctionne de la manière suivante :
Alternativement
un voyant ambre
clignotant et un
voyant blanc
Un adaptateur secteur non pris en charge par Dell est fixé sur votre portable.
Alternativement
un voyant ambre
clignotant avec
voyant blanc
fixe .
Défaillance de batterie temporaire lorsqu'il existe un adaptateur secteur.
Voyant ambre
clignotant
constamment
Défaillance de batterie irrémédiable avec adaptateur CA présent.
Voyant éteint La batterie est en mode de chargement complet lorsqu'il existe un adaptateur secteur.
Voyant blanc
allumé
La batterie est charge avec adaptateur secteur CA.
787
Caractéristiques techniques
REMARQUE : Les offres proposées peuvent varier selon les pays. Les caractéristiques suivantes se limitent à
celles que la législation impose de fournir avec l'ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de votre
ordinateur, cliquez sur Démarrer → Aide et support et sélectionnez l'option qui permet d'afficher les informations
relatives à votre ordinateur.
Tableau 15. System Information (Informations sur le système)
Elément Spécification
Jeu de puces Jeu de puces Mobile Intel 7 series (Intel QM77)
Largeur de bus DRAM 64 bits
Flash EPROM SPI 32 Mo, 64 Mo
Bus PCIe Gen1 100 MHz
Fréquence du bus externe DMI (5 GT/s)
Tableau 16. Processeur
Elément Spécification
Types • Intel Core i3 series
• Intel Core i5 series
• Intel Core i7 series
Mémoire cache L3 jusqu'à 8 Mo
Tableau 17. Mémoire
Elément Spécification
Connecteur mémoire Deux emplacement SODIMM
Capacité de la mémoire 1 Go, 2 Go ou 4 Go
Type de mémoire DDR3 SDRAM (1 600 MHz)
Mémoire minimale 2 Go
Mémoire maximale 16 Go
79Tableau 18. Audio
Elément Spécification
Type Quatre canaux son haute définition
Contrôleur IDT92HD93
Conversion stéréo 24 bits (analogique-numérique et numérique-analogique)
Interface :
Interne Son haute définition
Externe entrée microphone/casque stéréo/connecteur haut-parleurs
externes
Haut-parleurs deux
Amplificatîeur intégré de haut-parleurs 1 W (RMS) par canal
Réglages du volume touches de fonction du clavier et menus de programmes
Tableau 19. Vidéo
Elément Spécification
Type Intégrée sur la carte système
Contrôleur • Intel HD Graphics
• NVidia Discrete Graphics
Tableau 20. Communications
Fonctions Spécification
Carte réseau 10/100/1000 Mb/s Ethernet (RJ-45)
Wireless (Sans fil) réseau local sans fil (WLAN) et réseau étendu sans fil (WWAN)
Tableau 21. Ports et connecteurs
Fonctions Spécification
Audio un connecteur de microphone/casque stéréo/haut-parleurs
Vidéo • un connecteur VGA 15 pouces
• connecteur HDMI à 19 broches
Carte réseau un connecteur RJ-45
USB 2.0 • Un connecteur à 4 broches, compatible USB 2.0
• Un connecteur e/SAT, compatible USB 2.0
USB 3.0 deux
Lecteur de cartes mémoire un lecteur de carte mémoire 8-en-1
80Fonctions Spécification
Port d'accueil une
carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) une
Tableau 22. Carte à puce sans contact
Elément Spécification
Cartes à puce et technologies prises en charge ISO14443A — 106 kb/s, 212 kb/s, 424 kb/s et 848 kb/s ISO14443B —
106 kb/s, 212 kb/s, 424 kb/s et 848 kb/s ISO15936 HID iClass
FIPS201 NXP Desfire, HID iClass FIPS201 NXP Desfire
Tableau 23. Écran
Elément Spécification
Type • HD (1 366x768), WLED
• HD+ (1 600 x 900)
• FHD (1 920 x 1 080)
Taille
Latitude E6430 14,0 pouces
Latitude E6530 15,6 pouces
Latitude E6430 ATG 14,0 pouces
Dimensions :
Latitude E6430 :
Hauteur 192,50 mm (7,57 pouces)
Largeur 324 mm (12,75 pouces)
Diagonale 355,60 mm (14 pouces)
Zone active (X/Y) 309,40 mm x 173,95 mm
Résolution maximale • 1 366 x 768 pixels
• 1 600 x 900 pixels
Luminosité maximale 200 nits
Latitude E6530 :
Hauteur 210 mm (8,26 pouces)
Largeur 360 mm (14,17 pouces)
Diagonale 394,24 mm (15,60 pouces)
Zone active (X/Y) 344,23 mm x 193,54 mm
Résolution maximale • 1 366 x 768 pixels
81Elément Spécification
• 1 600 x 900 pixels
• 1 920 x 1 080 pixels
Luminosité maximale 220 nits
Latitude E6430 ATG :
Hauteur 192,5 mm (7,57 pouces)
Largeur 324 mm (12,75 pouces)
Diagonale 355,60 mm (14 pouces)
Zone active (X/Y) 357,30 mm x 246,50 mm
Résolution maximale 1 366 x 768 pixels
Luminosité maximale 730 nits
Angle de fonctionnement De 0° (fermé) à 180°
Fréquence d'affichage 60 Hz
Angles minimum de visualisation :
Latitude E6430 / Latitude E6530
Horizontal +/- 40°
Vertical +10°/-30°
Latitude E6430 ATG :
Horizontal +/- 50°
Vertical +/- 40°
Pas de pixel :
Latitude E6430 0,2265 mm x 0,2265 mm
Latitude E6530 0,252 mm x 0,252 m
Tableau 24. Clavier
Elément Spécification
Nombre de touches États-Unis : 86 touches ; Royaume-Uni : 87 touches ; Brésil :
87 touches ; Japon : 90 touches
REMARQUE : Le pavé numérique est disponible pour Latitude
E6530.
Configuration QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji
82Tableau 25. Pavé tactile
Elément Spécification
Zone active :
axe des X 80,00 mm
axe des Y 45,00 mm
Tableau 26. Batterie
Elément Spécification
Type • Bloc batterie au lithium-ion de 4 cellules (40 W/h) avec
Express Charge (uniquement pour certains pays)
• Bloc batterie au lithium-ion de 6 cellules (60 W/h) avec
Express Charge
• Bloc batterie au lithium-ion de 9 cellules (97 W/h) avec
Express Charge
• Bloc batterie au lithium-ion de 9 cellules (87 W/h)
Dimensions :
4 et 6 cellules :
Profondeur 48,08 mm (1,90 ")
Hauteur 20,00 mm (0,79 pouces)
Largeur 208,00 mm (8,18 pouces)
9 cellules :
Profondeur 71,79 mm (2,83”)
Hauteur 20,00 mm (0,79 pouces)
Largeur 214,00 mm (8,43 pouces)
Poids :
4 éléments 240,00 g (0,53 livres)
6 éléments 344,73 g (0,76 lb)
9 éléments 508,02 g (1,12 livres)
Tension :
4 éléments 14,80 VCC
6 et 9 cellules : 11,10 VCC
Plage de températures :
En fonctionnement De 0 °C à 35 °C (de 32 °F à 95 °F)
À l'arrêt –40 °C à 65 °C (–40 °F à 149 °F)
83Elément Spécification
Pile bouton Pile bouton 3 V CR2032 lithium
Tableau 27. Adaptateur CA
Elément Spécification
Type 65 W STD et 65 W sans BFR/PVC Adaptateur d90 W
Tension d'entrée De 100 VAC à 240 VAC De 100 VAC à 240 VAC
Courant d'entrée (maximum) 1,50 A 1,60 A
Fréquence d'entrée De 50 Hz à 60 Hz De 50 Hz à 60 Hz
Puissance de sortie 65 W 90 W
Courant de sortie 3,34 A (continu) 4,62 A (en continu)
Tension de sortie nominale 19,5 +/– 1,0 VCC 19,5 +/– 1,0 VCC
Plage de températures :
En fonctionnement De 0 °C à 40 °C (de 32 °F à 104 °F) De 0 °C à 40 °C (de 32 °F à 104 °F)
À l'arrêt De –40 °C à 70 °C (de -40 °F à 158 °F) De –40 °C à 70 °C (de -40 °F à 158 °F)
Tableau 28. Caractéristiques physiques
Elément Latitude E6430 Latitude E6530 Latitude E6430 ATG
Hauteur de 26,90 mm à 32,40 mm (de
1,06” à 1,27”)
de 28,40 mm à 34,20 mm (de
1,11 pouces à 1,35 pouces)
de 29,50 mm à 37,70 mm (de
1,16 pouces à 1,48 pouces)
Largeur 352,00 mm (13,86 pouces) 384,00 mm (15,12 pouces) 359,20 mm (14,14 pouces) avec
cache-port
Profondeur 241,00 mm (9,49 pouces) 258,00 mm (10,16 pouces) 247,40 mm (9,74 pouces) avec
cache-port
Poids 2,02 kg (4,45 livres) 2,47 kg (5,44 livres) 2,74 kg (6,04 livres)
Tableau 29. Conditions environnementales
Elément Spécification
Température :
En fonctionnement De 0 °C à 35 °C (de 32 °F à 95 °F)
Stockage –40 °C à 65 °C (–40 °F à 149 °F)
Humidité relative (maximum) :
En fonctionnement De 10 % à 90 % (sans condensation)
Stockage De 5 % à 95 % (sans condensation)
Altitude (maximale) :
84Elément Spécification
En fonctionnement De –15,24 à 3 048 m (de -50 pieds à 10 000 pieds)
À l'arrêt De –15,24 m à 10 668 m (de -50 pieds à 35 000 pieds)
Niveau de particules polluantes en suspension G1 tel que défini par ISA-71.04–1985
85868
Contacter Dell
Pour prendre contact avec Dell pour des questions commerciales, de support technique ou de service clientèle :
1. Rendez-vous sur le site support.dell.com.
2. Sélectionnez l'option appropriée dans le menu déroulant Choisissez un pays ou une région situé au bas de la page.
3. Cliquez sur Contactez-nous dans la partie gauche de la page.
4. Sélectionnez le lien correspondant au service ou au support technique requis.
5. Choisissez la méthode de contact qui vous convient.
87
www.dell.com | support.dell.com
Dell™ OptiPlex™ 330
Quick Reference Guide
Model DCSM and DCNENotes, Notices, and Cautions
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of
your computer.
NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data
and tells you how to avoid the problem.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury,
or death.
____________________
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2007 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly
forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex,
Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp, and Dell OpenManage are trademarks of Dell Inc.;
Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation; Microsoft and Windows
are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming
the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and
trade names other than its own.
Model DCSM and DCNE
September 2007 P/N JY235 Rev. A00Contents 3
Contents
Finding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Before Working Inside Your Computer. . . . . . . 10
Adding and Replacing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Installing Your Computer in an Enclosure . . . . . 13
Setting Up a Home and Office Network . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting to a Network Adapter . . . . . . . . . 15
Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting to the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Moving Information to a New Computer . . . . . . . . 19
Setting Up a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting Two Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Power Protection Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Desktop Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Back Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Removing the Computer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Inside View of Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Contents
System Board Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Replacing the Computer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Mini Tower Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Back Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Removing the Computer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Inside View of Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
System Board Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Replacing the Computer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Solving Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Power Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Beep Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Diagnostic Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Clearing Forgotten Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Clearing CMOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Flashing the BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Quick Reference Guide 5
Finding Information
NOTE: Some features or media may be optional and may not ship with your
computer. Some features or media may not be available in certain countries.
NOTE: Additional information may ship with your computer.
What Are You Looking For? Find It Here
• A diagnostic program for my
computer
• Drivers for my computer
• Desktop System Software (DSS)
Drivers and Utilities Media
NOTE: The Drivers and Utilities media may be
optional and may not ship with your computer.
Drivers are already installed on your
computer. You can use the media to reinstall
drivers (see the online User’s Guide), to run
the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics"
on page 48).
Readme files may be included on your media
to provide last-minute updates about
technical changes to your computer or
advanced technical-reference material for
technicians or experienced users.
NOTE: Drivers and documentation updates can
be found at support.dell.com.6 Quick Reference Guide
• Basic troubleshooting information
• How to run the Dell Diagnostics
• Tools and utilities
• How to set up a printer
Quick Reference Guide
NOTE: This document may be optional and may
not ship with your computer.
NOTE: This document is available as a PDF at
support.dell.com.
• Warranty information
• Terms and Conditions (U.S. only)
• Safety instructions
• Regulatory information
• Ergonomics information
• End User License Agreement
Dell™ Product Information Guide
• How to remove and replace parts
• Specifications
• How to configure system settings
• How to troubleshoot and solve
problems
Dell OptiPlex™ 330 User’s Guide
Microsoft Windows Help and Support Center
1 Click the Windows Vista Start button→
Help and Support→ Dell User and System
Guides→ System Guides.
2 Click the User’s Guide for your computer.
What Are You Looking For? Find It HereQuick Reference Guide 7
• Service Tag and Express Service
Code
• Microsoft Windows License Label
Service Tag and Microsoft® Windows®
License
These labels are located on your computer.
• Use the Service Tag to identify your
computer when you use support.dell.com or
contact support.
• Enter the Express Service Code to direct
your call when contacting support.
NOTE: As an increased security measure, the
newly designed Microsoft Windows license
label incorporates a missing portion or "hole" to
discourage removal of the label.
What Are You Looking For? Find It Here8 Quick Reference Guide
• Solutions — Troubleshooting hints
and tips, articles from technicians,
and online courses, frequently
asked questions
• Community — Online discussion
with other Dell customers
• Upgrades — Upgrade information
for components, such as memory,
the hard drive, and the operating
system
• Customer Care — Contact
information, service call and order
status, warranty, and repair
information
• Service and support — Service call
status and support history, service
contract, online discussions with
technical support
• Dell Technical Update Service —
Proactive e-mail notification of
software and hardware updates for
your computer
• Reference — Computer
documentation, details on my
computer configuration, product
specifications, and white papers
• Downloads — Certified drivers,
patches, and software updates
Dell Support Website — support.dell.com
NOTE: Select your region or business segment
to view the appropriate support site.
What Are You Looking For? Find It HereQuick Reference Guide 9
• Desktop System Software
(DSS) — If you reinstall the
operating system for your
computer, you should also reinstall
the DSS utility. DSS provides
critical updates for your operating
system and support for processors,
optical drives, USB devices, and so
on. DSS is necessary for correct
operation of your Dell computer.
The software automatically detects
your computer and operating
system and installs the updates
appropriate for your configuration.
To download Desktop System Software:
1 Go to support.dell.com, select your region
or business segment, and enter your Service
Tag.
2 Select Drivers & Downloads and click Go.
3 Click your operating system and search for
the keyword Desktop System Software.
NOTE: The support.dell.com user interface may
vary depending on your selections.
• How to use Windows
• How to work with programs and
files
• How to personalize my desktop
Windows Help and Support Center
1To access Windows Help and Support:
• In Windows XP, click Start and click Help
and Support.
• In Windows Vista™, click the Windows
Vista start button →Help and
Support.
2Type a word or phrase that describes your
problem and click the arrow icon.
3 Click the topic that describes your problem.
4 Follow the instructions on the screen.
• How to reinstall my operating
system
Operating System Media
NOTE: The Operating System media may be
optional and may not ship with your computer.
What Are You Looking For? Find It Here10 Quick Reference Guide
Before You Begin
Before Working Inside Your Computer
Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from
potential damage and to help to ensure your own personal safety.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components
or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket.
Hold a component such as a processor by its edges, not by its pins.
The operating system is already installed on
your computer. To reinstall your operating
system, use the Operating System disc, and see
the online User’s Guide.
After you reinstall your operating system, use
the Drivers and Utilities disc to reinstall
drivers for the devices that came with your
computer.
Your operating system product key label is
located on your computer.
NOTE: The color of your disc varies based on
the operating system you ordered.
What Are You Looking For? Find It HereQuick Reference Guide 11
NOTICE: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your
computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by
your warranty.
NOTICE: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its pull-tab, not
on the cable itself. Some cables have connectors with locking tabs; if you are
disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect
the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending
any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors
are correctly oriented and aligned.
NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer, perform the following steps before you
begin working inside the computer.
1 Turn off your computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 12).
CAUTION: Never apply power to the computer when the cover has been removed.
NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer
and then unplug the cable from the network device.
2 Disconnect all telephone or network cables from the computer.
3 Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical
outlets.
4 Press the power button to ground the system board.
NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by
touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer.
While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate static
electricity, which could harm internal components.
Adding and Replacing Parts
This section provides procedures for removing and installing the components
in your computer. Unless otherwise noted, each procedure assumes that the
following conditions exist:
• You have performed the steps in "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 12
and "Before Working Inside Your Computer" on page 10.
• You have read the safety information in the Dell™ Product Information
Guide.
• A component can be replaced or—if purchased separately—installed by
performing the removal procedure in reverse order.12 Quick Reference Guide
Recommended Tools
The procedures in this document may require the following tools:
• Small flat-blade screwdriver
• Small Phillips screwdriver
• Small plastic scribe
Turning Off Your Computer
NOTICE: To avoid losing data, save and close all open files and exit all open
programs before you turn off your computer.
1 Shut down the operating system:
a Save and close all open files and exit all open programs.
b In the Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system, click Start→ Shut
Down→ Shut down.
In Microsoft® Windows Vista™, click the Windows Vista Start button
, in the lower-left corner of the desktop, click the arrow in the
lower-right corner of the Start menu as shown below, and then click
Shut Down.
The computer turns off after the operating system shutdown process is
complete.
2 Ensure that the computer and all attached devices are turned off. If your
computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you
shut down your operating system, press and hold the power button for
about 4 seconds to turn them off.Quick Reference Guide 13
Setting Up Your Computer
Installing Your Computer in an Enclosure
Installing your computer in an enclosure can restrict the airflow and impact
your computer’s performance, possibly causing it to overheat. Follow the
guidelines below when installing your computer in an enclosure:
NOTICE: The operating temperature specifications indicated in this manual
reflects the maximum ambient operating temperature. The room ambient
temperature needs to be a consideration when installing your computer in an
enclosure. For example, if the ambient room temperature is at 25°C (77°F),
depending on your computer’s specifications, you only have 5° to 10°C (9° to 18°F)
temperature margin before you reach your computer’s maximum operating
temperature. For details about your computer’s specifications, see the online User’s
Guide.
• Leave a 10.2 cm (4 in) minimum clearance on all vented sides of the
computer to permit the airflow required for proper ventilation.
• If your enclosure has doors, they need to be of a type that allows at least
30 percent airflow through the enclosure (front and back).14 Quick Reference Guide
• If your computer is installed in a corner on a desk or under a desk, leave at
least 5.1 cm (2 in) clearance from the back of the computer to the wall to
permit the airflow required for proper ventilation.
NOTICE: Do not install your computer in an enclosure that does not allow airflow.
Restricting the airflow impacts your computer’s performance, possibly causing it to
overheat.Quick Reference Guide 15
Setting Up a Home and Office Network
Connecting to a Network Adapter
To connect a network cable:
NOTE: Plug the network cable into the network adapter connector on the
computer. Do not plug the network cable into the modem connector on the
computer. Do not plug a network cable into a telephone wall jack.
1 Connect the network cable to the network adapter connector on the back
of your computer.
Insert the cable until it clicks into place, and then gently pull it to ensure
that it is secure.
2 Connect the other end of the network cable to a network device.16 Quick Reference Guide
Network Setup
Windows XP
The Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system provides a Network Setup
Wizard to guide you through the process of sharing files, printers, or an
Internet connection between computers in a home or small office.
1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs→ Accessories→
Communications, and then click Network Setup Wizard.
2 On the Network Setup Wizard welcome screen, click Next.
3 Click Checklist for creating a network.
NOTE: Selecting the connection method This computer connects directly to the
Internet enables the integrated firewall provided with Windows XP Service Pack 1
(SP1) or later.
4 Complete the checklist and required preparations.
5 Return to the Network Setup Wizard and follow the instructions on the
screen.
network
device
network adapter connector on computer network cable
network
adapter
connectorQuick Reference Guide 17
Windows Vista
To make changes to your network setup in Microsoft® Windows Vista™:
1 Click the Windows Vista Start button, , and then click Network→
Network and Sharing Center.
2 Click Set up a connection or network.
3 Select the type of network connection you want to make and follow the
instructions on the screen.
4 When finished, close the Network and Sharing Center.
Connecting to the Internet
NOTE: ISPs and ISP offerings vary by country.
To connect to the Internet, you need a modem or network connection and an
Internet service provider (ISP). Your ISP will offer one or more of the
following Internet connection options:
• DSL connections that provide high-speed Internet access through your
existing telephone line or cellular telephone service. With a DSL
connection, you can access the Internet and use your telephone on the
same line simultaneously.
• Cable modem connections that provide high-speed Internet access
through your local cable TV line.
• Satellite modem connections that provide high-speed Internet access
through a satellite television system.
• Dial-up connections that provide Internet access through a telephone line.
Dial-up connections are considerably slower than DSL and cable (or
satellite) modem connections.
• Wireless LAN connections that provide Internet access using Bluetooth®
wireless technology.
If you are using a dial-up connection, connect a telephone line to the modem
connector on your computer and to the telephone wall jack before you set up
your Internet connection. If you are using a DSL or cable/satellite modem
connection, contact your ISP or cellular telephone service for setup
instructions.18 Quick Reference Guide
Setting Up Your Internet Connection
To set up an Internet connection with a provided ISP desktop shortcut:
1 Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs.
2 Double-click the ISP icon on the Microsoft® Windows® desktop.
3 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup.
If you do not have an ISP icon on your desktop or if you want to set up an
Internet connection with a different ISP, perform the steps in the following
section that corresponds to the operating system your computer is using.
NOTE: If you are having problems connecting to the Internet, see "Setting Up a
Home and Office Network" on page 15. If you cannot connect to the Internet but
have successfully connected in the past, the ISP might have a service outage.
Contact your ISP to check the service status, or try connecting again later.
Windows XP
1 Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs.
2 Click Start→ Internet Explorer.
The New Connection Wizard appears.
3 Click Connect to the Internet.
4 In the next window, click the appropriate option:
• If you do not have an ISP and want to select one, click Choose from a
list of Internet service providers (ISPs).
• If you have already obtained setup information from your ISP but you
did not receive a setup CD, click Set up my connection manually.
• If you have a CD, click Use the CD I got from an ISP.
5 Click Next.
If you selected Set up my connection manually, continue to step 6.
Otherwise, follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup.
NOTE: If you do not know which type of connection to select, contact your ISP.
6 Click the appropriate option under How do you want to connect to the
Internet?, and then click Next.
7 Use the setup information provided by your ISP to complete the setup.Quick Reference Guide 19
Windows Vista™
NOTE: Have your ISP information ready. If you do not have an ISP, the Connect to
the Internet wizard can help you get one.
1 Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs.
2 Click the Windows Vista Start button , and click Control Panel.
3 Under Network and Internet, click Connect to the Internet.
The Connect to the Internet window appears.
4 Click either Broadband (PPPoE) or Dial-up, depending on how you want
to connect:
• Choose Broadband if you will use a DSL, satellite modem, cable TV
modem, or Bluetooth wireless technology connection.
• Chose Dial-up if you will use a dial-up modem or ISDN.
NOTE: If you do not know which type of connection to select, click Help me choose
or contact your ISP.
5 Follow the instructions on the screen and use the setup information
provided by your ISP to complete the setup.
Moving Information to a New Computer
You can use your operating system "wizards" to help you transfer files and
other data from one computer to another—for example, from an old
computer to a new computer. For instructions, see the following section that
corresponds to the operating system that your computer is running.
Microsoft® Windows® XP (Optional)
The MicrosoftWindows XP operating system provides the Files and Settings
Transfer Wizard to move data from a source computer to a new computer.
You can transfer data, such as:
• E-mail messages
• Toolbar settings
• Window sizes
• Internet bookmarks 20 Quick Reference Guide
You can transfer the data to the new computer over a network or serial
connection, or you can store it on removable media, such as a writable CD,
for transfer to the new computer.
NOTE: You can transfer information from an old computer to a new computer by
directly connecting a serial cable to the input/output (I/O) ports of the two
computers. To transfer data over a serial connection, you must access the Network
Connections utility from the Control Panel and perform additional configuration
steps, such as setting up an advanced connection and designating the host
computer and the guest computer.
For instructions on setting up a direct cable connection between two computers,
see Microsoft Knowledge Base Article #305621, titled How to Set Up a Direct Cable
Connection Between Two Computers in Windows XP. This information may not be
available in certain countries.
For transferring information to a new computer, you must run the Files and
Settings Transfer Wizard. You can use the optional Operating System media
for this process or you can create a wizard disk with the Files and Settings
Transfer Wizard.
Running the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard With the Operating System Media
NOTE: This procedure requires the Operating System media. This media is optional
and may not be included with certain computers.
To prepare a new computer for the file transfer:
1 Open the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard: click Start→All Programs→
Accessories→ System Tools→ Files and Settings Transfer Wizard.
2 When the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard welcome screen appears,
click Next.
3 On the Which computer is this? screen, click New Computer→ Next.
4 On the Do you have a Windows XP CD? screen, click I will use the wizard
from the Windows XP CD→ Next.
5 When the Now go to your old computer screen appears, go to your old or
source computer. Do not click Next at this time.Quick Reference Guide 21
To copy data from the old computer:
1 On the old computer, insert the Windows XP Operating System media.
2 On the Welcome to Microsoft Windows XP screen, click Perform
additional tasks.
3 Under What do you want to do?, click Transfer files and settings→ Next.
4 On the Which computer is this? screen, click Old Computer→ Next.
5 On the Select a transfer method screen, click the transfer method you
prefer.
6 On the What do you want to transfer? screen, select the items you want to
transfer and click Next.
After the information has been copied, the Completing the Collection
Phase screen appears.
7 Click Finish.
To transfer data to the new computer:
1 On the Now go to your old computer screen on the new computer, click
Next.
2 On the Where are the files and settings? screen, select the method you
chose for transferring your settings and files and click Next.
The wizard reads the collected files and settings and applies them to your
new computer.
When all of the settings and files have been applied, the Finished screen
appears.
3 Click Finished and restart the new computer.
Running the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard Without the Operating System
Media
To run the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard without the Operating System
media, you must create a wizard disk that will allow you to create a backup
image file to removable media.
To create a wizard disk, use your new computer with Windows XP and
perform the following steps:
1 Open the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard: click Start→All Programs→
Accessories→ System Tools→ Files and Settings Transfer Wizard.22 Quick Reference Guide
2 When the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard welcome screen appears,
click Next.
3 On the Which computer is this? screen, click New Computer→ Next.
4 On the Do you have a Windows XP CD? screen, click I want to create a
Wizard Disk in the following drive→ Next.
5 Insert the removable media, such as a writable CD, and click OK.
6 When the disk creation completes and the Now go to your old
computer message appears, do not click Next.
7 Go to the old computer.
To copy data from the old computer:
1 On the old computer, insert the wizard disk.
2 Click Start→ Run.
3 In the Open field on the Run window, browse to the path for fastwiz (on
the appropriate removable media) and click OK.
4 On the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard welcome screen, click Next.
5 On the Which computer is this? screen, click Old Computer→ Next.
6 On the Select a transfer method screen, click the transfer method you
prefer.
7 On the What do you want to transfer? screen, select the items you want to
transfer and click Next.
After the information has been copied, the Completing the Collection
Phase screen appears.
8 Click Finish.
To transfer data to the new computer:
1 On the Now go to your old computer screen on the new computer, click
Next.
2 On the Where are the files and settings? screen, select the method you
chose for transferring your settings and files and click Next. Follow the
instructions on the screen.
The wizard reads the collected files and settings and applies them to your
new computer.Quick Reference Guide 23
When all of the settings and files have been applied, the Finished screen
appears.
3 Click Finished and restart the new computer.
NOTE: For more information about this procedure, search support.dell.com for
document #154781 (What Are The Different Methods To Transfer Files From My Old
Computer To My New Dell™ Computer Using the Microsoft® Windows® XP
Operating System?).
NOTE: Access to the Dell™ Knowledge Base document may not be available in
certain countries.
Microsoft Windows Vista™ (Optional)
1 Click the Windows Vista Start button , and then click Transfer files
and settings→ Start Windows Easy Transfer.
2 In the User Account Control dialog box, click Continue.
3 Click Start a new transfer or Continue a transfer in progress.
Follow the instructions provided on the screen by the Windows Easy Transfer
wizard.
Setting Up a Printer
NOTICE: Complete the operating system setup before you connect a printer to the
computer.
See the documentation that came with the printer for setup information,
including how to:
• Obtain and install updated drivers.
• Connect the printer to the computer.
• Load paper and install the toner or ink cartridge.
For technical assistance, refer to the printer owner's manual or contact the
printer manufacturer. 24 Quick Reference Guide
Printer Cable
Your printer connects to your computer with either a USB cable or a parallel
cable. Your printer may not come with a printer cable, so if you purchase a
cable separately, ensure that it is compatible with your printer and computer.
If you purchased a printer cable at the same time you purchased your
computer, the cable may arrive in the computer’s shipping box.
Connecting Two Monitors
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
If you purchased a graphics card that supports dual monitors, follow these
instructions to connect and enable your monitors. The instructions tell you
how to connect either two monitors (each with a VGA connector), one monitor
with a VGA connector and one monitor with a DVI connector, or a TV.
NOTICE: If you are connecting two monitors that have VGA connectors, you must
have the optional DVI adapter to connect the cable. If you are connecting two
flat-panel monitors, at least one of them must have a VGA connector. If you are
connecting a TV, you may connect only one monitor (VGA or DVI) in addition to the TV.
Connecting Two Monitors With VGA Connectors
1 Shutdown your system.
NOTE: If your computer has integrated video, do not connect either monitor to the
integrated video connector. If the integrated video connector is covered by a cap,
do not remove the cap to connect the monitor or the monitor will not function.
2 Connect one of the monitors to the VGA (blue) connector on the back of
the computer.
3 Connect the other monitor to the optional DVI adapter and connect the
DVI adapter to the DVI (white) connector on the back of the computer.
4 Restart your system.Quick Reference Guide 25
Connecting One Monitor With a VGA Connector and One Monitor With a DVI
Connector
1 Shutdown your system.
2 Connect the VGA connector on the monitor to the VGA (blue) connector
on the back of the computer.
3 Connect the DVI connector on the other monitor to the DVI (white)
connector on the back of the computer.
4 Restart your system.
1 optional DVI adapter 2 DVI (white) connector
3 TV-OUT connector 4 VGA (blue) connector
1
4 3 226 Quick Reference Guide
Connecting a TV
NOTE: You must purchase an S-video cable, available at most consumer electronics
stores, to connect a TV to your computer. It is not included with your computer.
1 Shutdown your system.
2 Connect one end of the S-video cable to the optional TV-OUT connector
on the back of the computer.
3 Connect the other end of the S-video cable to the S-video input connector
on your TV.
4 Connect the VGA or DVI monitor.
5 Restart your system.
Changing the Display Settings
1 After you connect the monitor(s) or TV, turn on the computer.
The Microsoft® Windows® desktop displays on the primary monitor.
2 Enable extended desktop mode in the display settings. In extended
desktop mode, you can drag objects from one screen to the other,
effectively doubling the amount of viewable work space.
Power Protection Devices
Several devices are available to protect against power fluctuations and
failures:
• Surge protectors
• Line conditioners
• Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)
Surge Protectors
Surge protectors and power strips equipped with surge protection help
prevent damage to your computer from voltage spikes that can occur during
electrical storms or after power interruptions. Some surge protector
manufacturers include warranty coverage for certain types of damage.
Carefully read the device warranty when choosing a surge protector. A device
with a higher joule rating offers more protection. Compare joule ratings to
determine the relative effectiveness of different devices.Quick Reference Guide 27
NOTICE: Most surge protectors do not protect against power fluctuations or
power interruptions caused by nearby lightning strikes. When lightning occurs in
your area, disconnect the telephone line from the telephone wall jack and
disconnect your computer from the electrical outlet.
Many surge protectors have a telephone jack for modem protection. See the
surge protector documentation for modem connection instructions.
NOTICE: Not all surge protectors offer network adapter protection. Disconnect the
network cable from the network wall jack during electrical storms.
Line Conditioners
NOTICE: Line conditioners do not protect against power interruptions.
Line conditioners are designed to maintain AC voltage at a fairly constant
level.
Uninterruptible Power Supplies
NOTICE: Loss of power while data is being saved to the hard drive may result in
data loss or file damage.
NOTE: To ensure maximum battery operating time, connect only your computer to
a UPS. Connect other devices, such as a printer, to a separate power strip that
provides surge protection.
A UPS protects against power fluctuations and interruptions. UPS devices
contain a battery that provides temporary power to connected devices when
AC power is interrupted. The battery charges while AC power is available. See
the UPS manufacturer documentation for information on battery operating
time and to ensure that the device is approved by Underwriters Laboratories
(UL).28 Quick Reference Guide
Desktop Computer
Front View
1 USB 2.0 connectors
(2)
Use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect
occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras, or for bootable
USB devices (see "System Setup Options in the online
User’s Guide for more information on booting to a
USB device). It is recommended that you use the back
USB connectors for devices that typically remain
connected, such as printers and keyboards.
2 drive activity light The drive activity light is on when the computer reads
data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light
might also be on when a device such as an optical drive
is operating.
3 power button,
power light
Press the power button to turn on the computer.
The light in the center of this button indicates
power state.
NOTICE: To avoid losing data, do not use the
power button to turn off the computer. Instead,
perform an operating system shutdown.
9 8
3
5
1
10 6 4
2
11 7Quick Reference Guide 29
4 Dell badge This badge can be rotated to match the orientation of
your computer. To rotate the badge, place your fingers
around the outside of the badge, press firmly, and turn
the badge. You can also rotate the badge using the slot
provided near the bottom of the badge.
5 power light The power light illuminates and blinks or remains solid
to indicate different operating states:
• No light — The computer is turned off.
• Steady green — The computer is in a normal
operating state.
• Blinking green — The computer is in a power-saving
mode.
• Blinking or solid amber — See "Power Problems" in
the online User’s Guide.
To exit from a power-saving mode, press the power
button or use the keyboard or the mouse if it is
configured as a wake device in the Windows Device
Manager. For more information about sleep modes and
exiting from a power-saving mode, see the online
User’s Guide.
See"Diagnostic Lights" on page 56" for a description of
light codes that can help you troubleshoot problems
with your computer.
6 diagnostic lights Use the lights to help you troubleshoot a computer
problem based on the diagnostic code. For more
information, see "Diagnostic Lights" on page 56.
7 LAN indicator light This light indicates that a LAN (local area network)
connection is established.
8 headphone and
microphone
connectors
Use the microphone connector to attach a personal
computer microphone. On computers with a sound
card, the microphone connector is on the card.
Use the headphone connector to attach headphones
and most kinds of speakers.
9 floppy drive Can contain an optional floppy drive.
10 optical drive Use the optical drive to play a CD/DVD.
11 Service Tag Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you
access the Dell Support website or call Support.30 Quick Reference Guide
Back View
CAUTION: Ensure that none of the system air vents are blocked. Blocking them
would cause serious thermal problems.
1 card slots Access connectors for any installed PCI and PCI Express cards.
2 back panel
connectors
Plug USB, audio, and other devices into the appropriate
connector (see "Back Panel Connectors" on page 31 for
more information).
3 power connector Insert the power cable.
4 voltage selector
switch
For selecting voltage rating.
5 padlock rings Padlock rings are for attaching a commercially available
antitheft device. The padlock rings allows you to secure the
computer cover to the chassis with a padlock to prevent
unauthorized access to the inside of the computer. To use
the padlock rings, insert a commercially available padlock
through the rings, and then lock the padlock.
6 cover release latch Use this latch to open the computer cover.
1 2 3 4 5 6Quick Reference Guide 31
Back Panel Connectors
1 parallel
connector
Connect a parallel device, such as a printer, to the parallel
connector. If you have a USB printer, plug it into a USB
connector.
NOTE: The integrated parallel connector is automatically
disabled if the computer detects an installed card containing a
parallel connector configured to the same address. For more
information, see "System Setup Options" in the online User’s
Guide.
2 link integrity
light
• Green — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps
network and the computer.
• Orange — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps
network and the computer.
• Yellow — A good connection exists between a 1-Gbps
(1000-Mbps) network and the computer.
• Off — The computer is not detecting a physical
connection to the network.
1 3
98 7
5
6
2 432 Quick Reference Guide
3 network adapter
connector
To attach your computer to a network or broadband device,
connect one end of a network cable to either a network jack
or your network or broadband device. Connect the other
end of the network cable to the network adapter connector
on the back panel of your computer. A click indicates that
the network cable has been securely attached.
NOTE: Do not plug a telephone cable into the network
connector.
On computers with a network adapter card, use the
connector on the card.
It is recommended that you use at least Category 5 wiring
and connectors for your network. If you must use Category 3
wiring, force the network speed to 10 Mbps to ensure
reliable operation.
4 network activity
light
This light flashes yellow when the computer is transmitting
or receiving network data. A high volume of network traffic
may make this light appear to be in a steady "on" state.
5 line-out
connector
Use the green line-out connector to attach headphones and
most speakers with integrated amplifiers.
On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the
card.
6 microphone/linein connector
Use the blue line-in connector to attach a record/playback
device such as a cassette player, CD player, or VCR.
Use the pink microphone connector to attach a personal
computer microphone for voice or musical input into a
sound or telephony program.
On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the
card.
7 USB 2.0
connectors (6)
Use the back USB connectors for devices that typically
remain connected, such as printers and keyboards.
It is recommended that you use the front USB connectors
for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or
cameras.Quick Reference Guide 33
Removing the Computer Cover
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from
the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 10.
NOTE: Ensure that sufficient space exists to support the removed cover.
NOTICE: Ensure that you are working on a level, protected surface to avoid
scratching either the computer or the surface on which it is resting.
2 If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel,
remove the padlock.
3 Slide the cover release latch back as you lift the cover.
8 VGA video
connector
Connect the monitor’s VGA cable to the VGA connector on
the computer.
On computers with a video card, use the connector on the
card.
9 serial connector Connect a serial device, such as a handheld device, to the
serial port. The default designation is COM1 for serial
connector 1.
For more information, see "System Setup Options" in the
online User’s Guide.34 Quick Reference Guide
4 Pivot the cover up using the hinge tabs as leverage points.
5 Remove the cover from the hinge tabs and set it aside on a soft
nonabrasive surface.
1 security cable slot 2 cover release latch
3 padlock ring
2
1
3Quick Reference Guide 35
Inside View of Your Computer
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To avoid electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the
electrical outlet before removing the computer cover.
NOTICE: Be careful when opening the computer cover to ensure that you do not
accidentally disconnect cables from the system board.
1 drives bay
(CD/DVD, floppy, and hard drive)
2 power supply
3 system board 4 card slots
5 heat sink assembly 6 front I/O panel
1
2
3
4
6 536 Quick Reference Guide
System Board Components
1 internal speaker connector
(INT_SPKR)
2 processor connector (CPU)
3 processor power connector
(12VPOWER)
4 memory module connectors
(DIMM_1, DIMM_2)
1 2
13 5
3
15
17
12
4
7
14
11 8 10 9
16
6Quick Reference Guide 37
Replacing the Computer Cover
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions located in the Product Information Guide.
1 Ensure that all cables are connected, and fold cables out of the way.
2 Ensure that no tools or extra parts are left inside the computer.
3 To replace the cover:
a Align the bottom of the cover with the hinge tabs located along the
bottom edge of the computer.
b Using the hinge tabs as leverage, rotate the cover downward to close it.
c Snap the cover into place by pulling back on the cover release latch
and then releasing the latch when the cover is properly seated.
d Ensure that the cover is seated correctly before moving the computer.
5 SATA drive connectors
(SATA0, SATA1)
6 front-panel connector
(FRONTPANEL)
7 power connector
(POWER)
8 SATA drive connectors
(SATA2, SATA3)
9 RTC reset jumper (RTCRST) 10 password jumper (PSWD)
11 battery socket (BATTERY) 12 PCI Express x16 card connector
(SLOT1)
13 PCI card connectors
(SLOT2 and SLOT3)
14 internal buzzer (SPKR)
15 serial/ PS/2 connector (PS2/SER2) 16 fan connector (FAN_CPU)
17 floppy drive connector (FLOPPY)38 Quick Reference Guide
Mini Tower Computer
Front View
1 Service Tag Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you
access the Dell Support website or call Support.
2 optical drive Use the optical drive to play a CD/DVD.
4
8
7
3
2
6
5
1
10
9Quick Reference Guide 39
3 floppy drive A floppy drive is optional.
4 drive activity light The drive activity light is on when the computer reads
data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light
might also be on when a device such as an optical drive
is operating.
5 USB 2.0 connectors
(2)
Use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect
occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras, or for bootable
USB devices (see "System Setup Options" in the online
User’s Guide for more information on booting to a
USB device). It is recommended that you use the back
USB connectors for devices that typically remain
connected, such as printers and keyboards.
6 diagnostic lights Use these lights to help you troubleshoot a computer
problem based on the diagnostic code. For more
information, see "Diagnostic Lights" on page 56.
7 power button,
power light
Press the power button to turn on the computer.
The light in the center of this button indicates
power state.
NOTICE: To avoid losing data, do not use the
power button to turn off the computer. Instead,
perform an operating system shutdown.
8 headphone connector Use the headphone connector to attach headphones
and most kinds of speakers.
9 microphone
connector
Use the microphone connector to attach a personal
computer microphone for voice or musical input into a
sound or telephony program.
On computers with a sound card, the microphone
connector is on the card.
10 LAN indicator light This light indicates that a LAN (local area network)
connection is established.40 Quick Reference Guide
Back View
1 cover release latch This latch allows you to open the computer cover.
2 padlock rings Padlock rings are for attaching a commercially available
antitheft device. The padlock rings allows you to secure the
computer cover to the chassis with a padlock to prevent
unauthorized access to the inside of the computer. To use
the padlock rings, insert a commercially available padlock
through the rings, and then lock the padlock.
4
3
5
6
2
1Quick Reference Guide 41
CAUTION: Ensure that none of the system air vents are blocked. Blocking them
would cause serious thermal problems.
Back Panel Connectors
3 power connector Insert the power cable.
4 voltage selector
switch
For selecting voltage rating.
5 back panel
connectors
Plug USB, audio, and other devices into the appropriate
connector (see "Back Panel Connectors" on page 31 for
more information.
6 card slots Access connectors for any installed PCI and PCI Express cards.
1 parallel
connector
Connect a parallel device, such as a printer, to the parallel
connector. If you have a USB printer, plug it into a USB
connector.
NOTE: The integrated parallel connector is automatically
disabled if the computer detects an installed card containing a
parallel connector configured to the same address. For more
information, see "System Setup Options" in the online User’s
Guide.
1 3
98 7
5
6
2 442 Quick Reference Guide
2 link integrity
light
• Green — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps
network and the computer.
• Orange — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps
network and the computer.
• Yellow — A good connection exists between a 1-Gbps
(1000-Mbps) network and the computer.
• Off — The computer is not detecting a physical
connection to the network.
3 network adapter
connector
To attach your computer to a network or broadband device,
connect one end of a network cable to either a network jack
or your network or broadband device. Connect the other
end of the network cable to the network adapter connector
on the back panel of your computer. A click indicates that
the network cable has been securely attached.
NOTE: Do not plug a telephone cable into the network
connector.
On computers with a network adapter card, use the
connector on the card.
It is recommended that you use at least Category 5 wiring
and connectors for your network. If you must use Category 3
wiring, force the network speed to 10 Mbps to ensure
reliable operation.
4 network activity
light
This light flashes yellow when the computer is transmitting
or receiving network data. A high volume of network traffic
may make this light appear to be in a steady "on" state.
5 line-out
connector
Use the green line-out connector to attach headphones and
most speakers with integrated amplifiers.
On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the
card.
6 microphone/linein connector
Use the blue and pink line-in connector to attach a
record/playback device such as a cassette player, CD player,
or VCR; or personal computer microphone.
7 USB 2.0
connectors (6)
Use the back USB connectors for devices that typically
remain connected, such as printers and keyboards.
It is recommended that you use the front USB connectors
for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or
cameras.Quick Reference Guide 43
Removing the Computer Cover
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from
the electrical outlet before removing the cover.
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 10.
NOTE: Ensure that sufficient space exists to support the removed cover.
NOTICE: Ensure that you are working on a level, protected surface to avoid
scratching either the computer or the surface on which it is resting.
2 Lay your computer on its side with the computer cover facing up.
8 VGA video
connector
Connect the monitor’s VGA cable to the VGA connector on
the computer.
On computers with a video card, use the connector on the
card.
9 serial connector Connect a serial device, such as a handheld device, to the
serial port. The default designation is COM1 for serial
connector 1.
For more information, see "System Setup Options" in the
online User’s Guide.44 Quick Reference Guide
3 Release the computer cover by pulling it away from the front of the
computer and lifting it up.
4 Set the cover aside in a secure location.
1 security cable slot 2 cover release latch
3 padlock ring
2
1
3Quick Reference Guide 45
Inside View of Your Computer
1 floppy drive 2 optical drive
3 power supply 4 system board
5 heat sink assembly 6 hard drive
1
3
4
6
2
546 Quick Reference Guide
System Board Components
1 internal speaker connector
(INT_SPKR)
2 processor connector (CPU)
3 processor power connector
(12VPOWER)
4 memory module connectors
(DIMM_1, DIMM_2)
1 2
6
5
13
3
15
17
12
4
7
14
11 8 10 9
16Quick Reference Guide 47
Replacing the Computer Cover
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions located in the Product Information Guide.
1 Ensure that all cables are connected, and fold cables out of the way.
2 Ensure that no tools or extra parts are left inside the computer.
3 To replace the cover:
a Align the bottom of the cover with the hinge tabs located along the
bottom edge of the computer.
b Using the hinge tabs as leverage, rotate the cover downward to close it.
c Snap the cover into place by pulling back on the cover release latch
and then releasing the latch when the cover is properly seated.
d Ensure that the cover is seated correctly before moving the computer.
4 Move the computer to the upright position.
Solving Problems
Dell provides a number of tools to help you if your computer does not
perform as expected. For the latest troubleshooting information available for
your computer, see the Dell support website at support.dell.com.
5 SATA drive connectors
(SATA0, SATA1)
6 front-panel connector
(FRONTPANEL)
7 power connector
(POWER)
8 SATA drive connectors
(SATA2, SATA3)
9 RTC reset jumper (RTCRST) 10 password jumper (PSWD)
11 battery socket (BATTERY) 12 PCI Express x16 card connector
(SLOT1)
13 PCI card connectors
(SLOT2 and SLOT3)
14 internal buzzer (SPKR)
15 serial/ PS/2 connector (PS2/SER2) 16 fan connector (FAN_CPU)
17 floppy drive connector (FLOPPY)48 Quick Reference Guide
If computer problems occur that require help from Dell, write a detailed
description of the error, beep codes, or diagnostic light patterns, record your
Express Service Code and Service Tag below, and then contact Dell from the
same location as your computer.
For an example of the Express Service Code and Service Tag, see "Finding
Information" in your computer User’s Guide.
Dell Diagnostics
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
When to Use the Dell Diagnostics
If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in
Lockups and Software Problems (see the online User’s Guide for details) and
run the Dell Diagnostics before you contact Dell for technical assistance.
It is recommended that you print these procedures before you begin.
NOTICE: The Dell Diagnostics works only on Dell™ computers.
NOTE: The Drivers and Utilities media is optional and may not ship with your
computer.
See "System Setup" in the online User’s Guide to review your computer’s
configuration information, and ensure that the device that you want to test
displays in the system setup program and is active.
Start the Dell Diagnostics from your hard drive or from the Drivers and
Utilities media.
Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive
The Dell Diagnostics is located on a hidden diagnostic utility partition on
your hard drive.
NOTE: If your computer cannot display a screen image, contact Dell.
1 Ensure that the computer is connected to an electrical outlet that is
known to be working properly.
Express Service Code:
Service Tag:Quick Reference Guide 49
2 Turn on (or restart) your computer.
3 When the DELL™ logo appears, press immediately. Select
Diagnostics from the boot menu and press .
NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to
wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop; then, shut down your
computer and try again.
NOTE: If you see a message stating that no diagnostics utility partition has
been found, run the Dell Diagnostics from the Drivers and Utilities media.
4 Press any key to start the Dell Diagnostics from the diagnostics utility
partition on your hard drive.
Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the Drivers and Utilities Media
1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities media.
2 Shut down and restart the computer.
When the DELL logo appears, press immediately.
NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue
to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop; then, shut down your
computer and try again.
NOTE: The next steps change the boot sequence for one time only. On the
next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in the
system setup program.
3 When the boot device list appears, highlight CD/DVD/CD-RW and press
.
4 Select the Boot from CD-ROM option from the menu that appears and
press .
5 Type 1 to start the CD menu and press to proceed.
6 Select Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics from the numbered list. If
multiple versions are listed, select the version appropriate for your
computer.
7 When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want
to run.50 Quick Reference Guide
Dell Diagnostics Main Menu
1 After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the MainMenu screen appears, click
the button for the option you want.
NOTE: It is recommended that you select Test System to run a complete test on
your computer.
2 After you have selected the Test System option from the main menu, the
following menu appears:
NOTE: It is recommended that you select Extended Test from the menu below to
run a more thorough check of devices in the computer.
3 If a problem is encountered during a test, a message appears with an error
code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and
problem description and contact Dell.
NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located at the top of each test
screen. If you contact Dell, technical support will ask for your Service Tag.
4 If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the
applicable tab described in the following table for more information.
Option Function
Test Memory Run the stand-alone memory test
Test System Run System Diagnostics
Exit Exit the Diagnostics
Option Function
Express Test Performs a quick test of devices in the system. This
typically can take 10 to 20 minutes.
Extended Test Performs a thorough check of devices in the system. This
typically can take an hour or more.
Custom Test Use to test a specific device or customize the tests to be
run.
Symptom Tree This option allows you to select tests based on a
symptom of the problem you are having. This option lists
the most common symptoms.Quick Reference Guide 51
5 When the tests are complete, close the test screen to return to the Main
Menu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and restart the computer, close
the Main Menu screen.
6 Remove the Dell Drivers and Utilities media (if applicable).
Power Lights
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
The power button light (bi-color LED) located on the front of the computer
illuminates and blinks or remains solid to indicate different states:
• If the power light is off, the computer is either turned off or is not
receiving power.
– Reseat the power cable in the power connector on the back of the
computer and the electrical outlet.
Tab Function
Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions
encountered.
Errors Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and
the problem description.
Help Describes the test and may indicate requirements for
running the test.
Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected
device.
The Dell Diagnostics obtains configuration information
for all devices from system setup, memory, and various
internal tests, and it displays the information in the
device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list
may not display the names of all the components
installed on your computer or all devices attached to your
computer.
Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test
settings.52 Quick Reference Guide
– If the computer is plugged into a power strip, ensure that the power
strip is plugged into an electrical outlet and that the power strip is
turned on. Also, bypass power protection devices, power strips, and
power extension cables to verify that the computer turns on properly.
– Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another
device, such as a lamp.
• If the power light is steady green and the computer is not responding:
– Ensure that the display is connected and powered on.
– If the display is connected and powered on, see "Beep Codes" on
page 53.
• If the power light is blinking green, the computer is in standby mode. Press
a key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power button to
resume normal operation.If the power light is green and the computer is
not responding:
– Ensure the display is connected and powered on.
– If the display is connected and powered on, see "Beep Codes" on
page 53.
• If the power light is steady amber, the computer is receiving electrical
power, but a device might be malfunctioning or incorrectly installed.
– Remove and then reinstall the memory modules.
– Remove and then reinstall any cards.
– Remove and then reinstall the graphics card, if applicable.
• If the power light is blinking amber, there may be a power problem or an
internal device malfunction.
– Ensure that all power cables are securely connected to the system
board (see "System Board Components" on page 36).
– Ensure that the main power cable and front panel cable are securely
connected to the system board (see "System Board Components" on
page 36).Quick Reference Guide 53
Beep Codes
Your computer might emit a series of beeps during start-up if the monitor
cannot display errors or problems. This series of beeps, called a beep code,
identifies a problem. For example, beep code 1-3-1 (one possible beep code)
consists of one beep, a burst of three beeps, and then one beep. This beep
code tells you that the computer encountered a memory problem.
Reseating the memory modules may correct the following beep code errors. If
the problem persists, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" in the User’s Guide)
for instructions on obtaining technical assistance.
If you experience any of the following beep code errors, see "Contacting Dell"
in the User’s Guide for instructions on obtaining technical assistance.
Code Cause
1-3-1 through
2-4-4
Memory not being properly identified or used
4-3-1 Memory failure above address 0FFFFh
Code Cause
1-1-2 Microprocessor register failure
1-1-3 NVRAM read/write failure
1-1-4 ROM BIOS checksum failure
1-2-1 Programmable interval timer failure
1-2-2 DMA initialization failure
1-2-3 DMA page register read/write failure
1-3 Video Memory Test failure
1-3-1 through
2-4-4
Memory not being properly identified or used
3-1-1 Slave DMA register failure
3-1-2 Master DMA register failure
3-1-3 Master interrupt mask register failure
3-1-4 Slave interrupt mask register failure54 Quick Reference Guide
System Messages
NOTE: If the message you received is not listed in the table, see the documentation
for either the operating system or the program that was running when the message
appeared.
3-2-2 Interrupt vector loading failure
3-2-4 Keyboard Controller Test failure
3-3-1 NVRAM power loss
3-3-2 Invalid NVRAM configuration
3-3-4 Video Memory Test failure
3-4-1 Screen initialization failure
3-4-2 Screen retrace failure
3-4-3 Search for video ROM failure
4-2-1 No timer tick
4-2-2 Shutdown failure
4-2-3 Gate A20 failure
4-2-4 Unexpected interrupt in protected mode
4-3-1 Memory failure above address 0FFFFh
4-3-3 Timer-chip counter 2 failure
4-3-4 Time-of-day clock stopped
4-4-1 Serial or parallel port test failure
4-4-2 Failure to decompress code to shadowed memory
4-4-3 Math-coprocessor test failure
4-4-4 Cache test failure
ALERT! PREVIOUS ATTEMPTS A T BOOTING THIS SYSTEM HAVE FAILED A T
CHECKPOINT [NNNN]. FO R HELP IN RESOLVING THIS PROBLEM, PLEASE NOTE
THIS CHECKPOINT AND CONTACT DELL TECHNICAL SUPPORT — The computer
failed to complete the boot routine three consecutive times for the same error.
Code CauseQuick Reference Guide 55
CMOS CHECKSUM ERROR — Possible motherboard failure or RTC battery low.
Replace battery.
CPU FAN FAILURE — CPU fan failure. Replace the CPU fan.
DISKETTE DRIVE 0 SEEK FAILURE — A cable may be loose, or the computer
configuration information may not match the hardware configuration. Check cable
connections.
DISKETTE READ FAILURE — The floppy disk may be defective or a cable may be
loose. Replace the floppy disk/check for a loose cable connection.
HARD-DISK DRIVE FAILURE — Possible hard disk drive failure during HDD
POST. Check cables /swap hard disks.
HARD-DISK DRIVE READ FAILURE — Possible HDD failure during HDD boot test.
KEYBOARD FAILURE — Keyboard failure or keyboard cable loose.
NO BOOT DEVICE AVAILABLE — The system cannot detect a bootable device or
partition.
• If the floppy drive is your boot device, ensure that the cables are connected and
that a bootable floppy disk is in the drive.
• If the hard drive is your boot device, ensure that the cables are connected and
that the drive is installed properly and partitioned as a boot device.
• Enter system setup and ensure that the boot sequence information is correct.
NO TIMER TICK INTERRUPT — A chip on the system board might be
malfunctioning or motherboard failure.
NON-SYSTEM DISK O R DISK ERROR — Replace the floppy disk with one that has
a bootable operating system or remove the floppy disk from drive A and restart the
computer.56 Quick Reference Guide
Diagnostic Lights
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions located in the Product Information Guide.
To help you troubleshoot a problem, your computer has four lights labeled 1,
2, 3, and 4 on the front or back panel. The lights can be off or green. When
the computer starts normally, the patterns or codes on the lights change as
the boot process completes. When the computer starts normally, the patterns
or codes on the lights change as the boot process completes. If the POST
portion of system boot completes successfully, all four lights display solid
green. If the computer malfunctions during the POST process, the pattern
displayed on the LEDs may help identify where in the process the computer
halted.
NOTE: The orientation of the diagnostic lights may vary depending on the system
type. The diagnostic lights can appear either vertical or horizontal.
NO T A BOOT DISKETTE — Insert a bootable floppy disk and restart your
computer.
USB OVER CURRENT ERROR — Disconnect the USB device. Use an external
power source for the USB device.
NOTICE - HARD DRIVE SELF MONITORING SYSTEM HAS REPORTED THAT A
PARAMETER HAS EXCEEDED ITS NORMAL OPERATING RANGE. DELL
RECOMMENDS THAT YOU BACK U P YOUR DATA REGULARLY. A PARAMETER OUT
O F RANGE MAY O R MAY NOT INDICATE A POTENTIAL HARD DRIVE PROBLEM —
S.M.A.R.T error, possible HDD failure. This feature can be enabled or disabled in
BIOS setup.Quick Reference Guide 57
Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested Resolution
The computer is in a normal
"off" condition, or a possible
pre-BIOS failure has occurred.
The diagnostic lights are not lit
after the computer successfully
boots to the operating system.
Plug the computer into a
working electrical outlet and
press the power button.
A possible BIOS failure has
occurred; the computer is in
the recovery mode.
Run the BIOS Recovery utility,
wait for recovery completion,
and then restart the computer.
A possible processor failure has
occurred.
Reinstall the processor and
restart the computer.
Memory modules are detected,
but a memory failure has
occurred.
• If you have one memory
module installed, reinstall it
and restart the computer.
(see the online User’s Guide
for instructions on how to
remove and install memory
modules.)
• If you have two or more
memory modules installed,
remove the modules,
reinstall one module, and
then restart the computer. If
the computer starts
normally, reinstall an
additional module.
Continue until you have
identified a faulty module or
reinstalled all modules
without error.
• If available, install properly
working memory of the same
type into your computer.
• If the problem persists,
contact Dell.58 Quick Reference Guide
A possible graphics card failure
has occurred.
• If the computer has a
graphics card, remove the
card, reinstall it, and then
restart the computer.
• If the problem still exists,
install a graphics card that
you know works and restart
the computer.
• If the problem persists or the
computer has integrated
graphics, contact Dell.
A possible floppy or hard drive
failure has occurred.
Reseat all power and data
cables and restart the
computer.
A possible USB failure has
occurred.
Reinstall all USB devices,
check cable connections, and
then restart the computer.
Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested ResolutionQuick Reference Guide 59
No memory modules are
detected.
• If you have one memory
module installed, reinstall it
and restart the computer.
See the online User’s Guide
for instructions on how to
remove and install memory
modules.
• If you have two or more
memory modules installed,
remove the modules,
reinstall one module, and
then restart the computer. If
the computer starts
normally, reinstall an
additional module.
Continue until you have
identified a faulty module or
reinstalled all modules
without error.
• If available, install properly
working memory of the same
type into your computer.
• If the problem persists,
contact Dell.
Memory modules are detected,
but a memory configuration or
compatibility error exists.
• Ensure that no special
memory module/memory
connector placement
requirements exist.
• Verify that the memory
modules that you are
installing are compatible
with your computer.
• If the problem persists,
Contact Dell.
Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested Resolution60 Quick Reference Guide
Clearing Forgotten Passwords
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions located in the Product Information Guide.
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 10.
2 Remove the computer cover (see "Removing the Computer Cover" on
page 43).
3 Locate the 2-pin password jumper (PSWD) on the system board. By
default, Pin1 and Pin2 should be connected. You will need to remove the
jumper and boot the system, as follows.
4 Remove the jumper.
A failure has occurred.
This pattern also displays when
you enter system setup and
may not indicate a problem.
• Ensure that the cables are
properly connected to the
system board from the hard
drive and the optical drive.
• Check the computer
message that appears on
your monitor screen.
• If the problem persists,
Contact Dell.
After POST is complete, all
four diagnostic lights turn
green briefly before turning off
to indicate normal operating
condition.
None.
Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested ResolutionQuick Reference Guide 61
5 Replace the computer cover (see "Replacing the Computer Cover" on
page 37).
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network device
and then plug it into the computer.
6 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn
them on.
7 After the Microsoft® Windows® desktop appears on your computer, shut
down your computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 12).
8 Turn off the monitor and disconnect it from the electrical outlet.
9 Disconnect the computer power cable from the electrical outlet, and press
the power button to ground the system board.
10 Open the computer cover.
11 Locate the 2-pin password jumper (PSWD) on the system board and
attach the jumper to reenable the password feature.
12 Replace the computer cover (see "Replacing the Computer Cover" on
page 37).62 Quick Reference Guide
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack
and then plug it into the computer.
13 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn
them on.
NOTE: This procedure enables the password feature. When you enter system
setup (see "Entering System Setup" in your User’s Guide), both system and
administrator password options appear as Not Set—meaning that the password
feature is enabled but no password is assigned.
14 Assign a new system and/or administrator password.
Clearing CMOS Settings
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions located in the Product Information Guide.
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 10.
NOTE: The computer must be disconnected from the electrical outlet to clear
the CMOS setting.
2 Remove the computer cover (see "Removing the Computer Cover" on
page 43).
3 Remove the computer cover.
4 Reset the current CMOS settings:
a Locate the password (PSWD) and CMOS (RTCRST) jumpers on the
system board (see "Clearing Forgotten Passwords" on page 60).
b Remove the password jumper plug from its pins.
c Place the password jumper plug on the RTCRST pins and wait
approximately 5 seconds.
d Remove the jumper plug from the RTCRST pins and place it back on
the password pins.
5 Replace the computer cover (see "Replacing the Computer Cover" on
page 37).
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or
device and then plug it into the computer.
6 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn
them on.Quick Reference Guide 63
Flashing the BIOS
The BIOS may require flashing when an update is available or when replacing
the system board.
1 Turn on the computer.
2 Locate the BIOS update file for your computer at the Dell Support
website at support.dell.com.
3 Click Download Now to download the file.
4 If the Export Compliance Disclaimer window appears, click Yes, I Accept
this Agreement.
The File Download window appears.
5 Click Save this program to disk, and then click OK.
The Save In window appears.
6 Click the down arrow to view the Save In menu, select Desktop, and then
click Save.
The file downloads to your desktop.
7 Click Close when the Download Complete window appears.
The file icon appears on your desktop and is titled the same as the
downloaded BIOS update file.
8 Double-click the file icon on the desktop and follow the on-screen
instructions.64 Quick Reference GuideIndex 65
Index
B
beep codes, 53
C
CDs
operating system, 9
CMOS settings
clearing, 62
computer
beep codes, 53
components inside, 35, 45
inside view, 35, 45
cover
removing, 33, 43
replacing, 37, 47
D
Dell Diagnostics, 48
Dell support site, 8
diagnostics
beep codes, 53
Dell, 48
documentation
End User License Agreement, 6
ergonomics, 6
online, 8
Product Information Guide, 6
Quick Reference, 6
regulatory, 6
safety, 6
User’s Guide, 6
warranty, 6
E
End User License Agreement, 6
ergonomics information, 6
error messages
beep codes, 53
H
hardware
beep codes, 53
Dell Diagnostics, 48
Help and Support Center, 9
help file
Windows Help and Support
Center, 9
I
installing parts
before you begin, 11
recommended tools, 1266 Index
turning off your computer, 12
Internet connection
about, 17
options, 17
setting up, 18
L
labels
Microsoft Windows, 7
Service Tag, 7, 29, 38
lights
power, 29
M
monitor
clone mode, 26
connect DVI, 24-25
connect TV, 24, 26
connect two, 24-25
connect VGA, 24-25
display settings, 26
extended desktop mode, 26
motherboard. See system board
N
network
Network Setup Wizard, 16
Network Setup Wizard, 16
O
operating system
reinstalling, 9
Operating System CD, 9
P
password
clearing, 60
jumper, 60
power
button, 28, 39
light, 29
line conditioners
protection devices
surge protectors
UPS
printer
cable, 24
connecting, 15, 23
setting up, 15, 23
problems
beep codes, 53
Dell Diagnostics, 48
Product Information Guide, 6
R
regulatory information, 6
ResourceCD
Dell Diagnostics, 48Index 67
S
S.M.A.R.T, 56
safety instructions, 6
Service Tag, 7, 29, 38
Starting the Dell Diagnostics
From the Drivers and
Utilities CD, 49
Starting the Dell Diagnostics
From Your Hard Drive, 48
support website, 8
system board, 36, 46
T
troubleshooting
Dell Diagnostics, 48
Help and Support Center, 9
TV
connect to computer, 24, 26
U
uninterruptible power supply.
See UPS
UPS
User’s Guide, 6
W
warranty information, 6
Windows XP
Help and Support Center, 9
Network Setup Wizard, 16
reinstalling, 9
wizards
Network Setup Wizard, 1668 Indexwww.dell.com | support.dell.com
Dell™ OptiPlex™ 330
Guide de référence rapide
Modèles DCSM et DCNERemarques, avis et précautions
REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent
vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur.
AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d’un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de
données et vous indique comment éviter le problème.
PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement
du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort.
____________________
Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis.
© 2007 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés.
La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc.
est strictement interdite.
Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension,
OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp et Dell OpenManage sont des marques de
Dell Inc. ; Intel, Pentium, et Celeron sont des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation ; Microsoft et
Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation.
D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence
aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt
propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens.
Modèles DCSM et DCNE
Septembre 2007 Réf. JY235 Rév. A00Table des matières 71
Table des matières
Recherche d'informations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Avant de commencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre
ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Ajout et remplacement de pièces . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Configuration de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Installation de votre ordinateur dans
une enceinte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Configuration d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau
d'entreprise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Connexion à une carte réseau . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Configuration réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Connexion à Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel
ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Configuration d'une imprimante . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Raccordement de deux moniteurs . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Périphériques de protection contre les surtensions
électriques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Ordinateur de bureau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Vue frontale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Vue arrière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Connecteurs du panneau arrière . . . . . . . . . 10072 Table des matières
Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Vue intérieure de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Composants de la carte système . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Remplacement du capot de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . 106
Ordinateur mini-tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Vue frontale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Vue arrière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Connecteurs du panneau arrière . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Vue intérieure de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Composants de la carte système . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Remplacement du capot de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . 116
Résolution des problèmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Voyants d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Codes sonores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Messages système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Voyants de diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Effacement des mots de passe oubliés . . . . . . . . . 129
Effacement des paramètres CMOS . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Clignotement du BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Guide de référence rapide 73
Recherche d'informations
REMARQUE : Il se peut que certaines fonctionnalités et certains supports soient
en option et ne soient pas livrés avec votre ordinateur. Certaines fonctionnalités ne
sont pas nécessairement disponibles dans tous les pays.
REMARQUE : Il est possible que des informations supplémentaires soient fournies
avec votre ordinateur.
Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici
• Programme de diagnostic pour
mon ordinateur
• Pilotes pour mon ordinateur
• Logiciel DSS (Desktop System
Software)
Support Drivers and Utilities
REMARQUE : Il se peut que le support Drivers
and Utilities soit en option et qu'il ne soit pas
livré avec tous les ordinateurs.
Les pilotes sont déjà installés sur votre
ordinateur. Vous pouvez utiliser ce support
pour réinstaller les pilotes (reportez-vous au
Guide d'utilisation en ligne) et pour exécuter
Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section
« Dell Diagnostics » à la page 117).
Des fichiers « Lisez-moi » peuvent être inclus
sur votre support ; ces fichiers fournissent des
informations sur les modifications techniques
de dernière minute apportées à votre système
ou des informations de référence destinées aux
techniciens ou aux utilisateurs expérimentés.
REMARQUE : Les dernières mises à jour des
pilotes et de la documentation se trouvent à
l'adresse support.dell.com.74 Guide de référence rapide
• Informations de dépannage de
base
• Comment exécuter Dell
Diagnostics
• Outils et utilitaires
• Comment installer une
imprimante
Guide de référence rapide
REMARQUE : Ce document peut être en option
et n'est pas obligatoirement expédié avec votre
ordinateur.
REMARQUE : Ce document est disponible au
format PDF à l'adresse support.dell.com.
• Informations sur les garanties
• Termes et Conditions
(États-Unis uniquement)
• Consignes de sécurité
• Informations sur les
réglementations
• Informations relatives à
l'ergonomie
• Contrat de licence pour utilisateur
final
Guide d'information sur le produit Dell™
• Comment retirer et remplacer des
pièces
• Caractéristiques
• Comment configurer les
paramètres du système
• Comment déterminer et résoudre
des problèmes
Guide d'utilisation du Dell OptiPlex™ 330
Centre d'aide et de support Microsoft Windows
1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows
Vista, puis sur Aide et support→ User and
system guides (Guides d'utilisation du
système)→System Guides (Guides de
système).
2 Cliquez sur le Guide d'utilisation de votre
ordinateur.
Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez iciGuide de référence rapide 75
• Numéro de service et code de
service express
• Étiquette de licence Microsoft
Windows
Numéro de service et licence Microsoft®
Windows®
Ces étiquettes sont apposées à l'ordinateur.
• Utilisez le numéro de service pour identifier
votre ordinateur lorsque vous accédez au site
Web support.dell.com ou lorsque vous
contactez le service de support.
• Entrez le code de service express pour
orienter votre appel lorsque vous contactez le
service de support.
REMARQUE : Par mesure de sécurité, la
nouvelle étiquette de licence de Microsoft
Windows intègre une partie manquante afin
d'éviter qu'elle ne soit enlevée.
Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici76 Guide de référence rapide
• Solutions — Conseils et astuces de
dépannage, articles de techniciens,
cours en ligne et questions
fréquemment posées
• Forum clients — Discussion en
ligne avec d'autres clients Dell
• Mises à niveau — Informations sur
les mises à niveau des composants,
comme la mémoire, l'unité de
disque dur et le système
d'exploitation
• Service clientèle — Coordonnées,
appels de service et état des
commandes, garantie et
informations sur les réparations
• Service et support — État des
appels de service et historique du
support, contrat de service,
discussions en ligne avec le support
technique
• Service Dell Technical Update —
Notification proactive par e-mail
des mises à jour logicielles et
matérielles de votre ordinateur
• Référence — Documentation de
l'ordinateur, détails sur la
configuration de l'ordinateur,
caractéristiques de produit et livres
blancs
• Téléchargements — Pilotes,
correctifs et mises à jour logicielles
agréés
Site Web de support de Dell — support.dell.com
REMARQUE : Sélectionnez votre région ou
votre secteur d'activité pour afficher le site de
support qui vous concerne.
Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez iciGuide de référence rapide 77
• DSS (Desktop System Software -
Logiciel système de bureau) —
Si vous réinstallez le système
d'exploitation de votre ordinateur,
vous devez également réinstaller
l'utilitaire DSS. DSS fournit des
mises à jour essentielles pour le
système d'exploitation et la prise
en charge des processeurs, des
lecteurs optiques, des
périphériques USB, etc. DSS est
requis pour le bon fonctionnement
de votre ordinateur Dell. Ce
logiciel détecte automatiquement
votre ordinateur et son système
d'exploitation, et installe les mises
à jour appropriées à votre
configuration.
Pour télécharger DSS (Desktop System
Software) :
1 Rendez-vous sur le site support.dell.com,
sélectionnez votre région ou secteur
d'activité, puis saisissez votre numéro de
service.
2 Sélectionnez Drivers & Downloads (Pilotes
et téléchargements) et cliquez sur OK.
3 Cliquez sur votre système d'exploitation et
recherchez le mot-clé Desktop System
Software.
REMARQUE : L'interface utilisateur
support.dell.com peut varier selon vos
sélections.
• Comment utiliser Windows
• Comment utiliser des programmes
et des fichiers
• Comment personnaliser mon
bureau
Centre d'aide et de support de Windows
1 Pour accéder à l'aide et au support de
Windows :
• Sous Windows XP, cliquez sur Démarrer et
sur Aide et support.
• Sous Windows Vista™, cliquez sur le
bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista et sur
Aide et support.
2Tapez un mot ou une expression qui décrit
votre problème, puis cliquez sur l'icône en
forme de flèche.
3 Cliquez sur la rubrique qui décrit votre
problème.
4 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à
l'écran.
• Comment réinstaller mon système
d'exploitation
Support Operating System
REMARQUE : Il se peut que le support
Operating System soit en option et qu'il ne soit
pas livré avec certains ordinateurs.
Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici78 Guide de référence rapide
Avant de commencer
Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur
Respectez les consignes de sécurité suivantes pour vous aider à protéger votre
ordinateur contre les dommages éventuels et pour garantir votre sécurité
personnelle.
PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez
et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit.
AVIS : Manipulez les composants et les cartes avec précaution. Ne touchez pas
les pièces ou les contacts d'une carte. Tenez une carte par les bords ou par la
languette de montage métallique. Tenez les pièces, telles qu'un processeur, par les
bords et non par les broches.
Le système d'exploitation est déjà installé sur
votre ordinateur. Pour réinstaller votre système
d'exploitation, utilisez le disque Operating
System et reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation
en ligne.
Après la réinstallation de votre système
d'exploitation, utilisez le disque Drivers and
Utilities pour réinstaller les pilotes des
périphériques fournis avec l'ordinateur.
L'étiquette de la Clé de produit du système
d'exploitation est apposée sur l'ordinateur.
REMARQUE : La couleur du disque varie selon
le système d'exploitation que vous avez
commandé.
Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez iciGuide de référence rapide 79
AVIS : Seul un technicien d'entretien qualifié doit effectuer les réparations sur
votre ordinateur. Les dommages causés par une personne non agréée par Dell ne
sont pas couverts par votre garantie.
AVIS : Lorsque vous débranchez un câble, tirez sur le connecteur ou sur la
languette de retrait, mais jamais sur le câble lui-même. Certains câbles sont munis
de connecteurs à languettes de verrouillage ; si vous déconnectez ce type de
câble, appuyez sur les languettes de verrouillage vers l'intérieur avant de
déconnecter le câble. Quand vous séparez les connecteurs en tirant dessus, veillez
à les maintenir alignés pour ne pas plier de broches de connecteur. De même,
lorsque vous connectez un câble, assurez-vous que les deux connecteurs sont bien
orientés et alignés.
AVIS : Avant de commencer à travailler sur l'ordinateur, suivez les étapes
suivantes pour éviter de l'endommager.
1 Mettez votre ordinateur hors tension (reportez-vous à la section « Mise
hors tension de l'ordinateur » à la page 80).
PRÉCAUTION : Ne mettez jamais l'ordinateur sous tension si le capot est retiré.
AVIS : Pour déconnecter un câble réseau, débranchez d'abord le câble de votre
ordinateur, puis du périphérique réseau.
2 Débranchez tous les câbles de téléphone ou réseau de l'ordinateur.
3 Déconnectez l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques qui y sont reliés de leur
prise secteur.
4 Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre à la terre la carte système.
AVIS : Avant de toucher quoi que ce soit à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, raccordezvous à la masse en touchant une surface métallique non peinte, par exemple la
partie métallique à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Pendant votre intervention, touchez
périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte de l'ordinateur pour dissiper
toute électricité statique qui pourrait endommager les composants internes.
Ajout et remplacement de pièces
Cette section fournit des procédures pour le retrait et l'installation des
composants dans votre ordinateur. À moins d'indication contraire, les
conditions suivantes doivent exister préalablement à chaque procédure :
• Vous avez suivi les étapes décrites dans les sections « Mise hors tension de
l'ordinateur » à la page 80 et « Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre
ordinateur » à la page 78.80 Guide de référence rapide
• Vous avez lu les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide
d'information sur le produit de Dell™.
• Pour remplacer un composant ou pour l'installer, s'il a été acheté
séparément, effectuez la procédure de retrait en ordre inverse.
Outils recommandés
Les procédures mentionnées dans ce document exigent les outils suivants :
• un petit tournevis à lame plate
• un petit tournevis cruciforme
• une petite pointe en plastique
Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur
AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, enregistrez tous les fichiers ouverts,
fermez-les et quittez toutes les applications avant de procéder à l'arrêt du système.
1 Arrêtez le système d'exploitation :
a Enregistrez et fermez tout fichier ouvert et quittez tous les
programmes d'application en cours d'utilisation.
b Sous le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP, cliquez sur
Démarrer→ Arrêter→ Arrêter.
Sous Microsoft® Windows Vista™, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de
Windows Vista , dans le coin inférieur gauche du bureau, cliquez
sur la flèche dans le coin inférieur droit du menu Démarrer comme
illustré ci-dessous, puis cliquez sur Arrêter.
L'ordinateur s'éteint automatiquement une fois le processus d'arrêt du
système d'exploitation terminé.
2 Vérifiez que l'ordinateur et les périphériques reliés sont éteints. Si votre
ordinateur et les périphériques reliés ne s'éteignent pas automatiquement
lorsque vous arrêtez le système d'exploitation, appuyez sur le bouton
d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant environ 4 secondes pour
les éteindre.Guide de référence rapide 81
Configuration de votre ordinateur
Installation de votre ordinateur dans une enceinte
L'installation de votre ordinateur dans une enceinte peut restreindre la
circulation de l'air et ainsi affecter la performance de votre ordinateur et peut-
être même le faire surchauffer. Suivez les consignes ci-dessous lorsque vous
installez votre ordinateur dans une enceinte :
AVIS : Les spécifications de la température de fonctionnement indiquées dans ce
manuel reflètent la température ambiante maximale de fonctionnement. La
température ambiante doit être prise en compte lorsque vous installez votre
ordinateur dans une enceinte. Par exemple, si la température ambiante est de 25 °C
(77 °F), selon les spécifications de votre ordinateur, vous n'avez qu'une marge de
température de 5° à 10 °C (de 9° à 18 °F) avant d'atteindre la température maximale
de fonctionnement de votre ordinateur. Pour en savoir plus sur les spécifications de
votre ordinateur, reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation en ligne.
• Laissez un dégagement d'au moins 10,2 cm (4 po) au niveau des entrées
d'air de l'ordinateur afin de permettre la circulation de l'air nécessaire à une
bonne ventilation.
• Si l'enceinte est équipée de portes, celles-ci doivent être du type qui
permet une circulation d'air de 30 pour cent à l'intérieur de l'enceinte
(avant et arrière).82 Guide de référence rapide
• Si votre ordinateur est installé dans un coin sur un bureau ou en-dessous
d'un bureau, prévoyez une ouverture d'au moins 5,1 cm (2 po.) entre
l'arrière de l'ordinateur et le mur afin d'assurer la circulation d'air
nécessaire à une ventilation appropriée.
AVIS : N'installez pas votre ordinateur dans une enceinte qui ne permet pas un
écoulement d'air. Une restriction de circulation d'air affecte les performances de
votre ordinateur et peut même le faire surchauffer.Guide de référence rapide 83
Configuration d'un réseau domestique et d'un
réseau d'entreprise
Connexion à une carte réseau
Pour connecter un câble de réseau :
REMARQUE : Raccordez le câble de réseau au connecteur réseau de votre
ordinateur. Ne le raccordez pas au connecteur modem de votre ordinateur. Ne
raccordez pas non plus de câble de réseau à une prise téléphonique murale.
1 Raccordez le câble de réseau au connecteur de carte réseau à l'arrière de
l'ordinateur.
Insérez le câble jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche et tirez dessus doucement pour
vous assurer qu'il est correctement fixé.
2 Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble de réseau à un périphérique réseau.84 Guide de référence rapide
Configuration réseau
Windows XP
L'Assistant Configuration réseau du système d'exploitation Microsoft®
Windows® XP vous guide dans la procédure de partage des fichiers, des
imprimantes ou d'une connexion Internet entre ordinateurs présents au sein
d'un réseau domestique ou d'une petite entreprise.
1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→
Accessoires→ Communications, puis cliquez sur Assistant Configuration
réseau.
2 Sur l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Configuration réseau, cliquez sur
Suivant.
3 Cliquez sur Liste de vérification pour la création d'un réseau.
REMARQUE : La sélection de la méthode de connexion This computer connects
directly to the Internet (Cet ordinateur se connecte directement à Internet) entraîne
l'activation du pare-feu intégré fourni avec Windows XP Service Pack 1 (SP1).
4 Terminez la liste de vérifications et les préparations requises.
5 Revenez à l'Assistant Configuration réseau et suivez les instructions qui
s'affichent.
périphérique
réseau
connecteur de carte
réseau de l'ordinateur
câble de réseau
connecteur
de carte
réseauGuide de référence rapide 85
Windows Vista
Pour modifier votre configuration réseau dans Microsoft® Windows Vista™ :
1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista , puis sur Réseau→
Centre de réseau et de partage.
2 Cliquez sur Configurer une connexion ou un réseau.
3 Sélectionnez le type de connexion réseau souhaité et suivez les
instructions à l'écran.
4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, fermez le Centre de réseau et de partage.
Connexion à Internet
REMARQUE : Les fournisseurs d'accès Internet (FAI) et leurs offres varient selon
les pays.
Pour vous connecter à Internet, vous devez disposer d'un modem ou d'une
connexion réseau et d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet (FAI). Votre fournisseur
d'accès Internet vous proposera une ou plusieurs des options de connexion
Internet suivantes :
• Connexions ADSL qui offrent un accès à Internet à haute vitesse par
l'intermédiaire de votre ligne téléphonique existante ou un service de
téléphone cellulaire. Avec une connexion ADSL, vous pouvez accéder à
Internet et utiliser votre téléphone sur la même ligne simultanément.
• Connexions modem par câble qui offrent un accès à Internet à haute
vitesse par l'intermédiaire de la ligne TV câblée locale.
• Connexions modem par satellite qui offrent un accès à Internet à haute
vitesse par l'intermédiaire d'un système de télévision par satellite.
• Connexions d'accès à distance qui offrent un accès à Internet par
l'intermédiaire d'une ligne téléphonique. Ces connexions sont beaucoup
plus lentes que les connexions ADSL et de modem par câble (ou satellite).
• Connexions LAN sans fil qui offrent un accès à Internet par l'intermédiaire
de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth®.
Si vous utilisez une connexion d'accès à distance, connectez une ligne
téléphonique au connecteur du modem sur votre ordinateur et à la prise
téléphonique murale avant de configurer la connexion Internet. Si vous
utilisez une connexion ADSL ou modem par câble/satellite, contactez votre
fournisseur d'accès Internet (FAI) ou votre fournisseur de service de
téléphone cellulaire pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration.86 Guide de référence rapide
Configuration de votre connexion Internet
Pour configurer une connexion Internet à l'aide du raccourci de bureau d'un
fournisseur d'accès Internet fourni :
1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes.
2 Double-cliquez sur l'icône d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet sur le bureau
Microsoft® Windows®.
3 Pour effectuer la configuration, suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à
l'écran.
Si vous ne voyez pas l'icône d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet sur votre bureau
ou que vous souhaitez configurer une connexion Internet avec un autre FAI,
suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous et appropriée au système d'exploitation
que vous utilisez.
REMARQUE : Si vous rencontrez des problèmes de connexion à Internet,
reportez-vous à la section « Configuration d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau
d'entreprise » à la page 83. Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à Internet alors
que vous l'avez fait auparavant, il est possible que le fournisseur d'accès Internet
subisse une interruption de services. Contactez-le pour vérifier l'état des services
ou essayez de vous connecter ultérieurement.
Windows XP
1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes.
2 Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Internet Explorer.
L'Assistant Nouvelle connexion s'affiche.
3 Cliquez sur Connecter à Internet.
4 Dans la fenêtre suivante, cliquez sur l'option appropriée :
• Si vous ne disposez pas de fournisseur d'accès Internet et souhaitez en
sélectionner un, cliquez sur Choisir dans une liste de fournisseurs de
services Internet.
• Si vous avez déjà reçu les informations de configuration de votre
fournisseur de services Internet, mais pas le CD de configuration,
cliquez sur Configurer ma connexion manuellement.
• Si vous disposez d'un CD, cliquez sur Utiliser le CD fourni par mon
fournisseur de services Internet.
5 Cliquez sur Suivant.Guide de référence rapide 87
Si vous sélectionnez Configurer ma connexion manuellement, passez à
l'étape 6. Sinon, suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour
terminer la configuration.
REMARQUE : Si vous ne savez pas quel type de connexion sélectionner, contactez
votre fournisseur d'accès Internet.
6 Cliquez sur l'option appropriée sous Comment souhaitez-vous vous
connecter à Internet ?, puis cliquez sur Suivant.
7 Utilisez les informations fournies par votre fournisseur d'accès Internet
pour terminer la configuration.
Windows Vista™
REMARQUE : Veillez à avoir à portée de main les informations concernant votre
FAI. Si vous n'avez pas de FAI, l'Assistant Connexion à Internet vous aide à en
trouver un.
1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes.
2 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista , puis sur Panneau
de configuration.
3 Sous Réseau et Internet, cliquez sur Connexion à Internet.
La fenêtre Connexion à Internet s'affiche.
4 Cliquez sur Large bande (PPPoE) ou Accès à distance, selon la façon dont
vous souhaitez vous connecter :
• Choisissez Large bande si vous comptez utiliser une connexion ADSL,
un modem par satellite, un modem par câble ou la technologie sans fil
Bluetooth.
• Choisissez Accès à distance si vous comptez utiliser un modem
d'accès à distance ou le RNIS.
REMARQUE : Si vous ne savez pas quel type de connexion sélectionner, cliquez
sur Aidez-moi à choisir ou contactez votre FAI.
5 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran et utilisez les informations
de configuration fournies par votre FAI pour terminer la procédure de
configuration.88 Guide de référence rapide
Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur
Vous pouvez utiliser les « Assistants » de votre système d'exploitation pour
transférer des fichiers et toute autre donnée d'un ordinateur à l'autre, par
exemple d'un ancien ordinateur vers un nouvel ordinateur. Pour plus
d'informations, reportez-vous à la section correspondant au système
d'exploitation que vous utilisez.
Microsoft® Windows® XP (optionnel)
Le système d'exploitation MicrosoftWindows XP fournit l'Assistant Transfert
de fichiers et de paramètres pour déplacer les données de l'ordinateur source
vers un nouvel ordinateur. Vous pouvez transférer des données telles que :
• messages e-mail
• paramètres de la barre d'outils
• tailles de fenêtre
• signets Internet
Vous pouvez transférer les données vers un nouvel ordinateur en utilisant une
connexion réseau ou série, ou les stocker sur un support amovible, comme un
CD inscriptible.
REMARQUE : Vous pouvez transférer les informations d'un ancien ordinateur vers
un nouveau en connectant directement un câble série aux ports d'entrée/sortie
(E/S) des deux ordinateurs. Pour le transfert de données par connexion série, vous
devez accéder à l'utilitaire Connexions réseau depuis le Panneau de configuration
et passer par des étapes de configuration supplémentaires, comme le paramétrage
d'une connexion avancée et la désignation de l'ordinateur hôte et invité.
Pour des instructions sur la configuration d'une connexion à câble directe entre
deux ordinateurs, reportez-vous à la base de connaissances de Microsoft Article
nº 305621, intitulé How to Set Up a Direct Cable Connection Between Two
Computers in Windows XP (Comment configurer une connexion à câble directe
entre deux ordinateurs sous Windows XP). Il se peut que ces informations ne soient
pas disponibles dans certains pays.
Pour transférer des informations vers un nouvel ordinateur, vous devez lancer
l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez
utiliser le support Operating System en option ou créer un disque Assistant à
l'aide de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres.Guide de référence rapide 89
Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres avec le support
Operating System
REMARQUE : Le support Operating system est requis. Toutefois, ce support est en
option et n'est pas obligatoirement expédié avec certains ordinateurs.
Pour préparer un nouvel ordinateur au transfert de fichiers :
1 Ouvrez l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres : cliquez sur
Démarrer→ Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système→
Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres.
2 Lorsque l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de
paramètres s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant.
3 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur,
puis sur Suivant.
4 Dans l'écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur
J'utiliserai l'Assistant du CD-ROM de Windows XP→ Suivant.
5 Lorsque l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur s'affiche, allez
à l'ancien ordinateur ou ordinateur source. Ne cliquez pas sur Suivant à ce
moment.
Pour copier les données à partir de l'ancien ordinateur :
1 Sur l'ancien ordinateur, insérez le support Operating System pour
Windows XP.
2 Dans l'écran Bienvenue dans Microsoft Windows XP, cliquez sur
Effectuer des tâches supplémentaires.
3 Sous Que voulez-vous faire ?, cliquez sur Transférer des fichiers et des
paramètres→ Suivant.
4 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien
ordinateur→ Suivant.
5 Dans l'écran Sélectionnez une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur la
méthode de transfert de votre choix.
6 Dans l'écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à
transférer, puis cliquez sur Suivant.
Une fois les informations copiées, l'écran Fin de la phase de collecte des
données apparaît.
7 Cliquez sur Terminer.90 Guide de référence rapide
Pour transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur :
1 Dans l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur sur le nouvel
ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant.
2 Dans l'écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?, sélectionnez la
méthode de transfert de vos paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur Suivant.
L'Assistant lit les paramètres et fichiers recueillis, puis les applique à votre
nouvel ordinateur.
Lorsque tous les paramètres et fichiers ont été appliqués, l'écran Terminé
s'affiche.
3 Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur.
Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le support
Operating System
Pour exécuter l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le support
Operating System, il faut créer un disque Assistant qui va permettre la
création d'un fichier d'image de sauvegarde pour support amovible.
Pour créer un disque Assistant, servez-vous de votre nouvel ordinateur doté de
Windows XP et suivez les étapes ci-dessous :
1 Ouvrez l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres : cliquez sur
Démarrer→ Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système→
Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres.
2 Lorsque l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de
paramètres s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant.
3 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur,
puis sur Suivant.
4 Dans l'écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur Je
désire créer un disque Assistant dans le lecteur suivant→ Suivant.
5 Insérez le support amovible, tel qu'un CD inscriptible, puis cliquez sur OK.
6 Lorsque la création du disque est terminée et que le message Now go to
your old computer (Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur)
apparaît, ne cliquez pas sur Suivant.
7 Allez à votre ancien ordinateur.Guide de référence rapide 91
Pour copier les données à partir de l'ancien ordinateur :
1 Insérez le disque Assistant sur l'ancien ordinateur.
2 Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Exécuter.
3 Dans le champ Ouvrir de la fenêtre Exécuter, recherchez le chemin fastwiz
(pour le support amovible approprié) et cliquez sur OK.
4 Dans l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de
paramètres, cliquez sur Suivant.
5 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien
ordinateur→ Suivant.
6 Dans l'écran Sélectionnez une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur la
méthode de transfert de votre choix.
7 Dans l'écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à
transférer, puis cliquez sur Suivant.
Une fois les informations copiées, l'écran Fin de la phase de collecte des
données apparaît.
8 Cliquez sur Terminer.
Pour transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur :
1 Dans l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur sur le nouvel
ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant.
2 Dans l'écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?, sélectionnez la
méthode de transfert de vos paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur
Suivant. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran.
L'Assistant lit les paramètres et fichiers recueillis, puis les applique à votre
nouvel ordinateur.
Lorsque tous les paramètres et fichiers ont été appliqués, l'écran Terminé
s'affiche.
3 Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur.
REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations sur cette procédure, rendez-vous sur le
site Web support.dell.com pour accéder au document nº 154781 (What Are The
Different Methods To Transfer Files From My Old Computer To My New Dell™
Computer Using the Microsoft® Windows® XP Operating System? [Quelles sont les
différentes méthodes pour transférer des fichiers à partir de mon ancien ordinateur
vers mon nouvel ordinateur Dell™ à l'aide du système d'exploitation Microsoft®
Windows® XP ?]).92 Guide de référence rapide
REMARQUE : Certains pays peuvent ne pas avoir accès au document de la base
de connaissances Dell™.
Microsoft Windows Vista™ (optionnel)
1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista , puis sur Transférer
des fichiers et des paramètres→ Start Windows Easy Transfer (Lancer le
transfert de fichiers et de paramètres Windows).
2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle de compte d'utilisateur, cliquez sur
Continuer.
3 Cliquez sur Lancer un nouveau transfert ou Continuer un transfert en
cours.
Suivez les instructions affichées à l'écran par l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers
et de paramètres Windows.
Configuration d'une imprimante
AVIS : Effectuez la configuration du système d'exploitation avant de connecter une
imprimante à l'ordinateur.
Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec l'imprimante pour obtenir des
informations sur la configuration, notamment :
• Obtenir et installer les pilotes mis à jour.
• Connecter l'imprimante à l'ordinateur.
• Charger le papier et installer la cartouche de toner ou d'encre.
Consultez le Manuel du propriétaire de l'imprimante pour obtenir une
assistance technique ou contactez le fabricant de l'imprimante.
Câble de l'imprimante
L'imprimante se connecte à l'ordinateur avec un câble USB ou un câble
parallèle. Il est possible que l'imprimante soit livrée sans câble. Par
conséquent, si vous achetez un câble séparément, assurez-vous qu'il est
compatible avec votre imprimante et votre ordinateur. Si vous avez acheté un
câble d'imprimante en même temps que l'ordinateur, il est possible qu'il vous
soit livré avec ce dernier. Guide de référence rapide 93
Raccordement de deux moniteurs
PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez
et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit.
Si vous avez acheté une carte graphique prenant en charge deux moniteurs,
suivez les instructions ci-dessous pour connecter et activer vos moniteurs. Les
instructions vous indiquent la façon de raccorder deux moniteurs (chacun
disposant d'un connecteur VGA), l'un disposant d'un connecteur VGA et
l'autre disposant d'un connecteur DVI ou un téléviseur.
AVIS : Si vous raccordez deux moniteurs ayant des connecteurs VGA, vous devez
disposer de l'adaptateur DVI en option pour pouvoir connecter le câble. Si vous
raccordez deux moniteurs à écran plat, au moins un des moniteurs doit être équipé
d'un connecteur VGA. Si vous connectez un téléviseur, vous ne pouvez raccorder
qu'un moniteur (VGA ou DVI) en plus du téléviseur.
Raccordement de deux moniteurs ayant des connecteurs VGA
1 Mettez votre système hors tension.
REMARQUE : Si votre ordinateur dispose de la vidéo intégrée, ne connectez
aucun moniteur au connecteur vidéo intégré. Si le connecteur vidéo intégré est
couvert d'un capot, ne retirez pas le capot pour connecter le moniteur, sinon le
moniteur ne fonctionnera pas.
2 Connectez l'un des moniteurs au connecteur VGA (bleu) situé à l'arrière
de l'ordinateur.
3 Connectez l'autre moniteur à l'adaptateur DVI en option, puis connectez
l'adaptateur DVI au connecteur DVI (blanc) situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur.
4 Redémarrez votre système.94 Guide de référence rapide
Raccordement d'un moniteur disposant d'un connecteur VGA et d'un autre
disposant d'un connecteur DVI
1 Mettez votre système hors tension.
2 Connectez le connecteur VGA sur le moniteur au connecteur VGA (bleu)
situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur.
3 Connectez le connecteur DVI de l'autre moniteur au connecteur DVI
(blanc) situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur.
4 Redémarrez votre système.
Connexion d'un téléviseur
REMARQUE : Pour connecter un téléviseur à votre ordinateur, vous devez acheter
un câble S-vidéo, disponible chez la plupart des revendeurs de composants
électroniques. Ce câble n'est pas inclus avec votre ordinateur.
1 Mettez votre système hors tension.
2 Branchez une extrémité du câble S-vidéo dans le connecteur de sortie
TV en option situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur.
1 adaptateur DVI en option 2 connecteur DVI (blanc)
3 connecteur sortie TV 4 connecteur VGA (bleu)
1
4 3 2Guide de référence rapide 95
3 Branchez l'autre extrémité du câble S-vidéo au connecteur d'entrée
TV S-vidéo.
4 Connectez le moniteur VGA ou DVI.
5 Redémarrez votre système.
Modification des paramètres d'affichage
1 Après avoir connecté le(s) moniteur(s) ou le téléviseur, allumez l'ordinateur.
Le bureau Microsoft® Windows® s'affiche sur le moniteur principal.
2 Activez le mode Bureau étendu dans les paramètres d'affichage. En mode
Bureau étendu, vous pouvez faire glisser des objets d'un écran à l'autre, ce
qui a pour effet de doubler l'espace de travail d'affichage.
Périphériques de protection contre les
surtensions électriques
Plusieurs périphériques peuvent vous protéger contre les fluctuations de la
tension et les pannes d'alimentation :
• Parasurtenseurs
• Filtres de ligne
• Onduleurs
Parasurtenseurs
Les parasurtenseurs et les rampes d'alimentation équipées d'une protection
contre la surtension réduisent les risques d'endommagement de votre
ordinateur provoqués par les pointes de tension pouvant survenir au cours
d'un orage électrique ou suite à une coupure de courant. Certains fabricants
offrent également une garantie contre certains types de dégâts. Lisez
attentivement la garantie du parasurtenseur que vous achetez. Un protecteur
doté d'une valeur nominale en joules plus élevée offre une meilleure
protection. Comparez les valeurs nominales, en joules, afin de déterminer
l'efficacité relative des différents dispositifs.
AVIS : La plupart des parasurtenseurs ne protègent pas contre les fluctuations de
tension ou les coupures de courant. Lorsqu'un orage est proche, débranchez la
ligne téléphonique de la prise murale et déconnectez votre ordinateur de la prise de
courant.96 Guide de référence rapide
De nombreux parasurtenseurs sont équipés d'une prise téléphonique pour
assurer la protection du modem. Consultez la documentation du
parasurtenseur pour obtenir des instructions sur la connexion du modem.
AVIS : Certains parasurtenseurs n'offrent pas de protection pour les cartes réseau.
Déconnectez le câble de réseau de la prise réseau murale pendant les orages.
Filtres de ligne
AVIS : Les filtres de ligne n'offrent pas de protection contre les coupures de
courant.
Ils sont conçus pour maintenir la tension CA à un niveau relativement
constant.
Onduleurs
AVIS : Une baisse de tension pendant l'enregistrement des données sur le disque
dur peut provoquer une perte de données ou la corruption du fichier.
REMARQUE : Pour optimiser le temps de fonctionnement de la batterie, connectez
uniquement votre ordinateur à un onduleur. Connectez les autres périphériques,
tels que l'imprimante, à une rampe d'alimentation différente équipée d'un
parasurtenseur.
Les onduleurs protègent contre les fluctuations de tension et les coupures de
courant. Ils incluent une batterie qui alimente temporairement les
périphériques connectés lorsque l'alimentation secteur est coupée. La
batterie se charge lorsque l'alimentation secteur est disponible. Consultez la
documentation fournie par le fabricant de l'onduleur afin d'obtenir des
informations sur la durée de fonctionnement de la batterie et vous assurer
que le dispositif est approuvé par Underwriters Laboratories (UL).Guide de référence rapide 97
Ordinateur de bureau
Vue frontale
1 connecteurs
USB 2.0 (2)
Utilisez les connecteurs USB frontaux pour connecter les
périphériques dont vous ne vous servez qu'occasionnellement, tels
qu'une manette de jeu ou une caméra, ou des périphériques USB
amorçables (reportez-vous à la section « Options de
configuration du système » dans le Guide d'utilisation en ligne
pour de plus amples informations sur l'amorçage à partir d'un
périphérique USB). Il est recommandé d'utiliser les connecteurs
USB situés à l'arrière pour les périphériques qui restent
connectés, comme une imprimante ou un clavier.
2 voyant d'activité
du lecteur
Le voyant d'activité du lecteur s'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou
écrit des données sur l'unité de disque dur. Le voyant peut
également être allumé lorsqu'un périphérique, comme un
lecteur optique, fonctionne.
3 bouton
d'alimentation,
voyant
d'alimentation
Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour allumer l'ordinateur.
Le voyant qui se trouve au centre de ce bouton indique l'état de
l'alimentation.
AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, n'utilisez pas le
bouton d'alimentation pour éteindre l'ordinateur. Procédez
plutôt à un arrêt du système d'exploitation.
9 8
3
5
1
10 6 4
2
11 798 Guide de référence rapide
4 badge Dell Vous pouvez faire pivoter ce badge pour l'aligner sur l'orientation
de votre ordinateur. Pour le faire pivoter, placez vos doigts sur le
pourtour du badge, appuyez fermement dessus, puis tournez-le.
Vous pouvez également le faire pivoter à l'aide de l'encoche
située vers le bas du badge.
5 voyant
d'alimentation
Le voyant d'alimentation s'allume et clignote ou reste fixe, selon
l'état de fonctionnement :
• Éteint — L'ordinateur est éteint.
• Vert fixe — L'ordinateur fonctionne normalement.
• Vert clignotant — L'ordinateur est en mode d'économie
d'énergie.
• Orange clignotant ou fixe — Reportez-vous à la section
« Problèmes d'alimentation » du Guide d'utilisation en ligne.
Pour quitter le mode d'économie d'énergie, appuyez sur le
bouton d'alimentation ou utilisez le clavier ou la souris si ce
périphérique est configuré comme un périphérique de réveil
dans le Gestionnaire de périphériques Windows. Pour plus
d'informations sur les modes de mise en veille et sur la façon de
quitter le mode d'économie d'énergie, reportez-vous au Guide
d'utilisation en ligne.
Reportez-vous à la section « Voyants de diagnostic » à la page 126
pour obtenir la description des codes lumineux qui pourront vous
aider à résoudre les problèmes rencontrés avec votre ordinateur.
6 voyants de
diagnostic
Ces voyants vous aident à résoudre les problèmes informatiques
d'après le code de diagnostic. Pour plus d'informations, reportezvous à la section « Voyants de diagnostic » à la page 126.
7 voyant LAN Ce voyant indique qu'une connexion LAN (réseau local) est
établie.
8 casque et
connecteurs
microphone
Permet de connecter un microphone d'ordinateur personnel. Sur
les ordinateurs équipés d'une carte son, le connecteur de
microphone est situé sur la carte.
Permet de connecter le casque et la plupart des haut-parleurs.
9 lecteur de
disquette
Peut contenir un lecteur de disquette optionnel.
10 lecteur optique Permet de jouer un CD/DVD.
11 numéro de
service
Utilisez le numéro de service pour identifier votre ordinateur
lorsque vous accédez au site Web de support de Dell ou que vous
contactez le support technique.Guide de référence rapide 99
Vue arrière
PRÉCAUTION : Assurez-vous qu'aucune entrée d'air du système n’est bloquée.
Cela peut produire des problèmes thermiques graves.
1 logements de carte Permettent d'accéder aux connecteurs de toutes les cartes PCI
et PCI Express installées.
2 connecteurs du
panneau arrière
Branchez les périphériques USB, audio et autres dans le
connecteur approprié (reportez-vous à la section
« Connecteurs du panneau arrière » à la page 100 pour
obtenir plus d'informations).
3 connecteur
d'alimentation
Insérez le câble d'alimentation.
4 sélecteur de tension Permet de sélectionner la capacité en tension.
5 anneaux pour
cadenas
Les anneaux pour cadenas permettent de connecter un
dispositif antivol offert sur le marché. Ils permettent
également de fixer le capot de l'ordinateur au châssis à
l'aide d'un cadenas afin d'empêcher un accès non autorisé à
l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. Pour utiliser les anneaux pour
cadenas, insérez un cadenas offert sur le marché à travers
les anneaux, puis verrouillez le cadenas.
6 loquet de fermeture
du capot
Ce loquet permet d'ouvrir le capot de l'ordinateur.
1 2 3 4 5 6100 Guide de référence rapide
Connecteurs du panneau arrière
1 connecteur
parallèle
Permet de connecter un périphérique parallèle, tel qu'une
imprimante. Si vous avez une imprimante USB, raccordez-la à
un connecteur USB.
REMARQUE : Le connecteur parallèle intégré est
automatiquement désactivé si l'ordinateur détecte une carte
installée contenant un connecteur parallèle configuré sur la
même adresse. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la
section « Options du programme de configuration » du Guide
d'utilisation en ligne.
2 voyant d'intégrité
de la liaison
• Vert — Une bonne connexion est établie entre un réseau à 10
Mb/s et l'ordinateur.
• Orange — Une bonne connexion est établie entre un réseau à
100 Mb/s et l'ordinateur.
• Jaune — Une bonne connexion est établie entre un réseau à 1
Gb/s (ou 1000 Mb/s) et l'ordinateur.
• Éteint — L'ordinateur ne détecte pas de connexion physique
au réseau.
1 3
98 7
5
6
2 4Guide de référence rapide 101
3 connecteur de
carte réseau
Pour connecter l'ordinateur à un périphérique réseau ou large
bande, branchez l'une des extrémités d'un câble réseau à une
prise réseau, un périphérique réseau ou un périphérique large
bande. Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble au connecteur de
carte réseau situé sur le panneau arrière de votre ordinateur. Un
déclic indique que le câble de réseau a été correctement
installé.
REMARQUE : Ne branchez pas un câble téléphonique au
connecteur réseau.
Sur les ordinateurs disposant d'une carte d'adaptateur réseau,
utilisez le connecteur situé sur cette carte.
Il est recommandé d'utiliser au moins un câblage et des
connecteurs de catégorie 5 pour le réseau. Si vous devez utiliser
un câblage de catégorie 3, forcez la vitesse réseau à 10 Mb/s
pour garantir un fonctionnement fiable.
4 voyant d'activité
réseau
Ce voyant est jaune clignotant lorsque l'ordinateur transmet ou
reçoit des données réseau. Un trafic réseau important peut
donner l'impression que ce voyant est fixe.
5 connecteur ligne
de sortie
Utilisez le connecteur ligne de sortie vert pour raccorder le
casque et la plupart des haut-parleurs dotés d'amplificateurs
intégrés.
Sur les ordinateurs équipés d'une carte son, utilisez le
connecteur qui se trouve sur cette carte.
6 connecteur
microphone/
ligne d'entrée
Utilisez le connecteur ligne d'entrée bleu pour raccorder un
appareil d'enregistrement/de lecture, tel qu'un lecteur de
cassette, un lecteur de CD ou un magnétoscope.
Utilisez le connecteur de microphone rose pour raccorder un
microphone d'ordinateur personnel destiné à une entrée vocale
ou musicale dans un programme sonore ou de téléphonie.
Sur les ordinateurs équipés d'une carte son, utilisez le
connecteur qui se trouve sur cette carte.
7 connecteurs
USB 2.0 (6)
Utilisez les connecteurs USB situés à l'arrière pour les
périphériques connectés en permanence, comme l'imprimante
et le clavier.
Il est recommandé d'utiliser les connecteurs USB frontaux pour
les périphériques connectés occasionnellement, comme les
manettes de jeu ou les appareils photo.102 Guide de référence rapide
Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur
PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez
et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit.
PRÉCAUTION : Pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez
toujours votre ordinateur de la prise électrique avant de retirer le capot.
1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la
page 78.
REMARQUE : Assurez-vous qu'il y a assez d'espace pour supporter le capot retiré.
AVIS : Assurez-vous de travailler sur une surface de niveau et protégée afin
d'éviter des égratignures sur l'ordinateur ou la surface sur laquelle il repose.
2 Si vous avez installé un cadenas dans l'anneau prévu à cet effet sur le
panneau arrière, retirez-le.
3 Faites glisser le loquet de fermeture du capot vers l'arrière tout en
soulevant le capot.
8 connecteur vidéo
VGA
Connectez le câble VGA du moniteur au connecteur VGA sur
l'ordinateur.
Sur les ordinateurs équipés d'une carte vidéo, utilisez le
connecteur qui se trouve sur cette carte.
9 connecteur série Connectez un périphérique série, tel qu'un PDA, au port série.
La désignation par défaut est COM1 pour le connecteur série 1.
Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Options
du programme de configuration » du Guide d'utilisation en
ligne.Guide de référence rapide 103
4 Faites pivoter le capot de l'ordinateur vers le haut en utilisant les
languettes des charnières comme leviers.
5 Retirez le capot des languettes de charnière et mettez-le de côté sur une
surface douce non abrasive.
1 emplacement pour câble de
sécurité
2 loquet de fermeture du capot
3 anneau pour cadenas
2
1
3104 Guide de référence rapide
Vue intérieure de votre ordinateur
PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez
et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit.
PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise
secteur de votre ordinateur avant d'ouvrir le capot de l'ordinateur.
AVIS : Lorsque vous ouvrez le capot de l'ordinateur, prenez soin de ne pas
déconnecter de câbles de la carte système accidentellement.
1 baie de lecteurs
(CD/DVD, disquette et disque dur)
2 bloc d'alimentation
3 carte système 4 logements de carte
5 assemblage du dissipateur de
chaleur
6 panneau d'E/S avant
1
2
3
4
6 5Guide de référence rapide 105
Composants de la carte système
1 connecteur de haut-parleur interne
(INT_SPKR)
2 connecteur du processeur (UC)
3 connecteur d'alimentation du
processeur (12VPOWER)
4 connecteurs de module de mémoire
(DIMM_1, DIMM_2)
1 2
13 5
3
15
17
12
4
7
14
11 8 10 9
16
6106 Guide de référence rapide
Remplacement du capot de l'ordinateur
PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez
et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit.
1 Vérifiez que tous les câbles sont connectés et pliez-les de sorte qu'ils ne
gênent pas.
2 Vérifiez que vous n'avez rien oublié à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur.
3 Pour remettre en place le capot :
a Alignez le bas du capot sur les languettes de charnière situées le long
du bord inférieur de l'ordinateur.
b Faites pivoter le capot vers le bas en utilisant les languettes de
charnière comme leviers et fermez-le.
c Enclenchez le capot en place en tirant vers l'arrière le loquet de
fermeture du capot, puis en le relâchant, une fois le capot
correctement installé.
d Vérifiez que le capot est correctement installé avant de déplacer
l'ordinateur.
5 connecteurs de disque SATA
(SATA0, SATA1)
6 connecteur du panneau avant
(FRONTPANEL)
7 connecteur d'alimentation
(POWER)
8 connecteurs de disque SATA
(SATA2, SATA3)
9 cavalier de réinitialisation RTC
(RTCRST)
10 cavalier du mot de passe (PSWD)
11 support de pile (BATTERY) 12 connecteur de carte PCI Express
x16 (SLOT1)
13 connecteurs de carte PCI
(SLOT2 et SLOT3)
14 avertisseur interne (SPKR)
15 connecteur série/ PS/2 (PS2/SER2) 16 connecteur du ventilateur
(FAN_CPU)
17 connecteur pour lecteur de
disquette (FLOPPY)Guide de référence rapide 107
Ordinateur mini-tour
Vue frontale
1 numéro de service Utilisez le numéro de service pour identifier votre
ordinateur lorsque vous accédez au site Web de support
de Dell ou que vous contactez le support technique.
2 lecteur optique Permet de jouer un CD/DVD.
4
8
7
3
2
6
5
1
10
9108 Guide de référence rapide
3 lecteur de disquette Un lecteur de disquette est optionnel.
4 voyant d'activité du
lecteur
Le voyant d'activité du lecteur s'allume lorsque
l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données sur l'unité de
disque dur. Le voyant peut également être allumé
lorsqu'un périphérique, comme un lecteur optique,
fonctionne.
5 connecteurs
USB 2.0 (2)
Utilisez les connecteurs USB frontaux pour connecter les
périphériques dont vous ne vous servez
qu'occasionnellement, tels qu'une manette de jeu ou une
caméra, ou des périphériques USB amorçables (reportezvous à la section « Options de configuration du
système » dans le Guide d'utilisation en ligne pour de
plus amples informations sur l'amorçage à partir d'un
périphérique USB). Il est recommandé d'utiliser les
connecteurs USB situés à l'arrière pour les
périphériques qui restent connectés, comme une
imprimante ou un clavier.
6 voyants de diagnostic Utilisez ces voyants pour vous aider à résoudre les
problèmes grâce au code de diagnostic. Pour plus
d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Voyants de
diagnostic » à la page 126.
7 bouton
d'alimentation
voyant d'alimentation
Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour allumer
l'ordinateur. Le voyant qui se trouve au centre de ce
bouton indique l'état de l'alimentation.
AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données,
n'utilisez pas le bouton d'alimentation pour
éteindre l'ordinateur. Procédez plutôt à un arrêt du
système d'exploitation.
8 connecteur de casque Permet de connecter le casque et la plupart des hautparleurs.
9 connecteur de
microphone
Utilisez le connecteur de microphone pour raccorder
un microphone d'ordinateur personnel destiné à une
entrée vocale ou musicale dans un programme sonore
ou de téléphonie.
Sur les ordinateurs équipés d'une carte son, le
connecteur de microphone est situé sur la carte.
10 voyant LAN Ce voyant indique qu'une connexion LAN (réseau
local) est établie.Guide de référence rapide 109
Vue arrière
1 loquet de fermeture
du capot
Ce loquet permet d'ouvrir le capot de l'ordinateur.
2 anneaux pour
cadenas
Les anneaux pour cadenas permettent de connecter un
dispositif antivol offert sur le marché. Ils permettent également
de fixer le capot de l'ordinateur au châssis à l'aide d'un cadenas
afin d'empêcher un accès non autorisé à l'intérieur de
l'ordinateur. Pour utiliser les anneaux pour cadenas, insérez un
cadenas offert sur le marché à travers les anneaux, puis
verrouillez le cadenas.
4
3
5
6
2
1110 Guide de référence rapide
PRÉCAUTION : Assurez-vous qu'aucune entrée d'air de système est bloquée.
Cela peut produire des problèmes thermiques graves.
Connecteurs du panneau arrière
3 connecteur
d'alimentation
Insérez le câble d'alimentation.
4 sélecteur de tension Permet de sélectionner la capacité en tension.
5 connecteurs du
panneau arrière
Branchez les périphériques USB, audio et autres dans le
connecteur approprié (reportez-vous à la section « Connecteurs
du panneau arrière » à la page 100 pour obtenir plus
d'informations).
6 logements de carte Permettent d'accéder aux connecteurs de toutes les cartes PCI et
PCI Express installées.
1 connecteur
parallèle
Permet de connecter un périphérique parallèle, tel qu'une
imprimante. Si vous avez une imprimante USB, raccordez-la
à un connecteur USB.
REMARQUE : Le connecteur parallèle intégré est
automatiquement désactivé si l'ordinateur détecte une carte
installée contenant un connecteur parallèle configuré sur la
même adresse. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la
section « Options de configuration du système » du Guide
d'utilisation en ligne.
1 3
98 7
5
6
2 4Guide de référence rapide 111
2 voyant d'intégrité
de la liaison
• Vert — Une bonne connexion est établie entre un réseau à
10 Mb/s et l'ordinateur.
• Orange — Une bonne connexion est établie entre un
réseau à 100 Mb/s et l'ordinateur.
• Jaune — Une bonne connexion est établie entre un réseau
à 1 Gb/s (ou 1000 Mb/s) et l'ordinateur.
• Éteint — L'ordinateur ne détecte pas de connexion
physique au réseau.
3 connecteur de
carte réseau
Pour connecter l'ordinateur à un périphérique réseau ou
large bande, branchez l'une des extrémités d'un câble réseau
à une prise réseau, un périphérique réseau ou un
périphérique large bande. Connectez l'autre extrémité du
câble au connecteur de carte réseau situé sur le panneau
arrière de votre ordinateur. Un déclic indique que le câble
réseau a été correctement installé.
REMARQUE : Ne branchez pas un câble téléphonique au
connecteur réseau.
Sur les ordinateurs disposant d'une carte d'adaptateur
réseau, utilisez le connecteur situé sur cette carte.
Il est recommandé d'utiliser au moins un câblage et des
connecteurs de catégorie 5 pour le réseau. Si vous devez
utiliser un câblage de catégorie 3, forcez la vitesse réseau à
10 Mb/s pour garantir un fonctionnement fiable.
4 voyant d'activité
réseau
Ce voyant est jaune clignotant lorsque l'ordinateur transmet
ou reçoit des données réseau. Un trafic réseau important
peut donner l'impression que ce voyant est fixe.
5 connecteur ligne
de sortie
Utilisez le connecteur ligne de sortie vert pour raccorder le
casque et la plupart des haut-parleurs dotés d'amplificateurs
intégrés.
Sur les ordinateurs équipés d'une carte son, utilisez le
connecteur qui se trouve sur cette carte.
6 connecteur
microphone/
ligne d'entrée
Utilisez le connecteur ligne d'entrée de couleurs bleue et
rose pour connecter des périphériques d'enregistrement ou
de lecture (magnétophones, lecteurs de CD, magnétoscopes
ou microphones d'ordinateur personnel).112 Guide de référence rapide
Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur
PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez
et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit.
PRÉCAUTION : Pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez
toujours votre ordinateur de la prise électrique avant de retirer le capot.
1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la
page 78.
REMARQUE : Assurez-vous qu'il y a assez d'espace pour supporter le capot retiré.
AVIS : Assurez-vous de travailler sur une surface de niveau et protégée afin
d'éviter des égratignures sur l'ordinateur ou la surface sur laquelle il repose.
2 Posez votre ordinateur sur son côté avec le capot de l'ordinateur pointant
vers le haut.
7 connecteurs
USB 2.0 (6)
Utilisez les connecteurs USB situés à l'arrière pour les
périphériques connectés en permanence, comme
l'imprimante et le clavier.
Il est recommandé d'utiliser les connecteurs USB frontaux
pour les périphériques connectés occasionnellement,
comme les manettes de jeu ou les appareils photo.
8 connecteur vidéo
VGA
Connectez le câble VGA du moniteur au connecteur VGA
sur l'ordinateur.
Sur les ordinateurs équipés d'une carte vidéo, utilisez le
connecteur qui se trouve sur cette carte.
9 connecteur série Connectez un périphérique série, tel qu'un PDA, au port
série. La désignation par défaut est COM1 pour le
connecteur série 1.
Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section
« Options du programme de configuration » du Guide
d'utilisation en ligne.Guide de référence rapide 113
3 Relâchez le capot de l'ordinateur en le tirant vers l'extérieur de l'avant de
l'ordinateur, puis en levant vers le haut.
4 Mettez le capot de côté dans un endroit sûr.
1 emplacement pour câble de sécurité 2 loquet de fermeture du capot
3 anneau pour cadenas
2
1
3114 Guide de référence rapide
Vue intérieure de l'ordinateur
1 lecteur de disquette 2 lecteur optique
3 bloc d'alimentation 4 carte système
5 assemblage du dissipateur de
chaleur
6 disque dur
1
3
4
6
2
5Guide de référence rapide 115
Composants de la carte système
1 connecteur de haut-parleur interne
(INT_SPKR)
2 connecteur du processeur (UC)
3 connecteur d'alimentation du
processeur (12VPOWER)
4 connecteurs de module de
mémoire (DIMM_1, DIMM_2)
1 2
6
5
13
3
15
17
12
4
7
14
11 8 10 9
16116 Guide de référence rapide
Remplacement du capot de l'ordinateur
PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez
et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit.
1 Vérifiez que tous les câbles sont connectés et pliez-les de sorte qu'ils ne
gênent pas.
2 Vérifiez que vous n'avez rien oublié à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur.
3 Pour remettre en place le capot :
a Alignez le bas du capot sur les languettes de charnière situées le long
du bord inférieur de l'ordinateur.
b Faites pivoter le capot vers le bas en utilisant les languettes de
charnière comme leviers et fermez-le.
c Enclenchez le capot en place en tirant vers l'arrière le loquet de
fermeture du capot, puis en le relâchant, une fois le capot
correctement installé.
d Vérifiez que le capot est correctement installé avant de déplacer
l'ordinateur.
4 Placez l'ordinateur en position verticale.
5 connecteurs de disque SATA
(SATA0, SATA1)
6 connecteur du panneau avant
(FRONTPANEL)
7 connecteur d'alimentation
(POWER)
8 connecteurs de disque SATA
(SATA2, SATA3)
9 cavalier de réinitialisation RTC
(RTCRST)
10 cavalier du mot de passe (PSWD)
11 support de pile (BATTERY) 12 connecteur de carte PCI Express
x16 (SLOT1)
13 connecteurs de carte PCI
(SLOT2 et SLOT3)
14 avertisseur interne (SPKR)
15 connecteur série/ PS/2 (PS2/SER2) 16 connecteur du ventilateur
(FAN_CPU)
17 connecteur pour lecteur de
disquette (FLOPPY)Guide de référence rapide 117
Résolution des problèmes
Dell fournit un certain nombre d'outils qui vous aideront si votre ordinateur
ne fonctionne pas de la manière escomptée. Pour obtenir les dernières
informations sur le dépannage disponibles pour votre ordinateur, consultez le
site Web du service de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com.
Si des problèmes nécessitant l'aide de Dell surviennent, rédigez une
description détaillée de l'erreur, des codes sonores ou des voyants de
diagnostic, notez votre code de service express et votre numéro de service cidessous, puis contactez Dell depuis l'endroit où se trouve votre ordinateur.
Pour obtenir un exemple de code de service express et de numéro de service,
reportez-vous à la section « Recherche d'informations » du Guide d'utilisation
de votre ordinateur.
Dell Diagnostics
PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez
et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit.
Quand utiliser Dell Diagnostics
Si vous rencontrez un problème avec l'ordinateur, effectuez les vérifications
indiquées dans la section « Blocages et problèmes logiciels » (reportez-vous au
Guide d'utilisation en ligne pour en savoir plus) et exécutez Dell Diagnostics
avant de contacter Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique.
Nous vous recommandons d'imprimer ces procédures avant de commencer.
AVIS : Dell Diagnostics ne fonctionne que sur les ordinateurs Dell™.
REMARQUE : Il se peut que le CD Drivers and Utilities soit en option et qu'il ne soit
pas livré avec tous les ordinateurs.
Reportez-vous à la section « Configuration du système » du Guide d'utilisation en
ligne pour étudier les informations de configuration de votre ordinateur et
vérifiez que le périphérique à tester apparaît dans le programme de
configuration du système et qu'il est actif.
Lancez Dell Diagnostics à partir de votre disque dur ou à partir du support
Drivers and Utilities.
Code de service express :
Numéro de service :118 Guide de référence rapide
Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du disque dur
Dell Diagnostics se trouve dans une partition cachée (utilitaire de
diagnostics) de votre disque dur.
REMARQUE : Si aucune image ne s'affiche, contactez Dell.
1 Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur est connecté à une prise électrique qui
fonctionne correctement.
2 Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le).
3 Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur .
Sélectionnez Diagnostics à partir du menu de démarrage et appuyez sur
.
REMARQUE : Si vous avez attendu trop longtemps et que le logo du système
d'exploitation s'affiche, attendez que le bureau de Microsoft® Windows®
s'affiche, puis arrêtez votre ordinateur et essayez à nouveau.
REMARQUE : Si un message indique qu'aucune partition de diagnostic n'a
été trouvée, exécutez Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities.
4 Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer Dell Diagnostics à partir de la
partition de diagnostics du disque dur.
Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du support Drivers and Utilities
1 Insérez le disque Drivers and Utilities.
2 Arrêtez, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur.
Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur .
REMARQUE : Si vous avez attendu trop longtemps et que le logo du système
d'exploitation s'affiche, attendez que le bureau de Microsoft® Windows®
s'affiche, puis arrêtez votre ordinateur et essayez à nouveau.
REMARQUE : Les étapes suivantes modifient la séquence d'amorçage pour
une seule exécution. Au démarrage suivant, l'ordinateur démarre en fonction
des périphériques définis dans le programme de configuration du système.
3 Lorsque la liste des périphériques d'amorçage s'affiche, mettez en
surbrillance CD/DVD/CD-RW et appuyez sur .
4 Sélectionnez l'option Boot from CD-ROM (Amorcer à partir du
CD-ROM) dans le menu qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur .
5 Tapez 1 pour démarrer le menu du CD, puis appuyez sur pour
continuer.Guide de référence rapide 119
6 Sélectionnez Exécuter Dell Diagnostics 32 bits dans la liste numérotée. Si
plusieurs versions sont répertoriées, sélectionnez la version appropriée à
votre ordinateur.
7 Lorsque le menu principal de Dell Diagnostics s'affiche, sélectionnez le
test à effectuer.
Menu principal de Dell Diagnostics
1 Une fois Dell Diagnostics chargé et lorsque l'écran Menu principal
s'affiche, cliquez sur le bouton de l'option de votre choix.
REMARQUE : Il vous est recommandé de sélectionner Test System (Test système)
pour exécuter un test complet sur votre ordinateur.
2 Après que vous sélectionnez l'option Test System (Test système) dans le
menu principal, le menu suivant s'affiche.
REMARQUE : Il vous est recommandé de sélectionner Extended Test (Test
approfondi) dans le menu ci-dessous pour exécuter un test plus approfondi des
périphériques de l'ordinateur.
Option Fonction
Test Memory
(Test mémoire)
Permet d'exécuter le test de mémoire autonome.
Test System
(Test système)
Permet d'exécuter les diagnostics système.
Exit (Quitter) Permet de quitter les diagnostics.
Option Fonction
Express Test
(Test rapide)
Exécute un test rapide des périphériques du système.
Typiquement, cela peut prendre de 10 à 20 minutes.
Extended Test
(Test approfondi)
Exécute un test approfondi des périphériques du système.
Typiquement, cela peut prendre une heure ou plus.
Custom Test
(Test personnalisé)
Permet de tester un périphérique spécifique ou de
personnaliser les tests à exécuter.
Symptom Tree
(Arborescence des
symptômes)
Cette option permet de sélectionner les tests selon un
symptôme du problème que vous rencontrez. Elle répertorie
les symptômes les plus communs.120 Guide de référence rapide
3 Si un problème survient pendant un test, un message indiquant le code
d'erreur et une description du problème s'affiche. Prenez note du code
d'erreur et de la description du problème, puis contactez Dell.
REMARQUE : Le numéro de service de votre ordinateur est situé en haut de
chaque écran de test. Lorsque vous contacterez le support technique de Dell,
ce numéro de service vous sera demandé.
4 Si vous exécutez un test à partir de l'option Custom Test (Test
personnalisé) ou Symptom Tree (Arborescence des symptômes), cliquez
sur l'onglet approprié décrit dans le tableau suivant pour obtenir plus
d'informations.
5 Une fois les tests effectués, fermez l'écran de test pour revenir à l'écran du
menu principal. Pour quitter Dell Diagnostics et redémarrer l'ordinateur,
fermez l'écran Menu principal.
6 Retirez le support Drivers and Utilities de Dell (le cas échéant).
Onglet Fonction
Results
(Résultats)
Affiche les résultats du test et les conditions d'erreur
rencontrées.
Errors
(Erreurs)
Affiche les conditions d'erreur rencontrées, les codes d'erreur
et la description du problème.
Help
(Aide)
Décrit le test et peut indiquer les conditions requises pour
exécuter le test.
Configuration
(Configuration)
Affiche la configuration matérielle du périphérique
sélectionné.
Dell Diagnostics obtient des informations de configuration
sur tous les périphériques à partir du programme de
configuration du système, de la mémoire et de divers tests
internes. Ces résultats sont ensuite affichés dans la liste des
périphériques située dans la partie gauche de l'écran. La liste
des périphériques risque de ne pas afficher les noms de tous
les composants installés sur votre ordinateur ou de tous les
périphériques reliés à celui-ci.
Parameters
(Paramètres)
Vous permet de personnaliser le test en modifiant ses
paramètres.Guide de référence rapide 121
Voyants d'alimentation
PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez
et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit.
Le voyant de bouton d'alimentation (DEL bicolore) qui se trouve à l'avant de
l'ordinateur s'allume et clignote ou bien demeure allumé pour indiquer
différents états :
• Si le voyant d'alimentation est éteint, l'ordinateur n'est pas allumé ou n'est
pas branché à une source d'alimentation.
– Rebranchez le câble d'alimentation dans le connecteur d'alimentation
situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur et dans la prise secteur.
– Si l'ordinateur est connecté à une multiprise, vérifiez qu'elle est
branchée à une prise secteur et qu'elle est allumée. Contournez
également les périphériques de protection contre les surtensions
électriques, les barrettes d'alimentation et les rallonges d'alimentation
pour vérifier que l'ordinateur est sous tension.
– Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un
autre appareil, une lampe par exemple.
• Si le voyant d'alimentation est vert statique et que l'ordinateur ne répond
plus :
– Vérifiez si l'écran est connecté et sous tension.
– Si l'écran est connecté et sous tension, reportez-vous à la section
« Codes sonores » à la page 122.
• Si le voyant d'alimentation est vert clignotant, l'ordinateur est en mode
Veille. Appuyez sur une touche sur le clavier, déplacez la souris ou appuyez
sur le bouton d'alimentation pour reprendre l'opération normale. Si le
voyant d'alimentation est vert et que l'ordinateur ne répond pas :
– Vérifiez si l'écran est connecté et sous tension.
– Si l'écran est connecté et sous tension, reportez-vous à la section
« Codes sonores » à la page 122.
• Si le voyant d'alimentation est orange statique, l'ordinateur reçoit
l'alimentation électrique, mais il se peut qu'un périphérique soit
défectueux ou incorrectement installé.
– Retirez, puis réinstallez les modules de mémoire.
– Retirez, puis réinstallez la ou les carte(s).
– Retirez, puis réinstallez la carte graphique, le cas échéant.122 Guide de référence rapide
• Si le voyant d'alimentation est orange clignotant, il existe peut-être un
problème d'alimentation ou une défaillance de périphérique interne.
– Vérifiez si tous les câbles d'alimentation sont branchés à la carte
système de façon sûre (reportez-vous à la section « Composants de la
carte système » à la page 105).
– Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation principal et le câble du panneau
avant sont bien connectés à la carte système (reportez-vous à la
section « Composants de la carte système » à la page 105).
Codes sonores
Il se peut que votre ordinateur émette une série de bips lors du démarrage si
le moniteur ne peut pas afficher des erreurs ou des problèmes. Cette série de
signaux, appelés « codes sonores », permet d'identifier les problèmes de
fonctionnement de l'ordinateur. Par exemple, le code sonore 1-3-1 (un code
sonore possible) est composé d'un signal, d'une série de trois signaux, puis
d'un autre signal. Ce code sonore vous indique que l'ordinateur a rencontré
un problème de mémoire.
La réinstallation des modules de mémoire peut permettre de corriger les
erreurs signalées par les codes sonores suivants. Si le problème persiste,
contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » du Guide
d'utilisation) pour savoir comment obtenir une assistance technique.
Si vous rencontrez les erreurs signalées par les codes sonores suivants,
reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » du Guide d'utilisation pour savoir
comment obtenir une assistance technique.
Code Cause
1-3-1 à
2-4-4
La mémoire n'est pas correctement identifiée ou utilisée
4-3-1 Échec de mémoire au-dessus de l'adresse 0FFFFh
Code Cause
1-1-2 Panne de registre du microprocesseur
1-1-3 Erreur de lecture/écriture en NVRAM
1-1-4 Échec du total des vérifications BIOS ROMGuide de référence rapide 123
1-2-1 Erreur du temporisateur d'intervalles programmable
1-2-2 Échec d'initialisation du DMA (accès direct à la mémoire)
1-2-3 Échec de lecture/écriture du registre des pages de DMA
1-3 Échec du test de la mémoire vidéo
1-3-1 à
2-4-4
La mémoire n'est pas correctement identifiée ou utilisée
3-1-1 Échec de registre DMA esclave
3-1-2 Échec de registre DMA maître
3-1-3 Échec de registre de masque d'interruption maître
3-1-4 Échec de registre de masque d'interruption esclave
3-2-2 Échec de chargement du vecteur d'interruption
3-2-4 Échec du test de contrôleur de clavier
3-3-1 Perte d'alimentation de NVRAM
3-3-2 Configuration incorrecte de la NVRAM
3-3-4 Échec du test de la mémoire vidéo
3-4-1 Échec d'initialisation de l'écran
3-4-2 Échec de retraçage de l'écran
3-4-3 Échec de recherche de ROM vidéo
4-2-1 Aucune impulsion d'horloge
4-2-2 Échec de l'arrêt
4-2-3 Échec de la porte A20
4-2-4 Interruption inattendue en mode protégé
4-3-1 Échec de mémoire au-dessus de l'adresse 0FFFFh
4-3-3 Panne du compteur 2 de puce de l'horloge
4-3-4 Arrêt de l'horloge machine
4-4-1 Échec du test de port parallèle ou série
4-4-2 Échec de décompression de code dans la mémoire en double
4-4-3 Échec du test de coprocesseur mathématique
4-4-4 Échec du test de mémoire cache
Code Cause124 Guide de référence rapide
Messages système
REMARQUE : Si le message affiché n'est pas répertorié dans le tableau, consultez
la documentation du système d'exploitation ou du programme en cours d'utilisation
au moment où le message est apparu.
ALERT! PREVIOUS ATTEMPTS A T BOOTING THIS SYSTEM HAVE FAILED A T
CHECKPOINT [NNNN]. FO R HELP IN RESOLVING THIS PROBLEM, PLEASE NOTE
THIS CHECKPOINT AND CONTACT DELL TECHNICAL SUPPORT (ALERTE ! LE S
TENTATIVES PRÉCÉDENTES D E DÉMARRAGE D E C E SYSTÈME ONT ÉCHOUÉ A U
POINT D E CONTRÔLE [NNNN]. POUR RÉSOUDRE C E PROBLÈME, VEUILLEZ
PRENDRE NOTE D E C E POINT D E CONTRÔLE E T CONTACTER L E SUPPORT
TECHNIQUE D E DELL) — L'ordinateur n'a pas terminé la procédure d'amorçage
trois fois consécutives pour la même erreur.
CMOS CHECKSUM ERROR (ERREUR D E SOMME D E CONTRÔLE D U CMOS) —
Échec possible de la carte mère ou décharge de la batterie RTC. Remplacez la
batterie.
CPU FAN FAILURE (ÉCHEC D U VENTILATEUR UC) — Échec du ventilateur UC.
Remplacez le ventilateur UC.
DISKETTE DRIVE 0 SEEK FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E RECHERCHE D U LECTEUR D E
DISQUETTE 0) — Il se peut qu'un câble soit desserré ou que les informations de
configuration de l'ordinateur ne correspondent pas à la configuration matérielle.
Vérifiez les raccordements de câble.
DISKETTE READ FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E LECTURE D E DISQUETTE) — Il se peut que
la disquette soit défectueuse ou qu'un câble soit desserré. Remplacez la disquette
ou vérifiez s'il existe un raccordement de câble desserré.
HARD-DISK DRIVE FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E L'UNITÉ D E DISQUE DUR) — Échec
possible de l'unité de disque lors de HDD POST. Vérifiez les câbles ou échangez le
disque dur.
HARD-DISK DRIVE READ FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E LECTURE D E L'UNITÉ D E DISQUE
DUR) — Échec de lecture possible de l'unité de disque dur lors du test d'amorçage
du disque dur.
KEYBOARD FAILURE (PANNE D U CLAVIER) — Panne du clavier ou câble de
clavier desserré.Guide de référence rapide 125
NO BOOT DEVICE AVAILABLE (AUCUN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE D'AMORÇAGE N'EST
DISPONIBLE) — Le système ne peut pas détecter un périphérique ou une partition
amorçable.
• Si le lecteur de disquette est votre périphérique d'amorçage, assurez-vous que les
câbles sont bien raccordés et qu'une disquette se trouve dans le lecteur.
• Si le disque dur est votre périphérique d'amorçage, assurez-vous que les câbles
sont bien raccordés, que le lecteur est installé, bien en place et partitionné
comme périphérique d'amorçage.
• Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système et assurez-vous que les
informations de la séquence d'amorçage sont correctes.
NO TIMER TICK INTERRUPT (AUCUNE INTERRUPTION D E TIC D'HORLOGE) —
ll se peut qu'une puce sur la carte système soit défectueuse ou qu'il y ait un échec
de la carte mère.
NON-SYSTEM DISK OR DISK ERROR (ERREUR DISQUE OU DISQUE NON-SYSTÈME) —
Remplacez la disquette par une disquette avec un système d'exploitation
amorçable ou retirez la disquette du lecteur A et redémarrez l'ordinateur.
NO T A BOOT DISKETTE (DISQUETTE NON AMORÇABLE) — Insérez une disquette
d'amorçage et redémarrez votre ordinateur.
USB OVER CURRENT ERROR (ERREUR D E SURINTENSITÉ USB) — Débranchez le
périphérique USB. Utilisez une source d'alimentation électrique externe pour le
périphérique USB.
NOTICE - HARD DRIVE SELF MONITORING SYSTEM HAS REPORTED THAT A
PARAMETER HAS EXCEEDED ITS NORMAL OPERATING RANGE. DELL
RECOMMENDS THAT YOU BACK U P YOUR DATA REGULARLY. A PARAMETER OUT
O F RANGE MAY O R MAY NOT INDICATE A POTENTIAL HARD DRIVE PROBLEM —
(Avis - Le système d’auto-surveillance du disque dur a déclaré qu'un paramètre a
dépassé la plage de fonctionnement normale. Dell vous recommande de
sauvegarder vos données périodiquement. Un paramètre hors limites peut ou non
indiquer un problème de disque dur éventuel)
Erreur S.M.A.R.T, échec possible du disque dur. Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver
cette fonctionnalité dans la configuration du BIOS.126 Guide de référence rapide
Voyants de diagnostic
PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez
et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit.
Afin de vous aider à résoudre les problèmes, l'ordinateur est équipé de quatre
voyants situés sur le panneau avant ou arrière : 1, 2, 3 et 4. Ces voyants
peuvent être éteints ou verts. Lorsque l'ordinateur démarre normalement, le
comportement ou les codes des voyants changent au fur et à mesure de
l'avancement du processus de démarrage. Lorsque l'ordinateur démarre
normalement, le comportement ou les codes des voyants changent au fur et à
mesure de l'avancement du processus de démarrage. Si la partie POST
(autotest à la mise sous tension) du démarrage du système s'effectue
correctement, les quatre voyants sont verts fixes. Si l'ordinateur ne fonctionne
pas correctement lors du processus POST, le comportement des voyants peut
vous aider à identifier l'origine du problème.
REMARQUE : L'orientation des voyants de diagnostic peut varier selon le type de
système. Les voyants de diagnostic peuvent apparaître soit verticalement, soit
horizontalement.
Comportement des
voyants
Description du problème Solution proposée
L'ordinateur est en condition
d'arrêt normale ou une panne
est survenue avant le BIOS.
Les voyants de diagnostic ne
sont pas allumés alors que le
système d'exploitation de
l'ordinateur s'est lancé
correctement.
Raccordez l'ordinateur à une prise
secteur qui fonctionne et appuyez
sur le bouton d'alimentation.
Échec éventuel du BIOS ;
l'ordinateur est en mode
Restauration.
Exécutez l'utilitaire de sauvegarde
du BIOS, attendez que la
restauration soit terminée et
redémarrez l'ordinateur.
Une défaillance du
processeur semble s'être
produite.
Réinstallez le processeur et
redémarrez l'ordinateur.Guide de référence rapide 127
Les modules de mémoire
sont détectés, mais une
panne de mémoire est
survenue.
• Si un module de mémoire est
installé, réinstallez-le et
redémarrez l'ordinateur.
(Reportez-vous au Guide
d'utilisation en ligne pour obtenir
des instructions sur la façon de
retirer et d'installer les modules
de mémoire.)
• Si au moins deux modules de
mémoire sont installés,
supprimez-les, réinstallez un
module, puis redémarrez
l'ordinateur. Si l'ordinateur
redémarre normalement,
réinstallez un autre module.
Répétez cette procédure jusqu'à
identification du module
défectueux ou réinstallation de
tous les modules sans erreur.
• Installez sur votre ordinateur la
mémoire du même type
fonctionnant correctement, le
cas échéant.
• Si le problème persiste,
contactez Dell.
Une défaillance de la carte
graphique semble s'être
produite.
• Si l'ordinateur possède une carte
graphique, retirez-la, réinstallezla, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur.
• Si le problème persiste, installez
une carte graphique qui
fonctionne et redémarrez
l'ordinateur.
• Si le problème persiste ou que
votre ordinateur dispose de
fonctions vidéo intégrées,
contactez Dell.
Comportement des
voyants
Description du problème Solution proposée128 Guide de référence rapide
Panne possible de lecteur de
disquette ou de disque dur.
Réinstallez tous les câbles de
données et d'alimentation, puis
redémarrez l'ordinateur.
Panne USB possible. Réinstallez tous les périphériques
USB, vérifiez la connexion des
câbles, puis redémarrez
l'ordinateur.
Aucun module de mémoire
n'a été détecté.
• Si un module de mémoire est
installé, réinstallez-le et
redémarrez l'ordinateur.
Reportez-vous au Guide
d'utilisation en ligne pour obtenir
des instructions sur la façon de
retirer et d'installer les modules
de mémoire.
• Si au moins deux modules de
mémoire sont installés,
supprimez-les, réinstallez un
module, puis redémarrez
l'ordinateur. Si l'ordinateur
redémarre normalement,
réinstallez un autre module.
Répétez cette procédure jusqu'à
identification du module
défectueux ou réinstallation de
tous les modules sans erreur.
• Installez sur votre ordinateur la
mémoire du même type
fonctionnant correctement, le
cas échéant.
• Si le problème persiste,
contactez Dell.
Comportement des
voyants
Description du problème Solution proposéeGuide de référence rapide 129
Effacement des mots de passe oubliés
PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez
et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit.
1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la
page 78.
2 Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section « Retrait du
capot de l'ordinateur » à la page 112).
Les modules de mémoire
sont détectés, mais une
erreur de configuration de
mémoire ou de compatibilité
est survenue.
• Vérifiez qu'aucune contrainte
particulière ne doit être
respectée pour l'installation des
modules dans les connecteurs de
mémoire.
• Vérifiez que les modules de
mémoire que vous installez sont
compatibles avec votre
ordinateur.
• Si le problème persiste, contactez
Dell.
Une erreur est survenue.
Cette séquence s'affiche
également lorsque vous
ouvrez le programme de
configuration du système et
n'est pas forcément
significative d'un problème.
• Vérifiez que les câbles sont
correctement connectés entre le
disque dur, le lecteur optique et
la carte mère.
• Lisez le message qui s'affiche sur
l'écran du moniteur.
• Si le problème persiste, contactez
Dell.
Une fois le POST terminé,
les quatre voyants de
diagnostic deviennent
brièvement verts avant de
s'éteindre pour indiquer une
condition de fonctionnement
normale.
Aucune.
Comportement des
voyants
Description du problème Solution proposée130 Guide de référence rapide
3 Repérez le cavalier de mot de passe (PSWD, 2 broches) sur la carte système.
Par défaut, Pin1 et Pin2 (Broche1 et Broche2) devraient être connectées.
Vous devez retirer le cavalier et amorcer le système, comme suit :
4 Retirez le cavalier.
5 Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section
« Remplacement du capot de l'ordinateur » à la page 106).
AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord au périphérique
réseau, puis à l'ordinateur.
6 Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises électriques, puis
allumez-les.
7 Après l'affichage du bureau Microsoft® Windows® sur votre ordinateur,
arrêtez celui-ci (reportez-vous à la section « Mise hors tension de
l'ordinateur » à la page 80).
8 Éteignez le moniteur et débranchez-le de la prise secteur.
9 Débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise secteur, puis appuyez sur le bouton
d'alimentation pour mettre la carte système à la terre.
10 Ouvrez le capot de l'ordinateur.
11 Repérez le cavalier de mot de passe (PSWD, 2 broches) sur la carte
système, et remettez-le en place pour réactiver la fonction de mot de passe.Guide de référence rapide 131
12 Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section
« Remplacement du capot de l'ordinateur » à la page 106).
AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez le câble d'abord sur la prise
réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur.
13 Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises électriques, puis
allumez-les.
REMARQUE : Cette opération réactive la fonctionnalité de mot de passe. Lorsque
vous ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section
« Ouverture du programme de configuration du système » du Guide d'utilisation), les
deux options de mot de passe (système et administrateur) ont pour valeur Not Set
(Non défini) — Cela signifie que la fonctionnalité est activée mais qu'aucun mot de
passe n'est attribué.
14 Affectez un nouveau mot de passe système et/ou administrateur.
Effacement des paramètres CMOS
PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez
et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit.
1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la
page 78.
REMARQUE : L'ordinateur doit être débranché de la prise secteur pour
effacer le paramètre CMOS.
2 Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section « Retrait du
capot de l'ordinateur » à la page 112).
3 Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur.
4 Réinitialisez les paramètres CMOS :
a Repérez les cavaliers de mot de passe (PSWD) et CMOS (RTCRST)
sur la carte système (reportez-vous à la section « Effacement des mots
de passe oubliés » à la page 129).
b Retirez la fiche du cavalier PSWD de ses broches.
c Placez la fiche sur les broches du cavalier RTCRST et attendez
environ cinq secondes.
d Retirez la fiche des broches RTCRST et remettez-la sur les broches du
cavalier PWSD.132 Guide de référence rapide
5 Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section
« Remplacement du capot de l'ordinateur » à la page 106).
AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord au port réseau ou
au périphérique, puis à l'ordinateur.
6 Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises électriques, puis
allumez-les.
Clignotement du BIOS
Il se peut que le BIOS nécessite le clignotement lorsqu'une mise à jour est
disponible ou lorsque vous remplacez la carte système.
1 Allumez l'ordinateur.
2 Recherchez le fichier de mise à jour BIOS pour votre ordinateur sur le site
Web du service de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com.
3 Cliquez sur Download Now (Télécharger maintenant) pour télécharger le
fichier.
4 Si la fenêtre Export Compliance Disclaimer (Renonciation à la
conformité aux normes d’exportation) s'affiche, cliquez sur Yes, I Accept
this Agreement (Oui, j'accepte cet accord).
La fenêtre File Download (Téléchargement du fichier) apparaît.
5 Cliquez sur Save this program to disk (Enregistrer ce programme sur un
disque), puis cliquez sur OK.
La fenêtre Save In (Enregistrer dans) apparaît.
6 Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour afficher le menu Enregistrer dans,
sélectionnez Desktop (Bureau), puis cliquez sur Save (Enregistrer).
Le fichier est téléchargé sur votre bureau.
7 Cliquez sur Fermer lorsque la fenêtre Download Complete
(Téléchargement terminé) apparaît.
L'icône de fichier apparaît sur votre bureau et porte le même nom que le
fichier de mise à jour BIOS.
8 Double-cliquez sur l'icône de fichier sur le bureau et suivez les instructions
apparaissant à l'écran.Index 133
Index
A
alimentation
bouton, 97, 108
filtres de ligne
parasurtenseurs
périphériques de protection
UPS
voyant, 98
alimentation sans interruption.
Voir UPS
Assistant Configuration
réseau, 84
assistants
Assistant Configuration
réseau, 84
C
capot
remplacement, 106, 116
retrait, 102, 112
carte mère. Voir carte système
carte système, 105, 115
CD
système d'exploitation, 77
CD Operating System, 77
CD ResourceCD
Dell Diagnostics, 117
Centre d'aide et de support, 77
codes sonores, 122
codes sonores d'ordinateur
codes sonores, 122
composants
avant de commencer, 79
connexion Internet
à propos de, 85
configuration, 86
options, 85
consignes de sécurité, 74
contrat de licence pour
utilisateur final, 74
D
Dell Diagnostics, 117
Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à
partir du CD Drivers and
Utilities, 118
Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à
partir du disque dur, 118
dépannage
Centre d'aide et de support, 77
Dell Diagnostics, 117
diagnostics
codes sonores, 122
Dell, 117134 Index
documentation
contrat de licence pour utilisateur
final, 74
en ligne, 76
ergonomie, 74
garantie, 74
Guide d'information sur le
produit, 74
Guide d'utilisation, 74
Référence rapide, 74
réglementation, 74
sécurité, 74
E
étiquettes
Microsoft Windows, 75
numéro de service, 75, 98, 107
F
fichier d'aide
Centre d'aide et de support de
Windows, 77
G
Guide d'information sur le
produit, 74
Guide d'utilisation, 74
I
imprimante
câble, 92
configuration, 83, 92
connexion, 83, 92
informations relatives à
l'ergonomie, 74
informations relatives à la
garantie, 74
informations sur les
réglementations, 74
installation de pièces
mise hors tension de
l'ordinateur, 80
installer des composants
outils recommandés, 80
M
matériel
codes sonores, 122
Dell Diagnostics, 117
messages d'erreur
codes sonores, 122
moniteur
connecter le DVI, 93-94
connecter le VGA, 93-94
connecter un téléviseur, 93-94
connecter VGA, 93
en raccorder deux, 93-94
mode bureau étendu, 95
mode de clonage, 95Index 135
paramètres d'affichage, 95
raccorder deux, 93
mot de passe
cavalier, 129
effacement, 129
N
numéro de service, 75, 98, 107
O
ordinateur
codes sonores, 122
composants à l'intérieur, 104, 114
vue intérieure, 104, 114
P
paramètres CMOS
effacement, 131
problèmes
codes sonores, 122
Dell Diagnostics, 117
R
réseau
Assistant Configuration
réseau, 84
S
S.M.A.R.T, 125
site de support de Dell, 76
site Web de support, 76
système d'exploitation
réinstallation, 77
T
téléviseur
connecter à l'ordinateur, 93-94
U
UPS
V
voyants
alimentation, 98
W
Windows XP
Assistant Configuration
réseau, 84
Centre d'aide et de support, 77
réinstallation, 77136 Indexwww.dell.com | support.dell.com
Dell™ OptiPlex™ 330
Guía de referencia rápida
Modelo DCSM y DCNENotas, avisos y precauciones
NOTA: una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayuda a utilizar su
ordenador de la mejor manera posible.
AVISO: un AVISO indica la posibilidad de daños en el hardware o pérdida de datos
y le explica cómo evitar el problema.
PRECAUCIÓN: una PRECAUCIÓN indica un posible daño material, lesión
corporal o muerte.
____________________
La información contenida en este documento puede modificarse sin aviso previo.
© 2007 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados.
Queda estrictamente prohibido realizar cualquier tipo de reproducción sin el consentimiento por escrito
de Dell Inc.
Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell, el logotipo de DELL, Inspiron, Dell Precision,
Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp y Dell OpenManage son marcas
comerciales de Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium y Celeron son marcas comerciales registradas de Intel
Corporation; Microsoft y Windows son marcas comerciales registradas de Microsoft Corporation.
Este documento puede incluir otras marcas y nombres comerciales para referirse a las entidades que
son propietarias de los mismos o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la
propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos.
Modelo DCSM y DCNE
Septiembre 2007 P/N JY235 Rev. A00Contenido 139
Contenido
Búsqueda de información . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Antes de comenzar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Antes de trabajar en el interior de su
ordenador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Adición y sustitución de piezas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Configuración del ordenador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Instalación del ordenador en un gabinete . . . . . 149
Configuración de una red doméstica y de oficina . . . 151
Conexión a un adaptador de red . . . . . . . . . . 151
Configuración de red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Conexión a Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Transferencia de información a un ordenador
nuevo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Configuración de una impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Conexión de dos monitores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Dispositivos de protección de alimentación . . . . . . 163
Ordenador de sobremesa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Vista anterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Vista posterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Conectores del panel posterior . . . . . . . . . . 168
Extracción de la cubierta del ordenador . . . . . . . . 170140 Contenido
Vista interior del ordenador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Componentes de la placa base . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Cómo volver a colocar la cubierta del ordenador . . . 174
Ordenador de minitorre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Vista anterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Vista posterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Conectores del panel posterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Cómo quitar la cubierta del ordenador . . . . . . . . . 180
Vista interior del ordenador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Componentes de la placa base . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Cómo volver a colocar la cubierta del ordenador . . . 184
Solución de problemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Indicadores de alimentación . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Códigos de sonido . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Mensajes del sistema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Indicadores de diagnóstico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Cómo borrar contraseñas olvidadas . . . . . . . . . . 198
Borrado de la configuración de CMOS . . . . . . . . . 200
Actualización flash del BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Índice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Guía de referencia rápida 141
Búsqueda de información
NOTA: Algunas funciones o medios son opcionales y pueden no incluirse en su
ordenador. Es posible que algunas funciones o medios no estén disponibles en
determinados países.
NOTA: Su ordenador puede incluir información adicional.
¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará
• Un programa de diagnóstico para
mi ordenador
• Controladores para mi ordenador
• Software del sistema de escritorio
(DSS)
Soporte multimedia Drivers and Utilities
(Controladores y utilidades)
NOTA: El soporte multimedia Drivers and
Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) es opcional
y es posible que no se entregue con el
ordenador.
Los controladores ya están instalados en el
ordenador. Puede utilizar el soporte
multimedia para volver a instalar los
controladores (consulte la Guía del usuario en
línea), para ejecutar los Dell Diagnostics
(consulte el apartado “Dell Diagnostics” en la
página 185).
Los archivos “readme” (léame) pueden estar
incluidos en su CD para disponer de
actualizaciones de última hora sobre los
cambios técnicos del ordenador o material de
consulta destinado a los técnicos o usuarios
avanzados.
NOTA: Los controladores y las actualizaciones
de la documentación se pueden encontrar en
support.dell.com.142 Guía de referencia rápida
• Información básica sobre la
solución de problemas
• Cómo ejecutar Dell Diagnostics
• Herramientas y utilidades
• Cómo configurar una impresora
Guía de referencia rápida
NOTA: Este documento puede ser opcional, por
lo que es posible que no se envíe con su
ordenador.
NOTA: Este documento está disponible en
formato PDF en support.dell.com.
• Información sobre la garantía
• Términos y condiciones (sólo en
EE.UU.)
• Instrucciones de seguridad
• Información reglamentaria
• Información ergonómica
• Contrato de licencia de usuario
final
Guía de información del producto de Dell™
• Cómo extraer y cambiar piezas
• Especificaciones
• Cómo configurar los parámetros
del sistema
• Cómo detectar y solucionar
problemas
Guía del usuario de Dell OptiPlex™ 330
Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Microsoft
Windows
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio de Windows
Vista→Ayuda y soporte técnico→ Guías del
usuario y del sistema de Dell→ Guías del
sistema.
2 Haga clic en la Guía del usuario de su
ordenador.
¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontraráGuía de referencia rápida 143
• Etiqueta de servicio y Express
Service Code (Código de servicio
rápido)
• Etiqueta de licencia de Microsoft
Windows
Etiqueta de servicio y licencia de Microsoft®
Windows®
Estas etiquetas se encuentran en su ordenador.
• Utilice la etiqueta de servicio para identificar
el ordenador cuando visite support.dell.com
o se ponga en contacto con el servicio de
asistencia.
• Escriba el código de servicio urgente para
dirigir su llamada cuando se ponga en
contacto con el servicio de asistencia.
NOTA: Como una mayor medida de seguridad, a
las etiquetas de licencia de Microsoft Windows
diseñadas recientemente parece que les falta un
trozo de etiqueta o que tienen un “agujero”, para
disuadir a los delincuentes de retirar la etiqueta.
¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará144 Guía de referencia rápida
• Soluciones: consejos y orientación
para la solución de problemas,
artículos de técnicos y cursos en
línea, preguntas frecuentes.
• Comunidad: debates en línea con
otros clientes de Dell.
• Actualizaciones: información de
actualización para componentes
como, por ejemplo, la memoria, la
unidad de disco duro y el sistema
operativo.
• Atención al cliente: información de
contacto, llamada de servicio y
estado de los pedidos, garantía e
información de reparación.
• Servicio y asistencia: historial de
asistencia y estado de las llamadas
de servicio, contrato de servicio,
debates en línea con el personal de
asistencia técnica.
• El servicio Dell Technical Update:
notificación proactiva mediante
correo electrónico de
actualizaciones de software y
hardware para el ordenador.
• Referencia: documentación del
ordenador, detalles en la
configuración de mi ordenador,
especificaciones del producto y
documentación técnica.
• Descargas: controladores
certificados, revisiones y
actualizaciones de software.
Sitio web Dell Support: support.dell.com
NOTA: Seleccione su región o segmento de
negocios para ver el sitio de asistencia técnica
apropiado.
¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontraráGuía de referencia rápida 145
• Desktop System Software (DSS): si
vuelve a instalar el sistema
operativo del ordenador, también
debe volver a instalar la utilidad
DSS. DSS proporciona
actualizaciones importantes del
sistema operativo y asistencia para
procesadores, unidades ópticas,
dispositivos USB, etc. La utilidad
DSS es necesaria para el correcto
funcionamiento de su ordenador
Dell. El software detecta
automáticamente su ordenador y
sistema operativo e instala las
actualizaciones apropiadas a su
configuración.
Para descargar Desktop System Software:
1 Vaya a support.dell.com, seleccione su zona o
segmento empresarial e introduzca la
etiqueta de servicio.
2 Seleccione Drivers & Downloads
(Controladores & Descargas) y haga clic en
Go (Ir).
3 Haga clic en el sistema operativo y busque la
palabra clave Desktop System Software.
NOTA: La interfaz para el usuario
support.dell.com puede variar dependiendo de
las selecciones que efectúe.
• Cómo utilizar Windows
• Cómo trabajar con programas y
archivos
• Cómo personalizar mi escritorio
Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows
1 Para acceder a Ayuda y soporte técnico de
Windows:
• En Windows XP, haga clic en Inicio y en
Ayuda y soporte técnico.
• En Windows Vista™, haga clic en el botón
Inicio de Windows Vista →Ayuda y
soporte técnico.
2 Escriba una palabra o frase que describa el
problema y, a continuación, haga clic en el
icono de flecha.
3 Haga clic en el tema que describa el
problema.
4 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en
pantalla.
• Cómo volver a instalar mi sistema
operativo
Soporte multimedia Operating System (Sistema
operativo)
NOTA: El soporte multimedia Operating System
(Sistema operativo) es opcional, por lo que es
posible que no se envíe con su ordenador.
¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará146 Guía de referencia rápida
Antes de comenzar
Antes de trabajar en el interior de su ordenador
Use las siguientes instrucciones de seguridad para proteger el equipo contra
posibles daños y garantizar su propia seguridad personal.
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta
sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de
información del producto.
AVISO: Manipule los componentes y las tarjetas con precaución. No toque los
componentes o contactos ubicados en una tarjeta. Sostenga las tarjetas por sus
bordes o por su soporte metálico de montaje. Sujete un componente, como un
procesador, por sus bordes y no por sus patas.
El sistema operativo ya está instalado en el
ordenador. Para volver a instalar el sistema
operativo, utilice el disco Operating System
(Sistema operativo) y consulte la Guía del
usuario en línea.
Después de volver a instalar el sistema
operativo, utilice el disco Drivers and Utilities
(Controladores y utilidades) para volver a
instalar los controladores de los dispositivos
que se incluían con el ordenador.
La clave del producto del sistema operativo se
encuentra en el ordenador.
NOTA: El color del disco varía según el sistema
operativo que haya solicitado.
¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontraráGuía de referencia rápida 147
AVISO: Sólo un técnico certificado debe realizar reparaciones en el ordenador. La
garantía no cubre los daños por reparaciones no autorizadas por Dell.
AVISO: Cuando desconecte un cable, tire del conector o de la lengüeta de tiro, no
tire directamente del cable. Algunos cables tienen conectores con lengüetas de
bloqueo; si va a desconectar un cable de este tipo, antes pulse las lengüetas de
bloqueo. Cuando separe conectores, manténgalos alineados para evitar doblar las
patas de conexión. Además, antes de conectar un cable, asegúrese de que los dos
conectores estén orientados y alineados correctamente.
AVISO: Para evitar daños en el ordenador, realice los pasos siguientes antes de
comenzar a trabajar dentro del ordenador.
1 Apague el ordenador (consulte el apartado “Cómo apagar el ordenador” en
la página 148).
PRECAUCIÓN: Nunca suministre alimentación eléctrica al ordenador cuando se
haya extraído la cubierta.
AVISO: Para desconectar un cable de red, desconecte primero el cable del
ordenador y, a continuación, del dispositivo de red.
2 Desconecte todos los cables del teléfono o de la red del ordenador.
3 Desconecte el ordenador y todos los dispositivos conectados de sus tomas
de alimentación eléctrica.
4 Pulse el botón de alimentación para conectar a tierra la placa base.
AVISO: Antes de tocar algo en el interior del ordenador, conéctese a tierra
tocando una superficie metálica sin pintura como, por ejemplo, la parte posterior
del ordenador. Mientras trabaja, toque periódicamente una superficie metálica sin
pintar para disipar la electricidad estática, que podría dañar los componentes
internos.
Adición y sustitución de piezas
Esta sección le proporciona los procedimientos para quitar e instalar los
componentes en su ordenador.A menos que se especifique lo contrario, para
cada procedimiento se presupone que se cumplen las condiciones siguientes:
• Ha realizado los pasos que se indican en los apartados “Cómo apagar el
ordenador” en la página 148 y “Antes de trabajar en el interior de su
ordenador” en la página 146.
• Ha leído la información de seguridad de la Guía de información del
producto de Dell™.148 Guía de referencia rápida
• Un componente se puede volver a colocar o—si se ha adquirido por
separado—instalar mediante el proceso de extracción realizado en orden
inverso.
Herramientas recomendadas
Es posible que necesite las herramientas siguientes para los procedimientos
descritos en este documento:
• Un destornillador pequeño de paletas planas
• Destornillador Phillips pequeño
• Punta trazadora pequeña de plástico
Cómo apagar el ordenador
AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos
y salga de todos los programas abiertos antes de apagar el ordenador.
1 Apague el sistema operativo:
a Guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y salga de todos los
programas activos.
b En el sistema operativo Microsoft® Windows® XP, haga clic en Inicio→
Apagar→ Apagar.
En Microsoft® Windows Vista™, haga clic en el botón Inicio de
Windows Vista , situado en la esquina inferior izquierda del
escritorio, haga clic en la flecha de la esquina inferior derecha del
menú Inicio tal como se muestra a continuación y después haga clic
en Apagar.
El equipo se apaga una vez finalizado el proceso de cierre del sistema
operativo.
2 Asegúrese de que el ordenador y todos los dispositivos conectados estén
apagados. Si el ordenador y los dispositivos conectados no se apagaron
automáticamente cuando apagó el sistema operativo, pulse el botón de
alimentación durante 4 segundos aproximadamente para apagarlos.Guía de referencia rápida 149
Configuración del ordenador
Instalación del ordenador en un gabinete
La instalación del ordenador en un gabinete puede restringir el flujo de aire,
influir en el rendimiento del ordenador y hacer que posiblemente se caliente en
exceso. Siga las siguientes pautas cuando instale el ordenador en un gabinete:
AVISO: Las especificaciones de temperatura de funcionamiento que se indican en
este manual reflejan la temperatura ambiente de funcionamiento máxima. Se tiene
que tener en cuenta la temperatura ambiente de la sala cuando se instala el
ordenador en un gabinete. Por ejemplo, si la temperatura ambiente de la sala es de
25° C (77° F), en función de las especificaciones del ordenador, sólo tiene un
margen de temperatura de 5° a 10° C (de 9° a 18° F) antes de alcanzar la
temperatura de funcionamiento máxima del ordenador. Para obtener más detalles
sobre las especificaciones de su ordenador, consulte la Guía del usuario en línea.
• Deje que haya una distancia de separación de 10,2 cm (4 pulgadas) como
mínimo en todos los laterales del ordenador que facilitan la ventilación
para permitir que el aire que se necesita ofrezca la ventilación adecuada.
• Si el gabinete tiene tapas, tienen que ser de un tipo que permita que haya
como mínimo un flujo de aire del 30 por ciento a través del gabinete
(delante y detrás).150 Guía de referencia rápida
• Si el ordenador está instalado en una esquina sobre un escritorio o debajo
de un escritorio, deje como mínimo 5,1 centímetros (2 pulgadas) de
distancia de separación entre la parte posterior del ordenador y la pared
para permitir que haya el flujo de aire necesario para una ventilación
adecuada.
AVISO: No instale el ordenador en un gabinete que no permita que haya flujo de
aire. Restringir el flujo de aire afecta negativamente al rendimiento del ordenador y
hace que posiblemente se caliente.Guía de referencia rápida 151
Configuración de una red doméstica y de oficina
Conexión a un adaptador de red
Para conectar el cable de red:
NOTA: Enchufe el cable de red al conector del adaptador de red del ordenador. No
enchufe el cable de red al conector del módem del ordenador. No enchufe un cable
de red a una toma telefónica de la pared.
1 Conecte el cable de red al conector del adaptador de red, que está situado
en la parte posterior del ordenador.
Inserte el cable hasta que encaje en su posición y, a continuación, tire de él
suavemente para asegurarse de que está bien encajado.
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable de red a un dispositivo de red.152 Guía de referencia rápida
Configuración de red
Windows XP
El sistema operativo Microsoft® Windows® XP ofrece un Asistente para
configuración de redes que le guiará en el proceso de compartir archivos,
impresoras o una conexión a Internet entre ordenadores en un entorno
doméstico o de pequeña oficina.
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→
Accesorios→ Comunicaciones y, a continuación, haga clic en Asistente
para configuración de redes.
2 En la pantalla de bienvenida Asistente para configuración de red, haga clic
en Siguiente.
3 Haga clic en Lista de comprobación para crear una red.
NOTA: Al seleccionar el método de conexión Este ordenador se conecta
directamente a Internet, se activa el servidor de seguridad integrado que se
proporciona con Windows XP Service Pack 1 (SP1) o posterior.
4 Haga las comprobaciones de la lista de verificación y los preparativos
necesarios.
5 Vuelva a Asistente para configuración de red y siga las instrucciones que
aparecen en pantalla.
Dispositivo
de red
Conector del adaptador
de red del ordenador Cable de red
Conector del
adaptador de redGuía de referencia rápida 153
Windows Vista
Para realizar cambios en la configuración de red en Microsoft® Windows
Vista™:
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio de Windows Vista, y, a continuación, haga
clic en Red→ Centro de redes y recursos compartidos.
2 Haga clic en Set up a connection or network (Establecer una conexión o
red).
3 Seleccione el tipo de conexión de red que desea hacer y siga las
instrucciones de la pantalla.
4 Cuando haya acabado, cierre el Centro de redes y recursos compartidos.
Conexión a Internet
NOTA: Los proveedores de servicios de internet y las ofertas de estos proveedores
pueden variar según el país.
Para conectarse a Internet, necesita una conexión por módem o de red y un
proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP). Su proveedor de servicios de internet
(ISP) le ofrecerá una o más de las siguientes opciones de conexión a Internet:
• Las conexiones ADSL, que ofrecen acceso a Internet de alta velocidad a
través de la línea de teléfono existente o del servicio de telefonía móvil.
Con una conexión ADSL, podrá acceder a Internet y utilizar su teléfono en
la misma línea simultáneamente.
• Las conexiones de módem por cable, que ofrecen acceso a Internet de alta
velocidad a través de su línea de TV por cable local.
• Las conexiones de módem por satélite, que ofrecen acceso a Internet de
alta velocidad a través del sistema de televisión por satélite.
• Las conexiones de acceso telefónico, que ofrecen acceso a Internet a través
de la línea telefónica. Las conexiones de acceso telefónico son
considerablemente más lentas que las de ADSL y conexiones de módem
por cable (o satélite).
• Las conexiones LAN (Red de área local) inalámbricas, que ofrecen acceso a
Internet utilizando tecnología inalámbrica Bluetooth®.
Si utiliza una conexión de acceso telefónico, conecte una línea telefónica al
conector del módem en el ordenador y a la roseta del teléfono antes de
configurar la conexión a Internet. Si utiliza una conexión ADSL o de módem
por cable/satélite, póngase en contacto con su proveedor de servicios de
internet o con su servicio de telefonía móvil para obtener instrucciones de
configuración.154 Guía de referencia rápida
Configuración de su conexión a Internet
Para configurar una conexión a Internet con un acceso directo en el escritorio
de su proveedor de servicios de internet:
1 Guarde y cierre todos los archivos que estén abiertos y salga de los
programas activos.
2 Haga doble clic en el icono de su proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP)
en el escritorio de Microsoft® Windows®.
3 Siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para completar la configuración.
Si no tiene un icono de su proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP) en el
escritorio o desea configurar una conexión a Internet con un ISP diferente,
realice los pasos de la siguiente sección que se correspondan con el sistema
operativo del ordenador que utiliza.
NOTA: Si tiene problemas para conectarse a Internet, consulte el apartado
“Configuración de una red doméstica y de oficina” en la página 151. Si no puede
conectarse a Internet pero consiguió hacerlo anteriormente, puede que el
proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP) tenga una interrupción del servicio.
Póngase en contacto con su proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP) para
comprobar el estado del servicio, o intente conectarse de nuevo más tarde.
Windows XP
1 Guarde y cierre todos los archivos que estén abiertos y salga de los
programas activos.
2 Haga clic en Inicio→ Internet Explorer.
Aparecerá el Asistente para conexión nueva.
3 Haga clic en Conectarse a Internet.
4 En la siguiente ventana, haga clic en la opción correcta:
• Si no tiene un proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP) y desea
seleccionar uno, haga clic en Elegir de una lista de proveedores de
servicios Internet (ISP).
• Si ha obtenido información de configuración de su ISP pero no ha
recibido un CD de configuración, haga clic en Establecer mi conexión
manualmente.
• Si dispone de un CD, haga clic en Usar el CD que tengo de un
proveedor de servicios Internet (ISP).Guía de referencia rápida 155
5 Haga clic en Siguiente.
Si ha seleccionado Establecer mi conexión manualmente, continúe con el
paso 6. En caso contrario, siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para
completar la configuración.
NOTA: Si no sabe qué tipo de conexión seleccionar, póngase en contacto con su
ISP.
6 Haga clic en la opción adecuada de ¿Cómo desea conectar a Internet? y, a
continuación, haga clic en Siguiente.
7 Utilice la información de configuración ofrecida por su proveedor de
servicios de internet (ISP) para completar la configuración.
Windows Vista™
NOTA: Tenga la información de su proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP)
preparada. Si no dispone de ISP, el asistente para Conectarse a Internet podrá
ayudarle a obtener uno.
1 Guarde y cierre todos los archivos que estén abiertos y salga de los
programas activos.
2 Haga clic en el botón Inicio de Windows Vista y en Panel de control.
3 En Red e Internet, haga clic en Conectarse a Internet.
Aparece la ventana Conectarse a Internet.
4 Haga clic en Banda ancha (PPPoE) o Conexión telefónica, dependiendo
de cómo desee conectarse:
• Seleccione Banda ancha si va a utilizar una conexión ADSL, de
módem por satélite, de módem por TV de cable, o de tecnología
inalámbrica Bluetooth.
• Seleccione Conexión telefónica si va a utilizar un módem de acceso
telefónico o ISDN.
NOTA: Si no sabe qué tipo de conexión seleccionar, haga clic en Ayúdeme a elegir
o póngase en contacto con su proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP).
5 Siga las instrucciones de la pantalla y utilice la información de
configuración suministrada por su proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP)
para completar la configuración.156 Guía de referencia rápida
Transferencia de información a un ordenador
nuevo
Puede utilizar los “asistentes” del sistema operativo para ayudarle a transferir
archivos y otros datos de un ordenador a otro (por ejemplo, de un ordenador
antiguo a uno nuevo. Para obtener instrucciones, consulte en los apartados
siguientes el que corresponda al sistema operativo que ejecuta su ordenador.
Microsoft® Windows® XP (opcional)
El sistema operativo MicrosoftWindows XP proporciona un Asistente para
transferencia de archivos y configuraciones que sirve para transferir datos del
ordenador de origen a uno nuevo. Puede transferir datos, como los siguientes:
• Mensajes de correo electrónico
• Configuraciones de barras de herramientas
• Tamaños de ventana
• Marcadores de Internet
Puede transferir los datos al ordenador nuevo a través de una conexión de red
o de serie o puede guardarlos en medios extraíbles como, por ejemplo, un CD
grabable, para transferirlos al ordenador nuevo.
NOTA: Puede transferir información de un ordenador viejo a un ordenador nuevo
conectando directamente un cable serie a los puertos de entrada/salida (E/S) de
los dos ordenadores. Para transferir datos a través de una conexión serie, debe
acceder a la utilidad Conexiones de red desde el Panel de control y realizar los
pasos de configuración adicionales, como configurar una conexión avanzada y
designar el ordenador host y el ordenador invitado.
Para obtener instrucciones sobre la configuración de una conexión de cables
directa entre dos ordenadores, consulte en Microsoft Knowledge Base el artículo
número 305621, titulado How to Set Up a Direct Cable Connection Between Two
Computers in Windows XP. Es posible que esta información no esté disponible en
determinados países.
Para transferir información a un ordenador nuevo, debe ejecutar el Asistente
para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones. Para este proceso, puede
utilizar el soporte multimedia opcional Operating System (Sistema operativo)
o bien crear un disco del asistente con el Asistente para transferencia de
archivos y configuraciones.Guía de referencia rápida 157
Ejecución del Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones con el
CD Operating System (Sistema operativo)
NOTA: Para este procedimiento es necesario el soporte multimedia Operating
System (Sistema operativo). Este soporte multimedia es opcional, por lo que es
posible que no se envíe con todos los ordenadores.
Para preparar un ordenador nuevo para la transferencia de archivos:
1 Abra el Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones: haga
clic en Inicio→ Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Herramientas del
sistema→ Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones.
2 Cuando aparezca la pantalla de bienvenida Asistente para transferencia de
archivos y configuraciones, haga clic en Siguiente.
3 En la pantalla ¿Qué ordenador es éste?, haga clic en Ordenador nuevo→
Siguiente.
4 En la pantalla ¿Tiene un CD de Windows XP?, haga clic en Utilizaré el
asistente desde el CD de Windows XP→ Siguiente.
5 Cuando aparezca la pantalla Diríjase al ordenador antiguo, vaya al
ordenador antiguo o de origen. No haga clic en Siguiente en esta ocasión.
Para copiar datos del ordenador antiguo:
1 En el ordenador antiguo, inserte el soporte multimedia Operating System
(Sistema operativo) de Windows XP.
2 En la pantalla Microsoft Windows XP, haga clic en Realizar tareas
adicionales.
3 En ¿Qué desea hacer?, haga clic en Transferir archivos y
configuraciones→ Siguiente.
4 En la pantalla ¿Qué ordenador es éste?, haga clic en Ordenador antiguo→
Siguiente.
5 En la pantalla Seleccione un método de transferencia, haga clic en el
método de transferencia que prefiera.
6 En la pantalla Elija qué desea transferir, seleccione los elementos que
desea transferir y haga clic en Siguiente.
Una vez copiada la información, se muestra la pantalla Completando la
Fase de recopilación.
7 Haga clic en Terminar.158 Guía de referencia rápida
Para transferir información al ordenador nuevo:
1 En la pantalla Diríjase al ordenador antiguo del ordenador nuevo, haga
clic en Siguiente.
2 En la pantalla Seleccione la ubicación de archivos y configuraciones,
seleccione el método que ha elegido para transferir los archivos y las
configuraciones y haga clic en Siguiente.
El asistente lee las configuraciones y los archivos recopilados y los aplica al
nuevo ordenador.
Una vez se han aplicado todas las configuraciones y los archivos, aparece la
pantalla Completado.
3 Haga clic en Completado y reinicie el ordenador nuevo.
Ejecución del Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones sin el
soporte multimedia Operating System (Sistema operativo)
Para ejecutar el Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones sin
el soporte multimedia Operating System (Sistema operativo), debe crear un
disco del asistente que le permitirá crear un archivo imagen a modo de copia
de seguridad para los medios extraíbles.
Para crear un disco del asistente, utilice el nuevo ordenador con Windows XP
y realice los pasos siguientes:
1 Abra el Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones: haga
clic en Inicio→ Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Herramientas del
sistema→ Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones.
2 Cuando aparezca la pantalla de bienvenida Asistente para transferencia de
archivos y configuraciones, haga clic en Siguiente.
3 En la pantalla ¿Qué ordenador es éste?, haga clic en Ordenador nuevo→
Siguiente.
4 En la pantalla ¿Tiene un CD de Windows XP?, haga clic en Deseo crear
un disco del asistente en la siguiente unidad:→ Siguiente.
5 Inserte los medios extraíbles, como un CD grabable, y haga clic en
Aceptar.
6 Cuando la creación del disco haya finalizado y aparezca el mensaje
Diríjase al ordenador antiguo, no haga clic en Siguiente.
7 Diríjase al ordenador antiguo.Guía de referencia rápida 159
Para copiar datos del ordenador antiguo:
1 En el ordenador antiguo, inserte el disco del asistente.
2 Haga clic en Inicio→ Ejecutar.
3 En el campo Abrir de la ventana Ejecutar, busque la ruta de acceso de
fastwiz (en los medios extraíbles adecuados) y haga clic en Aceptar.
4 En la pantalla de bienvenida Asistente para transferencia de archivos y
configuraciones, haga clic en Siguiente.
5 En la pantalla ¿Qué ordenador es éste?, haga clic en Ordenador antiguo→
Siguiente.
6 En la pantalla Seleccione un método de transferencia, haga clic en el
método de transferencia que prefiera.
7 En la pantalla Elija qué desea transferir, seleccione los elementos que
desea transferir y haga clic en Siguiente.
Una vez copiada la información, se muestra la pantalla Completando la
Fase de recopilación.
8 Haga clic en Terminar.
Para transferir información al ordenador nuevo:
1 En la pantalla Diríjase al ordenador antiguo del ordenador nuevo, haga
clic en Siguiente.
2 En la pantalla Seleccione la ubicación de archivos y configuraciones,
seleccione el método que ha elegido para transferir los archivos y las
configuraciones y haga clic en Siguiente. Siga las instrucciones que
aparecen en pantalla.
El asistente lee las configuraciones y los archivos recopilados y los aplica al
nuevo ordenador.
Una vez se han aplicado todas las configuraciones y los archivos, aparece la
pantalla Completado.
3 Haga clic en Completado y reinicie el ordenador nuevo.
NOTA: Para obtener más información acerca de este procedimiento, busque en el
sitio web support.dell.com el documento n.º 154781 (What Are The Different
Methods To Transfer Files From My Old Computer To My New Dell™ Computer
Using the Microsoft® Windows® XP Operating System?).
NOTA: Es posible que no pueda acceder al documento Dell™ Knowledge Base en
determinados países.160 Guía de referencia rápida
Microsoft Windows Vista™ (opcional)
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio de Windows Vista y, a continuación, haga
clic en Transferir archivos y configuraciones→ Iniciar Windows Easy
Transfer.
2 En el cuadro de diálogo User Account Control (Control de cuenta de
usuario), haga clic en Continue (Continuar).
3 Haga clic en Start a new transfer (Iniciar una transferencia nueva) o
Continue a transfer in progress (Continuar con una transferencia en
curso).
Siga las instrucciones del asistente Windows Easy Transfer (Transferencia
sencilla de Windows) que aparecen en la pantalla.
Configuración de una impresora
AVISO: Complete la configuración del sistema operativo antes de conectar una
impresora al ordenador.
Consulte la documentación incluida con la impresora para obtener
información sobre la configuración, entre ella, cómo:
• Obtener e instalar unidades actualizadas.
• Conectar la impresora al ordenador.
• Cargar papel e instalar el cartucho de tóner o de tinta.
Si necesita asistencia técnica, consulte el manual del propietario de la
impresora o póngase en contacto con el fabricante de la impresora.
Cable de la impresora
Su impresora se conecta al ordenador con un cable USB o un cable paralelo.
Su impresora puede no incluir un cable de impresora, así que cómprelo por
separado, asegurándose de que sea compatible con la impresora y el
ordenador. Si ha adquirido un cable de impresora al mismo tiempo que
compró el ordenador, puede que el cable venga en la caja de envío del
ordenador. Guía de referencia rápida 161
Conexión de dos monitores
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta
sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de
información del producto.
Si ha adquirido una tarjeta gráfica que admita monitores duales, siga estas
instrucciones para conectar y activar los monitores. Las instrucciones le dirán
cómo conectar los dos monitores (cada uno de ellos con un conector VGA),
un monitor con un conector VGA y un monitor con un conector DVI, o
una TV.
AVISO: Si conecta dos monitores que tengan conectores VGA, deberá disponer del
adaptador DVI opcional para conectar el cable. Si conecta dos monitores de
panel-plano, al menos uno de ellos deberá tener un conector VGA. Si conecta una TV,
podrá conectar sólo un monitor (VGA o DVI) además de la TV.
Conexión de dos monitores con conectores VGA
1 Apague el sistema.
NOTA: Si el ordenador tiene vídeo integrado, no conecte ningún monitor al
conector de vídeo integrado. Si el conector de vídeo integrado está cubierto por
una funda, no retire la funda para conectar el monitor o el monitor no funcionará.
2 Conecte uno de los monitores al conector VGA (azul) de la parte trasera
del ordenador.
3 Conecte el otro monitor al adaptador DVI opcional y conecte el adaptador
DVI al conector DVI (blanco) de la parte trasera del ordenador.
4 Reinicie el sistema.162 Guía de referencia rápida
Conexión de un monitor con un conector VGA y un monitor con un conector DVI
1 Apague el sistema.
2 Conecte el conector VGA del monitor al conector VGA (azul) de la parte
trasera del ordenador.
3 Conecte el conector DVI del otro monitor al conector DVI (blanco) de la
parte trasera del ordenador.
4 Reinicie el sistema.
Conexión de una TV
NOTA: Debe adquirir un cable de S-vídeo, disponible en la mayoría de los
establecimientos de electrónica de consumo, para conectar un televisor al
ordenador. No viene incluido con el ordenador.
1 Apague el sistema.
2 Conecte un extremo del cable de S-vídeo al conector de SALIDA de TV
opcional situado en la parte trasera del ordenador.
1 Adaptador DVI opcional 2 Conector DVI (blanco)
3 Conector de SALIDA de TV 4 Conector VGA (azul)
1
4 3 2Guía de referencia rápida 163
3 Conecte el otro extremo del cable de S-vídeo al conector de entrada de Svídeo del televisor.
4 Conecte el monitor VGA o DVI.
5 Reinicie el sistema.
Cambio de la configuración de pantalla
1 Después de conectar los monitores o el televisor, encienda el ordenador.
El escritorio de Microsoft® Windows® aparece en el monitor principal.
2 Active el modo de escritorio ampliado en la configuración de pantalla. En
el modo de escritorio ampliado, puede arrastrar objetos de una pantalla a
otra, con lo que se dobla de manera eficaz la cantidad de área de trabajo
visible.
Dispositivos de protección de alimentación
Dispone de varios dispositivos para protegerse contra las fluctuaciones y fallos
de la alimentación:
• Protectores contra sobrevoltajes
• Acondicionadores de línea
• Sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida (SAI)
Protectores contra sobrevoltajes
Los protectores contra sobrevoltajes y las cajas de enchufes equipadas con
protección contra sobrevoltaje ayudan a evitar daños en el ordenador
causados por los picos de voltaje que se puedan producir durante tormentas
eléctricas o tras interrupciones eléctricas. Algunos fabricantes de protectores
contra sobrevoltajes incluyen cobertura de garantía para determinados tipos
de daños. Lea atentamente la garantía del dispositivo al elegir un protector
contra sobrevoltajes. Un dispositivo con un rango de julios más alto ofrece
mayor protección. Compare los rangos de julios para determinar la eficacia
relativa de los distintos dispositivos.
AVISO: La mayoría de los protectores contra sobrevoltajes no protegen contra las
fluctuaciones de alimentación o los cortes de electricidad causados por descargas
de rayos cercanas. Si se produce una descarga en su zona, desconecte la línea
telefónica de la roseta del teléfono y desconecte el ordenador de la toma de
corriente.164 Guía de referencia rápida
Muchos protectores contra sobrevoltaje tienen una roseta para protección del
módem. Consulte la documentación del protector contra sobrevoltajes para
obtener instrucciones sobre conexiones de módem.
AVISO: No todos los protectores contra sobrevoltajes ofrecen protección al
adaptador de red. Desconecte el cable de red de la toma de red de pared durante
las tormentas eléctricas.
Acondicionadores de línea
AVISO: Los acondicionadores de línea no protegen contra las interrupciones del
suministro eléctrico.
Los acondicionadores de línea están diseñados para mantener el voltaje de
corriente alterna a un nivel cuasi constante.
Sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida
AVISO: El corte del suministro eléctrico mientras los datos se estén guardando en
la unidad de disco duro podría causar la pérdida de los datos o daños en los
archivos.
NOTA: Para garantizar un tiempo máximo de funcionamiento de la batería, conecte
sólo un ordenador al SAI. Conecte los demás dispositivos, caso de una impresora, a
una caja de enchufes independiente que ofrezca protección contra sobrevoltajes.
Una SAI protege contra las fluctuaciones e interrupciones de la electricidad.
Los dispositivos SAI contienen una batería que proporciona alimentación
temporal a los dispositivos a ellos conectados cuando la alimentación de CA
se interrumpe. La batería se carga mientras haya alimentación de CA.
Consulte la documentación del fabricante de SAI para obtener información
acerca del tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería y para asegurarse de que el
dispositivo esté aprobado por Underwriters Laboratories (UL).Guía de referencia rápida 165
Ordenador de sobremesa
Vista anterior
1 Conectores
USB 2.0 (2)
Utilice los conectores USB para los dispositivos que conecte
ocasionalmente, como palancas de mando o cámaras, o para
dispositivos USB de arranque (consulte el apartado
“Opciones de la Configuración del sistema” en la Guía
del usuario en línea para obtener más información sobre
cómo arrancar desde un dispositivo USB). Se recomienda
la utilización de los conectores USB posteriores para los
dispositivos que suelen permanecer siempre conectados
como, por ejemplo, impresoras y teclados.
2 Indicador de
actividad de la
unidad
El indicador de actividad de la unidad se enciende
cuando el ordenador lee o escribe datos en la unidad de
disco duro. El indicador también puede encenderse
cuando un dispositivo como la unidad óptica está en
funcionamiento.
3 Botón de encendido Pulse el botón de encendido para encender el ordenador.
El indicador situado en el centro de este botón señala el
estado encendido.
AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos no utilice el
botón de alimentación para apagar el ordenador. En
su lugar, apague el ordenador mediante el sistema
operativo.
9 8
3
5
1
10 6 4
2
11 7166 Guía de referencia rápida
4 Placa de
identificación de
Dell
Esta placa puede girarse de modo que esté orientada
igual que su ordenador. Para girar la placa, coloque los
dedos alrededor de la placa, presione con fuerza y gírela.
También puede girarla utilizando la ranura que hay cerca
de la parte inferior de la placa.
5 Indicador de
alimentación
El indicador de alimentación se ilumina y parpadea o
permanece encendido para indicar estados diferentes:
• Sin luz: el ordenador está apagado.
• Verde sólido: el ordenador se encuentra en un estado de
funcionamiento normal.
• Verde parpadeante: el ordenador se encuentra en un
modo de ahorro de energía.
• Ámbar sólido o parpadeante: consulte “Problemas de
alimentación” en la Guía del usuario en línea.
Para salir de un modo de ahorro de energía, pulse el
botón de encendido o utilice el teclado o el ratón si está
configurado como un dispositivo de activación en el
Administrador de dispositivos de Windows. Para obtener
más información acerca de los modos de suspensión y
cómo salir del modo de ahorro de energía, consulte la
Guía del usuario en línea.
Consulte el apartado “Indicadores de diagnóstico” en la
página 194 para ver una descripción de los códigos
luminosos que pueden ayudarle a solucionar problemas
del ordenador.
6 Indicadores de
diagnóstico
Utilice los indicadores para solucionar problemas del
ordenador basados en el código de diagnóstico. Para
obtener más información, consulte el apartado
“Indicadores de diagnóstico” en la página 194.
7 Indicador luminoso
de LAN
Este indicador señala que se ha establecido una conexión
LAN (red de área local).
8 Conectores de
micrófono y
auricular
Utilice el conector del micrófono para conectar un
micrófono para PC. En los ordenadores con tarjeta de
sonido, el conector de micrófono está en la tarjeta.
Utilice el conector de los auriculares para conectar los
auriculares y la mayoría de los altavoces.
9 Unidad de disco
flexible
Puede contener una unidad de disco flexible.
10 Unidad óptica Utilice la unidad óptica para reproducir un CD/DVD.
11 Etiqueta de servicio Utilice la etiqueta de servicio para identificar el ordenador al
acceder al sitio web Dell Support o al llamar a la asistencia.Guía de referencia rápida 167
Vista posterior
PRECAUCIÓN: Asegúrese de que ninguno de los ventiladores de aire del sistema
estén bloqueados. Su bloqueo podría causar serios problemas termales.
1 Ranuras para
tarjetas
Acceda a los conectores de las tarjetas PCI y PCI Express
instaladas.
2 Conectores del
panel posterior
Conecte el USB, el audio y demás dispositivos en el
conector adecuado (consulte el apartado “Conectores del
panel posterior” en la página 168 para obtener más
información).
3 Conector de
alimentación
Inserte el cable de alimentación.
4 Interruptor
selector de voltaje
Para seleccionar el tipo de voltaje.
5 Anillos del
candado
Los anillos del candado sirven para conectar un dispositivo
contra robo comercialmente disponible. Los anillos del
candado le permiten asegurar la cubierta del ordenador al
chasis con un candado, evitando así el acceso no autorizado
al interior del ordenador. Para utilizar anillos del candado,
inserte un candado disponible comercialmente a través de
los anillos y, a continuación, cierre el candado.
6 Pestillo de
liberación de la
cubierta
Utilice este seguro para abrir la cubierta del ordenador.
1 2 3 4 5 6168 Guía de referencia rápida
Conectores del panel posterior
1 Conector
paralelo
Conecte un dispositivo paralelo, como una impresora, al
conector paralelo. Si tiene una impresora USB, enchúfela a
un conector USB.
NOTA: El conector paralelo integrado se desactiva
automáticamente si el ordenador detecta una tarjeta instalada
que contiene un conector paralelo configurado en la misma
dirección. Si desea más información, consulte el apartado
“Opciones de configuración del sistema” en la Guía del
usuario en línea.
2 Indicador de
integridad de
vínculo
• Verde: existe una conexión correcta entre una red a
10 Mbps y el ordenador.
• Naranja: existe una conexión correcta entre una red a
100 Mbps y el ordenador.
• Amarillo: existe una conexión correcta entre una red a 1 Gb
(o 1.000 Mbps) y el ordenador.
• Apagado: el ordenador no detecta una conexión física con
la red.
1 3
98 7
5
6
2 4Guía de referencia rápida 169
3 Conector del
adaptador de red
Para conectar el ordenador a una red o a un dispositivo de
banda ancha, conecte un extremo de un cable de red a un
enchufe de red o a su dispositivo de banda ancha. Conecte
el otro extremo del cable de red al conector del adaptador de
red, situado en el panel posterior del equipo. Cuando el
cable de red se haya conectado correctamente, oirá un clic.
NOTA: No enchufe un cable de teléfono al conector de red.
En los ordenadores con una tarjeta adaptadora de red, utilice
el conector de la tarjeta.
Se recomienda que utilice al menos cableado y conectores
de categoría 5 para su red. Si debe utilizar la categoría 3 para
cables, fuerce la velocidad de la red a 10 Mbps para
garantizar un funcionamiento fiable.
4 Indicador de
actividad de red
Este indicador amarillo parpadea cuando el ordenador
transmite o recibe datos de la red. Un gran volumen de
tráfico en la red puede hacer que este indicador luminoso
parezca estar continuamente encendido.
5 Conector de
salida de línea
Utilice el conector verde de salida de línea para conectar
auriculares y la mayoría de altavoces con amplificadores
integrados.
En ordenadores con tarjeta de sonido, use el conector de la
tarjeta.
6 Conector del
micrófono/línea
de entrada
Utilice el conector azul de entrada de línea para conectar un
dispositivo de grabación/reproducción como un reproductor
de casete, de CD o VCR.
Utilice el conector rosa de micrófono para conectar un
micrófono de PC para la entrada de música o de voz a un
programa de sonido o de telefonía.
En ordenadores con tarjeta de sonido, use el conector de la
tarjeta.
7 Conectores
USB 2.0 (6)
Utilice los conectores USB posteriores para los dispositivos
que suelen permanecer siempre conectados como, por
ejemplo, impresoras y teclados.
Se recomienda la utilización de los conectores USB
delanteros para los dispositivos que se conectan
ocasionalmente, como, por ejemplo, palancas de mando o
cámaras.170 Guía de referencia rápida
Extracción de la cubierta del ordenador
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta
sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad en la Guía de información del
producto.
PRECAUCIÓN: Para protegerse de las descargas eléctricas, desconecte el
ordenador de la toma de corriente eléctrica antes de retirar la cubierta.
1 Siga los procedimientos que se indican en el apartado “Antes de comenzar”
en la página 146.
NOTA: Asegúrese de que existe suficiente espacio para la extracción de la
cubierta.
AVISO: Asegúrese de trabajar en una superficie protegida y nivelada para evitar
arañar el ordenador o la superficie sobre la que descansa.
2 Si ha instalado un candado a través del anillo del candado en el panel
posterior, retire el candado.
3 Deslice el seguro de liberación de la cubierta hacia atrás al mismo tiempo
que levanta la cubierta.
8 Conector de
vídeo VGA
Conecte el cable VGA del monitor al conector VGA del
ordenador.
En ordenadores con tarjeta de vídeo, utilice el conector de la
tarjeta.
9 Conector serie Conecte un dispositivo serie, como un dispositivo portátil, al
puerto serie. El nombre predeterminado para el conector
serie 1 es COM1.
Si desea más información, consulte el apartado “Opciones
de configuración del sistema” en la Guía del usuario en
línea.Guía de referencia rápida 171
4 Levante la cubierta utilizando las lengüetas de la bisagra a modo de
palanca.
5 Retire la cubierta de las lengüetas de la bisagra y colóquela sobre una
superficie suave y no abrasiva.
1 Ranura para cable de seguridad 2 Pestillo de liberación de la cubierta
3 Anillo del candado
2
1
3172 Guía de referencia rápida
Vista interior del ordenador
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta
sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de
información del producto.
PRECAUCIÓN: Para evitar las descargas eléctricas, desconecte el ordenador de
la toma de alimentación eléctrica antes de retirar la cubierta.
AVISO: Asegúrese de que al abrir la cubierta del ordenador no haya desconectado
inadvertidamente los cables de la placa base.
1 Compartimento de las unidades
(CD/DVD, disquete y unidad de
disco duro)
2 Fuente de alimentación
3 Tarjeta del sistema 4 Ranuras para tarjetas
5 Ensamblaje de disipador de calor 6 Panel de E/S frontal
1
2
3
4
6 5Guía de referencia rápida 173
Componentes de la placa base
1 Conector del altavoz interno
(INT_SPKR)
2 Conector del procesador (CPU)
3 Conector de alimentación del
procesador (12VPOWER)
4 Conectores del módulo de memoria
(DIMM_1, DIMM_2)
1 2
13 5
3
15
17
12
4
7
14
11 8 10 9
16
6174 Guía de referencia rápida
Cómo volver a colocar la cubierta del ordenador
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de este
apartado, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de
información del producto.
1 Compruebe que todos los cables estén conectados y apártelos de forma
que no molesten.
2 Asegúrese de no dejar herramientas ni piezas adicionales dentro del
ordenador.
3 Para volver a colocar la cubierta:
a Alinee la parte inferior de la cubierta con las lengüetas de la bisagra
situadas a lo largo del borde inferior del ordenador.
b Haga palanca con las lengüetas de la bisagra para girar la cubierta
hacia abajo y cerrarla.
c Coloque la cubierta en su sitio tirando del seguro de liberación de la
cubierta y, cuando la cubierta esté bien colocada, suelte el seguro.
d Compruebe que la cubierta está colocada correctamente antes de
mover el ordenador.
5 Conectores de unidad SATA
(SATA0, SATA1)
6 Conector del panel anterior
(FRONTPANEL)
7 Conector de alimentación
(POWER)
8 Conectores de unidad SATA
(SATA2, SATA3)
9 Puente de reinicio de RTC
(RTCRST)
10 Puente de contraseña (PSWD)
11 Zócalo de la batería (BATTERY) 12 Conector de tarjeta PCI Express
x16 (SLOT1)
13 Conectores de tarjeta PCI
(SLOT2 y SLOT3)
14 Timbre interno (SPKR)
15 Conector serie/ PS/2 (PS2/SER2) 16 Conector del ventilador
(FAN_CPU)
17 Conector de la unidad de disco
flexible (FLOPPY)Guía de referencia rápida 175
Ordenador de minitorre
Vista anterior
1 Etiqueta de servicio Utilice la etiqueta de servicio para identificar el
ordenador al acceder al sitio web Dell Support o al llamar
a la asistencia.
2 Unidad óptica Utilice la unidad óptica para reproducir un CD/DVD.
4
8
7
3
2
6
5
1
10
9176 Guía de referencia rápida
3 Unidad de disco
flexible
Una unidad de disco flexible es opcional.
4 Indicador de
actividad de la
unidad
El indicador de actividad de la unidad se enciende
cuando el ordenador lee o escribe datos en la unidad de
disco duro. El indicador también puede encenderse
cuando un dispositivo como la unidad óptica está en
funcionamiento.
5 Conectores
USB 2.0 (2)
Utilice los conectores USB para los dispositivos que conecte
ocasionalmente, como palancas de mando o cámaras, o para
dispositivos USB de arranque (consulte el apartado
“Opciones de la Configuración del sistema” en la Guía
del usuario en línea para obtener más información sobre
cómo arrancar desde un dispositivo USB). Se recomienda
la utilización de los conectores USB posteriores para los
dispositivos que suelen permanecer siempre conectados
como, por ejemplo, impresoras y teclados.
6 Indicadores de
diagnóstico
Utilice los indicadores para solucionar problemas del
ordenador basados en el código de diagnóstico. Para
obtener más información, consulte el apartado
“Indicadores de diagnóstico” en la página 194.
7 Botón de
alimentación,
Indicador de
alimentación
Pulse el botón de encendido para encender el ordenador.
El indicador situado en el centro de este botón señala el
estado encendido.
AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos no utilice el
botón de alimentación para apagar el ordenador. En
su lugar, apague el ordenador mediante el sistema
operativo.
8 Conector de
auriculares
Utilice el conector de los auriculares para conectar los
auriculares y la mayoría de los altavoces.
9 Conector del
micrófono
Utilice el conector para micrófono para conectar un
micrófono de PC para la entrada de voz o música a un
programa de sonido o de telefonía.
En los ordenadores con tarjeta de sonido, el conector de
micrófono está en la tarjeta.
10 Indicador luminoso
de LAN
Este indicador señala que se ha establecido una conexión
LAN (red de área local).Guía de referencia rápida 177
Vista posterior
4
3
5
6
2
1178 Guía de referencia rápida
PRECAUCIÓN: Asegúrese de que ninguno de los ventiladores de aire del sistema
estén bloqueados. Su bloqueo podría causar serios problemas termales.
Conectores del panel posterior
1 Pestillo de
liberación de la
cubierta
Este seguro le permite abrir la cubierta de su ordenador.
2 Anillos del
candado
Los anillos del candado sirven para conectar un dispositivo
contra robo comercialmente disponible. Los anillos del
candado le permiten asegurar la cubierta del ordenador al
chasis con un candado, evitando así el acceso no autorizado
al interior del ordenador. Para utilizar anillos del candado,
inserte un candado disponible comercialmente a través de
los anillos y, a continuación, cierre el candado.
3 Conector de
alimentación
Inserte el cable de alimentación.
4 Interruptor
selector de voltaje
Para seleccionar el tipo de voltaje.
5 Conectores del
panel posterior
Conecte el USB, el audio y demás dispositivos en el conector
adecuado (consulte el apartado “Conectores del panel
posterior” en la página 168 para obtener más información).
6 Ranuras para
tarjetas
Acceda a los conectores de las tarjetas PCI y PCI Express
instaladas.
1 3
98 7
5
6
2 4Guía de referencia rápida 179
1 Conector
paralelo
Conecte un dispositivo paralelo, como una impresora, al
conector paralelo. Si tiene una impresora USB, enchúfela a un
conector USB.
NOTA: El conector paralelo integrado se desactiva
automáticamente si el ordenador detecta una tarjeta instalada
que contiene un conector paralelo configurado en la misma
dirección. Para obtener más información, consulte el apartado
“Opciones de configuración del sistema” en la Guía del usuario
en línea.
2 Indicador de
integridad de
vínculo
• Verde: existe una conexión correcta entre una red a 10 Mbps
y el ordenador.
• Naranja: existe una conexión correcta entre una red a
100 Mbps y el ordenador.
• Amarillo: existe una conexión correcta entre una red a 1 Gb
(o 1.000 Mbps) y el ordenador.
• Apagado: el ordenador no detecta una conexión física con la
red.
3 Conector del
adaptador de
red
Para conectar el ordenador a una red o a un dispositivo de
banda ancha, conecte un extremo de un cable de red a un
enchufe de red o a su dispositivo de banda ancha. Conecte el
otro extremo del cable de red al conector del adaptador de red,
situado en el panel posterior del equipo. Cuando el cable de
red se haya conectado correctamente, oirá un clic.
NOTA: No enchufe un cable de teléfono al conector de red.
En los ordenadores con una tarjeta adaptadora de red, utilice
el conector de la tarjeta.
Se recomienda que utilice al menos cableado y conectores de
categoría 5 para su red. Si debe utilizar la categoría 3 para
cables, fuerce la velocidad de la red a 10 Mbps para garantizar
un funcionamiento fiable.
4 Indicador de
actividad de red
Este indicador amarillo parpadea cuando el ordenador
transmite o recibe datos de la red. Un gran volumen de tráfico
en la red puede hacer que este indicador luminoso parezca
estar continuamente encendido.180 Guía de referencia rápida
Cómo quitar la cubierta del ordenador
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta
sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad en la Guía de información del
producto.
PRECAUCIÓN: Para protegerse de las descargas eléctricas, desconecte el
ordenador de la toma de corriente eléctrica antes de retirar la cubierta.
1 Siga los procedimientos que se indican en el apartado “Antes de comenzar”
en la página 146.
NOTA: Asegúrese de que existe suficiente espacio para la extracción de la
cubierta.
AVISO: Asegúrese de trabajar en una superficie protegida y nivelada para evitar
arañar el ordenador o la superficie sobre la que descansa.
5 Conector de
salida de línea
Utilice el conector verde de salida de línea para conectar
auriculares y la mayoría de altavoces con amplificadores
integrados.
En ordenadores con tarjeta de sonido, use el conector de la
tarjeta.
6 Conector del
micrófono/línea
de entrada
Utilice el conector de entrada de línea azul y rosa para
conectar un dispositivo de grabación/reproducción como un
reproductor de casete, de CD o VCR; o un micrófono para PC.
7 Conectores
USB 2.0 (6)
Utilice los conectores USB posteriores para los dispositivos
que suelen permanecer siempre conectados como, por
ejemplo, impresoras y teclados.
Se recomienda la utilización de los conectores USB delanteros
para los dispositivos que se conectan ocasionalmente, como,
por ejemplo, palancas de mando o cámaras.
8 Conector de
vídeo VGA
Conecte el cable VGA del monitor al conector VGA del
ordenador.
En ordenadores con tarjeta de vídeo, utilice el conector de la
tarjeta.
9 Conector serie Conecte un dispositivo serie, como un dispositivo portátil, al
puerto serie. El nombre predeterminado para el conector serie
1 es COM1.
Si desea más información, consulte el apartado “Opciones de
configuración del sistema” en la Guía del usuario en línea.Guía de referencia rápida 181
2 Deje el ordenador de lado con la cubierta mirando hacia arriba.
3 Saque la cubierta del ordenador tirando de ella de la parte delantera del
ordenador y levantándola.
4 Deje la cubierta a un lado en un lugar segura.
1 Ranura para cable de seguridad 2 Pestillo de liberación de la cubierta
3 Anillo del candado
2
1
3182 Guía de referencia rápida
Vista interior del ordenador
1 Unidad de disco flexible 2 Unidad óptica
3 Fuente de alimentación 4 Tarjeta del sistema
5 Ensamblaje de disipador de calor 6 Unidad de disco duro
1
3
4
6
2
5Guía de referencia rápida 183
Componentes de la placa base
1 Conector del altavoz interno
(INT_SPKR)
2 Conector del procesador (CPU)
3 Conector de alimentación del
procesador (12VPOWER)
4 Conectores del módulo de
memoria (DIMM_1, DIMM_2)
5 Conectores de unidad SATA
(SATA0, SATA1)
6 Conector del panel anterior
(FRONTPANEL)
1 2
6
5
13
3
15
17
12
4
7
14
11 8 10 9
16184 Guía de referencia rápida
Cómo volver a colocar la cubierta del ordenador
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de este
apartado, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de
información del producto.
1 Compruebe que todos los cables estén conectados y apártelos de forma
que no molesten.
2 Asegúrese de no dejar herramientas ni piezas adicionales dentro del
ordenador.
3 Para volver a colocar la cubierta:
a Alinee la parte inferior de la cubierta con las lengüetas de la bisagra
situadas a lo largo del borde inferior del ordenador.
b Haga palanca con las lengüetas de la bisagra para girar la cubierta
hacia abajo y cerrarla.
c Coloque la cubierta en su sitio tirando del seguro de liberación de la
cubierta y, cuando la cubierta esté bien colocada, suelte el seguro.
d Compruebe que la cubierta está colocada correctamente antes de
mover el ordenador.
4 Mueva el ordenador poniéndolo en posición vertical.
Solución de problemas
Dell proporciona una serie de herramientas para ayudarle en el caso de que el
ordenador no funcione como es de esperar. Para obtener la información más
actualizada sobre la solución de problemas de su ordenador, consulte el sitio
web Dell Support en support.dell.com.
7 Conector de alimentación
(POWER)
8 Conectores de unidad SATA
(SATA2, SATA3)
9 Puente de reinicio de RTC
(RTCRST)
10 Puente de contraseña (PSWD)
11 Zócalo de la batería (BATTERY) 12 Conector de tarjeta PCI Express
x16 (SLOT1)
13 Conectores de tarjeta PCI
(SLOT2 y SLOT3)
14 Timbre interno (SPKR)
15 Conector serie/ PS/2 (PS2/SER2) 16 Conector del ventilador
(FAN_CPU)
17 Conector de la unidad de disco
flexible (FLOPPY)Guía de referencia rápida 185
Si se produce algún problema en el ordenador para el que necesite la ayuda de
Dell, escriba una descripción detallada del error, los códigos de sonido o los
patrones de los indicadores de diagnóstico, introduzca el código de servicio
rápido y la etiqueta de servicio que aparece a continuación y póngase en
contacto con Dell desde la misma ubicación que el ordenador.
Para obtener un ejemplo del código de servicio rápido y de la etiqueta de
servicio, consulte el apartado “Localización de información” en la Guía del
usuario del ordenador.
Dell Diagnostics
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta
sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de
información del producto.
Cuándo utilizar los Dell Diagnostics (Diagnósticos Dell)
Si tiene algún problema con el ordenador, realice las comprobaciones que se
indican en la sección Bloqueos y problemas de software (consulte la Guía del
usuario en línea) y ejecute Dell Diagnostics antes de ponerse en contacto con
Dell para obtener asistencia técnica.
Se recomienda imprimir estos procesos antes de empezar.
AVISO: Los Dell Diagnostics (Diagnósticos Dell) sólo funcionan en los ordenadores
Dell™.
NOTA: El soporte multimedia Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) es
opcional y es posible que no se entregue con el ordenador.
Consulte la “Configuración del sistema” en la Guía del usuario en línea para
revisar la información de configuración del ordenador y asegúrese de que el
dispositivo que desea probar se muestra en la Configuración del sistema y que
está activo.
Inicie los Dell Diagnostics desde la unidad de disco duro o desde el soporte
multimedia Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades).
Código de servicio urgente:
Etiqueta de servicio:186 Guía de referencia rápida
Inicio de los Dell Diagnostics desde la unidad de disco duro
Los Dell Diagnostics se encuentran en una partición oculta de la utilidad de
diagnóstico en la unidad de disco duro.
NOTA: Si el ordenador no muestra ninguna imagen en la pantalla, póngase en
contacto con Dell.
1 Asegúrese de que el ordenador esté conectado a una toma de corriente que
funcione correctamente.
2 Encienda (o reinicie) el ordenador.
3 Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL™, pulse inmediatamente.
Seleccione Diagnostics (Diagnósticos) desde el menú de inicio y pulse
.
NOTA: Si espera demasiado y aparece el logotipo del sistema operativo, siga
esperando hasta que vea el escritorio de Microsoft® Windows® y, a
continuación, cierre el ordenador e inténtelo de nuevo.
NOTA: Si recibe un mensaje que indica que no se ha encontrado ninguna
partición para la utilidad de diagnóstico, ejecute los Dell Diagnostics desde el
soporte multimedia Drivers and Utilities.
4 Pulse cualquier tecla para iniciar los Dell Diagnostics desde la partición de
la utilidad de diagnósticos en la unidad de disco duro.
Inicio de los Dell Diagnostics desde el soporte multimedia Drivers and Utilities
1 Introduzca el soporte multimedia Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y
utilidades).
2 Apague y reinicie el ordenador
Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL, pulse inmediatamente.
NOTA: Si espera demasiado y aparece el logotipo del sistema operativo, siga
esperando hasta que vea el escritorio de Microsoft® Windows® y, a
continuación, cierre el ordenador e inténtelo de nuevo.
NOTA: Los siguientes pasos cambian la secuencia de inicio una sola vez. La
próxima vez que inicie el ordenador, éste lo hará según los dispositivos
especificados en el programa Configuración del sistema.
3 Cuando aparezca la lista de dispositivos de inicio, resalte CD/DVD/
CD-RW y pulse .
4 Seleccione la opción Boot from CD-ROM (Iniciar desde CD-ROM) en el
menú que aparece y pulse .
5 Escriba 1 para iniciar el menú del CD y presione para continuar.Guía de referencia rápida 187
6 Seleccione Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics (Ejecutar los Dell Diagnostics
de 32 bits) de la lista numerada. Si se muestran varias versiones, seleccione
la apropiada para su ordenador.
7 Cuando aparezca el Main Menu (Menú principal) de Dell Diagnostics
(Diagnósticos Dell), seleccione la prueba que desea ejecutar.
Menú principal de Dell Diagnostics (Diagnósticos Dell)
1 Una vez se hayan cargado los Dell Diagnostics y aparezca la pantalla Main
Menu (Menú principal), haga clic en el botón de la opción que desee.
NOTA: Se recomienda que seleccione Test System (Probar sistema) para ejecutar
una prueba completa en el ordenador.
2 Después de seleccionar la opción Test System (Probar sistema) del menú
principal, aparecerá el siguiente menú:
NOTA: Se recomienda que seleccione Extended Test (Prueba exhaustiva) en el
siguiente menú para realizar una comprobación más exhaustiva de los dispositivos
del ordenador.
Opción Función
Test Memory
(Probar memoria)
Ejecutar la prueba de memoria independiente
Test System
(Probar sistema)
Ejecutar los diagnósticos del sistema
Exit (Salir) Salir de los diagnósticos
Opción Función
Express Test
(Prueba rápida)
Realiza una prueba rápida de los dispositivos del sistema.
Suele tardar de 10 a 20 minutos.
Extended Test
(Prueba extendida)
Realiza una comprobación exhaustiva de los dispositivos
del sistema. Suele tardar una hora o más.
Custom Test
(Prueba personalizada)
Se utiliza para probar un dispositivo específico o para
personalizar las pruebas que se van a ejecutar.
Symptom Tree
(Árbol de síntomas)
Esta opción le permite seleccionar pruebas basadas en un
síntoma del problema que tiene. Esta opción enumera los
síntomas más comunes.188 Guía de referencia rápida
3 Si se produce un problema durante una prueba, aparecerá un mensaje con
un código de error y una descripción del problema. Anote el código de
error y la descripción del problema y póngase en contacto con Dell.
NOTA: La etiqueta de servicio para su ordenador está situada en la parte
superior de cada pantalla de prueba. Si se pone en contacto con Dell, el
servicio de asistencia técnica le pedirá su etiqueta de servicio.
4 Si ejecuta una prueba desde la opción Custom Test (Prueba personalizada)
o Symptom Tree (Árbol de síntomas), haga clic en la ficha correspondiente
que se describe en la tabla siguiente para obtener más información.
5 Cuando las pruebas hayan terminado, cierre la pantalla de la prueba para
volver a la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal). Para salir de Dell
Diagnostics y reiniciar el ordenador, cierre la pantalla Main Menu (Menú
principal).
6 Retire el soporte multimedia Drivers and Utilities(Controladores y
utilidades) de Dell (si corresponde).
Ficha Función
Results (Resultados) Muestra el resultado de la prueba y las condiciones de error
encontradas.
Errors (Errores) Muestra las condiciones de error encontradas, los códigos
de error y la descripción del problema.
Help (Ayuda) Describe la prueba y puede indicar los requisitos para
ejecutarla.
Configuration
(Configuración)
Muestra la configuración de hardware del dispositivo
seleccionado.
Dell Diagnostics obtiene la información de configuración
de todos los dispositivos a partir de la configuración del
sistema, la memoria y varias pruebas internas, y la muestra
en la lista de dispositivos del panel izquierdo de la pantalla.
La lista de dispositivos puede que no muestre los nombres
de todos los componentes instalados en el ordenador o de
todos los dispositivos conectados al ordenador.
Parameters
(Parámetros)
Permite personalizar la prueba cambiando su
configuración.Guía de referencia rápida 189
Indicadores de alimentación
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta
sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de
información del producto.
El indicador del botón de alimentación (LED bicolor) ubicado en la parte
anterior del ordenador se ilumina y parpadea o permanece encendido para
indicar diferentes estados:
• Si el indicador de alimentación está apagado, el ordenador está apagado o
no recibe alimentación.
– Coloque de nuevo el cable de alimentación en el conector de
alimentación de la parte posterior del ordenador y en la toma de
corriente.
– Si el ordenador está enchufado a una caja de enchufes, asegúrese de
que la caja de enchufes esté enchufada a una toma de corriente y que
esté encendida. Además, puentee los dispositivos de protección de la
alimentación, las regletas de enchufes y los alargadores de
alimentación para comprobar que el ordenador se enciende
correctamente.
– Asegúrese de que la toma de alimentación eléctrica funciona; para
ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara.
• Si el indicador de alimentación se ilumina en verde y el ordenador no
responde:
– Asegúrese de que la pantalla está conectada y encendida.
– Si la pantalla está conectada y encendida, consulte el apartado
“Códigos de sonido” en la página 190.
• Si el indicador de alimentación se ilumina de color verde y parpadea, el
ordenador está en modo de espera. Pulse una tecla del teclado, mueva el
ratón o pulse el botón de alimentación para reanudar la operación normal.
Si la luz de alimentación es verde y el ordenador no responde:
– Asegúrese de que la pantalla está conectada y encendida.
– Si la pantalla está conectada y encendida, consulte el apartado
“Códigos de sonido” en la página 190.190 Guía de referencia rápida
• Si el indicador de alimentación está en ámbar, el ordenador estará
recibiendo corriente eléctrica pero puede que un dispositivo no funcione
bien o no esté correctamente instalado.
– Retire y vuelva a instalar los módulos de memoria.
– Extraiga las tarjetas y vuelva a instalarlas.
– Extraiga la tarjeta gráfica y vuelva a instalarla, si procede.
• Si el indicador de alimentación parpadea en ámbar, puede que haya algún
problema de alimentación o que falle un dispositivo interno.
– Asegúrese de que todos los cables de alimentación estén firmemente
conectados a la placa base (consulte el apartado “Componentes de la
placa base” en la página 173).
– Asegúrese de que el cable de alimentación principal y el cable del
panel anterior están firmemente conectados a la placa base (consulte
el apartado “Componentes de la placa base” en la página 173).
Códigos de sonido
Su ordenador puede emitir una serie de sonidos durante el inicio si el monitor
no puede mostrar errores o problemas.Esta serie de sonidos, denominada
códigos de sonido, identifica un problema. Por ejemplo, el código de sonido 1-
3-1 (un código de sonido posible) consiste en un sonido, una serie de tres
sonidos y, a continuación, otro sonido. Este código de sonido indica que el
equipo ha detectado un problema de memoria.
El hecho de volver a colocar los módulos de memoria puede corregir los
errores de código de sonido siguientes. Si el problema continua, póngase en
contacto con Dell para obtener asistencia técnica (consulte el apartado
“Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell” en la Guía del usuario).
Si se le presenta alguno de los siguientes errores de códigos de sonido,
consulte el apartado “Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell” en la Guía del
usuario para obtener instrucciones sobre cómo obtener asistencia técnica.
Código Causa
1-3-1 a
2-4-4
La memoria no se está utilizando o identificando adecuadamente
4-3-1 Fallo de memoria por encima de la dirección 0FFFFhGuía de referencia rápida 191
Código Causa
1-1-2 Fallo en un registro del microprocesador
1-1-3 Fallo de lectura/escritura NVRAM
1-1-4 Fallo en la suma de comprobación del BIOS en ROM
1-2-1 Error del temporizador de intervalos programable
1-2-2 Fallo en la inicialización de DMA
1-2-3 Fallo de lectura /escritura en el registro de páginas del sistema de DMA
1-3 Fallo en la prueba de la memoria de vídeo
1-3-1 a
2-4-4
La memoria no se está utilizando o identificando adecuadamente
3-1-1 Fallo en el registro DMA esclavo
3-1-2 Fallo en el registro del DMA maestro
3-1-3 Fallo en el registro maestro de enmascaramiento de interrupciones.
3-1-4 Fallo en el registro esclavo de enmascaramiento de interrupciones
3-2-2 Fallo en la carga del vector de interrupciones
3-2-4 Fallo de la prueba de la controladora del teclado
3-3-1 Pérdida de alimentación para la NVRAM
3-3-2 Configuración de la NVRAM no válida
3-3-4 Fallo en la prueba de la memoria de vídeo
3-4-1 Fallo de inicio de la pantalla
3-4-2 Fallo en el retrazo de la pantalla
3-4-3 Fallo de búsqueda de ROM de vídeo
4-2-1 No hay impulsos del temporizador
4-2-2 Fallo de suspensión del trabajo
4-2-3 Error Gate A20
4-2-4 Interrupción inesperada en modo protegido
4-3-1 Fallo de memoria por encima de la dirección 0FFFFh
4-3-3 Fallo en el contador del chip del temporizador 2
4-3-4 El reloj de hora se ha parado
4-4-1 Fallo en la prueba de un puerto serie o paralelo
4-4-2 Falló la descompresión de los datos hacia la memoria duplicada
4-4-3 Fallo en la prueba del coprocesador matemático
4-4-4 Fallo de la prueba de la memoria caché192 Guía de referencia rápida
Mensajes del sistema
NOTA: Si el mensaje que ha recibido no aparece en la lista de la tabla, consulte la
documentación para el sistema operativo o programa que se estaba ejecutando
cuando apareció el mensaje.
ALERT! PREVIOUS ATTEMPTS A T BOOTING THIS SYSTEM HAVE FAILED A T
CHECKPOINT [NNNN ] (¡ALERTA! LO S INTENTOS ANTERIORES D E INICIAR ESTE
SISTEMA N O HAN SIDO SATISFACTORIOS EN E L PUNTO D E CONTROL [NNNN]).
PARA OBTENER AYUDA ACERCA D E L A RESOLUCIÓN D E ESTE PROBLEMA, ANOTE
ESTE PUNTO D E CONTROL Y PÓNGASE EN CONTACTO CON E L SOPORTE TÉCNICO
D E DELL: The computer failed to complete the boot routine three consecutive
times for the same error (el ordenador no ha podido completar la rutina de inicio
tres veces consecutivas por el mismo error).
CMOS CHECKSUM ERROR (ERROR D E SUMA D E COMPROBACIÓN D E CMOS):
Possible motherboard failure or RTC battery low (Posible fallo de la placa base o
batería baja de RTC). Cambie la batería
CPU FAN FAILURE (FALLO DEL VENTILADOR D E L A UNIDAD CENTRAL D E
PROCESAMIENTO): CPU fan failure (Fallo del ventilador de la Unidad central de
procesamiento). Cambie el ventilador de la UCP.
DISKETTE DRIVE 0 SEEK FAILURE (FALLO D E BÚSQUEDA EN UNIDAD D E DISCO
FLEXIBLE 0): A cable may be loose, or the computer configuration information
may not match the hardware configuration (Un cable puede estar suelto, o la
información de configuración del equipo puede no coincidir con la configuración
del hardware). Compruebe las conexiones de cable.
DISKETTE READ FAILURE (EL DISQUETE N O S E PUEDE LEER): The floppy disk
may be defective or a cable may be loose (El disco flexible puede estar defectuoso o
un cable puede estar suelto). Replace the floppy disk/check for a loose cable
connection (Sustituya el disco flexible/compruebe si hay una conexión de cable
suelta).
HARD-DISK DRIVE FAILURE (FALLO D E L A UNIDAD D E DISCO DURO): Possible
hard disk drive failure during HDD POST (Posible fallo de la unidad de disco duro
durante la autoprueba de encendido de la unidad de disco duro). Compruebe los
cables/cambie los discos duros.Guía de referencia rápida 193
HARD-DISK DRIVE READ FAILURE (FALLO D E LECTURA D E LA UNIDAD D E DISCO
DURO): Possible HDD failure during HDD boot test (Posible fallo de la unidad de
disco duro durante la prueba de arranque de la unidad de disco duro).
KEYBOARD FAILURE (ERROR D E TECLADO): Keyboard failure or keyboard cable
loose (Fallo del teclado o cable del teclado suelto).
NO BOOT DEVICE AVAILABLE (NO HAY NINGÚN DISPOSITIVO D E INICIO
DISPONIBLE): The system cannot detect a bootable device or partition (El sistema
no puede detectar un dispositivo de inicio o una partición).
• If the floppy drive is your boot device, ensure that the cables are connected and
that a bootable floppy disk is in the drive (Si la unidad de disco flexible es el
dispositivo de inicio, asegúrese de que los cables estén conectados y que el
disquete de inicio esté en la unidad).
• Si la unidad de disco duro es el dispositivo de inicio, asegúrese de que los cables
estén conectados y que la unidad esté instalada correctamente y dividida en
particiones como un dispositivo de inicio.
• Ejecute el programa de configuración del sistema y asegúrese de que la
información de la secuencia de inicio es correcta.
NO TIMER TICK INTERRUPT (NO HAY INTERRUPCIÓN D E TIC D E
TEMPORIZADOR): A chip on the system board might be malfunctioning or
motherboard failure (Un chip de la placa base podría estar fallando o fallo de la
placa base).
NON-SYSTEM DISK O R DISK ERROR (NO E S DISCO DEL SISTEMA O ERROR D E
DISCO): Cambie el disco flexible por uno que contenga un sistema operativo
ejecutable o retire el disco flexible de la unidad A y reinicie el ordenador.
NO T A BOOT DISKETTE (NO E S UN DISQUETE D E INICIALIZACIÓN): Inserte un
disquete de inicio y reinicie el ordenador.
USB OVER CURRENT ERROR (ERROR D E SOBRECORRIENTE EN USB): Disconnect
the USB device (Desconecte el dispositivo USB). Use an external power source for
the USB device (Utilice una fuente de energía externa para el dispositivo USB).194 Guía de referencia rápida
Indicadores de diagnóstico
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de este
apartado, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de
información del producto.
Para ayudarle a solucionar un problema con el ordenador, el ordenador cuenta
con cuatro indicadores denominados 1, 2, 3 y 4 situados en el panel anterior o
posterior. Estos indicadores pueden estar apagados o ser de color verde. Cuando
el equipo se inicia normalmente, los patrones o códigos de los indicadores
cambian a medida que avanza el proceso de arranque. Cuando el equipo se
inicia normalmente, los patrones o códigos de los indicadores cambian a
medida que avanza el proceso de arranque. Si la parte de la POST del arranque
del sistema se completa correctamente, los cuatro indicadores luminosos
emiten una luz verde fija. En el caso de que se produzcan errores durante el
proceso de la POST, el patrón mostrado en los indicadores LED puede ayudarle
a identificar la fase del proceso en la que se ha detenido el equipo.
NOTA: La orientación de las luces de diagnóstico puede variar en función del tipo
de sistema. Los indicadores de diagnóstico pueden estar en posición vertical u
horizontal.
NOTICE - HARD DRIVE SELF MONITORING SYSTEM HAS REPORTED THAT A
PARAMETER HAS EXCEEDED ITS NORMAL OPERATING RANGE (AVISO - UNIDAD
D E DISCO DURO EL SISTEMA DE SUPERVISIÓN AUTOMÁTICO H A
INFORMADO D E QUE UN PARÁMETRO H A SUPERADO S U RANGO OPERATIVO
NORMAL). DELL RECOMMENDS THAT YOU BACK U P YOUR DATA REGULARLY
(DELL RECOMIENDA QUE REGULARMENTE HAGA UNA COPIA D E SEGURIDAD D E
LOS DATOS). A PARAMETER OUT O F RANGE MAY O R MAY NOT INDICATE A
POTENTIAL HARD DRIVE PROBLEM (UN PARÁMETRO FUERA D E RANGO PUEDE O
N O INDICAR UN PROBLEMA POTENCIAL EN LA UNIDAD D E DISCO DURO). Error
de S.M.A.R.T, posible fallo de la unidad de disco duro. Esta función puede estar
activada o desactivada en la configuración de BIOS.
Patrón de luz Descripción del problema Resolución sugerida
El ordenador está apagado o se
ha producido un error de preBIOS.
Los indicadores de diagnóstico
no permanecen encendidos
después de que el ordenador se
inicie correctamente en el
sistema operativo.
Enchufe el ordenador a una
toma de alimentación eléctrica
en funcionamiento y pulse el
botón de alimentación.Guía de referencia rápida 195
Se ha producido un posible
fallo del BIOS; el ordenador se
encuentra en modo de
recuperación.
Ejecute la Utilidad de
recuperación de BIOS, espere a
que acabe la recuperación y
reinicie el ordenador.
Se ha producido un posible
fallo en el procesador.
Vuelva a instalar el procesador y
reinicie el ordenador.
Se han detectado los módulos
de memoria, pero se ha
producido un error de
memoria.
• Si tiene instalado un módulo
de memoria, vuelva a instalarlo
y, a continuación, reinicie el
ordenador. (consulte la Guía
del usuario en línea para
obtener instrucciones sobre
cómo quitar e instalar módulos
de memoria).
• Si tiene instalados dos o más
módulos de memoria,
extráigalos, vuelva a instalar
uno y reinicie el ordenador. Si
el equipo se inicia
normalmente, vuelva a instalar
otro módulo. Prosiga de este
modo hasta que identifique el
módulo anómalo o hasta que
haya vuelto a instalar todos los
módulos sin errores.
• Si es posible, instale una
memoria del mismo tipo que
funcione correctamente en el
ordenador.
• Si el problema persiste,
póngase en contacto con Dell.
Patrón de luz Descripción del problema Resolución sugerida196 Guía de referencia rápida
Se ha producido un posible
fallo de la tarjeta de gráficos.
• Si el ordenador incluye una
tarjeta gráfica, extráigala,
vuelta a instalarla y, a
continuación, reinicie el
ordenador.
• Si persiste el problema, instale
una tarjeta de gráficos que
sepa que funcione y reinicie el
ordenador.
• Si no se soluciona el problema
o el ordenador tiene gráficos
integrados, póngase en
contacto con Dell.
Se ha producido un error de
unidad de disco flexible o de
disco duro.
Vuelva a asentar todos los cables
de alimentación y de datos y
reinicie el ordenador.
Se ha producido un fallo de
USB.
Vuelva a instalar todos los
dispositivos USB, compruebe las
conexiones por cable y reinicie el
ordenador.
Patrón de luz Descripción del problema Resolución sugeridaGuía de referencia rápida 197
No se detectan módulos de
memoria.
• Si tiene instalado un módulo
de memoria, vuelva a instalarlo
y, a continuación, reinicie el
ordenador. Consulte la Guía
del usuario en línea para
obtener instrucciones sobre
cómo quitar e instalar módulos
de memoria.
• Si tiene instalados dos o más
módulos de memoria,
extráigalos, vuelva a instalar
uno y reinicie el ordenador. Si
el equipo se inicia
normalmente, vuelva a instalar
otro módulo. Prosiga de este
modo hasta que identifique el
módulo anómalo o hasta que
haya vuelto a instalar todos los
módulos sin errores.
• Si es posible, instale una
memoria del mismo tipo que
funcione correctamente en el
ordenador.
• Si el problema persiste,
póngase en contacto con Dell.
Se han detectado los módulos
de memoria, pero existe un
error de configuración del
sistema o de compatibilidad.
• Asegúrese de que no existen
requisitos especiales para la
colocación del conector o del
módulo de memoria.
• Asegúrese de que los módulos
de memoria que va a instalar
son compatibles con el
ordenador.
• Si el problema no desaparece,
póngase en contacto con Dell.
Patrón de luz Descripción del problema Resolución sugerida198 Guía de referencia rápida
Cómo borrar contraseñas olvidadas
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de este
apartado, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de
información del producto.
1 Siga los procedimientos que se indican en el apartado “Antes de comenzar”
en la página 146.
2 Quite la cubierta del ordenador (consulte el apartado “Cómo quitar la
cubierta del ordenador” en la página 180).
3 Localice el puente de contraseña de 2 patas (PSWD) situado en la placa
base. De manera predeterminada, la pata 1 y la pata 2 deberían estar
conectadas. Tendrá que retirar el puente e iniciar el sistema como se
explica a continuación.
4 Retire el puente.
Se ha producido un fallo.
Este patrón también se
muestra cuando entra en la
configuración del sistema y
puede que no indique un
problema.
• Compruebe que los cables de
las unidades de disco duro y de
la unidad óptica están
conectados correctamente a la
placa base.
• Compruebe el mensaje del
ordenador que aparece en la
pantalla del monitor.
• Si el problema no desaparece,
póngase en contacto con Dell.
Cuando se ha completado la
POST, los cuatro indicadores
verdes se encienden unos
segundos antes de apagarse
para indicar un
funcionamiento normal.
Ninguna.
Patrón de luz Descripción del problema Resolución sugeridaGuía de referencia rápida 199
5 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta del ordenador (consulte el apartado “Cómo
volver a colocar la cubierta del ordenador” en la página 174).
AVISO: Para conectar un cable de red, conecte primero el cable al dispositivo de
red y, a continuación, enchúfelo al ordenador.
6 Conecte el ordenador y los dispositivos a las tomas de corriente y
enciéndalos.
7 Después de que aparezca el escritorio de Microsoft® Windows® en el
ordenador, apague el ordenador (consulte el apartado “Cómo apagar el
ordenador” en la página 148).
8 Apague el monitor y desconéctelo de la toma de alimentación eléctrica.
9 Desconecte el cable de alimentación del ordenador de la toma de
alimentación eléctrica y pulse el botón de alimentación para conectar a
tierra la placa base.
10 Abra la cubierta de la PC.
11 Localice el puente de contraseña de 2 patas (PSWD) en la placa base y
conecte el puente para volver a activar la función de contraseña.
12 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta del ordenador (consulte el apartado “Cómo
volver a colocar la cubierta del ordenador” en la página 174).200 Guía de referencia rápida
AVISO: Para conectar un cable de red, primero conecte el cable a la toma de red
de la pared y, después, al ordenador.
13 Conecte el ordenador y los dispositivos a las tomas de corriente y
enciéndalos.
NOTA: Este procedimiento permite activar la función de contraseña. Cuando entre
en la configuración del sistema (consulte el apartado “Cómo entrar en la
configuración del sistema” de la Guía del usuario), las opciones de contraseña del
sistema y de contraseña de administrador aparecen con el valor Not Set (No
establecida), lo que significa que la función de contraseña está activada pero no se
ha asignado ninguna contraseña.
14 Asigne una nueva contraseña del sistema y/o de administrador.
Borrado de la configuración de CMOS
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de este
apartado, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de
información del producto.
1 Siga los procedimientos que se indican en el apartado “Antes de comenzar”
en la página 146.
NOTA: El ordenador debe estar desconectado de la toma de corriente para
borrar la configuración de CMOS.
2 Quite la cubierta del ordenador (consulte el apartado “Cómo quitar la
cubierta del ordenador” en la página 180).
3 Retire la cubierta del sistema.
4 Restablezca la configuración actual de la memoria CMOS:
a Localice los puentes de contraseña (PSWD) y CMOS (RTCRST) en
la placa base (consulte el apartado “Cómo borrar contraseñas
olvidadas” en la página 198).
b Quite el conector del puente de contraseña de sus patillas.
c Coloque el conector del puente de contraseña en las patas RTCRST y
espere unos cinco segundos.
d Quite el conector del puente de las patas de RTCRST y colóquelo de
nuevo en las patas de la contraseña.
5 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta del ordenador (consulte el apartado “Cómo
volver a colocar la cubierta del ordenador” en la página 174).Guía de referencia rápida 201
AVISO: Para conectar un cable de red, conecte primero el cable al dispositivo o
puerto de red y, a continuación, enchúfelo al ordenador.
6 Conecte el ordenador y los dispositivos a las tomas de corriente y
enciéndalos.
Actualización flash del BIOS
Es posible que sea necesario actualizar el BIOS cuando haya una
actualización disponible o cuando se cambie la placa base.
1 Encienda el ordenador.
2 Localice el archivo de actualización del BIOS para el ordenador situado en
el sitio web Dell Support en support.dell.com.
3 Haga clic en Download Now (Descargar) ahora para descargar el archivo.
4 Si aparece la ventana Export Compliance Disclaimer (Renuncia de
cumplimiento para exportación), haga clic en Yes, I Accept this
Agreement (Sí, acepto este acuerdo).
Aparece la ventana File Download (Descarga de archivos).
5 Haga clic en Save this program to disk (Guardar este programa en el disco)
y, a continuación, haga clic en OK (Aceptar).
Aparece la ventana Save In (Guardar en).
6 Haga clic en la flecha hacia abajo para ver el menú Save In (Guardar en),
seleccione Desktop (Escritorio) y, a continuación, haga clic en Save
(Guardar).
El archivo se descarga en el escritorio.
7 Haga clic en Close (Cerrar) cuando aparezca la ventana Download
Complete (Descarga completa).
Aparecerá un icono de archivo en el escritorio que se titula igual que el
archivo de actualización BIOS que se ha descargado.
8 Haga doble clic en el icono de archivo situado en el escritorio y siga las
instrucciones que aparecen en la pantalla.202 Guía de referencia rápidaÍndice 203
Índice
A
alimentación
acondicionadores de línea
botón, 176
dispositivos de protección
indicador, 166
protector contra sobrevoltajes
UPS
archivo de ayuda
Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico
de Windows, 145
Asistente para configuración de
red, 152
asistentes
Asistente para configuración de
red, 152
C
CD
sistema operativo, 145
CD Operating System (Sistema
operativo), 145
Centro de ayuda y soporte
técnico, 145
códigos de sonido, 190
conexión a Internet
acerca de, 153
configuración, 154
opciones, 153
configuración de CMOS
borrar, 200
contraseña
borrar, 198
puente, 198
Contrato de licencia del usuario
final, 142
cubierta
quitar, 170, 180
volver a colocar, 174, 184
D
Dell Diagnostics, 185
diagnósticos
códigos de sonido, 190
Dell, 185
documentación
Contrato de licencia del usuario
final, 142
en línea, 144
ergonomía, 142
garantía, 142
Guía de información del
producto, 142
Guía del usuario, 142
Referencia rápida, 142
reglamentaria, 142204 Índice
seguridad, 142
E
equipo
componentes del interior, 182
vista interior, 182
etiqueta de servicio, 143, 166,
175
etiquetas
etiqueta de servicio, 143, 166,
175
Microsoft Windows, 143
G
Guía de información del
producto, 142
Guía del usuario, 142
H
hardware
códigos de sonido, 190
Dell Diagnostics, 185
I
impresora
cable, 160
conectar, 151
conexión, 160
configurar, 151, 160
indicadores
alimentación, 166
información reglamentaria, 142
información sobre
ergonomía, 142
información sobre la
garantía, 142
Iniciar los Dell Diagnostics
desde el CD Drivers and
Utilities, 186
Iniciar los Dell Diagnostics
desde la unidad de disco
duro, 186
instalación de piezas
antes de comenzar, 147
instalar piezas
apagar el ordenador, 148
herramientas recomendadas, 148
instrucciones de seguridad, 142
M
mensajes de error
códigos de sonido, 190
monitor
conectar dos, 161-162
conectar DVI, 161-162
conectar TV, 161-162
conectar VGA, 161-162
configuración de pantalla, 163
modo de clonación, 163
modo de escritorio ampliado, 163Índice 205
O
ordenador
códigos de sonido, 190
componentes internos, 172
vista interior, 172
P
placa base, 173, 183
placa base. Consulte placa base
placa base. Véase placa base
problemas
códigos de sonido, 190
Dell Diagnostics, 185
R
red
Asistente para configuración de
red, 152
ResourceCD
Dell Diagnostics, 185
S
S.M.A.R.T, 194
sistema de alimentación
ininterrumpida. Consulte
UPS
sistema operativo
volver a instalar, 145
sitio web de asistencia
técnica, 144
sitio web de asistencia técnica de
Dell, 144
solución de problemas
Centro de ayuda y soporte
técnico, 145
Dell Diagnostics, 185
T
TV
conectar al equipo, 161
conectar al ordenador, 162
U
UPS
W
Windows XP
Asistente para configuración de
red, 152
Centro de ayuda y soporte
técnico, 145
volver a instalar, 145206 Índice
www.dell.com | support.dell.com
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1520 Owner’s Manual
Model PP22LNotes, Notices, and Cautions
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of
your computer.
NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data
and tells you how to avoid the problem.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury,
or death.
____________________
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2007 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc.is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, Wi-Fi Catcher, and Dell MediaDirect are
trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel is a registered trademark and Core is a trademark of Intel Corporation;
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries; Blu-ray Disc is a trademark of the Blu-ray
Disc Association; Bluetooth is a registered trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and is used by
Dell under license.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming
the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and
trade names other than its own.
Model PP22L
October 2007 P/N UX862 Rev. A03Contents 3
Contents
Finding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1 About Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Determining Your Computer’s Configuration . . . . . . 21
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Left Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Right Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2 Setting Up Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connecting to the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Setting Up Your Internet Connection . . . . . . . . 36
Transferring Information to a New Computer . . . . . 37
Windows Easy Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Setting Up a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Printer Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connecting a USB Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Contents
Power Protection Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Surge Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Line Conditioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Uninterruptible Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . 40
3 Using the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Adjusting Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Using a Projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Making Images and Text Look Bigger or Sharper . . . 41
Microsoft® Windows® XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Windows Vista® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Using Both a Monitor and Your Computer Display . . . 43
Microsoft Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Windows Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Setting Display Resolution and Refresh Rate . . . . . . 44
Microsoft Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Windows Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4 Using the Keyboard and Touchpad . . . . . 47
Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Key Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
System Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Display Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Microsoft® Windows® Logo Key Functions . . . . 49
Dell™ QuickSet Key Combinations . . . . . . . . . 49
Adjusting Keyboard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Contents 5
Touch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Customizing the Touch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5 Using a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Battery Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Checking the Battery Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Dell QuickSet Battery Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Microsoft® Windows® Battery Meter . . . . . . . 55
Charge Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Low-Battery Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Conserving Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Power Management Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Standby and Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Hibernate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Configuring Power Management Settings . . . . . . . 58
Accessing Power Options Properties . . . . . . . 58
Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Storing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
6 Using Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Playing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Playing Media Using Dell Travel Remote
(Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636 Contents
Copying CD, DVD, and Blu-ray Disc™ (BD) Media . . . 64
How to Copy a CD, DVD, or BD . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Using Blank CD, DVD, and BD Media . . . . . . . 65
Helpful Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Adjusting the Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Adjusting the Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using Dell MediaDirect™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Connecting Your Computer to a TV or
Audio Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
S-Video and Standard Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
S-Video and S/PDIF Digital Audio . . . . . . . . . 73
Composite Video and Standard Audio . . . . . . . 75
Composite Video and S/PDIF Digital Audio . . . . 77
Component Video and Standard Audio . . . . . . 79
Component Video and S/PDIF Digital Audio . . . . 81
Enabling the Display Settings for a TV . . . . . . . 84
7 Using ExpressCards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
ExpressCard Blanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Installing an ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Removing an ExpressCard or Blank . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8 Using the Memory Card Reader . . . . . . . 91
Memory Card Blanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Installing a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Removing a Memory Card or Blank . . . . . . . . . . . 92Contents 7
9 Setting Up and Using Networks . . . . . . . 93
Connecting a Network or Broadband
Modem Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Setting Up a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Windows Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Wireless Local Area Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
What You Need to Establish a WLAN
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Checking Your Wireless Network Card . . . . . . 95
Setting Up a New WLAN Using a
Wireless Router and a Broadband Modem . . . . 96
Connecting to a WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Mobile Broadband (or Wireless Wide
Area Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
What You Need to Establish a Mobile
Broadband Network Connection . . . . . . . . . 100
Checking Your Dell Mobile Broadband Card . . . . 100
Connecting to a Mobile Broadband
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Enabling/Disabling the Dell Mobile
Broadband Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Dell Wi-Fi Catcher™ Network Locator . . . . . . . . . 102
10 Securing Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Security Cable Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
If Your Computer Is Lost or Stolen . . . . . . . . . . . 1058 Contents
11 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Dell Technical Update Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Dell Support Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Dell Support 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Dell PC Tune-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Dell PC CheckUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Dell Network Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
DellConnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Optical drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Hard drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
E-Mail, Modem, and Internet Problems . . . . . . . . . 117
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
ExpressCard Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
IEEE 1394 Device Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Keyboard Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
External Keyboard problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Unexpected characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Lockups and Software Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
The computer does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
The computer stops responding . . . . . . . . . . 127
A program stops responding or
crashes repeatedly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
A program is designed for an earlier
Microsoft® Windows® operating system . . . . . 127
A solid blue screen appears . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Contents 9
Dell MediaDirect problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Other software problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Memory Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Network Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Mobile Broadband (Wireless Wide Area
Network [WWAN]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Printer Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Scanner Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Sound and Speaker Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
No sound from integrated speakers . . . . . . . . 135
No sound from external speakers . . . . . . . . . 135
No sound from headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Touch Pad or Mouse Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Video and Display Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
If the display is blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
If the display is difficult to read . . . . . . . . . . 138
If only part of the display is readable . . . . . . . 139
Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
What Is a Driver? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Identifying Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . 140
Troubleshooting Software and Hardware
Problems in the Microsoft® Windows® XP and
Microsoft Windows Vista® Operating Systems . . . . 143
Restoring Your Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Using MicrosoftWindows System Restore . . . . 14510 Contents
Starting System Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Using Dell™ PC Restore and Dell Factory
Image Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Using the Operating System Media . . . . . . . . 150
12 Adding and Replacing Parts . . . . . . . . . 153
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Turning Off Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Before Working Inside Your Computer . . . . . . . 154
Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Removing the Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Replacing the Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Returning a Hard Drive to Dell . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Removing the Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Replacing the Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Hinge Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Removing the Hinge Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Replacing the Hinge Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Removing the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Replacing the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Removing the DIMM A Memory Module . . . . . . 163
Replacing the DIMM A Memory Module . . . . . 165
Removing the DIMM B Memory Module . . . . . . 166
Replacing the DIMM B Memory Module . . . . . 167Contents 11
Subscriber Identity Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Wireless Mini Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Removing a WLAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Replacing a WLAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Removing a Mobile Broadband or
WWAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Replacing a WWAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Removing a WPAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Replacing a WPAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Flash Cache Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Removing the FCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Replacing the FCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Internal Card With Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Removing the Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Replacing the Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Coin-Cell Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Removing the Coin-Cell Battery . . . . . . . . . . 181
Replacing the Coin-Cell Battery . . . . . . . . . . 182
13 Dell™ QuickSet Features . . . . . . . . . . . 183
14 Traveling With Your Computer . . . . . . . 185
Identifying Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Packing the Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Travel Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Traveling by Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18612 Contents
15 Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Obtaining Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Technical Support and Customer Service . . . . . 188
DellConnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Online Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
AutoTech Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Automated Order-Status Service . . . . . . . . . 189
Problems With Your Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit . . . . . 190
Before You Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
16 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
A Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Using the System Setup Program . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Viewing the System Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . 204
System Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Commonly Used Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Cleaning Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Computer, Keyboard, and Display . . . . . . . . . 206
Touch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Contents 13
Dell Technical Support Policy (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . 208
Definition of "Dell-Installed" Software and Peripherals 209
Definition of "Third-Party" Software and Peripherals 209
FCC Notice (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
FCC Class B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Macrovision Product Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22914 ContentsFinding Information 15
Finding Information
NOTE: Some features may be optional and may not ship with your computer. Some
features may not be available in certain countries.
NOTE: Additional information may ship with your computer.
What Are You Looking For? Find It Here
• A diagnostic program for my computer
• Drivers for my computer
• Device documentation
• Notebook System Software (NSS)
Drivers and Utilities Media
Documentation and drivers are already
installed on your computer. You can use
the Drivers and Utilities media to
reinstall drivers (see "Reinstalling Drivers
and Utilities" on page 140) or run the
Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics"
on page 107).
Readme files may be included on your
Drivers and Utilities media to provide
last-minute updates about technical
changes to your computer or advanced
technical-reference material for
technicians or experienced users.
NOTE: Drivers and documentation updates
can be found at support.dell.com.16 Finding Information
• Warranty information
• Terms and Conditions (U.S. only)
• Safety instructions
• Regulatory information
• Ergonomics information
• End User License Agreement
Dell™ Product Information Guide
• How to set up my computer Setup Diagram
NOTE: See the setup diagram that came
with your computer.
• How to remove and replace parts
• Specifications
• How to configure system settings
• How to troubleshoot and solve
problems
Microsoft Windows XP and Windows
Vista® Help and Support Center
1 Click Start→Help and Support→
Dell User and System Guides→
System Guides.
2 Click the User’s Guide for your computer.
• Service Tag and Express Service Code
• Microsoft® Windows® Product Key
Service Tag and Microsoft Windows
Product Key
These labels are located on your computer.
• Use the Service Tag to identify your
computer when you use
support.dell.com or contact support.
NOTE: If your operating system is
Windows XP, this label might look different.
• Enter the Express Service Code to direct
your call when contacting support.
NOTE: As an increased security measure,
the newly designed Microsoft Windows
license label incorporates a "security
portal," which looks like a missing portion of
the label, to discourage removal of the label.
What Are You Looking For? Find It HereFinding Information 17
• Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and
tips, articles from technicians, online
courses, and frequently asked questions
• Community — Online discussion with
other Dell customers
• Upgrades — Upgrade information for
components, such as the memory, hard
drive, and operating system
• Customer Care — Contact information,
service call and order status, and warranty
and repair information
• Service and support — Service call
status, support history, service contract,
and online discussions with support
• Dell Technical Update Service —
Proactive e-mail notification of software
and hardware updates for your computer
• Reference — Computer
documentation, details on my
computer configuration, product
specifications, and white papers
• Downloads — Certified drivers,
patches, and software updates
• Notebook System Software (NSS) — If
you reinstall the operating system on
your computer, you should also reinstall
the NSS utility. NSS automatically
detects your computer and operating
system, and installs the updates
appropriate for your configuration,
providing critical updates for your
operating system and support for
Dell 3.5-inch USB floppy drives, Intel®
processors, optical drives, and USB
devices. NSS is necessary for correct
operation of your Dell computer.
Dell Support Website — support.dell.com
NOTE: Select your region or business
segment to view the appropriate support site.
To download Notebook System Software:
1 Go to support.dell.com, select your
country/region, and then click
Drivers & Downloads.
2 Enter your Service Tag or product model,
and then click Go.
3 Select your operating system and
language, and then click Find
Downloads, or under Downloads Search,
search for the keywordNotebook System
Software.
NOTE: The support.dell.com user
interface may vary depending on your
selections.
What Are You Looking For? Find It Here18 Finding Information
• Software upgrades and troubleshooting
hints — Frequently asked questions,
hot topics, and general health of your
computing environment
Dell Support Utility
The Dell Support Utility is an automated
upgrade and notification system installed
on your computer. This support provides
real-time health scans of your computing
environment, software updates, and
relevant self-support information. Access
the Dell Support Utility from the
icon on the taskbar. For more information,
see "Dell Support Center" on page 111.
• How to use Windows XP or
Windows Vista
• How to work with programs and files
• How to personalize my desktop
Microsoft Windows XP and Windows
Vista Help and Support Center
1 Click Start→Help and Support.
2Type a word or phrase that describes
your problem and click the arrow icon.
3 Click the topic that describes your
problem.
4 Follow the instructions on the screen.
• Information on network activity, the
Power Management Wizard, hotkeys,
and other items controlled by Dell
QuickSet
Dell QuickSet Help
To view Dell QuickSet Help, right-click
the Dell QuickSet icon in the Windows
notification area.
For more information on Dell QuickSet,
see "Dell™ QuickSet Features" on
page 183.
What Are You Looking For? Find It HereFinding Information 19
• How to reinstall my operating system Operating System Media
The operating system is already installed
on your computer. To reinstall your
operating system, use one of the
following methods:
• Microsoft Windows System Restore—
Microsoft Windows System Restore
returns your computer to an earlier
operating state without affecting data
files.
• Dell PC Restore — Dell PC Restore
returns your computer to its original
operating state. Dell PC Restore may
not ship with your computer.
• Operating System Installation Media —
If you received operating system media
with your computer, you can use it to
restore your operating system.
For more information, see "Restoring
Your Operating System" on page 144.
After you reinstall your operating system,
use the Drivers and Utilities media to
reinstall drivers for the devices that came
with your computer.
Your operating system product key label is
located on your computer.
NOTE: The color of your operating system
installation media varies according to the
operating system you ordered.
What Are You Looking For? Find It Here20 Finding InformationAbout Your Computer 21
About Your Computer
Determining Your Computer’s Configuration
Based on selections that you made when purchasing your computer, your
computer has one of several different video controller configurations. To
determine your computer’s video controller configuration:
1 Click Start , and then click Help and Support.
2 Under Pick a Task, click Use Tools to view your computer information
and diagnose problems.
3 Under My Computer Information, select Hardware.
From the My Computer Information - Hardware screen, you can view the
type of video controller installed in your computer, as well as the other
hardware components.22 About Your Computer
Front View
1 camera indicator (optional) 2 camera (optional)
3 display latch 4 display
5 power button 6 keyboard
7 device status lights 8 touch pad
9 consumer IR 10 media control buttons
11 touch pad buttons 12 Dell MediaDirect™ button
13 keyboard status lights 14 digital array microphones
4
5
13
3
6
12
8
7
14
1 2
11 10 9About Your Computer 23
CAMERA INDICATOR — Indicates that the camera is on. Based on configuration
selections you made when ordering your computer, your computer may not include a
camera.
CAMERA — Built-in camera for video capture, conferencing, and chat. Based on
configuration selections you made when ordering your computer, your computer may
not include a camera.
DISPLAY LATCH — Keeps the display closed.
DISPLAY — For more information about your display, see "Using the Display" on
page 41.
POWER BUTTON — Press the power button to turn on the computer or exit a power
management mode (see "Power Management Modes" on page 56).
NOTICE: To avoid losing data, turn off your computer by performing a Microsoft®
Windows® operating system shutdown rather than by pressing the power button.
If the computer stops responding, press and hold the power button until the
computer turns off completely (may take several seconds).
KEYBOARD — For more information about the keyboard, see "Using the Keyboard
and Touchpad" on page 47. 24 About Your Computer
DEVICE STATUS LIGHTS
The blue lights located to the right of the keyboard indicate the following:
Power light – Turns on when you turn on the computer, and blinks when
the computer is in a power management mode.
Hard drive activity light – Turns on when the computer reads or writes
data.
NOTICE: To avoid loss of data, never turn off the computer while the
light is flashing.
Battery status light – Turns on steadily or blinks to indicate battery charge
status.
WiFi status light – Turns on when wireless networking is enabled. To
enable or disable wireless networking, use the wireless switch (see "wireless
switch" on page 27).About Your Computer 25
If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the light operates as follows:
– Solid blue: The battery is charging.
– Flashing blue: The battery is almost fully charged.
– Off: The battery is adequately charged.
If the computer is running on a battery, the light operates as follows:
– Off: The battery is adequately charged (or the computer is turned off).
– Flashing amber: The battery charge is low.
– Solid amber: The battery charge is critically low.
TOUCH PAD — Provides the functionality of a mouse (see "Touch Pad" on page 50).
TOUCH PAD BUTTONS — Use these buttons much like the buttons on a mouse when
you use the touch pad to move the cursor on the display (see "Touch Pad" on page 50).
MEDIA CONTROL BUTTONS — Control CD, DVD, Blu-ray Disc™ (BD), and Media
Player playback.
Bluetooth® status light – Turns on when a card with Bluetooth wireless
technology is enabled.
NOTE: The card with Bluetooth wireless technology is an optional feature.
The light turns on only if you ordered the card with your computer. For
more information, see the documentation that came with your card.
To turn off only the Bluetooth wireless technology functionality, right-click the
icon in the notification area, and then click Disable Bluetooth Radio.
To quickly enable or disable all wireless devices, use the wireless switch
(see "wireless switch" on page 27).
Mute the sound. Play the previous track.
Turn the volume down. Play the next track.
Turn the volume up. Stop.
Play or pause. 26 About Your Computer
DELL MEDIADIRECT™ BUTTON — Press the Dell MediaDirect button to launch
Dell MediaDirect (see "Using Dell MediaDirect™" on page 68).
KEYBOARD STATUS LIGHTS
The blue lights located above the keyboard indicate the following:
DIGITAL ARRAY MICROPHONES — Built-in microphone for conferencing and chat.
Turns on when the numeric keypad is enabled.
Turns on when the uppercase letter (caps lock) function is enabled.
Turns on when the scroll lock function is enabled.
9
AAbout Your Computer 27
Left Side View
SECURITY CABLE SLOT — Lets you attach a commercially available antitheft device
to the computer (see "Security Cable Lock" on page 103).
WIRELESS SWITCH — When enabled through Dell QuickSet, this switch can scan for
a wireless local area network (WLAN) in your vicinity. You can also use it to rapidly
turn off or on any wireless devices such as WLAN cards and internal cards with
Bluetooth wireless technology (see "Dell Wi-Fi Catcher™ Network Locator" on page 102).
1 security cable slot 2 wireless switch
3 Wi-Fi Catcher light 4 air vents
5 audio connectors 6 ExpressCard slot
1 off Disables wireless devices.
2 on Enables wireless devices.
3 momentary Scans for WLAN networks (see "Dell Wi-Fi
Catcher™ Network Locator" on page 102).
4 Wi-Fi Catcher light • Flashing green: Searching for networks
• Solid green: Strong network found
• Solid yellow: Weak network found
• Flashing yellow: Error
• Off: No signal found
1 2 56 3 4
1 2 3 428 About Your Computer
CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air
vents. Do not store your computer in a low-airflow environment, such as a closed
briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or
cause a fire.
AIR VENTS — The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents,
which prevents the computer from overheating. The computer turns the fan on when
the computer gets hot. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the
fan or the computer.
AUDIO CONNECTORS
EXPRESSCARD SLOT — Supports one ExpressCard. The computer ships with a
plastic blank installed in the slot. For more information, see "Using ExpressCards" on
page 87.
Attach headphones to the connector.
Attach a microphone to the connector.About Your Computer 29
Right Side View
OPTICAL DRIVE — For more information about the optical drive, see "Using
Multimedia" on page 61.
EJECT BUTTON — Press the eject button to open the optical drive.
8-IN-1 MEMORY CARD READER — Provides a fast and convenient way to view and
share digital photos, music, and videos stored on a memory card. The computer ships
with a plastic blank installed in the slot. The 8-in-1 memory card reader reads the
following digital memory cards:
• Secure Digital (SD) memory card
• SDIO card
• MultiMediaCard (MMC)
• Memory Stick
• Memory Stick PRO
• xD-Picture Card
• Hi Speed-SD
• Hi Density-SD
IEEE 1394 CONNECTOR — Connects devices supporting IEEE 1394 high-speed
transfer rates, such as some digital video cameras.
1 battery status light 2 hard drive activity light
3 power light 4 optical drive
5 eject button 6 8-in-1 memory card reader
7 IEEE 1394 connector 8 video connector (VGA)
9 network connector (RJ-45) 10 USB connectors (2)
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 330 About Your Computer
VIDEO CONNECTOR
NETWORK CONNECTOR (RJ-45)
USB CONNECTORS
Back View
Connects video devices, such as a monitor.
Connects the computer to a network. The two lights next
to the connector indicate status and activity for wired
network connections.
For information on using the network adapter, see the
device user’s guide supplied with your computer.
Connect USB devices, such as a mouse, keyboard, or
printer.
1 S-video TV-out connector 2 USB connectors (2)
3 AC adapter connector 4 battery
5 modem connector (RJ-11)
1 2 3 4 5About Your Computer 31
S-VIDEO TV-OUT CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTORS
AC ADAPTER CONNECTOR — Attaches an AC adapter to the computer. The AC
adapter converts AC power to the DC power required by the computer. You can
connect the AC adapter with your computer turned on or off.
CAUTION: The AC adapter works with electrical outlets worldwide. However,
power connectors and power strips vary among countries. Using an incompatible
cable or improperly connecting the cable to the power strip or electrical outlet
may cause fire or equipment damage.
NOTICE: When you disconnect the AC adapter cable from the computer, grasp the
connector, not the cable itself, and pull firmly, but gently to help prevent damage to
the cable.
Connects your computer to a TV. Also connects digital
audio-capable devices using the TV/digital audio
adapter cable.
Connect USB devices, such as a mouse, keyboard, or
printer. 32 About Your Computer
MODEM CONNECTOR (RJ-11)
Bottom View
Connect the telephone line to the modem connector.
For information on using the modem, see the online
modem documentation supplied with your computer.
1 left speaker 2 memory module/coin-cell battery compartment
3 consumer IR 4 right speaker
5 wireless mini card compartment 6 battery
7 battery charge/health gauge 8 battery-bay latch releases (2)
9 fan 10 hard drive
2 3 4
10
7
1
6
8
9
5About Your Computer 33
LEFT SPEAKER — To adjust the volume of the integrated speaker, press the volume
control buttons or the mute button.
MEMORY MODULE/COIN-CELL BATTERY COMPARTMENT — Compartment that
contains the DIMM B memory module and the coin-cell battery. For additional
information, see "Adding and Replacing Parts" on page 153.
CONSUMER IR — Infrared sensor for the Dell Travel Remote.
RIGHT SPEAKER — To adjust the volume of the integrated speaker, press the volume
control buttons or the mute button.
WIRELESS MINI CARD COMPARTMENT — Compartment for WLAN, WWAN, or
WPAN Mini Cards (see "Wireless Mini Cards" on page 170).
BATTERY — When a battery is installed, you can use the computer without
connecting the computer to an electrical outlet (see "Using a Battery" on page 53).
BATTERY CHARGE/HEALTH GAUGE — Provides information on the battery charge (see
"Checking the Battery Charge" on page 54).
BATTERY-BAY LATCH RELEASES — Releases the battery (see "Replacing the Battery"
on page 59 for instructions).
FAN — The computer uses a fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents
the computer from overheating. The computer turns the fan on when the computer
gets hot. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fan or the
computer.
HARD DRIVE — Stores software and data.34 About Your ComputerSetting Up Your Computer 35
Setting Up Your Computer
Connecting to the Internet
NOTE: ISPs and ISP offerings vary by country.
To connect to the Internet, you need a modem or network connection and an
Internet service provider (ISP). Your ISP will offer one or more of the
following Internet connection options:
• DSL connections that provide high-speed Internet access through your
existing telephone line or cellular telephone service. With a DSL
connection, you can access the Internet and use your telephone on the
same line simultaneously.
• Cable modem connections that provide high-speed Internet access
through your local cable TV line.
• Satellite modem connections that provide high-speed Internet access
through a satellite television system.
• Dial-up connections that provide Internet access through a telephone line.
Dial-up connections are considerably slower than DSL, cable, and satellite
modem connections.
• Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) or Mobile Broadband technology
provides a connection to the Internet using cellular technology at
broadband rates.
• Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) connections use high-frequency
radio waves to communicate. Typically, a wireless router is connected to
the broadband cable or DSL modem that broadcasts the Internet signal to
your computer.
If you are using a dial-up connection, connect a telephone line to the modem
connector on your computer and to the telephone wall jack before you set up
your Internet connection. If you are using a DSL, cable, or satellite modem
connection, contact your ISP or cellular telephone service for setup
instructions.36 Setting Up Your Computer
Setting Up Your Internet Connection
To set up an Internet connection with a provided ISP desktop shortcut:
1 Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs.
2 Double-click the ISP icon on the Microsoft® Windows® desktop.
3 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup.
NOTE: If you are having problems connecting to the Internet, see "E-Mail, Modem,
and Internet Problems" on page 117. If you cannot connect to the Internet, but have
successfully connected in the past, the ISP may have a service outage. Contact
your ISP to check the service status, or try connecting again later.
NOTE: Have your ISP information ready. If you do not have an ISP, the Connect to
the Internet wizard can help you obtain one.
If you do not have an ISP icon on your desktop or if you want to set up an
Internet connection with a different ISP:
1 Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs.
2 Click Start , and then click Control Panel.
3 Under Network and Internet, click Connect to the Internet.
The Connect to the Internet window appears.
4 Click either Broadband (PPPoE), Wireless, or Dial-up, depending on how
you want to connect:
• Choose Broadband if you will use a DSL modem, cable TV modem, or
satellite modem.
• Choose Wireless if you will use a wireless connection through a
WLAN card.
• Choose Dial-up if you will use a dial-up modem or ISDN.
NOTE: If you do not know which type of connection to select, click Help me
choose or contact your ISP.
5 Follow the instructions on the screen and use the setup information
provided by your ISP to complete the setup.Setting Up Your Computer 37
Transferring Information to a New Computer
You can transfer the following types of data from one computer to another:
• E-mail messages
• Toolbar settings
• Window sizes
• Internet bookmarks
Use one of the following methods for transferring data:
• Windows Easy Transfer wizard, an Easy Transfer Cable, and a USB port
• Over a network
• Removable media, such as a writable CD
Windows Easy Transfer
1 Click Start →All Programs→Accessories→System Tools→Windows
Easy Transfer.
2 In the User Account Control dialog box, click Continue.
3 Click Next.
4 Click Start a new transfer or Continue a transfer in progress.
5 Follow the instructions in the Windows Easy Transfer wizard.
Setting Up a Printer
NOTICE: Complete the operating system setup before you connect a printer to the
computer.
See the documentation that came with the printer for setup information,
including how to:
• Obtain and install updated drivers.
• Connect the printer to the computer.
• Load paper and install the toner or ink cartridge.
For technical assistance, refer to the printer owner's manual or contact the
printer manufacturer. 38 Setting Up Your Computer
Printer Cable
Your printer connects to your computer with a USB cable. Your printer may
not come with a printer cable, so if you purchase a cable separately, ensure
that it is compatible with your printer and computer. If you purchased a
printer cable at the same time you purchased your computer, the cable may
arrive in the computer’s shipping box.
Connecting a USB Printer
NOTE: You can connect USB devices while the computer is turned on.
1 Complete the operating system setup if you have not already done so.
2 Attach the USB printer cable to the USB connectors on the computer and
the printer. The USB connectors fit only one way.
1 USB connector on computer 2 USB connector on printer
3 USB printer cable
3
2
1Setting Up Your Computer 39
3 Turn on the printer, and then turn on the computer.
If the Add New Hardware Wizard window appears, click Cancel.
4 Click Start , and then click Network.
5 Click Add a printer to start the Add Printer Wizard.
NOTE: To install the printer driver, see "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on
page 140 and the documentation that came with your printer.
6 Click Add a local printer or Add a network, wireless, or Bluetooth printer.
7 Follow the instructions in the Add Printer Wizard.
Power Protection Devices
Several devices are available to protect against power fluctuations and failures:
• Surge protectors
• Line conditioners
• Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)
Surge Protectors
Surge protectors and power strips equipped with surge protection help
prevent damage to your computer from voltage spikes that can occur during
electrical storms or after power interruptions. Some surge protector
manufacturers include warranty coverage for certain types of damage.
Carefully read the device warranty when choosing a surge protector. A device
with a higher joule rating offers more protection. Compare joule ratings to
determine the relative effectiveness of different devices.
NOTICE: Most surge protectors do not protect against power fluctuations or
power interruptions caused by nearby lightning strikes. When lightning occurs in
your area, disconnect the telephone line from the telephone wall jack and
disconnect your computer from the electrical outlet.
Many surge protectors have a telephone jack for modem protection. See the
surge protector documentation for modem connection instructions.
NOTICE: Not all surge protectors offer network adapter protection. Disconnect the
network cable from the network wall jack during electrical storms.40 Setting Up Your Computer
Line Conditioners
NOTICE: Line conditioners do not protect against power interruptions.
Line conditioners are designed to maintain AC voltage at a fairly constant level.
Uninterruptible Power Supplies
NOTICE: Loss of power while data is being saved to the hard drive may result in
data loss or file damage.
NOTE: To ensure maximum battery operating time, connect only your computer to
a UPS. Connect other devices, such as a printer, to a separate power strip that
provides surge protection.
A UPS protects against power fluctuations and interruptions. UPS devices
contain a battery that provides temporary power to connected devices when
AC power is interrupted. The battery charges while AC power is available. See
the UPS manufacturer documentation for information on battery operating
time and to ensure that the device is approved by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).Using the Display 41
Using the Display
Adjusting Brightness
When a Dell™ computer is running on battery power, you can conserve power
by setting the display brightness to the lowest comfortable level.
• Press and the up-arrow key to increase brightness on the integrated
display only (not on an external monitor).
• Press and the down-arrow key to decrease brightness on the
integrated display only (not on an external monitor).
NOTE: Brightness key combinations only affect the display on your portable
computer, not monitors or projectors that you attach to your portable computer or
docking device. If your computer is connected to an external monitor and you try to
change the brightness level, the Brightness Meter may appear, but the brightness
level on the external device does not change.
Using a Projector
When you start the computer with an external device attached (such as an
external monitor or projector) and turned on, the image may appear on either
the computer display or the external device.
Press to switch the video image between the display only, the
external device only, or the display and the external device simultaneously.
Making Images and Text Look Bigger or Sharper
NOTE: If you change the display resolution from the current settings, the image
may appear blurry or text may be hard to read if you change the resolution to one
not supported by your computer and display. Before you change any of the display
settings, make a note of the current settings so you can change back to the
previous settings if you need to.
You can enhance the legibility of text and change the appearance of images
on the screen by adjusting display resolution. As you increase resolution,
items appear smaller on the screen. In contrast, lower resolution causes text 42 Using the Display
and images to appear larger and can benefit people with vision impairments.
To display a program at a specific resolution, both the video card and the display
must support the program, and the necessary video drivers must be installed.
NOTE: Use only the Dell-installed video drivers, which are designed to offer the
best performance with your Dell-installed operating system.
If you choose a resolution or color palette that is higher than the display
supports, the settings adjust automatically to the closest supported values.
To set the display resolution and refresh rate for your display, perform the
steps in the following section that corresponds to the operating system your
computer is using.
Microsoft® Windows® XP
1 Click Start→Settings→Control Panel.
2 Under Pick a category, click Appearance and Themes.
3 Under Pick a task..., click the area you want to change, or under or pick a
Control Panel icon, click Display.
4 In the Display Properties window, click the Settings tab.
5 Try different settings for Color quality and Screen resolution.
NOTE: As the resolution increases, icons and text appear smaller on the screen.
Windows Vista®
1 Click the Windows Vista Start button , and click Control Panel.
2 Under Appearance and Personalization, click Adjust screen resolution.
3 In the Display Settings window, under Resolution, slide the slide bar to
the left or right to decrease/increase the screen resolution.
4 Click How do I get the best display? for further instructions.
If the video resolution setting is higher than that supported by the display, the
computer enters pan mode. In pan mode, the entire video image cannot be
displayed at one time, and the taskbar that usually appears at the bottom of
the desktop may no longer be visible. To view the parts of the video image
that are not visible, you can use the touch pad or track stick to move (or pan)
the image up, down, left, and right.
NOTICE: You can damage an external monitor by using an unsupported refresh
rate. Before adjusting the refresh rate on an external monitor, see the user’s guide
for the monitor.Using the Display 43
Using Both a Monitor and Your Computer Display
You can attach an external monitor or projector to your computer and use it
as an extension of your display (known as dual independent display or extended
desktop mode). This mode allows you to use both screens independently and
drag objects from one screen to the other, effectively doubling the amount of
viewable work space.
To use extended desktop mode, perform the steps in the following section
that corresponds to the operating system your computer is using.
Microsoft Windows XP
1 Connect the external monitor, TV, or projector to the computer.
2 Click Start→Settings→Control Panel.
3 Under Pick a category, click Appearance and Themes.
4 Under Pick a task..., click the area you want to change, or under or pick a
Control Panel icon, click Display.
5 In the Display Properties window, click the Settings tab.
NOTE: If you choose a resolution or color palette that is higher than the
display supports, the settings adjust automatically to the closest supported
values. For more information, see your operating system documentation.
6 Click the monitor 2 icon, click the Extend my Windows desktop... check
box, and then click Apply.
7 Change Screen Area to the appropriate sizes for both displays and click Apply.
8 If prompted to restart the computer, click Apply the new color setting
without restarting and click OK.
9 If prompted, click OK to resize your desktop.
10 If prompted, click Yes to keep the settings.
11 Click OK to close the Display Properties window.44 Using the Display
To disable dual independent display mode:
1 Click the Settings tab in the Display Properties window.
2 Click the monitor 2 icon, uncheck the Extend my Windows desktop onto
this monitor option, and then click Apply.
If necessary, press to bring the screen image back to the
computer display.
Windows Vista
1 Click the Windows Vista Start button , and click Control Panel.
2 Under Appearance and Personalization, click Adjust screen resolution.
3 In the Display Settings window, click the monitor 2 icon, click the Extend
the desktop onto this monitor check box, and then click Apply.
4 Click OK to close the Display Settings window.
To disable extended desktop mode:
1 In the Display Settings window, click the Settings tab.
2 Click the monitor 2 icon, uncheck the Extend the desktop onto this
monitor option, and then click Apply.
Setting Display Resolution and Refresh Rate
NOTE: If you change the display resolution from the current settings, the image
may appear blurry or text may be hard to read if you change the resolution to one
not supported by your computer and display. Before you change any of the display
settings, make a note of the current settings so you can change back to the
previous settings if needed.
You can enhance the legibility of text and change the appearance of images
on the screen by adjusting display resolution. As you increase resolution,
items appear smaller on the screen. In contrast, lower resolution causes text
and images to appear larger and can benefit people with vision impairments.
To display a program at a specific resolution, both the video card and the
display must support the program, and the necessary video drivers must be
installed.
NOTE: Use only the Dell-installed video drivers, which are designed to offer the
best performance with your Dell-installed operating system.Using the Display 45
If you choose a resolution or color palette that is higher than the display
supports, the settings adjust automatically to the closest supported values.
To set the display resolution and refresh rate for your display, perform the
steps in the following section that corresponds to the operating system your
computer is using.
Microsoft Windows XP
1 Click Start→Settings→Control Panel.
2 Under Pick a category, click Appearance and Themes.
3 Under Pick a task..., click the area you want to change, or under or pick a
Control Panel icon, click Display.
4 In the Display Properties window, click the Settings tab.
5 Try different settings for Color quality and Screen resolution.
NOTE: As the resolution increases, icons and text appear smaller on the screen.
Windows Vista
1 Click the Windows Vista Start button and click Control Panel.
2 Under Appearance and Personalization, click Adjust screen resolution.
3 In the Display Settings window, under Resolution, move the slide bar to
the left or right to decrease or increase the screen resolution.
NOTE: For additional instructions, click How do I get the best display?46 Using the DisplayUsing the Keyboard and Touchpad 47
Using the Keyboard and Touchpad
Numeric Keypad
The numeric keypad functions like the numeric keypad on an external
keyboard. Each key on the keypad has multiple functions. The keypad
numbers and symbols are marked in blue on the right of the keypad keys. To
type a number or symbol, hold down and press the desired key.
• To enable the keypad, press . The light indicates that the
keypad is active.
• To disable the keypad, press again.
numeric keypad
948 Using the Keyboard and Touchpad
Key Combinations
System Functions
Display Functions
Battery
Power Management
Opens the Task Manager window.
Displays icons representing all currently
available display options (display only, external
monitor or projector only, both display and
projector, etc). Highlight the desired icon to
switch the display to that option.
and up-arrow key Increases brightness on the integrated display
only (not on an external monitor).
and down-arrow key Decreases brightness on the integrated display
only (not on an external monitor).
Displays the Dell™ QuickSet Battery Meter
(see "Dell QuickSet Battery Meter" on
page 54).
Activates a power management mode. You can
reprogram this keyboard shortcut to activate a
different power management mode using the
Advanced tab in the Power Options
Properties window (see "Power Management
Modes" on page 56).Using the Keyboard and Touchpad 49
Microsoft® Windows® Logo Key Functions
Dell™ QuickSet Key Combinations
If Dell QuickSet is installed, you can use other shortcut keys for functions
such as the Battery Meter or activating power management modes. For more
information about Dell QuickSet key combinations, right-click the QuickSet
icon in the notification area, and then click Help.
Adjusting Keyboard Settings
To adjust keyboard operation, such as the character repeat rate:
1 Click Start , and then click Control Panel.
2 Click Hardware and Sound.
3 Click Keyboard.
Windows logo key and Minimizes all open windows.
Windows logo key and
Restores all minimized windows. This key
combination functions as a toggle to restore
minimized windows following the use of the
Windows logo key and combination.
Windows logo key and Starts Windows Explorer.
Windows logo key and Opens the Run dialog box.
Windows logo key and Opens the Search Results dialog box.
Windows logo key and
Opens the Search Results-Computer dialog box
(if the computer is connected to a network).
Windows logo key and Opens the System Properties dialog box.50 Using the Keyboard and Touchpad
Touch Pad
The touch pad detects the pressure and movement of your finger to allow you
to move the cursor on the display. Use the touch pad and touch pad buttons
as you would use a mouse.
• To move the cursor, lightly slide your finger over the touch pad.
• To select an object, lightly tap once on the surface of the touch pad or use
your thumb to press the left touch pad button.
• To select and move (or drag) an object, position the cursor on the object
and tap twice on the touch pad. On the second tap, leave your finger on
the touch pad and move the selected object by sliding your finger over the
surface.
• To double-click an object, position the cursor on the object and tap twice on
the touch pad or use your thumb to press the left touch pad button twice.
1 touch pad 2 silk screen depicting scrolling capabilities
1
2Using the Keyboard and Touchpad 51
Customizing the Touch Pad
You can use the Mouse Properties window to disable the touch pad or adjust
the touch pad settings.
1 Click Start , and then click Control Panel.
2 Click Hardware and Sound.
3 Click Keyboard.
4 In the Mouse Properties window:
• Click the Device Select tab to disable the touch pad.
• Click the Touch Pad tab to adjust touch pad settings.
5 Click OK to save the settings and close the window.52 Using the Keyboard and TouchpadUsing a Battery 53
Using a Battery
Battery Performance
NOTE: For information about the Dell warranty for your computer, see the
Product Information Guide or separate paper warranty document that shipped with
your computer.
For optimal computer performance and to help preserve BIOS settings,
operate your Dell™ portable computer with the main battery installed at all
times. One battery is supplied as standard equipment in the battery bay.
NOTE: Because the battery may not be fully charged, use the AC adapter to
connect your new computer to an electrical outlet the first time you use the
computer. For best results, operate the computer with the AC adapter until the
battery is fully charged. To view battery charge status, place the mouse cursor over
the battery icon in the Windows notification area.
NOTE: Battery operating time (the time the battery can hold a charge) decreases
over time. Depending on how often the battery is used and the conditions under
which it is used, you may need to purchase a new battery during the life of your
computer.
NOTE: It is recommended that you connect your computer to an electrical outlet
when writing to media.
Battery operating time varies depending on operating conditions. Operating
time is significantly reduced when you perform operations including, but not
limited to, the following:
• Using optical drives.
• Using wireless communications devices, ExpressCards, memory cards, or
USB devices.
• Using high-brightness display settings, 3D screen savers, or other powerintensive programs such as complex 3D graphics applications.
• Running the computer in maximum performance mode (see "Power
Management Modes" on page 56 for information about accessing
Windows Power Options Properties or Dell QuickSet, which you can use
to configure power management settings).54 Using a Battery
You can check the battery charge before you insert the battery into the
computer. You can also set power management options to alert you when the
battery charge is low.
CAUTION: Using an incompatible battery may increase the risk of fire or
explosion. Replace the battery only with a compatible battery purchased from
Dell. The battery is designed to work with your Dell computer. Do not use batteries
from other computers with your computer.
CAUTION: Do not dispose of batteries with household waste. When your battery
no longer holds a charge, call your local waste disposal or environmental agency
for advice on disposing of a lithium-ion battery (see "Battery Disposal" in the
Product Information Guide).
CAUTION: Misuse of the battery may increase the risk of fire or chemical burn.
Do not puncture, incinerate, disassemble, or expose the battery to temperatures
above 65°C (149°F). Keep the battery away from children. Handle damaged or
leaking batteries with extreme care. Damaged batteries may leak and cause
personal injury or equipment damage.
Checking the Battery Charge
You can check the battery charge on your computer using any one of the
following methods:
• Dell QuickSet Battery Meter
• Microsoft Windows battery meter icon located in the notification area
• Battery charge/health gauge located on the battery
• Low-battery warning pop-up window
Dell QuickSet Battery Meter
To view the Dell QuickSet Battery Meter:
• Double-click the Dell QuickSet icon in the taskbar, and then click
Battery Meter
or
• Press
The Battery Meter displays the status, battery health, charge level, and charge
completion time for the battery in your computer.
For more information about QuickSet, right-click the QuickSet icon, and
then click Help.Using a Battery 55
Microsoft® Windows® Battery Meter
The battery meter indicates the remaining battery charge. To check the
battery meter, double-click the icon in the notification area.
Charge Gauge
By either pressing once or pressing and holding the status button on the
battery charge gauge, you can check:
• Battery charge (check by pressing and releasing the status button)
• Battery health (check by pressing and holding the status button)
The battery operating time is largely determined by the number of times it is
charged. After hundreds of charge and discharge cycles, batteries lose some
charge capacity—or battery health. Therefore, a battery can show a status of
charged, but maintain a reduced charge capacity (health).
Check the Battery Charge
To check the battery charge, press and release the status button on the battery
charge gauge to illuminate the charge indicator lights. Each light represents
approximately 20 percent of the total battery charge. For example, if the
battery has 80 percent of its charge remaining, four of the lights are on. If no
lights are on, the battery has no charge.
Check the Battery Health
NOTE: You can check battery health in one of two ways: by using the charge gauge
on the battery, as described below, and by using the Battery Meter in Dell QuickSet.
For information about QuickSet, right-click the QuickSet icon in the notification
area, and then click Help.
To check the battery health using the charge gauge, press and hold the status
button on the battery charge gauge for at least 3 seconds to illuminate the
health indicator lights. Each light represents incremental degradation. If no
lights appear, the battery is in good condition, and more than 80 percent of its
original charge capacity remains. If five lights appear, less than 60 percent of the
charge capacity remains, and you should consider replacing the battery (see
"Battery" on page 198 for more information about the battery operating time).56 Using a Battery
Low-Battery Warning
NOTICE: To avoid losing or corrupting data, save your work immediately after a
low-battery warning, then connect the computer to an electrical outlet. If the
battery runs completely out of power, Sleep state begins automatically.
A pop-up window warns you when the battery charge is approximately
90 percent depleted. The computer enters Sleep state when the battery
charge is at a critically low level.
You can change the settings for the battery alarms in Dell QuickSet or the
Power Options window (see "Power Management Modes" on page 56).
Conserving Battery Power
To conserve battery power on your portable computer, do any of the following:
• Connect the computer to an electrical outlet when possible; battery life is
largely determined by the number of times the battery is used and recharged.
• Configure the power management settings using either Dell QuickSet or
Microsoft Windows Power Options to optimize your computer’s power
usage (see "Power Management Modes" on page 56).
• Use the Sleep power state when you leave the computer unattended for
long periods of time (see "Standby and Sleep Mode" on page 56).
Power Management Modes
Standby and Sleep Mode
Standby mode (sleep mode in Microsoft Windows Vista®) conserves power
by turning off the display and the hard drive after a predetermined period of
inactivity (a time-out). When the computer exits standby or sleep mode, it
returns to the same operating state it was in before entering standby or sleep
mode.
NOTICE: If your computer loses AC and battery power while in standby or sleep
mode, it may lose data.
To enter standby mode in Windows XP, click Start→Turn off computer→
Stand by.
To enter sleep mode in Windows Vista, click the Windows Vista Start button ,
and then click Sleep.Using a Battery 57
Depending on how you set the power management options in the
Power Options Properties window or the QuickSet Power Management
Wizard, you may also use one of the following methods:
• Press the power button.
• Close the display.
• Press .
To exit standby or sleep mode, press the power button or open the display,
depending on how you set the power management options. You cannot make
the computer exit standby or sleep mode by pressing a key or touching the
touch pad.
Hibernate Mode
Hibernate mode conserves power by copying system data to a reserved area on
the hard drive and then completely turning off the computer. When the
computer exits hibernate mode, it returns to the same operating state it was
in before entering hibernate mode.
NOTICE: You cannot remove devices or undock your computer while your
computer is in hibernate mode.
Your computer enters hibernate mode if the battery charge level becomes
critically low.
To enter hibernate mode in Windows XP, click the Start button, click Turn off
computer, press and hold , and then click Hibernate.
To enter hibernate mode in Windows Vista, click the Windows Vista Start
button , and then click Hibernate.
Depending on how you set the power management options in the
Power Options Properties window or the QuickSet Power Management
Wizard, you may also use one of the following methods to enter hibernate mode:
• Press the power button.
• Close the display.
• Press .
NOTE: Some ExpressCards may not operate correctly after the computer exits
hibernate mode. Remove and reinsert the card (see "Removing an ExpressCard or
Blank" on page 89), or simply restart (reboot) your computer.58 Using a Battery
To exit hibernate mode, press the power button. The computer may take a
short time to exit hibernate mode. You cannot make the computer exit
hibernate mode by pressing a key or touching the touch pad. For more
information on hibernate mode, see the documentation that came with your
operating system.
Configuring Power Management Settings
You can use Dell QuickSet or Windows Power Options to configure the power
management settings on your computer.
• For information on how to use the Dell QuickSet Power Management
wizard, right-click the QuickSet icon in the notification area, click Help,
and then select Power Management.
Accessing Power Options Properties
Windows XP
Click Start→Control Panel→Performance and Maintenance, and then
click Power Options
Windows Vista
Click the Windows Vista Start button , click Control Panel, click System
and Maintenance, and then click Power Options.
Charging the Battery
NOTE: Charge time is longer with the computer turned on. You can leave the
battery in the computer for as long as you like. The battery’s internal circuitry
prevents the battery from overcharging.
When you connect the computer to an electrical outlet or install a battery
while the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the computer checks
the battery charge and temperature. If necessary, the AC adapter then charges
the battery and maintains the battery charge.
If the battery is hot from being used in your computer or being in a hot
environment, the battery may not charge when you connect the computer to
an electrical outlet.Using a Battery 59
The battery is too hot to start charging if the battery light flashes
alternately blue and amber. Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet
and allow the computer and the battery to cool to room temperature, then
connect the computer to an electrical outlet to continue charging the battery.
For more information about resolving problems with a battery, see "Power
Problems" on page 132.
Replacing the Battery
CAUTION: Using an incompatible battery may increase the risk of fire or
explosion. Replace the battery only with a compatible battery purchased from
Dell. The battery is designed to work with your Dell computer. Do not use batteries
from other computers with your computer.
CAUTION: Before performing these procedures, turn off the computer, disconnect
the AC adapter from the electrical outlet and the computer, disconnect the modem
from the wall connector and the computer, and remove any other external cables
from the computer.
NOTICE: You must remove all external cables from the computer to avoid possible
connector damage.
NOTICE: If you choose to replace the battery with the computer in Sleep state, you
have up to 1 minute to complete the battery replacement before the computer shuts
down and loses any unsaved data.
To remove the battery:
1 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it.
See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions.
2 Ensure that the computer is turned off.
3 Turn the computer over.
4 Slide and click the battery release latches to keep them open.
5 Slide the battery out of the bay.60 Using a Battery
To replace the battery, follow the removal procedure in reverse order.
Storing a Battery
Remove the battery when you store your computer for an extended period of
time. A battery discharges during prolonged storage. After a long storage
period, recharge the battery fully (see "Charging the Battery" on page 58)
before you use it.
1 battery 2 battery release latches (2)
1 2Using Multimedia 61
Using Multimedia
Playing Media
NOTICE: Do not press down on the optical drive tray when you open or close it.
Keep the tray closed when you are not using the drive.
NOTICE: Do not move the computer while playing media.
1 Press the eject button on the front of the drive.
2 Place the disc, label side up, in the center of the tray and snap the disc
onto the spindle.
3 Push the tray back into the drive.
To format media for storing or copying data, see the media software that
came with your computer.
NOTE: Ensure that you follow all copyright laws when copying media.62 Using Multimedia
A CD player includes the following basic buttons:
A DVD player includes the following basic buttons:
For more information on playing media, click Help on the media player
(if available).
Play
Move backward within the current track
Pause
Move forward within the current track
Stop
Go to the previous track
Eject
Go to the next track
Stop
Restart the current chapter
Play
Fast forward
Pause
Fast reverse
Advance a single frame while in pause mode
Go to the next title or chapter
Continuously play the current title or chapter
Go to the previous title or chapter
EjectUsing Multimedia 63
Playing Media Using Dell Travel
Remote (Optional)
The Dell Travel Remote is designed to control Dell Media Direct and
Windows Vista Media Center. It can work only with specified computers.
For more details, refer to the Dell Support website at support.dell.com.
To play media using Dell Travel Remote:
1 Install a coin-cell battery into your remote control.
2 Launch Windows Vista® Media Center from Start →Programs.
3 Use the remote control buttons to play media.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
14
13
12
11
10
17
15
18
1664 Using Multimedia
Copying CD, DVD, and Blu-ray Disc™ (BD) Media
This section applies only to computers that have a DVD+/-RW drive or a
BD-RE drive.
NOTE: Ensure that you observe all copyright laws when copying media.
NOTE: The types of optical drives offered by Dell may vary by country.
The following instructions explain how to make an exact copy of a CD, DVD,
or BD using Roxio Creator. You can also use Roxio Creator for other purposes,
such as creating music CDs from audio files stored on your computer or
backing up important data. For help, open Roxio Creator, and then press .
The DVD drives and BD drives installed in Dell computers do not support
HD-DVD media. For a list of supported media formats, see "Using Blank CD,
DVD, and BD Media" on page 65.
How to Copy a CD, DVD, or BD
NOTE: BD media can only be copied to other BD media.
NOTE: Copying a BD-R to BD-RE will not produce an exact copy.
NOTE: Most commercial DVDs and BDs have copyright protection and cannot be
copied using Roxio Creator.
1 Click Start →All Programs→ Roxio Creator→Projects→Copy.
2 Under the Copy tab, click Copy Disc.
1 Infrared Transmitter 2 Arrow Up
3 OK/Enter/Select 4 Arrow Right
5 Arrow Down 6 Play/Pause
7 Forward 8 Skip Forward
9 Stop 10 Skip Back
11 Reverse 12 Back
13 Arrow Left 14 Mute
15 Volume Down 16 Page Down
17 Volume Up 18 Page UpUsing Multimedia 65
3 To copy the CD, DVD, or BD:
• If you have one optical drive, insert the source disc into the drive,
ensure that the settings are correct, and then click the Copy Disc
button to continue. The computer reads your source disc and copies
the data to a temporary folder on your computer hard drive.
When prompted, insert a blank disc into the drive and click OK.
• If you have two optical drives, select the drive into which you have
inserted your source disc and click the Copy Disc button to continue.
The computer copies the data from the source disc to the blank disc.
Once you have finished copying the source disc, the disc that you have
created automatically ejects.
Using Blank CD, DVD, and BD Media
DVD-writable drives can write to both CD and DVD recording media.
BD-writable drives can write to CD, DVD and BD recording media.
Use blank CD-Rs to record music or permanently store data files. After
creating a CD-R, you cannot write to that CD-R again (see the Sonic
documentation for more information). Use a blank CD-RW if you plan to
erase, rewrite, or update information on that disc later.
Blank DVD+/-R or BD-R media can be used to permanently store large
amounts of information. After you create a DVD+/-R or BD-R, you may not
be able to write to that disc again if the disc is finalized or closed during the
final stage of the disc creation process. Use blank DVD+/-RW or BD-RE
media if you plan to erase, rewrite, or update information on that disc later.
CD-Writable Drives
Media Type Read Write Rewritable
CD-R Yes Yes No
CD-RW Yes Yes Yes66 Using Multimedia
DVD-Writable Drives
BD-Writable Drives
Helpful Tips
• Use Microsoft® Windows® Explorer to drag and drop files to a CD-R or
CD-RW only after you start Roxio Creator and open a Creator project.
• Do not burn a blank CD-R or CD-RW to its maximum capacity; for
example, do not copy a 650-MB file to a blank 650-MB CD. The CD-RW
drive needs 1–2 MB of the blank space to finalize the recording.
Media Type Read Write Rewritable
CD-R Yes Yes No
CD-RW Yes Yes Yes
DVD+R Yes Yes No
DVD-R Yes Yes No
DVD+RW Yes Yes Yes
DVD-RW Yes Yes Yes
DVD+R DL Yes Yes No
DVD-R DL Yes No No
Media Type Read Write Rewritable
CD-R Yes Yes No
CD-RW Yes Yes Yes
DVD+R Yes Yes No
DVD-R Yes Yes No
DVD+RW Yes Yes Yes
DVD-RW Yes Yes Yes
DVD+R DL Yes Yes No
DVD-R DL Yes No No
BD-R Yes Yes No
BD-RE Yes Yes YesUsing Multimedia 67
• Use CD-Rs to burn music CDs that you want to play in regular stereos.
CD-RWs do not play in most home or car stereos.
• Music MP3 files can be played only on MP3 players or on computers that
have MP3 software installed.
• Use a blank CD-RW to practice CD recording until you are familiar with
CD recording techniques. If you make a mistake, you can erase the data on
the CD-RW and try again. You can also use blank CD-RWs to test music
file projects before you record the project permanently to a blank CD-R.
• You cannot create audio DVDs with Roxio Creator.
• Commercially available DVD players used in home theater systems may
not support all available DVD formats. For a list of formats supported by
your DVD player, see the documentation provided with your DVD player
or contact the manufacturer.
• Commercially available BD players used in home theater systems may not
support all available BD formats. For a list of formats supported by your
BD player, see the documentation provided with your BD player or contact
the manufacturer.
• See the Roxio website at www.sonic.com or the Blu-ray Disc™ Association
website at blu-raydisc.com for additional information.
Adjusting the Volume
NOTE: When the speakers are muted, you do not hear the media playing.
1 Right-click the volume icon in the notification area.
2 Click Open Volume Mixer.
3 Click and drag the bar to slide it up or down to increase or decrease the
volume.
For more information on volume control options, click Help in the
Volume Mixer window.
The Volume Meter displays the current volume level, including mute, on your
computer. Either click the QuickSet icon in the notification area and select or
deselect Disable On Screen Volume Meter, or press the volume control
buttons to enable or disable the Volume Meter on the screen.68 Using Multimedia
Adjusting the Picture
If an error message notifies you that the current resolution and color depth
are using too much memory and preventing media playback, adjust the
display properties.
Windows XP
1 Click Start→Control Panel→Appearance and Themes.
2 Under Pick a task..., click Change the screen resolution.
3 Under Screen resolution, click and drag the bar to reduce the resolution
setting.
4 In the drop-down menu under Color quality, click Medium (16 bit) and
click OK.
Windows Vista®
1 Click the Windows Vista Start button , click Control Panel, and then
click Appearance and Personalization.
2 Under Personalization, click Adjust Screen Resolution.
The Display Properties window appears.
3 Under Resolution: click and drag the bar to reduce the resolution setting.
4 In the drop-down menu under Colors:, click Medium (16 bit).
5 Click OK.
Using Dell MediaDirect™
Dell MediaDirect is an instant-on multimedia playback mode for digital
media. Press the Dell MediaDirect button, located on the hinge cover, to
launch Dell MediaDirect.
If the computer is turned on or in standby or sleep mode
If you press the Dell MediaDirect button while the computer is turned on or
in standby (Windows XP) or sleep (Windows Vista) mode, either Windows
Media Center Manager or Dell Media Experience launches, depending on
your system setup. If both applications are present, Windows Media Center
Manager launches.Using Multimedia 69
If the computer is turned off or in hibernate mode
When your computer is turned off or in hibernate mode, you can press the
Dell MediaDirect button to start the computer and automatically launch the
Dell MediaDirect application.
NOTE: You cannot reinstall Dell MediaDirect if you voluntarily reformat the hard
drive. You need the installation software to reinstall Dell MediaDirect. Contact Dell
for assistance (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192).
For more information on using Dell MediaDirect, use the Help menu in the
Dell MediaDirect application.
Connecting Your Computer to a TV or
Audio Device
NOTE: Video and audio cables for connecting your computer to a TV or other audio
device may not be included with your computer. Cables and TV/digital audio
adapter cables are available for purchase from Dell.
Your computer has an S-video TV-out connector that, together with a
standard S-video cable, a composite video adapter cable, or a component
video adapter cable (available from Dell), enable you to connect the
computer to a TV.
1 Dell MediaDirect button
170 Using Multimedia
Your TV has either an S-video input connector, a composite video-input
connector, or a component video-input connector. Depending on what type
of connector is available on your TV, you can use a commercially available
S-video cable, composite video cable, or component video cable to connect
your computer to your TV.
1 S-video TV-out connector 2 S-video connector
1 S-video TV-out connector 2 composite video adapter
3 S/PDIF digital audio connector 4 composite video-output connector
5 S-video connector
1 S-video TV-out connector 2 component video adapter
3 S/PDIF digital audio connector 4 Pr (red) component video-output connector
5 Pb (blue) component videooutput connector
6 Y (green) component video-output
connector
1 2
5
4
3
1 2
5
4
3
1 2
6Using Multimedia 71
If you want to connect your computer to a TV or audio device, it is
recommended that you connect video and audio cables to your computer in
one of the following combinations:
• S-video and standard audio
• Composite video and standard audio
• Component-out video and standard audio
NOTE: See the diagrams at the beginning of each subsection to help you determine
which method of connection you should use.
When you finish connecting the video and audio cables between your
computer and your TV, you must enable your computer to work with the TV.
See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 84 to ensure that the
computer recognizes and works properly with the TV. Additionally, if you are
using S/PDIF digital audio, see "Enabling S/PDIF Digital Audio" on page 84.
S-Video and Standard Audio
1 audio connector 2 S-video TV-out connector
1
272 Using Multimedia
1 Turn off the computer and the TV and/or audio device that you want to
connect.
NOTE: If your TV or audio device supports S-video but not S/PDIF digital audio, you
can connect an S-video cable directly to the S-video TV-out connector on the
computer (without the TV/digital audio adapter cable).
2 Plug one end of the S-video cable into the S-video output connector on
the computer.
3 Plug the other end of the S-video cable into the S-video input connector
on your TV.
4 Plug the single-connector end of the audio cable into the headphone
connector on your computer.
5 Plug the two RCA connectors on the other end of the audio cable into the
audio input connectors on your TV or other audio device.
6 Turn on the TV and any audio device that you connected (if applicable),
and then turn on the computer.
7 See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 84 to ensure that the
computer recognizes and works properly with the TV.
1 standard S-video cable 2 standard audio cable
1
2Using Multimedia 73
S-Video and S/PDIF Digital Audio
1 S-video TV-out connector 2 composite video adapter
1 composite video adapter 2 S-video cable
3 S/PDIF digital audio cable
1 2
1
2
374 Using Multimedia
1 Turn off the computer and the TV and/or the audio device that you want
to connect.
2 Connect the composite video adapter to the S-video TV-out connector on
your computer.
3 Plug one end of the S-video cable into the S-video output connector on
the composite video adapter.
4 Plug the other end of the S-video cable into the S-video input connector
on the TV.
5 Plug one end of the S/PDIF digital audio cable into the digital audio
connector on the composite video adapter cable.
6 Plug the other end of the S/PDIF digital audio cable into the audio input
connector on your TV or audio device.
7 Turn on the TV, turn on any audio device that you connected (if
applicable), and then turn on the computer.
8 See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 84 to ensure that the
computer recognizes and works properly with the TV.
1 composite video adapter 2 S-video cable
1 composite video adapter 2 S/PDIF digital audio cable
1 2
1 2Using Multimedia 75
Composite Video and Standard Audio
1 audio input connector 2 S-video TV-out connector
3 composite video adapter
1 composite video adapter 2 composite video cable
3 standard audio cable
2
1
3
1
2
376 Using Multimedia
1 Turn off the computer and the TV and/or audio device that you want to
connect.
2 Connect the composite video adapter to the S-video TV-out connector on
your computer.
3 Plug one end of the composite video cable into the composite videooutput connector on the composite video adapter.
4 Plug the other end of the composite video cable into the composite videoinput connector on the TV.
5 Plug the single-connector end of the audio cable into the headphone
connector on the computer.
6 Plug the two RCA connectors on the other end of the audio cable into the
audio input connectors on your TV or other audio device.
7 Turn on the TV, turn on any audio device that you connected (if
applicable), and then turn on the computer.
8 See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 84 to ensure that the
computer recognizes and works properly with the TV.
1 composite video adapter 2 composite video cable
2
1Using Multimedia 77
Composite Video and S/PDIF Digital Audio
1 S-video TV-out connector 2 composite video adapter
1 composite video adapter 2 composite video cable
3 standard audio cable
1 2
1
2
378 Using Multimedia
1 Turn off the computer and the TV and/or audio device that you want to
connect.
2 Connect the composite video adapter to the S-video TV-out connector on
the computer.
3 Plug one end of the composite video cable into the composite video-input
connector on the composite video adapter.
4 Plug the other end of the composite video cable into the composite videoinput connector on the TV.
5 Plug one end of the S/PDIF digital audio cable into the S/PDIF audio
connector on the composite video adapter.
6 Plug the other end of the digital audio cable into the S/PDIF input
connector on your TV or other audio device.
7 Turn on the TV, turn on any audio device that you connected (if
applicable), and then turn on the computer.
8 See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 84 to ensure that the
computer recognizes and works properly with the TV.
1 composite video adapter 2 composite video cable
1 composite video adapter 2 S/PDIF digital audio cable
2
1
1 2Using Multimedia 79
Component Video and Standard Audio
1 S-video TV-out connector 2 component video adapter
1 component video adapter 2 component video cable
3 standard audio cable
1 2
1
2
380 Using Multimedia
1 Turn off the computer and the TV and/or audio device that you want to
connect.
2 Connect the component video adapter to the S-video TV-out connector on
your computer.
3 Plug all three ends of the component video cable into the component
video-output connectors on the component video adapter. Make sure that
the red, green, and blue colors of the cable match the corresponding
adapter ports.
4 Plug all three connectors from the other end of the component video cable
into the component video-input connectors on the TV. Make sure that the
red, green, and blue colors of the cable match the colors of the TV input
connectors.
5 Plug the single-connector end of the audio cable into the headphone
connector on the computer.
6 Plug the two RCA connectors on the other end of the audio cable into the
audio input connectors on your TV or audio device.
7 Turn on the TV, turn on any audio device that you connected (if
applicable), and then turn on the computer.
8 See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 84 to ensure that the
computer recognizes and works properly with the TV.
1 component video adapter 2 component video cable
1 2Using Multimedia 81
Component Video and S/PDIF Digital Audio
1 S-video TV-out connector 2 component video adapter
1 282 Using Multimedia
1 Turn off the computer and the TV and/or audio device that you want to
connect.
2 Connect the component video adapter to the S-video TV-out connector on
the computer.
3 Plug all three ends of the component video cable into the component
video-output connectors on the component video adapter. Make sure that
the red, green, and blue colors of the cable match the corresponding
adapter ports.
1 component video adapter 2 component video cable
3 standard audio cable
1
2
3Using Multimedia 83
4 Plug all three connectors from the other end of the component video cable
into the component video-input connectors on the TV. Make sure that the
red, green, and blue colors of the cable match the colors of the TV input
connectors.
5 Plug one end of the S/PDIF digital audio cable into the S/PDIF audio
connector on the component video adapter.
6 Plug the other end of the digital audio cable into the S/PDIF input
connector on your TV or other audio device.
7 Turn on the TV, turn on any audio device that you connected (if
applicable), and then turn on the computer.
8 See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 84 to ensure that the
computer recognizes and works properly with the TV.
1 component video adapter 2 component video-output connectors
3 component video cable
1 component video adapter 2 S/PDIF digital audio cable
1 3
2
2
184 Using Multimedia
Enabling S/PDIF Digital Audio
1 Double-click the speaker icon in the Windows notification area.
2 Click the Options menu and then click Advanced Controls.
3 Click Advanced.
4 Click S/PDIF Interface.
5 Click Close.
6 Click OK.
Enabling the Display Settings for a TV
NOTE: To ensure that the display options appear correctly, connect the TV to the
computer before you enable the display settings.
Windows XP
1 Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel.
2 Double-click Display and click the Settings tab.
3 Click Advanced.
4 Click the tab for your video card.
NOTE: To determine the type of video card installed in your computer, see the
Windows Help and Support Center. To access the Help and Support Center, click
Start→Help and Support. Under Pick a Task, click Use Tools to view your
computer information and diagnose problems. Then, under My Computer
Information, select Hardware.
5 In the display devices section, select the appropriate option for using
either a single display or multiple displays, ensuring that the display
settings are correct for your selection.Using Multimedia 85
Windows Vista
1 Click the Windows Vista Start button , click Control Panel, and then
click Appearance and Personalization.
2 Under Personalization, click Adjust Screen Resolution.
The Display Properties window appears.
3 Click Advanced.
4 Click the tab for your video card.
NOTICE: To determine the type of video card installed in your computer, see
the Windows Help and Support Center. To access the Help and Support
Center in Windows Vista, click the Windows Vista Start button →Help
and Support. Under Pick a Task, click Use Tools to view your computer
information and diagnose problems. Then, under My Computer Information,
select Hardware.
5 In the display devices section, select the appropriate option for using
either a single display or multiple displays, ensuring that the display
settings are correct for your selection.86 Using MultimediaUsing ExpressCards 87
Using ExpressCards
ExpressCards provide additional memory, wired and wireless
communications, multimedia and security features. For example, you can add
an ExpressCard to make wireless wide area network (WWAN) connectivity
available on your computer.
ExpressCards support two form factors:
• ExpressCard/34 (34 mm wide)
• ExpressCard/54 (54 mm wide in an L-shape with a 34 mm connector)
The 34 mm card fits into both the 34 mm and 54 mm card slots. The 54 mm
card only fits into a 54 mm card slot.
See "Specifications" on page 193 for information on supported ExpressCards.
NOTE: An ExpressCard is not a bootable device.
ExpressCard Blanks
Your computer shipped with a plastic blank installed in the ExpressCard slot.
Blanks protect unused slots from dust and other particles. Save the blank for
use when no ExpressCard is installed in the slot; blanks from other computers
may not fit your computer.
1 ExpressCard/34 2 ExpressCard/54
1 288 Using ExpressCards
Remove the blank before installing an ExpressCard. To remove the blank, see
"Removing an ExpressCard or Blank" on page 89.
Installing an ExpressCard
You can install an ExpressCard while the computer is running. The computer
automatically detects the card.
ExpressCards are generally marked with a symbol (such as a triangle or an
arrow) or a label to indicate which end to insert into the slot. The cards are
keyed to prevent incorrect insertion. If card orientation is not clear, see the
documentation that came with the card.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
To install an ExpressCard:
1 Hold the card with the top side of the card facing up.
2 Slide the card into the slot until the card is completely seated in its
connector.
If you encounter too much resistance, do not force the card. Check the
card orientation and try again.
1 slot 2 ExpressCard
1 2Using ExpressCards 89
The computer recognizes the ExpressCard and automatically loads the
appropriate device driver. If the configuration program tells you to load the
manufacturer's drivers, use the media that came with the ExpressCard.
Removing an ExpressCard or Blank
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
Press the latch and remove the card or blank. For some latches, you must press
the latch twice, once to pop the latch out, and then a second time to pop the
card out.
Save a blank to use when no ExpressCard is installed in a slot. Blanks protect
unused slots from dust and other particles.
1 release button
190 Using ExpressCardsUsing the Memory Card Reader 91
Using the Memory Card Reader
The memory card reader provides a fast and convenient way to view and share
digital photos, music, and videos stored on a memory card.
NOTE: A memory card is not a bootable device.
The 8-in-1 memory card reader reads the following memory cards:
• Secure Digital (SD)
• SDIO
• MultiMediaCard (MMC)
• Memory Stick
• Memory Stick PRO
• xD-Picture Card
• Hi Speed-SD
• Hi Density-SD
Memory Card Blanks
Your computer shipped with a plastic blank installed in the 8-in-1 memory
card reader. Blanks protect unused slots from dust and other particles. Save
the blank for use when no memory card is installed in the slot; blanks from
other computers may not fit your computer.
Remove the blank before installing a memory card. To remove the blank, see
"Removing a Memory Card or Blank" on page 92.
Installing a Memory Card
You can install a memory card in the computer while the computer is
running. The computer automatically detects the card.
Memory cards are generally marked with a symbol (such as a triangle or an
arrow) or a label to indicate which end to insert into the slot. The cards are
keyed to prevent incorrect insertion. If card orientation is not clear, see the
documentation that came with the card. 92 Using the Memory Card Reader
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
To install a memory card:
1 Hold the card with the top side of the card facing up.
2 Slide the card into the slot until the card is completely seated in its
connector.
If you encounter too much resistance, do not force the card. Check the
card orientation and try again.
The computer recognizes the memory card and automatically loads the
appropriate device driver. If the configuration program tells you to load the
manufacturer's drivers, use the media that came with the memory card, if
applicable.
Removing a Memory Card or Blank
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: Use the memory card configuration utility (click the icon in the
notification area) to select a card and stop it from functioning before you remove it
from the computer. If you do not stop the card in the configuration utility, you could
lose data.
Press the card into the slot to release it from the card reader. When it is
partially ejected, remove the card. Setting Up and Using Networks 93
Setting Up and Using Networks
A computer network provides connectivity between your computer and the
Internet, another computer, or a network. For example, with a network set up
in a home or small office you can print to a shared printer, access drives and
files on another computer, browse other networks, or access the Internet. You
can set up a local area network (LAN) using a network or broadband modem
cable or set up a wireless LAN (WLAN).
The Microsoft® Windows® XP and Microsoft Windows Vista® operating
systems provide wizards to help guide you through the process of networking
computers. For more information about Networking, see the Windows Help
and Support Center (see "Microsoft Windows XP and Windows Vista® Help
and Support Center" on page 16).
Connecting a Network or Broadband Modem Cable
Before you connect your computer to a network, the computer must have a
network adapter installed and a network cable connected to it.
1 Connect the network cable to the network adapter connector on the back
of your computer.
NOTE: Insert the cable connector until it clicks into place, and then gently
pull on the cable to ensure that it is securely attached.
2 Connect the other end of the network cable to a network connection
device or a network wall connector.
NOTE: Do not use a network cable with a telephone wall connector.94 Setting Up and Using Networks
Setting Up a Network
Windows XP
1 Click Start→All Programs→ Accessories→ Communications→Network
Setup Wizard→Next→Checklist for creating a network.
NOTE: Selecting the connection method labeled This computer connects
directly to the Internet enables the integrated firewall provided with
Windows XP Service Pack 2 (SP2).
2 Complete the checklist.
3 Return to the Network Setup Wizard and follow the instructions in the
wizard.
Windows Vista
1 Click the Windows Vista Start button , and then click Connect To→
Set up a connection or network.
2 Select an option under Choose a connection option.
3 Click Next, and then follow the instructions in the wizard.
Wireless Local Area Network
A wireless local area network (WLAN) is a series of interconnected computers
that communicate with each other over the air waves rather than through a
network cable connected to each computer. In a WLAN, a radio
communications device called an access point or wireless router connects
network computers and provides Internet, or network access. The access
point or wireless router and the wireless network card in the computer
communicate by broadcasting data from their antennas over the air waves.
What You Need to Establish a WLAN Connection
Before you can set up a WLAN, you need:
• High-speed (broadband) Internet access (such as cable or DSL)
• A broadband modem that is connected and working
• A wireless router or access pointSetting Up and Using Networks 95
• A wireless network card for each computer that you want to connect to
your WLAN
• A network cable with a network (RJ-45) connector
Checking Your Wireless Network Card
Depending on what you selected when you purchased your computer, the
computer has a variety of configurations. To confirm that your computer has
a wireless network card and to determine the type of card, use one of the following:
• The Start button and the Connect To option
• The order confirmation for your computer
Start Button and Connect To Option
In Microsoft Windows XP, click Start→ Connect To→Show all connections.
NOTE: If your computer is set to the Classic Start menu option, click Start→
Settings→Network Connections to view your network connections.
In Microsoft Windows Vista, click → Connect To→View network
computers and devices.
If Wireless Network Connection does not appear under LAN or High-Speed
Internet, you may not have a wireless network card.
If Wireless Network Connection appears, you have a wireless network card.
To view detailed information about the wireless network card:
1 Right-click Wireless Network Connection.
2 Click Properties.
The Wireless Network Connection Properties window appears.
The wireless network card’s name and model number are listed on the
Generaltab.
NOTE: If Wireless Network Connection does not appear, you may not have a
wireless network card.
The Order Confirmation for Your Computer
The order confirmation that you received when you ordered your computer
lists the hardware and software that shipped with your computer.96 Setting Up and Using Networks
Setting Up a New WLAN Using a Wireless Router and a
Broadband Modem
1 Contact your Internet service provider (ISP) to obtain specific information
about the connection requirements for your broadband modem.
2 Ensure that you have wired Internet access through your broadband
modem before you attempt to set up a wireless Internet connection
(see "Connecting a Network or Broadband Modem Cable" on page 93).
3 Install any software required for your wireless router. Your wireless router
may have been shipped with installation media. Installation media usually
contains installation and troubleshooting information. Install the required
software according to the instructions provided by the router manufacturer.
4 Shut down your computer and any other wireless-enabled computers in
the vicinity through the Windows Vista Start button .
5 Disconnect your broadband modem power cable from the electrical outlet.
6 Disconnect the network cable from the computer and the modem.
7 Disconnect the AC adapter cable from your wireless router to ensure that
there is no power connected to the router.
NOTE: Wait for a minimum of 5 minutes after disconnecting your broadband
modem before continuing with the network setup.
8 Insert a network cable into the network (RJ-45) connector on the
unpowered broadband modem.
9 Connect the other end of the network cable into the Internet network
(RJ-45) connector on the unpowered wireless router.
10 Ensure that no network or USB cables, other than the network cable
connecting the modem and the wireless router, are connected to the
broadband modem.
NOTE: Restart your wireless equipment in the order described below to prevent a
potential connection failure.
11 Turn on only your broadband modem and wait for at least 2 minutes for
the broadband modem to stabilize. After 2 minutes, proceed to step 12.
12 Turn on your wireless router and wait for at least 2 minutes for the wireless
router to stabilize. After 2 minutes, proceed to the step 13.
13 Start your computer and wait until the boot process completes.Setting Up and Using Networks 97
14 See the documentation that came with your wireless router to do the
following in order to set up the wireless router:
• Establish communication between your computer and your
wireless router.
• Configure your wireless router to communicate with your
broadband router.
• Find out your wireless router’s broadcast name. The technical term for
the name of your router’s broadcast name is Service Set Identifier (SSID)
or network name.
15 If necessary, configure your wireless network card to connect to the wireless
network (see "Connecting to a WLAN" on page 97).
Connecting to a WLAN
NOTE: Before you connect to a WLAN, ensure that you have followed the
instructions in "Wireless Local Area Network" on page 94.
NOTE: The following networking instructions do not apply to internal cards with
Bluetooth® wireless technology or cellular products.
This section provides general procedures for connecting to a network using
wireless technology. Specific network names and configuration details vary.
See "Wireless Local Area Network" on page 94 for more information about
how to prepare for connecting your computer to a WLAN.
Your wireless network card requires specific software and drivers for
connecting to a network. The software is already installed.
NOTE: If the software is removed or corrupted, follow the instructions in the user
documentation for your wireless network card. Verify the type of wireless network
card installed in your computer and then search for that name on the Dell™ Support
website at support.dell.com. For information on the type of wireless network card
that is installed in your computer, see "Checking Your Wireless Network Card" on
page 95.
When you turn on your computer, and a network for which your computer is
not configured is detected in the area, a pop-up appears near the network icon
in the Windows notification area.98 Setting Up and Using Networks
Determining the Wireless Network Device Manager
Depending on the software installed on your computer, different wireless
configuration utilities may manage your network devices:
• Your wireless network card’s client utility
• The Windows XP or Windows Vista operating system
To determine which wireless configuration utility is managing your wireless
network card in Windows XP:
1 Click Start→Settings→Control Panel→Network Connections.
2 Right-click the Wireless Network Connection icon, and then click View
Available Wireless Networks.
If the Choose a wireless network window states Windows cannot configure
this connection, the wireless network card’s client utility is managing the
wireless network card.
If the Choose a wireless network window states Click an item in the list
below to connect to a wireless network in range or to get more information,
the Windows XP operating system is managing the wireless network card.
To determine which wireless configuration utility is managing your wireless
network card in Windows Vista:
1 Click → Connect To→Manage wireless networks.
2 Double-click a profile to open the wireless network properties screen.
For specific information about the wireless configuration utility installed on
your computer, see your wireless network documentation in the Windows
Help and Support Center (see "Microsoft Windows XP and Windows Vista®
Help and Support Center" on page 16).
Completing the Connection to the WLAN
When you turn on your computer and a network (for which your computer is
not configured) is detected in the area, a pop-up appears near the network
icon in the notification area (in the lower-right corner of the Windows desktop).
Follow the instructions provided in any utility prompts that appear on
your screen.
Once you have configured your computer for the wireless network that you
selected, another pop-up notifies you that your computer is connected to that
network. Setting Up and Using Networks 99
Thereafter, whenever you log on to your computer within the range of the
wireless network that you selected, the same pop-up notifies you of the
wireless network connection.
NOTE: If you select a secure network, you must enter a WEP or WPA key when
prompted. Network security settings are unique to your network. Dell cannot
provide this information.
NOTE: Your computer can take up to 1 minute to connect to the network.
Monitoring the Status of the Wireless Network Card Through Dell QuickSet
The wireless activity indicator provides you with an easy way to monitor the
status of your computer’s wireless devices. To turn the wireless activity indicator
on or off, click the QuickSet icon in the taskbar and select Hotkey Popups.
If Wireless Activity Indicator Off is not checked, the indicator is on.
If Wireless Activity Indicator Off is checked, the indicator is off.
The wireless activity indicator displays whether your computer’s integrated
wireless devices are enabled or disabled. When you turn the wireless
networking function on or off, the wireless activity indicator changes to
display the status.
For more information about the Dell QuickSet wireless activity indicator,
right-click the QuickSet icon in the taskbar, and then select Help.
Mobile Broadband (or Wireless Wide
Area Network)
A Mobile Broadband network, also known as a Wireless Wide Area Network
(WWAN), is a high-speed digital cellular network that provides Internet
access over a much wider geographical area than a WLAN, which typically
covers only from 100 to 1000 feet. Your computer can maintain Mobile
Broadband network access as long as the computer is within a cellular-data
coverage zone. Contact your service provider for coverage of a high-speed
digital cellular network.
NOTE: Even if you are able to make a call from your cellular phone in a specific
geographical location, that location may not necessarily be within a cellular-data
coverage zone.100 Setting Up and Using Networks
What You Need to Establish a Mobile Broadband Network Connection
NOTE: Depending on your computer, you can use either a Mobile Broadband
ExpressCard or Mini Card, but not both, to establish a Mobile Broadband network
connection.
To set up a Mobile Broadband network connection, you need:
• A Mobile Broadband ExpressCard or Mini Card (depending on your
computer’s configuration)
NOTE: For instructions on using ExpressCards, see "Using ExpressCards" on
page 87.
• An activated Mobile Broadband ExpressCard or activated Subscriber
Identity Module (SIM) for your service provider
• The Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility (already installed on your
computer if you purchased the card when you purchased your computer, or
on the media that accompanied your card if purchased separately from
your computer)
If the utility is corrupted or deleted from your computer, see the Dell
Mobile Broadband Card Utility user’s guide in Windows Help and
Support (click Start , and then click Help and Support) or on the
media that accompanied your card if you purchased it separately from your
computer.
Checking Your Dell Mobile Broadband Card
Depending on what you selected when you purchased your computer, the
computer has a variety of configurations. To determine your computer
configuration, see one of the following:
• Your order confirmation
• Microsoft Windows Help and Support
To check your Mobile Broadband card in Windows Help and Support:
1 Click Start →Help and Support→Use Tools to view your computer
information and diagnose problems.
2 Under Tools, click My Computer Information→Find information about
the hardware installed on this computer.Setting Up and Using Networks 101
On the My Computer Information - Hardware screen, you can view the type
of Mobile Broadband card installed in your computer as well as other
hardware components.
NOTE: The Mobile Broadband card is listed under Modems.
Connecting to a Mobile Broadband Network
NOTE: These instructions only apply to Mobile Broadband ExpressCards or MiniCards. They do not apply to internal cards with wireless technology.
NOTE: Before you connect to the Internet, you must activate Mobile Broadband
service through your cellular service provider. For instructions and for additional
information about using the Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility, see the user's guide
available through Windows Help and Support (click Start , and then click Help
and Support). The user's guide is also available on the Dell Support website at
support.dell.com and on the media included with your Mobile Broadband card if
you purchased the card separately from your computer.
Use the Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility to establish and manage a
Mobile Broadband network connection to the Internet:
1 Click the Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility icon in the Windows
notification area to run the utility.
2 Click Connect.
NOTE: The Connect button changes to the Disconnect button.
3 Follow the instructions on the screen to manage the network connection
with the utility.
or
1 Click Start →All Programs→Dell Wireless.
2 Click Dell Wireless Broadband and follow the instructions on the screen.102 Setting Up and Using Networks
Enabling/Disabling the Dell Mobile Broadband Card
NOTE: If you are unable to connect to a Mobile Broadband network, ensure that
you have all the components for establishing a Mobile Broadband connection (see
"What You Need to Establish a Mobile Broadband Network Connection" on
page 100), and then verify that your Mobile Broadband card is enabled by verifying
the setting of the wireless switch.
You can turn your Mobile Broadband card on and off using the wireless switch
on your computer.
You can turn your computer’s wireless devices on and off with the wireless
switch on the left side of the computer (see "Left Side View" on page 27).
If the switch is in the on position, move the switch to the off position to
disable the switch and the Mobile Broadband card. If the switch is in the off
position, move the switch to the on position to enable the switch and the Dell
Mobile Broadband card. For information about the wireless switch positions,
see "wireless switch" on page 27.
To monitor the status of your wireless device, see "Monitoring the Status of
the Wireless Network Card Through Dell QuickSet" on page 99.
Dell Wi-Fi Catcher™ Network Locator
The wireless switch on your Dell computer uses the Dell Wi-Fi Catcher
Network Locator to scan specifically for wireless networks in your vicinity.
To scan for a wireless network, slide and hold the wireless switch (see "wireless
switch" on page 27) in the momentary position for a few seconds. The Wi-Fi
Catcher Network Locator functions regardless of whether your computer is
turned on or off, or in Sleep state, as long as the switch is configured through
Dell QuickSet or the BIOS (system setup program) to control WiFi network
connections.
Because the Wi-Fi Catcher Network Locator is disabled and not configured
for use when your computer is shipped to you, you must first use Dell
QuickSet to enable and configure the switch to control WiFi network
connections. For more information on the Wi-Fi Catcher Network Locator
and to enable the feature through Dell QuickSet, right-click the QuickSet
icon in the notification area, and then select Help.Securing Your Computer 103
Securing Your Computer
Security Cable Lock
NOTE: Your computer does not ship with a security cable lock.
A security cable lock is a commercially available antitheft device. To use the
lock, attach it to the security cable slot on your Dell computer. For more
information, see the instructions included with the device.
NOTICE: Before you buy an antitheft device, ensure that it will work with the
security cable slot on your computer.104 Securing Your Computer
Passwords
Passwords prevent unauthorized access to your computer. When you first
start your computer, you must assign a primary password at the prompt. If
you do not enter a password within 2 minutes, the computer returns to its
previous operating state.
When using passwords, observe the following guidelines:
• Choose a password that you can remember, but not one that is easy to
guess. For example, do not use the names of family members or pets for
passwords.
• It is recommended that you do not write down your password. If you do
write it down, however, ensure that the password is stored in a secure
location.
• Do not share your password with other people.
• Ensure that people are not watching you when you type your password.
NOTICE: Passwords provide a high level of security for data in your computer or
hard drive. However, they are not foolproof. If you require more security, obtain and
use additional forms of protection such as data encryption programs.
Use the User Accounts option in the Control Panel in the Microsoft® Windows®
operating system to create user accounts or to change passwords. Once you
create a user password, you must enter it each time you turn on or unlock
your computer. If you do not enter a password within 2 minutes, the
computer returns to its previous operating state. For more information, see
your Windows documentation.
If you forget any of your passwords, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on
page 192). For your protection, Dell technical support staff will ask you for
proof of your identity to ensure that only an authorized person can use the
computer.Securing Your Computer 105
If Your Computer Is Lost or Stolen
• Call a law enforcement agency to report the lost or stolen computer.
Include the Service Tag in your description of the computer. Ask that a
case number be assigned and write down the number, along with the
name, address, and phone number of the law enforcement agency. If
possible, obtain the name of the investigating officer.
NOTE: If you know where the computer was lost or stolen, call a law
enforcement agency in that area. If you do not know, call a law enforcement
agency where you live.
• If the computer belongs to a company, notify the security office of the
company.
• Contact Dell customer service to report the missing computer. Provide the
computer Service Tag, the case number, and the name, address, and phone
number of the law enforcement agency to which you reported the missing
computer. If possible, give the name of the investigating officer.
The Dell customer service representative will log your report under the
computer Service Tag and record the computer as missing or stolen. If someone
calls Dell for technical assistance and gives your Service Tag, the computer is
identified automatically as missing or stolen. The representative will attempt to
get the phone number and address of the caller. Dell will then contact the law
enforcement agency to which you reported the missing computer.106 Securing Your ComputerTroubleshooting 107
Troubleshooting
Dell Technical Update Service
The Dell Technical Update service provides proactive e-mail notification of
software and hardware updates for your computer. The service is free and can
be customized for content, format, and how frequently you receive
notifications.
To enroll for the Dell Technical Update service, go to
support.dell.com/technicalupdate.
Dell Diagnostics
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
When to Use the Dell Diagnostics
If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in
"Lockups and Software Problems" on page 127 and run the Dell Diagnostics
before you contact Dell for technical assistance.
It is recommended that you print these procedures before you begin.
NOTE: The Dell Diagnostics only operate on Dell computers.
Enter system setup, review your computer’s configuration information, and
ensure that the device you want to test displays in system setup and is active
(see "Using the System Setup Program" on page 203).
Start the Dell Diagnostics from your hard drive or from your Drivers and
Utilities media (see "Drivers and Utilities Media" on page 15).108 Troubleshooting
Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive
The Dell Diagnostics is located on a hidden diagnostic utility partition on
your hard drive.
NOTE: If your computer cannot display a screen image, contact Dell (see
"Contacting Dell" on page 192).
NOTE: If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it.
See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions.
1 Ensure that the computer is connected to an electrical outlet that is
known to be working properly.
2 Turn on (or restart) your computer.
3 Start the Dell Diagnostics in one of the following two ways:
a When the DELL™ logo appears, press immediately.
Select Diagnostics from the boot menu, and then press .
NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue
to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop, then shut down your
computer and try again.
NOTE: Before attempting option B, the computer must be powered down
completely.
b Press and hold the key while powering the computer on.
NOTE: If you see a message stating that no diagnostics utility partition has
been found, run the Dell Diagnostics from your Drivers and Utilities media.
The computer runs the Pre-boot System Assessment, a series of initial
tests of your system board, keyboard, hard drive, and display.
• During the assessment, answer any questions that appear.
• If a failure is detected, the computer stops and beeps. To stop the
assessment and restart the computer, press ; to continue to the
next test, press ; to retest the component that failed, press .
• If failures are detected during the Pre-boot System Assessment, write
down the error code(s) and contact Dell.
If the Pre-boot System Assessment completes successfully, you receive the
message Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition.
Press any key to continue.
4 Press any key to start the Dell Diagnostics from the diagnostics utility
partition on your hard drive.Troubleshooting 109
Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the Drivers and Utilities Media
1 Insert your Drivers and Utilities media.
2 Shut down and restart the computer.
3 When the DELL logo appears, press immediately.
NOTE: Keyboard failure may result when a key on the keyboard is held down
for extended periods of time. To avoid possible keyboard failure, press and
release in even intervals until the boot device menu appears.
4 At the boot device menu, use the up- and down-arrow keys to highlight
CD/DVD/CD-RW, and then press .
NOTE: The Quickboot feature changes the boot sequence for the current
boot only. Upon restart, the computer boots according to the boot sequence
specified in system setup.
5 Select the Boot from CD-ROM option from the menu that appears, and
then press .
6 Type 1 to start the Drivers and Utilities menu, and then press .
7 Select Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics from the numbered list. If multiple
versions are listed, select the version appropriate for your computer.
8 At the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu, select the test you want to run.
NOTE: Write down any error codes and problem descriptions exactly as they
appear and follow the instructions on the screen.
9 After all tests have completed, close the test window to return to the Dell
Diagnostics Main Menu.
10 Remove your Drivers and Utilities media, then close the Main Menu
window to exit the Dell Diagnostics and restart the computer.110 Troubleshooting
Dell Diagnostics Main Menu
After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the MainMenu screen appears, click the
button for the option you want.
NOTE: It is recommended that you select Test System to run a complete test
on your computer.
After you have selected the Test System option from the main menu, the
following menu appears.
NOTE: It is recommended that you select Extended Test from the menu
below to run a more thorough check of the devices in the computer.
For any problem encountered during a test, a message appears with an error
code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and problem
description exactly as it appears and follow the instructions on the screen. If you
cannot resolve the problem, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192).
NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located at the top of each test screen.
When contacting Dell support, have your Service Tag ready.
Option Function
Test Memory Run the stand-alone memory test
Test System Run System Diagnostics
Exit Exit the Diagnostics
Option Function
Express Test Performs a quick test of system devices. The test typically
takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your
part. Run Express Test first to increase the possibility of
tracing the problem quickly.
Extended Test Performs a thorough check of system devices. The test
typically takes an hour or more and periodically requires your
input to answer specific questions.
Custom Test Tests a specific device in the system and can be used to
customize the tests you want to run.
Symptom Tree Lists a number of common symptoms and allows you to select
a test based on the symptom of the problem you are having.Troubleshooting 111
The following tabs provide additional information for tests run from the
Custom Test or Symptom Tree option:
Dell Support Center
The Dell Support Center helps you find the service, support and system-specific
information you need. For more information about Dell Support Center and
available support tools, click the Services tab at support.dell.com.
Systems purchased on June 26, 2007 and later are pre-installed with
Dell Support Center. Click on the desktop icon and select the area of
assistance you require.
For computers purchased prior to June 26, 2007, you can download Dell
Support Center from the Services page at support.dell.com.
Click the Dell Support Center icon on your computer’s desktop to run
the application and to access the following features:
• Self-help tools such as, Dell Support 3, Dell PC Tune-Up, Dell PC
CheckUp, and Network Assistant
• DellConnect for remote, real-time, technical support
Tab Function
Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions
encountered.
Errors Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and the
problem description.
Help Describes the test and any requirements for running the test.
Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device.
The Dell Diagnostics obtains configuration information for all
devices from system setup, memory, and various internal tests,
and it displays the information in the device list in the left
pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names
of all the components installed on your computer or all devices
attached to your computer.
Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings.112 Troubleshooting
• Dell support contact information including e-mail and online chat
addresses as well as telephone numbers
• Resources specific to your computer are available under Drivers &
Downloads, Upgrades and System Information
The top of the Dell Support Center home page displays your computer’s
model number along with its Service Tag, Express Service code, and warranty
expiration details. When permissions are given to Dell to use your Service
Tag, additional details about your computer, such as available memory, disk
space, installed hardware, network addresses, modem specifications, installed
security software, and much more are provided. In addition, using your
Service Tag, Dell can link you to the most relevant www.dell.com web pages
for information about your warranty, ordering accessories and details about
installing recommended drivers and downloads.
Dell Support 3
The Dell Support 3 is customized for your computing environment. This
utility provides self-support information, software updates, and health scans
for your computer. Use this utility for the following functions:
• Check your computing environment
• View the Dell Support 3 settings
• Access the Dell Support 3 help file
• View frequently asked questions
• Learn more about Dell Support 3
• Turn Dell Support 3 off
For more information about Dell Support 3, click the question mark (?) at the
top of the Dell Support 3 window.
To access Dell Support 3:
• Click the Dell Support 3 icon in the notification area of your
Windows desktop.
NOTE: The icon functions vary depending on whether you click, doubleclick, or right-click the icon.
orTroubleshooting 113
• Click the Microsoft® Windows Vista® Start button →All Programs→
Dell Support 3→Dell Support Settings. Ensure that the Show icon on
the taskbar option is checked.
NOTE: If Dell Support 3 is not available from the Start menu, go to
support.dell.com and download the software.
Dell PC Tune-Up
The automated or monthly version of Dell PC Tune-Up allows you to choose
the day and time of the month you want your computer "tuned up". A typical
tune-up includes hard drive defragmentation, removal of unwanted and
temporary files, updated security settings, verification of "good" restore points,
and other maintenance activities designed to improve computer performance
and security. The monthly version is available as an annual subscription and is a
feature of Dell Support 3, a complimentary application that provides real-time
health scans and information on how to maintain your computer (see "Dell
Support 3" on page 112).
Both versions of PC Tune-Up are available to customers in the U.S. and
Canada. For the latest updates and to learn how to keep your computer
running at peak performance, search for the keyword PC TuneUp on
support.dell.com.
Dell PC CheckUp
Dell PC Checkup is a troubleshooting and diagnostic tool that provides
customized scanning and testing of your Dell computer. PC Checkup verifies
whether your hardware is working properly and provides automated fixes for
common configuration concerns. It is recommended that you run PC
Checkup on a regular basis or before contacting Dell for assistance. The
application creates a detailed report that Dell technicians can use to resolve
your issue quickly.
Dell Network Assistant
Designed specifically for users of Dell™ computers, the Dell Network
Assistant helps simplify the setup, monitoring, troubleshooting, and repair of
your network.114 Troubleshooting
The Dell Network Assistant provides the following features:
• Consolidated setup, alerting, and device status
• Simplified tracking of networked devices through a visual display of
network status
• Proactive troubleshooting and repair of network problems
• Tutorials, setup wizards, and frequently asked questions (FAQs) to
enhance understanding of networking principles
To access Dell Network Assistant:
1 Click the Dell Support Center icon on your computer’s desktop.
2 Click Self Help→Network / Internet→Network Management.
DellConnect
DellConnect is a simple online access tool that allows a Dell service and
support associate to access your computer through an Internet connection,
diagnose the problem and repair it. The associate works with your permission
under your supervision, and you can work with Dell’s associate during the
troubleshooting session.
To use this service, you must have an Internet connection and your Dell
computer must be under warranty. DellConnect is also available for a fee
through "Dell On Call."
To begin a live session with a Dell associate:
1 Click the Dell Support Center icon on your computer’s desktop.
Click Assistance From Dell→Technical Support→DellConnect→Phone
and follow the instructions.
Drive Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191 as you complete these checks.
ENSURE THAT MICROSOFT® WINDOWS® RECOGNIZES THE DRIVE —
Windows XP
Click Start→My Computer.Troubleshooting 115
Windows Vista®
Click Start →Computer.
If the drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to
check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from
recognizing the drive.
TEST THE DRIVE —
• Insert another floppy disk, CD, or DVD to eliminate the possibility that
the original media is defective.
• Insert a bootable floppy disk and restart the computer.
CLEAN THE DRIVE O R DISK — See "Cleaning Your Computer" on page 206.
ENSURE THAT THE CD O R DVD MEDIA I S SNAPPED ONTO THE SPINDLE
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
CHECK FOR HARDWARE INCOMPATIBILITIES — See "Troubleshooting Software
and Hardware Problems in the Microsoft® Windows® XP and Microsoft
Windows Vista® Operating Systems" on page 143.
RUN THE DELL DIAGNOSTICS — See "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107.
Optical drive problems
NOTE: High-speed optical drive vibration is normal and may cause noise, which
does not indicate a defect in the drive or the media.
NOTE: Because of different regions worldwide and different disc formats, not all
DVD titles work in all DVD drives.
Problems writing to a CD-RW, DVD+/-RW, or BD-RE drive
CLOSE OTHER PROGRAMS — CD-RW, DVD+/-RW, and BD-RE drives must
receive a steady stream of data when writing. If the stream is interrupted, an
error occurs. Try closing all programs before you write to the drive.
TURN OFF SLEEP STATE IN WINDOWS BEFORE WRITING T O A CD/DVD/BD
DISC — See "Standby and Sleep Mode" on page 56 for information on Sleep
state.
CHANGE THE WRITE SPEED T O A SLOWER RATE — See the help files for your
CD, DVD, or BD creation software.116 Troubleshooting
The drive tray cannot eject
1 Ensure that the computer is shut down.
2 Straighten a paper clip and insert one end into the eject hole at the front
of the drive, then push firmly until the tray is partially ejected.
3 Gently pull out the tray until it stops.
The drive makes an unfamiliar scraping or grinding sound
• Ensure that the sound is not caused by the program that is running.
• Ensure that the disc is inserted properly.
Hard drive problems
ALLOW THE COMPUTER T O COOL BEFORE TURNING I T ON — A hot hard drive may
prevent the operating system from starting. Try allowing the computer to
return to room temperature before turning it on.
RUN CHECK DISK —
Windows XP
1 Click Start and click My Computer.
2 Right-click Local Disk C:.
3 Click Properties→Tools→Check Now.
4 Click Scan for and attempt recovery of bad sectors and click Start.
Windows Vista
1 Click Start and click Computer.
2 Right-click Local Disk C:.
3 Click Properties→Tools→Check Now.
The User Account Control window may appear. If you are an
administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your
administrator to continue the desired action.
4 Follow the instructions on the screen.Troubleshooting 117
E-Mail, Modem, and Internet Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTE: Connect the modem to an analog telephone jack only. The modem does not
operate while it is connected to a digital telephone network.
CHECK THE MICROSOFT OUTLOOK® EXPRESS/WINDOWS MAIL SECURITY
SETTINGS — If you cannot open your e-mail attachments:
1 In Outlook Express/Windows Mail, click Tools, click Options, and then
click Security.
2 Click Do not allow attachments to remove the checkmark.
CHECK THE TELEPHONE LINE CONNECTION
CHECK THE TELEPHONE JACK
CONNECT THE MODEM DIRECTLY T O THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK
US E A DIFFERENT TELEPHONE LINE
• Verify that the telephone line is connected to the jack on the modem
(the jack has either a green label or a connector-shaped icon next to it).
• Ensure that you hear a click when you insert the telephone line connector
into the modem.
• Disconnect the telephone line from the modem and connect it to a
telephone, then listen for a dial tone.
• If you have other telephone devices sharing the line, such as an answering
machine, fax machine, surge protector, or line splitter, then bypass them
and connect the modem directly to the telephone wall jack. If you are
using a line that is 3 m (10 ft) or more in length, try a shorter one.
RUN THE MODEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL —
Windows XP
1 Click Start→All Programs→Modem Helper.
2 Follow the instructions on the screen to identify and resolve modem
problems. Modem Helper is not available on certain computers.118 Troubleshooting
Windows Vista
1 Click Start →All Programs→Modem Diagnostic Tool.
2 Follow the instructions on the screen to identify and resolve modem
problems. Modem diagnostics are not available on all computers.
VERIFY THAT THE MODEM I S COMMUNICATING WITH WINDOWS —
Windows XP
1 Click Start→Control Panel→Printers and Other Hardware→Phone and
Modem Options→Modems.
2 Click the COM port for your modem→Properties→ Diagnostics→Query
Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows.
If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly.
Windows Vista
1 Click Start →Control Panel→Hardware and Sound→Phone and
Modem Options→Modems.
2 Click the COM port for your modem→Properties→Diagnostics→Query
Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows.
If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly.
ENSURE THAT YOU ARE CONNECTED T O THE INTERNET — Ensure that you have
subscribed to an Internet service provider. With the Outlook Express/Windows
mail e-mail program open, click File. If Work Offline has a checkmark next to
it, click the checkmark to remove it, and then connect to the Internet. For
help, contact your Internet service provider.
SCAN THE COMPUTER FOR SPYWARE — If you are experiencing slow computer
performance, you frequently receive pop-up advertisements, or you are having
problems connecting to the Internet, your computer might be infected with
spyware. Use an anti-virus program that includes anti-spyware protection
(your program may require an upgrade) to scan the computer and remove
spyware. For more information, go to support.dell.com and search for the
keyword spyware.Troubleshooting 119
Error Messages
Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191 as you complete these checks.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
If the message is not listed, see the documentation for the operating system
or the program that was running when the message appeared.
AUXILIARY DEVICE FAILURE — The touch pad or external mouse may be faulty.
For an external mouse, check the cable connection. Enable the Pointing
Device option in the system setup program (see "Using the System Setup
Program" on page 203). If the problem persists, contact Dell (see "Contacting
Dell" on page 192).
BA D COMMAND O R FILE NAME — Ensure that you have spelled the command
correctly, put spaces in the proper place, and used the correct pathname.
CACHE DISABLED DUE T O FAILURE — The primary cache internal to the
microprocessor has failed. Contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192).
CD DRIVE CONTROLLER FAILURE — The CD drive does not respond to
commands from the computer (see "Drive Problems" on page 114).
DATA ERROR — The hard drive cannot read the data (see "Drive Problems" on
page 114).
DECREASING AVAILABLE MEMORY — One or more memory modules may be
faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary,
replace them (see "Memory" on page 163).
DISK C: FAILED INITIALIZATION — The hard drive failed initialization. Run the
hard drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107).
DRIVE NOT READY — The operation requires a hard drive in the bay before it
can continue. Install a hard drive in the hard drive bay (see "Hard Drive" on
page 156).
ERROR READING PCMCIA CARD — The computer cannot identify the
ExpressCard. Reinsert the card or try another card (see "Using ExpressCards"
on page 87).
EXTENDED MEMORY SIZE HAS CHANGED — The amount of memory recorded in
NVRAM does not match the memory installed in the computer. Restart the
computer. If the error appears again, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on
page 192).120 Troubleshooting
TH E FILE BEING COPIED I S TOO LARGE FOR THE DESTINATION DRIVE — The file
that you are trying to copy is too large to fit on the disk, or the disk is full. Try
copying the file to a different disk or use a larger capacity disk.
A FILENAME CANNOT CONTAIN ANY O F THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERS: \ / : * ? “ <
> | — Do not use these characters in filenames.
GATE A20 FAILURE — A memory module may be loose. Reinstall the memory
modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 163).
GENERAL FAILURE — The operating system is unable to carry out the
command. The message is usually followed by specific information—for
example, Printer out of paper. Take the appropriate action.
HARD-DISK DRIVE CONFIGURATION ERROR — The computer cannot identify the
drive type. Shut down the computer, remove the hard drive (see "Hard Drive"
on page 156), and boot the computer from a CD. Then, shut down the
computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. Run the Hard
Disk Drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107).
HARD-DISK DRIVE CONTROLLER FAILURE 0— The hard drive does not respond
to commands from the computer. Shut down the computer, remove the hard
drive (see "Hard Drive" on page 156), and boot the computer from a CD.
Then, shut down the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the
computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard Disk Drive
tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107).
HARD-DISK DRIVE FAILURE — The hard drive does not respond to commands
from the computer. Shut down the computer, remove the hard drive (see
"Hard Drive" on page 156), and boot the computer from a CD. Then, shut
down the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the
problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard Disk Drive tests in the Dell
Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107).
HARD-DISK DRIVE READ FAILURE — The hard drive may be defective. Shut
down the computer, remove the hard drive (see "Hard Drive" on page 156),
and boot the computer from a CD. Then, shut down the computer, reinstall
the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another
drive. Run the Hard Disk Drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell
Diagnostics" on page 107).
INSERT BOOTABLE MEDIA — The operating system is trying to boot to
nonbootable media, such as a floppy disk or CD. Insert bootable media.Troubleshooting 121
INVALID CONFIGURATION INFORMATION-PLEASE RUN SYSTEM SETUP
PROGRAM — The system configuration information does not match the
hardware configuration. The message is most likely to occur after a memory
module is installed. Correct the appropriate options in the system setup
program (see "Using the System Setup Program" on page 203).
KEYBOARD CLOCK LINE FAILURE — For external keyboards, check the cable
connection. Run the Keyboard Controller test in the Dell Diagnostics (see
"Dell Diagnostics" on page 107).
KEYBOARD CONTROLLER FAILURE — For external keyboards, check the cable
connection. Restart the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or the
mouse during the boot routine. Run the Keyboard Controller test in the Dell
Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107).
KEYBOARD DATA LINE FAILURE — For external keyboards, check the cable
connection. Run the Keyboard Controller test in the Dell Diagnostics (see
"Dell Diagnostics" on page 107).
KEYBOARD STUCK KEY FAILURE — For external keyboards or keypads, check the
cable connection. Restart the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or
keys during the boot routine. Run the Stuck Key test in the Dell Diagnostics
(see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107).
LICENSED CONTENT I S NOT ACCESSIBLE IN DELL MEDIADIRECT — Dell
MediaDirect™ cannot verify the Digital Rights Management (DRM)
restrictions on the file, so the file cannot be played (see "Dell MediaDirect
problems" on page 128).
MEMORY ADDRESS LINE FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE —
A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory
modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 163).
MEMORY ALLOCATION ERROR — The software you are attempting to run is
conflicting with the operating system, another program, or a utility. Shut
down the computer, wait 30 seconds, and then restart it. Try to run the
program again. If the error message still appears, see the software
documentation.
MEMORY DATA LINE FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE — A
memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory
modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 163).122 Troubleshooting
MEMORY DOUBLE WORD LOGIC FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING
VALUE — A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the
memory modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 163).
MEMORY ODD/EVEN LOGIC FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING
VALUE — A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the
memory modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 163).
MEMORY WRITE/READ FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE — A
memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory
modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 163).
NO BOOT DEVICE AVAILABLE — The computer cannot find the hard drive. If
the hard drive is your boot device, ensure that the drive is installed, properly
seated, and partitioned as a boot device.
NO BOOT SECTOR ON HARD DRIVE — The operating system may be corrupted.
Contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192).
NO TIMER TICK INTERRUPT — A chip on the system board may be
malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell
Diagnostics" on page 107).
NO T ENOUGH MEMORY O R RESOURCES. EXIT SOME PROGRAMS AND TRY AGAIN —
You have too many programs open. Close all windows and open the program
that you want to use.
OPERATING SYSTEM NOT FOUND — Reinstall the hard drive (see "Hard Drive"
on page 156). If the problem persists, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on
page 192).
OPTIONAL ROM BAD CHECKSUM — The optional ROM has failed. Contact
Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192).
A REQUIRED .DLL FILE WAS NOT FOUND — The program that you are trying to
open is missing an essential file. Remove and then reinstall the program.
Windows XP
1 Click Start→Control Panel→Add or Remove Programs→Programs and
Features.
2 Select the program you want to remove.
3 Click Uninstall.
4 See the program documentation for installation instructions.Troubleshooting 123
Windows Vista
1 Click Start →Control Panel→Programs→Programs and Features.
2 Select the program you want to remove.
3 Click Uninstall.
4 See the program documentation for installation instructions.
SECTOR NOT FOUND — The operating system cannot locate a sector on the
hard drive. You may have a defective sector or corrupted FAT on the hard drive.
Run the Windows error-checking utility to check the file structure on the
hard drive. See Windows Help and Support for instructions (click Start →
Help and Support). If a large number of sectors are defective, back up the
data (if possible), and then reformat the hard drive.
SEEK ERROR — The operating system cannot find a specific track on the hard
drive.
SHUTDOWN FAILURE — A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning.
Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on
page 107).
TIME-O F-DAY CLOCK LOST POWER — System configuration settings are
corrupted. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the
battery. If the problem persists, try to restore the data by entering the system
setup program, then immediately exit the program (see "Using the System
Setup Program" on page 203). If the message reappears, contact Dell (see
"Contacting Dell" on page 192).
TIME-O F-DAY CLOCK STOPPED — The reserve battery that supports the system
configuration settings may require recharging. Connect your computer to an
electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, contact Dell
(see "Contacting Dell" on page 192).
TIME-O F-DAY NOT SET-PLEASE RUN THE SYSTEM SETUP PROGRAM — The time
or date stored in the system setup program does not match the system clock.
Correct the settings for the Date and Time options (see "Using the System
Setup Program" on page 203).
TIMER CHIP COUNTER 2 FAILED — A chip on the system board may be
malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell
Diagnostics" on page 107).124 Troubleshooting
UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT IN PROTECTED MODE — The keyboard controller may
be malfunctioning, or a memory module may be loose. Run the System
Memory tests and the Keyboard Controller test in the Dell Diagnostics (see
"Dell Diagnostics" on page 107).
X:\ I S NOT ACCESSIBLE. TH E DEVICE I S NOT READY — Insert a disk into the
drive and try again.
WARNING: BATTERY I S CRITICALLY LOW — The battery is running out of
charge. Replace the battery, or connect the computer to an electrical outlet;
otherwise, activate hibernate mode or shut down the computer.
ExpressCard Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CHECK THE EXPRESSCARD — Ensure that the ExpressCard is properly inserted
into the connector.
CHECK THAT THE CARD I S RECOGNIZED B Y WINDOWS — Double-click the Safely
Remove Hardware icon in the Windows taskbar. Some cards do not support
this feature. If the card supports this Windows feature, the card will be listed.
IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS WITH A DELL-PROVIDED EXPRESSCARD — Contact Dell
(see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). Also, for Mobile Broadband (WWAN)
ExpressCards, see "Mobile Broadband (Wireless Wide Area Network
[WWAN])" on page 131.
IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS WITH AN EXPRESSCARD NOT PROVIDED B Y DELL —
Contact the ExpressCard manufacturer.
IEEE 1394 Device Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
ENSURE THAT THE IEEE 1394 DEVICE I S RECOGNIZED B Y WINDOWS —
Windows XP
Click Start and click Control Panel.
1 Under Pick a Category, click Performance and Maintenance→System→
System Properties→Hardware→Device Manager.Troubleshooting 125
Windows Vista
1 Click Start →Control Panel→Hardware and Sound.
2 Click Device Manager.
If your IEEE 1394 device is listed, Windows recognizes the device.
IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS WITH A DELL-PROVIDED IEEE 1394 DEVICE — Contact
Dell or the IEEE 1394 device manufacturer(see "Contacting Dell" on page 192).
IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS WITH AN IEEE 1394 DEVICE NOT PROVIDED B Y DELL —
Contact Dell or the IEEE 1394 device manufacturer(see "Contacting Dell" on
page 192).
Ensure that the IEEE 1394 device is properly inserted into the connector.
Keyboard Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191 as you perform the various
checks.
NOTE: Use the integrated keyboard when running the Dell Diagnostics or the
system setup program. When you attach an external keyboard, the integrated
keyboard remains fully functional.
External Keyboard problems
NOTE: When you attach an external keyboard, the integrated keyboard remains
fully functional.
CHECK THE KEYBOARD CABLE — Shut down the computer, disconnect the
keyboard cable and check it for damage, then firmly reconnect the cable.
If you are using a keyboard extension cable, disconnect it and connect the
keyboard directly to the computer.
CHECK THE EXTERNAL KEYBOARD —
1 Shut down the computer, wait 1 minute, and then turn it on again.
2 Verify that the numbers, capitals, and scroll lock lights on the keyboard
blink during the boot routine.126 Troubleshooting
3 From the Windows desktop, click Start →All Programs→
Accessories→Notepad.
4 Type some characters on the external keyboard and verify that they appear
on the display.
If you cannot verify these steps, you may have a defective external
keyboard.
TO VERIFY THAT THE PROBLEM I S WITH THE EXTERNAL KEYBOARD, CHECK THE
INTEGRATED KEYBOARD —
1 Shut down the computer.
2 Disconnect the external keyboard.
3 Turn on the computer.
4 From the Windows desktop, click Start →All Programs→
Accessories→Notepad.
5 Type some characters on the internal keyboard and verify that they appear
on the display.
If the characters appear now, but did not with the external keyboard, you
may have a defective external keyboard. Contact Dell (see "Contacting
Dell" on page 192).
RUN THE KEYBOARD DIAGNOSTICS TESTS — Run the PC-AT Compatible
Keyboards tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107).
If the tests indicate a defective external keyboard, contact Dell (see
"Contacting Dell" on page 192).
Unexpected characters
DISABLE THE NUMERIC KEYPAD — Press to disable the numeric
keypad if numbers are displayed instead of letters. Verify that the numbers
lock light is not lit.Troubleshooting 127
Lockups and Software Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
The computer does not start
CHECK THE A C ADAPTER — Ensure that the AC adapter is firmly connected to
the computer and to the electrical outlet.
The computer stops responding
NOTICE: You might lose data if you are unable to perform an operating system
shutdown.
TURN THE COMPUTER OFF — If you are unable to get a response by pressing a
key on your keyboard or moving your mouse, press and hold the power button
for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer turns off, then restart your
computer.
A program stops responding or crashes repeatedly
EN D THE PROGRAM —
1 Press simultaneously.
2 Click the Applications tab and select the program that is no longer
responding.
3 Click End Task.
NOTE: The chkdsk program may run when you restart the computer. Follow the
instructions on the screen.
CHECK THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION — If necessary, uninstall and then
reinstall the program. Software usually includes installation instructions in its
documentation or on a floppy disk or CD.
A program is designed for an earlier Microsoft® Windows®
operating system
RUN THE PROGRAM COMPATIBILITY WIZARD
Windows XP
The Program Compatibility Wizard configures a program so that it runs in an
environment similar to non-XP operating system environments.128 Troubleshooting
1 Click Start→All Programs→ Accessories→Program Compatibility
Wizard→Next.
2 Follow the instructions on the screen.
Windows Vista
The Program Compatibility Wizard configures a program so that it runs in an
environment similar to non-Windows Vista operating system environments.
1 Click Start →Control Panel→Programs→Use an older program
with this version of Windows.
2 In the welcome screen, click Next.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
A solid blue screen appears
TURN THE COMPUTER OFF — If you are unable to get a response by pressing a
key on your keyboard or moving your mouse, press and hold the power button
for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer turns off, then restart your
computer.
Dell MediaDirect problems
CHECK THE DELL MEDIADIRECT HELP FILE FOR INFORMATION — Use the Help
menu to access Dell MediaDirect Help.
TO PLAY MOVIES WITH DELL MEDIADIRECT, YOU MUST HAVE A DVD DRIVE AND
THE DELL DVD PLAYER — If you purchased a DVD drive with your computer,
this software should already be installed.
VIDEO QUALITY PROBLEMS — Turn off the Use Hardware Acceleration option.
This feature takes advantage of the special processing in some graphics cards
to reduce processor requirements when playing DVDs and certain types of
video files.
CANNOT PLAY SOME MEDIA FILES — Because Dell MediaDirect provides access
to media files outside the Windows operating system environment, access to
licensed content is restricted. Licensed content is digital content that has
Digital Rights Management (DRM) applied to it. The Dell MediaDirect
environment cannot verify the DRM restrictions, so the licensed files cannot
be played. Licensed music and video files have a lock icon next to them. You
can access licensed files in the Windows operating system environment. Troubleshooting 129
ADJUSTING THE COLOR SETTINGS FOR MOVIES THAT CONTAIN SCENES THAT ARE
TOO DARK O R TOO BRIGHT — Click EagleVision to use a video enhancement
technology that detects video content and dynamically adjusts the
brightness/contrast/saturation ratios.
NOTICE: You cannot reinstall the Dell MediaDirect feature if you voluntarily
reformat the hard drive. Contact Dell for assistance (see "Contacting Dell" on
page 192).
Other software problems
CHECK THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION O R CONTACT THE SOFTWARE
MANUFACTURER FOR TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION —
• Ensure that the program is compatible with the operating system installed
on your computer.
• Ensure that your computer meets the minimum hardware requirements
needed to run the software. See the software documentation for
information.
• Ensure that the program is installed and configured properly.
• Verify that the device drivers do not conflict with the program.
• If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program.
BACK U P YOUR FILES IMMEDIATELY
US E A VIRUS-SCANNING PROGRAM T O CHECK THE HARD DRIVE, FLOPPY DISKS,
O R CDS
SAVE AND CLOSE ANY OPEN FILES O R PROGRAMS AND SHUT DOWN YOUR
COMPUTER THROUGH THE START MENU
SCAN THE COMPUTER FOR SPYWARE — If you are experiencing slow computer
performance, you frequently receive pop-up advertisements, or you are having
problems connecting to the Internet, your computer might be infected with
spyware. Use an anti-virus program that includes anti-spyware protection
(your program may require an upgrade) to scan the computer and remove
spyware. For more information, go to support.dell.com and search for the
keyword spyware.
RUN THE DELL DIAGNOSTICS — If all tests run successfully, the error condition
is related to a software problem (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107).130 Troubleshooting
Memory Problems
Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191 as you complete these checks.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
IF YOU RECEIVE AN INSUFFICIENT MEMORY MESSAGE —
• Save and close any open files and exit any open programs you are not using
to see if that resolves the problem.
• See the software documentation for minimum memory requirements. If
necessary, install additional memory (see "Memory" on page 163).
• Reseat the memory modules to ensure that your computer is successfully
communicating with the memory (see "Memory" on page 163).
• Run the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107).
IF YOU EXPERIENCE OTHER MEMORY PROBLEMS —
• Reseat the memory modules to ensure that your computer is successfully
communicating with the memory (see "Memory" on page 163).
• Ensure that you are following the memory installation guidelines (see
"Memory" on page 163).
• Run the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107). Troubleshooting 131
Network Problems
Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191 as you complete these
checks.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CHECK THE NETWORK CABLE CONNECTOR — Ensure that the network cable is
firmly inserted into both the network connector on the back of the computer
and the network jack.
CHECK THE NETWORK LIGHTS ON THE NETWORK CONNECTOR — No light
indicates that no network communication exists. Replace the network cable.
RESTART THE COMPUTER AND LOG ON T O THE NETWORK AGAIN
CHECK YOUR NETWORK SETTINGS — Contact your network administrator or
the person who set up your network to verify that your network settings are
correct and that the network is functioning.
Mobile Broadband (Wireless Wide Area Network [WWAN])
NOTE: The Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility user’s guide and the Mobile
Broadband ExpressCard user’s guide are available through Windows Help and
Support (click Start →Help and Support). You can also download the Dell
Mobile Broadband Card Utility user’s guide from support.dell.com.
NOTE: The icon appears in the notification area if the computer has a Dell
WWAN device installed. Double-click the icon to launch the utility.
ACTIVATE THE MOBILE BROADBAND EXPRESSCARD — You must activate the
Mobile Broadband ExpressCard before you can connect to the network.
Position the mouse over the icon in the notification area to verify the
status of the connection. If the card is not activated, follow the card
activation instructions located within the Dell Mobile Broadband Card
Utility. To access the utility, double-click the icon located in the taskbar,
at the lower-right corner of your screen. If your ExpressCard is not a Dellbranded card, see the manufacturer’s instructions for your card.132 Troubleshooting
CHECK NETWORK CONNECTION STATUS IN THE DELL MOBILE BROADBAND CARD
UTILITY — Double-click the icon to launch the Dell Mobile Broadband
Card Utility. Check the status in the main window:
• No card detected — Restart the computer, and launch the Dell Mobile
Broadband Card Utility again.
• Check your WWAN service — Contact your cellular service provider to
verify your plan coverage and supported services.
Power Problems
Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191 as you complete these checks.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CHECK THE POWER LIGHT — When the power light is lit or blinking, the
computer has power. If the power light is blinking, the computer is in Sleep
state—press the power button to exit Sleep state. If the light is off, press the
power button to turn on the computer.
NOTE: For information on Sleep power state, see "Standby and Sleep Mode" on
page 56.
CHARGE THE BATTERY — The battery charge may be depleted.
1 Reinstall the battery.
2 Use the AC adapter to connect the computer to an electrical outlet.
3 Turn on the computer.
NOTE: Battery operating time (the time the battery can hold a charge) decreases
over time. Depending on how often the battery is used and the conditions under
which it is used, you may need to purchase a new battery during the life of your
computer.
CHECK THE BATTERY STATUS LIGHT — If the battery status light flashes amber
or is a steady amber, the battery charge is low or depleted. Connect the
computer to an electrical outlet.
If the battery status light flashes blue and amber, the battery is too hot to
charge. Shut down the computer, disconnect the computer from the electrical
outlet, and then let the battery and computer cool to room temperature.
If the battery status light rapidly flashes amber, the battery may be defective.
Contact Dell(see "Contacting Dell" on page 192).Troubleshooting 133
CHECK THE BATTERY TEMPERATURE — If the battery temperature is below
0°C (32°F), the computer will not start.
TEST THE ELECTRICAL OUTLET — Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by
testing it with another device, such as a lamp.
CHECK THE AC ADAPTER — Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the
AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on.
CONNECT THE COMPUTER DIRECTLY T O AN ELECTRICAL OUTLET — Bypass power
protection devices, power strips, and extension cables to verify that the
computer turns on.
ELIMINATE POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE — Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights,
halogen lamps, or other appliances.
ADJUST THE POWER PROPERTIES — See "Power Management Modes" on
page 56.
RESEAT THE MEMORY MODULES — If the computer power light turns on, but
the display remains blank, reinstall the memory modules (see "Memory" on
page 163).
Printer Problems
Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191 as you complete these checks.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTE: If you need technical assistance for your printer, contact the printer’s
manufacturer.
CHECK THE PRINTER DOCUMENTATION — See the printer documentation for
setup and troubleshooting information.
ENSURE THAT THE PRINTER I S TURNED ON
CHECK THE PRINTER CABLE CONNECTIONS —
• See the printer documentation for cable connection information.
• Ensure that the printer cables are securely connected to the printer and
the computer.
TEST THE ELECTRICAL OUTLET — Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by
testing it with another device, such as a lamp.134 Troubleshooting
VERIFY THAT THE PRINTER I S RECOGNIZED B Y WINDOWS —
Windows XP
1 Click Start→Control Panel→Printers and Other Hardware→
View installed printers or fax printers.
2 If the printer is listed, right-click the printer icon.
3 Click Properties→Ports. For a parallel printer, ensure that the Print to the
following port(s): setting is LPT1 (Printer Port). For a USB printer, ensure
that the Print to the following port(s): setting is USB.
Windows Vista
1 Click Start →Control Panel→Hardware and Sound→Printer.
2 If the printer is listed, right-click the printer icon.
3 Click Properties and click Ports.
4 Adjust the settings, as needed.
REINSTALL THE PRINTER DRIVER — See the printer documentation for
instructions.
Scanner Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTE: If you need technical assistance for your scanner, contact the scanner’s
manufacturer.
CHECK THE SCANNER DOCUMENTATION — See the scanner documentation for
setup and troubleshooting information.
UNLOCK THE SCANNER — Ensure that your scanner is unlocked.
RESTART THE COMPUTER AND TRY THE SCANNER AGAIN
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS —
• See the scanner documentation for cable connection information.
• Ensure that the scanner cables are securely connected to the scanner and
the computer.Troubleshooting 135
VERIFY THAT THE SCANNER I S RECOGNIZED B Y MICROSOFT WINDOWS —
Windows XP
1 Click Start→Control Panel→Printers and Other Hardware→Scanners
and Cameras.
2 If your scanner is listed, Windows recognizes the scanner.
Windows Vista
1 Click Start →Control Panel→Hardware and Sound→Scanners and
Cameras.
2 If the scanner is listed, Windows recognizes the scanner.
REINSTALL THE SCANNER DRIVER — See the scanner documentation for
instructions.
Sound and Speaker Problems
Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191 as you complete these checks.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
No sound from integrated speakers
ADJUST THE WINDOWS VOLUME CONTROL — Double-click the speaker icon in
the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and
that the sound is not muted. Adjust the volume, bass, or treble controls to
eliminate distortion.
ADJUST THE VOLUME USING KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS — Press to
disable (mute) or re-enable the integrated speakers.
REINSTALL THE SOUND (AUDIO) DRIVER — See "Reinstalling Drivers and
Utilities" on page 140.
No sound from external speakers
ENSURE THAT THE SUBWOOFER AND THE SPEAKERS ARE TURNED ON — See the
setup diagram supplied with the speakers. If your speakers have volume
controls, adjust the volume, bass, or treble to eliminate distortion.
ADJUST THE WINDOWS VOLUME CONTROL — Click or double-click the speaker
icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned
up and that the sound is not muted.136 Troubleshooting
DISCONNECT HEADPHONES FROM THE HEADPHONE CONNECTOR — Sound from
the speakers is automatically disabled when headphones are connected to the
headphone connector.
TEST THE ELECTRICAL OUTLET — Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by
testing it with another device, such as a lamp.
ELIMINATE POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE — Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights,
or halogen lamps to check for interference.
REINSTALL THE AUDIO DRIVER — See "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on
page 140.
RUN THE DELL DIAGNOSTICS — See "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107.
NOTE: The volume control in some MP3 players overrides the Windows volume
setting. If you have been listening to MP3 songs, ensure that you did not turn the
player volume down or off.
No sound from headphones
CHECK THE HEADPHONE CABLE CONNECTION — Ensure that the headphone
cable is securely inserted into the headphone connector (see "audio
connectors" on page 28).
ADJUST THE WINDOWS VOLUME CONTROL — Click or double-click the speaker
icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned
up and that the sound is not muted.
Touch Pad or Mouse Problems
CHECK THE TOUCH PAD SETTINGS —
Windows XP
1 Click Start→Control Panel→Printers and Other Hardware→Mouse.
2 Try adjusting the settings.
Windows Vista
1 Click Start →Control Panel→Hardware and Sound→Mouse.
2 Adjust the settings, as needed.Troubleshooting 137
CHECK THE MOUSE CABLE — Shut down the computer, disconnect the mouse
cable and check it for damage, then firmly reconnect the cable.
If you are using a mouse extension cable, disconnect it and connect the
mouse directly to the computer.
TO VERIFY THAT THE PROBLEM I S WITH THE MOUSE, CHECK THE TOUCH PAD —
1 Shut down the computer.
2 Disconnect the mouse.
3 Turn on the computer.
4 At the Windowsdesktop, use the touch pad to move the cursor around,
select an icon, and open it.
If the touch pad operates correctly, the mouse may be defective.
CHECK THE SYSTEM SETUP PROGRAM SETTINGS — Verify that the system setup
program lists the correct device for the pointing device option (the computer
automatically recognizes a USB mouse without making any setting
adjustments).
TEST THE MOUSE CONTROLLER — To test the mouse controller (which affects
pointer movement) and the operation of the touch pad or mouse buttons,
run the Mouse test in the Pointing Devices test group in the "Dell
Diagnostics" on page 107.
REINSTALL THE TOUCH PAD DRIVER — See "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities"
on page 140.
Video and Display Problems
Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191 as you complete these checks.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
If the display is blank
NOTE: If you are using a program that requires a higher resolution than your
computer supports, it is recommended that you attach an external monitor to your
computer.138 Troubleshooting
CHECK THE BATTERY — If you are using a battery to power your computer, the
battery charge may be depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet
using the AC adapter, and then turn on the computer.
TEST THE ELECTRICAL OUTLET — Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by
testing it with another device, such as a lamp.
CHECK THE AC ADAPTER — Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the
AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on.
CONNECT THE COMPUTER DIRECTLY T O AN ELECTRICAL OUTLET — Bypass power
protection devices, power strips, and extension cables to verify that the
computer turns on.
ADJUST THE POWER PROPERTIES — Search for the keyword sleep in Windows
Help and Support.
SWITCH THE VIDEO IMAGE — If your computer is attached to an external
monitor, press to switch the video image to the display.
If the display is difficult to read
ADJUST THE BRIGHTNESS — Press and the up- or down-arrow key.
MOVE THE EXTERNAL SUBWOOFER AWAY FROM THE COMPUTER O R MONITOR — If
your external speaker system includes a subwoofer, ensure that the subwoofer
is at least 60 cm (2 ft) away from the computer or external monitor.
ELIMINATE POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE — Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights,
halogen lamps, or other appliances.
ROTATE THE COMPUTER T O FACE A DIFFERENT DIRECTION — Eliminate sunlight
glare, which can cause poor picture quality.
ADJUST THE WINDOWS DISPLAY SETTINGS —
Windows XP
1 Click Start→Control Panel→Appearance and Themes.
2 Click the area you want to change or click the Display icon.
3 Try different settings for Color quality and Screen resolution.
Windows Vista
1 Click Start →Control Panel→Hardware and Sound→
Personalization→Display Settings.
2 Adjust Resolution and Colors settings, as needed.Troubleshooting 139
RUN THE VIDEO DIAGNOSTICS TESTS — If no error message appears and you
still have a display problem, but the display is not completely blank, run the
Video device group in the "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107, then contact Dell
(see "Contacting Dell" on page 192).
SE E "ERROR MESSAGES" — If an error message appears, see "Error Messages"
on page 119.
If only part of the display is readable
CONNECT AN EXTERNAL MONITOR —
1 Shut down your computer and connect an external monitor to the computer.
2 Turn on the computer and the monitor, and then adjust the monitor
brightness and contrast controls.
If the external monitor works, the computer display or video controller
may be defective. Contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192).
Drivers
What Is a Driver?
A driver is a program that controls a device such as a printer, mouse, or
keyboard. All devices require a driver program.
A driver acts like a translator between the device and any other programs that
use the device. Each device has its own set of specialized commands that only
its driver recognizes.
Dell ships your computer to you with required drivers already installed—no
further installation or configuration is needed.
NOTICE: Your Drivers and Utilities media may contain drivers for operating systems
that are not on your computer. Ensure that you are installing software appropriate
for your operating system.
Many drivers, such as the keyboard driver, come with your Microsoft® Windows®
operating system. You may need to install drivers if you:
• Upgrade your operating system.
• Reinstall your operating system.
• Connect or install a new device.140 Troubleshooting
Identifying Drivers
If you experience a problem with any device, identify whether the driver is the
source of your problem and, if necessary, update the driver.
Windows XP
1 Click Start→Control Panel.
2 Under Pick a Category, click Performance and Maintenance, and click System.
3 In the System Properties window, click the Hardware tab, and click
Device Manager.
Windows Vista
1 Click the Windows Vista start button , and right-click Computer.
2 Click Properties→Device Manager.
NOTE: The User Account Control window may appear. If you are an
administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your
administrator to continue.
NOTE: Scroll down the list of devices and check for an exclamation point (a circle
with a [!]) next to the device name. If an exclamation point is next to the device
name, you may need to reinstall the driver or install a new driver (see "Reinstalling
Drivers and Utilities" on page 140).
Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities
NOTICE: The Dell Support website at support.dell.com and your Drivers and
Utilities media provide approved drivers for Dell computers. If you install drivers
obtained from other sources, your computer might not work correctly.
Using Windows Device Driver Rollback
If a problem occurs on your computer after you install or update a driver, use
Windows Device Driver Rollback to replace the driver with the previously
installed version.
Windows XP
1 Click Start→My Computer→Properties→Hardware→Device Manager.
2 Right-click the device for which the new driver was installed and click Properties.
3 Click the Drivers tab→Roll Back Driver.Troubleshooting 141
Windows Vista
1 Click the Windows Vista start button , and right-click Computer.
2 Click Properties→Device Manager.
NOTE: The User Account Control window may appear. If you are an
administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your
administrator to enter the Device Manager.
3 Right-click the device for which the new driver was installed and click
Properties.
4 Click the Drivers tab→Roll Back Driver.
If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, use System Restore
(see "Restoring Your Operating System" on page 144) to return your computer
to the operating state that existed before you installed the new driver.
Using the Drivers and Utilities Media
If using Device Driver Rollback or System Restore (see "Restoring Your
Operating System" on page 144) does not resolve the problem, reinstall the
driver from your Drivers and Utilities media.
1 With the Windows desktop displayed, insert your Drivers and Utilities media.
If this is your first time to use your Drivers and Utilities media, continue
to step 2. If not, proceed to step 5.
2 When the Drivers and Utilitiesinstallation program starts, follow the
prompts on the screen.
NOTE: In most cases, the Drivers and Utilities program starts running
automatically. If it does not, start Windows Explorer, click your media drive
directory to display the media contents, and then double-click the autorcd.exe file.
3 When the InstallShield Wizard Complete window appears, remove the
Drivers and Utilities disc and click Finish to restart the computer.
4 When you see the Windows desktop, reinsert the Drivers and Utilities disc.142 Troubleshooting
5 At the Welcome Dell System Owner screen, click Next.
NOTE: The Drivers and Utilities program displays drivers only for hardware
that came installed in your computer. If you installed additional hardware, the
drivers for the new hardware might not be displayed. If those drivers are not
displayed, exit the Drivers and Utilities program. For drivers information, see
the documentation that came with the device.
A message stating that the Drivers and Utilities program is detecting
hardware in your computer appears.
The drivers that are used by your computer are automatically displayed in
the My Drivers—The ResourceCD has identified these components in
your system window.
6 Click the driver that you want to reinstall and follow the instructions on
the screen.
If a particular driver is not listed, then that driver is not required by your
operating system.
Manually Reinstalling Drivers
NOTE: If your computer has a Consumer IR port and you are reinstalling a
Consumer IR driver, you must first enable the Consumer IR port in the system setup
program (see "Using the System Setup Program" on page 203) before continuing
with the driver installation (see "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 140).
For information about components installed on your computer, see "Determining
Your Computer’s Configuration" on page 21.
After extracting the driver files to your hard drive, as described in the
previous section:
Windows XP
1 Click Start→ My Computer→Properties→Hardware→Device Manager.
2 Double-click the type of device for which you are installing the driver (for
example, Audio or Video).
3 Double-click the name of the device for which you are installing the driver.
4 Click the Driver tab→Update Driver.
5 Click Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)→Next.Troubleshooting 143
6 Click Browse and browse to the location to which you previously copied
the driver files.
7 When the name of the appropriate driver appears, click Next.
8 Click Finish and restart your computer.
Windows Vista
1 Click the Windows Vista start button , and right-click Computer.
2 Click Properties→Device Manager.
NOTE: The User Account Control window may appear. If you are an
administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your
administrator to enter the Device Manager.
3 Double-click the type of device for which you are installing the driver (for
example, Audio or Video).
4 Double-click the name of the device for which you are installing the driver.
5 Click the Driver tab→Update Driver→ Browse my computer for driver
software.
6 Click Browse and browse to the location to which you previously copied
the driver files.
7 When the name of the appropriate driver appears, click the name of the
driver→OK→Next.
8 Click Finish and restart your computer.
Troubleshooting Software and Hardware
Problems in the Microsoft® Windows® XP and
Microsoft Windows Vista® Operating Systems
If a device is either not detected during the operating system setup or is
detected but incorrectly configured, use Windows Vista Help and Support to
resolve the incompatibility:
If a device is either not detected during the operating system setup or is
detected but incorrectly configured, you can use the Hardware
Troubleshooter to resolve the incompatibility.144 Troubleshooting
To start the Hardware Troubleshooter:
Windows XP
1 Click Start→Help and Support.
2 Type hardware troubleshooter in the search field and press
to start the search.
3 In the Fix a Problem section, click Hardware Troubleshooter.
4 In the Hardware Troubleshooter list, select the option that best describes
the problem and click Next to follow the remaining troubleshooting steps.
Windows Vista
1 Click the Windows Vista start button , and click Help and Support.
2 Type hardware troubleshooter in the search field and press
to start the search.
3 In the search results, select the option that best describes the problem and
follow the remaining troubleshooting steps.
Restoring Your Operating System
You can restore your operating system in the following ways:
• Microsoft Windows Vista System Restore returns your computer to an earlier
operating state without affecting data files. Use System Restore as the first
solution for restoring your operating system and preserving data files. For
instructions, see "Using MicrosoftWindows System Restore" on page 145.
• Dell PC Restore by Symantec (available in Windows XP) and Dell Factory
Image Restore (available in Windows Vista) returns your hard drive to the
operating state it was in when you purchased the computer. Both
permanently delete all data on the hard drive and remove any programs
installed after you received the computer. Use Dell PC Restore or Dell
Factory Image Restore only if System Restore did not resolve your
operating system problem.
• If you received Operating System media with your computer, you can use it
to restore your operating system. However, using the Operating System
media also deletes all data on the hard drive. Use the media only if System
Restore did not resolve your operating system problem. For instructions,
see "Using the Operating System Media" on page 150.Troubleshooting 145
Using MicrosoftWindows System Restore
The Windows operating system provides System Restore to allow you to
return your computer to an earlier operating state (without affecting data
files) if changes to the hardware, software, or other system settings have left
the computer in an undesirable operating state. Any changes that System
Restore makes to your computer are completely reversible.
NOTICE: Make regular backups of your data files. System Restore does not
monitor your data files or recover them.
NOTE: The procedures in this document were written for the Windows default view,
so they may not apply if you set your Dell computer to the Windows Classic view.
1 Click Start →Help and Support.
2 Type System Restore in the search field, then press .
NOTE: The User Account Control window may appear. If you are an
administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your
administrator to continue the desired action.
3 Click Next and follow the remaining prompts on the screen.
In the event that System Restore did not resolve the issue, you may undo the
last system restore.
Starting System Restore
Windows XP
NOTICE: Before you restore the computer to an earlier operating state, save and
close any open files and exit any open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any
files or programs until the system restoration is complete.
1 Click Start→All Programs→Accessories→System Tools→System Restore.
2 Click either Restore my computer to an earlier time or Create a restore point.
3 Click Next and follow the remaining on-screen prompts.146 Troubleshooting
Windows Vista
1 Click Start .
2 In the Start Search box, type System Restore and press .
NOTE: The User Account Control window may appear. If you are an
administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your
administrator to continue the desired action.
3 Click Next and follow the remaining prompts on the screen.
In the event that System Restore did not resolve the issue, you may undo the
last system restore.
Undoing the Last System Restore
NOTICE: Before you undo the last system restore, save and close all open files and
exit any open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the
system restoration is complete.
Windows XP
1 Click Start→All Programs→ Accessories→ System Tools→System Restore.
2 Click Undo my last restoration and click Next.
Windows Vista
1 Click Start .
2 In the Start Search box, type System Restore and press .
3 Click Undo my last restoration and click Next.
Enabling System Restore
NOTE: Windows Vista does not disable System Restore; regardless of low disk
space. Therefore, the steps below apply only to Windows XP.
If you reinstall Windows XP with less than 200 MB of free hard-disk space
available, System Restore is automatically disabled.
To see if System Restore is enabled:
1 Click Start→Control Panel→Performance and Maintenance→System.
2 Click the System Restore tab and ensure that Turn off System Restore is
unchecked.Troubleshooting 147
Using Dell™ PC Restore and Dell Factory Image Restore
NOTICE: Using Dell PC Restore or Dell Factory Image Restore permanently deletes
all data on the hard drive and removes any programs or drivers installed after you
received your computer. If possible, back up the data before using these options.
Use PC Restore or Dell Factory Image Restore only if System Restore did not resolve
your operating system problem.
NOTE: Dell PC Restore by Symantec and Dell Factory Image Restore may not be
available in certain countries or on certain computers.
Use Dell PC Restore (Windows XP) or Dell Factory Image Restore
(Windows Vista) only as the last method to restore your operating system.
These options restore your hard drive to the operating state it was in when you
purchased the computer. Any programs or files added since you received your
computer—including data files—are permanently deleted from the hard drive.
Data files include documents, spreadsheets, e-mail messages, digital photos,
music files, and so on. If possible, back up all data before using PC Restore or
Factory Image Restore.
Dell PC Restore
Using PC Restore:
1 Turn on the computer.
During the boot process, a blue bar with www.dell.com appears at the top
of the screen.
2 Immediately upon seeing the blue bar, press .
If you do not press in time, let the computer finish
starting, and then restart the computer again.
NOTICE: If you do not want to proceed with PC Restore, click Reboot.
3 Click Restore and click Confirm.
The restore process takes approximately 6 to 10 minutes to complete.
4 When prompted, click Finish to reboot the computer.
NOTE: Do not manually shut down the computer. Click Finish and let the computer
completely reboot.148 Troubleshooting
5 When prompted, click Yes.
The computer restarts. Because the computer is restored to its original
operating state, the screens that appear, such as the End User License
Agreement, are the same ones that appeared the first time the computer
was turned on.
6 Click Next.
The System Restore screen appears and the computer restarts.
7 After the computer restarts, click OK.
Removing PC Restore:
NOTICE: Removing Dell PC Restore from the hard drive permanently deletes the PC
Restore utility from your computer. After you have removed Dell PC Restore, you will
not be able to use it to restore your computer operating system.
Dell PC Restore enables you to restore your hard drive to the operating state
it was in when you purchased your computer. It is recommended that you do
not remove PC Restore from your computer, even to gain additional hard-drive
space. If you remove PC Restore from the hard drive, you cannot ever recall it,
and you will never be able to use PC Restore to return your computer
operating system to its original state.
1 Log on to the computer as a local administrator.
2 In Microsoft Windows Explorer, go to c:\dell\utilities\DSR.
3 Double-click the filename DSRIRRemv2.exe.
NOTE: If you do not log on as a local administrator, a message appears
stating that you must log on as administrator. Click Quit, and then log on as a
local administrator.
NOTE: If the partition for PC Restore does not exist on your computer hard
drive, a message appears stating that the partition was not found. Click Quit;
there is no partition to delete.
4 Click OK to remove the PC Restore partition on the hard drive.
5 Click Yes when a confirmation message appears.
The PC Restore partition is deleted and the newly available disk space is
added to the free space allocation on the hard drive. Troubleshooting 149
6 Right-click Local Disk (C) in Windows Explorer, click Properties, and
verify that the additional disk space is available as indicated by the
increased value for Free Space.
7 Click Finish to close the PC Restore Removal window and restart the
computer.
Windows Vista: Dell Factory Image Restore
1 Turn on the computer. When the Dell logo appears, press several
times to access the Vista Advanced Boot Options Window.
2 Select Repair Your Computer.
The System Recovery Options window appears.
3 Select a keyboard layout and click Next.
4 To access the recovery options, log on as a local user. To access the
command prompt, type administrator in the User name field, then
click OK.
5 Click Dell Factory Image Restore.
NOTE: Depending upon your configuration, you may need to select
Dell Factory Tools, then Dell Factory Image Restore.
The Dell Factory Image Restore welcome screen appears.
6 Click Next.
The Confirm Data Deletion screen appears.
NOTICE: If you do not want to proceed with Factory Image Restore, click Cancel.
7 Click the checkbox to confirm that you want to continue reformatting the
hard drive and restoring the system software to the factory condition, then
click Next.
The restore process begins and may take five or more minutes to complete.
A message appears when the operating system and factory-installed
applications have been restored to factory condition.
8 Click Finish to reboot the system.150 Troubleshooting
Using the Operating System Media
Before You Begin
If you are considering reinstalling the Windows operating system to correct a
problem with a newly installed driver, first try using Windows Device Driver
Rollback (see "Using Windows Device Driver Rollback" on page 140).
If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, then use System
Restore to return your operating system to the operating state it was in before
you installed the new device driver (see "Using MicrosoftWindows System
Restore" on page 145).
NOTICE: Before performing the installation, back up all data files on your primary
hard drive. For conventional hard drive configurations, the primary hard drive is the
first drive detected by the computer.
To reinstall Windows, you need the following items:
• Dell Operating System media
• Dell Drivers and Utilities media
NOTE: Your Drivers and Utilities media contains drivers that were installed during
assembly of the computer. Use your Drivers and Utilities media to load any required
drivers, including the drivers required if your computer has a RAID controller.
Reinstalling Windows XP or Windows Vista
The reinstallation process can take 1 to 2 hours to complete. After you
reinstall the operating system, you must also reinstall the device drivers, virus
protection program, and other software.
NOTICE: The Operating System media provides options for reinstalling
Windows XP. The options can overwrite files and possibly affect programs that are
installed on your hard drive. Therefore, do not reinstall Windows XP unless a Dell
technical support representative instructs you to do so.
1 Save and close any open files and exit any open programs.
2 Insert the Operating System disc.
3 Click Exit if the Install Windows message appears.Troubleshooting 151
4 Restart the computer.
When the DELL logo appears, press immediately.
NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue
to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop; then, shut down your
computer and try again.
NOTE: The next steps change the boot sequence for one time only. On the
next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in the
system setup program.
5 When the boot device list appears, highlight CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive
and press .
6 Press any key to Boot from CD-ROM.
7 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation.152 TroubleshootingAdding and Replacing Parts 153
Adding and Replacing Parts
Before You Begin
This chapter provides procedures for removing and installing the components
in your computer. Unless otherwise noted, each procedure assumes that the
following conditions exist:
• You have performed the steps in "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 154
and "Before Working Inside Your Computer" on page 154.
• You have read the safety information in your Dell Product Information Guide.
• A component can be replaced—or if purchased separately—installed by
performing the removal procedure in reverse order.
Recommended Tools
The procedures in this document may require the following tools:
• Small flat-blade screwdriver
• Phillips screwdriver
• Small plastic scribe
• Flash BIOS update (see the Dell Support website at support.dell.com)154 Adding and Replacing Parts
Turning Off Your Computer
NOTICE: To avoid losing data, save and close any open files and exit any open
programs before you turn off your computer.
1 Save and close all open files and exit all open programs.
2 Shut down the operating system:
Windows® XP:
Click Start→Shut Down→Shut down.
Windows Vista®:
Click the Windows Vista Start button , click the arrow in the
lower-right corner of the Start menu as shown below, and then click
Shut Down.
The computer turns off after the operating system shutdown process
is complete.
3 Ensure that the computer and all attached devices are turned off. If your
computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you
shut down your operating system, press and hold the power button for
about 4 seconds to turn them off.
Before Working Inside Your Computer
Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from
potential damage and to help ensure your own personal safety.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components
or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket.
Hold a component such as a processor by its edges, not by its pins.
NOTICE: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your
computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by
your warranty.Adding and Replacing Parts 155
NOTICE: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain-relief
loop, not on the cable itself. Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you
are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you
disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to
avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that
both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned.
NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist
grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a
connector on the back of the computer).
NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the computer, perform the following steps
before you begin working inside the computer.
1 Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent the computer
cover from being scratched.
2 Turn off your computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 154).
NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer,
and then unplug it from the network wall jack.
3 Disconnect any telephone or network cables from the computer.
4 Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical
outlets.
NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the system board, you must remove the battery
from the battery bay before you service the computer.
NOTE: To avoid damage to the computer, use only the battery designed for this
particular Dell computer. Do not use batteries designed for other Dell computers.
5 Turn the computer over.
6 Slide and click the battery release latches.
7 Slide the battery out of the battery bay.156 Adding and Replacing Parts
8 Turn the computer top-side up, open the display, and press the power
button to ground the system board.
9 Remove any installed cards from the ExpressCard slot (see "Removing an
ExpressCard or Blank" on page 89) and the 8-in-1 memory card reader (see
"Removing a Memory Card or Blank" on page 92).
Hard Drive
CAUTION: If you remove the hard drive from the computer when the drive is hot,
do not touch the metal housing of the hard drive.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To prevent data loss, turn off your computer (see "Turning Off Your
Computer" on page 154) before removing the hard drive. Do not remove the hard
drive while the computer is on or in Sleep state.
NOTICE: Hard drives are extremely fragile. Exercise care when handling the
hard drive.
NOTE: Dell does not guarantee compatibility or provide support for hard drives
from sources other than Dell.
NOTE: If you are installing a hard drive from a source other than Dell, you need to
install an operating system, drivers, and utilities on the new hard drive (see
"Restoring Your Operating System" on page 144 and "Reinstalling Drivers and
Utilities" on page 140).
1 battery 2 battery release latch (2)
1 2Adding and Replacing Parts 157
Removing the Hard Drive
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153.
2 Turn the computer over and remove the hard drive screws.
NOTICE: When the hard drive is not in the computer, store it in protective antistatic
packaging (see "Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge" in the
Product Information Guide).
3 Slide the hard drive out of the computer.
1 hard drive 2 screws (4)
1 2158 Adding and Replacing Parts
Replacing the Hard Drive
1 Remove the new drive from its packaging.
Save the original packaging for storing or shipping the hard drive.
NOTICE: Use firm and even pressure to slide the drive into place. If you use
excessive force, you may damage the connector.
2 Slide the hard drive into the bay until it is fully seated.
3 Replace and tighten the screws.
4 Install the operating system for your computer, as needed (see "Restoring
Your Operating System" on page 144).
5 Install the drivers and utilities for your computer, as needed (see
"Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 140).
Returning a Hard Drive to Dell
Return your old hard drive to Dell in its original, or comparable, foam
packaging. Otherwise, the hard drive may be damaged in transit.
1 foam packaging 2 hard drive
2
1Adding and Replacing Parts 159
Optical Drive
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
Removing the Optical Drive
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153.
2 Turn the computer over.
3 Remove the locking screw from the optical drive.
4 Using a plastic scribe, push the notch to release the optical drive from the bay.
5 Slide the optical drive out of the bay.
1 optical drive 2 notch
3 locking screw
2
1
3160 Adding and Replacing Parts
Replacing the Optical Drive
1 Slide the optical drive into the bay.
2 Replace and tighten the locking screw.
Hinge Cover
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist
grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a
connector on the back of the computer).
NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the system board, you must remove the battery
from the battery bay before you begin working inside the computer.
Removing the Hinge Cover
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153.
2 Open the display as far as it will open.
NOTICE: To avoid damage to the hinge cover, do not lift the cover on both sides
simultaneously.
3 Insert a plastic scribe into the indent to lift the hinge cover on the right side.
4 Ease the hinge cover up, moving from right to left, and remove it.Adding and Replacing Parts 161
Replacing the Hinge Cover
1 Insert the left edge of the hinge cover.
2 Press from left to right until the cover snaps into place.
Keyboard
For more information about the keyboard, see "Using the Keyboard and
Touchpad" on page 47.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist
grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a
connector on the back of the computer).
NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the system board, you must remove the battery
from the battery bay before you begin working inside the computer.
1 hinge cover 2 scribe
1
2162 Adding and Replacing Parts
Removing the Keyboard
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153.
2 Remove the hinge cover (see "Hinge Cover" on page 160).
3 Remove the two screws at the top of the keyboard.
NOTICE: The key caps on the keyboard are fragile, easily dislodged, and timeconsuming to replace. Be careful when removing and handling the keyboard.
4 Lift the keyboard and hold it up and slightly forward to access to the
keyboard connector.
5 To disconnect the keyboard cable from the keyboard connector on the system
board, rotate the keyboard connector latch toward the front of the computer.
6 Slide the keyboard cable out of the keyboard connector on the DIMM A
memory module cover.
1 screws (2) 2 keyboard
3 tabs (5) 4 keyboard cable
5 cable release lever
1
2
4
5
3Adding and Replacing Parts 163
Replacing the Keyboard
1 Slide the keyboard cable into the keyboard connector on the DIMM A
memory module cover.
2 Rotate the keyboard connector latch to secure the cable.
3 Hook the tabs along the front edge of the keyboard into the palmrest.
4 Press on the right edge near the top to snap the keyboard into place.
5 Replace the two screws on the top of the keyboard.
Memory
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on
the system board. See "Specifications" on page 193 for information on the
memory supported by your computer. Install only memory modules that are
intended for your computer.
NOTE: Memory modules purchased from Dell are covered under your
computer warranty.
Your computer has two user-accessible SODIMM sockets, one accessed from
beneath the keyboard (DIMM A), and the other accessed from the bottom of
the computer (DIMM B).
NOTICE: If your computer has only one memory module, install the memory module
in the connector labeled “DIMMA.”
NOTICE: If you need to install memory modules in two connectors, install a
memory module in the connector labeled “DIMMA” before you install a module in
the connector labeled “DIMMB.”
Removing the DIMM A Memory Module
NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist
grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a
connector on the back of the computer).
The DIMM A memory module is located under the keyboard.
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153.
2 Remove the hinge cover (see "Hinge Cover" on page 160).164 Adding and Replacing Parts
3 Remove the keyboard (see "Keyboard" on page 161).
NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the keyboard cable from the memory
module cover.
4 Lift the memory module cover but do not remove it.
NOTICE: To prevent damage to the memory module connector, do not use tools to
spread the memory module securing clips.
5 Use your fingertips to carefully spread apart the securing clips on each end
of the memory module connector until the module pops up.
6 Remove the module from the connector.
1 memory module cover 2 memory module (DIMM A)
3 securing clips (2)
1
2
3Adding and Replacing Parts 165
Replacing the DIMM A Memory Module
NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist
grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a
connector on the back of the computer).
1 Align the notch in the module edge connector with the tab in the
connector slot.
2 Slide the module firmly into the slot at a 45-degree angle, and rotate the
module down until it clicks into place. If you do not feel the click, remove
the module and reinstall it.
NOTE: If the memory module is not installed properly, the computer may not boot.
No error message indicates this failure.
3 Replace the memory module cover.
4 Replace the keyboard and hinge cover.
5 Insert the battery into the battery bay, or connect the AC adapter to your
computer and an electrical outlet.
6 Turn on the computer.
As the computer boots, it detects the additional memory and automatically
updates the system configuration information.
1 tab 2 notch
1
2166 Adding and Replacing Parts
Confirm the amount of memory installed in the computer:
• Windows® XP
– Right-click the My Computer icon on your desktop, then click
Properties→ General.
• Windows Vista®
– Click the Windows Vista Start button , right-click Computer, and
then click Properties.
Removing the DIMM B Memory Module
The DIMM B memory module is located under the memory module cover on
the bottom of the computer.
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153.
2 Turn the computer upside-down, loosen the captive screw on the memory
module cover (see "Bottom View" on page 32), and remove the cover.
NOTICE: To prevent damage to the memory module connector, do not use tools to
spread the memory module securing clips.
NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist
grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a
connector on the back of the computer).
1 memory module/coin-cell battery compartment 2 captive screw
1
2Adding and Replacing Parts 167
3 Use your fingertips to carefully spread apart the securing clips on each end
of the memory module connector until the module pops up.
4 Remove the module from the connector.
Replacing the DIMM B Memory Module
NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist
grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a
connector on the back of the computer).
1 Align the notch in the module edge connector with the tab in the
connector slot.
2 Slide the module firmly into the slot at a 45-degree angle, and rotate the
module down until it clicks into place. If you do not feel the click, remove
the module and reinstall it.
NOTE: If the memory module is not installed properly, the computer may not boot.
No error message indicates this failure.
1 securing clips (2) 2 memory module
1 2168 Adding and Replacing Parts
NOTICE: If the cover is difficult to close, remove the module and reinstall it. Forcing
the cover to close may damage your computer.
3 Replace the memory module cover.
4 Insert the battery into the battery bay, or connect the AC adapter to your
computer and an electrical outlet.
5 Turn on the computer.
As the computer boots, it detects the additional memory and automatically
updates the system configuration information.
Confirm the amount of memory installed in the computer:
• Windows® XP
– Right-click the My Computer icon on your desktop, then click
Properties→ General.
• Windows Vista®
– Click the Windows Vista Start button , right-click Computer, and
then click Properties.
1 tab 2 notch
1
2Adding and Replacing Parts 169
Subscriber Identity Module
Subscriber Identity Modules (SIM) identify users uniquely through an
International Mobile Subscriber Identity.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTE: Only Cingular and Vodafone need a SIM. Verizon, Sprint, and Telus do not
use SIMs.
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153.
2 In the battery bay, slide the SIM into the compartment with the cut-off
corner of the card facing away from the compartment.
1 battery bay 2 SIM
1
2170 Adding and Replacing Parts
Wireless Mini Cards
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the system board, you must remove the battery
from the battery bay before you begin working inside the computer.
If you ordered a wireless Mini Card with your computer, the card is already
installed. Your computer supports three types of wireless Mini Cards:
• Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN)
• Mobile Broadband or Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
• Wireless Personal Area Network (WPAN)
Removing a WLAN Card
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153.
2 Turn the computer over.
3 Loosen the captive screws on the cover of the Mini Card compartment and
remove the cover.
1 captive screws (2) 2 cover
1
2Adding and Replacing Parts 171
4 Disconnect the antenna cables from the WLAN card.
5 Release the WLAN card by pushing the metal securing tabs toward the
back of the computer until the card pops up slightly.
1 antenna cable connectors (2) 2 WLAN card
1
2172 Adding and Replacing Parts
6 Lift the WLAN card out of its system board connector.
Replacing a WLAN Card
NOTICE: The connectors are keyed to ensure correct insertion. If you feel
resistance, check the connectors on the card and on the system board, and realign
the card.
NOTICE: To avoid damage to the WLAN card, never place cables under the card.
1 Insert the WLAN card connector into the system board connector labeled
"WLAN" at a 45-degree angle.
2 Press the other end of the WLAN card down into the securing tabs until
the card clicks into place.
1 metal securing tabs (2) 2 WLAN card
1
2Adding and Replacing Parts 173
3 Connect the appropriate antenna cables to the WLAN card you are installing:
If the WLAN card has two triangles on the label (white and black),
connect the white antenna cable to the connector labeled "main" (white
triangle), and connect the black antenna cable to the connector labeled
"aux" (black triangle).
If the WLAN card has three triangles on the label (white, black, and gray),
connect the white antenna cable to the white triangle, connect the black
antenna cable to the black triangle, and connect the gray antenna cable to
the gray triangle.
NOTE: The gray antenna cable may not be available in all computers. The
presence of the gray antenna cable in your Mini Card compartment depends
on the type of display.
4 Secure unused antenna cables in the protective mylar sleeve.
5 Replace the cover and tighten the captive screws.
Removing a Mobile Broadband or WWAN Card
NOTE: WWAN is also available on an ExpressCard (see "Using ExpressCards" on
page 87).
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153.
2 Turn the computer over.
3 Loosen the captive screws on the cover of the Mini Card compartment and
remove the cover.174 Adding and Replacing Parts
4 Disconnect the two antenna cables from the WWAN card.
1 captive screws (2) 2 cover
1 2Adding and Replacing Parts 175
5 Release the WWAN card by pushing the metal securing tabs toward the
back of the computer until the card pops up slightly.
1 antenna cable connectors (2) 2 WWAN card
1
2176 Adding and Replacing Parts
6 Lift the WWAN card out of its system board connector.
Replacing a WWAN Card
NOTICE: The connectors are keyed to ensure correct insertion. If you feel
resistance, check the connectors on the card and on the system board, and realign
the card.
NOTICE: To avoid damage to the WWAN card, never place cables under the card.
1 Insert the WWAN card connector into the system board connector labeled
"WWAN" at a 45-degree angle.
2 Press the other end of the WWAN card down into the securing tabs until
the card clicks into place.
1 metal securing tabs (2) 2 WWAN card
1
2Adding and Replacing Parts 177
3 Connect the black antenna cable with a gray stripe to the connector
labeled "aux" (black triangle) and connect the white antenna cable with a
gray stripe to the connector labeled "main" (white triangle).
4 Secure unused antenna cables in the protective mylar sleeve.
5 Replace the cover and tighten the captive screws.
Removing a WPAN Card
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153.
2 Turn the computer over.
3 Loosen the captive screws on the cover of the Mini Card compartment and
remove the cover.
4 Disconnect the blue antenna cable from the WPAN card.
5 Release the WPAN card by pushing the metal securing tabs toward the
back of the computer until the card pops up slightly.
6 Lift the WPAN card out of its system board connector.
1 captive screws (2) 2 cover
1
2178 Adding and Replacing Parts
Replacing a WPAN Card
NOTICE: The connectors are keyed to ensure correct insertion. If you feel
resistance, check the connectors on the card and on the system board, and realign
the card.
NOTICE: To avoid damage to the WPAN card, never place cables under the card.
1 Insert the WPAN card connector into the system board connector labeled
"WPAN" at a 45-degree angle.
2 Press the other end of the WPAN card down into the securing tabs until
the card clicks into place.
3 Connect the blue antenna cable to the WPAN card.
4 Secure unused antenna cables in the protective mylar sleeve.
5 Replace the cover and tighten the captive screws.
Flash Cache Module
The Flash Cache Module (FCM) is an internal flash drive that helps improve
the performance of your computer. If you ordered an FCM with your
computer, the card is already installed.
NOTE: Windows® XP does not support an FCM. You can have an FCM installed
when running Windows XP but it will have no effect on your computer’s performance.
Removing the FCM
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153.
2 Turn the computer over and remove the cover on the Mini Card
compartment.
3 Ground yourself by touching one of the metal connectors on the back of
the computer.
NOTE: If you leave the area, ground yourself again when you return to the
computer. Adding and Replacing Parts 179
4 Release the FCM by pushing the metal securing brackets away from the
card until the card pops up slightly.
5 Remove the FCM.
Replacing the FCM
NOTICE: Install the FCM in the WWAN or WPAN slot. Do not install an FCM in the
WLAN card slot. Doing so may cause damage to your computer.
1 Insert the FCM connector into the system board connector at a 45-degree
angle
2 Press the other end of the FCM down into the securing tabs until the card
clicks into place.
1 metal securing tabs (2) 2 FCM
1
2180 Adding and Replacing Parts
Internal Card With Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist
grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a
connector on the back of the computer).
NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the system board, you must remove the battery
from the battery bay before you begin working inside the computer.
If you ordered a card with Bluetooth wireless technology with your computer,
it is already installed.
Removing the Card
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153.
2 Remove the hinge cover (see "Hinge Cover" on page 160).
3 Disconnect the cable on the card.
4 Grasp the connector end of the card and slide it out from under the
securing tabs.
1 securing tab 2 card
3 securing tab 4 cable
1
4
2
3Adding and Replacing Parts 181
Replacing the Card
1 Replace the card at an angle to slide it under the securing tabs in the card
compartment.
2 Connect the cable to the card.
Coin-Cell Battery
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist
grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a
connector on the back of the computer).
NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the system board, you must remove the battery
from the battery bay before you begin working inside the computer.
Removing the Coin-Cell Battery
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153.
2 Turn the computer over.
3 Loosen the captive screw on the memory module/coin-cell battery cover
(see "Bottom View" on page 32), and remove the cover.
4 Disconnect the coin-cell battery cable from the system board.
5 Slide the battery out of the mylar sleeve.
1 coin-cell battery 2 mylar sleeve 3 battery cable connector
2
1
3182 Adding and Replacing Parts
Replacing the Coin-Cell Battery
1 Connect the coin-cell battery cable to the system board.
2 Slide the coin-cell battery into the mylar sleeve.
3 Replace the cover and tighten the captive screw.Dell™ QuickSet Features 183
Dell™ QuickSet Features
NOTE: This feature may not be available on your computer.
Dell QuickSet provides you with easy access to configure or view the
following types of settings:
• Network connectivity
• Power management
• Display
• System information
Depending on what you want to do in Dell QuickSet, you can start it by
either clicking, double-clicking, or right-clicking the QuickSet icon in the
Microsoft® Windows® notification area. The notification area is located in
the lower-right corner of your screen.
For more information about QuickSet, right-click the QuickSet icon and
select Help.184 Dell™ QuickSet FeaturesTraveling With Your Computer 185
Traveling With Your Computer
Identifying Your Computer
• Attach a name tag or business card to the computer.
• Write down your Service Tag and store it in a safe place away from the
computer or carrying case. Use the Service Tag if you need to report a loss
or theft to law enforcement officials and to Dell.
• Create a file on the Microsoft® Windows® desktop called if_found. Place
information such as your name, address, and phone number in this file.
• Contact your credit card company and ask if it offers coded
identification tags.
Packing the Computer
• Remove any external devices attached to the computer and store them in a
safe place.
• Fully charge the main battery and any spare batteries that you plan to carry
with you.
• Shut down the computer.
• Disconnect the AC adapter.
NOTICE: When the display is closed, extraneous items on the keyboard or palm
rest could damage the display.
• Remove any extraneous items, such as paper clips, pens, and paper, from
the keyboard and palm rest and close the display.
• Use the optional Dell carrying case to pack the computer and its
accessories together safely.
• Avoid packing the computer with items such as shaving cream, colognes,
perfumes, or food.
NOTICE: If the computer has been exposed to extreme temperatures, allow it to
acclimate to room temperature for 1 hour before turning it on.186 Traveling With Your Computer
• Protect the computer, the batteries, and the hard drive from hazards such
as extreme temperatures and overexposure to sunlight, dirt, dust, or liquids.
• Pack the computer so that it does not slide around in the trunk of your car
or in an overhead storage compartment.
Travel Tips
NOTICE: Do not move the computer while using the optical drive to prevent loss
of data.
NOTICE: Do not check the computer as baggage.
• Consider disabling wireless activity on your computer to maximize battery
operating time. To disable wireless activity, use the wireless switch (see
"wireless switch" on page 27).
• Consider changing your power management options to maximize battery
operating time (see "Power Management Modes" on page 56).
• If you are traveling internationally, carry proof of ownership—or of your
right to use the computer if it is company-owned—to speed your passage
through customs. Investigate the customs regulations of the countries you
plan to visit, and consider acquiring an international carnet (also known as
a merchandise passport) from your government.
• Find out what type of electrical outlets are used in the countries you will
visit, and have appropriate power adapters.
• Check with your credit card company for information about the kinds of
emergency travel assistance it offers to users of portable computers.
Traveling by Air
NOTICE: Do not walk the computer through a metal detector. Send the computer
through an X-ray machine or have it hand-inspected.
• Ensure that you have a charged battery available in case you are asked to
turn on the computer.
• Prior to entering the airplane, verify that using a computer is permitted.
Some airlines forbid the use of electronic devices during flight. All airlines
forbid the use of electronic devices during takeoff and landing.Getting Help 187
Getting Help
Obtaining Assistance
CAUTION: If you need to remove the computer cover, first disconnect the
computer power and modem cables from all electrical outlets.
If you experience a problem with your computer, you can complete the
following steps to diagnose and troubleshoot the problem:
1 See "Troubleshooting" on page 107 for information and procedures that
pertain to the problem your computer is experiencing.
2 See "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107 for procedures on how to run Dell
Diagnostics.
3 Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191.
4 Use Dell's extensive suite of online services available at Dell Support
(support.dell.com) for help with installation and troubleshooting
procedures. See "Online Services" on page 188 for a more extensive list of
Dell Support online.
5 If the preceding steps have not resolved the problem, see "Contacting
Dell" on page 192.
NOTE: Call Dell Support from a telephone near or at the computer so that the
support staff can assist you with any necessary procedures.
NOTE: Dell's Express Service Code system may not be available in all countries.
When prompted by Dell's automated telephone system, enter your Express
Service Code to route the call directly to the proper support personnel. If you
do not have an Express Service Code, open the Dell Accessories folder,
double-click the Express Service Code icon, and follow the directions.
For instructions on using the Dell Support, see "Technical Support and
Customer Service" on page 188.
NOTE: Some of the following services are not always available in all locations
outside the continental U.S. Call your local Dell representative for information on
availability.188 Getting Help
Technical Support and Customer Service
Dell's support service is available to answer your questions about Dell™
hardware. Our support staff uses computer-based diagnostics to provide fast,
accurate answers.
To contact Dell's support service, see "Before You Call" on page 190, and then
see "Contacting Dell" on page 192.
DellConnect
DellConnect is a simple online access tool that allows a Dell service and
support associate to access your computer through a broadband connection,
diagnose your problem and repair it all under your supervision. For more
information, go to support.dell.com and click DellConnect.
Online Services
You can learn about Dell products and services on the following websites:
www.dell.com
www.dell.com/ap (Asian/Pacific countries only)
www.dell.com/jp (Japan only)
www.euro.dell.com (Europe only)
www.dell.com/la (Latin American and Caribbean countries)
www.dell.ca (Canada only)
You can access Dell Support through the following websites and e-mail addresses:
• Dell Support websites
support.dell.com
support.jp.dell.com (Japan only)
support.euro.dell.com (Europe only)
• Dell Support e-mail addresses
mobile_support@us.dell.com
support@us.dell.com
la-techsupport@dell.com (Latin America and Caribbean countries only)
apsupport@dell.com (Asian/Pacific countries only)Getting Help 189
• Dell Marketing and Sales e-mail addresses
apmarketing@dell.com (Asian/Pacific countries only)
sales_canada@dell.com (Canada only)
• Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP)
ftp.dell.com
Log in as user: anonymous, and use your e-mail address as your password.
AutoTech Service
Dell's automated support service—AutoTech—provides recorded answers to
the questions most frequently asked by Dell customers about their portable
and desktop computers.
When you call AutoTech, use your touch-tone telephone to select the
subjects that correspond to your questions. For the telephone number to call
for your region, see "Contacting Dell" on page 192.
Automated Order-Status Service
To check on the status of any Dell products that you have ordered, you can go
to support.dell.com, or you can call the automated order-status service. A
recording prompts you for the information needed to locate and report on
your order. For the telephone number to call for your region, see "Contacting
Dell" on page 192.
Problems With Your Order
If you have a problem with your order, such as missing parts, wrong parts, or
incorrect billing, contact Dell for customer assistance. Have your invoice or
packing slip handy when you call. For the telephone number to call for your
region, see "Contacting Dell" on page 192.
Product Information
If you need information about additional products available from Dell, or if
you would like to place an order, visit the Dell website at www.dell.com. For
the telephone number to call for your region or to speak to a sales specialist,
see "Contacting Dell" on page 192.190 Getting Help
Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit
Prepare all items being returned, whether for repair or credit, as follows:
1 Call Dell to obtain a Return Material Authorization Number, and write it
clearly and prominently on the outside of the box.
For the telephone number to call for your region, see "Contacting Dell" on
page 192.
2 Include a copy of the invoice and a letter describing the reason for the return.
3 Include a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist (see "Diagnostics Checklist" on
page 191), indicating the tests that you have run and any error messages
reported by the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107).
4 Include any accessories that belong with the item(s) being returned (power
cables, software floppy disks, guides, and so on) if the return is for credit.
5 Pack the equipment to be returned in the original (or equivalent) packing
materials.
You are responsible for paying shipping expenses. You are also responsible for
insuring any product returned, and you assume the risk of loss during
shipment to Dell. Collect On Delivery (C.O.D.) packages are not accepted.
Returns that are missing any of the preceding requirements will be refused at
Dell’s receiving dock and returned to you.
Before You Call
NOTE: Have your Express Service Code ready when you call. The code helps Dell’s
automated-support telephone system direct your call more efficiently. You may also
be asked for your Service Tag (located on the back or bottom of your computer).
Remember to fill out the Diagnostics Checklist (see "Diagnostics Checklist"
on page 191). If possible, turn on your computer before you call Dell for
assistance and call from a telephone at or near the computer. You may be
asked to type some commands at the keyboard, relay detailed information
during operations, or try other troubleshooting steps possible only at the
computer itself. Ensure that the computer documentation is available.
CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, follow the safety instructions in
your Product InformationGuide.Getting Help 191
Diagnostics Checklist
Name:
Date:
Address:
Phone number:
Service Tag (bar code on the back or bottom of the computer):
Express Service Code:
Return Material Authorization Number (if provided by Dell support technician):
Operating system and version:
Devices:
Expansion cards:
Are you connected to a network? Yes/No
Network, version, and network adapter:
Programs and versions:
See your operating system documentation to determine the contents of the
system’s start-up files. If the computer is connected to a printer, print each file.
Otherwise, record the contents of each file before calling Dell.
Error message, beep code, or diagnostic code:
Description of problem and troubleshooting procedures you performed:192 Getting Help
Contacting Dell
NOTE: If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact
information on your purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, or Dell product catalog.
Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service options.
Availability varies by country and product, and some services may not be
available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or
customer service issues:
1 Visit support.dell.com.
2 Verify your country or region in the Choose A Country/Region drop-down
menu at the bottom of the page.
3 Click Contact Us on the left side of the page.
4 Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need.
5 Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you.Specifications 193
Specifications
NOTE: Offerings may vary by region. For more information regarding the
configuration of your computer, click Start , click Help and Support, and then
select the option to view information about your computer.
Processor
Processor type Intel® Core™ 2 Duo
L1 cache 32 KB per instruction, 32 KB data cache per
core
L2 cache 2 MB or 4 MB per core depending on model
External bus frequency 667 MHz and 800 MHz
System Information
System chipset Mobile Intel Express (GM 965 or PM 965)
Data bus width 64 bits
DRAM bus width dual-channel (2) 64-bit buses
Processor address bus width 32 bits
Flash EPROM 1 MB
Graphics bus PCI-E X16
PCI bus
(PCI-Express used for video
controllers)
32 bits
x16
ExpressCard
NOTE: The ExpressCard slot is designed only for ExpressCards. It does NOT support
PC Cards.
NOTE: PCMCIA may not be available in some regions.
ExpressCard controller Intel ICH8M
ExpressCard connector one ExpressCard slot (54 mm)194 Specifications
Cards supported ExpressCard/34 (34 mm)
ExpressCard/54 (54 mm)
1.5 V and 3.3 V
ExpressCard connector size 26 pins
8-in-1 Memory Card Reader
8-in-1 memory card controller Ricoh R5C833
8-in-1 memory card connector 8-in-1 combo card connector
Cards supported • Secure Digital (SD)
• SDIO
• MultiMediaCard (MMC)
• Memory Stick
• Memory Stick PRO
• xD-Picture Card
• Hi Speed-SD
• Hi Density-SD
Memory
Memory module connector two user-accessible SODIMM connectors
Memory module capacities 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB
Memory type 667 MHz SoDIMM DDR2
Minimum memory 512 MB
Maximum memory 4 GB
NOTE: In order to take advantage of the dual channel bandwidth capability, both
memory slots must be populated and must match in size.
NOTE: The available memory displayed does not reflect the complete maximum
memory installed because some memory is reserved for system files.
ExpressCard (continued)Specifications 195
Ports and Connectors
Audio microphone connector, stereo
headphone/speakers connector
IEEE 1394 4-pin serial connector
Consumer IR sensor compatible with Philips RC6 (receive
only)
Mini Card three Type IIIA Mini Card slots
Modem RJ-11 port
Network adapter RJ-45 port
S-video TV-out 7-pin mini-DIN connector (optional S-video
to composite video adapter cable)
USB four 4-pin USB 2.0-compliant connector
Video 15-hole connector
Communications
Modem:
Type v.92 56K MDC
Controller softmodem
Interface Intel High-Definition Audio
Network adapter 10/100 Ethernet LAN on system board
Wireless internal WLAN, WWAN, WPAN Mini
Cards
WWAN ExpressCard
Bluetooth® wireless technology196 Specifications
Video
NOTE: Optional video controller upgrades are available for your computer subject to
availability at the time of purchase. To determine the configuration of your computer,
see "Determining Your Computer’s Configuration" on page 21.
Video type: integrated on system board
Video controller Intel 965 GM
Video memory dynamic based on system memory capacity
LCD interface LVDS
TV support NTSC or PAL in S-video, composite, and
component modes
Video type: discrete video card
Data bus PCI Express X16
Video controller nVIDIA GeForce 8400M G or nVIDIA
GeForce 8600M GT
Video memory 128 MB (GeForce 8400M G) or 256 MB
(GeForce 8600M GT)
LCD interface LVDS
TV support NTSC or PAL in S-video, composite, and
component modes
Audio
Audio type two-channel high-definition stereo
Audio controller Intel HDA Azalia
Stereo conversion 24-bit (analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog)
Interfaces:
Internal Intel High Definition Audio
External microphone-in connector, stereo
headphones/speakers connector
Speaker two 4-ohm speakers
Internal speaker amplifier 2 Watts per channel into 4 ohms
Volume controls program menus, media control buttonsSpecifications 197
Display
Type (active-matrix TFT) 15.4-inch WXGA
15.4-inch WXGA with TrueLife
15.4-inch WXGA+ with TrueLife
15.4-inch WSXGA+ with TrueLife
Dimensions:
Height 222.5 mm (8.8 in)
Width 344.5 mm (13.6 in)
Diagonal 391.2 mm (15.4 in)
Maximum resolutions:
WXGA 1280 x 800 at 262 K colors
WXGA with TrueLife 1280 x 800 at 262 K colors
WXGA+ with TrueLife 1440 x 900 at 262 K colors
WSXGA+ with TrueLife 1680 x 1050 at 262 K colors
Refresh rate 60 Hz
Operating angle 0° (closed) to 155°
Viewing angles:
Horizontal ±40° (WXGA)
±40° (WXGA with TrueLife)
±55° (WXGA+ with TrueLife)
±60° (WSXGA+ with TrueLife)
Vertical +15°/–30° (WXGA)
+15°/–30° (WXGA with TrueLife)
±45° (WXGA+ with TrueLife)
+40°/–50° (WSXGA+ with TrueLife)198 Specifications
Pixel pitch:
WXGA 0.258 mm
WXGA with TrueLife 0.258 mm
WXGA+ with TrueLife 0.2304 mm
WSXGA+ with TrueLife 0.197 mm
Controls brightness can be controlled through
keyboard shortcuts (see "Display Functions"
on page 48)
Keyboard
Number of keys 87 (U.S. and Canada); 88 (Europe); 91 (Japan)
Layout QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji
Touch Pad
X/Y position resolution
(graphics table mode) 240 cpi
Size:
Width 71.7-mm (2.8-in) sensor-active area
Height 34.0-mm (1.3-in) rectangle
Battery
Type 9-cell "smart" lithium ion
6-cell "smart" lithium ion
Dimensions:
Depth 67.6 mm (2.66 in) (9 cell)
47.5 mm (1.87 in) (6 cell)
Height 20.4 mm (0.8 in)
Width 209.9 mm (8.26 in)
Weight 0.48 kg (1.06 lb) (9 cell)
0.33 kg (0.7 lb) (6 cell)
Display (continued)Specifications 199
Voltage 11.1 VDC
Charge time (approximate):
Computer off 4 hours
Operating time Battery operating time varies depending on
operating conditions and can be significantly
reduced under certain power-intensive
conditions (see "Power Problems" on
page 132).
See "Using a Battery" on page 53 for more
information on battery life.
Life span (approximate) 300 discharge/charge cycles
Temperature range:
Operating 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F)
Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F)
Coin-cell battery CR-2032
AC Adapter
Input voltage 90–264 VAC
Input current (maximum) 1.5 A
Input frequency 47–63 Hz
Output current (65 W) 4.34 A (maximum at 4-second pulse)
3.34 A (continuous)
Output current (90 W) 5.62 A (maximum at 4-second pulse)
4.62 A (continuous)
Output power 65 W, 90 W
Rated output voltage 19.5 +/– 1.0 VDC
Dimensions (65 W):
Height 28.2 mm (1.11 in)
Width 57.9 mm (2.28 in)
Depth 137.2 mm (5.4 in)
Battery (continued)200 Specifications
Weight (with cables) 0.4 kg (0.9 lb)
Dimensions (90 W):
Height 34.2 mm (1.34 in)
Width 60.8 mm (2.39 in)
Depth 153.4 mm (6.0 in)
Weight (with cables) 0.46 kg (1.01 lb)
Temperature range:
Operating 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F)
Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F)
Physical
Height 42 mm (1.65 in)
Width 358.7 mm (14.12 in)
Depth 269 mm (10.59 in)
Weight (with 6-cell battery):
Configurable to less than 3.0 kg (6.61 lb)
Environmental
Temperature range:
Operating 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F)
Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F)
Relative humidity (maximum):
Operating 10% to 90% (noncondensing)
Storage 5% to 95% (noncondensing)
Maximum vibration (using a random
vibration spectrum that simulates
user environment):
Operating 0.66 GRMS
Storage 1.3 GRMS
AC Adapter (continued)Specifications 201
Maximum shock (Measured with
hard drive in operating status and a
2-ms half-sine pulse for operating.
Also measured with hard drive in
head-parked position and a 2-ms
halfsine pulse for storage):
Operating 142 G
Storage 163 G
Altitude (maximum):
Operating –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft)
Storage –15.2 to 10,668 m (–50 to 35,000 ft)
Environmental (continued)202 SpecificationsAppendix 203
Appendix
Using the System Setup Program
NOTE: Your operating system may automatically configure most of the options
available in system setup, thus overriding options that you set through system setup.
An exception is the External Hot Key option, which you can disable or enable only
through system setup. For more information on configuring features for your
operating system, see Windows Help and Support (see "Microsoft Windows XP and
Windows Vista® Help and Support Center" on page 16).
You can use system setup as follows:
• To set or change user-selectable features such as your computer password
• To verify information about the computer's current configuration such as
the amount of system memory
After you set up the computer, run system setup to familiarize yourself with
your system configuration information and optional settings. You may want
to write down the information for future reference.
The system setup screens display the current setup information and settings
for your computer, such as:
• System configuration
• Boot order
• Boot (start-up) configuration
• Basic device configuration settings
• System security and hard drive password settings
NOTE: Unless you are an expert computer user or are directed to do so by Dell
technical support, do not change the system setup settings. Certain changes might
make your computer work incorrectly. 204 Appendix
Viewing the System Setup Screen
1 Turn on (or restart) your computer.
2 When the DELL logo appears, press immediately.
If you wait too long and the Microsoft Windows logo appears, continue to
wait until you see the Windows desktop, then shut down your computer
and try again.
System Setup Screen
NOTE: For information about a specific item on a system setup screen, highlight the
item and see the Help area on the screen.
On each screen, the system setup options are listed at the left. To the right of
each option is the setting or value for that option. You can change settings
that appear as white type on the screen. Options or values that you cannot
change (because they are determined by the computer) appear less bright.
The upper-right corner of the screen displays help information for the
currently highlighted option; the lower-right corner displays information
about the computer. System setup key functions are listed across the bottom
of the screen.
Commonly Used Options
Certain options require that you reboot the computer for new settings to
take effect.
Changing the Boot Sequence
The boot sequence, or boot order, tells the computer where to look to find the
software needed to start the operating system. You can control the boot
sequence and enable/disable devices using the Boot Order page of the system
setup program.
NOTE: To change the boot sequence on a one-time-only basis, see "Performing a
One-Time Boot" on page 205.
The Boot Order page displays a general list of the bootable devices that may
be installed in your computer, including but not limited to the following:
• Diskette Drive
• Internal HDDAppendix 205
• USB Storage Device
• CD/DVD/CD-RW drive
• Modular bay HDD
NOTE: Only devices that are preceded by a number are bootable.
During the boot routine, the computer starts at the top of the list and scans
each enabled device for the operating system start-up files. When the
computer finds the files, it stops searching and starts the operating system.
To control the boot devices, select (highlight) a device by pressing the downarrow or up-arrow key, and then enable or disable the device or change its
order in the list.
• To enable or disable a device, highlight the item and press the space bar.
Enabled items are preceded by a number; disabled items are not preceded
by a number.
• To reorder a device in the list, highlight the device and press to move
the device up the list or to move a device down the list.
Boot sequence changes take effect as soon as you save the changes and exit
the system setup program.
Performing a One-Time Boot
You can set a one-time-only boot sequence without entering the system setup
program (you can also use this procedure to boot the Dell Diagnostics on the
diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive).
1 Shut down the computer through the Start menu.
2 Connect the computer to an electrical outlet.
3 Turn on the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press
immediately.
If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until
you see the Windows desktop, then shut down your computer and try
again.
4 When the boot device list appears, highlight the device from which you
want to boot and press .
The computer boots to the selected device.
The next time you reboot the computer, the previous boot order is restored.206 Appendix
Cleaning Your Computer
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the
safety instructions located in the Product Information Guide.
Computer, Keyboard, and Display
CAUTION: Before you clean your computer, disconnect the computer from the
electrical outlet and remove any installed batteries. Clean your computer with a
soft cloth dampened with water. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners, which may
contain flammable substances.
• Use a can of compressed air to remove dust from between the keys on the
keyboard and to remove any dirt or lint from the display.
NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the computer or display, do not spray cleaning
solution directly onto the display. Only use products specifically designed for
cleaning displays, and follow the instructions that are included with the product.
• Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with either water or a display cleaner. Do not
use alcohol or an ammonia-based cleaner. Wipe the display gently working
from the center to the edges until it is clean and any fingerprints are
removed. Do not use excessive pressure.
NOTICE: To prevent damage to the antiglare coating, do not wipe the display with
soap or alcohol.
• Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water and wipe the computer and
keyboard. Do not allow water from the cloth to seep between the touch
pad and the surrounding palm rest.
• To clean your monitor screen, lightly dampen a soft, clean cloth with water.
You can also use a special screen-cleaning tissue or solution suitable for the
monitor’s antistatic coating.
• Wipe the keyboard, computer, and monitor plastics with a soft cleaning
cloth moistened with a solution of three parts water and one part
dishwashing detergent.
Do not soak the cloth or let water drip inside your computer or keyboard.Appendix 207
Touch Pad
1 Shut down and turn off your computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer"
on page 154).
2 Disconnect any attached devices from the computer and from their
electrical outlets.
3 Remove any installed batteries (see "Battery Performance" on page 53).
4 Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water, and wipe it gently across the
surface of the touch pad. Do not allow water from the cloth to seep
between the touch pad and the surrounding palm rest.
Mouse
NOTICE: Disconnect the mouse from the computer before cleaning the mouse
If your screen cursor skips or moves abnormally, clean the mouse.
Cleaning a Non-Optical Mouse
1 Clean the outside casing of the mouse with a cloth moistened with a mild
cleaning solution.
2 Turn the retainer ring on the underside of your mouse counterclockwise,
and then remove the ball.
3 Wipe the ball with a clean, lint-free cloth.
4 Blow carefully into the ball cage or use a can of compressed air to dislodge
dust and lint.
5 If the rollers inside the ball cage are dirty, clean the rollers with a cotton
swab moistened lightly with isopropyl alcohol.
6 Recenter the rollers in their channels if they are misaligned. Ensure that
fluff from the swab is not left on the rollers.
7 Replace the ball and retainer ring, and turn the retainer ring clockwise
until it clicks into place.
Cleaning an Optical Mouse
Clean the outside casing of the mouse with a cloth moistened with a mild
cleaning solution.208 Appendix
Media
NOTICE: Always use compressed air to clean the lens in the optical drive, and
follow the instructions that come with the compressed air product. Never touch the
lens in the drive.
If you notice problems, such as skipping, with the playback quality of your
media, try cleaning the discs.
1 Hold the disc by its outer edge. You can also touch the inside edge of the
center hole.
NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the surface, do not wipe in a circular motion
around the disc.
2 With a soft, lint-free cloth, gently wipe the bottom of the disc (the unlabeled
side) in a straight line from the center to the outer edge of the disc.
For stubborn dirt, try using water or a diluted solution of water and mild
soap. You can also purchase commercial products that clean discs and
provide some protection from dust, fingerprints, and scratches. Cleaning
products for CDs are also safe to use on DVDs.
Dell Technical Support Policy (U.S. Only)
Technician assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation
of the customer in the troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of
the operating system, software programs, and hardware drivers to the original
default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of
appropriate functionality of the computer and all Dell-installed hardware. In
addition to this technician assisted technical support, online technical
support is available at support.dell.com. Additional technical support options
may be available for purchase.
Dell provides limited technical support for the computer and any "Dellinstalled" software and peripherals1
. Support for third-party software and
peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer, including those
purchased and/or installed through Dell Software and Peripherals, Readyware,
and Custom Factory Integration2
.
1
Repair services are provided pursuant to the terms and conditions of your limited
warranty and any optional support service contract purchased with the computer.
2
All Dell-standard components included in a Custom Factory Integration (CFI) project are
covered by the standard Dell limited warranty for your computer. However, Dell also
extends a parts replacement program to cover all nonstandard, third-party hardware
components integrated through CFI for the duration of the computer’s service contract.Appendix 209
Definition of "Dell-Installed" Software and Peripherals
Dell-installed software includes the operating system and some of the
software programs that are installed on the computer during the
manufacturing process (Microsoft Office, Norton Antivirus, etc).
Dell-installed peripherals include any internal expansion cards, or
Dell-branded module bay or ExpressCard accessories. In addition, any Dellbranded monitors, keyboards, mice, speakers, microphones for telephonic
modems, docking stations/port replicators, networking products, and all
associated cabling are included.
Definition of "Third-Party" Software and Peripherals
Third-party software and peripherals include any peripheral, accessory, or
software program sold by Dell not under the Dell brand (printers, scanners,
cameras, games, etc). Support for all third-party software and peripherals is
provided by the original manufacturer of the product.
FCC Notice (U.S. Only)
FCC Class B
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction
manual, may cause interference with radio and television reception. This
equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTICE: The FCC regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly
approved by Dell Inc. could void your authority to operate this equipment. 210 Appendix
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference with radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient the receiving antenna.
• Relocate the system with respect to the receiver.
• Move the system away from the receiver.
• Plug the system into a different outlet so that the system and the receiver
are on different branch circuits.
If necessary, consult a representative of Dell Inc. or an experienced
radio/television technician for additional suggestions.
The following information is provided on the device or devices covered in this
document in compliance with the FCC regulations:
Macrovision Product Notice
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected
by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright
protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Product name: Dell™ Inspiron™ 1520
Model number: PP22L
Company name: Dell Inc.
Worldwide Regulatory Compliance & Environmental
Affairs
One Dell Way
Round Rock, TX 78682 USA
512-338-4400Glossary 211
Glossary
Terms in this Glossary are provided for informational purposes only and may
or may not describe features included with your particular computer.
A
AC— alternating current — The form of electricity that powers your computer when
you plug the AC adapter power cable in to an electrical outlet.
ACPI — advanced configuration and power interface — A power management
specification that enables Microsoft® Windows® operating systems to put a computer
in standby or hibernate mode to conserve the amount of electrical power allocated to
each device attached to the computer.
AGP — accelerated graphics port — A dedicated graphics port that allows system
memory to be used for video-related tasks. AGP delivers a smooth, true-color video
image because of the faster interface between the video circuitry and the computer
memory.
AHCI — Advanced Host Controller Interface — An interface for a SATA hard drive
Host Controller which allows the storage driver to enable technologies such as Native
Command Queuing (NCQ) and hot plug.
ALS — ambient light sensor — A feature that helps to control display brightness.
antivirus software — A program designed to identify, quarantine, and/or delete viruses
from your computer.
ASF — alert standards format — A standard to define a mechanism for reporting
hardware and software alerts to a management console. ASF is designed to be
platform- and operating system-independent.
B
battery life span — The length of time (years) during which a portable computer
battery is able to be depleted and recharged.
battery operating time — The length of time (minutes or hours) that a portable
computer battery powers the computer.
BD — See Blu-ray Disc. 212 Glossary
BIOS — basic input/output system — A program (or utility) that serves as an
interface between the computer hardware and the operating system. Unless you
understand what effect these settings have on the computer, do not change them. Also
referred to as system setup.
bit — The smallest unit of data interpreted by your computer.
Bluetooth® wireless technology — A wireless technology standard for short-range
(9 m [29 feet]) networking devices that allows for enabled devices to automatically
recognize each other.
Blu-ray Disc — Blu-ray Disc (BD) is an optical disc format jointly developed by the
Blu-ray Disc Association (BDA). A BD records and plays high-definition video (HD),
and stores large amounts of data: five times the storage capacity of a DVD and can
hold up to 25GB on a single-layer disc and 50GB on a dual-layer disc.
boot sequence — Specifies the order of the devices from which the computer
attempts to boot.
bootable CD — A CD that you can use to start your computer. In case your hard drive
is damaged or your computer has a virus, ensure that you always have a bootable CD
or floppy disk available. Your Drivers and Utilities media is a bootable CD.
bootable disk — A disk that you can use to start your computer. In case your hard
drive is damaged or your computer has a virus, ensure that you always have a bootable
CD or floppy disk available.
bps — bits per second — The standard unit for measuring data transmission speed.
BTU — British thermal unit — A measurement of heat output.
bus — A communication pathway between the components in your computer.
bus speed — The speed, given in MHz, that indicates how fast a bus can transfer
information.
byte — The basic data unit used by your computer. A byte is usually equal to 8 bits.
C
C — Celsius — A temperature measurement scale where 0° is the freezing point and
100° is the boiling point of water.
cache — A special high-speed storage mechanism which can be either a reserved
section of main memory or an independent high-speed storage device. The cache
enhances the efficiency of many processor operations.
L1 cache — Primary cache stored inside the processor.
L2 cache — Secondary cache which can either be external to the processor or
incorporated into the processor architecture.Glossary 213
carnet — An international customs document that facilitates temporary imports into
foreign countries. Also known as a merchandise passport.
CD-R — CD recordable — A recordable version of a CD. Data can be recorded only
once onto a CD-R. Once recorded, the data cannot be erased or written over.
CD-RW — CD rewritable — A rewritable version of a CD. Data can be written to a
CD-RW disc, and then erased and written over (rewritten).
CD-RW drive — A drive that can read CDs and write to CD-RW (rewritable CDs)
and CD-R (recordable CDs) discs. You can write to CD-RW discs multiple times, but
you can write to CD-R discs only once.
CD-RW/DVD drive — A drive, sometimes referred to as a combo drive, that can read
CDs and DVDs and write to CD-RW (rewritable CDs) and CD-R (recordable CDs)
discs. You can write to CD-RW discs multiple times, but you can write to CD-R discs
only once.
clock speed — The speed, given in MHz, that indicates how fast computer
components that are connected to the system bus operate.
CMOS — A type of electronic circuit. Computers use a small amount of batterypowered CMOS memory to hold date, time, and system setup options.
COA — Certificate of Authenticity — The Windows alpha-numeric code located on a
sticker on your computer. Also referred to as the Product Key or
Product ID.
Consumer IR — Infrared sensor for the Dell Travel Remote.
Control Panel — A Windows utility that allows you to modify operating system and
hardware settings, such as display settings.
controller — A chip that controls the transfer of data between the processor and
memory or between the processor and devices.
CRIMM — continuity rambus in-line memory module — A special module that has
no memory chips and is used to fill unused RIMM slots.
cursor — The marker on a display or screen that shows where the next keyboard, touch
pad, or mouse action will occur. It often is a blinking solid line, an underline character,
or a small arrow.214 Glossary
D
DDR SDRAM — double-data-rate SDRAM — A type of SDRAM that doubles the
data burst cycle, improving system performance.
DDR2 SDRAM — double-data-rate 2 SDRAM — A type of DDR SDRAM that uses a
4-bit prefetch and other architectural changes to boost memory speed to over
400 MHz.
device — Hardware such as a disk drive, printer, or keyboard that is installed in or
connected to your computer.
device driver — See driver.
DIMM — dual in-line memory module — A circuit board with memory chips that
connects to a memory module on the system board.
DIN connector — A round, six-pin connector that conforms to DIN (Deutsche
Industrie-Norm) standards; it is typically used to connect PS/2 keyboard or mouse
cable connectors.
disk striping — A technique for spreading data over multiple disk drives. Disk striping
can speed up operations that retrieve data from disk storage. Computers that use disk
striping generally allow the user to select the data unit size or stripe width.
DMA — direct memory access — A channel that allows certain types of data transfer
between RAM and a device to bypass the processor.
DMTF — Distributed Management Task Force — A consortium of hardware and
software companies who develop management standards for distributed desktop,
network, enterprise, and Internet environments.
domain — A group of computers, programs, and devices on a network that are
administered as a unit with common rules and procedures for use by a specific group
of users. A user logs on to the domain to gain access to the resources.
DRAM — dynamic random-access memory — Memory that stores information in
integrated circuits containing capacitors.
driver — Software that allows the operating system to control a device such as a
printer. Many devices do not work properly if the correct driver is not installed in the
computer.
DSL — Digital Subscriber Line — A technology that provides a constant, high-speed
Internet connection through an analog telephone line.
dual-core — An Intel® technology in which two physical computational units exist
inside a single processor package, thereby increasing computing efficiency and multitasking ability.Glossary 215
dual display mode — A display setting that allows you to use a second monitor as an
extension of your display. Also referred to as extended display mode.
DVD-R — DVD recordable — A recordable version of a DVD. Data can be recorded
only once onto a DVD-R. Once recorded, the data cannot be erased or written over.
DVD+RW — DVD rewritable — A rewritable version of a DVD. Data can be written
to a DVD+RW disc, and then erased and written over (rewritten). (DVD+RW
technology is different from DVD-RW technology.)
DVD+RW drive — drive that can read DVDs and most CD media and write to
DVD+RW (rewritable DVDs) discs.
DVI — digital video interface — A standard for digital transmission between a
computer and a digital video display.
E
ECC — error checking and correction — A type of memory that includes special
circuitry for testing the accuracy of data as it passes in and out of memory.
ECP — extended capabilities port — A parallel connector design that provides
improved bidirectional data transmission. Similar to EPP, ECP uses direct memory
access to transfer data and often improves performance.
EIDE — enhanced integrated device electronics — An improved version of the IDE
interface for hard drives and CD drives.
EMI — electromagnetic interference — Electrical interference caused by
electromagnetic radiation.
ENERGY STAR® — Environmental Protection Agency requirements that decrease
the overall consumption of electricity.
EPP — enhanced parallel port — A parallel connector design that provides
bidirectional data transmission.
ESD — electrostatic discharge — A rapid discharge of static electricity. ESD can
damage integrated circuits found in computer and communications equipment.
expansion card — A circuit board that installs in an expansion slot on the system
board in some computers, expanding the capabilities of the computer. Examples
include video, modem, and sound cards.
expansion slot — A connector on the system board (in some computers) where you
insert an expansion card, connecting it to the system bus.
ExpressCard — A removable I/O card adhering to the PCMCIA standard. Modems
and network adapters are common types of ExpressCards. ExpressCards support both
the PCI Express and USB 2.0 standard.216 Glossary
Express Service Code — A numeric code located on a sticker on your Dell™
computer. Use the Express Service Code when contacting Dell for assistance. Express
Service Code service may not be available in some countries.
extended display mode — A display setting that allows you to use a second monitor as
an extension of your display. Also referred to as dual display mode.
extended PC Card — A PC Card that extends beyond the edge of the PC Card slot
when installed.
F
Fahrenheit — A temperature measurement scale where 32° is the freezing point and
212° is the boiling point of water.
FBD — fully-buffered DIMM — A DIMM with DDR2 DRAM chips and an
Advanced Memory Buffer (AMB) that speeds communication between the DDR2
SDRAM chips and the system.
FCC — Federal Communications Commission — A U.S. agency responsible for
enforcing communications-related regulations that state how much radiation
computers and other electronic equipment can emit.
fingerprint reader — A strip sensor that uses your unique fingerprint to authenticate
your user identity to help secure your computer.
folder — A term used to describe space on a disk or drive where files are organized and
grouped. Files in a folder can be viewed and ordered in various ways, such as
alphabetically, by date, and by size.
format — The process that prepares a drive or disk for file storage. When a drive or
disk is formatted, the existing information on it is lost.
FSB — front side bus — The data path and physical interface between the processor
and RAM.
FTP — file transfer protocol — A standard Internet protocol used to exchange files
between computers connected to the Internet.
G
G — gravity — A measurement of weight and force.
GB — gigabyte — A measurement of data storage that equals 1024 MB
(1,073,741,824 bytes). When used to refer to hard drive storage, the term is often
rounded to 1,000,000,000 bytes.Glossary 217
GHz — gigahertz — A measurement of frequency that equals one thousand million
Hz, or one thousand MHz. The speeds for computer processors, buses, and interfaces
are often measured in GHz.
graphics mode — A video mode that can be defined as x horizontal pixels by y vertical
pixels by z colors. Graphics modes can display an unlimited variety of shapes and
fonts.
GUI — graphical user interface — Software that interacts with the user by means of
menus, windows, and icons. Most programs that operate on the Windows operating
systems are GUIs.
H
hard drive — A drive that reads and writes data on a hard disk. The terms hard drive
and hard disk are often used interchangeably.
heat sink — A metal plate on some processors that helps dissipate heat.
hibernate mode — A power management mode that saves everything in memory to a
reserved space on the hard drive and then turns off the computer. When you restart
the computer, the memory information that was saved to the hard drive is
automatically restored.
HTTP — hypertext transfer protocol — A protocol for exchanging files between
computers connected to the Internet.
Hyper-Threading — Hyper-Threading is an Intel technology that can enhance overall
computer performance by allowing one physical processor to function as two logical
processors, capable of performing certain tasks simultaneously.
Hz — hertz — A unit of frequency measurement that equals 1 cycle per second.
Computers and electronic devices are often measured in kilohertz (kHz), megahertz
(MHz), gigahertz (GHz), or terahertz (THz).
I
IC — integrated circuit — A semiconductor wafer, or chip, on which thousands or
millions of tiny electronic components are fabricated for use in computer, audio, and
video equipment.
IDE — integrated device electronics — An interface for mass storage devices in which
the controller is integrated into the hard drive or CD drive.
IEEE 1394 — Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. — A highperformance serial bus used to connect IEEE 1394-compatible devices, such as digital
cameras and DVD players, to the computer. 218 Glossary
infrared sensor — Sensor for the Dell Travel Remote
integrated — Usually refers to components that are physically located on the
computer’s system board. Also referred to as built-in.
I/O — input/output — An operation or device that enters and extracts data from your
computer. Keyboards and printers are I/O devices.
I/O address — An address in RAM that is associated with a specific device (such as a
serial connector, parallel connector, or expansion slot) and allows the processor to
communicate with that device.
IrDA — Infrared Data Association — The organization that creates international
standards for infrared communications.
IRQ — interrupt request — An electronic pathway assigned to a specific device so
that the device can communicate with the processor. Each device connection must be
assigned an IRQ. Although two devices can share the same IRQ assignment, you
cannot operate both devices simultaneously.
ISP — Internet service provider — A company that allows you to access its host server
to connect directly to the Internet, send and receive e-mail, and access websites. The
ISP typically provides you with a software package, user name, and access phone
numbers for a fee.
K
Kb — kilobit — A unit of data that equals 1024 bits. A measurement of the capacity of
memory integrated circuits.
KB — kilobyte — A unit of data that equals 1024 bytes but is often referred to as
1000 bytes.
key combination — A command requiring you to press multiple keys at the same
time.
kHz — kilohertz — A measurement of frequency that equals 1000 Hz.
L
LAN — local area network — A computer network covering a small area. A LAN
usually is confined to a building or a few nearby buildings. A LAN can be connected to
another LAN over any distance through telephone lines and radio waves to form a
wide area network (WAN).
LCD — liquid crystal display — The technology used by portable computer and flatpanel displays.Glossary 219
LED — light-emitting diode — An electronic component that emits light to indicate
the status of the computer.
local bus — A data bus that provides a fast throughput for devices to the processor.
LPT — line print terminal — The designation for a parallel connection to a printer or
other parallel device.
M
Mb — megabit — A measurement of memory chip capacity that equals 1024 Kb.
Mbps — megabits per second — One million bits per second. This measurement is
typically used for transmission speeds for networks and modems.
MB — megabyte — A measurement of data storage that equals 1,048,576 bytes. 1 MB
equals 1024 KB. When used to refer to hard drive storage, the term is often rounded to
1,000,000 bytes.
MB/sec — megabytes per second — One million bytes per second. This measurement
is typically used for data transfer ratings.
media bay — A bay that supports devices such as optical drives, a second battery, or a
Dell TravelLite™ module.
memory — A temporary data storage area inside your computer. Because the data in
memory is not permanent, it is recommended that you frequently save your files while
you are working on them, and always save your files before you shut down the
computer. Your computer can contain several different forms of memory, such as
RAM, ROM, and video memory. Frequently, the word memory is used as a synonym
for RAM.
memory address — A specific location where data is temporarily stored in RAM.
memory mapping — The process by which the computer assigns memory addresses to
physical locations at start-up. Devices and software can then identify information that
the processor can access.
memory module — A small circuit board containing memory chips, which connects to
the system board.
MHz — megahertz — A measure of frequency that equals 1 million cycles per second.
The speeds for computer processors, buses, and interfaces are often measured in MHz.
Mini PCI — A standard for integrated peripheral devices with an emphasis on
communications such as modems and NICs. A Mini PCI card is a small external card
that is functionally equivalent to a standard PCI expansion card.220 Glossary
Mini-Card — A small card designed for integrated peripherals, such as
communication NICs. The Mini-Card is functionally equivalent to a standard PCI
expansion card.
Mobile Broadband network— (also known as a WWAN) is a series of interconnected
computers that communicate with each other through wireless cellular technology
and provides Internet access in the same varied locations from which cellular
telephone service is available. Your computer can maintain the Mobile Broadband
network connection regardless of its physical location, as long as the computer remains
in the service area of your cellular service provider.
modem — A device that allows your computer to communicate with other computers
over analog telephone lines. Three types of modems include: external, PC Card, and
internal. You typically use your modem to connect to the Internet and exchange email.
module bay — See media bay.
MP — megapixel — A measure of image resolution used for digital cameras.
ms — millisecond — A measure of time that equals one thousandth of a second.
Access times of storage devices are often measured in ms.
N
network adapter — A chip that provides network capabilities. A computer may
include a network adapter on its system board, or it may contain a PC Card with an
adapter on it. A network adapter is also referred to as a NIC (network interface
controller).
NIC — See network adapter.
notification area — The section of the Windows taskbar that contains icons for
providing quick access to programs and computer functions, such as the clock, volume
control, and print status. Also referred to as system tray.
ns — nanosecond — A measure of time that equals one billionth of a second.
NVRAM — nonvolatile random access memory — A type of memory that stores data
when the computer is turned off or loses its external power source. NVRAM is used for
maintaining computer configuration information such as date, time, and other system
setup options that you can set.Glossary 221
O
optical drive — A drive that uses optical technology to read or write data from CDs,
DVDs, or DVD+RWs. Example of optical drives include CD drives, DVD drives,
CD-RW drives, and CD-RW/DVD combo drives.
P
parallel connector — An I/O port often used to connect a parallel printer to your
computer. Also referred to as an LPT port.
partition — A physical storage area on a hard drive that is assigned to one or more
logical storage areas known as logical drives. Each partition can contain multiple
logical drives.
PC Card — A removable I/O card adhering to the PCMCIA standard. Modems and
network adapters are common types of PC Cards.
PCI — peripheral component interconnect — PCI is a local bus that supports 32-and
64-bit data paths, providing a high-speed data path between the processor and devices
such as video, drives, and networks.
PCI Express — A modification to the PCI interface that boosts the data transfer rate
between the processor and the devices attached to it. PCI Express can transfer data at
speeds from 250 MB/sec to 4 GB/sec. If the PCI Express chip set and the device are
capable of different speeds, they will operate at the slower speed.
PCMCIA — Personal Computer Memory Card International Association — The
organization that establishes standards for PC Cards.
PIO — programmed input/output — A method of transferring data between two
devices through the processor as part of the data path.
pixel — A single point on a display screen. Pixels are arranged in rows and columns to
create an image. A video resolution, such as 800 x 600, is expressed as the number of
pixels across by the number of pixels up and down.
Plug-and-Play — The ability of the computer to automatically configure devices. Plug
and Play provides automatic installation, configuration, and compatibility with
existing hardware if the BIOS, operating system, and all devices are Plug and Play
compliant.
POST — power-on self-test — Diagnostics programs, loaded automatically by the
BIOS, that perform basic tests on the major computer components, such as memory,
hard drives, and video. If no problems are detected during POST, the computer
continues the start-up.222 Glossary
processor — A computer chip that interprets and executes program instructions.
Sometimes the processor is referred to as the CPU (central processing unit).
PS/2 — personal system/2 — A type of connector for attaching a PS/2-compatible
keyboard, mouse, or keypad.
PXE — pre-boot execution environment — A WfM (Wired for Management)
standard that allows networked computers that do not have an operating system to be
configured and started remotely.
R
RAID — redundant array of independent disks — A method of providing data
redundancy. Some common implementations of RAID include RAID 0, RAID 1,
RAID 5, RAID 10, and RAID 50.
RAM — random-access memory — The primary temporary storage area for program
instructions and data. Any information stored in RAM is lost when you shut down your
computer.
readme file — A text file included with a software package or hardware product.
Typically, readme files provide installation information and describe new product
enhancements or corrections that have not yet been documented.
read-only — Data and/or files you can view but cannot edit or delete. A file can have
read-only status if:
• It resides on a physically write-protected floppy disk, CD, or DVD.
• It is located on a network in a directory and the system administrator has assigned
rights only to specific individuals.
refresh rate — The frequency, measured in Hz, at which your screen's horizontal lines
are recharged (sometimes also referred to as its vertical frequency). The higher the
refresh rate, the less video flicker can be seen by the human eye.
resolution — The sharpness and clarity of an image produced by a printer or displayed
on a monitor. The higher the resolution, the sharper the image.
RFI — radio frequency interference — Interference that is generated at typical radio
frequencies, in the range of 10 kHz to 100,000 MHz. Radio frequencies are at the
lower end of the electromagnetic frequency spectrum and are more likely to have
interference than the higher frequency radiations, such as infrared and light.
ROM — read-only memory — Memory that stores data and programs that cannot be
deleted or written to by the computer. ROM, unlike RAM, retains its contents after
you shut down your computer. Some programs essential to the operation of your
computer reside in ROM.Glossary 223
RPM — revolutions per minute — The number of rotations that occur per minute.
Hard drive speed is often measured in rpm.
RTC — real time clock — Battery-powered clock on the system board that keeps the
date and time after you shut down the computer.
RTCRST — real-time clock reset — A jumper on the system board of some computers
that can often be used for troubleshooting problems.
S
SAS — serial attached SCSI — A faster, serial version of the SCSI interface (as
opposed to the original SCSI parallel architecture).
SATA — serial ATA — A faster, serial version of the ATA (IDE) interface.
ScanDisk — A Microsoft utility that checks files, folders, and the hard disk’s surface
for errors. ScanDisk often runs when you restart the computer after it has stopped
responding.
SCSI — small computer system interface — A high-speed interface used to connect
devices to a computer, such as hard drives, CD drives, printers, and scanners. The
SCSI can connect many devices using a single controller. Each device is accessed by an
individual identification number on the SCSI controller bus.
SDRAM — synchronous dynamic random-access memory — A type of DRAM that is
synchronized with the optimal clock speed of the processor.
serial connector — An I/O port often used to connect devices such as a handheld
digital device or digital camera to your computer.
Service Tag — A bar code label on your computer that identifies your computer when
you access Dell Support at support.dell.com or when you call Dell for customer service
or technical support.
setup program — A program that is used to install and configure hardware and
software. The setup.exe or install.exe program comes with most Windows software
packages. Setup program differs from system setup.
shortcut — An icon that provides quick access to frequently used programs, files,
folders, and drives. When you place a shortcut on your Windows desktop and doubleclick the icon, you can open its corresponding folder or file without having to find it
first. Shortcut icons do not change the location of files. If you delete a shortcut, the
original file is not affected. Also, you can rename a shortcut icon.
SIM — Subscriber Identity Module — A SIM card contains a microchip that encrypts
voice and data transmissions. SIM cards can be used in phones or portable computers.224 Glossary
smart card — A card that is embedded with a processor and a memory chip. Smart
cards can be used to authenticate a user on computers equipped for smart cards.
S/PDIF — Sony/Philips Digital Interface — An audio transfer file format that allows
the transfer of audio from one file to another without converting it to and from an
analog format, which could degrade the quality of the file.
standby mode — A power management mode that shuts down all unnecessary
computer operations to save energy.
Strike Zone™ — Reinforced area of the platform base that protects the hard drive by
acting as a dampening device when a computer experiences resonating shock or is
dropped (whether the computer is on or off).
surge protectors — Prevent voltage spikes, such as those that may occur during an
electrical storm, from entering the computer through the electrical outlet. Surge
protectors do not protect against lightning strikes or against brownouts, which occur
when the voltage drops more than 20 percent below the normal AC-line voltage level.
Network connections cannot be protected by surge protectors. Always disconnect the
network cable from the network connector during electrical storms.
SVGA — super-video graphics array — A video standard for video cards and
controllers. Typical SVGA resolutions are 800 x 600 and 1024 x 768.
The number of colors and resolution that a program displays depends on the
capabilities of the monitor, the video controller and its drivers, and the amount of
video memory installed in the computer.
S-video TV-out — A connector used to attach a TV or digital audio device to the
computer.
SXGA — super-extended graphics array — A video standard for video cards and
controllers that supports resolutions up to 1280 x 1024.
SXGA+ — super-extended graphics array plus — A video standard for video cards and
controllers that supports resolutions up to 1400 x 1050.
system board — The main circuit board in your computer. Also known as the
motherboard.
system setup — A utility that serves as an interface between the computer hardware
and the operating system. System setup allows you to configure user-selectable options
in the BIOS, such as date and time or system password. Unless you understand what
effect the settings have on the computer, do not change the settings for this program.Glossary 225
T
TAPI — telephony application programming interface — Enables Windows programs
to operate with a wide variety of telephony devices, including voice, data, fax, and video.
text editor — A program used to create and edit files that contain only text; for example,
Windows Notepad uses a text editor. Text editors do not usually provide word wrap or
formatting functionality (the option to underline, change fonts, and so on).
TPM — trusted platform module — A hardware-based security feature that when
combined with security software enhances network and computer security by enabling
features such as file and e-mail protection.
travel module — A plastic device designed to fit inside the module bay of a portable
computer to reduce the weight of the computer.
U
UAC — user account control— Microsoft Windows® Vista® security feature that,
when enabled, provides an added layer of security between user accounts and access to
operating system settings.
UMA — unified memory allocation — System memory dynamically allocated to
video.
UPS — uninterruptible power supply — A backup power source used when the
electrical power fails or drops to an unacceptable voltage level. A UPS keeps a
computer running for a limited amount of time when there is no electrical power. UPS
systems typically provide surge suppression and may also provide voltage regulation.
Small UPS systems provide battery power for a few minutes to enable you to shut
down your computer.
USB — universal serial bus — A hardware interface for a low-speed device such as a
USB-compatible keyboard, mouse, joystick, scanner, set of speakers, printer,
broadband devices (DSL and cable modems), imaging devices, or storage devices.
Devices are plugged directly in to a 4-pin socket on your computer or in to a multi-port
hub that plugs in to your computer. USB devices can be connected and disconnected
while the computer is turned on, and they can also be daisy-chained together.
UTP — unshielded twisted pair — Describes a type of cable used in most telephone
networks and some computer networks. Pairs of unshielded wires are twisted to protect
against electromagnetic interference, rather than relying on a metal sheath around
each pair of wires to protect against interference.
UXGA — ultra extended graphics array — A video standard for video cards and
controllers that supports resolutions up to 1600 x 1200.226 Glossary
V
video controller — The circuitry on a video card or on the system board (in computers
with an integrated video controller) that provides the video capabilities—in
combination with the monitor—for your computer.
video memory — Memory that consists of memory chips dedicated to video functions.
Video memory is usually faster than system memory. The amount of video memory
installed primarily influences the number of colors that a program can display.
video mode — A mode that describes how text and graphics are displayed on a
monitor. Graphics-based software, such as Windows operating systems, displays in
video modes that can be defined as x horizontal pixels by y vertical pixels by z colors.
Character-based software, such as text editors, displays in video modes that can be
defined as x columns by y rows of characters.
video resolution — See resolution.
virus — A program that is designed to inconvenience you or to destroy data stored on
your computer. A virus program moves from one computer to another through an
infected disk, software downloaded from the Internet, or e-mail attachments. When
an infected program starts, its embedded virus also starts.
A common type of virus is a boot virus, which is stored in the boot sectors of a floppy
disk. If the floppy disk is left in the drive when the computer is shut down and then
turned on, the computer is infected when it reads the boot sectors of the floppy disk
expecting to find the operating system. If the computer is infected, the boot virus may
replicate itself onto all the floppy disks that are read or written in that computer until
the virus is eradicated.
V — volt — The measurement of electric potential or electromotive force. One V
appears across a resistance of 1 ohm when a current of 1 ampere flows through that
resistance.
W
W — watt — The measurement of electrical power. One W is 1 ampere of current
flowing at 1 volt.
WHr — watt-hour — A unit of measure commonly used to indicate the approximate
capacity of a battery. For example, a 66-WHr battery can supply 66 W of power for
1 hour or 33 W for 2 hours.
wallpaper — The background pattern or picture on the Windows desktop. Change
your wallpaper through the Windows Control Panel. You can also scan in your favorite
picture and make it wallpaper.Glossary 227
WLAN — wireless local area network. A series of interconnected computers that
communicate with each other over the air waves using access points or wireless routers
to provide Internet access.
write-protected — Files or media that cannot be changed. Use write-protection when
you want to protect data from being changed or destroyed. To write-protect a 3.5-inch
floppy disk, slide its write-protect tab to the open position.
WPAN — wireless personal area network. A computer network used for communication
among computer devices (including telephones and personal digital assistants) close to
one person.
WWAN — wireless wide area network. A wireless high-speed data network using
cellular technology and covering a much larger geographic area than WLAN.
WXGA — wide-aspect extended graphics array — A video standard for video cards
and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1280 x 800."
X
XGA — extended graphics array — A video standard for video cards and controllers
that supports resolutions up to 1024 x 768.
Z
ZIF — zero insertion force — A type of socket or connector that allows a computer
chip to be installed or removed with no stress applied to either the chip or its socket.
Zip — A popular data compression format. Files that have been compressed with the
Zip format are called Zip files and usually have a filename extension of .zip. A special
kind of zipped file is a self-extracting file, which has a filename extension of .exe. You
can unzip a self-extracting file by double-clicking it.
Zip drive — A high-capacity floppy drive developed by Iomega Corporation that uses
3.5-inch removable disks called Zip disks. Zip disks are slightly larger than regular
floppy disks, about twice as thick, and hold up to 100 MB of data.228 GlossaryIndex 229
Index
Numerics
8-in-1 memory card reader, 91
A
audio device
connecting, 69
enabling, 84
audio. See sound
B
battery
charge gauge, 55
charging, 58
checking the charge, 54
performance, 53
power meter, 55
removing, 59
replacing coin-cell battery, 181
storing, 60
BD. See Blu-ray Disc
blank cards
ExpressCards, 87
memory card, 91
removing, 89, 92
Bluetooth wireless technology
card
device status light, 25
installing, 180
Blu-ray Disc, 64-65, 67
boot sequence, 204
brightness
adjusting, 41
C
camera, 23
carnet, 186
CD
about, 64
CD-RW drive problems, 115
drive problems, 115
Check Disk, 116
cleaning
display, 206
keyboard, 206
media, 208
mouse, 207
touch pad, 207
coin-cell battery
replacing, 181230 Index
computer
crashes, 127-128
restore to previous operating
state, 145
slow performance, 118, 129
specifications, 193
stops responding, 127
conflicts
software and hardware
incompatibilities, 143
connecting
audio device, 69
Mobile Broadband network, 99
TV, 69
contacting Dell, 192
copying CDs
general information, 64
helpful tips, 66
how to, 64
copying DVDs
general information, 64
helpful tips, 66
how to, 64
D
Dell
contacting, 192
Dell Diagnostics
about, 107
starting from the Drivers and
Utilities media, 109
starting from your hard drive, 108
Dell MediaDirect
about, 26
problems, 128
Dell support site, 17
DellConnect, 188
device latch release
description, 33
device status lights
description, 24
diagnostics
Dell, 107
digital array microphones, 26
display
adjusting brightness, 41
adjusting the size of icons, 183
adjusting the size of toolbars, 183
description, 23
dual display operation, 43
resolution, 44
switching the video image, 41
documentation
End User License Agreement, 16
ergonomics, 16
online, 17
Product Information Guide, 16
regulatory, 16
safety, 16
warranty, 16
Dolby headphones, setting
up, 84Index 231
drivers
about, 139
identifying, 140
reinstalling, 140
Drivers and Utilities media, 15
about, 141
Dell Diagnostics, 107
drives
problems, 114
See also hard drive
See also optical drive
DVD
about, 64
drive problems, 115
E
End User License Agreement, 16
ergonomics information, 16
error messages, 119
ExpressCard slot
description, 28
ExpressCards, 87
blanks, 87, 89
installing, 88
removing, 89
F
Factory Image Restore, 147, 149
fan
description, 33
FCM. See Flash Cache Module
Flash Cache Module, 178
H
hard drive
description, 33
problems, 116
replacing, 156
returning to Dell, 158
hardware
conflicts, 143
Dell Diagnostics, 107
Hardware Troubleshooter, 143
hibernate mode, 57
hinge cover
removing, 160
I
icons
adjusting the size, 183
IEEE 1394 connector
description, 29
problems, 124
infrared sensor
description, 33
installing, 170232 Index
Internet connection
about, 35
options, 35
setting up, 36
IRQ conflicts, 143
K
keyboard
numeric keypad, 47
problems, 125
removing, 161
shortcuts, 48
keyboard status lights
description, 26
keypad
numeric, 47
L
labels
Microsoft Windows, 16
Service Tag, 16
lost computer, 105
M
media
playing, 61
media control buttons
Dell MediaDirect button, 68
description, 25
memory
DIMM A, 165
DIMM B, 166
installing, 163
removing, 164, 167
memory card, 91
blanks, 91-92
installing, 91
reader, 29
removing, 92
memory card reader, 91
memory module cover
description, 33
messages
error, 119
Mini Card
installing, 170
WLAN, 170
WPAN, 170
WWAN, 170
Mobile Broadband
network connections, 99
problems, 131
See also wireless switch
modem connector
description, 31
monitor. See displayIndex 233
N
network
installing WLAN Mini Card, 170
Mobile Broadband
(WWAN), 131
problems, 131
QuickSet, 183
network connector
description, 30
O
operating system
reinstalling Windows Vista, 145
P
PC Restore, 147
phone numbers, 192
power
hibernate mode, 57
line conditioners, 39
problems, 132
protection devices, 39
standby mode, 56
surge protectors, 39
UPS, 39
power button
description, 23
power light
conditions, 132
power management
adjusting settings, 183
QuickSet, 183
printer
cable, 38
connecting, 37
problems, 133
setting up, 37
USB, 38
problems
blue screen, 128
CD drive, 115
CD-RW drive, 115
computer crashes, 127-128
computer does not start up, 127
computer stops responding, 127
conflicts, 143
Dell Diagnostics, 107
Dell MediaDirect, 128
drives, 114
DVD drive, 115
error messages, 119
hard drive, 116
IEEE 1394 connector, 124
keyboard, 125
lockups, 127
network, 131
power, 132
power light conditions, 132
printer, 133
program crashes repeatedly, 127
program stops responding, 127
programs and Windows
compatibility, 127234 Index
problems (continued)
restore computer to previous
operating state, 145
restore operating system to
previous state, 144
scanner, 134
slow computer performance, 118,
129
software, 127, 129
sound and speakers, 135
speakers, 135
spyware, 118, 129
Product Information Guide, 16
Q
QuickSet, 183
QuickSet Help, 18
R
RAM. See memory
regulatory information, 16
reinstalling
Windows Vista, 145
resolution
setting, 44
S
S/PDIF digital audio
enabling, 84
Safely Remove Hardware
icon, 124
safety instructions, 16
scanner
problems, 134
screen. See display
security cable slot
description, 27
Service Tag, 16
SIM. See Subscriber Identity
Module
software
conflicts, 143
problems, 127, 129
software and hardware
incompatibilities, 143
sound
problems, 135
volume, 135
speakers
description, 33
problems, 135
volume, 135
specifications, 193
spyware, 118, 129
standby mode
about, 56
stolen computer, 105
Subscriber Identity Module, 169
support
contacting Dell, 192Index 235
support website, 17
S-video TV-out connector
description, 31
System Restore, 144-145
system setup program
commonly used options, 204
screens, 204
viewing, 204
T
taskbar
Dell Mobile Broadband Card
Utility, 131
Dell Support Utility, 18
QuickSet icon, 183
Safely Remove Hardware, 124
wireless activity indicator, 99
telephone numbers, 192
toolbars
adjusting the size, 183
touch pad, 50
cleaning, 207
customizing, 51
touch pad buttons
description, 25
track stick/touch pad buttons
description, 25
transferring information to a new
computer, 37
traveling with the computer
by air, 186
identification tag, 185
packing, 185
tips, 186
troubleshooting
conflicts, 143
Dell Diagnostics, 107
Hardware Troubleshooter, 143
restore computer to previous
operating state, 144-145
TV
connecting, 69
types, 91
U
uninterruptible power supply.
See UPS
UPS, 39
USB connector
description, 31
V
video
problems, 137
video controller
determining configuration, 21
video controller configuration
determining what controller is
installed, 21236 Index
volume
adjusting, 135
W
warranty information, 16
Windows Easy Transfer
wizard, 37
Windows Vista
Device Driver Rollback, 140
Factory Image Restore, 147
Program Compatibility
wizard, 127
reinstalling, 145
System Restore, 144-145
Windows Easy Transfer wizard, 37
Windows XP
Device Driver Rollback, 141
Hardware Troubleshooter, 143
hibernate mode, 57
PC Restore, 147
Program Compatibility
wizard, 127
reinstalling, 150
standby mode, 56
wireless
turning activity on and off, 183
wizards
Program Compatibility
wizard, 127
Windows Easy Transfer, 37
WLAN, 170
installing Mini Card, 170
WPAN
installing, 177
WWAN
installing, 173
See also Mobile Broadband
Dellt Tower UPS
500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W
Getting Started With
Your System
Démarrage avec votre système
Erste Schritte Mit Ihrem System
Начало работы c вашей системой
Inicio de su sistema
系统使用 入门指南
系統使用 入門指南
사용자의 시스템 시작하기
はじめに システムについて
H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N
www.dell.com | support.dell.comDellt Tower UPS
500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W
Getting Started
With Your System
Démarrage avec votre système
Erste Schritte Mit Ihrem System
Начало работы c вашей системой
Inicio de su sistema
系统使用 入门指南
系統使用 入門指南
사용자의 시스템 시작하기
はじめに システムについて
H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N
www.dell.com | support.dell.comNotes and Warnings
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your software.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury or in property damage incidents.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
injury.
DANGER: A DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
DANGER: Observe the following instruction to help prevent an imminently hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury:
S This UPS contains LETHAL VOLTAGES. All repairs and service should be performed by
AUTHORIZED SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY. There are NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS
inside the UPS.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
E 2009 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Phillipsis a registered trademark of Phillips Screw
Company.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their
products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
July 2009System Features |
1
System Features
Providing outstanding performance and reliability, the UPS's unique benefits include:
S Buck and Boost voltage regulation that ensures regulated voltage to your load by correcting voltage
fluctuations.
S Start-on-battery capability for powering up the UPS even if utility power is not available.
S Extended runtime with an optional External Battery Module (EBM) for 1000–1920W UPS
models.
S Two standard communication ports (USB and DB-9 serial port).
S Optional Dell Network Management Card with enhanced communication capabilities for
increased power protection and control.
S Network transient protector that guards your network communications equipment from surges.
S Advanced power management with the Dell UPS Management Software for graceful shutdowns
and power monitoring.
S Sequential shutdown and load management through separate receptacle groups called load
segments.
S Firmware that is easily upgradable without a service call.
S Backed by worldwide agency approvals.2 |
Finding Information
Finding Information
CAUTION: The Safety, Environmental, and Regulatory Information document provides important safety and
regulatory information.
What are You Looking For? Find It Here
S The user's guide for my UPS
S The user's guide for the Dell Network Management
Card
S Dell UPS Management Software
NOTE:Documentation and software updates can be
found at support.dell.com.
Dell UPS Disc
S Specifications
S How to configure UPS settings
S How to troubleshoot and solve problems
Dell UPS User's Guide
The user's guide is available on the Dell UPS disc and
on support.dell.com.
S Safety instructions
S Regulatory information
S Recycling information
Safety, Environmental, and Regulatory Information
S Warranty information
S Terms and Conditions (U.S. only)
S End User License Agreement
Dell Warranty and Support Information
S Support information Dell Support Website — support.dell.com
NOTE: Select your region or business segment to view
the appropriate support site.Installation and Startup |
3
Installation and Startup
CAUTION: Before performing the procedures in this document, read and follow the safety instructions and
important regulatory information in your Safety, Environmental, and Regulatory Information document.
CAUTION: The cabinet is heavy [500W: 11.6 kg (25.6 lb); 1000W: 18.3 kg (40.3 lb); 1920/1500W: 30.5 kg (67.2 lb)].
Use caution to unpack and move the cabinet.
This section describes the steps to set up your system for the first time.
Unpacking the System
1 Unpack your system and identify each item.
2 Discard or recycle the packaging in a responsible manner, or store it for future use.4 |
Installation and Startup
Identifying the UPS
This section shows a front and rear panel of the Dell Tower UPS. Refer to the Dell Line-Interactive
Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W User's Guide for all rear panel details.
Cover Latch
Cover Latch
LCD Panel
Scroll Button (Up or Back)
Select Button
Scroll Button (Down or Forward)
Figure 1. The Dell Tower UPS
Communication Port
Six 5-15 Receptacles
(Load Segment 1)
Network Transient
Protector
USB Port
UPS Communication Bay
On/Off Button
IEC-C14 Input
Connector
Two 5-15 Receptacles
(Load Segment 2)
EBM Connector
Figure 2. UPS Rear Panel (1000W, 120V Rear Panel)Installation and Startup |
5
Removing the UPS Front Cover
3 Remove the UPS front cover.
Push the two cover latches to release the front cover and pull up.
Removing the Battery Cover
4 Unscrew the thumbscrew on the the metal battery cover and lift up to remove the cover.6 |
Installation and Startup
Connecting the Internal Battery Connector
5 Connect the internal battery connector.
6 Replace the metal battery cover.
Torque the screw to 0.7 Nm (6.2 lb in).
7 Replace the UPS front cover.Installation and Startup |
7
Connecting the Equipment
9
Connect equipment to UPS
Connect communication cable from
computer to UPS (optional)
8
8 If you plan to use Dell UPS Management Software, connect your computer to the USB port or
RS-232 port using the supplied cable.
9 Plug the equipment to be protected into the UPS output receptacles, but do not turn on the
protected equipment.
NOTE: Verify that the total equipment ratings do not exceed the UPS capacity to prevent an overload alarm.8 |
Installation and Startup
Connecting the Power Cord
10 Verify that the power input to the UPS has adequate upstream overcurrent protection:
Table 1. Minimum Upstream Circuit Breaker Rating
UPS Output Power 120V 208V 230V
500W 15A — 15A
1000W 15A — 15A
1500W (at 100V)
1920W
20A — 15A
11 Plug the UPS power cord into a power outlet.
NOTE: For 1920/1500W models. There are two power cords in the box, one with BSMI and PSE certified
markings that can be used in Taiwan and Japan, another cord is for regions other than Taiwan and Japan.Installation and Startup |
9
Starting the UPS
12 Press the button on the UPS rear panel.
Completing the Startup
13 Verify that the Normal icon appears on the UPS status summary screen, indicating that the
UPS is operating normally and any loads are powered.
14 On the UPS status summary screen, press the button to check for active alarms or notices.
Resolve any active alarms before continuing. See “Troubleshooting” in the Dell Line-Interactive
Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W User's Guide.
If there are no active alarms, a “No Active Alarms” message appears.
15 To change other factory-set defaults, see “Operation” in the Dell Line-Interactive Tower UPS
500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W User's Guide.10 |
Installation and StartupOnduleur Tour Dellt
500 W, 1000 W et 1920/1500 W
Démarrage
avec votre système
H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N
www.dell.com | support.dell.comRemarques et avertissements
REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre logiciel.
DANGER : Un DANGER indique une situation dangereuse imminente qui, si elle n'est pas évitée, provoquera la
mort ou une blessure grave.
AVERTISSEMENT : Un AVERTISSEMENT indique une situation dangereuse potentielle qui, si elle n'est pas évitée,
pourrait provoquer la mort ou une blessure.
ATTENTION : Une ATTENTION indique une situation dangereuse potentielle qui, si elle n'est pas évitée, peut
provoquer une blessure mineure ou légère ou des dommages matériels.
DANGER : Respectez les instructions suivantes pour aider à empêcher une situation dangereuse imminente qui, si
elle n'est pas évitée, peut provoquer la mort ou des blessures graves :
S Cet onduleur contient desTENSIONS MORTELLES. Toutes les réparations et tous
les entretiens devront être effectués UNIQUEMENT PAR UN PERSONNEL
D’ENTRETIEN AGRÉÉ. Aucune pièce à l’intérieur de cet onduleur NE PEUT
ÊTRE ENTRETENUE PAR L’UTILISATEUR.
Les informations dans ce document sont soumises à modifications sans préavis.
E 2009 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés.
La reproduction de quelque manière que ce soit sans autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite.
Marques commerciales utilisées dans ce texte : Dell et le logo DELL sont des marques commerciales de Dell Inc. ; Phillips est une marque
déposée de Phillips Screw Company.
D’autres marques commerciales et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour se référer à des entités revendiquant les
marques et les noms ou leurs produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques commerciales et les noms commerciaux ne
lui appartenant pas.
Julliet 2009Caractéristiques du système |
13
Caractéristiques du système
Offrant une fiabilité et des performances remarquables, les avantages uniques de l'onduleur
comprennent :
S La régulation de tension Buck and Boost qui assure une tension régulée à votre charge en
corrigeant les fluctuations de tension.
S La capacité de démarrage-sur-batterie pour alimenter l'onduleur même si le courant du secteur
n'est pas disponible.
S Temps d'exécution prolongé avec un Module de batterie externe (EBM) en option pour les
modèles d'onduleur 1000–1920 W.
S Deux ports de communication standards (port série DB-9 et USB).
S Carte de gestion de réseau Dell optionnelle avec capacités de communication améliorées pour une
protection et un contrôle accrus de l'alimentation électrique.
S Protecteur de réseau contre les phénomènes transitoires qui protège votre équipement de
communication réseau contre les surtensions.
S Gestion avancée de l'alimentation électrique avec le Logiciel de gestion d'onduleur Dell pour des
coupures progressives et une surveillance de l'alimentation.
S Arrêt séquentiel et gestion de charge par des groupes de prises séparés appelés « segments de
charge ».
S Micrologiciel qui peut être facilement mis à niveau sans appeler le service technique.
S Soutenu par des approbations d'organismes dans le monde entier.14 |
Trouver des informations
Trouver des informations
ATTENTION! Le document Informations sur la sécurité, l'environnement et la réglementation fournit des
informations importantes sur la sécurité et la réglementation.
Que recherchez-vous ? Trouvez-le ici
S Le guide d'utilisation de mon onduleur
S Le guide d'utilisation de ma Carte de gestion de
réseau Dell
S Logiciel de gestion d'onduleur Dell
REMARQUE : Les mises à jour des documents et des
logiciels se trouvent sur support.dell.com.
Disque de l'onduleur Dell
S Spécifications
S Comment configurer les paramètres de l'onduleur
S Comment identifier et résoudre les problèmes
Guide d'utilisation de l'onduleur Dell
Le guide d'utilisation est disponible sur le disque de
l'onduleur Dell et sursupport.dell.com.
S Instructions sur la sécurit
S Informations sur la réglementation
S Informations sur le recyclage
Informations sur la sécurité, l'environnement et la
réglementation
S Informations sur la garantie
S Termes et conditions (États-Unis uniquement)
S Contrat de licence de l'utilisateur final
Informations sur l'assistance et la garantie Dell
S Informations sur l'assistance Site Internet d'assistance Dell — support.dell.com
REMARQUE : Sélectionnez votre région ou votre segment
commercial pour voir le site d'assistance approprié.Installation et démarrage |
15
Installation et démarrage
ATTENTION! Avant de réaliser les procédures de ce document, lisez et suivez les instructions de sécurité et
les informations importantes sur la réglementation qui figurent dans votre document Informations sur la
sécurité, l'environnement et la réglementation.
ATTENTION! Le module est lourd [500 W : 11,6 kg (25,6 lb) ; 1000 W : 18,3 kg (40,3 lb) ; 1920/1500 W :
30,5 kg (67,2 lb)]. Prenez toutes les précautions nécessaires pour déballer et déplacer le module.
Cette section décrit les étapes de configuration de votre système pour la première fois.
Déballage du système
1 Déballez votre système et identifiez chaque élément.
2 Jetez ou recyclez l'emballage d'une façon responsable, ou conservez-le pour une utilisation
ultérieure.16 |
Installation et démarrage
Identification de l'onduleur
Cette section montre un panneau avant et arrière de l'onduleur Tour Dell. Reportez-vous au Guide
d'utilisation de l'onduleur en baie Line-Interactive 500 W, 1000 W et 1920/1500 W pour tous les détails
sur le panneau arrière.
Loquet du couvercle
Loquet du couvercle
Panneau LCD
Bouton de défilement
(haut ou arrière)
Bouton de sélection
Bouton de défilement (bas ou avant)
Figure 1. Onduleur Tour Dell
Port de communication
Six prises 5-15
(Segment de charge 1)
Protecteur de réseau contre les
phénomènes transitoires
Port USB
Baie de communication de
l'onduleur
Bouton Marche/Arrêt
Connecteur d'entrée
CEI-C14
Deux prises 5-15
(Segment de charge 2)
Connecteur de l'EBM
Figure 2. Panneau arrière de l'onduleur (panneau arrière du 1000 W, 120 V)Installation et démarrage |
17
Retrait du couvercle avant de l'onduleur
3 Retirez le couvercle avant de l'onduleur.
Poussez les deux loquets du couvercle pour libérer le couvercle avant et levez.
Retrait du couvercle des batteries
4 Dévissez la vis à oreilles sur le couvercle métallique des batteries et levez pour retirer le couvercle.18 |
Installation et démarrage
Connexion du connecteur interne des batteries
5 Branchez le connecteur interne des batteries.
6 Remettez en place le couvercle métallique des batteries.
Serrez la vis à un couple de 0,7 N·m (6,2 lb in).
7 Remettez en place le couvercle avant de l'onduleur.Installation et démarrage |
19
Connexion de l'équipement
9
Connectez l'équipement à l'onduleur
Connectez le câble de communication de
l'ordinateur à l'onduleur (en option)
8
8 Si vous prévoyez d'utiliser le Logiciel de gestion d'onduleur Dell, connectez votre ordinateur au
port USB ou RS-232 en utilisant le câble fourni.
9 Branchez l'équipement à protéger sur les prises de sortie de l'onduleur, mais ne mettez pas
l'équipement à protéger sous tension.
REMARQUE: Pour éviter une alarme de surcharge, vérifiez que les valeurs nominales totales de l'équipement
ne dépassent pas la capacité de l'onduleur.20 |
Installation et démarrage
Connexion du cordon d'alimentation
10 Vérifiez que l'entrée d'alimentation de l'onduleur possède une protection contre les surintensités
montantes compatible avec la valeur nominale de l'intensité pouvant être acheminée par le
cordon d'alimentation.
11 Vérifiez que l'entrée d'alimentation vers l'onduleur possède une protection adéquate contre des
surintensités montantes :
Tableau 1. Valeur nominale minimale du disjoncteur amont
Puissance de sortie de l'onduleur 120 V 208 V 230 V
500 W 15 A — 15 A
1000 W 15 A — 15 A
1500 W (à 100 V)
1920 W
20 A — 15 A
12 Branchez le cordon d'alimentation de l'onduleur à une prise secteur.Installation et démarrage |
21
Démarrage de l'onduleur
13 Appuyez sur le bouton sur le panneau arrière de l'onduleur.
Achèvement du démarrage
14 Vérifiez que l'icône Normal apparaît sur l'écran de résumé d'état de l'onduleur, indiquant que
l'onduleur fonctionne normalement et que toutes les charges sont alimentées.
15 Sur l'écran de résumé d'état de l'onduleur, appuyez sur le bouton pour vérifier les avis et les
alarmes actives. Résolvez toutes les alarmes actives avant de continuer. Voir « Dépannage » dans le
Guide d'utilisation de l'onduleur en baie Line-Interactive 500 W, 1000 W et 1920/1500 W.
Si aucune alarme n'est activée, un message « Aucune alarme active » apparaît.
16 Pour changer d'autres valeurs d'usine par défaut, voir « Fonctionnement » dans le Guide
d'utilisation de l'onduleur en baie Line-Interactive 500 W, 1000 W et 1920/1500 W.22 |
Installation et démarrageDellt Tower USV
500 W, 1000 W, und 1920/1500 W
Erste Schritte
Mit Ihrem System
H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N
www.dell.com | support.dell.comHinweise und Warnungen
HINWEIS: Ein HINWEIS macht auf eine wichtige Information aufmerksam, mit deren Hilfe Sie Ihre Software optimal
nutzen können.
GEFAHR: GEFAHR macht auf eine unmittelbar gefährliche Situation aufmerksam, die zum Tod oder schweren
Verletzungen führt, wenn sie nicht vermieden wird.
WARNUNG: Eine WARNUNG macht auf eine potenziell gefährliche Situation aufmerksam, die zum Tod oder zu
Verletzungen führt, wenn sie nicht vermieden wird.
ACHTUNG: ACHTUNG macht auf eine potenziell gefährliche Situation aufmerksam, die zu geringen oder mäßigen
Verletzungen oder Sachschäden führen kann, wenn sie nicht vermieden wird.
GEFAHR: Beachten Sie den folgenden Hinweis, um eine unmittelbar gefährliche Situation zu vermeiden, die zum
Tod oder zu schweren Verletzungen führen könnte:
S Diese USV führt LEBENSGEFÄHRLICHE SPANNUNG. Sämtliche Reparatur--
und Wartungsarbeiten dürfen NUR VON
AUTORISIERTEM WARTUNGSPERSONAL durchgeführt werden. Im Inneren
der USV sind KEINE VOM BENUTZER WARTBAREN TEILEvorhanden.
Unangekündigte Änderungen der Angaben in diesem Dokument vorbehalten.
E 2009 Dell Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.
Die Vervielfältigung, gleich welcher Art, ist ohne schriftliche Genehmigung von Dell Inc. strengstens untersagt.
In diesem Text verwendete Marken: Dell und das DELL--Logo sind Marken von Dell Inc.; Phillipsist eine eingetragene Marke von Phillips
Screw Company.
In diesem Dokument können weitere Marken und Handelsnamen verwendet werden, die sich entweder auf die Personen beziehen, die diese
Marken und Namen für sich beanspruchen , oder auf deren Produkte. Dell Inc. verzichtet auf sämtliche gewerblichen Eigentumsrechte an
Marken und Handelsnamen, bei denen es sich nicht um eigene Marken und Handelsnamen handelt.
Juli 2009Systemmerkmale |
25
Systemmerkmale
Die herausragende Leistung und Zuverlässigkeit sind nur einige der Vorteile der USV-Anlagen. Sie
bieten zudem:
S Spannungsregulierung durch das „Buck and Boost“-Verfahren. Dies gewährleistet durch die
Korrektur von Unregelmäßigkeiten einen gleichbleibenden Spannungswert für Ihre Anlagen.
S Starten der Anlage im Batteriebetrieb zum Versorgen der USV mit Strom, selbst wenn kein
Netzstrom zur Verfügung steht.
S Erweiterte Laufzeit mit optionalem Externes Batteriemodul (EBM) für USV-Modelle für
1000-1920 W.
S Serienmäßige Ausstattung mit zwei Kommunikationsschnittstellen (USV-Schnittstelle und serielle
DB-9-Schnittstelle).
S Optionale Dell Netzwerkmanagementkarte mit erweiterten Kommunikationsmöglichkeiten für
verbesserten Leistungsschutz und Kontrolle.
S Netzwerkschutzeinrichtungen schützen Ihre Anlage für Netzwerkkommunikation vor
Spannungsspitzen.
S Fortgeschrittene Stromüberwachung mit der Dell USV Management Software für sicheres
Herunterfahren und Stromüberwachung.
S Abschaltsequenz und Lastenmanagement durch separate Anschlussgruppen (sogenannte
Lastsegmente).
S Firmware, die sich einfach und ohne Wartungsdienst aktualisieren lässt.
S Entspricht einschlägigen Normen auf der ganzen Welt.26 |
Auffinden von Informationen
Auffinden von Informationen
ACHTUNG: Im Dokument Informationen zu Sicherheit, Umweltschutz und Ordnungsvorschriften finden Sie
wichtige Sicherheitshinweise und Informationen zu gesetzlichen Bestimmungen.
Was suchen Sie? Hier finden Sie es
S Die Benutzeranleitung für meine USV
S Die Benutzeranleitung für die Dell
Netzwerkmanagementkarte
S Dell USV Management Software
HINWEIS:Dokumente und Softwareaktualisierungen
finden Sie unter support.dell.com.
Die Disk für die Dell USV
S Spezifikationen
S Anleitung zum Konfigurieren der
USV-Einstellungen
S Behebung von Fehlern und Lösung von Problemen
Benutzeranleitung der Dell USV
Die Benutzeranleitung finden Sie auf der Disk zu der
Dell USV und auch untersupport.dell.com.
S Sicherheitshinweise
S Informationen über Ordnungsvorschriften
S Recycling-Informationen
Informationen zu Sicherheit, Umweltschutz und
Ordnungsvorschriften
S Garantieerklärung
S AGB (nur USA)
S Lizenzvereinbarung für Endbenutzer
Informationen zu Garantie und Support von Dell
S Supportinformationen Support-Website von Dell – support.dell.com
HINWEIS: Wählen Sie Ihre Region bzw. Ihre Branche
aus, um die geeignete Support-Website aufzurufen.Installation und Inbetriebnahme |
27
Installation und Inbetriebnahme
ACHTUNG: Vor der Ausführung der Verfahren in diesem Dokument lesen Sie bitte die Sicherheitshinweise
und wichtigen Informationen zu Ordnungsvorschriften in Ihrem Dokument überInformationen zu Sicherheit,
Umweltschutz und Ordnungsvorschriften und halten Sie diese unbedingt ein.
:ACHTUNG: Das Gehäuse ist schwer [500 W: 11,6 kg (25,6 lb); 1000 W: 18,3 kg (40,3 lb); 1920/1500 W: 30,5 kg
(67,2 lb)]. Beim Auspacken und Transportieren des Gehäuses ist Vorsicht geboten.
In diesem Abschnitt werden die Schritte für die Erstkonfiguration Ihres Systems beschrieben.
Auspacken des Systems
1 Packen Sie das System aus und identifizieren Sie die einzelnen Komponenten.
2 Entsorgen oder recyceln Sie die Verpackung in umweltbewusster Weise, oder bewahren Sie sie für
den späteren Gebrauch auf.28 |
Installation und Inbetriebnahme
Beschreibung der USV
In diesem Abschnitt wird die Vorder- und Rückansicht der Dell Tower USV angezeigt. Alle
Einzelheiten zur Rückseite finden Sie in der Dell Line-Interactive Tower USV 500 W, 1000 W, und
1920/1500 W Benutzeranleitung.
Abdeckungslasche
Abdeckungslasche
LCD-Anzeigen
Bildlauftaste (aufwärts oder rückwärts)
Auswahltaste
Bildlauftaste (abwärts oder vorwärts)
Abbildung 1. Die Dell Tower USV
Kommunikationsschnittstelle
Sechs 5-15-Anschlussdosen
(Lastsegment 1)
Netzwerk-Transienten
Schutz
USB-Schnittstelle
Kommunikationssteckplatz der USV
Ein-/Ausschalttaste
IEC-C14-Eingangsanschluss
Zwei 5-15-Anschlussdosen
(Lastsegment 2)
EBM-Anschluss
Abbildung 2. Rückseite der USV (1000 W, 120 V)Installation und Inbetriebnahme |
29
Entfernen der vorderen USV-Abdeckung
3 Entfernen Sie die vordere USV-Abdeckung.
Drücken Sie auf die beiden Abdeckungslaschen, um die vordere Abdeckung zu lösen, und
ziehen Sie diese hoch.
Entfernen der Batterieabdeckung
4 Lösen Sie die Rändelschraube auf der metallenen Batterieabdeckung und heben Sie die
Abdeckung hoch, um sie zu entfernen.30 |
Installation und Inbetriebnahme
Anklemmen des Anschlusses im Inneren der Batterie
5 Klemmen Sie den Anschluss im Inneren der Batterie an.
6 Setzen Sie die die Batterieabdeckung aus Metall wieder ein.
Drehen Sie die Schraube mit einem Drehmoment von 0,7 Nm (6,2 lb in) wieder ein.
7 Bringen Sie die vordere Abdeckung der USV wieder an.Installation und Inbetriebnahme |
31
Anschließen der Anlage
9
Schließen Sie die Anlage an die USV an
Schließen Sie das Kommunikationskabel vom
Computer an die USV an (optional)
8
8 Sofern Sie die Benutzung der Dell USV Management Software planen, schließen Sie Ihren
Computer mit dem beiliegenden Kabel an die USB-Schnittstelle oder an die RS-232-Schnittstelle
an.
9 Stecken Sie Stecker der zu schützenden Geräte in die Ausgangsanschlüsse der USV ein, aber
schalten Sie die geschützten Geräte noch nicht ein.
HINWEIS: Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Gesamtnennleistung aller angeschlossenen Geräte die Kapazität
der USV nicht überschreitet, um einen Überlastalarm zu vermeiden.32 |
Installation und Inbetriebnahme
Anschließen des Netzkabels
10 Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Stromeingang der USV entsprechend dem Nennstrom des
Netzkabels mit einem Schutz gegen Spannungsspitzen ausgestattet ist.
11 Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Stromeingang der USV mit einem angemessenen Schutz gegen
Spannungsspitzen ausgestattet ist:
Tabelle 1. Mindestnennstrom der Überstromsicherung
USV-Ausgangsleistung 120 V 208 V 230 V
500 W 15 A — 15 A
1000 W 15 A — 15 A
1500 W (bei 100 V)
1920 W
20 A — 15 A
12 Stecken Sie das Netzkabel der USV in eine Netzsteckdose.Installation und Inbetriebnahme |
33
Starten der USV
13 Drücken Sie die Taste auf der Rückseite der USV.
Abschluss des Startvorgangs
14 Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Symbol für „Normal“ auf dem Bildschirm der
USV-Statusübersicht angezeigt wird. Hierdurch wird angezeigt, dass die USV ordnungsgemäß
funktioniert und dass alle angeschlossenen Lasten mit Strom versorgt werden.34 |
Installation und Inbetriebnahme
15 Wählen Sie im Bildschirm mit der USV-Statusübersicht die Schaltfläche , um zu prüfen ob eine
aktive Warnmeldung oder ein aktiver Hinweis vorliegt. Lösen Sie alle aktiven Warnmeldungen,
bevor Sie den Vorgang fortsetzen. Siehe „Fehlerbehebung“ in der Dell Line-Interactive Tower USV
500 W, 1000 W, und 1920/1500 W Benutzeranleitung.
Falls keine Warnmeldungen aktiv sind, wird die Meldung „Keine aktiven
Warnmeldungen“ angezeigt.
16 Für die Änderung anderer werkseitiger Standardeinstellungen siehe „Betrieb“ in der Dell
Line-Interactive Tower USV 500 W, 1000 W, und 1920/1500 W Benutzeranleitung.ИБП башенного типа Dellt
500 Вт, 1000 Вт и 1920/1500 Вт
Начало работы
c вашей системой
www.dell.com | support.dell.comПримечания и предупреждения
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Пометка ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ указывает на важную информацию, которая поможет
вам более эффективно использовать свое программное обеспечение.
ОПАСНОСТЬ: Пометка ОПАСНОСТЬ указывает на ситуации, в которых существует
непосредственная угроза, которая, если ее не избежать, приведет к серьезной травме или
летальному исходу.
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ: Пометка ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ указывает на потенциально опасную
ситуацию, которая, если ее не избежать, может привести к травме или летальному исходу.
ВНИМАНИЕ: Пометка ВНИМАНИЕ указывает на потенциально опасную ситуацию, которая,
если ее не избежать, может привести к травмам легкой и средней степени тяжести или к
повреждению имущества.
ОПАСНОСТЬ: Следуйте приведенным ниже инструкциям, позволяющим предупредить
непосредственную угрозу, которая, если ее не избежать, приведет к серьезной травме или
летальному исходу:
S В устройстве ИБП некоторые узлы находятся под СМЕРТЕЛЬНО ОПАСНЫМ
НАПРЯЖЕНИЕМ. Все работы по ремонту и обслуживанию должны выполняться
ТОЛЬКО УПОЛНОМОЧЕННЫМ ОБСЛУЖИВАЮЩИМ ПЕРСОНАЛОМ. В ИБП НЕТ
УЗЛОВ, ОБСЛУЖИВАЕМЫХ ПОЛЬЗОВАТЕЛЕМ.
Информация в настоящем документе может быть изменена без предварительного уведомления.
E 2009 Dell Inc. Все права защищены.
Воспроизведение данного документа любым способом безписьменного разрешения компании Dell Inc. категорически
запрещено.
Торговые знаки, используемые в данном тексте: Логотипы Dell и DELL являются торговыми знаками компании Dell
Inc.; Phillips является зарегистрированным торговым знаком компании Phillips Screw Company.
Прочие торговые знаки и торговые марки могут использоваться в данном документе для ссылки на организации,
предъявляющие права на эти знаки и марки, или на их товары. Dell Inc. отказывается от любого права собственности
на какие-либо торговые знаки или торговые марки, кроме своих собственных.
Июль 2009 г.Функции системы |
37
Функции системы
Вот уникальные преимущества, обеспечивающие исключительную эффективность и
надежность ИБП:
S Понижающая и повышающая регулировка напряжения обеспечивает подачу
стабильного напряжения на нагрузку путем коррекции колебаний напряжения.
S Функция запуска от батареи используется для питания ИБП даже при отсутствии
питания от электросети.
S Увеличенное время работы при помощи дополнительного модуля Модуль внешней
батареи (EBM) для моделей ИБП 1000 - 1920 Вт.
S Два стандартных коммуникационных порта (USB и последовательный порт DB-9).
S Дополнительная Карта сетевого управления Dell с усовершенствованными
коммуникационными возможностями улучшает защиту питания и его мониторинг.
S Защита от сетевых переходных процессов, которая предохраняет устройства
сетевой связи от скачков.
S Усовершенствованное управление питанием при помощи Программа управления ИБП
Dell обеспечивает корректное выключение нагрузки и мониторинг электропитания.
S Последовательное выключение и управление нагрузкой при помощи раздельных
групп разъемов, называемых сегментами нагрузки.
S Легко обновляемое аппаратно-программное обеспечение; для обновления нет
необходимости обращаться в службу технической поддержки.
S Утверждены международными организациями.38 |
Поиск информации
Поиск информации
ВНИМАНИЕ: Документ Информация о технике безопасности, охране окружающей
среды и нормативная информация содержит важную информацию о технике
безопасности и нормативную информацию.
Что вы ищите? Вы найдете это здесь
S Руководство пользователя для моего ИБП
S Руководство пользователя для карты Карта
сетевого управления Dell
S Программа управления ИБП Dell
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Документация и обновленные
версии ПО можно найти на сайте
support.dell.com.
Диск ИБП Dell
S Спецификации
S Как конфигурировать настройки ИБП
S Как находить и устранять неисправности и
решать проблемы
Руководство пользователя ИБП Dell
Руководство пользователя доступно на диске
ИБП Dell и на сайте support.dell.com.
S Инструкции по технике безопасности
S Нормативная информация
S Информация об утилизации
Информация о технике безопасности, охране
окружающей среды и нормативная
информация
S Информация о гарантии
S Сроки и условия (только для США)
S Лицензионное соглашение с конечным
пользователем
Информация о гарантии и поддержке Dell
S Информация о поддержке Веб-сайт поддержки Dell — support.dell.com
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Выберите свой регион или
сегмент бизнеса, чтобы увидеть
соответствующий сайт поддержки.Установка и запуск |
39
Установка и запуск
ВНИМАНИЕ: Перед выполнением процедуры, описанной в данной документации,
прочтите и выполните инструкции по технике безопасности и ознакомьтесь с важной
нормативной информацией, которая содержится в документе Информация о технике
безопасности, охране окружающей среды и нормативная информация.
ВНИМАНИЕ: ВНИМАНИЕ: Корпустяжелый (500 Вт: 11,6 кг; 1000 Вт: 18,3 кг; 1920/1500
Вт: 30,5 кг]. Проявляйте осторожность при распаковке и перемещении корпуса.
В данном разделе описываются этапы настройки системы в первый раз.
Распаковка системы
1 Распакуйте систему и проверьте каждый элемент.
2 Выбросьте или утилизируйте упаковку согласно правилам или сохраните ее для
будущего использования.40 |
Установка и запуск
Описание ИБП
В данном разделе показаны передняя и задняя панели ИБП «Башня» Dell. См.
Руководство пользователя линейно-интерактивного ИБП башенного типа 500 Вт, 1000 Вт
и 1920/1500 Вт Dell, чтобы получить подробную информацию о задней панели.
Защелка крышки
Защелка крышки
Жидкокристаллическая панель
Кнопка пролистывания
(вверх или назад)
Кнопка выбора
Кнопка пролистывания
(внизили вперед)
Рис. 1. ИБП «Башня» Dell
Коммуникационный порт
Шесть гнезд 5-15
(Сегмент нагрузки 1)
Устройство защиты от
переходных процессов в
коммуникационной сети Порт USB
Коммуникационного отсека блока
бесперебойного питания
Кнопка Вкл./Выкл
Входной разъем IEC-C14
Два гнезда 5-15
(Сегмент нагрузки 2) Разъем EBM
Рис. 2. Задняя панель ИБП (задняя панель 1000 Вт, 120 В)Установка и запуск |
41
Снятие передней крышки ИБП
3 Снимите переднюю крышку ИБП.
Нажмите на две защелки крышки, чтобы освободить переднюю крышку, и потяните
вверх.
Снятие крышки батарей
4 Отвинтите винты на металлической крышке батарей и поднимите ее, чтобы снять.42 |
Установка и запуск
Подключение разъема внутренней батареи
5 Подключите разъем внутренней батареи.
6 Установите на место металлическую крышку батарей.
Затяните винт с усилием 0,7 Нм (6,2 фунта на дюйм).
7 Установите на место переднюю крышку ИБП.Установка и запуск |
43
Подключение оборудования
9
Присоедините свое оборудование к ИБП
Подключите кабель связи от
компьютера к ИБП (факультативно)
8
8 Если вы планируете использовать Программа управления ИБП Dell, подключите свой
компьютер к USB-порту или порту RS-232 при помощи прилагающегося кабеля.
9 Подключите оборудование, которое необходимо предохранить от скачков
напряжения, к выходным гнездам ИБП, но не включайте это оборудование.
Примечание: Убедитесь, что общая паспортная мощность потребителей не превышает
мощность ИБП во избежание сигнала перегрузки.44 |
Установка и запуск
Подключение шнура питания
10 Убедитесь, что вход питания на ИБП имеет защиту от верхней перегрузки по току
согласно номинальному току шнура питания.
11 Убедитесь, что вход питания ИБП имеет соответствующую защиту от верхней
перегрузки по току:
Таблица 1. Минимальный номинал вышестоящего выключателя
Выходная мощность
ИБП
120 В 208 В 230 В
500 Вт 15 A — 15 A
1000 Вт 15 A — 15 A
1500 Вт (на 100 В)
1920 Вт
20 A — 15 A
12 Вставьте шнур питания ИБП в розетку электросети.Установка и запуск |
45
Включение ИБП
13 Нажмите кнопку на задней панели ИБП.
Завершение запуска
14 Убедитесь, что на итоговом экране состояния ИБП появилась пиктограмма обычного
режима , обозначающая, что ИБП работает нормально и подает электропитание
на существующие нагрузки.46 |
Установка и запуск
15 На итоговом экране состояния ИБП нажмите кнопку , чтобы проверить, активны ли
аварийные сигналы или извещения. Отреагируйте на все активные сигналы, прежде
чем продолжить. См. Руководство пользователя линейно-интерактивного ИБП
башенного типа 500 Вт, 1000 Вт и 1920/1500 Вт Dell, раздел «Поиск и устранение
неисправностей».
При отсутствии активных аварийных сигналов появится сообщение «Активные
аварийные сигналы отсутствуют».
16 Чтобы изменить прочие заводские настройки по умолчанию см. Руководство
пользователя линейно-интерактивного ИБП башенного типа 500 Вт, 1000 Вт и
, раздел «Эксплуатация».UPS de la torre de Dellt
500 W, 1000 W y 1920/1500 W
Inicio de
su sistema
H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N
www.dell.com | support.dell.comNotas y advertencias
NOTA: Una NOTA indica información importante que lo ayuda a utilizar mejor el software.
PELIGRO: Un PELIGRO indica una situación inminentemente peligrosa que, si no se evita, dará como resultado la
muerte o una lesión grave.
AVISO: Una ADVERTENCIA indica una situación potencialmente peligrosa que, si no se evita, podría dar como
resultado la muerte o una lesión.
PRECAUCIÓN: Una PRECAUCIÓN indica una situación potencialmente peligrosa que, si no se evita, puede dar
como resultado una lesión moderada o menor, o en incidentes de daño de la propiedad.
PELIGRO: Cumpla con la siguiente instrucción para evitar una situación inminentemente peligrosa que, de no
evitarse, dará como resultado la muerte o una lesión grave:
S Esta UPS contiene VOLTAJES LETALES. SÓLO EL PERSONAL DE SERVICIO AUTORIZADO
debe realizar las reparaciones y el servicio. SÓLO EL PERSONAL DE SERVICIO AUTORIZADO
dentro de la UPS.
La información de este documento se encuentra sujeta a cambios sin previo aviso.
E 2009 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados.
Queda estrictamente prohibida cualquier forma de reproducción sin el previo consentimiento de Dell Inc. por escrito.
Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell y el logotipo de DELL son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc.; Phillips es una marca
comercial registrada de Phillips Screw Company.
Es posible que en este documento se utilicen otras marcas y nombres comerciales para hacer referencia a las entidades que responden a
dichas marcas y nombres o a sus productos. Dell Inc. niega cualquier interés en la propiedad de las marcas y nombres comerciales de
terceros.
julio de 2009Características del sistema |
49
Características del sistema
Al brindar rendimiento y confiabilidad sobresalientes, los beneficios exclusivos de la UPS incluyen:
S Regulación del aumento y la reducción de voltaje que garantiza un voltaje constante para la carga,
corrigiendo así las fluctuaciones.
S Capacidad de arranque en batería para poner en funcionamiento la UPS aun cuando el suministro
eléctrico no esté disponible.
S Tiempo de ejecución con un Módulo de batería externa opcional (EBM) para los modelos de UPS
1000-1920 W.
S Dos puertos de comunicación estándar (USB y puerto serie).
S Tarjetas opcionales Tarjeta de gestión de red de Dell con capacidades de comunicación mejoradas
para lograr mayor control y protección del suministro eléctrico.
S Protector transitorio de redes que preserva a su equipo de comunicaciones en red de las
sobretensiones.
S El manejo avanzado del suministro eléctrico con Software de Gestión de UPS de Dell permite el
apagado ordenado y la supervisión del suministro eléctrico.
S El apagado secuencial y la gestión de carga mediante grupos de receptáculos separados que se
denominan segmentos de carga.
S Firmware que se actualiza fácilmente sin necesidad de llamar al cliente.
S Respaldado por las aprobaciones de agencias a nivel mundial.50 |
Búsqueda de información
Búsqueda de información
PRECAUCIÓN: El documento Información Ambiental, Regulatoria y de Seguridad brinda información
regulatoria y sobre seguridad importante.
¿Qué está buscando? Encuéntrelo aqu
S La guía del usuario para mi UPS
S La guía del usuario para la Tarjeta de gestión de red
de Dell
S Software de Gestión de UPS de Dell
NOTA:La documentación y la actualización de software se
pueden encontrar en support.dell.com.
Disco de la UPS de Dell
S Especificaciones
S Cómo configurar los valores de la UPS
S Cómo diagnosticar las fallas y resolver problemas
Guía del usuario de la UPS de Dell
La guía del usuario está disponible en el disco de la
UPS de Dell y en support.dell.com.
S Instrucciones de seguridad
S Información regulatoria
S Información sobre reciclado
Información Ambiental, Regulatoria y de Seguridad
S Información sobre seguridad
S Términos y condiciones (sólo EE. UU.)
S Acuerdo de licencia del usuario final
Información sobre soporte y garantía de Dell
S Información sobre soporte Sitio web de soporte de Dell — support.dell.com
NOTA: Seleccione su región o segmento de negocio para
visualizar el sitio de soporte correspondiente.Instalación y arranque |
51
Instalación y arranque
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de realizar los procedimientos que se describen en este documento, lea y cumpla con
las instrucciones de seguridad y la información regulatoria importante en su documento Información
Ambiental, Regulatoria y de Seguridad.
PRECAUCIÓN: El gabinete es pesado [500 W: 11,6 kg (25,6 lb); 1000 W: 18,3 kg (40,3 lb); 1920/1500 W: 30,5 kg
(67,2 lb)]. Tenga precaución al desembalar y trasladar el gabinete.
En la presente sección, se describen los pasos para configurar su sistema por primera vez.
Cómo desembalar el sistema
1 Desembale el sistema e identifique cada elemento.
2 Deseche o recicle el embalaje de una manera responsable o guárdelo para un uso futuro.52 |
Instalación y arranque
Identificación de la UPS
En la presente sección, se muestra un panel frontal y posterior de la UPS de la Torre de Dell. Consulte
la Guía del usuario de la UPS de la torre de la línea interactiva de Dell 500 W, 1000 W y 1920/1500 W
para obtener todos los detalles del panel posterior.
Pestillo de la
Pestillo de la cubierta
cubierta
Panel LCD
Botón de desplazamiento
(hacia arriba o hacia atrás)
Botón de selección
Botón de desplazamiento
(hacia abajo o hacia delante)
Figure 1. La UPS de la Torre de Dell
Puerto de comunicaciones
Seis receptáculos de 5-15
(Segmento de carga 1)
Protector de red a
transitorios
Puerto USB
Compartimiento de
comunicación de la UPS
Botón de
Encendido/Apagado
Conector de entrada
IEC-C14
Dos receptáculos de 5-15
(Segmento de carga 2)
Conector EBM
Figure 2. Panel posterior de la UPS (panel posterior 1000 W, 120 V)Instalación y arranque |
53
Cómo retirar la cubierta frontal de la UPS
3 Extraiga la cubierta frontal de la UPS.
Empuje las dos pestillas de la cubierta para liberar la cubierta frontal y levantarla.
Cómo extraer la cubierta de la batería
4 Desatornille el tornillo de apriete manual de la cubierta metálica de la batería y levante para
extraer la cubierta.54 |
Instalación y arranque
Cómo conectar el conector de la batería interna
5 Conecte el conector de la batería interna.
6 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta metálica de la batería.
Apriete el tornillo a 0,7 N·m (6,2 lb pulg.).
7 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta frontal de la UPS.Instalación y arranque |
55
Conectar el equipo
9
Conecte el equipamiento a la UPS
Conecte el cable de comunicación de
la computadora a la UPS (opcional)
8
8 Si planea utilizar el Software de Gestión de UPS de Dell, conecte su equipo al puerto USB o el
puerto RS-232 mediante el uso del cable suministrado.
9 Enchufe el equipo para que esté protegido en los receptáculos exteriores de la UPS, pero no
encienda el equipo protegido.
NOTA: Verifique que los regímenes totales del equipo no excedan la capacidad de la UPS para prevenir una
alarma de sobrecarga.56 |
Instalación y arranque
Conexión del cable de energía
10 Verifique que la entrada de energía a la UPS tenga protección de sobrecarga de corriente
ascendente de acuerdo con el régimen de corriente del cable de energía.
11 Verifique que la entrada de energía a la UPS tenga protección de sobrecarga de corriente
ascendente adecuada:
Table 1. Régimen mínimo del disyuntor ascendente
Potencia de salida de la UPS 120 V 208 V 230 V
500 W 15 A — 15 A
1000W 15 A — 15 A
1500 W (a 100 V)
1920 W
20 A — 15 A
12 Conecte el cable de alimentación de la UPS a un tomacorriente.Instalación y arranque |
57
Inicio de la UPS
13 Presione el botón del panel posterior de la UPS.
Cómo completar el arranque
14 Verifique que el ícono Normal aparezca en la pantalla de resumen del estado UPS, que indica
que la UPS funciona normalmente y todas las cargas están energizadas.58 |
Instalación y arranque
15 En la pantalla de resumen de estado de UPS, presione el botón para comprobar las
notificaciones y las alarmas activas. Solucione todas las alarmas activas antes de continuar.
Consulte el “Diagnóstico de fallas” en la Guía del usuario de la UPS de la torre de la línea
interactiva de Dell 500 W, 1000 W y 1920/1500 W.
Si no hay ninguna alarma activa, se muestra el mensaje “Ninguna alarma activa”.
16 Para cambiar otros valores predeterminados establecidos de fábrica, consulte “Funcionamiento”
en la Guía del usuario de la UPS de la torre de la línea interactiva de Dell 500 W, 1000 W
y 1920/1500 W.Dellt 塔式 UPS
500W, 1000W, 和 1920/1500W
系统使用
入门指南
H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N
www.dell.com | support.dell.com注意和警告
注意: “注意”表示可帮助您更好使用本软件的重要信息。
危险:“危险”表示紧急危险情况，如果不加以避免，将导致死亡或严重的伤害。
警告:“警告”表示潜在危险情况，如果不加以避免，将会导致死亡或伤害。
小心:“小心”表示潜在危险情况，如果不加以避免，可能导致轻度或中度伤害，或财产损失事故。
危险: 遵守下列须知有助于防止紧急危险情况，其若不加以避免，将导致死亡或严重的伤害：
S 本 UPS 包含危险致命的电压。所有维修和服务都只能由经过授权的维修人员进行。UPS
中没有用户可自行维修的部件。
本文档所含信息如有更改，恕不另行通知。
E 2009 Dell Inc. 保留所有权利。
未经 Dell Inc. 书面允许，严禁以任何形式进行复制。
本文中使用的商标：Dell和DELL 徽标为 Dell Inc.的商标；Phillips 为 Phillips Screw Company 的注册商标。
本文件中可能会使用其它商标或商业名称来指称拥有该商标或名称权利的实体或其产品。Dell Inc.
对不属于自己的商标和商品名称，不拥有任何产权利益。
2009 年 7 月系统性能 |
61
系统性能
该 UPS 可提供杰出的性能与可靠性，其独特优势包括：
S 降压与升压调节，通过调节电压波动确保您的负荷电压稳定。
S 即使没有公用电源，电池启动功能也能给 UPS 供电。
S 对 1000–1920W UPS 型号，通过可选的外部电池模块（EBM）延长运行时间。
S 两个标准通信端口（USB 和 DB-9 串行口）。
S 为了加强电源保护和控制，可选择增强通信能力的 Dell 网络管理卡。
S 网络抗瞬变装置可保护您的网络通信设备免受电涌的损害。
S 高级电源管理，用Dell UPS 管理软件进行平滑关机和电力监控。
S 通过称为载入段的单独插座组进行顺序关机和负荷管理。
S 不必拨打服务电话，即可自行对固件进行方便升级。
S 全球代理认证提供支持。62 |
查找信息
查找信息
CAUTION:安全、环保和法规信息文件提供了重要的安全和法规信息。
您正在寻找什么？ 在此查找
S 我的 UPS 的用户指南
S Dell 网络管理卡 用户指南
S Dell UPS 管理软件
注意：文件和软件更新可在 support.dell.com
找到。
Dell UPS 光盘
S 规格
S 如何配置 UPS 设置
S 如何排查故障和解决问题
Dell UPS 用户指南
用户指南可从 Dell UPS 光盘和 support.dell.com
上找到。
S 安全操作说明
S 行政法规信息
S 回收信息
安全、环保和法规信息
S 保修信息
S 条款和条件（仅限美国）
S 最终用户许可协议
Dell 保修和支持信息
S 支持信息 Dell 支持网站 — support.dell.com
注意：选择您的区域或业务部门，以查看合适的支
持网站。安装和启动 |
63
安装和启动
CAUTION: 在进行本文件中的步骤之前，请先阅读和遵循 安全、环保和法规信息
文件中的安全操作说明和重要法规信息。
CAUTION:小心：机箱较重 [500W: 11.6 千克（25.6 磅）；1000W：18.3 千克（40.3
磅）；1920/1500W： 30.5 千克 （67.2 磅）]。请在拆开包装和搬动机箱时特别小心。
本节描述首次安装系统的步骤。
打开系统
1 打开系统，查看每个物品项目。
2 以负责任的方式处理包装材料或回收循环利用，或者收起存放以备将来使用。64 |
安装和启动
UPS 识别
本节介绍 Dell 塔式 UPS 的前面板和后面板。后面板详细情况请参见 Dell 在线互动塔式 UPS
500W, 1000W, 和 1920/1500W 用户指南 。
外盖闩锁
外盖闩锁
LCD 显示面板
滚动按钮（向上或向后）
选择按钮
滚动按钮（向下或向前）
图 1. Dell 塔式 UPS
通信端口
六个 5-15 插座（载入段 1）
网络抗瞬变装置
USB 端口
UPS 通信槽
开/关按钮
IEC-C14
输入连接器
两个 5-15 插座（载入段 2） EBM 接线器
图 2. UPS 后面板（1000W （瓦），120V （伏）后面板）安装和启动 |
65
取下 UPS 前盖
3 取下 UPS 前盖。
推动两个外盖闩锁，以松开前盖，并拉起。
取下电池盖
4 松开电池金属盖上的翼形螺钉，并提起以取下外盖。66 |
安装和启动
连接内部电池连接器
5 连接内部电池接线器。
6 重新放回电池金属盖。
将螺钉拧至 0.7 牛米（N·m） （6.2 磅英寸（lb in））。
7 重新放回 UPS 前盖。安装和启动 |
67
连接设备
9
将设备连接到 UPS 上
将计算机的通信电缆连接到
UPS 上（可选）
8
8 如果您计划使用Dell UPS 管理软件，用提供的电缆将您的电脑连接到 USB 端口或 RS-232
端口。
9 将需要保护的设备插入 UPS 输出插座，但不要启动受保护的设备。
注意:确保全部设备的总额定值不超过 UPS 的负载能力，以防止出现过载警报。68 |
安装和启动
连接电源线
10 根据电源线额定电流验证 UPS 的功率输入具有上游过电流保护。
11 验证 UPS 的功率输入具有足够的上游过电流保护：
图 1. 最小上游断路器额定值
UPS 输出功率 120V（伏） 208V（伏） 230V（伏）
500W（瓦） 15A（安） — 15A（安）
1000W（瓦） 15A（安） — 15A（安）
1500W （瓦）
（在100V（伏）时）
1920W（瓦）
20A（安） — 15A（安）
12 将 UPS 电源线插入电源插座。安装和启动 |
69
启动 UPS
13 按下 UPS 后面板上的 按钮。
完成启动
14 确认“正常”（Normal）图标 显示在 UPS 状态概要屏幕上，这表明 UPS
运转正常，任何负荷都有动力供给。
15 在 UPS 状态屏上，按下 按钮，查看现有警报或通知。 解决所有警报问题，然后继续。
参见Dell 在线互动塔式 UPS 500W, 1000W, 和 1920/1500W 用户指南中的“故障处理”。
如果没有现有警报，会出现“无现有警报”（No Active Alarms）信息。
16 要更改其它出厂设置默认项，请参见Dell 在线互动塔式 UPS 500W, 1000W, 和 1920/1500W
用户指南中的“操作”。70 |
安装和启动Dellt 塔式 UPS
500W、1000W 和 1920/1500W
系統使用
入門指南
H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N
www.dell.com | support.dell.com注意和警告
注意: 「注意」表示可幫助您更好地使用本軟體的重要資訊。
危險: 「危險」表示緊急危險情況，如果不加以避免，將導致死亡或嚴重的傷害。
警告: 「警告」表示潛在危險情況，如果不加以避免，將會導致死亡或嚴重的傷害。
小心:「小心」表示潛在危險情況，如果不加以避免，可能導致輕度或中度傷害，或財產損失事故。
危險: 遵守以下須知有助於防止緊急危險情況，其若不加以避免，將導致死亡或嚴重的傷害。
S 本 UPS 包含危險致命的電壓。所有維修和服務都只能由經過授權的維修人員進行。UPS
中沒有可由使用者自行維修的零件。
本文件所含資訊如有變更，恕不另行通知。
E 2009 Dell Inc. 保留所有權利。
未經 Dell Inc. 書面允許，嚴格禁止以任何形式進行複製。
本文中使用的商標：Dell和Dell 標誌為 Dell Inc.的商標；Phillips 為 Phillips Screw Company 的註冊商標。
本文件中可能會使用其他商標或商業名稱來指涉擁有該商標或名稱權利的實體或其產品。Dell Inc.
對不屬於自己的商標和商品名稱，不擁有任何產權利益。
2009 年 7 月系統性能 |
73
系統性能
該 UPS 可提供傑出的性能與可靠性，包括下列獨有優勢：
S 降壓與升壓調節，藉由調節電壓波動確保您的負載電壓穩定。
S 電池啟動功能使您能在沒有外部電源時，也能使 UPS 通電。
S 1000–1920W UPS 型號可藉由選配的 外部電池模組（EBM）延長運行時間。
S 兩個標準通信連接埠（USB 和 DB--9 序列埠）。
S 選配的 Dell 網路管理卡 具有增強通訊功能，可增加電源保護和控制。
S 網路瞬態過電保護裝置可保護您的網路通信設備免受電壓突波的損害。
S 使用Dell UPS 管理軟體的先進電源管理，進行平滑關機和電力監控。
S 藉由稱為負載區段的單獨插座組進行順序關機和負載管理。
S 不必撥打服務電話，即可自行輕鬆的升級韌體。
S 提供全球代理商認證支援。74 |
尋找資訊
尋找資訊
CAUTION: 安全、環保和法規資訊文件提供重要的安全和法規資訊。
您正在尋找什麼？ 在此尋找
S 我的 UPS 的使用者指南
S Dell 網路管理卡 使用者指南
S Dell UPS 管理軟體
注意：文件和軟體更新可在 support.dell.com 找到。
Dell UPS 光碟
S 規格
S 如何進行 UPS 設定
S 如何排除故障和解決問題
Dell UPS 使用者指南
使用者指南可從 Dell UPS 光碟和 support.dell.com
上取得。
S 安全操作說明
S 行政法規資訊
S 回收資訊
安全、環保和法規資訊
S 保固資訊
S 條款與條件（僅限美國）
S 一般使用者授權協議
Dell 保固和支援資訊
S 支援資訊 Dell 支援網站 — support.dell.com
注意：選擇您的區域或業務部門，以查看合適的支援
網站。安裝和啟動 |
75
安裝和啟動
CAUTION: 在進行本文件中的步驟之前，請先閱讀和遵循 安全、環保和法規資訊
文件中的安全操作說明和重要法規資訊。
CAUTION:小心: 機箱較重 [500W； 11.6 公斤 （25.6 磅）； 1000W； 18.3 公斤 （40.3 磅）；
1920/1500W： 30.5 公斤 （67.2 磅）]。 在拆開包裝和搬動機箱時請特別小心。
本節描述首次安裝系統的步驟。
拆除系統包裝
1 拆除系統包裝，並檢查確定每個項目。
2 以負責任的方式棄置或回收包裝材料，或者將其存放以備將來使用。76 |
安裝和啟動
UPS 的識別
本節介紹 Dell 塔式 UPS 的前面板和後面板。後面板詳細情況請參見 Dell在線互動機架式 UPS
500W、1000W、和 1920/1500W使用者指南。
外蓋閂鎖
外蓋閂鎖
LCD 顯示面板
捲軸按鈕（向上或向後）
選擇按鈕
捲軸按鈕（向下或向前）
圖 1. Dell 塔式UPS
通信連接埠
六個 5-15 插座（負載區段 1）
網路瞬態過電保護裝置
USB 連接埠
UPS 通信槽
開/關按鈕
IEC--C14
輸入連接器
兩個 5-15 插座（負載區段 2） EBM 接線器
圖 2. UPS 後面板（1000W，120V 後面板）安裝和啟動 |
77
取下 UPS 前蓋
3 取下 UPS 前蓋。
推動兩個外蓋閂鎖，以鬆開前蓋並將其拉起。
取下電池蓋
4 鬆開電池金屬蓋上的翼形螺釘，提起以取下外蓋。78 |
安裝和啟動
連接內部電池連接器
5 連接內部電池接線器。
6 重新放囘電池金屬蓋。
將螺釘擰至 0.7 牛米（N·m）（6.2 磅吋（lb in））。
7 重新放囘 UPS 前蓋。安裝和啟動 |
79
連接設備
9
將設備連接到 UPS 上
將電腦的通信電纜連接
到 UPS 上（可選
8
8 如果您計劃使用Dell UPS 管理軟體，請使用提供的電纜將您的電腦連接到 USB連接埠或
RS--232 連接埠。
9 將要保護的設備插入 UPS 輸出插座，但不要開啟受保護設備的電源。
注意: 確保全部設備的縂額定值未超過 UPS 的負載能力，以防止出現過載警報。80 |
安裝和啟動
連接電源線
10 根據電源線額定電流驗證 UPS 的電源輸入具有上游過電保護。
11 驗證 UPS 的電源輸入具有足夠的上游過電保護：
表 1. 最小上游斷路器額定值
UPS 輸出功率 120V（伏） 208V（伏） 230V（伏）
500W（瓦） 15A（安） — 15A（安）
1000W（瓦） 15A（安） — 15A（安）
1500W（瓦）
（當100V（伏）時）
1920W（瓦）
20A（安） — 15A（安）
12 將 UPS 電源線插入電源插座。安裝和啟動 |
81
啟動 UPS
13 按下 UPS 後面板上的 按鈕。
完成啟動
14 確認「正常」（Normal）圖示 顯示在 UPS 狀態概要螢幕上，這表明 UPS 運作正常，
任何負載都有電力提供。
15 在 UPS 狀態概要螢幕上，按下 按鈕，查看作用中的警報或通知。解決所有警報問題，
然後繼續。 參見 Dell在線互動機架式 UPS 500W、1000W和 1920/1500W使用者指南
中的「故障處理」。
如果沒有作用中的警報，會出現「無作用中警報」（No Active Alarms）訊息。
16 若要變更其它出廠預設設定，請參見Dell在線互動塔式 UPS 500W, 1000W和 1920/1500W
使用者指南中的「操作」。82 |
安裝和啟動Dellt Tower UPS
500W, 1000W, 1920/1500W
사용자의 시스템
시작하기
H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N
www.dell.com | support.dell.com참고 및 경고
참고:"참고"는 소프트웨어를 더 잘 활용하는 데 도움이 되는 중요한 정보를 나타냅니다.
위험:"위험"은 피하지 않을 경우, 급박한 위험 상황이 사망이나 중상의 결과를 야기할 수 있음을
나타냅니다.
경고:"경고"는 피하지 않을 경우 죽음이나 상해를 야기할 수 있는 잠재적 위험 상황을 표시합니다.
주의:"주의"는 피하지 않을 경우 경미하거나 보통의 상해 또는 재산 손실 사고를 야기할 수 있는 잠재적
위험 상황을 표시합니다.
위험: 아래의 지시사항을 준수하여, 피하지 않을 경우 사망이나 중상의 결과를 야기할 수 있는 급박한 위험
상황을 방지하십시오.
S UPS는 사망에 이를 수 있는 전압을 갖고 있습니다. 모든 수리와 정비는 자격있는 서비스
요원만이 수행해야 합니다. UPS 내부에는 사용자가 정비할 수 없는 부품이 있습니다.
이 문서에 포함된 정보는 고지없이 변경될 수 있습니다.
E 2009 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Dell Inc.의 서면 허락 없이 어떤 방식으로든 복제를 하는 것은 엄격히 금지됩니다.
이 문서에서 사용된 상표 : Dell및DELL로고는 Dell Inc.의 상표입니다. Phillips는Phillips Screw Company 의 등록상표입니다.
기타 상표와 상호를 관련 상표 및 명칭 또는 관련 제품에 대한 권리를 가지는 당사자를 지칭하기 위해 이 문서에서 사용될 수
있습니다. Dell Inc.는 Dell Inc.가 소유하지 않은 상표 및 상호에 대한 재산적 이해관계를 부인합니다.
2009 년 7월시스템 기능 |
85
시스템 기능
탁월한 성능과 신뢰도를 제공하면서, 본 UPS는 다음과 같은 특유의 장점을 지닙니다.
S 전압 변동을 교정하여 사용자의 부하에 대한 조정 전압을 보장하는 승강압형 전압 조정.
S 상용 전력을 사용할 수 없는 경우에도 UPS에 전력을 공급하는 스타트온 배터리
(start--on--battery) 기능.
S 선택사양인 1000–1920W UPS 모델용 외장 배터리 모듈(EBM)을 갖춘 확장 런타임.
S 2개의 표준 통신 포트 (USB 및 DB--9 시리얼 포트).
S 전원 보호 및 제어 능력을 제고하기 위한 강화된 통신 기능을 갖춘 선택사양인
Dell Network Management Card.
S 네트워크 통신 장비를 서지(surge)로부터 보호하는 네트워크 과도전류(transient) 프로텍터.
S 안정적인 종료 및 전원 감시를 위한 Dell UPS Management Software로 수행되는 고급 전원
관리.
S 로드 세그먼트라고 하는 별도의 콘센트 그룹을 통한 순차적 종료 및 부하 관리.
S 서비스 요청 없이도 쉽게 업그레이드할 수 있는 펌웨어.
S 세계적인 인증기관의 각종 인증을 득함.86 |
정보 찾아보기
정보 찾아보기
주의:안전, 환경, 및 규제 관련 정보 문서는 중요한 안전 및 규제 정보를 제공합니다.
찾는 정보 항목 정보의 소재
S UPS용 사용자 설명서
S Dell Network Management Card용 사용자 설명서
S Dell UPS Management Software
참고: 문서 및 소프트웨어 업데이트는
support.dell.com에서 조회할 수 있습니다.
Dell UPS 디스크
S 사양
S UPS 설정 구성 방법
S 문제점 처리 및 해결 방법
Dell UPS 사용자 설명서
사용자 설명서는 Dell UPS 디스크 및
support.dell.com에서 조회할 수 있습니다.
S 안전 지침
S 규제 정보
S 재활용 정보
안전, 환경, 및 규제 관련 정보
S 보증 정보
S 약관 (미국만 해당)
S 최종사용자 라이센스 계약
Dell 보증 및 지원 정보
S 지원 정보 Dell 지원 웹사이트 — support.dell.com
참고:적절한 지원 사이트를 보려면 해당
지역이나 사업분야를 선택하십시오.설치 및 시동 |
87
설치 및 시동
주의:본 문서의 절차를 수행하기 전에 안전, 환경, 및 규제 관련 정보 문서에 있는 안전 지침 및 중요한
규제정보를 읽고 준수하십시오.
주의:캐비닛은 무겁습니다[500W : 11.6 kg (25.6 lb); 1000W : 18.3 kg (40.3 lb); 1920/1500W :
30.5 kg (67.2 lb)]. 주의하여 캐비닛의 포장을 풀고 캐비닛을 옮기십시오.
이 절은 귀하의 시스템을 처음 설치하는 절차를 설명합니다.
시스템 포장풀기
1 시스템 포장을 풀고 각 품목을 확인하십시오.
2 포장은 해당 처리방식에 따라 폐기하거나 재활용하십시오. 또는, 추후 사용하려면
보관하십시오.88 |
설치 및 시동
UPS 확인하기
이 절에서는 Dell Tower UPS의 앞면 패널과 뒷면 패널을 보여줍니다. 모든 뒷면 패널의 세부에
대해서는 Dell Line--Interactive Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, 1920/1500W 사용자 설명서를
참조하십시오.
덮개 걸쇠
덮개 걸쇠
LCD패널
스크롤 버튼(위로 또는 뒤로)
버튼 선택
스크롤 버튼(아래로 또는 앞으로)
그림 1. Dell Tower UPS
통신 포트
6개의5-15콘센트
(로드 세그먼트1)
네트워크 과도전류
프로텍터
USB포트
UPS통신 베이
ON/OFF버튼
IEC-C14입력
커넥터
2개의5-15콘센트
(로드 세그먼트 2)
EBM 커넥터
그림 2. UPS 뒷면 패널 (1000W, 120V 뒷면 패널)설치 및 시동 |
89
UPS 앞면 덮개 제거하기
3 UPS 앞면 덮개를 제거하십시오.
두 개의 덮개 걸쇠를 밀어서 앞면 덮개를 풀고 당겨 올리십시오.
배터리 덮개 제거하기
4 금속 배터리 덮개의 손나사를 풀고 들어올려 덮개를 제거하십시오.90 |
설치 및 시동
내부 배터리 커넥터 연결하기
5 내부 배터리 커넥터를 연결하십시오.
6 금속 배터리 덮개를 교체하십시오.
나사에 0.7 N·m (6.2 lb in)의 토크를 주십시오.
7 UPS 앞면 덮개를 교체하십시오.설치 및 시동 |
91
장비 연결하기
9
장비를UPS로 연결
컴퓨터에서UPS로 통신 케이블을
연결(선택사양)
8
8 Dell UPS Management Software를 사용하실 계획이라면, 제공된 케이블을 이용하여 컴퓨터를
USB 포트나 RS--232 포트로 연결하십시오.
9 보호할 장비를 UPS 출력 콘센트에 꽂되 켜지는 마십시오.
참고: 과부하 경보를 방지하려면 장비의 전체 정격사양이 UPS 용량을 초과하지 않도록 확인하십시오.92 |
설치 및 시동
전원 코드 연결하기
10 UPS로 입력되는 전원이 전원코드 전류 정격에 따라 업스트림 과전류 보호를 받고 있는지
확인하십시오.
11 UPS로 입력되는 전원이 적당한 업스트림 과전류에 대해 보호 받고 있는지 확인하십시오.
표 1. 최소 업스트림 회로차단기 정격
UPS 출력 전원 120V 208V 230V
500W 15A — 15A
1000W 15A — 15A
1500W (100V)
1920W
20A — 15A
12 UPS 전원코드를 전원 콘센트에 연결하십시오.설치 및 시동 |
93
UPS 시동하기
13 UPS 앞면 패널의 버튼을 누르십시오.
시동 완료하기
14 UPS가 정상적으로 작동하고 있고 모든 부하가 전력을 공급받고 있음을 표시하는, 정상
아이콘 이 UPS 상태 요약 화면에 나타나는지 확인하십시오.
15 UPS 상태 요약 화면에서, 활성 경보나 통지를 확인하려면 버튼을 누르십시오. 후속
작업을 계속하기 전에 활성 경보를 처리하십시오. Dell Line--Interactive Tower UPS 500W,
1000W, 1920/1500W 사용자 설명서의 "장애처리"를 참조하십시오.
활성 경보가 없을 경우, "활성 경보 없음" 메시지가 나타납니다.
16 기타 공장설정값을 변경하려면 Dell Line--Interactive Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, 1920/1500W
사용자 설명서의 "작동"을 참조하십시오.94 |
설치 및 시동Delltタワー型UPS
500W、1000W、および1920/1500W
はじめに
システムについて
H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N
www.dell.com | support.dell.com注意および警告
注記: 「注記」は、ソフトウェアを有効に利用するための重要な情報を示しています。
危険: 「危険」は、回避しないとほぼ確実に死亡、または重傷を招く危険な状況を示しています。
警告: 「警告」は、回避しないと死亡、または重傷を招く潜在的に危険な状況を示しています。
注意: 「注意」は、回避しないと軽傷、または中程度の傷害を招く恐れがある潜在的に危険な状況を示
しています。
危険:
避しないとほぼ確実に死亡、または重傷を招く危険な状況を防ぐため、以下の説明をよくお読みくだ
さい。
S このUPSの中には致死的な電圧が掛かっています。 すべての修理や点検は、公認のサービ
ススタッフのみが行わなければいけません。
当資料の情報は、予告なく変更されることがあります。
E 2009 Dell Inc.無断複写・転載を禁じます。
Dell Inc.の書面による許可のない複写は、いかなる形態においても厳重に禁じられています。.
DellおよびDELLのロゴは、Dell Inc.の登録商標です：Phillipsは、Phillips Screw Companyの登録商標です。
本書に使用されているその他の登録商標および商標名は、商標や名称を主張する事業体、あるいは製品のいずれかに言及しま
す。Dell Inc.は、Dell自身が所有する登録商標および商標権におけるいかなる所有権を一切放棄します。
2009年7月システムの特徴 |
97
システムの特徴
UPSは優れた性能や信頼性を提供し、以下のような独自の利点がございます：
S 電圧変動を修正することで、負荷への一貫した電圧を保証する「昇降圧」電圧調節。
S 外部電力がないときでもUPSの電力を入れることができる始動電池の能力。
S 拡張ランタイムおよびオプションとして1000--1920W UPS型用
の外付けバッテリーモジュール（外付けバッテリーモジュール）付き。
S 2つの標準通信ポート（USBおよびDB--9シリアルポート）。
S オプションとして、増加電力の保護や制御を行う高度通信機能付きDell
ネットワークマネージメントカード。
S サージからネットワーク通信装置を保護するネットワーク過度電流プロテクタ。
S スムースなシャットダウンや電力管理を行うDell UPS制御ソフトウェアおよび高度電力
管理。
S 負荷セグメントと呼ばれる個別のレセプタクルグループを通じた逐次シャットダウンおよび
負荷制御。
S カスタマーサービスに問い合わせる必要なく、
簡単にアップグレードができるファームウェア。
S 世界中の代理店の承認による支持。98 |
情報検出
情報検出
注意：:
安全、環境、規則に関する情報資料には、安全および規定に関する重要情報が含まれています。
どんな情報をお探しですか? こちらでご覧いただけます
S UPSユーザーガイド
S Dellネットワークマネージメントカード用の
ユーザーガイド
S Dell UPS制御ソフトウェア
注記：説明書およびソフトウェアの更新情報
は、support.dell.comでご確認いただけます。
Dell UPS ディスク
S 仕様
S UPSの設定方法
S トラブルシューティングおよび問題の解決方法
Dell UPS ユーザーガイド
ユーザーガイドはDell UPSディスクおよび
support.dell.comで入手することができます。
S 安全に関する説明書
S 規則に関する情報
S リサイクルに関する情報
安全、環境、規則に関する情報
S 保証情報
S 使用上の条件（アメリカのみ）
S エンドユーザー使用許諾契約
Dell 保証およびサポート情報
S サポート情報 Dell サポート用ウェブサイト ‒
support.dell.com
注意：使用する地域や事業区分を選択し、
適切なサポートサイトをご覧ください。インストールおよび設定 |
99
インストールおよび設定
注意：:
当資料の手順を実施する前に、安全、環境、規則に関する情報資料に記載されている安全に関す
る説明書および重要な規制情報をご覧いただき、これらの情報に従ってください。
注意：: キャビネットの重量[500W: 11.6 kg (25.6 lb); 1000W: 18.3 kg (40.3 lb); 1920/1500W: 30.5
kg (67.2 lb)] 注意して開梱し、キャビネットを移動します。
このセクションは、最初におけるシステムの設定方法について説明しています。
システムの開梱
1 システムを開梱し、各項目を識別します。
2 責任を持ってパッケージを処分、またはリサイクルし、あるいは将来使えるように保管し
ます。100 |
インストールおよび設定
UPSの識別
このセクションは、Dellタワー型UPSのフロントパネルおよびリヤパネルを示しています。
リヤパネルの詳細に関しましては、Dellラインインタラクティブ式ラック
500W、1000W、および1920/1500W ユーザーガイドをご参照ください。
カバー止め
カバー止め
LCDパネル
スクロールボタン
（上方向、または後方）
選択ボタン
スクロールボタン
（下方向、または前方）
図 1. Dellタワー型UPS
通信ポート
5-15レセプタクル 6個
（負荷セグメント1）
ネットワーク過度
電流プロテクタ USBポート
カバーを取り外します
オン/オフボタン
IEC-C14
入力コネクタ
5-15レセプタクル 2個 EMB コネクタ （負荷セグメント2）
図 2. UPSリヤパネル（1000W、120Vリヤパネル）インストールおよび設定 |
101
UPSのフロントカバーの取り外し方法
3 UPSのフロントカバーを取り外します。
2個のカバー止めを押し、フロントカバーを開放し、引き上げます。
バッテリーカバーの取り外し方
4 金属製バッテリーカバーの蝶ネジを外し、カバーを持ち上げて取り外します。102 |
インストールおよび設定
内臓バッテリーコネクタの接続方法
5 内臓バッテリーコネクタを接続します。
6 金属製バッテリーカバーを取り外します。
ネジを0.7 N·m (6.2 lb in)のトルクで締めます。
7 UPSフロントカバーを取り外します。インストールおよび設定 |
103
装置の接続方法
9
装置をUPSへ接続
コンピューターからUPSへの通信
ケーブルを接続（オプション）
8
8 Dell UPS制御ソフトウェアを使用する場合は、同梱のケーブルを使って、
コンピューターをUSBポートやRS--232ポートへ接続してください。
9 保護する装置をUPS出力レセプタクルに差し込みます。ただし保護装置の電源は入れない
でください。
注記：:
過負荷アラームを防ぐため、装置の定格の合計がUPSの容量を超えていないか確認してください。104 |
インストールおよび設定
電源コードの接続方法
10 UPSへの電源入力には、電源コードの定格電流に従い、逆流過電流保護があるか確認して
ください。
11 UPSへの電源入力には、十分な逆流過電流保護があるか確認してください。
表 1. 上流遮断機最小定格
UPS出力 120V 208V 230V
500W 15A — 15A
1000W 15A — 15A
1500W (100V時)
1920W
20A — 15A
12 UPSの電源コードを電源コンセントに差し込みます。インストールおよび設定 |
105
UPSの起動方法
13 UPSのリヤパネルの ボタンを押します。
起動の完了
14 UPSが正常に動作し、負荷電力があることを示す「正常」アイコン がUPSのステータス
要約画面に現れていることをお確かめください。
15 アクティブになっているアラームや通知を確かめるには、UPSステータス要約画面の ボタ
ンを押します。 続ける前に、アクティブになっているアラームを解消してください。Dell
ラインインタラクティブ式ラック 500W、1000W、および1920/1500W ユーザーガイドの
「トラブルシューティング」をご参照ください。
アクティブになっているアラームがない場合は、「アクティブアラームなし」と表示され
たメッセージが現れます。
16 その他の工場出荷時設定の変更は、Dellラインインタラクティブ式ラック
500W、1000W、および1920/1500W ユーザーガイドの「操作方法」をご参照ください。106 |
インストールおよび設定*1642018091*
164201809 1
Dell Multi-UPS Management Console and
UPS Local Node Manager Software
Version 01.06
User Guide Update MUMC and ULNM Software v01.06 User Guide Update
December 2012 2
Operating Systems supported by MUMC and ULNM
MUMC and ULNM v01.06 support the following systems:
Operating system
MUMC ULNM
Service
Pack
Platform Software
version Service
Pack
Platform Software
version
x86 x64 V1.04 V1.06 x86 x64 V1.04 V1.06
Windows
Server 2012
Windows Small
Business Server 2012
Standard
Latest √ √ Latest √ √
Windows
Server 2011
Windows Small
Business Server 2011
Standard
Latest √ √ √ Latest √ √ √
Windows
Server 2008
Windows Server 2008
R2 Standard,
Enterprise, Datacenter
SP1 √ √ √ SP1 √ √ √
Windows Server 2008
R1 Standard, Enterprise,
Datacenter
SP2 √ √ √ √ SP2 √ √ √ √
Windows Server 2008
Small Business Server
R2
Latest √ √ √ √ Latest √ √ √ √
Windows Server 2008
Small Business Server Latest √ √ √ √ Latest √ √ √ √
Windows
Server 2003
Windows Server 2003
Standard, Enterprise,
Datacenter R2
SP2 √ √ √ √ SP2 √ √ √ √
Windows Server 2003
Standard, Enterprise,
Datacenter R1
SP1 √ √ √ √ SP1 √ √ √ √
Windows Small
Business Server 2003
Standard, Enterprise,
Premium R2
Latest √ √ √ Latest √ √ √
Windows 8
Windows 8 (Enterprise,
Premium, Professional,
Ultimate, Basic)
Latest √ √ Latest √ √
Windows 7
Windows 7 (Enterprise,
Premium, Professional,
Ultimate, Basic)
SP1 √ √ √ √ SP1 √ √ √ √
Windows
Vista
Windows Vista
(Enterprise, Ultimate,
Business)
SP2 √ √ √ √ SP2 √ √ √ √
Windows XP Windows XP
Professional SP3 √ √ √ SP3 √ √ √
RedHat
Enterprise
Linux
Red Hat Enterprise
Linux 6.3 √ √ √
Red Hat Enterprise
Linux 6.2 √ √ √ √
Red Hat Enterprise
Linux 5.9 √ √ √ √
Red Hat Enterprise
Linux 5.8 √ √ √ √
Red Hat Enterprise
Linux 5.7 √ √ √ √
Red Hat Enterprise
Linux Advanced
Platform 5.4 (Latest
U7 √ √ √ √MUMC and ULNM Software v01.06 User Guide Update
December 2012 3
Update)
Red Hat Enterprise
Linux Base Server
5.4 (Latest Update)
U7 √ √ √ √
Red Hat Enterprise
Linux Version 5 U6 √ √ √ √
Fedora core 15 √ √ √ √
Fedora core 14 √ √ √ √
SUSE/Novel
SuSE Linux Enterprise
Server 11 SP2 √ √ √ √
SuSE Linux Enterprise
Server 11 SP1 √ √ √ √
SuSE Linux Enterprise
Server 10 SP4 √ √ √ √
OpenSuse 11.4 √ √ √ √
OpenSuse 11.2 √ √ √ √
Debian GNU
Linux
Debian 6 (Squeeze) √ √ √ √
Debian 5 (Lenny) √ √ √
Ubuntu
12.10 √ √ √ √
12.04 LTS √ √ √ √
11.04 LTS √ √ √ √
10.04 LTS √ √ √ √
Virtualization environments supported by MUMC and ULNM
MUMC and ULNM v01.06 support the following environments:
Virtualization Environment
MUMC ULNM
Service
Pack
Platform Software
version Service
Pack
Platform Software
version
x86 x64 V1.04 V1.06 x86 x64 V1.04 V1.06
VMware ESXi 5.1 (pay version
only) √ √ √ √
ESXi 5.0 (pay version
only) U1 √ √ √ U1 √ √ √
ESX 4.0 (pay version
only) U4 √ √ √ U4 √ √ √
ESXi 4.1 (pay version
only) U4 √ √ √ U4 √ √ √
ESX 4.0 (pay version
only) √ √ √ √ √ √
ESXi 4.1 (pay version
only) √ √ √ √ √ √
Microsoft
HyperV
Windows Hyper-V
Server 2012 √ √ √ √
Windows Hyper-V
Server 2008 R2 √ √ √ √ √ √
Windows Hyper-V
Server 2008 √ √ √ √ √ √
Citrix
XenServer 6.0 √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
XenServer 5.6 √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
OpenSource Xen 2.6
on RHEL 5 √ √ √ √ √ √
OpenSource Xen 3.2
on Debian 5 √ √ √ √ √ √
KVM KVM 0.12.1.2 on RHEL
6 and Debian 5 √ √ √ √ √ √MUMC and ULNM Software v01.06 User Guide Update
December 2012 4
Virtualization consoles and features supported by MUMC and ULNM
MUMC and ULNM v01.06 support the following virtual environment consoles and features:
Virtualization consoles and
features
MUMC ULNM
Service
Pack
Platform Software
version Service
Pack
Platform Software
version
x86 x64 V1.04 V1.06 x86 x64 V1.04 V1.06
VMware
console vCenter √ √ √ √
VMware
feature
vMotion √ √ √ √
vSphere √
Microsoft
HyperV
console
SCVMM 2012 √ √ √ √
Microsoft
HyperV
feature
LiveMigration √ √ √ √
Citrix
console XenCenter √ √ √ √
Citrix
feature
XenMotion Live
Migration √ √ √ √
Release notes
MUMC and ULNM version 01.06
Operating systems updates compatibility:
Windows 8
Add new etoast notification tool for operating system providing Metro interface.
SCVMM 2012
ESXi 5.1
RedHat 6.3
Bug fixes:
Remove vCenter plugin does not remove MUMC tab in vCenter
Fix issue with IE10 (Windows 8) compatibility
Fix bad icon in Windows 8 task bar when notification popup is displayed
Fix a crash when special network interfaces are set. This crash has been reported in Red Hat 5.6 using
a tuned interface created via openvpn. MUMC and ULNM Software v01.06 User Guide Update
December 2012 5
MUMC and ULNM version 01.04
Usability enhancementsto the graphical userinterface
Systemtraymenu added (Windows) including ability to stop/startservice fromthe tray icon contextual
menu
Improved alarmacknowledgement options, and audible alarmadded to notification events
Improved eventsorting options
Display of active powerin watts, not Volt‐Amps
UPS shutdown settingsmenu now available in shutdownmenu location
Newfunctionality in the graphical userinterface
Improvedmass configuration ofmultipleDellUPSNetwork Cards andULNM agents
XML v4 implementation forimproved security
Improved reverse name resolution capabilitiesforULNM agents and hardware nodes
Enhanced detection of communication loss, which is now available as a shutdown criteria
Added ability to forceUDP or TCP subscription forNMC
MUMC now can be registered as “powered application” inNMC Web interface.
Database logs optimized to handle largerinstallations
Expanded virtualization platform support and integration
XenCenter plugin
Force VM shutdown inHA clusters using Remote Virtual Machine Shutdown (RVMS)
Smoother operation of hostmanagementshutdown
Improved documentation for VMware setup
Supportfortwo or moreUPSs powering redundant powersupply unit(PSU) devices
UPS software considersmultipleUPS battery status before reaching “low battery” status and shutting
down servers.
Ability to create virtual composite groups ofUPSstomanage redundantinstallations as one device
Support ofDell’s unique power metrics
Peak headroom, peak consumption, allmetrics now in Watts(W) and not Volt‐Amps(VA).
Virtualization
Subscribe MUMC isshown as a “notified application” in theUPSNMC card when a VM host node has a
UPS configured in MUMC.
MicrosoftIntegration
Trigger vCenter vMotion™ and SCVMM Live Migration™ applications
Transparentlymove virtualmachinesfroma server affected by a powerinterruption to a non‐affected
serverMUMC and ULNM Software v01.06 User Guide Update
December 2012 6
Citrix integration
XenServer: Remote shutdown from MUMC,remotemaintenance from MUMC, can Add/Protect a
XenServerin MUMC
XenCenter: Create an MUMC XenCenter plug‐in, agent‐less hostmanagementfrom MUMC, agent‐less
XenMotion
VMware integration
Removed the prerequisite of Pearl SDK installation for MUMC to communicate with VMware vCenter
New power events and alarmslogs created in VMware vCenter console
Added ability to force VM shutdown forHA clusters
Can now Add/Protect a standalone ESX/ESXi in MUMC without vCenter
Linux Support
Added supportforlatest Linux distributions(seeUserGuide forfull list)
Bug fixes:
Crash when emc2 runs out of resources (memory)
ULNM does not detect UPS connected with USB connectivity
Transfer to high efficiency mode not visible in the events list
MUMC may lose nodes, and generates alarms on non‐UPS SNMP devices
When a proxy client reaches shutdown time, all other proxy clients along with server get shut down
No communication lost after network cable is removed
Make sure Scan and communication behaves correctly when USB module is not present
Proxy: when changing power source, previous endpoint is not removed
MUMC upgrade will disable the "Set as Power Source"
ULNM in connected mode in Notified Applications of NMC
Event Pane in Power Source View is Off by One
Detect Lansafe, Netwatch, Lansafe Web View in the installer
Silent uninstall does not remove the install folder
Other bug fixes and improvements:
Outlet management improvements
Scan sometime never stops
Removing devices hangs the server
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGCover.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 – FOR PROOF ONLY
Template Last Updated -03/06/2010
Dell PowerConnect
5500 Series
System User Guide
Regulatory Models: PowerConnect 5524, 5524P, 5548, 5548PNotes, Cautions, and Warnings
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you
make better use of your system.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to
hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property
damage, personal injury, or death.
____________________
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2013 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written
permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, Dell Precision™,
OptiPlex™, Latitude™, PowerEdge™, PowerVault™, PowerConnect™,
OpenManage™, EqualLogic™, KACE™, FlexAddress™ and Vostro™ are
trademarks of Dell Inc. Intel®, Pentium®, Xeon®, Core™ and Celeron® are
registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
AMD® is a registered trademark and AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™, and
AMD Sempron™ are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft®,
Windows®, Windows Server®, MS-DOS® and Windows Vista® are either
trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries. Red Hat Enterprise Linux® and Enterprise Linux®
are registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and/or other
countries. Novell® is a registered trademark and SUSE ™ is a trademark of
Novell Inc. in the United States and other countries. Oracle® is a registered
trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Citrix®, Xen®, XenServer®
and XenMotion® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Citrix
Systems, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. VMware®, Virtual
SMP®, vMotion®, vCenter®, and vSphere® are registered trademarks or
trademarks of VMWare, Inc. in the United States or other countries.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to
either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc.
disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its
own.
Regulatory Models PC5524, PC5524P, PC5548 and PC5548P
March 2013 A07FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance
Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm
Contents 3
Contents
1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
IP Version 6 (IPv6) Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Stack Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Power over Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Green Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Head of Line Blocking Prevention. . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Flow Control Support (IEEE 802.3X) . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Back Pressure Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Virtual Cable Testing (VCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Auto-Negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
MDI/MDIX Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
MAC Address Supported Features . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Layer 2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
IGMP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Broadcast Storm Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance
Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm
4 Contents
VLAN Supported Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Spanning Tree Protocol Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Link Aggregation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Quality of Service Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Device Management Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Port Profile (CLI Macro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Protected Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
iSCSI Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Proprietary Protocol Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3 Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Device Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Device Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
LED Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4 Stacking Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Stack Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Stack Members and Unit IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance
Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm
Contents 5
5 Configuring the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Configuration Work Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Connecting the Switch to the Terminal . . . . . . . . . 59
Booting the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Configuring the Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Configuration Using the Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . 61
6 Advanced Switch Configuration . . . . . . . 67
Using the CLI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Accessing the Device Through the CLI . . . . . . . . . 71
Retrieving an IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Security Management and Password Configuration . . 75
Configuring Login Banners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Startup Menu Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7 Using Dell OpenManage Administrator. . 87
Starting the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Understanding the Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Using the Switch Administrator Buttons . . . . . . . . 91
Field Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Common GUI Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance
Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm
6 Contents
GUI Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
CLI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
8 Network Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Port Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
ACLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
ACL Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Proprietary Protocol Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Time Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Dot1x Authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
9 Configuring System Information . . . . . . 155
General Switch Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
IP Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Management Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
File Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Stack Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance
Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm
Contents 7
sFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
10 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Jumbo Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Green Ethernet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Protected Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Port Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
LAG Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Storm Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
11 Address Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Static Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Dynamic Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
12 GARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
GARP Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
GARP Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance
Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm
8 Contents
13 Spanning Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Spanning Tree Protocol Overview. . . . . . . . . . . 435
Global Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
STP Port Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
STP LAG Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Rapid Spanning Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Multiple Spanning Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
14 VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Virtual LAN Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
VLAN Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
LAGs Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Protocol Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Protocol Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
GVRP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Private VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Voice VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
15 Link Aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Link Aggregation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
LACP Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance
Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm
Contents 9
LAG Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
16 Multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Multicast Support Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Global Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Bridge Multicast Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Bridge Multicast Forward All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
IGMP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Unregistered Multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Multicast TV VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
17 LLDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
LLDP Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
LLDP Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
LLDP Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
MED Network Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
LLDP MED Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Neighbors Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
18 Dynamic ARP Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Dynamic ARP Inspection Overview. . . . . . . . . . . 561
Global Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance
Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm
10 Contents
Dynamic ARP Inspection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries . . . . . . . . . . . 566
VLAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Trusted Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
19 DHCP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
DHCP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
DHCP Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
20 iSCSI Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Optimizing iSCSI Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Global Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
iSCSI Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
iSCSI Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Configuring iSCSI Using CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
21 Statistics/RMON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Table Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
RMON Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance
Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm
Contents 11
22 Quality of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
QoS Features and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
QoS Basic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
QoS Advanced Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
QoS Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance
Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm
12 ContentsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 13
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
1
Preface
PowerConnect 5524/5548 and PowerConnect 5524P/5548P are stackable,
advanced multi-layer devices.
This guide contains the information needed for installing, configuring, and
maintaining the device through the web-based management system, called
the OpenManage Switch Administrator.
This guide describes how to configure each system through the web-based
management system and through CLI commands.
The CLI Reference Guide, which is available on the Documentation CD,
provides additional information about the CLI commands. 14 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGPrefix.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLYDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 15
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
2
Features
This section describes the features of the PowerConnect 5524/P and 5548/P
switches.
For a complete list of all updated device features, see the latest software
version Release Notes.
This section contains the following topics:
• IP Version 6 (IPv6) Support
• Stack Support
• Power over Ethernet
• Green Ethernet
• Head of Line Blocking Prevention
• Flow Control Support (IEEE 802.3X)
• Back Pressure Support
• Virtual Cable Testing (VCT)
• Auto-Negotiation
• MDI/MDIX Support
• MAC Address Supported Features
• Layer 2 Features
• IGMP Snooping
• Port Mirroring
• Broadcast Storm Control
• VLAN Supported Features
• Spanning Tree Protocol Features
• Link Aggregation
• Quality of Service Features
• Quality of Service Features
• Device Management Features16 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Security Features
• DHCP Server
• Protected Ports
• iSCSI Optimization
• Proprietary Protocol Filtering
IP Version 6 (IPv6) Support
The device functions as an IPv6-compliant host, as well as an IPv4 host (also
known as dual stack). This enables device operation in a pure IPv6 network as
well as in a combined IPv4/IPv6 network.
For more information, see "IP Addressing" on page 209.
Stack Support
The system supports up to eight units with two fixed HDMI stacking ports.
The HDMI ports are 1.3a specification, Category 2 High Speed cables, 340
MHz (10.2 Gbit/s).
it is recommended to use HDMI cable version 1.4
The stacking feature supports the following features:
• Fast-link failover
• Software auto-synch.
• Improved response time to events, such as master failover
• Auto-numbering algorithm when choosing unit number
For more information, see "Stacking Overview" on page 45
Power over Ethernet
Power over Ethernet (PoE) provides power to devices over existing LAN
cabling, without updating or modifying the network infrastructure. When
PoE is used, the network devices do not have to be placed next to a power
source. PoE can be used in the following applications:
• IP Phones
• Wireless Access PointsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 17
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• IP Gateways
• PDAs
• Audio and video remote monitoring
For more information, see "Power over Ethernet" on page 162.
Green Ethernet
Green Ethernet, also known as Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE), is an effort
to make networking equipment environmentally friendly, by reducing the
power usage of Ethernet connections.
The Short-Reach method, which reduces power over Ethernet cables shorter
than 40m, is supported by the device.
For more information, see "Green Ethernet Configuration" on page 390.
Head of Line Blocking Prevention
Head of Line (HOL) blocking results in traffic delays and frame loss caused
by traffic competing for the same egress port resources. To prevent HOL
blocking, the device queues packets, and packets at the head of the queue are
forwarded before packets at the end of the queue.
Flow Control Support (IEEE 802.3X)
Flow control enables lower-speed devices to communicate with higher-speed
devices, by requesting that the higher-speed device refrain from sending
packets. Transmissions are temporarily halted to prevent buffer overflows.
For more information, see "Flow Control" on page 386.
Back Pressure Support
On half-duplex links, the receiving port prevents buffer overflows by
occupying the link so that it is unavailable for additional traffic.
For more information, see "Protected Ports" on page 394.18 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Virtual Cable Testing (VCT)
VCTdetects and reports copper link cabling faults, such as open cables and
cable shorts.
For more information, see "Diagnostics" on page 255.
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-negotiation enables the device to advertise modes of operation. The
auto-negotiation function enables an exchange of information between two
devices that share a point-to-point link segment, and automatically
configures both devices to take maximum advantage of their transmission
capabilities.
The PowerConnect 5500 series enhances auto-negotiation by providing port
advertisement. Port advertisement enables the system administrator to
configure the port speeds that are advertised.
For more information, see "Port Configuration" on page 403 or "LAG
Configuration" on page 409.
MDI/MDIX Support
Standard wiring for end stations is known as Media-Dependent Interface
(MDI), and standard wiring for hubs and switches is known as MediaDependent Interface with Crossover (MDIX).
If auto-negotiation is enabled, the device automatically detects whether the
cable connected to an RJ-45 port is MDIX (crossed) or MDI (straight). This
enables both types to be used interchangeably.
If auto-negotiation is not enabled, only MDI (straight) cables can be used.
For more information, see "Port Configuration" on page 403 or "LAG
Configuration" on page 409.
MAC Address Supported Features
MAC Address Capacity Support
The device supports up to 16K MAC addresses and it reserves specific MAC
addresses for system use.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 19
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Static MAC Entries
MAC entries can be manually entered in the Bridging Table, as an alternative
to learning them from incoming frames. These user-defined entries are not
subject to aging, and are preserved across resets and reboots.
For more information, see "Static Addresses" on page 424.
Self-Learning MAC Addresses
The device enables controlled MAC address learning from incoming packets.
The MAC addresses are stored in the Bridging Table.
For more information, see "Dynamic Addresses" on page 427.
Automatic Aging for MAC Addresses
MAC addresses from which no traffic is received for a given period, are aged
out. This prevents the Bridging Table from overflowing.
For more information, see "Dynamic Addresses" on page 427.
VLAN-Aware MAC-Based Switching
The device always performs VLAN-aware bridging. Classic bridging
(IEEE802.1D), in which frames are forwarded based only on their destination
MAC address, is not performed. However, a similar functionality can be
configured for untagged frames. Frames addressed to a destination MAC
address that is not associated with any port are flooded to all ports of the
relevant VLAN.
MAC Multicast Support
Multicast service is a limited Broadcast service that enables one-to-many and
many-to-many connections for information distribution. In Layer 2 Multicast
service, a single frame is addressed to a specific Multicast address, from which
copies of the frame are transmitted to the relevant ports. When Multicast
groups are statically enabled, you can set the destination port of registered
groups, as well as define the behavior of unregistered Multicast frames.
For more information, see "Multicast" on page 516.20 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Layer 2 Features
IGMP Snooping
Internet Group Membership Protocol (IGMP) Snooping examines IGMP
frame contents, when they are forwarded by the device from work stations to
an upstream Multicast router. From the frame, the device identifies work
stations configured for Multicast sessions, and which Multicast routers are
sending Multicast frames. The IGMP Querier simulates the behavior of a
Multicast router. This enables snooping of the Layer 2 Multicast domain even
if there is no Multicast router.
For more information, see "IGMP Snooping" on page 527.
Port Mirroring
Port mirroring monitors network traffic by forwarding copies of incoming and
outgoing packets from a monitored port to a monitoring port. Users specify
which target port receives copies of all traffic passing through a specified
source port.
For more information, see "Port Mirroring" on page 417.
Broadcast Storm Control
Storm Control enables limiting the number of Multicast and Broadcast
frames accepted by and forwarded by the device.
When Layer 2 frames are forwarded, Broadcast and Multicast frames are
flooded to all ports on the relevant VLAN. This occupies bandwidth, and
loads all nodes connected on all ports.
For more information, see "Storm Control" on page 414.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 21
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
VLAN Supported Features
VLAN Support
VLANs are collections of switching ports that comprise a single Broadcast
domain. Packets are classified as belonging to a VLAN, based on either the
VLAN tag or on a combination of the ingress port and packet contents.
Packets sharing common attributes can be grouped in the same VLAN.
For more information, see "VLANs" on page 466.
Port-Based Virtual LANs (VLANs)
Port-based VLANs classify incoming packets to VLANs, based on their ingress
port.
For more information, see "Defining VLAN Membership Using CLI
Commands" on page 473.
Full 802.1Q VLAN Tagging Compliance
IEEE 802.1Q defines an architecture for virtual, bridged LANs, the services
provided in VLANs, and the protocols and algorithms involved in the
provision of these services.
For more information, see "Virtual LAN Overview" on page 467.
GVRP Support
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol(GVRP) provides IEEE 802.1Qcompliant VLAN pruning and dynamic VLAN creation. When GVRP is
enabled, the device registers and propagates VLAN membership on all ports
that are part of the active underlying Spanning Tree Protocol topology.
For more information, see "GVRP Parameters" on page 490.
Voice VLAN
Voice VLAN enables network administrators to enhance VoIP service by
configuring ports to carry IP voice traffic from IP phones on a specific VLAN.
VoIP traffic has a preconfigured OUI prefix in the source MAC address.
Network administrators can configure VLANs from which voice IP traffic is 22 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
forwarded. Non-VoIP traffic is dropped from the Voice VLAN in Auto-Voice
VLAN Secure mode. Voice VLAN also provides QoS to VoIP, ensuring that the
quality of voice does not deteriorate if the IP traffic is received unevenly.
For more information, see "Voice VLAN" on page 498.
Guest VLAN
Guest VLAN provides limited network access to unauthorized ports. If a port
is denied network access via port-based authorization, but the Guest VLAN is
enabled, the port receives limited network access through the Guest VLAN.
For more information, see "Dot1x Authentication" on page 132.
Private VLAN
The Private VLAN feature provides Layer 2 isolation between ports that share
the same Broadcast domain, or in other words, it creates a point-tomultipoint Broadcast domain. The ports can be located anywhere in the
Layer 2 network (compared to the Protected Ports feature, where the ports
must be in the same stack).
For more information, see "Private VLAN" on page 494.
Multicast TV VLAN
The Multicast TV VLAN feature provides the ability to supply multicast
transmissions to Layer 2-isolated subscribers, without replicating the
multicast transmissions for each subscriber VLAN. The subscribers are the
only receivers of the multicast transmissions.
For more information, see "Multicast TV VLAN" on page 535.
Spanning Tree Protocol Features
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
802.1d Spanning tree is a standard Layer 2 switch requirement that enables
bridges to automatically prevent and resolve Layer 2 forwarding loops.
Switches exchange configuration messages using specifically-formatted
frames, and selectively enable and disable forwarding on ports.
For more information, see "Spanning Tree" on page 434. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 23
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Fast Link
STP can take 30–60 seconds to converge. During this time, STP detects
possible loops, enabling time for status changes to propagate and for relevant
devices to respond. This period of 30-60 seconds is considered too long a
response time for many applications. The Fast Link option bypasses this
delay, and can be used in network topologies, where forwarding loops do not
occur.
For more information on enabling Fast Link for ports and LAGs, see "STP
Port Settings" on page 442 or "Static Addresses" on page 424.
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree
Spanning Tree takes 30–60 seconds for each host to decide whether its ports
are actively forwarding traffic. Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP) detects uses of
network topologies to enable faster convergence, without creating forwarding
loops.
For more information, see "Spanning Tree" on page 434.
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree
Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP) operation maps VLANs into STP instances.
MSTP provides a different load balancing scenario. Packets assigned to various
VLANs are transmitted along different paths within MSTP Regions (MST
Regions). Regions are one or more MSTP bridges by which frames can be
transmitted. The standard lets administrators assign VLAN traffic to
unique paths.
For more information, see "Spanning Tree" on page 434.
STP BPDU Guard
BPDU Guard is used as a security mechanism, to protect the network from
invalid configurations.
BPDU Guard is usually used either when fast link ports (ports connected to
clients) are enabled or when the STP feature is disabled. When it is enabled
on a port, the port is shut down if a BPDU message is received and an
appropriate SNMP trap is generated.
For more information, see "Spanning Tree" on page 434.24 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Link Aggregation
Up to 32 Aggregated Links may be defined, each with up to eight member
ports, to form a single Link Aggregated Group (LAG). This enables:
• Fault tolerance protection from physical link disruption
• Higher bandwidth connections
• Improved bandwidth granularity
• High bandwidth server connectivity
A LAG is composed of ports with the same speed, set to full-duplex
operation.
For more information, see "LAG Configuration" on page 409.
Link Aggregation and LACP
LACP uses peer exchanges across links to determine, on an ongoing basis, the
aggregation capability of various links, and continuously provides the
maximum level of aggregation capability achievable between a given pair of
devices. LACP automatically determines, configures, binds, and monitors the
port binding within the system.
For more information, see "Link Aggregation" on page 508.
BootP and DHCP Clients
DHCP enables additional setup parameters to be received from a network
server upon system startup. DHCP service is an on-going process. DHCP is an
extension of BootP.
For more information, see "DHCP IPv4 Interface" on page 214.
Quality of Service Features
Class of Service 802.1p Support
The IEEE 802.1p signaling technique is an OSI Layer 2 standard for marking
and prioritizing network traffic at the data link/MAC sub-layer. 802.1p traffic
is classified and sent to the destination. No bandwidth reservations or limits Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 25
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
are established or enforced. 802.1p is a spin-off of the 802.1Q (VLANs)
standard. 802.1p establishes eight levels of priority, similar to the IP
Precedence IP Header bit-field.
Advanced QoS
Frames that match an ACL and were permitted entrance are implicitly
labeled with the name of the ACL that permitted their entrance. Advanced
mode QoS actions defined in network policies can then be applied to these
flows.
The switch can set DSCP values and map IPv6 DSCP to egress queues in the
same way it does for IPv4. The switch detects IPv6 frames by the IPv6 ethertype.
For more information about Advanced QoS, see "QoS Advanced Mode" on
page 678.
TCP Congestion Avoidance
The TCP Congestion Avoidance feature activates an algorithm that breaks up
or prevents TCP global synchronization on a congested node, where the
congestion is due to multiple sources sending packets with the same byte
count.
For more information, see "The following is an example of the CLI
commands:" on page 666.
Device Management Features
SNMP Alarms and Trap Logs
The system logs events with severity codes and timestamps. Events are sent as
SNMP traps to a Trap Recipient List.
For more information, see "SNMP" on page 314.26 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
SNMP Versions 1, 2, and 3
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) over the UDP/IP protocol
controls access to the system. A list of community entries is defined, each
consisting of a community string and its access privileges. There are three
levels of SNMP security: read-only, read-write, and super. Only a super user
can access the Community table.
For more information, see "SNMP" on page 314.
Web-Based Management
Web-based management enables managing the system from any web browser.
The system contains an Embedded Web Server (EWS) that serves HTML
pages, through which the system can be monitored and configured. The
system internally converts web-based input into configuration commands,
MIB variable settings, and other management-related settings.
Management IP Address Conflict Notification
This feature validates the uniqueness of the switch's IP address, whether it is
assigned manually or through DHCP. If the IP address is not unique, the
switch performs actions according to the address type. If the IP address is
static, see more information about this in "IPv4 Interface Parameters" on
page 210. If the IP address is dynamic, see more information about this
in"DHCP IPv4 Interface" on page 214.
Flow Monitoring (sflow)
The switch supports statistics collection, using a sampling technology called
sFlow that is based on RFC 3176. The sFlow sampling technology is
embedded within the switch, and provides the ability to continuously
monitor traffic flows on some or all the interfaces simultaneously.
For more information, see "sFlow" on page 375.
Configuration File Download and Upload
The device configuration is stored in a configuration file. The configuration
file includes both system-wide and port-specific device configuration. The
system can display configuration files as a collection of CLI commands that
are stored and manipulated as text files.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 27
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Auto-Update of Configuration/Image File
This feature facilitates installation of new devices. When you enable the
various auto-update options, the device automatically downloads a new
image or configuration file when it receives its IP address from a TFTP server,
and automatically reboots, using the image or configuration file it received.
For more information, see "Auto-Update/Configuration Feature" on page 338.
TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol
The device supports boot image, software, and configuration
upload/download via TFTP.
USB File Transfer Protocol
The device supports boot image, software, and configuration
upload/download via USB.
Remote Monitoring
Remote Monitoring (RMON) is an extension to SNMP that provides
comprehensive network traffic monitoring capabilities. RMON is a standard
MIB that defines MAC-layer statistics and control objects, enabling real-time
information to be captured across the entire network.
For more information, see "Statistics/RMON" on page 606.
Command Line Interface
Command Line Interface (CLI) syntax and semantics conform as much as
possible to common, industry standards. CLI is composed of mandatory and
optional elements. The CLI interpreter provides command and keyword
completion to assist users and save typing.
Syslog
Syslog is a protocol that enables event notifications to be sent to a set of
remote servers, where they can be stored, examined, and acted upon. The
system sends notifications of significant events in real time, and keeps a
record of these events for after-the-fact usage.
For more information on Syslog, see "Logs" on page 195.28 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
SNTP
The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) assures accurate network
Ethernet Switch clock time synchronization up to the millisecond. Time
synchronization is performed by a network SNTP server. Time sources are
prioritized by strata. Strata define the distance from the reference clock. The
higher the stratum (where zero is the highest), the more accurate the clock.
For more information, see "Time Synchronization" on page 169.
Domain Name System
Domain Name System (DNS) converts user-defined domain names into IP
addresses. Each time a domain name is assigned, the DNS service translates
the name into a numeric IP address. For example, www.ipexample.com is
translated into 192.87.56.2. DNS servers maintain domain name databases
containing their corresponding IP addresses.
For more information, see "Domain Name System" on page 242.
802.1ab (LLDP-MED)
The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) enables network managers to
troubleshoot, and enhances network management by discovering and
maintaining network topologies over multi-vendor environments. LLDP
discovers network neighbors by standardizing methods for network devices to
advertise themselves to other systems, and to store discovered information.
The multiple advertisement sets are sent in the packet Type Length Value
(TLV) field. LLDP devices must support chassis and port ID advertisement,
as well as system name, system ID, system description, and system capability
advertisements.
LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) increases network flexibility
by enabling various IP systems to co-exist on a single network LLDP. It
provides detailed network topology information, emergency call service via IP
phone location information, and troubleshooting information.
For more information, see "LLDP" on page 540.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 29
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Security Features
SSL
Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an application-level protocol that enables secure
transactions of data through privacy, authentication, and data integrity. It
relies upon certificates and public and private keys.
Port-Based Authentication (Dot1x)
Port-based authentication enables authenticating system users on a per-port
basis via an external server. Only authenticated and approved system users
can transmit and receive data. Ports are authenticated via the Remote
Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server using the Extensible
Authentication Protocol (EAP). Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA) enables
network administrators to automatically assign users to VLANs during the
RADIUS server authentication.
For more information, see "Dot1x Authentication" on page 132.
Locked Port Support
Locked Port increases network security by limiting access on a specific port to
users with specific MAC addresses. These addresses are either manually
defined or learned on that port. When a frame is seen on a locked port, and
the frame source MAC address is not tied to that port, the protection
mechanism is invoked.
For more information, see "Port Security" on page 98.
RADIUS Client
RADIUS is a client/server-based protocol. A RADIUS server maintains a user
database that contains per-user authentication information, such as user
name, password, and accounting information.
RADIUS Accounting
This feature enables recording device management sessions (Telnet, serial,
and WEB but not SNMP) and/or 802.1x authentication sessions.30 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Due to the complexity of 802.1x setup and configuration, many mistakes can
be made that might cause loss of connectivity or incorrect behavior. The
802.1x Monitor mode enables applying 802.1x functionality to the switch,
with all necessary RADIUS and/or domain servers active, without actually
taking any action that may cause unexpected behavior. In this way, the user
can test the 802.1x setup before actually applying it.
For more information, see "RADIUS" on page 291.
SSH
Secure Shell (SSH) is a protocol that provides a secure, remote connection to
a device. SSH version 2 is currently supported. The SSH server feature
enables an SSH client to establish a secure, encrypted connection with a
device. This connection provides functionality that is similar to an inbound
telnet connection. SSH uses RSA and DSA Public Key cryptography for
device connections and authentication.
For more information, see "Security Management and Password
Configuration" on page 75.
TACACS+
TACACS+ provides centralized security for validation of users accessing the
device. TACACS+ provides a centralized, user management system, while
still retaining consistency with RADIUS and other authentication processes.
For more information, see "TACACS+" on page 282.
Password Management
Password management provides increased network security and improved
password control. Passwords for SSH, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, and SNMP
access are assigned security features.
For more information, see "Password Management" on page 286.
The switch provides the ability to demand strong passwords, meaning that
they must contain both upper and lower-case letters, numbers, and
punctuation marks.
For more information, see "Password Management" on page 286.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 31
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Access Control Lists (ACL)
Access Control Lists (ACL) enable network managers to define classification
actions and rules for specific ingress ports. Packets entering an ingress port
with an active ACL, are either admitted or denied entry and the ingress port is
disabled. If they are denied entry, the user can disable the port.
Dynamic ACL/Dynamic Policy Assignment (DACL/DPA)
The network administrator can specify the user's ACL in the RADIUS server.
After successful authentication, the user is assigned that ACL.
For more information, see "Network Security" on page 97.
DHCP Snooping
DHCP Snooping expands network security by providing firewall security
between untrusted interfaces and DHCP servers. By enabling DHCP
Snooping, network administrators can differentiate between trusted
interfaces connected to end-users or DHCP servers and untrusted interfaces
located beyond the network firewall.
For more information, see "DHCP Snooping" on page 573.
ARP Inspection
Dynamic ARP inspection is a security feature that validates ARP packets in a
network. It intercepts, logs, and discards ARP packets with invalid IP-to-MAC
address bindings. This capability protects the network from certain man-inthe-middle attacks.
Port Profile (CLI Macro)
Macros provide a convenient way to save and share a common configuration.
A macro is a set of CLI commands with a unique name. When a macro is
applied to a port, the CLI commands contained within it are executed and
added to the Running Configuration file.
For more information, see "Dynamic ARP Inspection" on page 560.32 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
DHCP Server
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides a means of passing
configuration information (including the IP address of a TFTP server and a
configuration file name) to hosts on a TCP/IP network. The switch can serve
as a DHCP server or client.
For more information on the device serving as a DHCP server, see "DHCP
Server" on page 297.
For more information on the device serving as a DHCP client, see "DHCP
IPv4 Interface" on page 214.
Protected Ports
The Protected Ports feature provides Layer 2 isolation between interfaces
(Ethernet ports and LAGs) that share the same Broadcast domain (VLAN)
with other interfaces.
For more information, see "Protected Ports" on page 394.
iSCSI Optimization
iSCSI optimization provides the iSCSI flows with specific priority over other
network traffic. In addition, the feature provides monitoring of iSCSI
sessions.
For more information, see "iSCSI Optimization" on page 594.
Proprietary Protocol Filtering
This feature enables user control over the filtering of packets with proprietary
protocols such as CDP, VTP, DTP, UDLD, PaGP, and SSTP. The user can
select any combination of the protocols to be filtered, for example: CDP and
VTP and UDLD.
For more information, see "Network Security" on page 97.
DHCP Relay and Option 82
A DHCP relay agent detects DHCP Broadcasts from DHCP clients and relays
them to DHCP servers that may reside on different subnets.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 33
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The relay agent information option (Option 82) in the DHCP protocol
enables a DHCP relay agent to send additional client information, upon
requesting an IP address.
Option 82 specifies the relaying switch's MAC address, the port identifier, and
the VLAN that forwarded the packet.
For more information, see "DHCP Relay" on page 586.
Identifying a Switch via LED
The switch provides the ability to turn on a LED (through the GUI interface)
on a specific unit or on all units in a stack for a specific length of time.
For more information, see Unit Identification (Location).34 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLYDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 35
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
3
Hardware Description
This section describes PowerConnect 5500 hardware.
It contains the following topics:
• Device Models
• Device Structure
• LED Definitions
• Power Supplies36 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Device Models
The PowerConnect 5500 switches combine versatility with minimal
management requirements. This series includes the following device types:
• PowerConnect 5524 — Provides 24 10/100/1000Mbps Base-T ports
• PowerConnect 5524P (with PoE) — Provides 24 10/100/1000Mbps Base-T
ports, along with Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) support
• PowerConnect 5548 — Provides 48 10/100/1000Mbps Base-T ports
• PowerConnect 5548P (with PoE) — Provides 24 10/100/1000Mbps Base-T
ports, along with Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) support
Each of these devices provides, in addition to the above ports, two HDMI
ports, two SPF+ ports, an RS-232 console port, and a USB port, as shown in
Figure 3-1.
NOTE: 10/100/1000Mbps Baset-T ports are also known as Gigabit ports or G ports.
Device Structure
This section describes the structure of the devices.
It contains the following topics:
• Front Panel
• Buttons and LEDs
• Back Panel
• Ventilation System
• System LEDs
• Port LEDsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 37
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Front Panel
Figure 3-1 shows the front panel of the PowerConnect 5548 device with its
various ports labelled. The PowerConnect 5524 device from the
PowerConnect 5548 device in that there are 24 G ports and not 48.
Figure 3-2 shows the buttons/LEDs on the right side in greater detail.
Figure 3-1. PowerConnect 5548 Ports
The following ports are found on the devices.
• 24/48 G Ports
• Two XG Ports (also known as Small Form Factor Plugable (SFP)+ Ports)
These are 10 Gigabit ports, designated as 1000Base-X-SFP+. The SFP+
ports are fiber transceivers designated as 10000 Base-SX or LX. They
include TWSI (Two-Wire Serial Interface) and internal EPROM.
• RS-232 Console Port
This port is used for a terminal connection for debugging and software
downloads. The default baud rate is 9,600 bps. The baud rate can be
configured from 2400 bps up to 115,200 bps.
• Two HDMI Ports
The HDMI ports are 1.3a specification, category 2 high-speed cables, 340
MHz (10.2 Gbit/s). They are used for stacking purposes.
Console
SPF+ Ports
USB Port
HDMI Ports
Giga Ports (even numbered)
Port
Giga Ports (odd numbered)38 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
NOTE: it is recommended to use HDMI cable version 1.4
• Single USB Port
This port is used for firmware upgrade from a USB device.
Buttons and LEDs
LEDs on Front Panel
Figure 3-2 shows the extreme, right-hand part of the front panel, which
contains buttons and LEDs, in addition to ports.
Figure 3-2. Button/LED Panel
These LEDs are described in Table 3-1 and Table 3-2.
Reset Button
The PowerConnect 5500 switches have a reset button, located on the front
panel that is used for manual reset (reboot) of the device.
The single reset circuit of the switch is activated by power-up or low-voltage
conditions.
Power Status
Fan
RPS
Reset
Stacking Unit ID
Master Port LEDs
Console PortDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 39
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The Reset button does not extend beyond the unit’s front, and it must be
activated with a pin.
Back Panel
The back panel of the non-PoE models, shown in Figure 3-3, contains a
Redundant Power Supply (RPS) connector, Location LED, and power
connector.
The back panel of the PoE models, shown in Figure 3-4, contains a Modular
Power Supply (MPS) connector, Location LED, power connector, and two fan
outlets.
Figure 3-3. PowerConnect 5524/48 Back Panel
Figure 3-4. PowerConnect 5524/48/P Back Panel
The elements on the back panel are used as follows:
• Locator LED — This LED is lit when the Unit Identification feature is
selected. See "Unit Identification (Location)" on page 373 for more
information about this feature.
• RPS/MPS — Connector for auxiliary power supply. See "Power Supplies"
on page 44 for more information.
RPS
A/C Power Supply
Locator
Locator MPS Fan Fan A/C Power Supply40 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• A/C Power Supply — Connector for AC power supply. See "Power
Supplies" on page 44 for more information.
• Fans — Fan outlets. See "Ventilation System" on page 40 for more
information.
Ventilation System
The PowerConnect 5500/P switches have two built-in fans. Operation can be
verified by observing the LED that indicates if one or more fans are faulty
(see Table 3-1).
The fan outlets are shown in Figure 3-4.
LED Definitions
The front panel contains light emitting diodes(LEDs) that indicate the
status of links, power supplies, fans, and system diagnostics.
These are described below.
System LEDs
The system LEDs of the PowerConnect 5500 devices provide information
about the power supplies, fans, thermal conditions, and diagnostics.
Figure 3-2 shows the location of the system LEDS on the device.
Table 3-1 describes the meaning of the colors of the system LEDs.
Table 3-1. System LED Indicators
LED Color Description
Power Supply
(PWR)
Green Static The switch is turned on.
Green Flashing The Locator function is enabled.
Off The switch is turned off.
Status Green Static The switch is operating normally.
Green Flashing The switch is booting.
Red Static A critical system error has occurred.
Red Flashing A non-critical system error has occurred.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 41
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Stacking No. Indicates the unit ID of the device in the
stack.
Modular/Redundan
cy Power Supply
(MPS/RPS)
Green Static The MPS/RPS is currently operating.
Red Static The MPS/RPS failed.
Off The MPS/RPS is not plugged in.
Locator Green Flashing Locator function is enabled.
Green Static Locator function is disabled.
Master Green Static The device is a master unit.
Off The device is not a master unit.
Fan (FAN) Green Static All device fans are operating normally.
Red Static One or more of the device fans are not
operating.
Table 3-1. System LED Indicators (Continued)
LED Color Description 42 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Port LEDs
Gigabit Ports
Each Giga port has two LEDs associated with it. The speed/link (LNK) LED
is located on the left side of the port, while the activity/PoE LED is located on
the right side of the port. The activity/PoE LED is labelled ACT in non-PoE
devices, and is labelled PoE in PoE-enabled devices, as shown in Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5. Giga Port LEDs
Table 3-2 describes the LED indications for the Gigabit ports:
Table 3-2. Giga Port s on non-PoE-enabled Devices LEDs
LED Color Description
LNK Green Flashing Link is up and the port is either transmitting
or receiving at 1000 Mbs.
Yellow Flashing Link is up and the port is either transmitting
or receiving data at 100 Mbps.
Solid green
Solid amber
Link is up high speed.
Link is up at lower speeds.
OFF The port is currently not operating.
ACT Green Flashing There is activity on the port.
Off There is no activity on the port.
LNK ACT/PoE
LNK ACT/PoEDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 43
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Table 3-3 describes the LED indications for Gigabit ports on PoE-enabled
devices.
HDMI Port LEDs
The HDMI ports have a Speed/link (LNK) LED on their left side and an
activity (ACT) LED on their right side.
Table 3-4 describes the HDMP port LEDs:
Table 3-3. Giga Port s on PoE-enabled Devices LEDs
LED Color Description
LNK Flashing green Link is up and the port is either transmitting or
receiving at 1000 Mbs.
Flashing amber Link is up and the port is either transmitting or
receiving data at 100 Mbps.
Solid green
Solid amber
Link is up high speed.
Link is up at lower speeds.
Off Port is currently not operating.
PoE Flashing green There is activity on the port and the PoE is off.
Flashing amber There is activity on the port and the PoE is on.
Amber solid There is no activity on the port and the PoE power is
on.
Off There is no activity on the port and the PoE is off.
Table 3-4. HDMI (Stacking) Port LEDs
LED Color Description
Speed/Link Solid green Port is linked to device.
Off Port is currently not operating.
ACT Flashing green Port is either transmitting or receiving.
Off Port is not transmitting or receiving.44 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
SFP LEDs
The SFP+ ports each have two LEDs, marked as LNK and ACT, associated
with them. Figure 3-5 describes these LEDs.
Stack ID LED
The front panel of the device contains a Stack ID panel used to display the
Unit ID for the Stack Master and members, as shown in Figure 3-2.
Power Supplies
The device has an internal power supply unit (AC unit) and a connector to
connect PowerConnect 5500/P devices to a PowerConnect EPS-470 unit, or
to a PowerConnect MPS-600 unit.
The PowerConnect 5500/P devices have the following internal power
supplies:
• 24 Port non-PoE devices — 54 Watt.
• 48 Port non-PoE devices — 100 Watt.
• 24/48 Port PoE devices — 600 Watt.
Operation with both power supply units is regulated through load sharing.
Power supply LEDs indicate the status of the power supply.
The AC power supply unit operates from 90 to 264 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz. The AC
power supply unit uses a standard connector. A LED, shown in Figure 3-3,
indicates whether the AC unit is connected.
When the device is connected to a supplementary power source, the
probability of failure in the event of a power outage decreases.
Table 3-5. SFP Port LEDs
LED Color Description
LNK Solid green Link is at highest speed.
Solid amber Link is at lowest speed.
Off Port is currently not linked.
ACT Flashing green Port is either transmitting or receiving.Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 45
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
4
Stacking Overview
This section describes how the Stacking feature of the PowerConnect 5500
series functions.
It contains the following topics:
• Stack Overview
• Stack Members and Unit IDs46 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Stack Overview
The PowerConnect 5500 Stacking feature provides multiple switch
management through a single switch, so that all units in the stack are treated
as if they were a single switch. All stack members are accessed through the
management IP address, through which the stack is managed.
Each switch is a member in a stack, although the stack may consist of only a
single switch.
Up to eight units can be stacked.
This section covers the following topics:
• Stack Operation Modes
• Stacking Units
• Stack Topology
Stack Operation Modes
All stacks must have a Master unit, and may have a Master Backup unit. All
other units are connected to the stack as members (slaves).
A unit in the stack can be in one of the following modes:
• Stack Master — Runs the fully operational software of a switch. In
addition, it runs configures and manages all other units in the stack. All
protocols run in the context of the Master unit. It is responsible for
updating and synchronizing the Master Backup.
The Stack Master detects and reconfigures the ports with minimal
operational impact in the event of:
Unit failure
Inter-unit stacking link failure
Unit insertion
Unit removal
When the Master unit boots, or when inserting or removing a stack
member, the Master unit initiates a stacking discovering process. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 47
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Slave Unit — Runs a slave version of the software that enables the
applications running on the Master’s CPU to control and manage the
resources of the slave unit.
• Master Backup — Runs as a slave unit, as described above, and in
addition, continuously monitors the existence and operation of the stack
master. If the master unit fails, the master-backup unit assumes the Master
Backup role.
Stacking Units
PowerConnect 5500 series switches use two HDMI 10G ports for stacking.
To connect the units in the stack:
1 Insert one end of an HDMI cable into the left-hand HDMI port on the
unit at the top of the stack and the other end into the right-hand HDMI
port of the unit immediately below it (this is called crossover).
2 Repeat this process until all units are connected.
3 (Optional) Connect the left-hand HDMI port of the unit at the bottom of
the stack to the right-hand HDMI port of the unit at the top of the stack.
This step provides increased bandwidth and redundancy.48 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The results of this process are shown in Figure .
Figure 4-1. Stacking Ring Topology
HDMI Ports
Front Panel
HDMI Ports
Front Panel
HDMI Ports
Front Panel
Front Panel
HDMI PortsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 49
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Stack Topology
The PowerConnect 5500 series systems operates in a ring or chain topology.
Ring Topology
In a ring topology all units in the stack are connected to each other, forming a
circle. Each unit in the stack accepts data and sends it to the unit to which it
is attached. The packet continues through the stack until it reaches its
destination. The system discovers the optimal path on which to send traffic.
Figure 4-1 shows units of a stack connected in a ring topology.
Stacking Failover Topology - Chain Topology
Difficulties occur when a unit in the ring becomes non-functional, or a link is
severed. In this case, the system automatically switches to a chain topology,
without any system downtime.
In chain topology, each unit in the stack is connected to neighboring unit
except for the last unit, which is not connected to any other unit.
In the chain topology, the stack continues to function as long as there is a
master- or backup-enabled unit in each segment of the stack.
When the ring topology is switched to chain topology, an SNMP message is
automatically generated, but no stack management action is required. The
unit that failed must be repaired to restore full stacking operation in the ring
topology.
After the stacking issues are resolved, the units can be reconnected without
interruption, and the ring topology is restored.
Stack Members and Unit IDs
This section describes how to configure the stack.
It contains the following topics:
• Adding a Unit to the Stack
• Assigning Unit IDs
• Selecting the Master and Master Backup Units
• Switching from the Master to the Master Backup
• Replacing Stacking Members50 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Loading Software onto Stack Members
• Rebooting the Stack
• Managing Configuration Files on the Stack
Adding a Unit to the Stack
The recommended procedure to add a unit to a stack is as follows:
1 Place the powered-off unit in its physical place in the stack, and insert the
stacking link in the unit (but do not connect it to the rest of the stack).
2 Power up the unit, and set the correct Unit ID, as described below.
3 Reboot the unit and connect it to the rest of the stack through the stack
link.
Assigning Unit IDs
Each unit in the stack has a unique ID that defines the unit’s position and
function in the stack, as shown in Figure 3-2.
The unit that is assigned Unit ID 1 is the Master unit, by default. The unit
that is assigned Unit ID 2 is the Master Backup unit.
When you power-up the stack, each unit is assigned a unique Unit ID. This is
displayed on the front panel of the unit, as shown in Figure 3-2.
The Unit ID of each unit can be either automatically assigned or manually
assigned, as described in step 1 to step 4 below.
To assign IDs to the units in the stack, do the following for each unit in the
stack:
1 Connect the unit to the terminal.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 51
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
2 Turn on the unit to begin auto boot and press Return or Esc to abort and
enter the Start Up menu.
3 Select Stack Menu to open the Stack Menu.
4 Select Set Unit Stack ID. Enter either a Unit ID for manual assignment or
0 to indicate that the unit ID will be assigned automatically.
NOTE: The entire stack should be connected, as shown in Figure 4-1, before
powering up the units.
Selecting the Master and Master Backup Units
A unit is master-enabled if it assigned Unit ID 1 and Unit 2. All other units in
the stack (slaves) have unit IDs of 3-8.
The stack master assignment is performed during the configuration boot
process. One master-enabled stack member is elected as Master, and the
other master-enabled stack member is selected as Master Backup, according
to the following decision process:
• A master is selected from the set of the two Master-enabled units. Priority
is given to the lowest unit ID, but also takes into account the amount of
time the unit is UP (Up Time) as follows:
Startup Menu
[1]Download Software
[2]Erase Flash File
[3]Password Recovery Procedure
[4]Set Terminal Baud-Rate
[5]Stack Menu
[6]Back
[1]Show Unit Stack ID
[2]Set Unit Stack ID
[3]Back52 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– When a master-enabled unit is inserted to a running stack, (or when
Master and Backup master both start at the same time), they
exchange each other’s UP TIME (the time since they powered up). If
the time difference is smaller than 10 minutes, the unit with the
lowest unit ID is elected; otherwise, the unit with the longest UP time
is elected.
– If a Master-enabled unit (with ID 1 or 2) is inserted into an
operational stack, it will be elected as a backup master.
– If a Master unit and/or a backup Master unit is removed from the
stack and the user wishes to configure one of the slave units
(numbered 3-8) to be a Master backup, the user must reset the unit’s
ID. This can be done as follows:
• If there is a Master-enabled unit in the stack: Do -switch n
renumber 2 (through CLI or GUI). This makes the nth unit a
master-enabled unit.
• If there is no Master-enabled unit in the stack: Press the reset
button on the unit to be master-enabled, and assign it a unit ID=
1 using the boot menu.
• The user can force a master-enabled unit to be the master unit of the
stack, even if the master election process did not select it. This is done by
switching over to the backup unit.
NOTE: Two stacking member are considered the same age if they were
inserted within a ten minute interval, for example, if Unit 2 is inserted in the
first minute of a ten-minute cycle, and Unit 1 is inserted in fifth minute of the
same cycle, the units are considered to be the same age.
NOTE: If two stack members are discovered to have the same Unit ID, only
the older unit is included in the stack. The stack continues to function and a
message is sent notifying that a unit failed to join the stack.
The Stack Master and the Master Backup maintain a Warm Standby. The
Warm Standby ensures that the Master Backup takes over for the Stack
Master if a failover occurs, so that the stack continues to operate normally.
During the Warm Standby, the Master and the Master Backup are
synchronized with the static configuration. When the Stacking Master is
configured, it must synchronize the Master Backup. The dynamic Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 53
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
configuration is not saved, for example, dynamically-learned MAC addresses
are not saved, but dynamic information is learned quickly and automatically
by network traffic.
Switching from the Master to the Master Backup
The Master Backup replaces the Stack Master if one or more of the following
events occur:
• The Stack Master fails or is removed from the stack.
• Links from the Stack Master to the stacking members fails.
• User performs soft switchover via the Web interface or the CLI.
Switching between the Stack Master and the Master Backup results in limited
service loss. Dynamic tables are relearned if a failure occurs. The Running
Configuration file is synchronized between Stack Master and the Master
Backup, and continues running on the Master Backup.
Replacing Stacking Members
If a unit is removed from the stack, and replaced with a unit with the same
unit ID, the stack member is configured with the original unit configuration.
Otherwise, if the new unit has either more or fewer ports than the previous
unit, the results depend on the device type of the new and original units, as
defined in Table 4-1:
Table 4-1. Port Configurations when Replacing Units
New Unit Original Unit New Port Configuration
5548P or 5548 5548P or 5548 Port configurations remain the same.
5524 or 5524P The first 24 Giga (GE) ports receive the
respective 5524/P 24 GE port
configurations. The 10 G port
configurations remain the same. 54 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Loading Software onto Stack Members
Software can be downloaded to all units simultaneously, or to the master unit
alone. If software is only loaded to the master unit, when new software is
selected, and the Master is rebooted, the Master updates the software on the
remaining units.
In this way, all units in the stack run the same software version.
Rebooting the Stack
Whenever a reboot occurs, topology discovery is performed, and the Master
learns all units IDs in the stack.
Configuration files are changed only through explicit user configuration, and
are not automatically modified when units are added, removed or reassigned
unit IDs.
Each time the system reboots, the Startup Configuration file in the Master
unit is used to configure the stack.
Managing Configuration Files on the Stack
The Startup Configuration and Running Configuration file are stored on the
stack master.
Each port in the stack is referenced in the configuration files by its port type
and unit ID/0/port number, for example "gi1/0/24", which means Giga port 24
on unit 1 (the middle 0 is reserved for future use).
Configuration files are managed from the Stack Master, including:
• Saving to flash memory
5524P or 5524 5548P or 5548 The PowerConnect 5524/P 24 Gigabit
ports receives the first 24 Giga 5548/P port
configurations. The 10 Giga port
configurations remain the same. The
remaining ports receive the default port
configuration.
5524P or 5524 Port configurations remain the same.
Table 4-1. Port Configurations when Replacing Units (Continued)
New Unit Original Unit New Port ConfigurationDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 55
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Uploading configuration files to an external TFTP server/HTTP client
• Downloading configuration files from an external TFTP server/HTTP
client
• Download/upload through the USB port
NOTE: Stack configuration for all configured ports is saved, even if the stack
is reset and/or the ports are no longer present.56 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLYTemplate Last Updated - 2/7/2007Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 57
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
5
Configuring the Switch
This section describes the configuration that must be performed after the
switch is installed and connected to power supplies. Additional advanced
functions are described in "Advanced Switch Configuration" on page 67.
NOTE: Before proceeding further, read the release notes for this product. You can
download the release notes from the Dell Support website at support.dell.com.
NOTE: We recommend that you obtain the most recent revision of the user
documentation from the Dell Support website at support.dell.com.
It contains the following topics:
• Configuration Work Flow
• Connecting the Switch to the Terminal
• Booting the Switch
• Configuring the Stack
• Configuration Using the Setup Wizard58 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuration Work Flow
To configure the switches:
1 For each switch in the stack:
a Connect it to a terminal, as described in the "Connecting the Switch
to the Terminal" on page 59.
b Boot the switch, as described in the "Booting the Switch" on page 60.
c Assign a unit ID to the switch, as described in "Assigning Unit IDs" on
page 50.
2 Connect the units in the stack to each other, as described in "Configuring
the Stack" on page 61.
3 Connect the Master unit to the terminal, reboot the unit and the Setup
Wizard is run automatically, as described in "Configuration Using the
Setup Wizard" on page 61.
4 Respond to the Setup Wizard prompts.
5 Continue managing the switch, either through the console or Telnet, using
the CLI or the web GUI.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 59
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Connecting the Switch to the Terminal
The switch is configured and monitored through a terminal desktop system
that runs terminal emulation software. The switch connects to the terminal
through the console port.
To connect the switch to a terminal:
1 Connect an RS-232 cable to a VT100-compatible terminal or the serial
connector of a desktop system running terminal emulation software.
2 Connect the RS-232 cable to the switch console port on the front panel of
the switch (see Figure 5-1) using an 8-pin RJ-45 male connector.
Figure 5-1. Front-Panel Console Port
3 Set the terminal emulation software as follows:
a Select the appropriate serial port to connect to the switch.
b Set the data rate to 9600 baud.
c Set the data format to 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.
d Set Flow Control to none.
e Select VT100 for Emulation mode within your communication
software.
f Select Terminal keys for Function, Arrow, and Ctrl keys. Ensure that
the setting is for Terminal keys (not Windows keys).
NOTE: You can connect a console to the console port on any unit in the stack, but
stack management is performed only from the stack master (Unit ID 1 or 2).
Console Port60 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Booting the Switch
After the local terminal is connected, turn on power. The switch then goes
through power-on self-test (POST). POST runs every time the switch is
started and checks hardware components, to determine if the switch is
operational before completely booting. If the system detects a critical
problem, the boot process stops. If POST passes successfully, a valid
executable image is loaded into RAM. POST messages are displayed on the
terminal and indicate test success or failure.
The boot process runs for approximately 40-45seconds.
When the boot process completes, the following LEDs are lit, as shown in
Figure 5-2:
• Power
• Status
• Fan (should be green)
• RPS (if it is being used)
Figure 5-2. Initial LEDs
Power Status
Fan
RPSDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 61
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring the Stack
The switch is always considered to be a stack of switches even if the stack only
contains a single switch. If there is more than one switch in the stack, each
switch must be configured individually. See "Assigning Unit IDs" on page 50
for instructions on how to configure the stack.
Configuration Using the Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard guides you through the initial switch configuration to get
the system up and running as quickly as possible. Note that you can skip the
Setup Wizard and configure the switch manually through the CLI.
The Setup Wizard configures the following fields:
• SNMP Community String and SNMP Management System IP address
(optional)
• Username and password
• Management switch IP address
• IP subnet mask
• Default gateway IP address
NOTE: The Setup Wizard assumes the following:
• The PowerConnect switch was never configured before and is in the same
state as when you received it.
• The PowerConnect switch booted successfully.
• The console connection is established and the console prompt is displayed on
the screen of a VT100 terminal switch.
Connect the Master unit to a terminal. You can identify the Master unit by
the illuminated Master LED on the front panel of the switch (see Figure 3-2).
To configure the system using the Setup Wizard:
1 Obtain the following information from the network administrator:
• SNMP Community String and SNMP Management System IP
address (optional)
• Username and password62 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• The IP address to be assigned to the VLAN 1 interface through which
the switch is to be managed (by default, every external and internal
port is a member of the VLAN 1)
• The IP subnet mask for the network
• The default gateway (next hop router) IP address for configuring the
default route
2 Boot the Master unit. The system automatically prompts you to use the
Setup Wizard.
The Setup Wizard displays the following information:
Welcome to Dell Easy Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard guides you through the initial
switch configuration and gets you up and running
easily and quickly. You can skip the Setup Wizard
and enter CLI mode to manually configure the
switch. The system will prompt you with a default
answer; by pressing Enter, you accept the default
value.
You must respond to the next question to run the
Setup Wizard within 60 seconds, otherwise the
system will continue with normal operation using
the default system configuration.
Would you like to enter the Setup Wizard (you must
answer this question within 60 seconds)? (Y/N)
3 Enter [Y] to run the wizard. If you enter [N] or if you do not respond
within 60 seconds, the Setup Wizard automatically exits and the CLI
console prompt appears.
If you enter [Y] the wizard provides interactive guidance through the
initial switch configuration.
The following information is displayed:
You can exit the Setup Wizard at any time by
entering [ctrl+Z].
The system is not set up for SNMP management by
default. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 63
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To manage the switch using SNMP (required for Dell
Network Manager) you can:
• Setup the initial SNMP version 2 account now.
• Return later and set up the SNMP version account.
For more information on setting up a SNMP version
2 account, see the user documentation.
Would you like to set up the SNMP management
interface now? [Y/N]
4 Enter [N] to skip to Step 7 or enter [Y] to continue the Setup Wizard. If
you enter [Y] the following information is displayed:
To set up the SNMP management account you must
specify the management system IP address and the
"community string" or password that the particular
management system uses to access the switch. The
wizard automatically assigns the highest access
level [Privilege Level 15] to this account.
You can use Dell Network Manager or other
management interfaces to change this setting later
and to add additional management system later. For
more information on adding management systems, see
the user documentation.
To add a management station:
Please enter the SNMP community string to be used:
5 Enter the SNMP community string. You can use the default name "public"
Please enter the IP address of the Management
System (A.B.C.D) or wildcard (0.0.0.0) to manage
from any Management Station:[0.0.0.0].
6 Enter the SNMP Management System IP.
7 Set up user account privilege level, as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Now we need to set up your initial privilege
(Level 15) user account. This account is used to
login to the CLI and Web interface. You may set up 64 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
other accounts and change privilege levels later.
For more information on setting up user accounts
and changing privilege levels, see the user
documentation.
To set up a user account:
Enter the user name:
Please enter the user password:
Please reenter the user password:
8 Enter the following:
• User name, for example "admin"
• Password and password confirmation.
9 Press Enter.
The following information is displayed:
Next, an IP address is setup. The IP address is
defined on the default VLAN (VLAN 1). This is the
IP address you use to access the Telnet, Web
interface, or SNMP interface for the switch.
To set up an IP address:
Please enter the IP address of the device
(A.B.C.D):
Please enter the IP subnet mask (A.B.C.D or nn):
10 Enter the management IP address and IP subnet mask, for example
192.168.2.100 as the IP address and 255.255.255.0 as the IP subnet mask.
11 Press Enter.
The following information is displayed:
Finally, set up the default gateway.
Please enter the IP address of the gateway from
which this network is reachable
(e.g. 192.168.2.1).Default gateway
(A.B.C.D):[0.0.0.0] Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 65
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
12 Enter the default gateway.
13 Press Enter. The following is displayed (example):
This is the configuration information that has
been collected:
SNMP Interface = "Dell Network
Manager"@192.168.2.10
User Account setup = admin
Password = **********
Management IP address = 192.168.2.100
255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = 192.168.2.1
The following information is displayed:
If the information is correct, please select (Y)
to save the configuration and copy to the start-up
configuration file. If the information is
incorrect, select (N) to discard configuration and
restart the wizard: [Y/N]
14 Enter [N] to restart the wizard or enter [Y] to complete the Setup Wizard.
If you enter [Y] the following is displayed:
Configuring SNMP management interface.
Configuring user account.......
Configuring IP and subnet......
Thank you for using Dell Easy Setup Wizard. You
will now enter CLI mode.
The CLI prompt is displayed. You have finished the initial configuration.
After the initial configuration is complete, you can manage the switch from
the connected console port using the CLI or remotely through the
management interface, using Telnet or the Web GUI. See the Dell
PowerConnect 5500 Series User Guide found on the Documentation CD.66 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLYDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 67
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
6
Advanced Switch Configuration
This section describes how to perform various configuration operations
through the CLI.
It includes the following topics:
• Using the CLI
• Accessing the Device Through the CLI
• Retrieving an IP Address
• Security Management and Password Configuration
• Configuring Login Banners
• Startup Menu Procedures
• Software Download68 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Using the CLI
This section provides some general information for using the CLI.
For a complete description of CLI commands, refer to the Dell
PowerConnect 55xx Systems CLI Reference Guide.
Command Mode Overview
The CLI is divided into command modes, each with a specific command set.
Entering a question mark at the terminal prompt displays a list of commands
available for that particular command mode.
In each mode, a specific command is used to navigate from one mode to
another.
These modes are described below.
User EXEC Mode
During CLI session initialization, the CLI is in User EXEC mode. Only a
limited subset of commands is available in User EXEC mode. This level is
reserved for tasks that do not change the terminal configuration and is used
to access configuration sub-systems.
After logging into the device, User EXEC command mode is enabled. The
user-level prompt consists of the host name followed by the angle bracket
(>). For example: console>
NOTE: The default host name is console unless it has been modified during
initial configuration.
The User EXEC commands enable connecting to remote devices, changing
terminal settings on a temporary basis, performing basic tests, and listing
system information.
To list the User EXEC commands, enter a question mark at the command
prompt.
To enter the next level, Privileged EXEC mode, a password is required (if
configured).
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privileged EXEC mode provides access to the device global configuration. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 69
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Privileged access can be protected, to prevent unauthorized access and to
secure operating parameters. Passwords are displayed on the screen, and are
case-sensitive.
NOTE: The enable command is only necessary if you login with privilege level less
than 15.
To access and list the Privileged EXEC mode commands:
1 At the prompt type enable and press .
2 When a password prompt displays, enter the password and press
.
The Privileged EXEC mode prompt displays as the device host name
followed by #. For example: console#
To list the Privileged EXEC commands, type a question mark at the
command prompt.
To return from Privileged EXEC mode to User EXEC mode, type disable
and press .
The following example illustrates accessing privileged EXEC mode and then
returning to the User EXEC mode:
Use the exit command to return to a previous mode.
To configure the device, enter the next level, Global Configuration mode.
Global Configuration Mode
The Global Configuration mode manages device configuration on a global
level. Global Configuration commands apply to system features, rather than a
specific protocol or interface.
console> enable
Enter Password: ******
console#
console# disable
console>70 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To access Global Configuration mode, at the Privileged EXEC Mode prompt,
type configure and press . The Global Configuration mode displays
as the device host name followed by (config) and the pound sign #.
To list the Global Configuration commands, enter a question mark at the
command prompt.
The following example illustrates how to access Global Configuration mode
and return back to the Privileged EXEC mode:
Interface Configuration Mode
The Interface Configuration mode configures the device at the physical
interface level (port, VLAN, or LAG). Interface commands that require
subcommands have another level, called the Subinterface Configuration
mode. A password is not required to access this level.
The following example, places the CLI in Interface Configuration mode on
port 1/0/1. The sntp command is then applied to that port.
To run a command in a mode, which does not contain it, use do before the
command, as in the following example:
console# configure
console(configure)#
console#
console# configure
console(config)# exit
console#
console# configure
console(config)# interface gi1/0/1
console(config-if)# sntp client enable
console# configure
console(config)# interface gi1/0/1
console(config-if)# sntp client enable
console(config-if)# do show sntp configurationDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 71
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Accessing the Device Through the CLI
You can manage the device using CLI commands, over a direct connection to
the terminal console, or via a Telnet connection.
Direct Connection
Connect the device to the console and enter the CLI commands upon
receiving a prompt.
Telnet Connection
Telnet is a terminal emulation TCP/IP protocol. RS-232 terminals can be
virtually connected to the local device through a TCP/IP protocol network.
Telnet is an alternative to a local login terminal, where a remote login is
required.
The device supports up to four simultaneous Telnet sessions. All CLI
commands can be used over a Telnet session.
If access is via a Telnet connection, ensure that the device has an IP address
and that software has been downloaded to the device.
To start a Telnet session:
1 Select Start > Run.
The Run window opens.
2 Type cmd.
The cmd window opens.
3 In the cmd window, type Telnet .
The Telnet session begins.72 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Retrieving an IP Address
Receiving an IP Address from a DHCP Server
When using the DHCP protocol to retrieve an IP address, the device acts as a
DHCP client. When the device is reset, the DHCP command is saved in the
configuration file, but the IP address is not.
To retrieve an IP address from a DHCP server, perform the following steps:
1 Select and connect any port to a DHCP server or to a subnet that has a
DHCP server on it.
2 Type the following commands to use the selected port for receiving the IP
address.
a Assigning dynamic IP Addresses on a port:
b Assigning a dynamic IP Addresses on a VLAN:
The interface receives the IP address automatically.
console# configure
console(config)# interface gi1/0/1
console(config-if)# ip address dhcp
console# configure
console(config)# interface vlan 1
console(config-if)# ip address dhcpDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 73
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
3 To verify the IP address, type show ip interface at the system prompt, as
shown in the following example.
When configuring/receiving IP addresses through DHCP and BOOTP (an
older version of DHCP), the configuration received from these servers
includes the IP address and may include the subnet mask and default
gateway.
NOTE: It is not necessary to delete the device configuration to retrieve an IP
address from the DHCP server.
NOTE: When copying configuration files, avoid using a configuration file that
contains an instruction to enable DHCP on an interface that connects to the same
DHCP server, or to one with an identical configuration. In this instance, the device
retrieves the new configuration file and boots from it. The device then enables
DHCP, as instructed in the new configuration file, and the DHCP instructs it to reload
the same file.
NOTE: If you configure a DHCP IP address, this address is dynamically retrieved,
and the ip address dhcp command is saved in the configuration file. In the event of
master failure, the backup will again attempt to retrieve a DHCP address. This could
result in one of the following:
• The same IP address may be assigned.
• A different IP address may be assigned, which could result in loss of
connectivity to the management station.
• The DHCP server may be down, which would result in IP address retrieval
failure, and possible loss of connectivity to the management station.
Receiving an IP Address From a BOOTP Server
The standard BOOTP protocol is supported and enables the device to
automatically download its IP host configuration from any standard BOOTP
server in the network. In this case, the device acts as a BOOTP client.
console# show ip interface
IP Address I/F Type Directed Precedence Status
Broadcast
----------------- --------- -------- -------- -------- -----
0.0.0.0/32 gi2/0/1 DHCP disable No Valid
10.5.234.232/24 vlan 1 Static disable No Valid74 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To retrieve an IP address from a BOOTP server:
1 Select and connect any port to a BOOTP server or subnet containing such
a server.
2 At the system prompt, enter the delete startup configuration command to
delete the Startup Configuration from flash.
The device reboots with no configuration and in 60 seconds starts sending
BOOTP requests. The device receives the IP address automatically.
NOTE: When the device reboot begins, any input at the ASCII terminal or keyboard
automatically cancels the BOOTP process before completion and the device does
not receive an IP address from the BOOTP server.
The following example illustrates the process:
To display the IP address, enter the show ip interface command.
The device is now configured with an IP address.
console> enable
console# delete startup-config
Startup file was deleted
console# reload
You haven’t saved your changes. Are you sure you want to
continue (Y/N) [N]?
This command will reset the whole system and disconnect
your current session. Do you want to continue (Y/N) [N]?
************************************************
/* the device reboots */Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 75
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Security Management and Password
Configuration
System security is handled through the Authentication, Authorization, and
Accounting (AAA) mechanism that manages user access rights, privileges,
and management methods. AAA uses both local and remote user databases.
Data encryption is handled through the SSH mechanism.
Passwords can be configured for the following services:
• Terminal
• Telnet
• SSH
• HTTP
• HTTPS
NOTE: When creating a user name, the default priority is 1, which provides access
but not configuration rights. A priority of 15 must be set to enable access and
configuration rights to the device. Although user names can be assigned privilege
level 15 without a password, it is recommended to always assign a password. If
there is no specified password, privileged users can access the Web interface with
any password.
NOTE: Passwords can be secured by using password management commands to
force aging out of passwords, or expiration of passwords. For more information, see
"Management Security" on page 261.
Initial Configuration and Password Recovery
The system is delivered without a default password, and all passwords must be
defined by the user. If a user-defined password is lost, a password recovery
procedure can be invoked from the Startup menu. This procedure is
applicable for the local terminal only and enables a single access to the device
from the local terminal with no password entered.
The full mode of password recovery mechanism can be enabled/disabled
through the CLI (service password-recovery command).
This affects password recovery in the following way:
• Enabled: When the password-recovery mechanism is invoked, one-time
access to the device without a password is enabled and all configuration
and user files are retained.76 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Disabled: When the password-recovery mechanism is invoked, one-time
access to the device without a password is stilled enabled, however all
configuration files (startup and backups) are removed and the following
log message is generated to the terminal after boot process completed: “All
configuration and user files were removed”
Configuring an Initial Terminal Password
To configure an initial terminal password, enter the following commands:
Configuring an Initial Telnet Password
To configure an initial Telnet password, enter the following commands:
console(config)# aaa authentication login default line
console(config)# aaa authentication enable default line
console(config)# line console
console(config-line)# login authentication default
console(config-line)# enable authentication default
console(config-line)# password george
console(config)# aaa authentication login default line
console(config)# aaa authentication enable default line
console(config)# line telnet
console(config-line)# login authentication default
console(config-line)# enable authentication default
console(config-line)# password bobDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 77
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring an Initial SSH Password
To configure an initial SSH password, enter the following commands:
Configuring an Initial HTTP Password
To configure an initial HTTP password, enter the following commands:
Configuring an Initial HTTPS Password
To configure an initial HTTPS password, enter the following commands:
Enter the following commands once when configuring use of a terminal, a
Telnet, or an SSH session, for an HTTPS session.
NOTE: In the Web browser, enable SSL 2.0 or greater for the page content to be
displayed.
NOTE: HTTP and HTTPS services require privilege level 15 access and connect
directly to the configuration level access.
console(config)# aaa authentication login default line
console(config)# aaa authentication enable default line
console(config)# line ssh
console(config-line)# login authentication default
console(config-line)# enable authentication default
console(config-line)# password jones
console(config)# ip http authentication aaa loginauthentication local
console(config)# username admin password user1 privilege
15
console(config)# ip http authentication aaa loginauthentication local
console(config)# username admin password user1 privilege
15
console(config)# crypto certificate 1 generate keygenerate
console(config)# ip http secure-server78 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring Login Banners
Banners can be defined for each line, such as console and telnet) or for all
lines. They are disabled by default.
The following types of banners can be defined:
• Message-of-the-Day Banner (motd) — Displayed when the user connects
to the device, before login. The following defines a message-of-the-day for
the console:
console# configure
console(config)# line console
console(config-line)# motd-banner
console(config-line)# exit
console (config)# banner motd *
Welcome*
console# do show banner motd
Welcome
Would you like to enable this banner to all lines?
(Y/N)[Y] Y
console(config)#Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 79
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Login Banner— Displayed after the Message-of-the-Day Banner, and
before the user has logged in. The following defines a login banner for the
console:
• Exec Banner — Displayed after successful login (in all privileged levels
and in all authentication methods). The following defines an exec banner
for the console:
console# configure
console(config)# line console
console(config-line)# login-banner
console(config-line)# exit
console (config)# banner login *
Please log in*
console# do show banner login
Would you like to enable this banner to all lines?
(Y/N)[Y] Y
Please log in
console# configure
console(config)# line console
console(config-line)# exec-banner
console(config-line)# exit
console (config)# banner exec *
Successfully logged in*
Would you like to enable this banner to all lines?
(Y/N)[Y] Y
console# do show banner exec
Successfully logged in80 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Startup Menu Procedures
The Startup menu enables performing various tasks, such as software
download, flash handling and password recovery.
You can enter the Startup menu when booting the device. User input must be
entered immediately after the POST test.
To enter the Startup menu:
• Turn the power on. After the auto-boot messages appear, the following
menu is displayed:
The following sections describe the available Startup menu options.
NOTE: When selecting an option from the Startup menu, take time-out into
account. If no selection is made within 10 seconds (default), the device times out.
This default value can be changed through the CLI.
Download Software - Option[1]
The software download procedure is used to replace corrupted files or
upgrade system software, when the device does not have IP connectivity or
when both software images of the device are corrupted and therefore you
cannot use the web-based management system.
NOTE: it is highly recommended that, before loading via xmodem, the baud rate of
the device and terminal be set to 115200.
Startup Menu
[1]Download Software
[2]Erase Flash File
[3]Password Recovery Procedure
[4]Set Terminal Baud-Rate
[5]Stack menu
[6]BackDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 81
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To download software through the Startup menu:
1 From the Startup menu, press [1]. The following prompt is displayed:
2 When using the HyperTerminal, click Transfer on the HyperTerminal
Menu Bar and select Send File.
3 In the Filename field, enter the file path for the file to be downloaded.
4 Ensure that the Xmodem protocol is selected in the Protocol field.
5 Press Send. The software is downloaded.
NOTE: After software download, the device reboots automatically.
Erase FLASH File - Option[2]
In some cases, the device Startup Configuration file must be erased. If the
configuration is erased, all parameters configured via CLI, web-management
or SNMP must be reconfigured.
To erase the device configuration in the Startup Configuration file:
1 From the Startup menu, select [2]. The following message is
displayed:
Warning! About to erase a Flash file.
Are you sure (Y/N)?
2 Press Y. The following message is displayed.
Write Flash file name (Up to 8 characters, Enter for
none.):
3 Enter config ("config" is the standard name for the Startup configuration
file although you can use any name).
The following is displayed:
Downloading code using XMODEM
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
File config (if present) will be erased after system
initialization
======== Press Enter To Continue ========82 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The configuration is erased when the system is reset.
Password Recovery - Option[3]
If a password is lost, the Password Recovery procedure can be called from the
Startup menu. The procedure enables entry to the device a single time
without entering a password.
To recover a lost password when entering the local terminal only:
1 From the Startup menu, select [3].
2 Continue the regular startup by logging in without a password.
3 Enter a new password or press 'ESC' to exit.
NOTE: To ensure device security, reconfigure passwords for applicable
management methods.
Set Terminal Baud-Rate - Option[4]
To set the terminal baud-rate:
1 Type [4] and press .
2 Enter the new baud rate. The following is displayed:
Note that after this step, your terminal will no longer respond. Adjust your
terminal speed to the configured one.
Stack Menu - Option[5]
To configure the stack, type [5] and press .
For more information, see "Assigning Unit IDs" on page 50.
Set new device baud-rate: 38,400Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 83
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Software Download
This section contains instructions for downloading device software (system
and boot images) through a TFTP server or USB port. The TFTP server must
be configured before downloading the software.
Software Auto Synch in Stack
When several units are stacked, they must all run the same software version.
When a new slave device is inserted into the stack, it is first checked for
compatibility (meaning that the master can run firmware upgrade/downgrade
to the slave unit), and if found compatible, its boot and image software
versions are automatically updated with the Master’s. If the slave is found not
compatible, it is shutdown.
A SYSLOG message is sent when a master synchronizes a slave's software.
System Image Download
When the device boots, it decompresses the system image from the flash
memory area and runs it. When a new image is downloaded, it is saved in the
other area allocated for the other system image copy.
On the next boot, the device decompresses and runs the image from the
currently active system image.
A system image can be downloaded through a USB port or a TFTP server.
To download the system image from a TFTP server, ensure that an IP address
is configured on one of the device ports and pings can be sent to the TFTP
server. In addition, ensure that the file to be downloaded is saved on the
TFTP server.
To download a system image through the USB port or TFTP server:
1 Enter the show version command, to verify which software version is
currently running on the device. The following is an example of the
information that appears:
Unit SW version Boot version HW version
------ ------------------- ------------------- --------
2 1.0.0.24 1.0.0.11
console#84 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
2 Enter the show bootvar command, to verify which system image is
currently active. The following is an example of the information that is
displayed:
3 Enter the one of the following commands to copy a new system image to
the current unit:
– copy {tftp://|usb://}{tftp address}/{file name}
image (current unit)
or
To copy a new system image to all units in the stack:
– copy tftp://{tftp address}/{file name}
unit://*/image
4 When the new image is downloaded, it is saved in the area allocated for
the other copy of system image (image-2, as shown in the example). The
following is an example of the information that appears:
Exclamation symbols indicate that a copying process is in progress. Each
symbol (!) corresponds to 512 bytes transferred successfully. A period
indicates that the copying process is timed out. Many periods in a row
indicate that the copying process failed.
console# show bootvar
Unit Image Filename Version Date Status
---- ----- --------- --------- --------------------- ---------
2 1 image-1 1.0.0.13 04-Aug-2010 08:27:30 Active*
2 2 image-2 1.0.0.12 29-Jul-2010 17:02:26 Not active
console#
console# copy tftp://176.215.31.3/file1.ros image
Accessing file ‘file1’ on 176.215.31.3Ö
Loading file1 from 176.215.31.3:
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
Copy took 00:01:11 [hh:mm:ss]Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 85
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
5 Select the image for the next boot by entering the boot system command.
After this command, enter the show bootvar command to verify that the
copy indicated as a parameter in the boot system command is selected for
the next boot.
The following is an example of the information that appears:
If the image for the next boot is not selected by entering the boot system
command, the system boots from the currently active image.
6 Enter the reload command. The following message is displayed:
7 Enter Y. The device reboots.
Boot Image Download
Loading a new boot image from the TFTP server or USB port, updates the
boot image. The boot image is loaded when the device is powered on. A user
has no control over the boot image copies.
To download a boot image through the TFTP server:
console# boot system image-2
console# show bootvar
Images currently available on the Flash
Image-1 active
Image-2 not active (selected for next boot)
console# reload
This command will reset the whole system and
disconnect your current session. Do you want to
continue (y/n) [n]?86 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
1 Enter the show version command to verify which software version is
currently running on the device. The following is an example of the
information that appears:
2 Enter the copy {tftp://|usb://}{tftp address}/{file
name} boot command to copy the boot image to the device. The
following is an example of the information that appears:
3 Enter the reload command. The following message is displayed:
4 Enter Y. The device reboots.
console# show version
Unit SW version Boot version HW version
----- -------------- ----------------- ----------
2 1.0.0.24 1.0.0.11
console#
console# copy tftp://50.1.1.7/contax-10014.ros image
01-Oct-2006 11:57:35 %COPY-I-FILECPY: Files Copy - source URL
tftp://50.1.1.7/contax-10014.ros destination URL flash://image
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
01-Sep-2010 11:57:38 %INIT-I-Startup: Cold Startup
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
01-Sep-2010 11:59:05 %COPY-N-: The copy operation was completed
successfully!
Copy: 5954757 bytes copied in 00:01:30 [hh:mm:ss]
console# reload
This command will reset the whole system and
disconnect your current session. Do you want to
continue (Y/N) [N]?Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 87
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
7
Using Dell OpenManage
Administrator
This section provides an introduction to the Dell OpenManage Switch
Administrator user interface.
It contains the following topics:
• Starting the Application
• Understanding the Interface
• Using the Switch Administrator Buttons
• Field Definitions
• Common GUI Features
• CLI Commands88 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Starting the Application
NOTE: Before starting the application the IP address must be defined. For more
information, see "Accessing the Device Through the CLI" on page 71.
1 Open a web browser.
2 Enter the device’s IP address in the address bar and press .
3 When the Log In window displays, enter a user name and password.
NOTE: Passwords are both case sensitive and alpha-numeric.
4 Click OK.
The Dell OpenManage Switch Administrator home page displays.
Understanding the Interface
The home page contains the following views:
• Tree view — Located on the left side of the home page, the tree view
provides an expandable view of the features and their components. The
branches in the tree view can be expanded to view all the components
under a specific feature, or retracted to hide the feature's components. By
dragging the vertical bar to the right, the tree area can be expanded to
display the full name of a component.
• Device View — Located in on the top center of the home page, the device
view provides information about device ports, current configuration and
status, table information, and feature components. For further
information, see "Device Representation" on page 89
• Components List — Located in the bottom center of the home page,
contains a list of the feature components. When a feature is expanded, the
GUI page for that feature is displayed.
• Information Buttons— Located at the top of the home page, provide
access to information about the device and access to Dell Support. For
more information, see "Information Buttons" on page 91.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 89
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Device Representation
The home page contains a graphical representation of the units in the stack’s
front panels. Figure 7-1 displays the 5548 model, but the display for the other
models are similar.
Figure 7-1. PowerConnect Device Port Indicators
The graphic display on the home page displays the Unit ID and port
indicators that specify whether a specific port is currently active. Table 7-1
describes the port colors that are displayed and their meaning:
Table 7-1. Port Colors
NOTE: For more information about LEDs, see "LED Definitions" on page 40.
To configure a port double-click on its icon.
Only ports that are physically present are displayed in the PowerConnect
OpenManage Switch Administrator home page, and can be configured
through the web management system. Non-present ports can be configured
through the CLI or SNMP interfaces.
Port Representation
Ports are referred to in the notation: [gi/te]x/0/z, where:
Component Description
Amber The port is currently connected at 100 Mbps.
Green The port is currently connected at 1000 Mbps
Grey The port is currently disconnected
Stacking Unit ID
Giga Ports (odd numbered)
Giga Ports (even numbered)90 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• gi—Giga port
• te —Ten Giga port
• x — Unit ID
• z — Port numberDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 91
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Using the Switch Administrator Buttons
This section describes the buttons found on the OpenManage Switch
Administrator interface.
Information Buttons
Table 7-2 describes the information buttons that provide access to online
support and online help, as well as information about the OpenManage
Switch Administrator interfaces. These are displayed at the top of each page.
Device Management Icons
Table 7-3 describes the device management buttons.
Table 7-2. Information Buttons
Button Description
Support Opens the Dell Support page at support.dell.com
About Contains the version and build number and Dell copyright
information.
Logout Opens the Log Out window.
Table 7-3. Device Management Icons
Button Icon Description
Apply&Save Saves changes to the Running and Startup Configuration
files.
Help Open online help. The online help pages are
context-sensitive. For example, if the IP Addressing page is
open, the help topic for that page is displayed when Help is
clicked.
Print Prints the Network Management System page and/or table
information.92 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Refresh Refreshes device information from the Running
Configuration file.
Table 7-3. Device Management Icons (Continued)Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 93
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Field Definitions
Fields that are user-defined can contain between 1–159 characters, unless
otherwise noted on the OpenManage Switch Administrator web page. All
letters or characters can be used, except the following: "\ / : * ? < >"
Common GUI Features
Table 7-4 describes the common functions that can be performed on many
GUI pages.
Table 7-4. Common GUI Elements
Button Description
Apply Save changes entered in GUI page to the Running
Configuration file.
Back Go to previous page.
Cancel Cancel changes entered in GUI page.
Clear All Counters Delete counters.
Clear Counters Delete selected counters.
Clear Log Delete entries from log.
Clear Statistics Delete statistics.
Copy parameters
from
Copy the parameters from a selected row to the selected
target rows.
Copy parameters
from port
Copy the parameters from a selected port to the selected
target ports.
Details Shows further details relevant to the current page.
Next Go to next page.
Query Run a query after query criteria have been entered.
Remove Remove checked elements in the page. If Select All is
selected, all elements are removed.
Reset All Counters Delete all counters.
Restore Defaults Restores parameters entered in page to default values.94 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
GUI Terms
Each GUI page in the tree view is described in the following sections. A brief
introduction is provided along with steps specifying how to enter information
in the page. The following terms are used:
• Enter — Indicates that information may be entered in the field. It does
not imply that the field is mandatory.
• Select —Indicates that information may be selected from a drop-down list
or from radio buttons.
• Displays —Indicates that the field is display only.
CLI Commands
There are certain command entry conventions that apply to all commands.
The following table describes these conventions.
Table 7-5. Common GUI Elements
Telnet Opens a Telnet window. This only works in the Explorer 6 and
Firefox browsers.
Button Description
[ ] In a command line, square brackets indicate an optional
entry..
{ } In a command line, curly brackets indicate a selection of
compulsory parameters separated by the | character. One
option must be selected. For example: flowcontrol
{auto|on|off} means that for the flowcontrol command
either auto, on, or off must be selected.
Italic Font Indicates a parameter value.
Bold Italic Font Indicates a parameter key word.
Any individual key on the keyboard. For example click
.
Table 7-4. Common GUI Elements (Continued)
Button DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 95
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Ctrl+F4 Any combination of keys clicked simultaneously, for example:
Ctrl and F4.
Screen Display Indicates system messages and prompts appearing on the
console.
all When a parameter is required to define a range of ports or
parameters and all is an option, the default for the command
is all when no parameters are defined. For example, the
command interface range port-channel has the option of
either entering a range of channels, or selecting all. When the
command is entered without a parameter, it automatically
defaults to all.
Button Description96 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLYDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 97
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
8
Network Security
This section describes the various mechanisms for providing security on the
switch.
It contains the following topics:
• Port Security
• ACLs
• ACL Binding
• Proprietary Protocol Filtering
• Absolute Time Range
• Time Range Recurrence
• Dot1x Authentication98 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Port Security
Network security can be enhanced by limiting access on a port to users with
specific MAC addresses. The MAC addresses can be dynamically learned, or
they can be statically configured.
Port security has the following modes:
• Classic Lock — Locked port security monitors both received and learned
packets that are received on specific ports. Access to the locked port is
limited to users with specific MAC addresses. These addresses are either
manually defined on the port, or learned on that port before it was locked.
• Limited Dynamic Lock — When a packet is received on a locked port,
and the packet’s source MAC address is not tied to that port (either it was
learned on a different port, or it is unknown to the system), a protection
mechanism, which provides various options is invoked. Unauthorized
packets arriving to a locked port are either:
– Forwarded
– Discarded with no trap
– Discarded with a trap
– The port is shutdown
Locked port security enables storing a list of MAC addresses in the
configuration file. The MAC addresses are restored when the device is reset.
Disabled ports can be activated from the Port Configuration page. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 99
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To configure port security:
1 Click Switching > Network Security > Port Security to display the Port
Security: Summary page.
Figure 8-1. Port Security: Summary
Security parameters are displayed for all ports or LAGs, depending on the
selected interface type.
2 To modify the security parameters for a port, select it, and click Edit.
3 Enter the following fields:
– Interface — Select the interface to be configured.
– Current Port Status — Displays the current port status.
– Set Port — Select to either lock or unlock the port.
– Learning Mode — Set the locked port type. The Learning Mode field
is enabled only if Locked is selected in the Set Port field. The possible
options are:
• Classic Lock — Locks the port using the classic lock mechanism.
The port is immediately locked, regardless of the number of
addresses that have already been learned. 100 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Limited Dynamic Lock — Locks the port by deleting the
dynamic MAC addresses associated with the port. The port learns
up to the maximum addresses allowed on the port. Both
relearning and aging MAC addresses are enabled.
– Max Entries (0-128) — Enter the maximum number of MAC
addresses that can be learned on the port. The Max Entries field is
enabled only if Locked is selected in the Set Port field, and the
Limited Dynamic Lock mode is selected in Learning Mode field.
– Action on Violation — Select the action to be applied to packets
arriving on a locked port. The possible options are:
• Discard — Discard the packets from any unlearned source.
• Forward — Forward the packets from an unknown source,
without learning the MAC address.
• Shutdown — Discard the packet from any unlearned source, and
shut down the port. Ports remain shutdown until they are
reactivated, or the device is reset.
– Trap — Enable/disable traps being sent when a packet is received on a
locked port.
– Trap Frequency (1-1000000) — Enter the amount of time (in
seconds) between traps.
Configuring Port Security Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring port
security.
.
Table 8-1. Port Security CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
set interface active
{[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethern
et] interface|port-channel LAGnumber}
Reactivates an interface that is
shutdown due to port security
reasons.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 101
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
port security max {max-addr}
no port security max
Specifies the maximum number of
MAC addresses that can be learned
on the port.
Use the no form of this command
to restore the default
port security mode {lock | maxaddresses }
no port security mode
Configures the port security
learning mode.
Use the no form of this command
to restore the default
configuration.
port security [forward | discard |
discard-shutdown] [trap seconds]
no port security
Enables port security on an
interface.
Use the no form of this command
to disable port security on an
interface.
port security
[forward|discard|discard-shutdown]
[trap seconds]
no port security
Configures port security on an
interface.
Use the no form of this command
to disable port security.
show ports security
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethern
et] port-number ]|port-channel
LAG-number]
Displays lock status of specified
interface or of all interfaces.
Table 8-1. Port Security CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description102 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console # show ports security
Port Status Learning Action Maximum Trap Frequency
------- -------- -------- -------- ------- ---- ---------
gi1/0/1 Disabled Max-Addresses - 10 - -
gi1/0/2 Disabled Lock - 1 - -
gi1/0/3 Disabled Lock - 1 - -
gi1/0/4 Disabled Lock - 1 - -
gi1/0/5 Disabled Lock - 1 - -
gi1/0/6 Disabled Lock - 1 - -
gi1/0/7 Disabled Lock - 1 - -
gi1/0/8 Disabled Lock - 1 - -
gi1/0/9 Disabled Lock - 1 - -
gi1/0/10Disabled Lock - 1 - -
gi1/0/11Disabled Lock - 1 - -
gi1/0/12Disabled Lock - 1 - -Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 103
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
ACLs
This section describes Access Control Lists (ACLs), which enable defining
classification actions and rules for specific ingress or egress ports.
It contains the following topics:
• ACL Overview
• MAC-Based ACLs
• MAC-Based ACEs
• IPv4-Based ACLs
• IPv4-Based ACEs
• IPv6-Based ACLs
• IPv6-Based ACEs
ACL Overview
Access Control Lists (ACLs) enable network managers to define classification
actions and rules for specific ingress or egress ports. Packets entering an
ingress or egress port, with an active ACL, are either admitted or denied entry.
If entry is denied, the ingress or egress port may be disabled, for example, a
network administrator defines an ACL rule that states that port number 20
can receive TCP packets, however, if a UDP packet is received, the packet is
dropped.
ACLs are composed of Access Control Entries (ACEs) that are rules that
determine traffic classifications. Each ACE is a single rule, and up to 256
rules may be defined on each ACL, and up to 3000 rules globally.
Rules are not only used for user configuration purposes, they are also used for
features like DHCP Snooping, Protocol Group VLAN and iSCSI, so that not
all 3000 rules are available for ACEs. It is expected that there will be at least
2000 rules available. If there are fewer rules available, this may be due to
DHCP Snooping or iSCSI optimization. Reduce the number of entries in
DHCP Snooping or reduce the max number of TCP connections in the iSCSI
configuration in order to free rules for ACEs.
The following types of ACLs can be defined:
• MAC-based ACL — Examines Layer 2 fields only
• IPv4-based ACL —Examines the Layer 3 layer of IPv4 frames104 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• IPv6-based ACL —Examines the Layer 3 layer of IPv6 frames
MAC-Based ACLs
To define a MAC-based ACL:
1 Click Switching > Network Security > MAC Based ACL to display the
MAC Based ACL: Summary page.
Figure 8-2. MAC Based ACL: Summary
The currently-defined MAC-based ACLs are displayed.
2 To add a new ACL, click Add ACL, and enter the name of the new ACL.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 105
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring MAC-Based ACLs Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring
MAC-based ACLs.
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
Table 8-2. MAC Based ACL CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
mac access-list extended aclname
no mac access-list extended aclname
Defines an ACL and places the device
in MAC-extended ACL configuration
mode.
Use the no form of this command to
remove the ACL.
show interfaces access-lists Displays access lists applied on
interfaces.
console# show access-lists
Extended IP access list ACL1
permit 234 172.30.40.1 0.0.0.0 any
permit 234 172.30.8.8 0.0.0.0 any106 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
MAC-Based ACEs
To add rules to an ACL:
1 Click Switching > Network Security > MAC Based ACE to display the
MAC Based ACE: Summary page.
Figure 8-3. MAC Based ACE: Summary
The currently-defined rules for the selected ACL are displayed.
2 To add a rule click Add ACE.
3 Select the ACL for which a rule is being created.
4 Enter the fields:
– New Rule Priority — Enter the priority of the ACE. ACEs with higher
priority are processed first. One is the highest priority
– Source MAC Address — Match the source MAC address from which
packets have arrived to this source address. In addition to the Source
MAC address, you can enter a Wildcard Mask that specifies which
bits in the source address are used for matching and which bits are
ignored. A wildcard of 00:00:00:00:00:00 means the bits must be
matched exactly; ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff means the bits are irrelevant. Any
combination of 0s and ffs can be used.
– Any — Check to indicate that the source address is not matched.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 107
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Dest. MAC Address — Match the destination MAC address to which
packets are addressed to this address. In addition to the Destination
MAC address, you can enter a Wildcard Mask that specifies which
bits in the source address are used for matching and which bits are
ignored. A wildcard of 00:00:00:00:00:00 means the bits must be
matched exactly; ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff means the bits are irrelevant. Any
combination of 0s and ffs can be used.
– Any — Check to indicate that the destination address is not matched.
– VLAN ID — Match the packet’s VLAN ID to this VLAN ID. The
possible VLAN IDs are 1 to 4095.
– CoS — Match the packet’s CoS value to this CoS value.
– Cos Mask — Match the packet’s CoS value to one of these CoS
values.
– Ether type — Match the packet’s Ethertype to this one.
– Time Range Name — Check to associate a time range with the ACE.
Select one of the time ranges defined in the Time Range page.
– Action — Select the action taken upon a match. The following
options are available:
• Permit — Forward packets that meet the ACL criteria.
• Deny — Drop packets that meet the ACL criteria.
• Shutdown — Drop packets that meet the ACL criteria, and
disable the port to which the packet was addressed.
– Logging of Dropped Packets — Check to activate logging of dropped
packets. 108 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring MAC-Based ACEs Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring MACbased ACEs.
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
Table 8-3. MAC Based ACE CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
permit {any|source-ip-address
source-wildcard}
{any|destination destinationwildcard} [eth-type
0|aarp|amber|decspanning|decnetiv|diagnostic|dsm|etype-6000]
[vlan vlan-id] [cos cos coswildcard] [time-range timerange-name]
Sets permit conditions for an MAC
access list (in MAC ACL configuration
mode).
deny {any|source sourcewildcard} {any|destination
destination-wildcard} [eth-type
0|aarp|amber|decspanning|decnet-iv | diagnostic
|dsm|etype-6000] [vlan vlan-id]
[cos cos cos-wildcard] [timerange time-range-name][disableport|log-input]
Sets deny conditions for an MAC
access list.
console(config)# mac access-list extended server1
console(config-mac-al)# permit 00:00:00:00:00:01
00:00:00:00:00:ff anyDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 109
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
IPv4-Based ACLs
To define an IPv4-based ACL:
1 Click Switching > Network Security > IPv4 Based ACL to display the
IPv4 Based ACL: Summary page.
Figure 8-4. IPv4 Based ACL: Summary
The previously-defined IPv4 ACLs are displayed.
2 To add a new ACL, click Add ACL.
3 Enter the name of the new ACL. Names are case-sensitive.110 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring IP-based ACLs Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring IP-based
ACLs.
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
IPv4-Based ACEs
To add a rule to an ACL:
1 Click Switching > Network Security > IPv4 Based ACE to display the
IPv4 Based ACE page.
Figure 8-5. IPv4 Based ACE: Summary
Table 8-4. IP-Based ACL CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip access-list extended aclname
no ip access-list extended aclname
Defines an IPv4 access list and places
the device in IPv4 access list
configuration mode
Use the no form of this command to
remove the access list.
console(config)# ip access-list extended server-aclDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 111
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The currently-defined rules for the selected ACL are displayed.
2 To add a rule, click Add ACE.
3 Select a user-defined ACL, and enter the following fields:
– New ACE Priority (1-2147483647) —Enter the priority of the ACE.
ACEs with higher priority are processed first. One is the highest
priority.
– Protocol Select From List — Select to create an ACE, based on a
specific protocol. The following options are available:
• ICMP — Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). The ICMP
enables the gateway or destination host to communicate with the
source host, for example, to report a processing error.
• IGMP — Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP).
Enables hosts to notify their local switch or router that they want
to receive transmissions assigned to a specific multicast group.
• IPinIP — IP in IP. Encapsulates IP packets to create tunnels
between two routers. This ensures that IPIP tunnel appears as a
single interface, rather than several separate interfaces. IPIP
enables tunnel intranets occur the internet, and provides an
alternative to source routing.
• TCP — Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). Enables two hosts
to communicate and exchange data streams. TCP guarantees
packet delivery, and guarantees that packets are transmitted and
received in the order they are sent.
• EGP — Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP). Permits exchanging
routing information between two neighboring gateway hosts in an
autonomous systems network.
• IGP — Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP). Enables for routing
information exchange between gateways in an autonomous
network.
• UDP — User Datagram Protocol (UDP). Communication
protocol that transmits packets but does not guarantee their
delivery.112 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• HMP — Host Mapping Protocol (HMP). Collects network
information from various networks hosts. HMP monitors hosts
spread over the internet as well as hosts in a single network.
• RDP — Reliable Data Protocol (RDP). provide a reliable data
transport service for packet-based applications.
• IDPR— Matches the packet to the IDPR protocol.
• IDRP— Matches the packet to the Inter-Domain Routing
Protocol (IDRP).
• RVSP — Matches the packet to the ReSerVation Protocol
(RSVP).
• AH — Authentication Header (AH). Provides source host
authentication and data integrity.
• EIGRP — Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol
(EIGRP). Provides fast convergence, support for variable-length
subnet mask, and supports multiple network layer protocols.
• OSPF — The Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol is a
link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for
network routing Layer Two (2) Tunneling Protocol, an extension
to the PPP protocol that enables ISPs to operate Virtual Private
Networks (VPNs).
• IPIP — IP over IP (IPinIP). Encapsulates IP packets to create
tunnels between two routers. This ensures that IPIP tunnel
appears as a single interface, rather than several separate
interfaces. IPIP enables tunnel intranets occur the internet, and
provides an alternative to source routing.
• PIM — Matches the packet to Protocol Independent Multicast
(PIM).
• L2TP— Matches the packet to Internet Protocol (L2IP).
• ISIS — Intermediate System - Intermediate System (ISIS).
Distributes IP routing information throughout a single
autonomous system in IP networks.
– Protocol ID To Match— Enter a protocol number if you did not
select a protocol by name.
– Any(IP) — Check to use any protocol. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 113
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Source Port (0 - 65535) — Enter the TCP/UDP source port. Enter
either Single, Range or select Any to include all ports.
– Destination Port (0 - 65535) — Enter the TCP/UDP destination port.
Enter either a Single, Range or select Any to include all ports.
– Source IP Address — Enter the source IP address to which addresses
in the packet are compared.
• Wildcard Mask —In addition to the Source MAC address, you
can enter a mask that specifies which bits in the source address are
used for matching and which bits are ignored. A wildcard of
0.0.0.0 means the bits must be matched exactly in addition to the
IP source address; ff.ff.ff.ff means the bits are irrelevant. Any
combination of 0s and ffs can be used.
• Any — Check to indicate that the source address is not matched.
– Dest. IP Address — Enter the destination IP address to which
addresses in the packet are compared.
• Wildcard Mask —In addition to the Destination MAC address,
you can enter a mask that specifies which bits in the source
address are used for matching and which bits are ignored. A
wildcard of 0.0.0.0 means the bits must be matched exactly in
addition to the IP destination address; ff.ff.ff.ff means the bits are
irrelevant. Any combination of 0s and ffs can be used.
• Any — Check to indicate that the destination address is not
matched.
– TCP Flags — To use TCP flags, check the TCP Flag checkbox and
then check the desired flag(s).
– ICMP — Specifies an ICMP message type for filtering ICMP packets.
This field is available only when ICMP is selected in the Protocol
field. The following options are available:
• Select from List — Select an ICMP type from the list.
• ICMP Type — Enter the ICMP type.
• Any — Check to use all ICMP types.114 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– ICMP Code — Enter an ICMP message code for filtering ICMP
packets that are filtered by ICMP message type or ICMP message
code. This field is available only when ICMP is selected in the
Protocol field. The following options are available:
• ICMP Code — Enter an ICMP code.
• Any — Check to use all ICMP codes.
– IGMP — IGMP packets can be filtered by IGMP message type. This
field is available only when IGMP is selected in the Protocol field. The
following options are available:
• Select from List — Select an IGMP message type from the list.
• IGMP Type — Enter the IGMP message type.
• Any — Check to use all IGMP message types.
– Classification — Select one of the following matching options:
• Match DSCP(0-63) — Matches the packet DSCP value to the
ACL.
• Match IP Precedence(0-7) — Check to enable matching
IP-precedence with the packet IP-precedence value. IPprecedence enables marking frames that exceed the CIR
threshold. In a congested network, frames containing a higher DP
value are discarded before frames with a lower DP value. If this
field is checked, enter a value to be matched.
– Time Range Name — Check to associate a time range with the ACE.
Select one of the time ranges defined in the Time Range page.
– Action — Select the ACL forwarding action. The following options
are available:
• Permit — Forward packets which meet the ACL criteria.
• Deny — Drop packets which meet the ACL criteria.
• Shutdown — Drop packet that meet the ACL criteria, and disable
the port to which the packet was addressed.
– Logging of Dropped Packets — Check to activate logging of dropped
packets. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 115
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring IP-based ACEs Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring IP-based
ACLs.
Table 8-5. IP-Based ACE CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
permit protocol {any|source-ip-address
source-wildcard} {any|destination-ipaddress destination-wildcard} [dscp
number|precedence number] [time-range
time-range-name]
permit icmp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|destination-ip-address
destination-wildcard} [any|icmptype][any|icmp-code]] [dscp
number|precedence number] [time-range
time-range-name]
permit igmp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|destination-ip-address
destination-wildcard}[igmp-type] [dscp
number|precedence number] [time-range
time-range-name]
permit tcp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|source-port/portrange}{any|destination-ip-address
destination-wildcard} {any|destinationport/port-range } [dscp number|precedence
number] [match-all list-of-flags] [timerange time-range-name]
permit udp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|source-port|port-range}
{any|destination-ip-address destinationwildcard} {any|destination-port/port-range
} [dscp number|precedence number] [matchall time-range-name] [time-range timerange-name]
Sets conditions to
allow a packet to pass
a named IP access list
( in access list
configuration mode).
The list of protocols is
found above.116 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
deny protocol {any|source-ip-address
source-wildcard} {any|destination-ipaddress destination-wildcard} [dscp
number|precedence number] [time-range
time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input]
deny icmp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|destination-ip-address
destination-wildcard{any|icmp-type}
{any|icmp-code} [dscp number|precedence
number] [time-range time-range-name]
[disable-port|log-input]
deny igmp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|destination-ip-address
destination-wildcard}[igmp-type] [dscp
number|precedence number] [time-range
time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input]
deny tcp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|source-port|portrange}{any|destination-ip-address
destination-wildcard} {any|destinationport/port-range } [dscp number|precedence
number] [match-all list-of-flags] [timerange time-range-name] [disable-port|loginput]
deny udp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|source-port|port-range}
{any|destination-ip-address destinationwildcard} {any|destination-port|port-range
} [dscp number|precedence number] [matchall time-range-name] [time-range timerange-name] [disable-port|log-input]
Sets deny conditions
for IPv4 access list (in
access list
configuration mode).
console(config)# ip access-list extended server
console(config-ip-al)# permit ip 1.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
1.1.2.0 0.0.0.0
Table 8-5. IP-Based ACE CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 117
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
IPv6-Based ACLs
The IPv6 Based ACL Page displays and enables the creation of IPv6 ACLs,
which check pure IPv6-based traffic. IPv6 ACLs do not check IPv6-over-IPv4
or ARP packets.
To define IPv6-based ACLs:
1 Click Switching > Network Security > IPv6 Based ACL to display the
IPv6 Based ACL: Summary page.
Figure 8-6. IPv6 Based ACL: Summary
A list of all of the currently defined IPv6-based ACLs is displayed.
2 To add a new ACL, click Add ACL.
3 Enter the name of the new ACL. Names are case-sensitive.118 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring IPv6-based ACLs Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring
IPv6-based ACLs.
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
IPv6-Based ACEs
To add a rule to an IPv6-based ACL:
1 Click Switching > Network Security > IPv6 Based ACE to display the
IPv6 ACE: Summary page.
Figure 8-7. IPv6 Based ACE: Summary
Table 8-6. IP-Based ACL CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ipv6 access-list [access-listname]
no ipv6 access-list [accesslist-name]
Defines an IPv6 access list and places
the device in IPv6 access list
configuration mode
Use the no form of this command to
remove the access list.
console(config)# ipv6 access-list server-aclDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 119
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The currently-defined rules for the selected ACL are displayed.
2 To add a rule click Add ACE.
3 Select a user-defined ACL for which a rule is being created.
4 Enter the following fields:
– New Rule Priority — Enter the ACE priority that determines which
ACE is matched to a packet, based on a first match.
– Protocol Select from List — Select to create an ACE, based on a
specific protocol. The following options are available:
• TCP — Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). Enables two
hosts to communicate and exchange data streams. TCP
guarantees packet delivery, and guarantees packets are
transmitted and received in the order the are sent.
• UDP — User Datagram Protocol (UDP). Communication
protocol that transmits packets but does not guarantee their
delivery.
• ICMP — Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). The
ICMP allows the gateway or destination host to communicate
with the source host. For example, to report a processing error.
• IPV6 — Matches the packet to the IPV6 protocol.
– Protocol ID To Match — Enter a protocol.
– Any — Check to use any protocol.
– Source Port — Enter the TCP/UDP source port. Enter either a Single,
Range or select Any to include all ports.
– Destination Port — Enter the TCP/UDP destination port. Enter
either a Single, Range or select Any to include all ports.
– TCP Flags — To use TCP flags, check the TCP Flag checkbox and
then check the desired flag(s).
– ICMP — Specifies an ICMP message type for filtering ICMP packets.
This field is available only when ICMP is selected in the Protocol
field. The following options are available:
• Select from List — Select an ICMP type from the list.
• ICMP Type — Enter the ICMP type.120 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Any — Check to use all ICMP types.
– ICMP Code — Specifies an ICMP message code for filtering ICMP
packets that are filtered by ICMP message type or ICMP message
code. This field is available only when ICMP is selected in the
Protocol field. The following options are available:
• ICMP Code — Enter an ICMP code.
• Any — Check to use all ICMP codes.
– Source IP Address — Enter the source IP address to which addresses
in the packet are compared. The following options are available:
• Prefix Length —The number of bits that comprise the source IP
address prefix of the subnetwork.
• Any — Check to indicate that the source address is not matched.
– Dest. IP Address — Enter the destination IP address to which
addresses in the packet are compared. The following options are
available:
• Prefix Length —The number of bits that comprise the
destination IP address prefix of the subnetwork.
• Any — Check to indicate that the destination address is not
matched.
– Traffic Class — Select one of the following options:
• Match DSCP — Matches the packet DSCP value to the ACL.
• Match IP Precedence — Matches the IP-precedence with the
packet IP-precedence value. IP-precedence enables marking
frames that exceed CIR threshold. In a congested network, frames
containing a higher DP value are discarded before frames with a
lower DP value.
– Time Range Name — Check to associate a time range with the ACE.
Select one of the time ranges defined in the Time Range page.
– Action — The ACL forwarding action. The following options are
available:
• Permit — Forwards packets that meet the ACL criteria.
• Deny — Drops packets that meet the ACL criteria.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 121
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Shutdown — Drops packet that meet the ACL criteria, and disables
the port to which the packet was addressed.
– Logging of Dropped Packets — Check to activate logging of dropped
packets.
Configuring IP-based ACEs Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring IP-based
ACLs.
Table 8-7. IP-Based ACE CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
permit protocol {any|{source-prefix/length
}{any|destination- prefix/length } [dscp
number|precedence number] [time-range
time-range-name]
permit icmp {any|{source-prefix/length
}{any|destination-prefix/length }
{any|icmp-type}{any|icmp-code} [dscp
number|precedence number] [time-range
time-range-name]
permit tcp {any|{source-prefix/length }
{any|source-port/port-range}
}{any|destination prefix/length }
{any|destination-port/port-range} [dscp
number|precedence number] [match-all listof-flags] [time-range time-range-name]
permit udp {any|{source-prefix/length }}
{any|source-port|port-range}
}{any|destination prefix/length }
{any|destination-port/port-range} [dscp
number|precedence number] [time-range
time-range-name]
Sets permit conditions
for IPv6 access list.122 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
deny protocol {any|{source-prefix/length
}{any|destination-prefix|length} [dscp
number|precedence number] [time-range
time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input]
deny icmp {any|{source-prefix/length
}{any|destination-prefix/length }
{any|icmp-type} {any|icmp-code} [dscp
number|precedence number] [time-range
time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input]
deny tcp {any|{source-prefix/length }
{any|source-port/port-range}
}{any|destination-prefix/length}
{any|destination-port/port-range} [dscp
number|precedence number] [match-all listof-flags] [time-range time-range-name]
[disable-port|log-input]
deny udp {any|{source-prefix/length }}
{any|source-port/port-range}
}{any|destination-prefix|length}
{any|destination-port/port-range} [dscp
number|precedence number] [time-range
time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input]
Sets deny conditions
for IPv4 access list (in
Access List
Configuration mode).
console(config)# ipv6 access-list server
console(config-ipv6-al)# permit tcp 3001::2/64 any any 80
Table 8-7. IP-Based ACE CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 123
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
ACL Binding
When an ACL is bound to an interface, all the rules that have been defined
for the ACL are applied to that interface. Whenever an ACL is assigned on a
port or LAG, flows from that ingress or egress interface that do not match the
ACL, are matched to the default rule, which is to Drop unmatched packets.
To change the default action for unmatched packets to an action other than
Drop, do the following:
• Add an additional ACE to the ACL with "Any" in all fields
• Set its action other than Drop
• Set the priority to the lowest in the ACL.
To bind ACLs to interfaces:
1 Click Switching > Network Security > ACL Binding to display the ACL
Binding: Summary page.
Figure 8-8. ACL Binding: Summary
The ports on the selected unit are displayed along with their associated
ACLs.124 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
2 To bind an ACL to an interface, select an interface and click Edit.
3 Select an ACL(s). You can select one of each type (MAC-based ACL,
IPv4-based ACL or IPv6-based ACL) or one IPv4-based ACL and one
IPv6-based ACL.
Configuring ACL Bindings Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring ACL
Bindings.
.
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
Table 8-8. ACL Bindings CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
service-acl input acl-name1
[acl-name2]
no service-acl input
Controls access to an interface
Use the no form of the command to
remove access control.
show access-lists [acl-name] Displays access control lists (ACLs)
configured on the switch.
console(config)# mac access-list extended server
console(config-mac-al)# permit 00:00:00:00:00:01
00:00:00:00:00:ff any
console(config-mac-al)# exit
console(config)# interface gi1/0/1
console(config-if)# service-acl input serverDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 125
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Proprietary Protocol Filtering
Protocol filters are used to disallow receiving specific proprietary protocol
packets through an interface. These can be enabled for specific ports.
If a protocol filter is enabled on a port, you cannot enable a QoS ACL on this
port.
To configure Proprietary Protocol Filtering:
1 Click Switching > Network Security > Proprietary Protocol Filtering to
display the Proprietary Protocol Filtering: Summary page.
Figure 8-9. Proprietary Protocol Filtering: Summary
A list of the ports and their filtered protocols is displayed.
2 Click Edit to modify the filtered protocols for a specific port.
3 Select a unit and an interface.126 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
4 Move the required protocols from the Available Protocols list to the
Filtered Protocols list. The following displays the protocols and the
addresses that are blocked:
Configuring Proprietary Protocol Filtering Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields in the
Proprietary Protocol Filtering pages.
Only one of the following CLI commands can be active on a port at the same
time. To add other protocol filters, the command must be negated and then
run again with all the required protocol names.
.
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
Table 8-9. Protocol Filtering
Protocol Destination Address Protocol Type
blockcdp 0100.0ccc.cccc 0x2000
blockvtp 0100.0ccc.cccc 0x2003
blockdtp 0100.0ccc.cccc 0x2004
blockudld 0100.0ccc.cccc 0x0111
blockpagp 0100.0ccc.cccc 0x0104
blocksstp 0100.0ccc.cccd -
blockall 0100.0ccc.ccc0 - 0100.0ccc.cccf -
Table 8-10. Proprietary Protocol Filtering CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
service-acl input protocol1
[protocol2 … protocol6]
no service-acl input
Discards packets that are classified to
specific protocols.
Use the no form of those commands
to disable discarding of the packets.
console (Config-if)# service-acl input blockcdp blockvtpDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 127
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Time Range
Time ranges can be defined and associated with an QoS ACL, so that it is
applied only during that time range.
There are two types of time ranges:
• Absolute —This type of time range begins on a specific date or
immediately and ends on a specific date or extends infinitely. It is created
in the Time Range pages. A recurring element can be added to it.
• Recurring — This is a time range element that is added to an absolute
range, and begins and ends on a recurring basis. It is defined in the Time
Range Recurrence pages.
If a time range includes both absolute and recurring ranges, the ACL is
activated only if both absolute start time and the recurring time range have
been reached. The ACL is deactivated when either of the time ranges is
reached.
The switch supports a maximum of 10 absolute time ranges.
All time specifications are interpreted as local time (Daylight Savings Time
does not affect this).
To ensure that the time range entries take effect at the desired times, the
system time must be set. For more information on setting the system time,
see "Time Synchronization" on page 169.
A possible use for this feature is to limit access of computers to the network
only during business hours, after which they are locked, and access to the rest
of the network is blocked.128 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Absolute Time Range
To define an absolute time range:
1 Click Switching > Network Security > Time Range to display the Time
Range: Summary page.
Figure 8-10. Time Range: Summary
The existing Time Ranges are displayed.
2 To add a new time range, click Add.
3 Enter the name of the time range in the Time Range Name field.
4 Define the Absolute Start time.
– To begin the Time Range immediately, click Immediate.
– To determine at what time in the future the Time Range will begin,
enter values in the Date and Time fields.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 129
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
5 Define the Absolute End time.
– To indicate that the Time Range should not end, click Infinite.
– To determine the time at which the Time Range ends, enter values in
the Date and Time fields.
See "Configuring Time Ranges Using CLI Commands" on page 130 for the
CLI commands for creating time ranges.
Time Range Recurrence
To add a recurring time range element to an absolute time range:
1 Click Switching > Network Security > Time Range Recurrence to display
the Recurring Time Range: Summary page.
Figure 8-11. Recurring Time Range: Summary
A daily and weekly recurring element of the time range that is selected is
displayed if they exist.130 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
2 To add a recurring time range element to a time range, click Add.
3 Select the Time Range Name to which you want to add the Time Range
Recurrence. The Absolute Start and Absolute End fields are displayed.
4 Check if the recurrence is Daily or Weekly in Recurrence type.
5 If the recurrence is Daily, enter:
– Start Time — Select the time on which the time range starts.
– End Time— Select the time on which the time range ends.
– Weekday — Select the day of the week on which the time range
occurs.
6 If the recurrence is Weekly, enter:
• Start — Select the Day of the Week and Time on which the time
range starts.
• End —Select the Day of the Week and Time on which the time
range ends.
Configuring Time Ranges Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring time
ranges.
Table 8-11. Time Range CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
time-range time-range-name
no time-range time-range-name
Enables time-range configuration
mode, and defines time ranges for
functions (such as access lists).
Use the no form of this command
to remove the time range
configuration.
absolute start hh:mm day month
year
no absolute start
absolute end hh:mm day month year
no absolute end
Adds start and end times to the
time range.
Use the no form of the commands
to remove the start and end times
from the time range.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 131
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
periodic day-of-the-week hh:mm to
day-of-the-week hh:mm
no periodic day-of-the-week hh:mm
to day-of-the-week hh:mm periodic
list hh:mm to hh:mm day-of-theweek1 [day-of-the-week2… day-ofthe-week7]
no periodic list hh:mm to hh:mm
day-of-the-week1 [day-of-theweek2… day-of-the-week7]
periodic list hh:mm to hh:mm all
no periodic list all hh:mm to
hh:mm all
Adds a recurring time range to the
time range.
Use the no form of the commands
to remove the recurring time
range.
console (config)# time-range http-allowed
console (config-time-range)# absolute start 12:00 1 jan
2005 end 12:00 31 dec 2005
console (config-time-range)# periodic monday 8:00 to
friday 20:00
Table 8-11. Time Range CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description132 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Dot1x Authentication
This section describes Dot1x authentication.
It contains the following topics:
• Port-Based Authentication Overview
• Dot1x Overview
• Port-Based Authentication Global
• Port-Based Authentication Interface Settings
• Monitoring Users
• Host Authentication
• Port Authentication Users
Port-Based Authentication Overview
Port-based authentication enables authenticating system users on a per-port
basis via an external server. Only authenticated and approved system users
can transmit and receive data. Ports are authenticated via the RADIUS server
using the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). Port Authentication
includes:
• Authenticators — Specifies the device port that is authenticated before
permitting system access.
• Supplicants — Specifies the host connected to the authenticated port hat
is requesting to access the system services.
• Authentication Server — Specifies the external server, for example, a
RADIUS server, which performs authentication on behalf of the
authenticator, and indicates whether the supplicant is authorized to access
system services.
Port-based authentication creates two access states:
• Controlled Access — Permits communication between the supplicant and
the system, if the supplicant is authorized.
• Uncontrolled Access — Permits uncontrolled communication, regardless
of the port authorization state.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 133
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The device supports Port Based Authentication via RADIUS servers.
Dot1x Overview
Dot1x is an IEEE standard for port-based network access control. The Dot1x
framework enables a device (the supplicant) to request port access from a
remote device (authenticator) to which it is connected. The supplicant is
permitted to send data to the port only after it is authenticated and
authorized. If it is not authenticated and authorized, the authenticator
discards the supplicant data, unless the data is sent to a Guest VLAN and/or
non-authenticated VLANs.
Authentication of the supplicant is performed by an external RADIUS server
through the authenticator. The authenticator monitors the results of the
authentication.
In the Dot1x standard, a device can be a supplicant and an authenticator at a
port, simultaneously requesting and granting port access. However, this
device can only act as an authenticator, and does not take on the role of a
supplicant.
The following varieties of Dot1x exist:
• Single session Dot1x:
– A1—Single-session/Single Host — In this mode, the switch, as an
authenticator, supports a single Dot1x session, and grants permission
to use the port to an authorized supplicant. All other access requests,
made by other devices received from the same port, are denied until
the authorized supplicant is no longer using the port, or the access
request is to an unauthenticated or guest VLAN.
– Single-session/Multiple Hosts—This follows the Dot1x standard. In
this mode, the switch, as an authenticator, enables any device to use a
port, as long as it has been granted permission as a supplicant at the
port.
• Multi-Session Dot1x—Every device (supplicant) connecting to a port
must be authenticated and authorized by the switch (authenticator),
separately in a different Dot1x session. This is the only mode that supports
Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA).134 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA)
Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA) is also referred to as RADIUS VLAN
Assignment in this guide. When a port is in Multiple Session mode and is
DVA-enabled, the switch automatically adds the port as an untagged member
of the VLAN that is assigned by the RADIUS server during the authentication
process. The switch classifies untagged packets to the assigned VLAN if the
packets originated from the devices or ports that are authenticated and
authorized.
For a device to be authenticated and authorized at a DVA-enabled port:
• The RADIUS server must authenticate the device and dynamically assign
a VLAN to the device.
• The assigned VLAN must not be the default VLAN and must have been
created on the switch.
• The switch must not be configured to use both a DVA and a MAC-based
VLAN group.
• A RADIUS server must support DVA with RADIUS attributes tunnel-type
(64) = VLAN (13), tunnel-media-type (65) = 802 (6), and tunnel-privategroup-id = a VLAN ID.
Dynamic Policy/ACL Assignment
The Dynamic Policy/ACL Assignment feature enables specifying a userdefined ACL or policy in the RADIUS server. After a successful
authentication, the user is assigned that ACL.
Authentication Methods
The possible authentication methods are:
• Dot1x — The switch supports this authentication mechanism, as
described in the standard, to authenticate and authorize Dot1x
supplicants.
• MAC-based — The switch can be configured to use this method to
authenticate and authorize devices that do not support Dot1x. The switch
emulates the supplicant role on behalf of the non-Dot1x-capable devices,
and uses the MAC address of the devices as the username and password,
when communicating with the RADIUS servers. MAC addresses for Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 135
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
username and password must be entered in lower case and with no
delimiting characters (for example: aaccbb55ccff). To use MAC-based
authentication at a port:
– A Guest VLAN must be defined.
– The port must be Guest-VLAN-enabled.
– The packets from the first supplicant, at the port before it is
authorized, must be untagged.
You can configure a port to use Dot1x only, MAC-based only, or Dot1x and
MAC-based authentication. If a port is configured to use both Dot1x and
MAC-based authentication, a Dot1x supplicant has precedence over a
non-Dot1x device. The Dot1x supplicant preempts an authorized, but
non-Dot1x device, at a port that is configured with a single session.
Unauthenticated VLAN and Guest VLANs
Unauthenticated VLANs and Guest VLANs provide access to services that do
not require the subscribing devices or ports to be Dot1x or MAC-Based
authenticated and authorized.
An unauthenticated VLAN is a VLAN that allows access by authorized and
unauthorized devices or ports. You can configure one or more VLAN to be
unauthenticated in the VLAN Membership pages in "VLANs" on page 466.
An unauthenticated VLAN has the following characteristics:
• It must be a static VLAN, and cannot be the Guest VLAN or the default
VLAN.
• The VLAN’s member ports must be manually configured as tagged
members.
• The member ports must be trunk and/or general ports. An access port
cannot be member of an unauthenticated VLAN.
The Guest VLAN, if configured, is a static VLAN with the following
characteristics.
• It must be manually defined from an existing, static VLAN.
• It is automatically available only to unauthorized devices, or to ports of
devices that are connected and Guest VLAN enabled. 136 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• If a port is Guest-VLAN-enabled, the switch automatically adds the port as
an untagged member of the Guest VLAN when the port is not authorized,
and removes the port from the Guest VLAN when the first supplicant of
the port is authorized.
• The Guest VLAN cannot be used as both the Voice VLAN and an
unauthenticated VLAN.
The switch also uses the Guest VLAN for authentication at ports configured
with Multiple Session mode and MAC-based authentication. Therefore, you
must configure a Guest VLAN before you can use the MAC-based
authentication mode.
For authentication to function, it must be activated both globally, in the PortBased Authentication Global page and individually on each port, in the PortBased Authentication Interface Settings pages.
Monitoring Mode
Monitoring mode enables providing users who fail authentication with
limited network access. This enables these users to correct the reason that the
authentication failed.
The following are the main aspects of this feature:
• Enables successful authentications using the returned RADIUS
information
• Provides a mechanism to report unsuccessful authentications without
negative repercussions to the user due to administrator errors
• Accurately reports the data received from the successful and nonsuccessful operations so that appropriate changes to problem areas may be
made.
The Dot1x monitoring activation command includes a special VLAN that is
used when there is no access interface configuration present and the client(s)
unsuccessfully authenticates. These clients are placed in the special VLAN.
For users that unsuccessfully authenticate during re-authentication process,
but already have existing VLANs configured, the failure to authenticate does
not put them in a disabled state but places them back to the existing
configuration.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 137
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Port-Based Authentication Global
To globally configure authentication:
1 Click Switching > Network Security > Dot1 Authentication > Port
Based Authentication Global to display the Port Based Authentication
Global page.
Figure 8-12. Port Based Authentication Global
2 Enter the following fields:
– Port Based Authentication State — Enable/disable port-based
authentication.
– Authentication Method — Select an authentication method. The
possible options are: 138 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• RADIUS, None — Perform port authentication first by using the
RADIUS server. If no response is received from RADIUS (for
example, if the server is down), then no authentication is
performed, and the session is permitted.
• RADIUS — Authenticate the user on the RADIUS server. If no
authentication is performed, the session is not permitted.
• None — Do not authenticate the user. Permit the session.
– Guest VLAN — Enable/disable the use of a Guest VLAN for
unauthorized ports. If a Guest VLAN is enabled, all unauthorized
ports automatically join the VLAN selected in the Guest VLAN ID
field. If a port is later authorized, it is removed from the Guest VLAN.
– VLAN List — Select the Guest VLAN from the VLAN list.
– Monitoring Mode — Enable/disable logging authentication attempts.
– Monitoring VLAN — Enter the ID of the VLAN to which traffic
being monitored is routed after unsuccessful Dot1x authentication.
– Accept Supplicant when Dynamic Policy/ACL Assignment Has No
Resources — If no resources remain in the TCAM, the system can
either reject (disable) or allow (enable) successful authentication.
Enabling Port-Based Authentication Globally Using the CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for enabling the port
based authentication as displayed in the Port Based Authentication Global
page.
Table 8-12. Port-Based Authentication Global CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
aaa authentication dot1x
default method1 [method2]
no aaa authentication dot1x
default
Specifies one or more AAA methods for
use on interfaces running IEEE 802.1X.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
dot1x system-auth-control
no dot1x system-auth-control
Enables 802.1x globally.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 139
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
dot1x system-auth-control
monitor [vlan vlan-id]
no dot1x system-auth-control
monitor
Enables 802.1x globally the 802.1x
Monitoring mode and define the Monitor
VLAN.
Use the no format of the command to
return to default.
dot1x guest-vlan
no dot1x guest-vlan
Contains a list of VLANs. The guest
VLAN is selected from the VLAN List.
Use the no form of this command to
disable access.
show dot1x Displays 802.1X status for the device.
console(config)# aaa authentication dot1x default none
console(config)# interface vlan 5
console# show dot1x
802.1x is disabled
Admin Oper Reauth Reauth Username
Port Mode Mode Control Period
-------- ------------------ ------------- -------- ------- --------
gi1/0/1 Force Authorized Authorized* Disabled 3600 n/a
gi1/0/2 Force Authorized Authorized* Disabled 3600 n/a
gi1/0/3 Force Authorized Authorized* Disabled 3600 n/a
gi1/0/4 Force Authorized Authorized* Disabled 3600 n/a
Table 8-12. Port-Based Authentication Global CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description140 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Port-Based Authentication Interface Settings
To configure 802.1x authentication on an interface:
1 Click Switching > Network Security > Dot1 Authentication > Port
Based Authentication Interface Settings to display the Port Based
Authentication Interface Settings: Summary page.
Figure 8-13. Port Based Authentication Interface Settings
Port parameters for the selected unit are displayed.
2 Click Edit.
3 Select a port for which the authentication parameters apply in the
Interface drop-down list.
4 Enter the parameters:
– User Name — Displays the username of the port.
– Admin Interface Control — Select the port authorization state. The
possible options are:
• Auto — Enables port-based authentication on the interface. The
interface moves between an authorized or unauthorized state,
based on the authentication exchange between the device and the
client.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 141
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Authorized — Places the interface into an authorized state
without being authenticated. The interface resends and receives
normal traffic without client port-based authentication.
• Unauthorized — Denies the selected interface system access by
moving the interface into unauthorized state. The device cannot
provide authentication services to the client through the
interface.
– Current Interface Control — Displays the current port authorization
state.
– Authentication Type — Select the type of authentication on the port.
The possible options are:
• 802.1x Only — 802.1X authentication is the only authentication
method performed on the port.
• MAC Only — Port is authenticated, based on the supplicant
MAC address. Only eight MAC-based authentications can be
used on the port.
• 802.1x & MAC — Both 802.1X and MAC-based authentication
are performed on the switch. The 802.1X authentication takes
precedence.
NOTE: For MAC authentication to succeed, the RADIUS server supplicant
username and password must be the supplicant MAC address. The MAC
address must be in lower case letters and entered without the “:” or “-”
separators; for example: 0020aa00bbcc.
– Dynamic VLAN Assignment — Enable/disable dynamic VLAN
assignment for this port. This feature enables you to automatically
assign users to VLANs during the RADIUS server authentication.
When a user is authenticated by the RADIUS server, the user is
automatically joined to the VLAN configured on a RADIUS server.
• Port Lock and Port Monitor should be disabled when DVA is
enabled.
• Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA) can occur only if a RADIUS
server is configured, and port authentication is enabled and set to
802.1x multi-session mode.
• If the RADIUS Accept Message does not contain the supplicant’s
VLAN, the supplicant is rejected.142 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Authenticated ports are added to the supplicant VLAN as
untagged.
• Authenticated ports remain unauthenticated VLAN and Guest
VLAN members. Static VLAN configuration is not applied to the
port.
• The following list of VLANs cannot participate in DVA: an
Unauthenticated VLAN, a Dynamic VLAN that was created by
GVRP, a Voice VLAN, a Default VLAN and a Guest VLAN.
• Delete the supplicant VLAN while the supplicant is logged in.
The supplicant is authorized during the next re-authentication if
this supplicant VLAN is re-created, or a new VLAN is configured
on the RADIUS server.
NOTE: DVA provides the same functionality as the MAC to VLAN Assignment
feature, but does so in a standard way. Therefore, when DVA is available,
MAC to VLAN Assignment is not available.
– Guest VLAN — Enable/disable port access to the Guest VLAN. If
enabled, unauthorized users, connected to this interface, can access
the Guest VLAN.
– Dynamic Policy / ACL Assignment — Enable/disable this feature.
– Periodic Reauthentication — Select to enable port re-authentication
attempts after the specified Reauthentication Period.
– Reauthentication Period (300-4294967295) — Enter the number of
seconds after which the selected port is reauthenticated.
– Reauthenticate Now — Select to enable immediate port
re-authentication.
– Authentication Server Timeout (1-65535) — Enter the time interval
that lapses before the device resends a request to the authentication
server. The field value is specified in seconds.
– Resending EAP Identity Request (1-65535) — Enter the amount of
time that lapses before EAP request are resent.
– Quiet Period (0-65535) — Enter the number of seconds that the
device remains in the quiet state, following a failed authentication
exchange.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 143
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Supplicant Timeout (1-65535) — Enter the amount of time that
lapses before EAP requests are resent to the supplicant. The field
value is in seconds.
– Max EAP Requests (1-10) — Enter the maximum number of EAP
requests that can be sent. If a response is not received after the defined
period (supplicant timeout), the authentication process is restarted.
Enabling Port-Based Authentication on Interfaces Using the CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for enabling the port
based authentication as displayed in the Port Based Authentication Global
page.
Table 8-13. Port-Based Authentication Interface CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
dot1x port-control {auto |
force-authorized | forceunauthorized}
no dot1x port-control
Enables manual control of the port
authorization state.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
dot1x mac-authentication
{mac-only|mac-and-802.1x}
no dot1x mac-authentication
Enables authentication based on the
station’s MAC address.
Use the no form of this command to
disable access.
dot1x radius-attributes vlan
no dot1x radius-attributes
vlan
Enables user-based VLAN assignment.
Use the no form of this command to
disable user-based VLAN assignment.
dot1x guest-vlan enable
no dot1x guest-vlan enable
Enables unauthorized users on the
interface access to the guest VLAN.
Use the no form of this command to
disable access.
dot1x max-req count
no dot1x max-req
Sets the maximum number of times that
the device sends an EAP to the client,
before restarting the authentication
process.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.144 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
dot1x re-authentication
no dot1x re-authentication
Enables periodic re-authentication of the
client.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
dot1x timeout re-authperiod
seconds
no dot1x timeout supp-timeout
Sets the number of seconds between reauthentication attempts.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
dot1x re-authenticate
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabit
ethernet] port-number]
Manually initiates a re-authentication of
all 802.1X-enabled ports or the specified
802.1X-enabled port.
dot1x timeout quiet-period
seconds
no dot1x timeout quiet-period
Sets the number of seconds that the
device remains in the quiet state following
a failed authentication exchange.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
dot1x timeout server-timeout
seconds
no dot1x timeout servertimeout
Sets the time for the retransmission of
packets to the authentication server.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
dot1x timeout supp-timeout
seconds
no dot1x timeout supp-timeout
Sets the time for the retransmission of an
EAP request frame to the client.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
dot1x timeout tx-period
seconds
no dot1x timeout tx-period
Sets the number of seconds that the
device waits for a response to an EAP -
request/identity frame, from the client,
before resending the request.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
show dot1x
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabit
ethernet] port-number]
Displays 802.1X status for the device or
for the specified interface.
Table 8-13. Port-Based Authentication Interface CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 145
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
show dot1x advanced Displays 802.1X advanced features for the
switch or specified interface.
show dot1x users [username
username]
Displays 802.1X users for the device.
dot1x guest-vlan enable
no dot1x guest-vlan enable
Enables using a guest VLAN for
unauthorized ports.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
console(config)# aaa authentication dot1x default none
console(config)# interface vlan 5
console(config-if)# dot1x auth-not-req
console(config)# vlan database
console(config-vlan)# vlan 2
console(config-vlan)# exit
console(config)# interface vlan 2
console(config-if)# dot1x guest-vlan
console# show dot1x
Interface Admin
Mode
Oper Mode Reauth
Control
Reauth
Period
Username
-------- ------- ---------- -------- ------ --------
gi1/0/1 Auto Authorized Enabled 3600 Bob
gi1/0/2 Auto Authorized Enabled 3600 John
gi1/0/3 Auto Unauthoriz
ed
Enabled 3600 Clark
gi1/0/4 Forceauth
Authorized Disabled 3600 n/a
Table 8-13. Port-Based Authentication Interface CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description146 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Monitoring Users
Use the Monitoring Users page to view rejected users.
1 Click Switching > Network Security > Dot1 Authentication >
Monitoring Users to display the Monitoring Users page.
Figure 8-14. Monitoring Users
2 Select a supplicant that was authenticated on the port. The supplicant’s
information is displayed.
– User Name — Name assigned to this port.
– Port — Number of port.
– VLAN — Port belongs to this VLAN.
– MAC Address — Source of traffic.
– Reject Reason — Reason that traffic was rejected. See Table 8-14 for a
list of the possible reject reasons.
– Time — Time that traffic was rejected.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 147
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Table 8-14. Reject Reason Description
Abbreviation Description
ACL-DEL ACL was deleted by a user.
ACL-NOTEXST ACL sent by the RADIUS server does not exist on the device.
ACL-OVRFL ACL sent by the RADIUS server cannot be applied because of
TCAM overflow.
AUTH-ERR Rejected by RADIUS due to wrong user name or password in
the RADIUS server.
FLTR-ERR RADIUS accept message contains more than two filter IDs.
FRS-MTH-DENY First method is deny.
IPv6WithMAC RADIUS accept message contains filter with IPv6 DIP and
MAC addresses.
IPV6WithNotIP RADIUS accept message contains IPv6 and not IP
simultaneously.
POL-BasicMode Policy is not supported in the QoS basic mode.
POL-DEL Policy was deleted by a user.
POL-OVRFL Policy sent by radius server can not be applied because of
TCAM overflow.
RAD-APIERR RADIUS API returned error (e.g. No RADIUS server is
configured).
RAD_INVLRES RADIUS server returned invalid packet (e.g. EAP attribute is
missing).
RAD-NORESP RADIUS server is not responding.
VLAN-DFLT VLAN sent by a RADIUS server cannot be applied because it
is the default VLAN.
VLAN-DYNAM VLAN sent by RADIUS server cannot be applied because it is
a dynamic VLAN.
VLAN-GUEST VLAN sent by RADIUS server cannot be applied because it is
the Guest VLAN.148 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Monitoring Users Using the CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for monitoring users:
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 8-15. Monitoring Users CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show dot1x monitoring result
[username username]
Displays the captured information of each
interface/host on the switch/stack.
console# show dot1x monitoring Tom
Username: Tom
Port g1
Quiet period: 60 Seconds
Tx period: 30 Seconds
Max req: 2
Supplicant timeout: 30 Seconds
Server timeout: 30 Seconds
Session Time (HH:MM:SS): 08:19:17
MAC Address: 00:08:78:32:98:78
Authentication Method: Remote
Assigned VLAN: 207
Reason for Failure:VLAN was not defined on SwitchDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 149
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Host Authentication
Use the Host Authentication page to define the authentication mode on the
port, and the action to perform if a violation is detected.
To view ports and their authentication information:
1 Click Switching > Network Security > Dot1 Authentication > Host
Authentication to display the Host Authentication: Summary page.
Figure 8-15. Host Authentication: Summary
A list of the ports and their authentication modes is displayed. The fields
are defined on the Edit page with the exception of the following field:
– Single Host Status — Displays the host status. The possible options
are:
• Unauthorized — The port control is Force Unauthorized, the
port link is down or the port control is Auto, but a client has not
been authenticated via the port.150 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Not in Auto Mode — The port control is Forced Authorized, and
clients have full port access.
• Single-host Lock — The port control is Auto and a single client
has been authenticated via the port.
• No Single Host — Multiple Host is enabled.
– Number of Violations — Displays the number of packets that arrive
on the interface in single-host mode, from a host whose MAC address
is not the supplicant MAC address.
2 Click Edit.
3 In the Port drop-down list, select the port to which you want to apply the
authentication mode.
4 Enter the fields:
– Host Authentication — Define the host authentication type. The
options are:
• Single — Only a single authorized host can access the port. (Port
Security cannot be enabled on a port in single-host mode.)
• Multiple Host — Multiple hosts can be attached to a single
802.1x-enabled port. Only the first host must be authorized, and
then the port is wide-open for all who want to access the network.
If the host authentication fails, or an EAPOL-logoff message is
received, all attached clients are denied access to the network.
• Multiple Session — A number of specific authorized hosts may
access the port. Each host is treated as if it was the first and only
user and must be authenticated. Filtering is based on the source
MAC address.
– Action on Single Host Violation — Select the action to be applied to
packets arriving in Single Session/Single Host mode, from a host
whose MAC address is not the supplicant MAC address. The options
are:
• Discard — Discard the packets from any unlearned source.
• Forward — Forward the packets from an unknown source,
however, the MAC address is not learned.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 151
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Shutdown — Discard the packet from any unlearned source and
shut down the port. Ports remain shutdown until they are
activated, or the switch is reset.
Host Authentication pages:
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 8-16. Host Authentication CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
dot1x host-mode {multihost|single-host|multisessions}
Allows a single host (client) or multiple
hosts on an IEEE 802.1x-authorized port.
dot1x traps macauthentication failure
no dot1x traps macauthentication failure
Enables sending traps when a MAC
address is successfully authenticated by
the 802.1X mac-authentication access
control.
Use the no form of this command to
disable the traps.
dot1x traps macauthentication success
no dot1x traps macauthentication success
Enables sending traps when MAC address
was failed in authentication of the 802.1X
MAC authentication access control.
Use the no form of this command to
disable the traps.
dot1x violation-mode
{restrict | protect |
shutdown}
no dot1x violation-mode
Configures the action to be taken, when a
station whose MAC address is not the
supplicant MAC address, attempts to
access the interface.
Use the no form of this command to
return to default.
show dot1x advanced
[gigabitethernet|tengigabite
thernet] port-number]
Displays 802.1x advanced features for the
device or specified interface.
console(config)# interface gi1/0/1
console(config-if)# dot1x host-mode multi-host
console(config-if)# dot1x host-mode single-host
console(config-if)# dot1x host-mode multi-sessions152 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Port Authentication Users
The Port Authentication Users page enables you to view users that attempted
to be authenticated.
To view ports and their authentication definitions:
1 Click Switching > Network Security > Dot1 Authentication > Port
Authentication Users to display the Port Authentication Users page.
Figure 8-16. Port Authentication Users
The ports and their authentication definitions are displayed.
– User Name — Supplicant names that were authenticated on each
port.
– Port — Number of port.
– Session Time — Amount of time (in seconds) that the supplicant was
logged on the port.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 153
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Authentication Method — Method by which the last session was
authenticated. The options are:
• None—No authentication is applied; it is automatically
authorized.
• RADIUS—Supplicant was authenticated by a RADIUS server.
• MAC Address—Displays the supplicant MAC address.
– MAC Address — MAC address of user who attempted to be
authenticated.
– VLAN — VLAN assigned to the user.
– Filter — Filter that was applied to the user by receiving the
policy/ACL name from the RADIUS server (Dynamic ACL
Assignment).
2 Click Details to view the names of the VLAN filters (Filter #1 and Filter
#2) defined on the port, in addition to the above fields.154 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Display Port Authentication Users Using the CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for displaying port
authentication users:
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 8-17. Display Port Authentication Users CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show dot1x users Displays active 802.1x authenticated users for the
device.
console# show dot1x users
Port User Session Auth MAC VLAN Filter
Name Time Method Address
------ ----- ----------- -------- -------------- ---- ------
gi1/0/1 Bob 1d 03:08:58 Remote 0008.3b79.8787 3
Port User Session Auth MAC VLAN Filter
Name Time Method Address
------ ----- ----------- -------- -------------- ---- ------
gi1/01 Bob 1d 09:07:38 Remote 0008.3b79.8787 3 OK
gi1/01 Tim 03:08:58 Remote 0008.3b79.3232 9 OK
gi1/03 Paul 02:12:48 Remote 0008.3b89.8237 8 Warning
console# show dot1x users username Bob
Port User Session Auth MAC VLAN Filter
Name Time Method Address
------ ----- ----------- -------- -------------- ---- ------
gi1/01 Bob 1d 09:07:38 Remote 0008.3b79.8787 3 OKTemplate Last Updated - 2/7/2007Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 155
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
9
Configuring System Information
This section describes how to set system parameters, such as security features,
switch software, system time, logging parameters and more.
It contains the following topics:
• General Switch Information
• Time Synchronization
• Logs
• IP Addressing
• Diagnostics
• Management Security
• DHCP Server
• DHCP Server
• File Management
• Stack Management
• sFlow156 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
General Switch Information
This section describes how to view and set general switch parameters.
It contains the following topics:
• Asset Information
• System Health
• Power over Ethernet
Asset Information
Use the Asset page to view and configure general device information,
including the system name, location, contact, system MAC Address, System
Object ID, date, time, and system up time.
To configure general device parameters:
1 Click System > General > Asset in the tree view to display the Asset page.
Figure 9-1. AssetDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 157
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
2 Enter/view the parameters:
– System Name (0-159 Characters) — Enter the user-defined device
name.
– System Contact (0-159 Characters) — Enter the name of the contact
person.
– System Location (0-159 Characters) — Enter the location where the
system is currently running.
– MAC Address — Displays the device MAC address.
– Sys Object ID — Displays the vendor's authoritative identification of
the network management subsystem contained in the entity.
– Date — Enter the current date (mandatory). This date can also be
entered in the Manual Time Settings page. If SNTP has been defined,
but the SNTP server is not available, the switch uses the date and time
in this field and the Time field.
– Time — Enter the current time (mandatory). This time can also be
entered in the Manual Time Settings page. If SNTP has been defined,
but the SNTP server is not available, the switch uses the date and time
in this field and the Date field.
– System Up Time — Displays the amount of time since the last device
reset.
3 For each unit in the stack (displayed in Unit No.), the following
information is displayed:
– Service Tag — Displays the service reference number used when
servicing the device.
– Asset Tag — Enter the device asset tag.
– Serial No. — Displays the device serial number.
4 Enter the Asset Tag (0-16 Characters) for each unit in the stack. This is
the user-defined reference for the unit.158 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Entering Asset Information Using the CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for entering fields
displayed on the Asset page.
The following is an example of the CLI commands
Table 9-1. Asset CLI Command
CLI Command Description
snmp-server contact text
no snmp-server contact
Configures the system contact
(sysContact) name.
Use the no form of the command to
remove the system contact
information.
snmp-server location text
no snmp-server location
Configures the system location
string.
Use the no form of this command to
remove the location string.
hostname name
no hostname
Specifies the device host name.
Use the no form of the command to
remove the existing host name.
clock set hh:mm:ss
{month|day} year
Sets the system clock to this time.
asset-tag [unit unit] tag
no asset-tag [unit unit]
Assigns the asset tag to the unit.
Removes the asset tag from the unit.
console (config)# asset-tag 2365491870Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 159
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
System Health
To view the device’s power information and set fan administration state:
1 Click System > General > System Health in the tree view to display the
System Health page.
Figure 9-2. System Health
The System Health page displays the following fields:
– Unit No. — The unit in the stack for which information is displayed.
Power Supply Status —Displays the following columns:
– PS — The power status of the internal power unit. The possible
options are:
• Checked — The power supply is operating normally.
• Unchecked — The power supply is not operating normally.
• Not Present — The power supply is currently not present.160 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– RPS — The device has one of two auxiliary power supplies:
Redundant Power Supply (RPS) for non-PoE devices and Modular
Power Supply (MPS) for PoE devices. Only one of these may be
present at one time. For each type of power supply, the possible
options are:
• Checked — The power supply is operating normally.
• Unchecked — The power supply is not operating normally.
• Not Present — The power supply is currently not present.
– Temperature — Displays the temperature on the device.
– Fan Status — The device has two fans. The device constantly
measures the internal temperature, and powers the fans on/off
according to the temperature. The user can set the fans to be
constantly on. The possible options are:
• Checked — The fans are operating normally.
• Unchecked — At least one of the fans is not operating
normally.
– Fan Admin State — On/Auto status that user configured in the Edit
page.
– Fan Current Level — Specifies whether the fan is actually on or off.
2 The lower block displays the condition under which a fan will be turned on
or off.
– Fan Level — The on or off level.
– Condition — The temperature at which the fans will be turned on or
off. The device temperature is displayed in Celsius. The device
temperature threshold is 40 C (104 F).Table 9-2 displays the
temperature in Fahrenheit in increments of 5.
NOTE: It is recommended to leave Fan User Level at Auto so that the fans
operate according to the temperature of the switch.
3 To control the fans on a unit, or set the default value, click Edit, and enter
the fields:
– Unit ID — Select the unit ID whose fan will be adjusted.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 161
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Fan Admin State — Set one of the options:
• Auto — Fans are turned on when the internal temperature of the
switch is higher than the threshold displayed on the Summary
page in the Condition field.
• ON — Turns fan on under all conditions
Table 9-2. Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion Table
Viewing System Health Information Using the CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing fields
displayed on the System Health page.
Celsius Fahrenheit
0 32
5 41
10 50
15 59
20 68
25 77
30 86
35 95
40 104
Table 9-3. System Health CLI Command
CLI Command Description
show system [unit unit] Displays system information.
system fans always-on
[unit unit]
no system fans always-on
Sets the system fans to On regardless of device
temperature.
Use the no form of the command to return to
default
show system fans Displays the fans’ status.162 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Power over Ethernet
A Power over Ethernet (PoE) switch is a type of PSE (Power Sourcing
Equipment) that delivers electrical power to connected Powered Devices
(PDs) over existing copper cables, without interfering with the network
traffic, updating the physical network or modifying the network
infrastructure.
Using PoE eliminates the need to:
• Place all network devices next to power sources.
• Deploy double-cabling systems, significantly decreasing installation costs.
PoE can be used in any network that deploys relatively low-powered devices
connected to the Ethernet LAN. PDs are devices that receive power from the
PowerConnect power supplies, such as:
• IP phones
console# show system
Unit Type
---- ----------------------
2 PowerConnect 5548
Unit Main Power Supply Redundant Power Supply
---- ----------------- ----------------------
2 OK
Unit Fans Status
---- -------------
2 OK
Unit Temperature (Celsius) Temperature Sensor Status
---- ------------------------- ---------------------
2 41 OK
Unit Up time
---- ---------------
2 02,00:03:32Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 163
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Wireless access points
• IP gateways
• Audio and video remote monitoring devices
PDs are connected to the device via the Gigabit ports.
Error Conditions
Traps are generated when the following occur:
• Status change to port delivering/not delivering power to PD.
• Indication that power usage is above the defined threshold.
• Indication that power usage is below the threshold.164 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring PoE
To configure PoE parameters on devices equipped with PoE:
1 Click System > General > Power over Ethernetin the tree view to display
the Power Over Ethernet: Summary page.
Figure 9-3. Power Over Ethernet: Summary
2 The PoE global parameters are displayed:
– Power Status — The inline power source status.
• On — The power supply unit is functioning.
• Off — The power supply unit is not functioning.
• Faulty — The power supply unit is functioning, but an error has
occurred, for example, a power overload or a short circuit.
– Nominal Power — The actual amount of power the device can supply,
in watts.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 165
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Consumed Power — The amount of the power used by the device, in
watts.
3 Enter the following parameters:
– Power Limit Mode — Enter one of the following options for the
system power limit mode.
• Port — The power limit of the port depends on port
configuration.
• Max Port Power — In this mode, each port can get up to the
maximum power, which is 15.4W.
– System Usage Threshold (1-99 Percent) — Enter the percentage of
power consumed before a trap is generated.
– Traps — Enable/disable PoE traps on the device. If enabled, traps are
generated if one of the following situations occurs:
• Status change to port delivering/not delivering power to PD
• Indication that power usage is above the defined threshold
• Indication that power usage is below the threshold
NOTE: If traps are enabled, you must also enable SNMP, and configure at least one SNMP
notification recipient.
4 To view PoE port settings for a unit in the stack, select its Unit ID. The
port PoE parameters are displayed for all ports on the unit. The fields
displayed in this block are described in the Edit page.
5 To set PoE settings for a port, click Edit.
6 Select a port in the Port field, and enter the following PoE parameters for
the PDs connected to this port.
– PoE Admin Status — Select the device PoE mode. The possible
options are:
• Auto — Enables the Device Discovery protocol, and provides
power to the device using the PoE unit. The Device Discovery
Protocol enables the device to discover Powered Devices attached
to the device interfaces, and to learn their classification.
• Never — Disables the Device Discovery protocol, and stops the
power supply to the device using the PoE module.166 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Power Priority Level— Enter the priority that determines the power
that is used if the power supply is from Critical to Low. If, for
example, the power supply is running at 99% usage, and port 1 is
prioritized as Critical, but port 3 is prioritized as Low, port 1 is will
receive power before port 3.
– Power Limit (0-15.4) — Enter the maximum amount of power
that the PoE unit may deliver to this port.
– Powered Device (0-24 characters) — Enter a user-defined
description of the PD connected to the port, such as: "Bob Smith’s
telephone".
The following fields are displayed on this page:
– PoE Operational Status — Whether the port is currently providing
power. If it is not providing power, the reason is displayed.
– Power Consumption — The amount of power being consumed by
the powered device.
– Overload Counter — Total power overload occurrences.
– Short Counter — Total power shortage occurrences.
– Denied Counter — Number of times the powered device was
denied power.
– Absent Counter— Number of times the power supply was stopped to
the PD because it was no longer detected.
– Invalid Signature Counter — Number of times an invalid signature
was received. Signatures are the means by which the powered device
identifies itself to the PSE. Signatures are generated during powered
device detection, classification, or maintenance.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 167
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Managing PoE Using the CLI Commands
The following table describes the CLI commands for viewing fields displayed
on the Power Over Ethernet pages.
Table 9-4. Power Over Ethernet CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
power inline {auto|never} Configures the administrative
status of the inline power on an
interface.
power inline powered-device pdtype
no power inline powered-device
Adds a description of the powered
device type. Use the no version of
the command to remove the
description.
Use the no form of this command
to restore the default
configuration.
power inline priority
{critical|high|low}
no power inline priority
Configures the priority of the
interface from the point of view of
inline power management.
Use the no form of this command
to restore the default
configuration.
power inline usage-threshold
no power inline usage-threshold
Configures the threshold for
triggering alarms.
Use the no form of this command
to restore the default
configuration.
power inline traps enable
no power inline traps enable
Enables PoE device traps.
Use the no form of this command
to disable traps.
power inline limit-mode {maxport-power|port}
no power inline limit-mode
Sets the power limit mode of the
system.
Use the no form of this command
to return to default.168 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
show power inline
[[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe
rnet]port-number]|module stackmember-number]
Displays PoE configuration
information for all interfaces or for
a unit in the stack.
console# show power inline
Unit Power Nominal Power Consumed Power Usage Threshold Traps
---- ------- ------------- ------------------ --------------- -----
1 Off 1 Watts 0 Watts (0%) 95 Disable
2 Off 1 Watts 0 Watts (0%) 95 Disable
3 Off 1 Watts 0 Watts (0%) 95 Disable
4 Off 1 Watts 0 Watts (0%) 95 Disable
Table 9-4. Power Over Ethernet CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 169
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Time Synchronization
The system clock runs from the moment the system starts up, and keeps track
of the date and time.
The date and time may be either set manually, or it may be received from an
SNTP server.
This section describes how to set system time, and contains the following
sections:
• Manual Time Settings
– Setting System Time and Daylight Savings Time
– CLI Commands for Setting Manual Time
• System Time from an SNTP Server
– Global Settings (Clock Source)
– SNTP Global Settings
– SNTP Authentication
– SNTP Servers
– SNTP Interfaces
– CLI Script for Receiving Time from an SNTP Server
Manual Time Settings
This section describes how to set the system time manually on the device.
It contains the following topics:
• Setting System Time and Daylight Savings Time
• CLI Commands for Setting Manual Time170 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Setting System Time and Daylight Savings Time
Use the Manual Time Settings page to set system date/time manually (as
opposed to receiving them from an external SNTP server). For more
information on SNTP, see "System Time from an SNTP Server" on page 177.
If system time is kept using an external SNTP clock, and the external SNTP
clock fails, the system time reverts to the time set here or in the Asset page.
In addition to setting the local clock, you can use this page to enable Daylight
Savings Time (DST) on the device.
The following is a list of DST start and end times in various countries:
• Albania — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Australia — From the end of October until the end of March.
• Australia - Tasmania — From beginning of October until the end of
March.
• Armenia — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Austria — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Bahamas — From April to October, in conjunction with U.S. summer
hours.
• Belarus — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Belgium — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Brazil — From the 3rd Sunday in October until the 3rd Saturday in
March. During the period of Daylight Saving Time, Brazilian clocks go
forward one hour in most of the Brazilian southeast.
• Chile — Easter Island 9th March 12th October. The first Sunday in March
or after 9th March.
• China — China does not operate Daylight Saving Time.
• Canada — From the first Sunday in April until the last Sunday of October.
Daylight Saving Time is usually regulated by provincial and territorial
governments. Exceptions may exist in certain municipalities.
• Cuba — From the last Sunday of March to the last Sunday of October.
• Cyprus — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Denmark — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Egypt — Last Friday in April until the last Thursday in September. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 171
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Estonia — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Finland — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• France — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Germany — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Greece — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Hungary — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• India — India does not operate Daylight Saving Time.
• Iran — From 1st Farvardin until the 1st Mehr.
• Iraq — From 1st April until 1st October.
• Ireland — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Israel — Varies year-to-year.
• Italy — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Japan — Japan does not operate Daylight Saving Time.
• Jordan — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Latvia — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Lebanon — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Lithuania — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Luxembourg — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Macedonia — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Mexico — From the first Sunday in April at 02:00 to the last Sunday in
October at 02:00.
• Moldova — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Montenegro — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Netherlands — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• New Zealand — From the first Sunday in October until the first Sunday
on or after 15th March.
• Norway — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Paraguay — From 6th April until 7th September.
• Poland — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Portugal — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.172 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Romania — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Russia — From the 29th March until the 25th October.
• Serbia — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Slovak Republic — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of
October.
• South Africa — South Africa does not operate Daylight Saving Time.
• Spain — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Sweden — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Switzerland — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• Syria — From 31st March until 30th October.
• Taiwan — Taiwan does not operate Daylight Saving Time.
• Turkey — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.
• United Kingdom — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of
October.
• United States of America — From the second Sunday of March at 02:00
to the first Sunday of November at 02:00.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 173
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To manually set the device time:
1 Click System > Time Synchronization > Manual Time Settingsin the
tree view to display the Manual Time Settings page.
Figure 9-4. Manual Time Settings
2 Enter the following local settings:
– Date — The system date.
– Local Time — The system time.
– Time Zone Offset — The difference between Greenwich Mean Time
(GMT) and local time. For example, the Time Zone Offset for Paris is
GMT +1:00, while the local time in New York is GMT –5:00.
3 To set Daylight Savings Time (DST), select the Daylight Savings field and
select one of the possible options:
– USA — The device switches to DST at 2 a.m. on the second Sunday
of March, and reverts to standard time at 2 a.m. on the first Sunday of
November. 174 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– European — The device switches to DST at 1:00 am on the last
Sunday in March, and reverts to standard time at 1:00 am on the last
Sunday in October. The European option applies to EU members,
and other European countries using the EU standard.
– Other — Specifies that you will set DST manually in the fields
described below.
If you selected USA or European you are finished. If you selected Other,
proceed to the next step.
There are two types of DST possible when Others is selected. You can set a
specific date in a particular year, or you can set a recurring setting,
irrespective of the year. For a specific setting in a particular year, complete
the Daylight Savings area, and for a recurring setting, complete the
Recurring area.
If Other is selected, the From and To fields must be defined either in the
Non-recurring or Recurring section.
4 To enter non-recurring DST parameters, enter the following fields:
– From — The time that DST begins. The possible options are:
• DD/MMM/YY — The date, month, and year at which DST
begins.
• HH/MM — The time (hour and minutes) at which DST begins.
– To — The time that DST ends. The possible options are:
• DD/MMM/YY — The date, month, and year at which DST ends.
• HH/MM — The time (hour and minutes) at which DST ends.
5 To enter recurring DST parameters, select Recurring and enter the
following fields:
– From — The time that DST begins each year, for example, DST
begins locally every second Sunday in April at 5:00 am. The possible
options are:
• Day — The day of the week from which DST begins every year.
• Week — The week within the month from which DST begins
every year.
• Month — The month of the year in which DST begins every year. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 175
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Time — The time at which DST begins every year.
– To — The recurring time that DST ends each year, for example, DST
ends locally every fourth Friday in October at 5:00 am. The possible
options are:
• Day — The day of the week at which DST ends every year.
• Week — The week within the month at which DST ends every
year.
• Month — The month of the year in which DST ends every year.
• Time — The time at which DST ends every year.
CLI Commands for Setting Manual Time
The following steps (in any order) must be completed before setting time
manually:
• Set system time
• Define the time zone in relation to GMT.
• Configure Daylight Savings Time.
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the Manual Time Setting pages when the clock source is Local.
Table 9-5. Manual Time Setting CLI Commands
CLI Description
clock set hh:mm:ss {[day
month]|[month day]} year
Set the system clock to this time.
clock summer-time zone
recurring {usa|eu|{week
day month hh:mm week day
month hh:mm}}[offset]
Configures the system to automatically
switch to summer time (according to the
USA and European standards) every year on a
recurring basis. 176 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
clock summer-time zone
date date month year hh:mm
date month year hh:mm
[offset]
clock summer-time zone
date month date year hh:mm
month date year hh:mm
[offset]
no clock summer-time
Configures the system to automatically
switch to summer time (Daylight Savings
Time) for a specific period - date/month/year
format.
Use the no form of the command to
configure the system not to switch to
summer time (Daylight Savings Time).
clock timezone zone hoursoffset [minutes offset]
Sets the time zone and names it "zone" for
display purposes.
show clock Displays the time and date from the system
clock.
Table 9-5. Manual Time Setting CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 177
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
A sample script to set system time manually is shown below
System Time from an SNTP Server
This section describes how to receive date/time from an SNTP server.
It contains the following topics:
• SNTP Overview
• SNTP Global Settings
• SNTP Authentication
• SNTP Servers
• SNTP Interfaces
Table 9-6. CLI Script to Set Manual System Time
CLI Description
Console# clock set 13:32:00 7 Nov 2010 Set the system time.
console# configure
console(config)# clock timezone Ohio +2
Set the time zone to GMT
plus 2 hours. The name of
the zone "Ohio" is purely for
documentation purposes.
This is not mandatory for
manual time, but is
recommended. It enables
anyone seeing the time to
know what that time is in
respect to their timezone.
console(config)# clock summer-time
Ohio_Summer recurring usa
Set Daylight Savings Time
such that it recurs every year
and is based on the summer
time schedule of the USA.
The name of the zone
"Ohio_Summer" is for
documentation purposes
only.
console(config)# exit
console# show clock
Display the system time.178 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
SNTP Overview
The switch supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP), which
provides accurate network switch clock time synchronization of up to 100
milliseconds. The implementation of SNTP is based on SNTPv4 (RFC 2030).
SNTP is a simple and lighter version of NTP, and can be used when the
ultimate performance of the full NTP implementation, described in
RFC-1305, is not required. SNTP operates with NTP, thus an SNTP client
can work with both SNTP and NTP servers.
The switch operates only as a client, and cannot provide time services to other
systems.
SNTP Server Types
The switch can accept time information from the following server types:
• Unicast
Polling for Unicast information is used for polling a server whose IP
address is known. This is the preferred method for synchronizing device
time, as it is most secure.
Up to eight SNTP servers can be defined.
If this method is selected, SNTP information is accepted only from SNTP
servers defined in the SNTP Servers page.
Time levels T1 - T4 (see the "Algorithm for Selecting Designated SNTP
Server" on page 180 section) are used to determine from which server time
information is accepted.
If Unicast polling is not enabled or if no servers are defined on the device,
the device accepts time information from any SNTP server of the type that
is enabled, which responds.
• Anycast
Polling for Anycast information is used when the SNTP server’s IP address
is not defined or it cannot be reached. If this method is enabled, time
information can be received from any SNTP server on the network. The Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 179
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
device time and date are synchronized when it proactively requests
synchronization information.
Anycast polling to get time information is preferable to Broadcast polling,
because it is more secure.
Time levels T3 and T4 are used to determine from which server time
information is accepted.
• Broadcast
Broadcast information is used if receiving Broadcast packets has been
enabled, and one of the following situations occurs:
– The SNTP server IP address has not been defined.
– Several time-information packets are received and the Broadcast time
is best according to the algorithm defined in "Algorithm for Selecting
Designated SNTP Server" on page 180.
Broadcast is the least secure method of receiving time, because it is both
unsecured and the time information was not specifically requested by the
device. Anycast is also unsecured, but time-information packets are only
accepted if they were requested.
Stratums
Each SNTP server is characterized by stratums, which define the accuracy of
its clock. The stratum is the distance, in terms of NTP hops, from the most
authoritative time server. The lower the stratum (where zero is the lowest),
the more accurate the clock. The switch accepts time from stratum 1 and
above.
The following provides examples of clocks from various stratums:
• Stratum 0 — A real time clock is used as the time source, for example, a
GPS system.
• Stratum 1 — A server that is directly linked to a Stratum 0 time source is
used.
• Stratum 2 — The time source is distanced from the Stratum 1 server over
a network path, for example, a Stratum 2 server receives the time over a
network link, via NTP, from a Stratum 1 server.180 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Algorithm for Selecting Designated SNTP Server
Messages received from SNTP servers are logged, until there are three
responding servers, or the timer expires. In any event, when the third message
is received, the timer expires.
A server is selected to be the “designated server” according to the following
criteria:
• The stratum (the distance in terms of NTP hops from the best
authoritative time servers) is considered, and the server with the best
(lowest) stratum is selected.
• If there is a tie in stratums, packets from servers defined on the device are
preferred to Anycast packets, which in turn are preferred to Broadcast
packets.
• If multiple servers pass the above criteria, then the server that sent the first
(earliest) time packet is chosen.
If a better server is discovered later, it is selected to be the “designated server”
at that time.
Polling
You can configure the system to acquire time information in the following
ways:
• Enable polling — Time information is requested every polling interval.
• Do not enable polling — Time information is received when the system is
brought up and every time that a topological change is made to the
Running Configuration file, for example when an SNTP Unicast server is
added.
This is configured by the user in the SNTP Global Settings page.
On power up, when the switch sends a request and there is no reply, it issues
another request (three retries at most) after 20 seconds of waiting.
If no SNTP server is found, the process is invoked every “poll interval” (set in
the SNTP Global Settings page), and a management trap is triggered.
Authentication
You can require that SNTP servers be authenticated, although this is not
mandatory (see the SNTP Authentication pages). Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 181
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
MD5 (Message Digest 5) Authentication safeguards device synchronization
paths to SNTP servers. MD5 is an algorithm that produces a 128-bit hash
value. MD5 is a variation of MD4, and increases MD4 security.
MD5 both verifies the integrity of the communication and authenticates the
origin of the communication.
Global Settings (Clock Source)
System time can be set manually, or it may be received from an external
SNTP server. You if wish to set the system time manually, you do not to use
the Global Settings page, because the default is manual (local) system time.
To set the clock source:
1 Click System > Time Synchronization > Global Settings in the tree view
to display the Global Settings page.
Figure 9-5. Global Settings182 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
2 Select the Clock Source. The possible options are:
– Local—System time is taken from the device’s internal clock. Set this
as defined in "Manual Time Settings" on page 169.
– SNTP— System time is set via an SNTP server. Set SNTP parameters
as defined in "System Time from an SNTP Server" on page 177.
Defining the Clock Source Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the clock
source.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
SNTP Global Settings
If SNTP was selected as the clock source in the Global Settings page, you
must define the mechanism of setting time from an SNTP server. This is
done in the SNTP pages, described below.
Table 9-7. Clock Source CLI Command
CLI Description
clock source {sntp}
no clock source
Configures an external time source for the
system clock.
Use the no form of this command to disable
the external time source.
show clock [detail] Displays the time and date from the system
clock and its source.
console# configure
console(config)# clock source sntp
console# show clock detail
3:29:03 UTC Sep 7 2010
Time source is sntp
Time zone:
Offset is UTC+0Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 183
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To define the types of server from which the device accepts SNTP
information and the polling interval:
1 Click System > Time Synchronization > SNTP Global Settings in the
tree view to display the SNTP Global Settings page.
Figure 9-6. SNTP Global Settings
2 Enter the fields:
– Poll Interval (60-86400) — Enter the interval (in seconds) at which
the SNTP servers are polled.
– Receive Broadcast Servers Updates — Enable/disable receiving time
information from Broadcast servers.
– Receive Anycast Servers Updates — Enable/disable receiving time
information from Anycast SNTP servers.
– Receive Unicast Servers Updates — Enable/disable receiving time
information from the SNTP servers defined on the switch.
– Poll Unicast Requests — Enable/disable sending SNTP Unicast server
time information requests to the SNTP server.184 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Defining SNTP Global Settings Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the SNTP Global Settings pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
SNTP Authentication
Use the SNTP Authentication page to enable/disable SNTP authentication
between the device and an SNTP server, and to set the means by which the
SNTP server is authenticated.
Table 9-8. SNTP Global Parameters CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
sntp client poll timer
seconds
no sntp client poll timer
Sets the polling time for an SNTP client.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
sntp broadcast client
enable
no sntp broadcast client
enable
Enables SNTP Broadcast clients.
Use the no form of this command to
disable SNTP Broadcast clients.
sntp anycast client enable
no sntp anycast client
enable
Enables SNTP Anycast clients.
Use the no form of this command to
disable SNTP Anycast clients.
sntp unicast client enable
no sntp unicast client
enable
Enables SNTP predefined Unicast clients.
Use the no form of this command to
disable SNTP Unicast clients.
show sntp configuration Displays SNTP configuration
console(config)# sntp anycast client enableDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 185
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To configure SNTP authentication:
1 Click System > Time Synchronization > SNTP Authentication in the
tree view to display the SNTP Authentication: Summary page.
Figure 9-7. SNTP Authentication: Summary
The previously-defined authentication keys are displayed.
2 Enable/disable SNTP Authentication. This enables/disables
authenticating SNTP sessions between the device and an SNTP server.
3 Multiple keys can be defined. To add a new SNTP authentication key, click
Add, and enter the fields.
– Encryption Key ID (1 - 4294967295) — Enter the number used to
identify this SNTP authentication key internally.
– Authentication Key (1 - 8 Characters) — Enter the key used for
authentication. The SNTP server must send this key for the switch to
use its time/date information.186 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Trusted Key — Check to specify that the encryption key is used to
authenticate the (Unicast) SNTP server. If this is not checked, the
key is not used for authentication (and another key(s) is used).
Defining SNTP Authentication Settings Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the SNTP Authentication pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 9-9. SNTP Authentication CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
sntp authenticate
no sntp authenticate
Defines authentication for received SNTP
traffic from servers.
Use the no form of this command to disable
the feature.
sntp trusted-key keynumber
no sntp trusted-key keynumber
Authenticates the identity of a system to
which SNTP will synchronize.
Use the no form of this command to disable
system identity authentication.
sntp authentication-key
key-number md5 value
no sntp authenticationkey key-number
Defines an authentication key for SNTP.
Use the no form of this command to remove
the authentication key for SNTP.
console(config)# sntp authenticate
console(config)# sntp trusted-key 8
console(config)# sntp authentication-key 8 md5 ClkkeyDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 187
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
SNTP Servers
To add an SNTP server or display SNTP server information:
1 Click System > Time Synchronization > SNTP Servers in the tree view to
display the SNTP Servers: Summary page.
Figure 9-8. SNTP Servers: Summary
The following is displayed for the previously-defined servers:
– SNTP Server — IP address of server.
– Polling — Polls the selected SNTP server for system time information,
when enabled.
– Encryption Key ID — Key Identification used to communicate
between the SNTP server and device. 188 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Preference — SNTP server providing SNTP system time information.
The system displays on of the following options:
• Primary — The server from which time was last accepted.
• Secondary — All other servers from which time was received.
– Status — The operating SNTP server status. The possible options are:
• Up — The SNTP server is currently operating normally.
• Down — An SNTP server is currently not available, for example,
the SNTP server is currently not connected or is currently down.
• In progress — The SNTP server is currently sending or receiving
SNTP information.
• Unknown — The progress of the SNTP information currently
being sent is unknown, for example, the device is currently
looking for an interface.
– Last Response — The last time a response was received from the
SNTP server.
– Offset — The estimated offset of the server's clock, relative to the
local clock, in milliseconds. The host determines the value of this
offset, using the algorithm described in RFC 2030.
– Delay — The estimated round-trip delay of the server's clock, relative
to the local clock over the network path between them, in
milliseconds. The host determines the value of this delay, using the
algorithm described in RFC 2030.
2 To add an SNTP Server, click Add, and enter the fields:
– Supported IP Format — Select whether IPv4 or IPv6 format is used
for the IP address of the SNTP server.
– IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies
the type of static address supported. Select one of the possible
options:
• Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used
for communication on the same network only.
• Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable
from different subnets.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 189
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local
address, this specifies the Link Local interface. Select one of the
possible options:
• VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured.
• ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP
tunnel.
– SNTP Server — Enter the SNTP server’s IP address.
– Poll Interval — Enable/disable polling the selected SNTP server for
system time information, when enabled.
– Encryption Key ID — Check to use an encryption key, and select one
of the encryption keys that was defined in the SNTP Authentication
pages.
Defining SNTP Servers Settings Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the SNTP Server pages.
Table 9-10. SNTP Server CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
sntp server {ipv4-
address|ipv6-address|ipv6-
address|hostname} [poll]
[key key-id]
no sntp server {ipv4-
address|ipv6-address|ipv6-
address|hostname}
Configures the device to use SNTP to
request and accept SNTP traffic from a
server.
Use the no form of this command to
remove a server from the list of SNTP
servers.
sntp unicast client poll
no sntp unicast client poll
Enables polling for the SNTP predefined
Unicast clients.
Use the no form of this command to
disable the polling for the SNTP client.
show sntp status Displays the SNTP server statuses.190 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
SNTP Interfaces
If receiving time information from Anycast servers is enabled, you can
determine through which interface the Anycast packets are sent and received.
If no interface is defined, Anycast requests are not sent.
console(config)# sntp server 100.1.1.1 poll key 10
console# show sntp status
Clock is unsynchronized
Unicast servers:
Server Status Last Response Offset Delay
[mSec] [mSec]
--------------- --------- ------------- -------- -------
Anycast server:
Server Interface Status Last Response Offset Delay
[mSec] [mSec]
--------------- -------- -------------- ------ ------
Broadcast:
Interface IP Address Last Response
------------ --------------- -----------------------
gi1/0/1 00:00:00.0 Jan 1 2010Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 191
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To enable receiving Anycast updates on an interface:
1 Click System > Time Synchronization > SNTP Interface Settings to
display the SNTP Interface Settings: Summary page.
Figure 9-9. SNTP Interface Settings: Summary
The following fields are displayed for every interface for which an SNTP
interface has been enabled:
– Interface — The port, LAG or VLAN on which SNTP is enabled.
– Receive Servers Updates — Displays whether the interface is enabled
to receive updates from the SNTP server.
2 To add an interface that can receive SNTP server updates, click Add.
3 Select an interface and enable/disable State to indicate that the interface
can now receive/not receive SNTP server updates.192 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Defining SNTP Interface Settings Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the SNTP Interface Settings pages.
Table 9-11. SNTP Interface Settings CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
sntp client enable
{[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethern
et] port-id|vlan vlan-id|portchannel LAG-number]}
no sntp client enable
{[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethern
et]port-number|vlan vlan-id|portchannel LAG-number]}
Enables the SNTP client on an
interface in Global
Configuration mode.
Use the no form of this
command to disable the SNTP
client.
sntp client enable
no sntp client enable
Enables SNTP client on an
interface in Interface
Configuration mode.
Use the no form of this
command to disable the SNTP
client.
show sntp configuration Shows the configuration of the
Simple Network Time Protocol
(SNTP).Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 193
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
CLI Script for Receiving Time from an SNTP Server
The following is a sample script that configures receiving system time from an
SNTP server.
console# configure
console(config)# sntp client enable gi1/0/1
console# exit
console# configure
console(config)# interface gi1/0/1
console(config-if)# sntp client enable
console# show sntp configuration
SNTP port : 123.
Polling interval: 1024 seconds.
No MD5 authentication keys.
Authentication is not required for synchronization.
No trusted keys.
Unicast Clients: Disabled
Unicast Clients Polling: Disabled
Server Polling Encryption Key
----------------------------- ---------- -----------
Broadcast Clients: disabled
Anycast Clients: disabled
Broadcast Interfaces: gi1/0/1
Table 9-12. Manual Time Setting CLI Commands
CLI Description
console# configure
console(config)#clock source sntp
Set the source of time as
an SNTP server.194 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
console(config)#sntp client poll timer 6 Set polling time to 6
seconds.
console(config)#sntp unicast client
enable
Enable accepting time
from predefined Unicast
clients.
console(config)#sntp unicast client poll Enable polling predefined
Unicast clients.
console(config)#sntp server 10.4.1.3
poll
Define the server that will
be used as an SNTP
server.
console(config)#exit
console# show sntp configuration
Display SNTP settings.
console# show sntp status Display SNTP servers.
Table 9-12. Manual Time Setting CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 195
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Logs
The Logs feature enables the switch to keep several, independent logs. Each
log is a set of entries that record system events.
It contains the following topics:
• System Log Overview
• Global Parameters
• RAM Log
• Log File (in Flash)
• Login History
• Remote Log Server
System Log Overview
System logs record events and report errors or informational messages. Some
aspects of system logging can be configured, as described below. When you
configure system logging, the configuration applies to all units in the stack.
Some events are automatically logged, such as hardware problems. You may
enable/disable logging the following types of events:
• Authentication Events in the Global Parameters page
• Copy File Events in the Global Parameters page
• Management Access Events in the Global Parameters page
• Login History in the Login History page
Event messages have a unique format, as per the System Logs (SYSLOG)
protocol recommended message format for all error reporting, for example,
SYSLOG and local device reporting messages are assigned a severity code,
and include a message mnemonic that identifies the source application
generating the message.
Messages may be filtered, based on their urgency or relevancy.
Events may be logged to the following destinations:
• Console
• Logging buffer (RAM)— Messages are stored in a cyclical file buffer.
When the maximum number of messages is reached, messages are written
starting at the beginning of the buffer (overwriting the old messages). 196 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Logs stored on the Logging buffer are deleted when the device is reset.
• Logging file (flash) — Messages are stored in flash memory. When the
buffer is full, messages are written starting at the beginning of the memory
block (overwriting the old messages).
• SYSLOG Server — Messages are sent to a remote server. This is useful for
central and remote management and to provide more space for storage of
messages. Up-to eight SYSLOG servers can be defined in the Remote
Log Server Settings pages.
You can select where to send logging messages according to their severity.
Each of the severity level can be directed to the console, RAM log, flash log
file or SYSLOG server or to any combination of these destinations.
Global Parameters
Use the Global Parameters page to enable/disable logging for the following
logging severity levels.
– Emergency — If the device is down or not functioning properly, an
emergency log message is saved to the specified logging location.
– Alert — An alert log is saved if there is a serious device malfunction,
for example, all device features are down.
– Critical — A critical log is saved if a critical device malfunction
occurs, for example, two device ports are not functioning, while the
rest of the device ports remain functional.
– Error — A device error has occurred, for example, a single port is
offline.
– Warning — The lowest level of a device warning. The device is
functioning, but an operational problem has occurred.
– Notice — Provides device information to which you might have to
respond.
– Informational — Provides device information to which you do not
have to respond.
– Debug — Provides debugging messages. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 197
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
If you enable logging, some events are automatically logged, and in addition,
you can enable/disable specific types of logging and set their destination.
To configure logging:
1 Click System > Logs > Global Parameters in the tree view to display the
Global Parameters page.
Figure 9-10. Global Parameters
2 Enable/disable logging in the Logging drop-down list. Console logs are
enabled by default, and cannot be disabled.
3 If Logging is enabled, select the types of events to be logged in addition to
the events that are always logged:
– Log Authentication Events — Enable/disable generating logs when
users are authenticated. 198 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Log Copy Files Events — Enable/disable generating logs when files
are copied.
– Log Management Access Events — Enable/disable generating logs
when the device is accessed using a management method, for
example, each time the device is accessed using SSH, a device log is
generated.
4 To select the destination of logging messages, according to their severity
levels, check the minimum severity level that will be associated with the
console log, RAM log, Log file (Flash memory) and remote SYSLOG
servers. When a severity level is selected, all severity levels above the
selection are selected automatically.
Enabling Logs Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the Global Parameters page.
Table 9-13. Global Log Parameters CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
logging on
no logging
Enables error message logging.
Turns off error message logging.
logging console level
no logging console level
Limits messages logged to the
console, based on severity.
Use the no form of this command to
disable logging limiting to the
console.
logging file level
no logging file
Limits SYSLOG messages stored in
flash memory, based on severity.
Use the no form of this command to
cancel using the buffer.
file-system logging
{copy|delete-rename}
Enables the logging of file system
events.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 199
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
management logging {deny}
no management logging {deny}
Enables Management Access List
(ACL) deny events.
Use the no form of this command to
disable logging management access
list events.
aaa logging {login}
no aaa logging {login}
Enables logging authentication login
events.
Use the no form of this command to
disable logging authentication login
events.
console# configure
console(config)# logging on
console(config)# logging console errors
console(config)# logging file alerts
Table 9-13. Global Log Parameters CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description200 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
RAM Log
To manage the RAM log buffer:
1 Click System > Logs > RAM Log in the tree view to display the RAM Log
page.
Figure 9-11. RAM Log
The Max RAM Log Entries (20-400) line, which contains the maximum
number of RAM log entries permitted, is displayed. When the log buffer is
full, the oldest entries are overwritten. The Current Setting contains how
many entries are currently permitted, and you can change this number in
the New Setting (after reset) field.
The following is displayed for the existing logs:
– Log Index — The log number in the RAM Log table.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 201
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Log Time — The time at which the log was entered into the RAM Log
table.
– Severity — The log severity.
– Description — The log entry text.
2 To remove all entries from the RAM log, click Clear Log.
Viewing and Clearing the RAM Log Table Using the CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the size of the
RAM log buffer, viewing, and clearing entries in the RAM log.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 9-14. RAM Log Table CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
logging buffered
size
no logging buffered
Sets the number of SYSLOG messages stored in the
internal buffer (RAM).
Use the no form of this command to cancel using the
buffer.
show logging Displays the RAM logging buffer.
clear logging Clears the RAM logging buffer.
console(config)# logging buffered 300
04-Oct-2010 09:47:04 %SYSLOG-N-LOGGINGBFRSIZE: the number
of syslog messages stored in the internal buffer will be
changed to 300 (after reboot).202 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Log File (in Flash)
To view and/or clear the flash memory log file:
1 Click System > Logs > Log File in the tree view to display the Log File
page.
Figure 9-12. Log File
The following is displayed for the existing logs:
– Log Index — The log number in the Log file.
– Log Time — The time at which the log was entered.
– Severity — The log severity.
– Description — The log entry text.
2 To remove all entries from the log file, click Clear Log.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 203
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Displaying the Log File Table Using the CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the Log File page.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Login History
Use the Login History page to monitor users, including the time a user
logged in, and the protocol used to log on to the device.
Table 9-15. Log File Table CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show logging file Displays the logging state and the SYSLOG
messages stored in the logging file.
console# show logging file
Logging is enabled.
Console Logging: Level info. Console Messages: 0 Dropped.
Buffer Logging: Level info. Buffer Messages: 62 Logged, 62
Displayed, 200 Max.
File Logging: Level debug. File Messages: 11 Logged, 51
Dropped.
SysLog server 1.1.1.1 Logging: info. Messages: 0 Dropped.
01-Jan-2000 01:12:01 :%COPY-W-TRAP: The copy operation was
completed successfully
01-Oct-2010 01:11:49 :%LINK-I-Up: gi/1/0/11
01-Oct-2010 01:11:46 :%LINK-I-Up: gi/1/0/12204 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To enable user history logging and view user login history:
1 Click System > Logs > Login History in the tree view to display the
Login History page.
Figure 9-13. Login History
The login history for the selected user or all users is displayed.
2 Enable/disable Login History to File to record login history.
3 Select a user or All from the User Name drop-down list. The login history
for this user is displayed in the following fields:
• Login Time — The time the selected user logged on to the device.
• User Name — The user that logged on to the device.
• Protocol — The means by which the user logged on to the device.
• Location — The IP address of the station from which the device was
accessed.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 205
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Displaying the Device Login History Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing and setting
fields displayed in the Login History page.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 9-16. Login History CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
aaa login-history file
no aaa login-history file
Enables writing to the login history file.
Use the no form of this command to disable
writing to the login history file.
show users login-history
[username]
Displays the user’s login history.
console (config)# aaa login-history file
console# show users login-history
Login Time Username Protocol Location
----------- -------- -------- ----------
01-Oct-2010
23:58:17
admin HTTP 172.16.1.8
01-Oct-2010
07:59:23
admin Telnet 172.16.0.8206 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Remote Log Server
Log messages can be sent to remote log servers, using the SYSLOG protocol.
To add a remote log server:
1 Click System > Logs > Remote Server Settings in the tree view to display
the Remote Log Server: Summary page.
Figure 9-14. Remote Log Server: Summary
The previously-defined remote servers are displayed.
2 To add a remote log server, click Add, and enter the fields:
– Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is
supported.
– IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies
the type of static address supported. The possible options are:
• Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used
for communication on the same network only.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 207
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable
from different subnets.
– Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local
address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options
are:
• VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured.
• ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP
tunnel.
– New Log Server IP Address — Enter the IP address of the remote
SYSLOG server.
– UDP Port (1-65535) — Enter the UDP port to which the logs are sent
for the selected server.
– Facility — Select a user-defined application from which system logs
are sent to the remote server. Only a single facility can be assigned to a
single server. If a second facility level is assigned, the first facility level
is overridden. All applications defined for a device utilize the same
facility on a server.
– Description (0-64 Characters) — Enter a server description.
– Severity to Include — Check the severity levels to be logged to the
remote server. The event severity levels are listed on this page in
descending order from the highest severity to the lowest. When a
severity level is selected to appear in a log, all higher severity events are
automatically selected to appear in the log. When a security level is
not selected, no lower severity events appear in the log. 208 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Working with Remote Server Logs Using the CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI command for working with remote
log servers.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 9-17. Remote Log Server CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
logging host {ipv4-address|ipv6-
address|hostname} [port port-id]
[severity level] [facility
facility] [description text]
no logging host {ipv4-
address|ipv6-address|hostname}
Logs messages to a remote server
with this IP address.
Use the no form of this command
to delete the SYSLOG server with
the specified address from the list
of SYSLOGs.
show syslog-servers Displays list of SYSLOG servers.
console (configure) # logging host 1.1.1.1
console# show syslog-servers
Device Configuration
---------------------------------------------------------
IP Address Port Facility Severity Description
----------- ----- -------- ----------- -----------
1.1.1.1 514 local7 info
1.1.1.2 514 local7 info
1.1.1.3 514 local7 info
1.1.1.4 514 local7 infoDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 209
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
IP Addressing
This section describes how to configure IP addresses on the switch, and
contains the following topics:
• IP Addressing Overview
• IPv4 Interface Parameters
• DHCP IPv4 Interface
• IPv4 Static Routing
• IPv6 Interfaces
• IPv6 Default Gateway
• ISATAP Tunnel
• IPv6 Neighbors
• IPv6 Routes Table
• Domain Name System
• Default Domain Names
• Host Name Mapping
• ARP
• UDP Relay
IP Addressing Overview
The device functions as an IPv6-compliant host, as well as an IPv4-host (also
known as dual stack). This enables device operation in a pure-IPv6 network,
as well as in a combined IPv4/IPv6 network.
Difference Between IPv4 and IPv6 Addressing
The primary difference between IPv4 to IPv6 is the length of network
addresses. IPv6 addresses are 128 bits, whereas IPv4 addresses are 32 bits.
Thus, IPv6 addresses enable the use of many more unique addresses.
The 128-bit IPv6 address format is divided into eight groups of four
hexadecimal digits. Abbreviation of this format by replacing a group of zeros
with double colons (::) is acceptable. IPv6 address representation can be
further simplified by suppressing the leading zeros.210 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
All IPv6 address formats are acceptable, yet for display purposes, the system
displays the most abbreviated form, which replaces groups of zeros with
double colons and removes the leading zeros.
IPv6 Prefixes
While Unicast IPv6 addresses written with their prefix lengths are permitted,
in practice their prefix lengths are always 64 bits, and therefore are not
required to be expressed. Any prefix that is less than 64 bits is a route or
address range that summarizes a portion of the IPv6 address space.
For every assignment of an IP address to an interface, the system runs the
Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) algorithm to ensure uniqueness.
An intermediary transition mechanism is required for IPv6-only nodes to
communicate with IPv6 nodes over an IPv4 infrastructure. The tunneling
mechanism implemented is the Intra-Site Automatic Tunnel Addressing
Protocol (ISATAP). This protocol treats the IPv4 network as a virtual IPv6
local-link, with each IPv4 address mapped to a Link Local IPv6 address.
IPv4 Interface Parameters
You can assign IP addresses to the interface in the following ways:
• Manual Assignment — Described below
• DHCP Server Assignment — Described in "DHCP IPv4 Interface" on
page 214
Multiple IP addresses can be configured in the IPv4 Interface Parameters
pages. These IP addresses can be assigned to a port, LAG, or VLAN interface.
When an IP address is assigned, it is checked for uniqueness in the following
way:
• A gratuitous ARP request is sent three times every three seconds.
• If after (3+1)*3 = 12 seconds the switch has not received the ARP
response, the IP address is considered to be unique.
• During the procedure the switch has to reply to gratuitous ARP and probe
ARP requests with the validated IP address.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 211
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The IP address is assigned even if the above validation procedure concludes
that the IP address in question is not unique, but a SYSLOG message is
generated.
In addition to the above validation procedure every time a switch receives an
ARP request with a sender IP address that is equal to its IP address defined on
the input interface it sends a SYSLOG message informing of IP duplication,
containing the sender IP and MAC addresses, from the received ARP
message.
To assign an IP address to an interface, and to define subnets to which traffic
can be routed:
1 Click System > IP Addressing > IPv4 Interface Parameters in the tree
view to display the IP Interface Parameters: Summary page.
Figure 9-15. IPv4 Interface Parameters: Summary212 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The previously-assigned IP addresses are displayed.
2 To add an IP address to an interface, click Add, and enter the fields:
– IP Address — Enter the IP address assigned to the interface.
– Network Mask — Select the subnetwork mask to which traffic can be
routed.
– Prefix Length — Enter the number of bits that comprise the IP
address prefix of the subnetwork.
– Interface — Select the interface for which the IP address is defined.
Select an interface type Port, LAG, or VLAN and the specific
interface number.
Defining IPv4 Interfaces Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the IPv4 Interfaces Parameters page.
Table 9-18. IPv4 Interface Parameters CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip address ip-address
{mask|prefix-length}
no ip address [ip-address]
Sets an IP address.
Use the no form of the command to
remove an IP address.
show ip interface
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet
hernet]port-number|vlan vlanid|port-channel LAG-number]
Displays the usability status of
interfaces configured for IP.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 213
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following are sample procedures to configure a static IPv4 address on an
interface using CLI and then to remove it:
Table 9-19. Sample CLI Script to Configure IPv4 Statically on a VLAN
CLI Command Description
console#config Enter Global Configuration
mode.
console(config)# interface vlan 1 Enter Interface mode for
VLAN 1.
console(config-if)# ip address
10.5.225.40 /27
Set the routing interface with
prefix length of 27.
console(config-if)# ip defaultgateway 10.5.225.33
Set the address of the default
gateway
console(config-if)# no ip address Remove the address (if
required).
Table 9-20. Sample CLI Script to Configure IPv4 Statically on a Port
CLI Command Description
console#config Enter Global Configuration
mode.
console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 Enter Interface mode for port
1 on unit 1.
console(config)# no switchport Enable the port to work as an
IP interface (Layer 3 mode).
console(config-if)# ip address
10.5.225.40 /27
Configure an IP address with
prefix length of 27.
console(config-if)# ip defaultgateway 10.5.225.33
Set the address of the default
gateway
console(config-if)# no ip address Remove the address (if
required).214 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
DHCP IPv4 Interface
The switch can operate in the following ways:
• It can function as a DHCP client that obtains its own IP from a DHCP
server, as described in this section
• It can function as a DHCP server that allocates IP addresses to other
devices, as described in "DHCP Server" on page 297
When the interface is configured as a DHCP client, it keeps requesting an IP
address from the DHCP server, until it receives one. It then sends Address
Resolution Protocol (ARP) packets to confirm the uniqueness of the IP
address. If the ARP response shows that the IP address is in use, the switch
sends a DHCPDECLINE message to the DHCP server, and sends another
DHCPDISCOVER packet that restarts the process.
IP address collisions occur when the same IP address is used in the same IP
subnet by more than one device. Address collisions require administrative
actions on the DHCP server and/or the devices that collide.
Up to 32 interfaces (ports, LAGs, and/or VLAN) on the switch can be
configured with a static or dynamic IP address. The IP subnets to which these
IP addresses belong are known as directly connected/attached IP subnets.
The IP address assignment rules for the switch are as follows:
• If the IP address on the switch is changed, the switch issues gratuitous
ARP packets to the corresponding VLAN, to check IP address collisions.
• When a client must renew its lease, prior to its expiration date, a
DHCPREQUEST message is sent.
• A specific interface can have either a static IP address or a dynamic IP
address, but not both.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 215
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To define the switch as a DHCP client:
1 Click System > IP Addressing > DHCP IPv4 Interface in the tree view to
display the DHCP IPv4 Interface: Summary page.
Figure 9-16. DHCP IPv4 Interface: Summary216 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The previously-configured DHCP IPv4 interfaces are displayed.
2 To add an interface that can receive an IP address, click Add and select the
whether the interface is a port, LAG or VLAN in the Interface field.
Defining DHCP IPv4 Interfaces Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields in the
DHCP IPv4 Interface pages.
Table 9-21. DHCP IPv4 Interface CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip address dhcp
no ip address dhcp
Acquires an IP address on an Ethernet interface
from the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP).
Use the no form of this command to release an
acquired IP address.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 217
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring DHCP IPv4 Interfaces Using CLI
The following is a sample CLI script to configure a dynamic IPv4 address on
an interface and then to remove it:
IPv4 Static Routing
IPv4 static routes can be configured for IP addresses that are not on directly
connected networks. These are defined in the IPv4 Static Routing pages.
Table 9-22. Sample CLI Script to Configure IPv4 Dynamically on a VLAN
CLI Command Description
console#config Enter Global Configuration
mode.
console(config)# interface vlan 1 Enter VLAN mode for VLAN
1.
console(config)# no switchport Enable the port to work as an
IP interface (Layer 3 mode).
console(config-if)# ip address dhcp Use the DHCP protocol to
acquire the IP address.
console(config-if)# no ip address
dhcp
Remove the address (if
required).
Table 9-23. Sample CLI Script to Configure IPv4 Dynamically on a Port
CLI Command Description
console#config Enter Global Configuration
mode.
console(config)# interface vlan 1 Enter VLAN mode for VLAN
1.
console(config-if)# ip address dhcp Use the DHCP protocol to
acquire the IP address.
console(config-if)# no switchport Enable the port to work as an
IP interface (Layer 3 mode).
console(config-if)# no ip address
dhcp
Remove the address (if
required).218 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
When routing traffic, the next hop is determined according to the longest
prefix match (LPM algorithm). A destination IPv4 address may match
multiple routes in the IPv4 Static Route table. The switch uses the matched
route with the longest prefix match.
To add an IPv4 static route:
1 Click System > IP Addressing > IPv4 Static Routing in the tree view to
display the IPv4 Static Routing: Summary page.
Figure 9-17. IPv4 Static Routing: Summary
2 Click Add to add a destination, and enter the fields:
– Destination IP Prefix — Enter the destination IPv4 prefix. If all zeros
are entered, this represents a default route.
– Network Mask — Select the destination IPv4 mask.
– Prefix Length — Select the length of the destination IPv4 address
prefix. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 219
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Next Hop — Enter the IP address to which the packet is forwarded on
the route to the destination address. This is typically the address of a
neighboring switch.
– Route Type — Select the route type. The possible options are:
• Reject — Rejects the route and stops routing to the destination
network via all gateways. This ensures that if a frame arrives with
the destination IP of this route, it is dropped.
• Remote — The route is a remote path.
– Metric (1-255) — Enter the administrative distance (cost) to the
destination.
Defining IPv4 Static Routing Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring IPv4
static routing.
The following is an example of the CLI command:
Table 9-24. IPv4 Static Routing CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip routing
no ip routing
Enables IPv4 Routing.
Use the no format of the
command to disable IPv4
Routing.
ip route prefix {mask|prefixlength} ip-address-next-hop
[metric distance] [reject-route]
no ip route prefix {mask|prefixlength} [ip-address-next-hop]
Configures static routes.
Use the no form of this
command to remove static
routes.
show ip route Displays the current routing
table state.
console(config)# ip route prefix 192.168.1.1 /8
10.5.234.255 metric 3 reject-route220 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring Two IP Networks on Two Different VLANS Using CLI
The following shows how to configure two IP networks on two different
VLANS using CLI:
To test this setup described in Figure 9-18:
1 Connect a host whose address is 1.1.1.2 to interface 1/0/1 (default route
1.1.1.1)
2 Connect a host whose address 2.1.1.2 to port 1/0/2 (default route 2.1.1.1)
3 Ping from 1.1.1.2 to 2.1.1.2 to verify the configuration
Table 9-25. Sample CLI Script to Configure Two IP Networks on Two Different VLANSs
CLI Command Description
console#config Enter Global Configuration
mode.
console(config)# vlan database Enter VLAN mode.
console(config-vlan)# vlan 100-150 Create VLANs number 100 to
150.
console(config-vlan)# exit Exit VLAN mode.
console(config)#interface gi1/0/1 Enter Interface mode for port
1 on unit 1.
console(config-if)# switchport access
vlan 100
Make port a member of
VLAN 100.
console(config-if)# ip address
1.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
Set the IP address with mask.
console(config-vlan)# exit Exit Interface mode for port.
console(config)#interface gi1/0/2 Enter Interface mode for port
2 on unit 1.
console(config-if)# switchport access
vlan 150
Make port a member of
VLAN 150.
console(config-if)# ip address
2.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
Set the IP address with mask.
console(config-vlan)# exit Exit Interface mode for port.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 221
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Figure 9-18. IP Routing Setup
IPv6 Interfaces
The system supports IPv6-addressable hosts.
To define IPv6 interfaces:
1 Click System > IP Addressing > IPv6 Interface in the tree view to open
the IPv6 Interface: Summary page.
Figure 9-19. IPv6 Interface: Summary
PC 1.1.1.1
Switch
PC 2.1.1.1
VLAN 100
VLAN 150222 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
2 Select an interface. The IPv6 addresses defined on the interface are
displayed. In addition to the fields described in the Add pages, the
following fields are displayed:
– ICMP Error Rate Limit Interval (0-2147483647) — Enter the
rate-limit interval for ICMPv6 error messages in milliseconds. The
value of this parameter together with the Bucket Size parameter
(below) determines how many ICMP error messages may be sent per
time interval, for example, a rate-limit interval of 100 ms and a bucket
size of 10 messages translates to 100 ICMP error messages per second.
– ICMP Error Rate Limit Bucket Size (1-200) — Enter the bucket size
for ICMPv6 error messages. The value of this parameter together with
the ICMP Error Rate Limit Interval parameter determines how many
ICMP error messages may be sent per time interval, for example, a
rate-limit interval of 100 ms and a bucket size of 10 messages
translates to 100 ICMP error messages per second.
3 To add a new IPv6 interface, click Add IPv6 Interface, and enter the fields:
– Interface — Select an IPv6 interface to be configured.
– Number of DAD Attempts — Enter the number of consecutive
neighbor solicitation messages that are sent on an interface while
Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) is performed on Unicast IPv6
addresses on this interface. New addresses remain in a tentative state
while duplicate address detection is performed. A field value of 0,
disables duplicate address detection processing on the specified
interface. A field value of 1, indicates a single transmission without
follow up transmissions.
– Autoconfiguration — Enable/disable stateless auto configuration of
IPv6 address assignment. When enabled, the router solicitation ND
procedure is initiated. This discovers a router in order to assign an IP
address to the interface, based on prefixes received with RA messages.
When auto configuration is disabled, no automatic assignment of
IPv6 global Unicast addresses is performed, and existing,
automatically-assigned IPv6 global Unicast addresses are removed
from the interface. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 223
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Send ICMP Unreachable — Enable/disable transmission of ICMPv6
address Unreachable messages. When enabled, unreachable messages
are generated for any packet arriving on the interface with unassigned
TCP/UDP port.
4 To add an address to an IPv6 interface, click Add IPv6 Address, and enter
the fields for the selected interface:
– IPv6 Address Type — Check the means by which the IP address was
added to the interface. The possible options are:
• Link Local — The IP address is link local; non-routable and can
be used for communication on the same network only. A Link
Local address has a prefix of 'FE80'.
• Global Unicast — The IP address is a globally unique IPv6
Unicast address; visible and reachable from different subnets.
• Global Anycast — The IP address is a globally unique IPv6
Anycast address; visible and reachable from different subnets.
– IPv6 Address — Enter the IPv6 address assigned to the interface. The
address must be a valid IPv6 address, specified in hexadecimal using
16-bit values between colons. An example of an IPv6 address is
2031:0:130F:0:0:9C0:876A:130D and the compressed version is
represented as 2031:0:130F::9C0:876A:130D. Up to five IPv6
addresses (not including Link Local addresses) can be set per
interface, with the limitation of up to128 addresses per system.
– Prefix Length — For global Unicast or Anycast, enter the length of the
IPv6 prefix. The length is a decimal value that indicates how many of
the high-order contiguous bits of the address comprise the prefix (the
network portion of the address). The Prefix field is applicable only on a
static IPv6 address defined as a Global IPv6 address.
– EUI-64 — For global Unicast or Anycast, check to use the EUI-64
option.224 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Defining IPv6 Interfaces Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the IPv6 Interface pages.
Table 9-26. IPv6 Interfaces CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ipv6 enable [no-autoconfig]
no ipv6 enable
Enables the IPv6 addressing mode on an
interface.
Use the no form of this command to
disable the IPv6 addressing mode on an
interface
ipv6 address autoconfig
no ipv6 address autoconfig
Enables automatic configuration of IPv6
addresses, using stateless auto
configuration on an interface. Addresses
are configured depending on the prefixes
received in Router Advertisement
messages.
Use the no form of this command to
disable address auto configuration on the
interface.
ipv6 icmp error-interval
milliseconds [bucketsize]
no ipv6 icmp error-interval
Configures the rate limit interval and
bucket size parameters for IPv6 Internet
Control Message Protocol (ICMP) error
messages.
Use the no form of this command to
return the interval to its default setting.
ipv6 address ipv6-
address/prefix-length [eui-64]
[anycast]
no ipv6 address [ipv6-
address/prefix-length] [eui-
64]
Configures an IPv6 address for an
interface.
Use the no form of this command to
remove the address from the interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 225
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
ipv6 address ipv6-
address/prefix-length linklocal
no ipv6 address link-local
Configures an IPv6 link-local address for
an interface.
Use the no form of this command to
return to the default link local address on
the interface.
ipv6 unreachables
no ipv6 unreachables
Enables the generation of ICMP for IPv6
(ICMPv6) unreachable messages for
packets arriving on a specified interface.
Use the no form of this command to
prevent the generation of unreachable
messages.
ipv6 nd dad attempts attempt Configures the number of consecutive
neighbor solicitation messages that are
sent on an interface while Duplicate
Address Detection (DAD) is performed
on the unicast IPv6 addresses of the
interface.
show ipv6 interface
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabite
thernet] port-number|vlan
vlan-id|port-channel LAGnumber]
Displays the usability status of interfaces
configured for IPv6.
show ipv6 icmp error-interval Displays the IPv6 ICMP error
interval.
Table 9-26. IPv6 Interfaces CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description226 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is a sample script to configure IPv6 using CLI:
IPv6 Default Gateway
Use the IPv6 Default Gateway pages to configure and view the default IPv6
router addresses. This list contains routers that are candidates to become the
switch default router for non-local traffic. The switch randomly selects a
router from the list. The switch supports one static IPv6 default router.
Dynamic default routers are routers that have sent router advertisements to
the switch IPv6 interface.
When adding or deleting IP addresses, the following events occur:
• When removing an IP interface, all of its default gateway IP addresses are
removed.
• Dynamic IP addresses cannot be removed.
• An alert message is displayed after a user attempts to insert more than one
IP address.
• An alert message is displayed when attempting to insert a non-Link Local
type address.
Table 9-27. Sample CLI Script to Configure IPv6 on a Port
CLI Command Description
console#config Enter Global Configuration
mode.
console(config)# interface vlan 1 Enter VLAN mode for VLAN
1.
console(config-if)# ipv6 enable Enable IPv6 (dynamic).
console(config-if)# ipv6 address
5::1/64
Set the IPv6 address (static)Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 227
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To configure a router:
1 Click System > IP Addressing > IPv6 Default Gateway in the tree view to
display the IPv6 Default Gateway: Summary page.
Figure 9-20. IPv6 Default Gateway: Summary
The previously-defined routers are displayed with the following fields:
– IPv6 Default IPv6 Address — The router’s address.
– Interface — The interface on which the router is accessed.
– Type — The means by which the default gateway was configured. The
possible options are:
• Static — The default gateway is user-defined.
• Dynamic — The default gateway is dynamically configured
through router advertisement.228 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– State — The router’s status. The possible options are:
• Incomplete — Address resolution is in progress and the link-layer
address of the default gateway has not yet been determined.
• Reachable — The default gateway is known to have been
reachable recently (within tens of seconds ago).
• Stale — The default gateway is no longer known to be reachable
but until traffic is sent to the default gateway, no attempt is made
to verify its reachability.
• Delay — The default gateway is no longer known to be reachable,
and traffic has recently been sent to the default gateway. Rather
than probe the default gateway immediately, however, there is a
delay sending probes for a short while in order to give upper-layer
protocols a chance to provide reachability confirmation.
• Probe — The default gateway is no longer known to be reachable,
and Unicast Neighbor Solicitation probes are being sent to verify
reachability.
• Unreachable — No reachability confirmation was received.
2 To add an IPv6 default gateway, click Add, and enter the fields:
– IPv6 Address Type — Displays that the IP address was added to the
interface through a link local address.
– Link Local Interface — Displays the outgoing interface through
which the default gateway can be reached.
– Default Gateway IPv6 Address — Enter the Link Local IPv6 address
of the default gateway.
Defining IPv6 Default Gateway Parameters Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the IPv6 Default Gateway pages
.
Table 9-28. IPv6 Default Gateway CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ipv6 default-gateway ipv6-
address
Defines an IPv6 default gateway.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 229
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following are examples of these CLI command:
ISATAP Tunnel
To deliver IPv6 addresses in an IPv4 network, a tunneling process must be
defined that encapsulates IPv6 packets in IPv4 packets.
The Intra-Site Automatic Tunnel Addressing Protocol (ISATAP) is an IPv6
transition mechanism that is used to transmit IPv6 packets between
dual-stack nodes (nodes that can accept both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses) on top
of an IPv4 network.
When enabling ISATAP on a tunnel interface, an explicit IPv4 address is
configured as the tunnel source, or an automatic mode exists, where the
lowest IPv4 address is assigned to an IP interface. This source IPv4 address is
used for setting the tunnel interface identifier according to ISATAP
addressing conventions. When a tunnel interface is enabled for ISATAP, the
tunnel source must be set for the interface in order for the interface to
become active.
An ISATAP address is represented using the [64-bit prefix]:0:5EFE:w.x.y.z,
where 5EFE is the ISATAP identifier and w.x.y.z is a public or private IPv4
address. Thus, a Link Local address will be represented as FE80::5EFE:w.x.y.z
show ipv6 route Displays the current state of the IPv6 routing
table.
console(config)# ipv6 default-gateway fe80::abcd
console(config-if)# do show ipv6 route
Codes: L - Local, S - Static, I - ICMP, ND - Router
Advertisement
The number in the brackets is the metric.
L 3000::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 20 Lifetime Infinite
L 4003::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 20 Lifetime Infinite
L 5003::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 20 Lifetime Infinite
L 6003::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 20 Lifetime Infinite
Table 9-28. IPv6 Default Gateway CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description230 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
After the last IPv4 address is removed from the interface, the ISATAP IP
interface state becomes inactive and is represented as Down, however the
Admin state remains Enabled.
When defining tunneling, note the following:
• An IPv6 Link Local address is assigned to the ISATAP interface. The initial
IP address is assigned to the interface, and the interface state becomes
Active.
• If an ISATAP interface is active, the ISATAP router IPv4 address is resolved
via DNS by using ISATAP-to-IPv4 mapping. If the ISATAP DNS record is
not resolved, the ISATAP host name-to-address mapping is searched in the
host name cache.
• When an ISATAP router IPv4 address is not resolved via the DNS process,
the status of the ISATAP IP interface remains Active. The system does not
have a default gateway for ISATAP traffic until the DNS procedure is
resolved.
• In order for an ISATAP Tunnel to work properly over an IPv4 network, an
ISATAP router is must be set up.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 231
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To define an IPv6 ISATAP tunnel:
1 Click System > IP Addressing > IPv6 ISATAP Tunnel in the tree view to
display the ISATAP Tunnel page.
Figure 9-21. IPv6 ISATAP Tunnel
2 Enter the fields:
– ISATAP Status —Enable/disable the status of ISATAP on the device.
– IPv4 Address Type — Enter the source of the IPv4 address used by the
tunnel. The options are:
• Auto —Use the dynamic address.
• None —Disable the ISATAP tunnel
• Manual —Use the manual address assigned.
– IPv4 Address — Enter the local (source) IPv4 address of a tunnel
interface. 232 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Tunnel Router's Domain Name — Enter a specific automatic tunnel
router domain name.
– Domain Name Query Interval(10 - 3600) — Enter the interval
between DNS queries (before the IP address of the ISATAP router is
known) for the automatic tunnel router domain name.
– ISATAP Router Solicitation Interval(10 - 3600) — Enter the interval
between router solicitations messages when there is no active router.
– ISATAP Robustness (1 - 20) — Enter the number of DNS
Query/Router Solicitation refresh messages that the device sends per
second.
Select the Use Default option to use the default setting of a field.
Defining ISATAP Tunnel Parameters Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the ISATAP Tunnel pages.
Table 9-29. ISATAP Tunnel CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
interface tunnel number Enters tunnel interface configuration
mode.
tunnel mode ipv6ip {isatap}
no tunnel mode ipv6ip
Configures an IPv6 transition
mechanism global support mode.
Use the no form of this command to
remove an IPv6 transition mechanism.
tunnel isatap router router_name
no tunnel isatap router
Configures a global string that
represents a specific automatic tunnel
router domain name.
Use the no form of this command to
remove the string associated with the
router domain name and restore the
default configuration.
tunnel source {auto|ip-address
ipv4-address}
no tunnel source
Sets the local (source) IPv4 address of
a tunnel interface.
Use the no form of the command to
delete the tunnel local address.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 233
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of a CLI script to create a tunnel:
tunnel isatap query-interval
seconds
no tunnel isatap query-interval
Configures the interval between DNS
Queries (before the IP address of the
ISATAP router is known) for the
automatic tunnel router domain
name.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
tunnel isatap solicitationinterval seconds
no tunnel isatap solicitationinterval
Configures the interval between
ISATAP router solicitations messages
(when there is no active ISATAP
router).
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
tunnel isatap robustness number
no tunnel isatap robustness
Configures the number of DNS
Query/Router Solicitation refresh
messages that the device sends.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
show ipv6 tunnel Displays information on the ISATAP
tunnel.
Table 9-30. ISATAP Tunnel CLI Script
CLI Command Description
console#config Enter Global Configuration
mode.
console(config)# interface vlan 1 Enter Interface mode for
VLAN 1.
console(config-if)# ip address
10.5.225.40 /27
Configure an IP address with
prefix length of 27.
console(config-if)# ip default-gateway
10.5.225.33
console(config-if)#exit
Set the address of the default
gateway and exit Interface
mode.
Table 9-29. ISATAP Tunnel CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description234 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
console (config)# ip domain lookup Enable DNS lookup
console(config)# ip name-server
176.16.1.18
Define DNS server
console(config)# interface tunnel 1 Enter tunnel mode
console(config-tunnel)#tunnel mode
ipv6ip isatap
Enable tunnel.
console(config-tunnel)#tunnel source
auto
The system minimum IPv4
address will be used as the
source address for packets
sent on the tunnel interface.
console(config-tunnel)# do show ipv6
tunnel
Display tunnel configuration
Table 9-30. ISATAP Tunnel CLI Script
CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 235
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
IPv6 Neighbors
The Neighbors feature is similar in functionality to the IPv4 Address
Resolution Protocol (ARP) feature. It enables detecting Link Local addresses
within the same subnet, and includes a database for maintaining reachability
information about active neighbors.
The device supports a total of up to 64 neighbors, obtained statically or
dynamically.
When removing an IPv6 interface, all neighbors entered statically or learned
dynamically, are removed.
To add an IPv6 neighbor:
1 Click System > IP Addressing > IPv6 Neighbors in the tree view to
display the IPv6 Neighbors: Summary page.
Figure 9-22. IPv6 Neighbors: Summary236 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The previously-defined neighbors are displayed along with their states.
The possible states are:
– Incomplete — An address resolution is in progress, and the link-layer
address of the neighbor has not yet been determined.
– Reachable — The neighbor is known to have been reachable recently
(within tens of seconds).
– Stale — The neighbor is no longer known to be reachable, but until
traffic is sent to the neighbor, no attempt is made to verify its
reachability.
– Delay — The neighbor is no longer known to be reachable, and traffic
has recently been sent to the neighbor. Rather than probe the
neighbor immediately, however, there is a delay sending probes for a
short while, in order to give upper-layer protocols a chance to provide
reachability confirmation.
– Probe — The neighbor is no longer known to be reachable, and
Unicast Neighbor Solicitation probes are being sent to verify
reachability.
2 To clear the Neighbors table, select one of the following options:
– None — Does not clear any entries.
– Static Only — Clears the static entries.
– Dynamic Only — Clears the dynamic entries.
– All Dynamic and Static — Clears the static and dynamic address
entries.
3 To add a new IPv6 neighbor, click Add, and enter the fields:
– IPv6 Interface — Displays the interface on which IPv6 Interface is
defined.
– IPv6 Address — Enter the neighbor IPv6 address.
– MAC Address — Enter the MAC address assigned to the interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 237
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
4 To modify or remove an IPv6 neighbor, click Edit, and enter the fields
described on the Add page.
5 If an entry for the specified IPv6 address already exists in the neighbor
discovery cache, as learned through the IPv6 neighbor discovery process,
you can convert the entry to a static entry. To do this, select Static in the
Type field.
Defining IPv6 Neighbors Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the IPv6 Neighbors pages.
Table 9-31. IPv6 Neighbors CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ipv6 neighbor ipv6_addr
{[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethernet]
port-number|vlan vlan-id|port-channel
LAG-number]} mac_addr
no ipv6 neighbor ipv6_addr
{[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethernet]
port-number|vlan vlan-id|port-channel
LAG-number]}
Configures a static entry in
the IPv6 neighbor discovery
cache.
Use the no form of this
command to remove a static
IPv6 entry from the IPv6
neighbor discovery cache.
show ipv6 neighbors
{static|dynamic}[ipv6-address ipv6-
address] [mac-address mac-address]
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethernet]
port-number|vlan vlan-id|port-channel
LAG-number]]
Displays IPv6 neighbor
discovery cache information.
clear ipv6 neighbors Deletes all entries in the IPv6
neighbor discovery cache.238 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console# config
console(config)# ipv6 neighbor 3000::a31b vlan 1
001b.3f9c.84ea
console# show ipv6 neighbors dynamic
Interface IPv6 Address HW Address State Router
--------- ------------ ---------- ----- -----
VLAN 1 3000::a31b 0001b.3f9c.84ea Reachable YesDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 239
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
IPv6 Routes Table
The IPv6 Routes Table describes how to reach IPv6 destinations. The routing
table is used to determine the next-hop address and the interface used for
forwarding.
Each dynamic entry also has an associated invalidation timer value (extracted
from Router Advertisements). This timer is used to delete entries that are no
longer advertised.
To view IPv6 destinations and how they are reached:
• Click System > IP Addressing > IPv6 Routes Table in the tree view to
display the IPv6 Routes Table page.
Figure 9-23. IPv6 Routes Table
The following is displayed for each IP address:
– IPv6 Address — The destination IPv6 address.240 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Prefix Length — The length of the IPv6 prefix. This field is applicable
only when the destination address is defined as a global IPv6 address.
– Interface — The interface that is used to forward the packet. Interface
refers to any Port, LAG or VLAN.
– Next Hop — The address to which the packet is forwarded on the
route to the Destination address (typically the address of a
neighboring router). This can be either a Link Local or Global IPv6
address.
– Metric — The value used for comparing this route to other routes
with the same destination in the IPv6 route table. This is an
administrative distance with the range of 0-255.
– Life-Time — The timeout interval of the route if no activity takes
place. Infinite means the address is never deleted.
– RouteType — Specifies whether the destination is directly-attached
and the means by which the entry was learned. The possible options
are:
• Local — A directly-connected route entry.
• Static — Manually configured route, supported only for default
gateway, learned through the Neighbor Discover (ND) process.
• ICMP — The route was learned through ICMP Redirect
messages, sent by the router.
• ND — Route was learned by the ND protocol from Router
Advertisement messages.
Viewing IPv6 Routes Table Parameters Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the IPv6 Routes Table page.
Table 9-32. IPv6 Routes Table CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show ipv6 route Displays the current state of the ipv6
routing table.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 241
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console> show ipv6 route
Codes: L - Local, S - Static, I - ICMP, ND - Router
Advertisement
The number in the brackets is the metric.
S::/0 via fe80::77 [0] VLAN 1 Lifetime Infinite
ND::/0 via fe80::200:cff:fe4a:dfa8 [0] VLAN 1 Lifetime
1784 sec
L 2001::/64 is directly connected, g2 Lifetime Infinite
L 2002:1:1:1::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 1 Lifetime
2147467 sec
L 3001::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 1 Lifetime
Infinite
L 4004::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 1 Lifetime
Infinite
L 6001::/64 is directly connected, g2 Lifetime Infinite242 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Domain Name System
The Domain Name System (DNS) converts user-defined domain names into
IP addresses. Each time a domain name is assigned, the DNS service
translates the name into a numeric IP address, for example,
www.ipexample.com is translated into 192.87.56.2. DNS servers maintain
domain name databases and their corresponding IP addresses.
To add a DNS server and specify the active DNS server:
1 Click System > IP Addressing > Domain Name System in the tree view
to display the Domain Name System: Summary page.
Figure 9-24. Domain Name System: Summary
The list of previously-defined DNS servers is displayed.
2 To enable mapping of host names into IP addresses through a DNS server,
select DNS Status.
3 To activate one of the currently-defined DNS servers, enable Active Server.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 243
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
4 To add a DNS server, click Add, and enter the fields:
– Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is
supported.
– IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies
the type of static address supported. The possible options are:
• Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used
for communication on the same network only.
• Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable
from different subnets.
– Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local
address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options
are:
• VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured.
• ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP
tunnel.
– DNS Server — Enter the IP address of the DNS server being added.
– DNS Server Currently Active — Displays the DNS server that is
currently active.
– Set DNS Server Active — Check to activate the selected DNS server.
Configuring DNS Servers Using the CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields
in the Domain Name System pages.
Table 9-33. DNS CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip domain lookup Enables DNS system for translating host
names to IP addresses.
ip name-server {server1-
ipv4-address|server1-ipv6-
address} [server-address2
…server-address8]
no ip name-server [serveraddress … server-address8]
Sets the available name servers. Up to eight
name servers can be set.
The no form of the command removes a
name server.244 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
clear host Deletes entries from the host name-toaddress cache.
clear host dhcp {name|*} Deletes entries from the host name-toaddress mapping received from DHCP.
show hosts Displays the default domain name, the list
of name server hosts, the static and the
cached list of host names and addresses
console (config)# ip domain lookup
console(config)# ip name-server 176.16.1.18
Table 9-33. DNS CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 245
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Default Domain Names
A default domain name is used when an IP address cannot be mapped to a
known domain name. This domain name is applied to all unqualified host
names.
To define the default domain name:
1 Click System > IP Addressing > Default Domain Name to display the
Default Domain Name page.
Figure 9-25. Default Domain Name
If there is a currently-defined default domain name, it is displayed.
2 Enter the Default Domain Name (1 - 160 Characters).
Its Type is displayed, and has one of the following options:
– Dynamic — The IP address was created dynamically.
– Static — The IP address is a static IP address.246 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Defining Default Domain Names Using the CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the
default domain name:
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 9-34. Default Domain Name CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip domain-name name
no ip domain-name
Defines a default domain name that the software uses
to complete unqualified host names.
The no form of the command disables the use of the
Domain Name System (DNS).
console(config)# ip domain-name dell.com Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 247
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Host Name Mapping
Host names can be dynamically mapped to IP addresses through the Domain
Name System pages, or statically through the Host Name Mapping page.
To assign IP addresses to static host names.
1 Click System > IP Addressing > Host Name Mapping in the tree view to
display the Host Name Mapping: Summary page.
Figure 9-26. Host Name Mapping: Summary
The currently-defined host names are displayed.
2 Click Add to add a new host name. Up to four IP addresses can be added.
3 For each IP address, enter the fields:
– Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is
supported. 248 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies
the type of static address supported. The possible options are:
• Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used
for communication on the same network only.
• Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable
from different subnets.
– Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local
address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options
are:
• VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured.
• ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP
tunnel.
• Host Name (1-160 Characters) — Enter the host name to be
associated with the IP address entered below.
• IP Address — Enter the IP address of the domain. Four addresses can
be entered.
4 Click Remove to delete a host name. All addresses for this host name are
deleted at the same time.
Mapping IP Addresses to Domain Host Names Using the CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for mapping domain
host names to IP addresses.
Table 9-35. Domain Host Name CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip host name address
[address2 address3
address4]
Defines the static host name-to-address mapping in
the host cache
no ip host name Removes the name-to-address mapping.
clear host {name|*} Deletes entries from the host name-to-address cache.
show hosts [name] Displays the default domain name, list of name server
hosts, the static and the cached list of host names and
addresses.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 249
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
ARP
The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) converts IP addresses into physical
MAC addresses. ARP enables a host to communicate with other hosts when
their IP addresses are known.
To add an IP/MAC address mapping:
1 Click System > IP Addressing > ARP in the tree view to display the ARP:
Summary page.
Figure 9-27. ARP: Summary
console(config)# ip host accounting.abc.com 176.10.23.1250 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The entries in the table are displayed.
2 Enter the parameters:
• ARP Entry Age Out (1 - 40000000) — Enter the amount of time in
seconds that can pass between ARP requests for this address. After
this period, the entry is deleted from the table.
• Clear ARP Table Entries — Select the type of ARP entries that are
cleared on all devices. The possible options are:
• None — ARP entries are not cleared.
• All — All ARP entries are cleared.
• Dynamic — Only learned ARP entries are cleared.
• Static — Only static ARP entries are cleared.
3 To add a mapping, click Add, and enter the fields:
– Interface — Select an interface to be associated with the addresses.
– IP Address — Enter the station IP address, which is associated with
the MAC address filled in below.
– MAC Address — Enter the station MAC address, which is associated
in the ARP table with the IP address.
4 To change the status of a mapping from static to dynamic or vice versa,
click Edit and enter the field:
– Status — Select the entry’s status. The possible options are:
• Static — The entry was statically entered.
• Dynamic — The entry was dynamically learned. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 251
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring ARP Using the CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the ARP pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 9-36. ARP CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
arp ip_addr mac_addr
{[gigabitethernet|tengigabit
ethernet] port-number|vlan
vlan-id|port-channel LAGnumber}
Adds a permanent entry in the ARP
cache.
no arp ip-address Removes an ARP entry from the ARP
Table.
arp timeout seconds Configures how long an entry remains in
the ARP cache. This command can be
used in Global Configuration mode for all
interfaces, or in Interface Configuration
mode for a specific interface.
clear arp-cache Deletes all dynamic entries from the ARP
cache
show arp Displays entries in the ARP Table.
show arp configuration Displays the global and interface
configuration of the ARP protocol
console(config)# arp 198.133.219.232 00-00-0c-40-0f-bc
console(config)# arp timeout 12000
console(config)# exit
console# show arp
ARP timeout: 12000 Seconds
Interface IP Address HW Address Status
--------- ---------- ---------- ------
gi1/0/11 10.7.1.102 00:10:B5:04:DB:4B dynamic
gi1/0/12 10.7.1.135 00:50:22:00:2A:A4 static252 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
UDP Relay
Switches do not typically route IP Broadcast packets between IP subnets.
However, if configured, the switch can relay specific UDP Broadcast packets
received from its IPv4 interfaces to specific destination IP addresses.
To configure the relaying of UDP packets received from a specific IPv4
interface with a destination UDP port:
1 Click System > IP Addressing > UDP Relay in the tree view to display
the UDP Relay: Summary page.
Figure 9-28. UDP Relay: SummaryDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 253
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The UDP relays are displayed.
2 To add a UDP relay, click Add, and enter the fields:
– Source IP Address — Select the source IP address to where the switch
is to relay UDP Broadcast packets, based on a configured UDP
destination port. The interface must be one of the IPv4 interfaces
configured on the switch. Select All for all addresses.
– UDP Port (1 - 65535) — Check Default Services to select all of the
following default ports:
• IEN-116 Name Service (port 42)
• DNS (port 53)
• NetBIOS Name Server (port 137)
• NetBIOS Datagram Server (port 138)
• TACACS Server (port 49)
• Time Service (port 37)
If Default Services are not selected, check the text box and enter a
UDP port.
– Destination IP Address — Enter the IP address that receives the UDP
packet relays. If this field is 0.0.0.0, UDP packets are discarded. If this
field is 255.255.255.255, UDP packets are flooded to all IP interfaces.
Configuring UDP Relay Using the CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the UDP Relay pages.
Table 9-37. UDP Relay CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip helper-address {ipinterface|all} address [udpport-list]
no ip helper-address {ipinterface|all} address
Enables the forwarding of User
Datagram Protocol (UDP) broadcast
packets received on an interface to a
specific (helper) address.
Use the no form of this command to
disable the forwarding of broadcast
packets to a specific (helper) address.254 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console (config)# ip helper-address all 172.16.9.9 49 53
console (config)# do show ip helper-address
Interface Helper Address UDP Ports
----------- --------------- --------------------------
All 172.16.9.9 49,53Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 255
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Diagnostics
This section describes how to perform cable tests on copper and fiber optic
cables.
It contains the following sections:
• Integrated Cable Test
• Optical Transceiver Diagnostics256 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Integrated Cable Test
Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR) technology is used to test the quality
and characteristics of a copper cable attached to a port. Cables up to 120
meters long can be tested. Cables can only be tested when the ports are in the
down state, with the exception of Approximated Cable Length test.
This test can only be performed when the port is up and operating at 1 Gbps.
To perform a cable test and view the results:
1 Click System > Diagnostics > Integrated Cable Test: Summary in the
tree view to display the Integrated Cable Test: Summary page.
Figure 9-29. Integrated Cable Test: Summary
2 Select a unit in the stack in the Unit ID field. Results from previously-run
tests on that unit are displayed.
3 Ensure that both ends of the copper cable are connected to a device. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 257
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
4 Ensure that the cable is connected to tested port. Go to the Test tab.
5 Click Test Now. The copper cable and Approximate Cable Length tests are
performed, and the following test results are displayed:
– Test Result — Displays the cable test results. The possible options are:
• No Cable — There is no cable connected to the port.
• Open Cable — The cable is connected on only one side.
• Short Cable — A short has occurred in the cable.
• OK — The cable passed the test.
– Cable Fault Distance — Displays the distance from the port where
the cable error occurred.
– Last Update — Displays the last time the port was tested.
– Approximate Cable Length — Displays the approximate cable length.
Performing Integrated Cable Tests Using CLI Commands
The following table contains the CLI commands for performing integrated
cable tests.
Table 9-38. Integrated Cable Test CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
test cable-diagnostics tdr
interface[gigabitethernet|tengigab
itethernet] port-number
Performs VCT tests.
show cable-diagnostics tdr
interface[gigabitethernet|tengigab
itethernet] port-number
Shows results of last VCT tests on
ports.
show cable-diagnostics cablelength interface
[gigabitethernet|tengigabitetherne
t] port-number
Displays the estimated copper
cable length attached to a port.258 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Optical Transceiver Diagnostics
The Optical Transceiver Diagnostics page displays the operating conditions
reported by the SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) transceiver. Some
information might not be available for SFPs that do not support the digital
diagnostic monitoring standard SFF-8472.
The following is the list of the compatible SFPs:
• SFP:
– X3366 — 1000Base-SX, Finisar FTLF8519P2BNL
– U3650 — 1000Base-LX, Finisar FTRJ1319P1BTL
• SFP+:
– N743D — SR, Finisar FTLX8571D3BCL
– T307D — LR, Finisar FTLX1471D3BCL
– C043H — LRM, Avago AFBR-707SDZ-D1
– N198M — LRM, Finisar FTLX1371D3BCL
console> enable
console# test cable-diagnostics tdr gi1/0/3
Cable is open at 100 meters.
console# show cable-diagnostics cable-length interface
gi2/0/5
Port Length [meters]
------- ----------------
gi2/0/5 < 50Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 259
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To view the results of optical fiber tests:
• Click System > Diagnostics > Optical Transceiver Diagnostics in the
tree view to display the Optical Transceiver Diagnostics page.
Figure 9-30. Optical Transceiver Diagnostics
The following fields are displayed for the selected unit:
– Port — The port number on which the cable was tested.
– Temperature — The temperature (C) at which the cable is operating.
– Voltage — The voltage at which the cable is operating.
– Current — The current at which the cable is operating.
– Output Power — The rate at which output power is transmitted.
– Input Power — The rate at which input power is transmitted.
– Transmitter Fault — A fault occurred during transmission.
– Loss of Signal — A signal loss occurred in the cable.
– Data Ready — The transceiver has achieved power up, and data is
ready.260 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Performing Fiber Optic Cable Tests Using CLI Commands
The following table contains the CLI command for performing fiber optic
cable tests.
The following is an example of the CLI command:
Table 9-39. Fiber Optic Cable Test CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show fiber-ports opticaltransceiver [interface
[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe
rnet] port-number] [detailed]
Displays the optical transceiver
diagnostics.
console# show fiber-ports optical-transceiver detailed
Port Temp
[C]
Voltage Current
[aM]
Output
[mWat]
Input
[mWa]
POWER
[mWa]
LOS
------- ---- ------- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---
gi1/0/1 48 5.15 50 1.789 1.789 No No
gi1/0/2 43 5.15 10 1.789 1.789 No NoDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 261
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Management Security
This section describes the pages used to manage device security.
It contains the following topics:
• Access Profiles
• Profile Rules
• Authentication Profiles
• Select Authentication
• Active Users
• Local User Database
• Line Passwords
• Enable Password
• TACACS+
• Password Management
• RADIUS
Access Profiles
Access to management functions may be limited to users identified by:
• Ingress interface (Port, LAG, or VLAN)
• Source IP address
• Source IP subnet
Management access may be separately defined for the following types of
management access methods:
• Telnet (CLI over Telnet sessions)
• Secure Telnet
• Web (HTTP)
• Secure Web (HTTPS, Using SSL)
• SNMP 262 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
This means, for example, that the set of managers allowed via Telnet may be
different than the set of Web-based managers which is, in turn, may be
different than the set of secure-web based managers, and so on.
A specific management access method may be completely disabled by
denying all user access to it (e.g. denying all users access to CLI/Telnet
management effectively disables CLI/Telnet as an available management
interface to the system).
By default, management access to the system, through all methods, is
enabled over all interfaces.
NOTE: If you enable management access through a physical port, all VLANs and
IP interfaces on that port will be acceptable management traffic sources. If you
enable management access through a VLAN, all ports and IP interfaces on that
VLAN will be acceptable. If specific IP address(es) are specified, only traffic from
the specified IP addresses on the appropriate ports will be accepted.
Access Profiles Rules
Each management access profile is composed of at least one rule, which acts
as a filter, and defines the device management method, interface type, source
IP address, network mask, and the device management access action.
Users can be blocked or permitted management access.
Rule priority sets the order in which the rules are implemented. Assigning an
access profile to an interface denies access via other interfaces. If an access
profile is not assigned to any interface, the device can be accessed by all
interfaces.
A total of 256 rules can be defined for all Management Access profiles.
To add rules to existing access profiles, see "Profile Rules" on page 266.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 263
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Creating an Access Profile
To define an access profile with a single rule:
1 Click System > Management Security > Access Profiles in the tree view
to display the Access Profiles: Summary page.
Figure 9-31. Access Profiles: Summary
The currently-defined access profiles are displayed.
2 To activate an access profile, select it in the Active Access Profile field.
If you select Console Only, active management of the device can only be
performed using the console connection. This profile cannot be removed.
3 To add a new profile, click Add, and enter the fields:
– Access Profile Name (1-32 Characters) — Enter a name for the access
profile. 264 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Rule Priority (1-65535) — Enter the rule priority. Rules are applied to
packets according to their priority. These can be viewed in the Profile
Rules: Summary page.
– Management Method — Select the management method to which
the access profile is applied. Users using this management method are
authenticated using this access profile. The possible options are:
• All — The access profile is applied to all management methods.
• Telnet — The access profile is applied to Telnet users.
• Secure Telnet (SSH) — The access profile is applied to SSH
users.
• HTTP — The access profile is applied to HTTP users.
• Secure HTTP (HTTPS) — The access profile is applied to
HTTPS users.
• SNMP — The access profile is applied to SNMP users.
– Interface — Check the fields and select the interface type to which
the rule applies.
– Enable Source IP Address — Check this parameter to restrict access,
based on the source IP address. When this field is not selected, the
source IP address cannot be entered into a configured rule.
– Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is
supported for the source IP addresses.
– Source IP Address — Enter the interface source IP address for which
the rule applies. This is an optional field and indicates that the rule is
valid for a subnetwork.
– Network Mask — Enter the IP subnetwork mask if Supported IP
Format is IPv4.
– Prefix Length — Enter the number of bits that comprise the source IP
address prefix, or the network mask of the source IP address.
– Action — Select whether to permit or deny management access to the
defined interface. The possible options are:
• Permit — Permits access to the device.
• Deny — Denies access to the device. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 265
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Defining Access Profiles Using CLI Commands
The following table contains the CLI command for defining an access profile,
without its rules. The CLI commands for defining the rules are described in
"Defining Access Profile Rules Using CLI Commands" on page 267.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 9-40. Access Profile CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
management access-list
name
no management access-list
name
Defines an access-list for management.
Use the no form of this command to delete an
access list.
console(config)# management access-list mlist
console(config-macl)#266 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Profile Rules
If an access profile already exists, meaning that a single rule has been defined
on it, use the Profile Rules pages to add additional rules to it.
To add a rule to a management access profiles:
1 Click System > Management Security > Profile Rules in the tree view to
display the Profile Rules: Summary page.
Figure 9-32. Profile Rules: Summary
2 Select an access profile name. Its rules are displayed in the order that they
will be implemented.
3 To add a rule to the selected management access profile, click Add.
4 Select a management access profile.
5 Complete the fields that are defined in Access Profiles pages.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 267
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Defining Access Profile Rules Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for adding rules to access
profiles.
Table 9-41. Access Profiles CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
permit[[gigabitethernet|tengigab
itethernet port-number]|vlan
vlan-id|port-channel LAG-number]
[service service]
Sets port permit conditions for the
management access list.
permit ip-source {ipv4-
address|ipv6-address|prefixlength} [mask mask|prefixlength]
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe
rnet][port-number|vlan vlanid|port-channel LAG-number]
[service service]
Sets port permitting conditions for
the management access list, and the
selected management method.
deny
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe
rnet] port-number|vlan vlanid|port-channel LAG-number]
[service service]
Sets port denying conditions for the
management access list, and the
selected management method.
deny ip-source {ipv4-
address|ipv6-address|prefixlength} [mask mask|prefixlength]
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe
rnet] port-number|vlan vlanid|port-channel LAG-number]
[service service]
Sets port denying conditions for the
management access list, and the
selected management method.
management access-class
{console-only|name}
no management access-class
Defines which access-list is used as
the active management connections.
Use the no form of this command to
disable management connection
restrictions.268 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
show management access-list
[name]
Displays the active management
access-lists.
show management access-class Displays information about
management access-class.
console(config)# management access-list mlist
console(config-macl)# permit gi1/0/1
console(config-macl)# permit gi1/0/2
console(config-macl)# deny gi1/0/3
console(config-macl)# deny gi1/0/4
console(config-macl)# exit
console(config)# management access-class mlist
console(config)# exit
console# show management access-list
mlist
-----
permit gi1/0/1
permit gi1/0/2
deny gi1/0/3
deny gi1/0/4
! (Note: all other access implicitly denied)
console# show management access-class
Management access-class is enabled, using access list
mlist
Table 9-41. Access Profiles CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 269
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Authentication Profiles
In addition to access profiles, you can configure authentication for
management access methods, such as SSH, console, Telnet, HTTP, and
HTTPS.
User authentication can occur:
• Locally
• Via an external server, such as a TACACS+ or a RADIUS server
User authentication occurs in the order that the methods are selected, for
example, if both the Local and RADIUS options are selected, the user is
authenticated first locally. If the local user database is empty, the user is
authenticated via the RADIUS server.
If an error occurs during the authentication, the next selected method is
used.
If an authentication method fails, or the user has an insufficient privilege
level, the user is denied access to the switch. The switch then stops, does not
continue, and does not attempt to use the next authentication method.
If a privilege level is redefined, the user must also be re-defined.
User authentication can also be set to None, in which case no authentication
is performed.
The process of configuring authentication for management access methods is
divided into the following stages:
• Create an authentication profile, as described below
• Assign an authentication profile to a management method, as described in
"Select Authentication" on page 272270 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To create an authentication profile:
1 Click System > Management Security > Authentication Profiles in the
tree view to display the Authentication Profiles: Summary page.
Figure 9-33. Authentication Profiles: Summary
All currently-defined authentication profiles are displayed.
2 Click Add to add a new authentication profile, and enter the fields:
– Profile Name (1-12 Characters) — Enter the name of the new
authentication profile. Profile names cannot include blank spaces.
– Authentication Method: Optional Methods — Select a user
authentication methods that can be assigned to this authentication
profile. The possible options are:
• Line — The line password is used for user authentication
(defined in "Line Passwords" on page 279).Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 271
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Enable — The enable (encrypted) password is used for
authentication (defined in "Enable Password" on page 281).
• Local — The user authentication is performed by the device,
which checks the user name and password for authentication.
• RADIUS — The user authentication is performed by the
RADIUS server. For more information, see "RADIUS" on
page 291.
• TACACS+ — The user authentication is performed by the
TACACS+ server. For more information, see "TACACS+" on
page 282.
• None — No user authentication occurs.
Select a method by highlighting it in the Optional Methods list, and
clicking on the right arrow to move it to the Selected Methods list.
Configuring an Authentication Profile Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the Authentication Profiles pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 9-42. Authentication Profile CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
aaa authentication login
{default|list-name} method1
[method2]
no aaa authentication login
{default|list-name}
Configures login authentication.
Use the no form of the command to
remove a login authentication profile.
console(config)# aaa authentication login default radius
local enable none272 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Select Authentication
After Authentication Profiles are defined, the Authentication Profiles can be
assigned to Management Access methods, for example, console users can be
authenticated by Authentication Profile 1, while Telnet users can be
authenticated by Authentication Profile 2.
To assign an authentication profile to a management access method:
1 Click System > Management Security > Select Authentication in the
tree view to display the Select Authentication page.
Figure 9-34. Select Authentication
2 For the Console, Telnet and Secure Telnet (SSH) types of users, select
either the default authentication profile or one of the previously-defined
authentication profiles.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 273
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
3 For Secure HTTP and HTTP types of users, select one or all of the
Optional Methods and click the right-arrow to move them to the Selected
Methods. The options are:
– Local — Authentication occurs locally.
– None — No authentication method is used for access.
– RADIUS — Authentication occurs at the RADIUS server.
– TACACS+ — Authentication occurs at the TACACS+ server.
Assigning Access Authentication Profiles Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the Select Authentication page.
Table 9-43. Select Authentication CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
aaa authentication enable {default|listname} method [method2 ...]
no aaa authentication enable {default|listname}
Indicates the authentication
method list when accessing a
higher privilege level from a
remote Telnet, Console or SSH.
enable authentication [default|list-name]
no enable authentication
Specifies the authentication
method for accessing a higher
privilege level from a remote
Telnet or console.
Use the no form of this
command to restore the default
authentication method
login authentication [default|list-name] Indicates the login
authentication method list for a
remote Telnet, Console or SSH.
ip http authentication aaa loginauthentication method1 [method2]
no ip http authentication aaa loginauthentication
Indicates authentication
methods for HTTP or HTTPS
servers.
show authentication methods Displays information about the
authentication methods.274 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands that sets authentication
for the console using the default method list that was previously-defined:
The following is an example of the CLI commands that creates an
authentication method list for http server access (RADIUS and local):
console(config)#line console
console(config-line)# enable authentication default
console(config-line)# login authentication default
console(config-line)# exit
console(config)# ip http authentication aaa loginauthentication radius local
console(config)# exitDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 275
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Active Users
To view active users on the device:
• Click System > Management Security > Active Users in the tree view to
display the Active Users page.
Figure 9-35. Active Users
The following fields are displayed for all active users:
– Name — Active users logged into the device.
– Protocol — The management method by which the user is connected
to the device.
– Location — The user’s IP address.276 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Displaying Active Users Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing active users
connected to the device.
The following example shows an example of the CLI command:
Table 9-44. Active Users CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show users Displays information about active users.
console> show users
Username Protocol Location
-------- -------- ---------
Bob Serial
John SSH 172.16.0.1
Robert HTTP 172.16.0.8
Betty Telnet 172.16.1.7Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 277
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Local User Database
Use the Local User Database pages to define users, passwords and access
levels.
To add a new user:
1 Click System > Management Security > Local User Database in the tree
view to display the Local User Database: Summary page.
Figure 9-36. Local User Database: Summary
All users are displayed even if they have been suspended.
If a user has been suspended, it can be restored here by selecting the
Reactivate Suspended User field.
2 To add a user, click Add, and enter the fields:
– User Name (1-20 characters) — Enter the username of the user.278 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Access Level — Select a user access level. The lowest user access level
is 1 and 15 is the highest user access level. Users with access level 15
are Privileged Users, and only they can access and use the switch
administrator.
– Password (8-64 characters) — Enter the password of the user.
– Confirm Password — Confirm the password of the user.
The following fields are displayed:
• Expiry Date — The expiration date of the user-defined password.
• Lockout Status — Specifies whether the user currently has access
(status Usable), or whether the user is locked out due to too many
failed authentication attempts since the user last logged in
successfully (status Locked).
• Reactivate Suspended User — Check to reactivate the specified
user’s access rights. Access rights can be suspended after
unsuccessfully attempting to login.
Configuring Local Users Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring local
users.
Table 9-45. Local User CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
username name {nopassword|password
password|password encrypted
encrypted-password}
username name [privilege-level]
no username name
Establishes a username-based
authentication system.
Use the no form to remove a user
name.
set username name active Reactivates a suspended user’s
access rights.
show user accounts Displays users information.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 279
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Line Passwords
To add a line password for Console, Telnet, and Secure-Telnet users:
1 Click System > Management Security > Line Passwords in the tree view
to display the Line Password page.
Figure 9-37. Line Password
2 Enter the fields for each type of user, separately:
– Password (0 - 159 Characters) — Enter the line password for accessing
the device.
– Confirm Password — Confirm the line password.
console(config)# username bob password lee privilege 15
console# set username bob active280 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Console/Telnet/Secure Telnet Line Aging (1-365) — Check to set the
amount of time in days that elapses before a line password is aged out.
Enter the number of days after which the password expires.
– Expiry Date — Displays the expiration date of the line password.
– Lockout Status — Displays whether the user currently has access
(status Usable), or whether the user is locked out due to too many
failed authentication attempts since the user last logged in
successfully (status Locked).
– Reactivate Locked Line — Check to reactivate the line password for a
Console/Telnet/Secure Telnet session. Access rights can be suspended
after a number of unsuccessful attempts to log in.
Assigning Line Passwords Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the Line Password page
.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 9-46. Line Password CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
line {console|telnet|ssh} Identifies a specific line for configuration
and enters the Line Configuration
command mode.
password password
[encrypted]
no password
Sets a password on a line.
Use the no form of this command to
remove the password.
console(config)# line console
console(config-line)# password dellDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 281
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Enable Password
To set a local password to control access to Normal and Privilege levels
activities.
1 Click System > Management Security > Enable Passwords in the tree
view to display the Enable Password page.
Figure 9-38. Enable Password
2 Enter the fields:
– Select Enable Access Level — Select the access level to associate with
the enable password. The lowest user access level is 1 and 15 is the
highest user access level. Users with access level 15 are Privileged
Users, and only they can access and use the OpenManage Switch
Administrator.
– Password (0-159 characters) — Enter the enable password.
– Confirm Password — Confirm the password.282 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Expiry Date — If Aging is selected, displays the expiration date of the
enable password.
– Lockout Status — Displays the number of failed authentication
attempts since the user last logged in successfully (if the Enable
Login Attempts checkbox is selected in the Password Management
page.) Specifies LOCKOUT, when the user account is locked.
– Reactivate Suspended User — Check to reactivate the specified user’s
access rights. Access rights can be suspended after unsuccessfully
attempting to login.
Assigning Enable Passwords Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the Enable Password page.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
TACACS+
The device can act as a Terminal Access Controller Access Control System
(TACACS+) client. TACACS+ provides centralized validation of users
accessing the device, while still retaining consistency with RADIUS and other
authentication processes.
TACACS+ provides the following services:
• Authentication — Provides authentication during login and via user
names and user-defined passwords.
• Authorization — Performed at login after authentication. The TACACS+
server checks the privileges of the authenticated user.
Table 9-47. Enable Password CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
enable password [level
level] d [encrypted]
no enable password [level
level]
Sets a local password to control access to
user and privilege levels.
Use the no form of this command to
remove the password requirement.
console(config)# enable password level 15 secretDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 283
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The TACACS+ protocol ensures network integrity through encrypted
protocol exchanges between the device and TACACS+ server.
To configure TACACS+ servers:
1 Click System > Management Security > TACACS+ in the tree view to
display the TACACS+: Summary page.
Figure 9-39. TACACS+: Summary
The list of currently-defined TACACS+ servers is displayed. The
parameters for each server is displayed, along with its connection status.
2 Enter the default parameters for TACACS+ servers. These values are used
unless values are added in the TACACS+ Add or Edit pages.
– Source IP Address — The device IP address used for the TACACS+
session between the device and the TACACS+ server. The default is
0.0.0.0., which means that any IP address of the device can be used to
communicate with the TACACS+ server.284 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Key String (1-128 Characters) — The authentication and encryption
key for TACACS+ communications between the device and the
TACACS+ server. This key must match the encryption key sent by the
TACACS+ server. This key is encrypted.
– Timeout for Reply (1-30) — The amount of time that passes before
the connection between the device and the TACACS+ server times
out.
3 To add a TACACS+ server, click Add, and enter the fields on the page.
The fields below are those that were not described on the TACACS+:
Summary page.
– Host IP Address — Enter the TACACS+ server IP address.
– Priority (0-65535) — Enter the order in which the TACACS+ servers
are used if several are defined.
– Source IP Address — Enter either specific device IP address for the
TACACS+ server.
– Authentication Port (0-65535) — Enter the port number through
which the TACACS+ session occurs.
– Timeout for Reply (1-30) — Enter the amount of time that passes
before the connection between the device and the TACACS+ server
times out.
– Single Connection — Check to maintain a single open connection
between the device and the TACACS+ server.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 285
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Wherever available, check Use Default to use a value that was entered in
the TACACS+: Summary page.
Defining TACACS+ Settings Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the TACACS+ Settings pages.
Table 9-48. TACACS+ CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
tacacs-server host {ip
address|hostname}[singleconnection] [port port-number]
[timeout timeout][key keystring][source source] [priority
priority]
no tacacs-server host {ipaddress|hostname}
Configures a TACACS+ host.
Use the no form of this command to
delete the specified TACACS+ host.
tacacs-server key key-string
no tacacs-server key
Specifies the authentication and
encryption key for all TACACS+
communications between the device
and the TACACS+ server.
Use the no form of this command to
disable the key.
tacacs-server timeout timeout
no tacacs-server timeout
Specifies the timeout value in
seconds.
tacacs-server source-ip source
no tacacs-server source-ip
source
Specifies the source IP address.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
show tacacs [ip-address] Displays configuration and statistics
for a TACACS+ server.286 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Password Management
Password management provides increased network security and improved
password control. This feature is optional and must be enabled in the
Password Management page.
Passwords for SSH, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, and SNMP access can be assigned
security features that include:
• Minimum password lengths
• Password expiration dates (password aging)
• Prevention of frequent password reuse
• Lockout of users after failed login attempts
• Number of repeated characters allowed
• Number of different character classes required in the password. Numeric,
alphabetic, and special characters are all character classes.
console(config)# tacacs-server source-ip 172.16.8.1
console# show tacacs
Device Configuration
-----------------------------
IP Address Status Port Single TimeOut Source IP Priority
Connection
---------- ------ ------ ---------- -------- ---------- --------
1.1.1.11 Not 49 No Global Global 10
Connected
1.1.1.21 Not 49 No Global Global 19
Connected
1.1.1.31 Not 49 No Global Global 18
Connected
1.1.1.41 Not 49 No Global Global 17
Connected
Global values
--------------
TimeOut : 5
-----------------------------
Source IP : 0.0.0.0Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 287
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Password aging starts immediately after password management is enabled.
However it is only effective if system time on the device is taken from an
SNTP server. Passwords expire according to the user-defined expiration
date/time. Ten days prior to password expiration, the device displays a
password expiration warning message.
After the password has expired, users can log in a few additional times.
During the remaining logins, an additional warning message displays
informing the user that the password must be changed. If the password is not
changed, users are locked out of the system, and can only log in using the
console. Password warnings are logged in the SYSLOG file.
NOTE: Password aging is enabled only after setting the switch to use SNTP for
setting time.288 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To define password management parameters:
1 Click System > Management Security > Password Management in the
tree view to display the Password Management page.
Figure 9-40. Password Management
2 Check the required fields and enter their values:
– Enable Strong Passwords — Check to enable this feature.
– Number of Classes — Select a number of character classes. The
character classes are: upper case characters, lower case characters,
digits and punctuation. The number of character classes selected
indicates how many different types of characters must be in the
password.
– Repeated Characters — Select the number of permissible repeated
characters in the password.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 289
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Password Minimum Length (8-64 characters) — When checked,
specifies the minimum password length. Enter the minimum
password length.
– Enable Login Attempts — When checked, enables locking a user out
of the device when a faulty password is used more than the number of
times entered. Select the maximum number of login attempts.
– Global Password Aging (1-365) — When checked, specifies that the
password will expire in the number of days entered. Enter the number
of days. This is only enabled after setting the switch to use SNTP for
setting time
– Consecutive Passwords Before Reuse (1-10) — When checked,
indicates the number of times a password must be changed, before the
password can be reused. Select the number of times.
– Password History Hold Time (1-365) — When checked, the password
history will be deleted after the number of days entered. Enter the
number of days.
Password Management Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the Password Management page.
Table 9-49. Password Management CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
passwords strength-check enable
no passwords strength-check
Enforces password strength checks.
Use the no form of this command
to disable enforcing password
strength checks.
passwords strength [max-limit
repeated characters | minimum
character-classes]
no passwords strength
Enforces limits of repeated
characters and character classes.
Use the no form of this command
to disable enforcing limits of
repeated characters and character
classes.290 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is a sample script that sets password strength rules and creates a
user with a valid password.
password min-length length
no password min-length
Defines the minimum password
length.
Use the no form of this command
to remove the restriction.
passwords aging days
no passwords aging
Enforces password aging.
Use the no form of this command
to return to default.
password history number
no password history
Defines the amount of times a
password is changed, before the
password can be reused.
password history hold-time days
no password history hold-time
Configures the duration that a
password is relevant for tracking
passwords history.
Use the no form of this command
to return to the default
configuration.
password lockout number
no password lockout
Defines the number of times a
faulty password is entered before
the user is locked out of the device.
Use the no form of this command
to disable the lockout feature.
show password configuration Displays password management
information.
Table 9-50. CLI Script to Configure Strong Password
CLI Command Description
console#configure
console(conf)# passwords strengthcheck enable
Enable strong passwords.
Table 9-49. Password Management CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 291
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) servers provide
additional security for networks. Up to four RADIUS servers can be defined.
RADIUS servers provide a centralized authentication method for:
• Telnet Access
• Secure Shell Access
• Web Access
• Console Access
console(config)# passwords strength
minimum character-classes 3
Enable that passwords must
contain at least three
character classes.
password min-length 8 Enable that passwords must
contain at least eight
characters.
console(config)# username admin
privilege 15 password FGH123!@#
Create a user named
"admin" with privilege level
15 and password that fits
the strength rules.
Table 9-50. CLI Script to Configure Strong Password
CLI Command Description292 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To add a RADIUS server:
1 Click System > Management Security > RADIUS in the tree view to
display the RADIUS: Summary page.
Figure 9-41. RADIUS: Summary
The RADIUS default parameters and previously-defined RADIUS servers
are displayed.
2 Enter the default parameters to be used when these parameters are not
entered for a specific server.
– Default Retries (1-10) — The default number of transmitted requests
sent to RADIUS server before a failure occurs.
– Default Timeout for Reply (1-30) — The default amount of the time
(in seconds) that the device waits for an answer from the RADIUS
server before timing out.
– Default Dead time (0-2000) — The default amount of time (in
minutes) that a RADIUS server is bypassed for service requests.
– Default Key String (0-128 Characters) — The Default Key string
used for authenticating and encrypting all RADIUS communications
between the device and the RADIUS server. This key is used for
encryption.
– Source IPv4 Address — The source IP v4 address that is used for
communication with RADIUS servers.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 293
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Source IPv6 Address — The source IP v6 address that is used for
communication with RADIUS servers.
3 To add a RADIUS server, click Add, and enter the fields:
– Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is
supported.
– IP Address — Enter the RADIUS server IP address.
– Priority (0-65535) — Enter the priority of the authentication server
being added. 0 is the highest value. This is used to configure the order
in which servers are queried.
– Authentication Port (0-65535) — Enter the authentication port used
to verify the RADIUS server authentication. Enter 0 if you do not
want this server to be used for authentication purposes.
– Accounting Port (0-65535) — Enter the accounting port, which is the
UDP port number of the RADUS server used for accounting requests.
Enter 0 if you do not want this server to be used for accounting
purposes.
– Usage Type — Enter the RADIUS server usage. The possible options
are:
• Login — Used for login authentication and/or accounting.
• 802.1x — Used for 802.1x authentication and/or accounting.
• All — Used for all types of authentication and/or accounting.
4 Enter the following fields if you do not want to use the default values
entered in the RADIUS: Summary page. If you do want to use the default
values, check Use Default for these fields.
– Number of Retries (1-10) — Enter the number of requests sent to the
RADIUS server before a failure occurs.
– Timeout for Reply (1-30) — The amount of the time in seconds that
the device waits for an answer from the RADIUS server before retrying
the query, or switching to the next server.
– Dead Time (0-2000) — The amount of time (in minutes) that a
RADIUS server is bypassed for service requests.
– Key String (0-128 Characters) — The key string used for
authenticating and encrypting all RADIUS communications between
the device and the RADIUS server. 294 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Source IP Address — The device IP address that is used for
communication with RADIUS servers.
Defining RADIUS Servers Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields
displayed on the RADIUS pages.
Table 9-51. RADIUS Server CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
radius-server host {ipv4-
address|ipv6-address|ipv6zaddress|hostname} [auth-port
auth-port-number] [acct-port
acct-port-number][timeout
timeout] [retransmit retries]
[deadtime deadtime] [key keystring] [source {ipv4-
address|ipv6-address}] [priority
priority] [usage
{login|802.1x|all}]
no radius-server host {ipv4-
address|ipv6-address|hostname}
Specifies a RADIUS server host.
Use the no form of the command to
delete the specified RADIUS server
host.
radius-server timeout timeout
no radius-server timeout
Sets the interval for which a device
waits for a server host to reply.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
radius-server source-ip sourceip-address
no radius-server source-ip
source-ip-address
Specifies the source IPv4 address
that will be used for the IPv4
communication with RADIUS
servers.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 295
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
radius-server source-ipv6
source-ipv6-address
no radius-server source-ipv6
source-ipv6-address
Specifies the source IPv6 address
that will be used for the IPv6
communication with RADIUS
servers.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
radius-server retransmit retries
no radius-server retransmit
Specifies the number of times the
software searches the list of
RADIUS server hosts.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
radius-server deadtime deadtime
no radius-server deadtime
Configures unavailable servers to be
skipped.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
radius-server key key-string
no radius-server key
Sets the authentication and
encryption key for all RADIUS
communications between the router
and the RADIUS server.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
show radius-servers Displays the RADIUS server
settings.
Table 9-51. RADIUS Server CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description296 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of CLI commands:
console(config)# radius-server host 192.168.10.1 authport 20 timeout 20
console(config)# radius-server key enterprise-server
console# show radius-servers
IP address Port Port Time- Ret- Dead- Source IP Prio. Usage
Auth Acct Out rans Time
--------------- ----- ----- ------ ------ ------ --------------- ----- ---
1.1.1.11 1812 1813 Global Global Global Global 10 all
1.1.1.21 1812 1813 Global Global Global Global 19 all
1.1.1.31 1812 1813 Global Global Global Global 18 all
1.1.1.41 1812 1813 Global Global Global Global 17 all
1.1.1.51 1812 1813 Global Global Global Global 16 all
Global values
--------------
TimeOut : 3
Retransmit : 3
Deadtime : 0
Source IP : 0.0.0.0
Source IPv6 : ::Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 297
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
DHCP Server
The switch can operate as either:
• DHCP client that obtains its own IP from a DHCP server, as described in
"DHCP IPv4 Interface" on page 214
• DHCP server that allocates IP addresses to other devices, as described in
this section
This section contains the following topics:
• DHCP Server Overview
• DHCP Server Properties
• Network Pool
• Excluded Addresses
• Static Hosts
• Address Binding
DHCP Server Overview
A DHCP server uses a defined pool of IP addresses (user-defined) from which
it allocates IP addresses to DHCP clients.
The DHCP server can allocate IP addresses in the following modes:
• Static Allocation — The hardware address of a host is manually mapped
to an IP address.
• Permanent Allocation — An IP address sent to the client through a
standard request-reply mechanism, is owned by that client permanently
(unless changes in the network environment/connections take place, for
any reason).
• Dynamic Allocation — A client obtains a leased IP address for a specified
period of time. The IP address is revoked at the end of this period, and the
client must request another IP address. 298 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
DHCP Server Properties
If the device is configured to act as a DHCP server, pinging capability can be
enabled. The DHCP server pings an IP address in the address pool before
assigning that IP address to a requesting client. If the ping is unanswered, the
DHCP server assumes that the address is not in use and assigns the address to
the client.
To configure the device as a DHCP server:
1 Click System > DHCP Server > DHCP Server Properties in the tree view
to display the DHCP Server Properties page.
Figure 9-42. DHCP Server PropertiesDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 299
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
2 Enter the fields:
– DHCP Server Status — Enable/disable the ability of the device to
function as a DHCP server.
– DHCP Ping — Enable/disable the DHCP server to ping the offered
IP address before responding to a client request.
– DHCP Ping Retries — Enter the number of pings that are sent before
discarding an IP address. Use Default reverts to the default Ping
Retries setting.
– DHCP Ping Timeout — Enter the maximum time interval (in
milliseconds) that the DHCP server waits for a ping reply. Use Default
reverts to the default Ping Timeout.
Defining DHCP Server Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining the switch as
a DHCP server.
Table 9-52. DHCP Server CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip dhcp server
no ip dhcp server
Enables the DHCP server feature on
the device.
Use the no form of this command to
disable the DHCP server feature.
ip dhcp ping enable
no ip dhcp ping enable
Enables the DHCP server to send ping
packets before assigning the address to a
requesting client.
Use the no form of this command to
prevent the server from pinging pool
addresses.
ip dhcp ping count number
no ip dhcp ping count
Specifies the number of packets a
DHCP server sends to a pool address as
part of a ping operation.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.300 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
ip dhcp ping timeout
milliseconds
no ip dhcp ping timeout
Specifies the time interval during which
a DHCP server waits for a ping reply
from an address pool.
Use the no form of this command to
restore default values.
console(config)# ip dhcp ping enable
console(config)# ip dhcp ping count 5
Table 9-52. DHCP Server CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 301
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Network Pool
When the device is serving as a DHCP server, a pool of IP addresses must be
defined, from which the switch will allocate IP addresses to clients.
Each IP pool has a lease duration.
To create a pool of IP addresses, and define their lease durations:
1 Click System > DHCP Server > Network Pool in the tree view to display
the Network Pool: Summary page.
Figure 9-43. Network Pool: Summary
The previously-defined network pools are displayed.
2 Click Add to define a new network pool, and enter the fields:
– Pool Name — Enter the pool name.
– Subnet IP Address — Enter the subnet in which the network pool
resides.302 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Network Mask — Check and enter the pool’s network mask.
• Prefix Length — Check and enter the number of bits that
comprise the address prefix.
– Address Pool Start — Enter the first IP address in the range of the
network pool.
– Address Pool End — Enter the last IP address in the range of the
network pool.
– Lease Duration — Enter the amount of time a DHCP client can use
an IP address from this pool. The total lease duration is 4294967295
seconds, i.e. 49710.2696 days. Thus a lease of 49710 days, 0 hours, 0
minutes and 0 seconds is a legal value, while a lease of 49710 days, 23
hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds results in an Out of Range alert.
• Days — The duration of the lease in number of days. The range is
0 to 49710 days.
• Hours — The number of hours in the lease. A days value must be
supplied before an hours value can be added.
• Minutes — The number of minutes in the lease. A days value and
an hours value must be added before a minutes value can be
added.
• Infinite — The duration of the lease is unlimited.
– Default Router — Enter the default router for the DHCP client.
– Domain Name Server — Enter the DNS server available to the DHCP
client.
– Domain Name — Enter the domain name for a DHCP client. The
domain name may contain up to 32 characters.
– NetBIOS WINS Server — Enter the NetBIOS WINS name server
available to a DHCP client.
– NetBIOS Node Type — Select how to resolve the NetBIOS name.
Valid node types are:
• Empty— Default value.
• Broadcast — IP Broadcast messages are used to register and
resolve NetBIOS names to IP addresses.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 303
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Peer-to-Peer — Point-to-point communications with a NetBIOS
name server are used to register and resolve computer names to IP
addresses.
• Mixed — A combination of b-node and p-node communications
is used to register and resolve NetBIOS names. M-node first uses
b-node; then, if necessary, p-node. M-node is typically not the best
choice for larger networks because its preference for b-node
Broadcasts increases network traffic.
• Hybrid — A hybrid combination of b-node and p-node is used.
When configured to use h-node, a computer always tries p-node
first and uses b-node only if p-node fails. This is the default.
– SNTP Server — Enter the IP address of the time server for the DHCP
client.
– Next Server — Enter the IP address of the next server in the boot
process of a DHCP client. If the next server in the boot process is not
configured, the DHCP server uses inbound interface helper addresses
as boot servers.
– Next Server Name — Enter the name of the next server in the boot
process.
– Image File Name — Enter the name of the file that is used as a boot
image.
Configuring Network Pool Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining a pool of
addresses on the DHCP server.
Table 9-53. Network Pool CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip dhcp pool network name
no ip dhcp pool network name
Configures a DHCP address pool on a
DHCP Server and enters DHCP Pool
Configuration mode.
Use the no form of this command to remove
the address pool.304 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
address {network-number|low
low-address high highaddress} {mask|prefixlength}
no address
Configures the subnet number, mask and
start and end addresses for a DHCP address
pool on a DHCP Server.
Use the no form of this command to remove
the subnet number and mask.
lease {days [{hours}
[minutes]]|infinite}
no lease
Configures the time duration of the lease for
an IP address that is assigned from a DHCP
server to a DHCP client.
Use the no form of this command to restore
the default value
default-router ip-address
[ip-address2 ... ipaddress8]
no default-router
Configures the default router list for a
DHCP client.
Use the no form of this command to remove
the default router list.
dns-server ip-address [ipaddress2 ... ip-address8]
no dns-server
Configures the DNS IP servers available to a
DHCP client.
Use the no form of this command to remove
the DNS server list.
domain-name domain
no domain-name
Specifies the domain name for a DHCP
client.
Use the no form of this command to remove
the domain name.
netbios-name-server ipaddress [ip-address2 ... ipaddress8]
no netbios-name-server
Configures the NetBIOS Windows Internet
Naming Service (WINS) servers that are
available to Microsoft DHCP clients.
Use the no form of this command to remove
the NetBIOS name server list.
netbios-node-type {b-node|pnode|m-node|h-node}
no netbios-node-type
Configures the NetBIOS node type for
Microsoft Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP) clients.
Use the no form of this command to remove
the NetBIOS node type.
Table 9-53. Network Pool CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 305
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
time-server ip-address [ipaddress2 ... ip-address8]
no time-server
Specifies the time servers list for a DHCP
client.
Use the no form of this command to remove
the time servers list.
next-server ip-address
no next-server
Configures the next server in the boot
process of a DHCP client.
Use the no form of this command to remove
the boot server.
next-server-name name
no next-server-name
Configures the next server name in the boot
process of a DHCP client.
Use the no form of this command to remove
the boot server name.
bootfile filename
no bootfile
Specifies the default boot image file name
for a DHCP client.
Use the no form of this command to delete
the boot image file name.
show ip dhcp pool network
[name]
Displays the DHCP network pool
configuration.
console(config)# ip dhcp pool network pool1
console(config-dhcp)# address 10.12.1.99 255.255.255.0
01b7.0813.8811.66
console(config-dhcp)# lease 1
Table 9-53. Network Pool CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description306 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Excluded Addresses
By default, the DHCP server assumes that all pool addresses in a pool may be
assigned to clients. A single IP address or a range of IP addresses can be
excluded.
To define an excluded address range:
1 Click System > DHCP Server > Excluded Addresses in the tree view to
display the Excluded Addresses: Summary page.
Figure 9-44. Excluded Addresses: Summary
The previously-defined excluded IP addresses are displayed.
2 To add a range of IP addresses to be excluded, click Add, and enter the
fields:
– Start IP Address — First IP address in the range of excluded IP
addresses.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 307
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– End IP Address — Last IP address in the range of excluded IP
addresses.
Excluding Addresses Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for excluding addresses.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 9-54. Excluding Addresses Using CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip dhcp excluded-address lowaddress [high-address]
no ip dhcp excluded-address
low-address [high-address]
Configures a DHCP address pool on a
DHCP Server and enter DHCP Pool
Configuration mode.
Use the no form of this command to
remove the address pool.
show ip dhcp excluded-addresses Displays the excluded addresses.
console(config)# ip dhcp excluded-address 172.16.1.100
172.16.1.199
console> show ip dhcp excluded-addresses
The number of excluded addresses ranges is 2
Excluded addresses:
10.1.1.212- 10.1.1.219, 10.1.2.212- 10.1.2.219308 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Static Hosts
To manually allocate permanent IP addresses to clients (known as static
hosts):
1 Click System > DHCP Server > Static Hosts in the tree view to display
the Static Hosts: Summary page.
Figure 9-45. Static Hosts: Summary
The static hosts are displayed.
2 To add a static host, click Add, and enter the fields:
– Host Name — Enter the host pool name, which can be a string of
symbols and an integer.
– IP Address — Enter the IP address that was statically assigned to the
host.
• Network Mask — Enter the pool’s network mask.
• Prefix Length — Enter the number of bits that comprise the address
prefix.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 309
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Client Identifier — Enter a unique identification of the client
specified in dotted hexadecimal notation, such as: 01b6.0819.6811.72.
or:
– MAC Address — Enter the MAC address of DHCP static host.
– Client Name — The name of the client, using a standard set of ASCII
characters. The client name must not include the domain name.
– Default Router — Enter the default router for the DHCP client.
– Domain Name Server — Enter the DNS server available to the DHCP
client.
– Domain Name — Enter the domain name for a DHCP client. The
domain name may contain up to 32 characters.
– NetBIOS WINS Server — Enter the NetBIOS WINS name server
available to a DHCP client.
– NetBIOS Node Type — Select how to resolve the NetBIOS name.
Valid node types are:
• Empty — Default value.
• Broadcast — IP Broadcast messages are used to register and
resolve NetBIOS names to IP addresses.
• Peer-to-Peer — Point-to-point communications with a NetBIOS
name server are used to register and resolve computer names to IP
addresses.
• Mixed — A combination of b-node and p-node communications
is used to register and resolve NetBIOS names. M-node first uses
b-node; then, if necessary, p-node. M-node is typically not the best
choice for larger networks because its preference for b-node
Broadcasts increases network traffic.
• Hybrid — A hybrid combination of b-node and p-node is used.
When configured to use h-node, a computer always tries p-node
first and uses b-node only if p-node fails. This is the default.
– SNTP Server — Enter the IP address of the time server for the DHCP
client.310 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Next Server — Enter the IP address of the next server in the boot
process of a DHCP client. If the next server in the boot process is not
configured, the DHCP server uses inbound interface helper addresses
as boot servers.
– Next Server Name — Enter the name of the next server in the boot
process.
– Image File Name — Enter the name of the file that is used as a boot
image.
Defining Static Hosts Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining static hosts.
See Table 9-53 for the remaining CLI commands that are common to the
Network Pool pages, but are used in the context DHCP Pool Host context.
Table 9-55. Defining Static Hosts Using CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip dhcp pool host
no ip dhcp pool host
Configures a DHCP static address
on a DHCP Server and enters the
DHCP Pool Host Configuration
mode.
Use the no form of this command to
remove the address pool.
ip host name address [address2
address3 address4]
no ip host name
Defines the static host name-toaddress mapping in the host cache.
Use the no form of this command to
remove the static hostname-toaddress mapping.
show hosts Displays the default domain name,
the list of name server hosts, the
static and the cached list of host
names and addresses.
clear host Deletes entries from the host nameto-address cache.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 311
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console(config)# ip dhcp pool host station
console(config-dhcp)#ip host accounting.website.com
176.10.23.1
console# show hosts
System Name:
Default domain: Domain name is not configured
Name/address lookup is enable
Name servers (Preference order): 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.2 1.1.1.3
1.1.1.4 1.1.1.5
Configured host name-to-address mapping:
Host IP Address
--------------------------------- -----------------------
accounting.website.com 176.10.23.1312 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Address Binding
Use the Address Binding page to view and remove the IP addresses allocated
by the switch and their corresponding MAC addresses.
To view and/or remove address bindings:
• Click System > DHCP Server > Address Binding in the tree view to
display the Address Binding page.
Figure 9-46. Address Binding
The following fields for the address bindings are displayed:
– IP Address — The IP addresses of the client.
– Client Identifier/MAC Address — A unique identification of the
client specified as a MAC Address or in dotted hexadecimal notation,
e.g., 01b6.0819.6811.72.
– Lease Expiration — The lease expiration date and time of the host’s
IP address.
– Type — The manner in which the IP address was assigned to the
client. The possible options are:
• Static — The hardware address of the host was mapped to an IP
address.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 313
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Permanent — The IP address, obtained dynamically from the
switch, is owned by the client permanently (unless changes in the
network environment/connections take place, for any reason).
• Dynamic — The IP address, obtained dynamically from the
switch, is owned by the client for a specified period of time. The
IP address is revoked at the end of this period, at which time the
client must request another IP address. 314 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
SNMP
This section describes the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
for managing network devices.
It contains the following topics:
• SNMP Overview
• SNMP Global Settings
• SNMP Views
• SNMP Access Control (Groups)
• SNMP User Security Model (Users)
• SNMP Communities
• SNMP Notification Filters
• SNMP Notification Recipients
SNMP Overview
The switch supports the SNMPv1, SNMPv2 and SNMPv3.
SNMP v1 and v2
The SNMP agent maintains a list of variables that are used to manage the
switch. These variables are stored in the Management Information Base
(MIB) from which they may be presented. The SNMP agent defines the MIB
specification format, as well as the format used to access the information over
the network. Access rights to the SNMP agents are controlled by access
strings.
SNMPv1 and v2 are enabled by default.
SNMP v3
In addition to the features provided by SNMPv1 and SNMPv2, SNMPv3
applies access control and a new trap mechanism to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2
PDUs. In addition, a User Security Model (USM) can be defined, which
includes:
• Authentication — Provides data integrity and data origin authentication. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 315
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Privacy — Protects against disclosure of message content. Cipher BlockChaining (CBC) is used for encryption. Either authentication alone can
be enabled on an SNMP message, or both authentication and privacy can
be enabled on an SNMP message. However privacy cannot be enabled
without authentication.
• Timeliness — Protects against message delay or message redundancy. The
SNMP agent compares incoming message to the message time
information.
• Key Management — Defines key generation, updates, and use.
The switch supports SNMP notification filters, based on Object IDs (OIDs),
which are used by the system to manage switch features.
Authentication or Privacy Keys are modified in the User Security Model
(USM).
SNMPv3 can only be enabled if the Local Engine ID is enabled.
SNMP Access Rights
Access rights in SNMP are managed in the following ways:
• SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 — Communities
The community name is a password sent by the SNMP management
station to the device for authentication purposes.
A community string is transmitted along with the SNMPv1,v2 frames, but
neither the frames nor the community string are encrypted. Since
SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 are not encrypted, they are not secure.
Communities can be associated with views or groups, and they are defined
in the Community pages.
• SNMPv3 — Users and Groups
SNMP v3 works with users instead of communities. The users belong to
groups that have access rights assigned to them. Users are defined in the
User Security Model pages
SNMPv3 provides two security mechanisms:
– Authentication — The switch checks that the SNMP user is an
authorized system administrator. This is done for each and every
frame. 316 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Privacy — SNMP frames can carry encrypted data.
These mechanisms can be combined to provide three levels of security:
– No security
– Authentication
– Authentication and Privacy. Note that for both authentication and
privacy to be enabled, two groups with the same name, one with
authentication and one with privacy, must be created.
A group is a label for a combination of attributes that determines whether
members have read, write, and/or notify privileges. Users can be associated
with a group. A group is operational only when it is associated with an
SNMP user.
Model OIDs
The following are the switch model Object IDs (OIDs):
SNMP Global Settings
The Engine ID is used by SNMPv3 entities to uniquely identify themselves.
An SNMP agent is considered an authoritative SNMP engine. This means
that the agent responds to incoming messages (Get, GetNext, GetBulk, Set),
and sends Trap messages to a manager. The agent's local information is
encapsulated in fields in the message.
Each SNMP agent maintains local information that is used in SNMPv3
message exchanges (not relevant for SNMPv1 or SNMPv2). The default
SNMP Engine ID is comprised of the enterprise number and the default
MAC address. The SNMP engine ID must be unique for the administrative
domain, so that no two devices in a network have the same engine ID.
Model Name Object ID
PC5524 10895.3030
PC5524P 10895.3032
PC5548 10895.3031
PC5548P 10895.3033Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 317
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The local information is stored in four read-only MIB variables:
snmpEngineId, snmpEngineBoots, snmpEngineTime, and
snmpEngineMaxMessageSize.
To configure SNMP:
1 Click System > SNMP > Global Parameters in the tree view to display
the Global Parameters page.
Figure 9-47. Global Parameters
The global parameters are displayed.
2 Enter the fields:
– Local Engine ID (10-64 Hex Characters) — Check and enter the
local device engine ID. The field value is a hexadecimal string. Each
byte in hexadecimal character strings is two hexadecimal digits. Each
byte can be separated by a period or a colon. The Engine ID must be
defined before SNMPv3 is enabled.
For stacked devices, verify that the Engine ID is unique for the
administrative domain. This prevents two devices in a network from
having the same Engine ID. 318 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Use Default — Check to use the device-generated Engine ID. The
default Engine ID is based on the device MAC address, and is defined
per standard as:
• First 4 octets — First bit = 1, the rest is IANA Enterprise number
= 674.
• Fifth octet — Set to 3 to indicate the MAC address that follows.
• Last 6 octets — MAC address of the device.
– SNMP Notifications — Enable/disable the switch sending SNMP
notifications.
– Authentication Notifications — Enable/disable the switch sending
SNMP traps when authentication fails.
Setting SNMP Global Parameters Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields in the
Global Parameters page.
Table 9-56. SNMP Global Parameters Commands
CLI Command Description
snmp-server engine ID local
{engine-id-string|default}
no snmp-server engine ID
local
Specifies the local device engine ID. The
field values is a hexadecimal string. Each
byte in hexadecimal character strings is two
hexadecimal digits. Each byte can be
separated by a period or colon. The Engine
ID must be defined before SNMPv3 is
enabled.
Use the no form of this command to
remove the configured engine ID.
snmp-server enable traps
no snmp-server enable traps
Enables the router to send Simple Network
Management Protocol traps.
Use the no form of the command to disable
SNMP traps.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 319
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
SNMP Views
An SNMP view, which is a collection of MIB subtrees, provides or blocks
access to device features.
Each subtree is defined by the Object ID (OID) of the root of its subtrees. In
extreme cases this subtree can be a leaf. Well-known names can be used to
specify the root of the desired subtree, or an OID can be entered (see "Model
OIDs" on page 316).
Each subtree is either included in or excluded from the view being defined.
snmp-server trap
authentication
no snmp-server trap
authentication
Enables the router to send Simple Network
Management Protocol traps when
authentication fails.
Use the no form of this command to
disable SNMP failed authentication traps.
show snmp Checks the status of SNMP
communications.
console(config)# snmp-server enable traps
console(config)# snmp-server trap authentication
console(config)# snmp-server engineid local default
The engine-id must be unique within your administrative
domain.
Do you wish to continue? [Y/N]y
The SNMPv3 database will be erased. Do you wish to
continue? [Y/N]y
Table 9-56. SNMP Global Parameters Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description320 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Views can be attached to groups in the Access Control pages.
To create an SNMP view:
1 Click System > SNMP > View Settings in the tree view to display the
View Settings: Summary page.
Figure 9-48. View Setting: Summary
2 Select a view name. Its subtrees are displayed.
3 To remove a subtree from an SNMP view, click Remove. The subtrees of
the default views (Default, DefaultSuper) cannot be changed.
4 To add a new view, click Add, and enter a new View Name (1-30
Characters).
5 To complete the definition of the view, click Edit, and select a View Name
to modify. Enter the fields:
– New Object ID Subtree — Check to specify the device feature OID
included or excluded in the selected SNMP view.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 321
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Selected from List — Select the device feature OID by using the
Up and Down buttons to scroll through a list of all device OIDs.
Or:
• Insert — Specify the device feature OID.
– View Type — Specify if the defined OID branch will be included or
excluded in the selected SNMP view.
Defining SNMP Views Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields
displayed in the View Settings pages.
The following is an example of CLI commands:
Table 9-57. SNMP View CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
snmp-server view view-name
oid-tree {included|excluded}
no snmp-server view view-name
[oid-tree]
Creates or updates a SNMP server view
entry.
Use the no form of this command to
remove an SNMP server view entry.
show snmp views [viewname] Displays the configuration of a view or all
views.
console(config)# snmp-server view user1 1 included
console(config)# end
console# show snmp views
Name OID Tree Type
------------ --------------- --------
user1 system included
Default iso included
Default snmpVacmMIB excluded
Default usmUser excluded
Default rndCommunityTable excluded
DefaultSuper iso included322 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
SNMP Access Control (Groups)
For ease of use, users may be assigned to groups. In this way, it is possible to
assign feature access rights to an entire group, instead of assigning them
individually to users. Users are created in the User Security Model pages.
Groups can be defined in any version of SNMP, but only SNMPv3 groups can
be assigned authentication methods.
To add an SNMP group, and assign it access control privileges:
1 Click System > SNMP > Access Control in the tree view to display the
Access Control: Summary page.
Figure 9-49. Access Control: Summary
Previously-defined groups are displayed.
2 To add a new group, click Add, and enter the fields:
– Group Name (1-30 Characters) — Enter a group name. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 323
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Security Model — Select the SNMP version of the group.
– Security Level — Select the security level attached to the group.
Security levels apply to SNMPv3 only. The possible options are:
• No Authentication — Neither authentication nor the privacy
security levels are assigned to the group.
• Authentication — Authenticates SNMP messages, and ensures
that the origin of the SNMP message is authenticated.
• Privacy — Encrypts SNMP message.
– Operation — Select the group access rights. The possible options are:
• Read — The management access is restricted to read-only, and
changes cannot be made to the assigned SNMP view. If desired,
select a view from the drop-down list.
• Write — The management access is read-write and changes can
be made to the assigned SNMP view. If desired, select a view from
the drop-down list.
• Notify — Sends traps for the assigned SNMP view. If desired,
select a view from the drop-down list.
Defining SNMP Access Control Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields
displayed in the Access Control pages.
Table 9-58. SNMP Access Control CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
snmp-server group groupname
{v1|v2|v3 {noauth|auth|priv}}
[read readview] [write
writeview] [notify notifyview]
no snmp-server group groupname
{v1|v2|v3 [noauth|auth|priv]}
[context-name]
Configure a new Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP)
group, or a table that maps SNMP
users to SNMP views.
Use the no form of this command to
remove a specified SNMP group.
show snmp groups [groupname] Displays the configuration of groups 324 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
SNMP User Security Model (Users)
An SNMP user is defined by the following:
• Login credentials (username, password, and authentication method)
• Context and scope in which the user operates
• Association with a group
• Engine ID
SNMP user login credentials are verified using a local database.
After a user is authenticated, it takes on the attributes of its group, and can
then access the views permitted to this group. A user can only be a member of
a single group.
Before you create an SNMPv3 user, create an SNMPv3 group in the Access
Control pages.
When the configuration file is saved, SNMP communities/users are not
saved. This means that if you configure another device with this
configuration file, you must define the SNMP communities/users on that
device.
console (config)# snmp-server group user-group v3 priv
read user-view
console# show snmp groups
Name Security Views
Model Level Read Write Notify
----- ----- ------- ------- ------- ----------
1 V1 noauth - - -
2 V1 noauth - - -
3 V1 noauth - - -
4 V1 noauth - - -
5 V1 noauth - - -Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 325
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To create an SNMP V3 user, and assign it to a group and view:
1 Click System > SNMP > User Security Model in the tree view to display
the User Security Model: Summary page.
Figure 9-50. User Security Model: Summary
The currently-defined users and their groups are displayed.
2 To add a user, click Add, and enter the fields:
– User Name (1-30 Characters) — Enter a new user name.
– Engine ID — Specifies the local or remote SNMP entity, to which the
user is connected. Changing or removing the local SNMP Engine ID
deletes the SNMPv3 User Database. Select either Local or Remote. If
Remote is selected, enter the remote engine ID.
– Group Name — Select from a list of user-defined SNMP groups.
SNMP groups are defined in the Access Control Group pages.326 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Authentication Method — Select an authentication method used to
authenticate users. The possible options are:
• None — No user authentication is used.
• MD5 Password — HMAC-MD5-96 password is used for
authentication.
• SHA Password — Users are authenticated using the HMAC-SHA-
96 authentication level.
• MD5 Key — Users are authenticated using the HMAC-MD5
algorithm.
• SHA Key — Users are authenticated using the HMAC-SHA-96
authentication level.
– Password (0-32 Characters) — If the MD5 Password or SHA Password
authentication method was selected, enter the user-defined password
for a group.
– Authentication Key (MD5-16; SHA-20 Hex Characters) — If the
MD5 Key or SHA Key authentication method was selected, enter the
HMAC-MD5-96 or HMAC-SHA-96 keys. The authentication and
privacy keys are entered to define the authentication key. If only
authentication is required, 16 bytes are defined for MD5. If both
privacy and authentication are required, 32 bytes are defined for MD5.
Each byte in hexadecimal character strings is two hexadecimal digits.
Each byte can be separated by a period or a colon.
– Privacy Key (16 Hex Characters) — If the MD5 Key or SHA Key
authentication method was selected, enter the privacy key. If only
authentication is required, 20 bytes are defined. If both privacy and
authentication are required, 16 bytes are defined. Each byte in
hexadecimal character strings is two hexadecimal digits. Each byte can
be separated by a period or colon. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 327
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Defining SNMPv3 Users Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields
displayed in the User Security Model pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
SNMP Communities
When using SNMP v1,2, communities strings (passwords) are used to provide
access rights in the following ways:
• Basic Table — The access rights of a community can be read-only, readwrite, or SNMP Admin. In addition, you can restrict access to the
community to only certain MIB objects using a view. Views are defined in
the Views Setting pages.
• Advanced Table — Access rights to a community are assigned to a group
that consists of users. A group can have Read, Write, and Notify access to
views. Groups are defined in the Access Control pages.
Table 9-59. SNMP Users CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
snmp-server user username groupname
{v1|v2c|[remote-host] v3 [encrypted]
[auth {md5|sha} auth-password]}
no snmp-server user username [remotehost]
Configures a new SNMP V3
user.
Use the no form of the
command to remove a user.
show snmp users [username] Displays the configuration of
users.
console(config)# snmp-server user tom acbd v1
console(config)# snmp-server user tom acbd v2c
console(config)# snmp-server user tom acbd v3328 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To define an SNMP community:
1 Click System > SNMP > Communities in the tree view to display the
Communities: Summary page.
Figure 9-51. SNMP Community
The Basic and Advanced tables are displayed.
2 To add a new community, click Add.
3 Define the SNMP management station by entering its IP address
information:
– Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is
being used.
– IPv6 Address Type — When the community supports IPv6, this
specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are:
• Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used
for communication on the same network only.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 329
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable
from different subnets.
– Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local
address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options
are:
• VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured.
• ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP
tunnel.
– SNMP Management Station — Enter the management station IP
address for which the SNMP community is defined, or choose All to
be able to receive SNMP messages from anywhere.
– Community String (1-20 Characters) — Enter the community string,
which functions as a password, and is used to authenticate the
management station to the device.
4 To associate access mode and views directly with the community, enter the
fields:
– Basic — Check to enable SNMP Basic mode for a selected
community.
– Access Mode — If Basic is selected, specify the access rights of the
community. The possible options are:
• Read-Only — Management access is restricted to read-only, and
changes cannot be made to the community.
• Read-Write — Management access is read-write and changes can
be made to the device configuration, but not to the community.
• SNMP Admin — User has access to all device configuration
options, as well as permissions to modify the community.
– View Name — Select a view from a list of user-defined SNMP views.
The view determines other characteristics associated with the
community.
5 To use Advanced mode, enter the fields:
– Advanced — When SNMP Advanced mode is selected, you can select
an SNMP group to specify the SNMP access control rules for the
selected community. The SNMP Advanced mode is defined only with
SNMPv3. 330 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Group Name — Select the group to be associated with the
community.
Configuring Communities Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields in the
Community pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
SNMP Notification Filters
Notification filters determine the type of SNMP notifications that are sent to
the management station, based on the OID of the notification to be sent.
Each OID is linked to a device feature or a feature aspect.
SNMP notification filters provide the following services:
• Identification of management trap targets
• Trap filtering
Table 9-60. SNMP Community CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
snmp-server community community
[view view-name] [ro|rw|su]
{ipv4-address|ipv6-address}
[mask mask-value|prefix-length
prefix-value] [type router|oob]
Sets up the community access string
to permit access to the SNMP
protocol.
Use the no form of this command to
remove the specified community
string
snmp-server community-group
community group-name [ipv4-
address|ipv6-
address][mask|prefix-length]
[type router|oob]
no snmp-server community string
[ipv4-address|ipv6-address]
Sets up community access string to
permit limited access to the SNMP
protocol, based on group access
rights.
show snmp Displays the current SNMP device
configuration.
console (config)# snmp-server community dell ro 10.1.1.1Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 331
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Selection of trap generation parameters
• Access control checks
After creating a notification filter, attach it to a notification recipient in the
SNMPv1,2 Notification Recipients pages.
To add a notification filter:
1 Click System > SNMP > Notification Filters in the tree view to display
the Notification Filter: Summary page.
Figure 9-52. Notification Filter: Summary
2 The OIDs of the selected filter are displayed.
3 If required, the notification filter type can be changed by selecting one of
the following options:
– Excluded — OID traps or informs will not be sent.
– Included — OID traps or informs will be sent.332 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
4 To add a new notification filter, click Add.
5 In addition to the fields described in the Summary page, enter the fields:
– Filter Name (1-30 Characters) — Enter the notification filter name.
– New Object Identifier Tree — Check to specify the device feature
OID included or excluded in the selected SNMP view.
• Selected from List — Select the device feature OID by using the
Up and Down buttons to scroll through a list of all device OIDs.
or:
• Object ID — Specify the device feature OID.
– Filter Type — Select whether the defined OID branch will be
Included or Excluded in the selected SNMP view.
Configuring Notification Filters Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes CLI commands for defining fields displayed
in the Notification Filter pages.
Table 9-61. SNMP Notification Filter CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
snmp-server filter filter-name oidtree {included|excluded}
no snmp-server filter filter-name
[oid-tree]
Creates or updates an SNMP
notification filter.
Use the no form of this
command to remove the
specified SNMP server filter
entry.
show snmp filters [filter-name] Displays the configuration of
SNMP notification filtersDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 333
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of CLI commands:
SNMP Notification Recipients
An SNMP notification is a trap message, sent from the switch to the SNMP
management station, indicating that a certain event has occurred, such as a
link up or down.
Trap receivers, also known as notification recipients, are network nodes to
which trap messages are sent by the switch.
A trap receiver entry contains the IP address of the node and the SNMP
credentials corresponding to the version that will be included in the trap
message. When an event arises that requires a trap message to be sent, it is
sent to every node listed in the trap receiver list.
Some messages are of an informational nature and are called "informs"
instead of traps.
console (config)# snmp-server filter user1 iso included
console(config)# end
console # show snmp filters
Name OID Tree Type
----------- ------------- --------
user1 iso Included334 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To add notification recipients, and attach them to notification filters:
1 Click System > SNMP > Notification Recipient in the tree view to
display the Notification Recipients: Summary page.
Figure 9-53. Notification Recipients: Summary
The previously-defined notification recipients are displayed.
2 To add a new notification recipient, click Add, and enter the fields:
– Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is
supported.
– IPv6 Address Type — When the recipient supports IPv6, this specifies
the type of static address supported. The possible options are:
• Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used
for communication on the same network only.
• Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable
from different subnets.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 335
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local
address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options
are:
• VLAN — The IPv6 interface is configured on this VLAN.
• ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP
tunnel.
– Recipient IP — The IP address to whom the traps are sent.
– Notification Type — The notification sent. The possible options are:
• Trap — Traps are sent.
• Inform — Informs are sent.
If SNMP versions 1 and 2 are enabled for the selected recipient, enter the
fields:
– Community String — The community string of the trap manager.
– Notification Version — The message trap SNMP version (v1 or v2).
If SNMPv3 is used to send and receive traps, enter the fields:
– User Name — The user to whom SNMP notifications are sent.
– Security Level — The means by which the packet is authenticated.
The possible options are:
• No Authentication — The packet is neither authenticated nor
encrypted.
• Authentication — The packet is authenticated.
• Privacy — The packet is both authenticated and encrypted.
3 Enter the fields for all versions of SNMP:
– UDP Port (1-65535) — The UDP port used to send notifications. The
default is 162.
– Filter Name — Select an SNMP filter from a list of previously-defined
SNMP filters.
– Timeout (1-300) — The amount of time (seconds) the device waits
before resending informs.
– Retries (1-255) — The amount of times the device resends an inform
request. 336 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring SNMP Notification Recipients Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields in the
Notification Recipients pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 9-62. SNMP Notification CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
snmp-server host {ipv4-
address|ipv6-address|hostname}
[traps|informs] [version {1|2c|3
[auth|noauth|priv]}] communitystring [udp-port port] [filter
filtername] [timeout seconds]
[retries retries]
no snmp-server host {ipv4-
address|ipv6-address|hostname}
[traps|informs] [version {1|2c|3}]
Creates or updates a notification
recipient receiving notifications in
SNMP version 1, 2 or 3.
Use the no form of this command to
remove the specified host.
show snmp Shows the current SNMP
configuration.
console(config)# snmp-server host 172.16.1.1 private
console(config)# end
console# show snmp
CommunityString
CommunityAccess
View Name IP Address
------------- ------------ --------- ----------
public read only user-view All
private read write default 172.16.1.1
private su DefaultSup
er
172.17.1.1 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 337
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
File Management
This section describes how to manage device firmware (image files) and
configuration files.
It contains the following topics:
• File Management Overview
• Auto-Update/Configuration Feature
• File Download
• File Upload
• Active Images
• Copy Files
• File System
File Management Overview
This section describes the system files found in the system and how they can
be updated (downloaded) and backed up (uploaded).
System Files
The following system files are maintained on the system:
• Startup Configuration File — Files with extension .text. These files
contain the commands required to configure the device at startup or after
reboot. The Startup Configuration file is created from the Running
Configuration file, or can be created from another file.
• Running Configuration File — Files with extension .text. These files
contain all Startup Configuration file commands, as well as all commands
entered during the current session. After the device is powered down or
rebooted, all commands stored in the Running Configuration file are lost.
During the startup process, all commands in the Startup Configuration
file are copied to the Running Configuration file, and applied to the
device.
During the session, new configuration commands are added to the
Running Configuration file. To update the Startup Configuration file with
these configuration commands, the Running Configuration file must first
be copied to the Startup Configuration file before powering down the 338 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
device. This can be done manually in the Copy Files page or see "AutoUpdate/Configuration Feature" on page 338 for more information about
how to perform this automatically.
• Image Files—Files with extension .ros. System file images are saved in two
flash files called Image 1 and Image 2. The active image contains the
active copy, while the other image contains a backup copy. The device
boots and runs from the active image. If the active image is corrupted, the
system automatically boots from the non-active image. This is a safety
feature for faults occurring during the software upgrade process.
Downloading/Uploading System Files
System files can be manually loaded from (downloaded) or copied to
(uploaded) a TFTP server or a USB drive. This can be done in one of the
following ways:
• Manually—System files can be downloaded using the File Download page
and uploaded using the File Upload page.
• Automatically (Auto Update/Configuration)—System files can be
downloaded automatically, as follows:
– Auto-Configuration—If the Auto-Configure feature is enabled (in the
Auto Update of Configuration/Image File page), the Startup
Configuration file (in various conditions described below) might be
automatically updated after reboot.
– Auto-Update—If the Firmware Auto-Update feature is enabled in the
Auto Update of Configuration/Image File page, the image file is might
be automatically updated (in various conditions described below).
Auto-Update/Configuration Feature
The Auto-Update/Configuration feature enables initial configuration of the
device and upgrading of the firmware through an automatic process, which
enables the administrator to ensure that the configuration/firmware of all the
devices in the network is up-to-date. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 339
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The required configuration files/images are stored on a USB key or TFTP
server, and these are downloaded to all the devices in the network when the
device boots up instead of booting from a local startup configuration file.
Auto-Update/Configuration also enables quick installation of new devices on
the network, since an out-of-box device can be configured to retrieve its
configuration file from the network/USB, allowing instant access to it from
the administrator's management station and up-to-date configuration on the
device.
NOTE: If Auto-Update is performed through the USB port, in addition to upgrading
the Startup Configuration and image file, a new IP address can also be assigned
to the device. See "Setup Files" on page 339 below.
Setup Files
In addition to placing configuration and image files on the USB key, the USB
key might also contain a setup file, which is a file with a .setup extension.
Setup File Contents
A setup file contains one or more lines. Each line contains some or all of the
following fields:
• MAC Address—This indicates to which device the line applies. In this
way, a single setup file can be used for multiple devices.
• New IP Address—The new IP address to be assigned to the device.
• New IP Address Mask—The IP address mask to be applied to the new IP
address assigned to the device.
• Configuration File Name—Name of the configuration file to be used as
the Startup Configuration.
• Image File Name—Name of the image file to be loaded on device.
• Flag—Indicates the status of the line. The following values can be used in
this field:
– In-Use—This line has already been applied. It is no longer a candidate
for future use.
– Invalid—The line is invalid, do not use.
– Blank—There is no value for the flag field. This line is a candidate to
be applied to the device.340 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Setup File Format
A line in a setup file contains all or some of the above fields separated by
spaces (in the following order):
If the field is omitted, it is considered to be blank.
A line can be in one of the following formats:
• Format A—Contains all possible fields:
Examples:
– 0080.c200.0010 192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0 switch-X.text pc5500-
4018.ros
This means that the line applies to the device with MAC address:
0080.c200.0010; a new IP address of 192.168.0.10 is to be assigned to
the device, with mask: 255.255.255.0. The switch-x.text is the Startup
Configuration file and pc5500-4018.ros is the new image file.
– 0080.c200.0010 192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0 switch-X.text pc5500-
4018.ros in-use
This line will not be used because the flag is in-use indicating that it
has already been used for some device, and it would be incorrect to use
if for another device.
– 0080.c200.0010 192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0 switch-X.text pc5500-
4018.ros invalid
This line will not be used because the flag is invalid indicating that it
is failed in the past.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 341
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Format B—Contains the following 4 fields:
Example:
0080.c200.0010 switch-X.text pc5500-4018.ros
This means that the line applies to the device with MAC address:
0080.c200.0010. The switch-x.text is the Startup Configuration file and
pc5500-4018.ros is the new image file.
• Format C—Contains the following 5 fields:
Example:
192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0 switch.text pc5500-4018.ros
This means that the line applies to any device (no MAC address is
supplied); a new IP address of 192.168.0.10 is to be assigned to the device,
with mask: 255.255.255.0. The switch-x.text is the Startup Configuration
file and pc5500-4018.ros is the new image file.
• Format D—Contains the following 3 fields:
Example:
192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0
This means that the line applies to any device (no MAC address is
supplied); a new IP address of 192.168.0.10 is to be assigned to the device,
with mask: 255.255.255.0.342 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Triggering the Auto-Update/Configuration Process
When the Auto-Update/Configuration feature is enabled (in the Auto
Update of Configuration/Image File page), the device automatically attempts
to download a new image or configuration file (under certain circumstances)
using one of the following processes:
• The Auto-Update process is triggered from the USB drive if a USB key in
the USB drive is found.
• The Auto-Configuration process is triggered from the USB drive after the
Auto-Update process completed and the device was rebooted (if a new
image file was loaded), and if the following conditions are fulfilled:
– There is a USB key in the USB drive.
– Force Configuration Download at Next Startup has been enabled by
the boot host dhcp command, or the Startup Configuration file is
empty.
See "Performing Auto-Update from a USB Drive" on page 343.
• The Auto-Update from a TFTP server is triggered if the following
conditions are fulfilled:
– The conditions for a USB Auto-Update are not fulfilled.
– An IP address of a TFTP server is received from a DHCP server.
– A file name is received from DHCP server.
• The Auto-Configuration from a TFTP server is triggered if the following
conditions are fulfilled:
– The conditions for USB Auto-Configuration are not fulfilled.
– The switch as DHCP client received a configuration file name or a
TFTP URL.
– Force Configuration Download at Next Startup enabled by the boot
host dhcp command, or, the Startup Configuration file is empty.
See "Preparations for Using Auto Configuration from a TFTP Server" on
page 345.
NOTES:
• DHCP client never triggers the Auto-Update process from a TFTP server
after attempting (whether successfully or not) to auto-update/configure
configuration/image file from the USB drive. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 343
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• If the auto process involved setting the IP address of the device from the
setup file, the auto process from the TFTP server can be triggered.
• If the USB drive contains a setup file, but that setup file does not include a
line that can be used for the current device, the DHCP client is able to
trigger the Auto-Update process from TFTP (because the USB process
never started at all).
Automatic DHCP IP Interface Assignment
The user can manually define a DHCP interface in the DHCP IPv4 page.
If the user does not do this, the switch automatically creates a DHCP
interface on the VLAN with the lowest VLAN ID that does not have an IP
address defined on it after boot if both of the following conditions are
fulfilled:
• There is no DHCP IP interface.
• There is a VLAN without an IP address.
Preparations for Using Auto Update/Configuration from a USB Drive
Before Auto-Update/Configuration from a USB drive can be performed, the
following steps must be performed:
1. Enable Auto-Update/Configuration in the Auto Update of
Configuration/Image File page.
2. (Optional) Create a line in the setup file for this device containing the
required options and load it on the USB key.
3. Load configuration/image files on the USB key as required.
4. Insert the USB key in the USB drive and reboot the device.
Performing Auto-Update from a USB Drive
When Auto-Update is initiated from a USB drive, the following steps are
performed:
1. Locate the correct setup file—The USB drive is searched for a setup file.
One of the following can occur:
– Setup file is not found—The root folder of the USB is searched for an
image files (with .ros extension).
• The image file with the most recent version is loaded into the
image file if the versions are different.344 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• If a new image file was loaded, the device is rebooted.
• The USB drive is searched for a configuration file (.text
extension). If there is more than one configuration file, the file
named powerconnect.text is loaded (if it is not found the process
is stopped).
– One or more setup files are found—If a single setup file is found, it is
used; if several files are found, the file powerconnect.setup is used. If
no setup file with this name is found, the process is stopped.
2. Find the line in the setup file relevant to the device—When the correct
setup file is found, it is searched for a line relevant to the device, as
follows:
– The setup file is searched for a line with format A or B in which there
is a match to the device's MAC address. If such line is found, and its
format is valid (the field is empty), the line is applied.
– If no line for the specific device was found, the setup file is searched
for valid lines with formats C or D. The first line found is applied.
3. Apply the correct line—When the correct line in the setup file is found,
it is applied, as follows:
– If the line contains an IP address and IP mask, the IP address is
configured on the default VLAN.
– If the line contains an image file and its version differs from the
current image file version, the USB image file is loaded and the switch
is rebooted.
– If a new image file was loaded, it is loaded onto all units in the stack.
– If the line contains a configuration file, the configuration file is
appended to running configuration file.
4. Mark the flag in the applied line—When the line is applied (successfully
or not), its flag is set, as follows:
– If the line contains an IP address and IP mask (format C or D), the IP
address is configured on the default VLAN and the line is marked as
"in-use". This ensures that the line is not used for another device.
– If the line was not applied successfully, for one of the following
reasons, the line is marked as "invalid" and a SYSLOG message is sent.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 345
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• The configuration file specified by the line does not exist on the
USB key or is corrupted.
• The image file specified by the line does not exist on the USB key
or is corrupted.
– If parsing of the line failed for some other reason, the line is ignored
and a SYSLOG message is sent.
NOTE: When both Auto-Update and Auto-Configuration are performed, the image
file is loaded first, the device is booted and then the configuration file is loaded.
Preparations for Using Auto Configuration from a TFTP Server
The Auto-Update/Configuration feature enables configuring the device from
a configuration file found on the TFTP server.
Two methods may be used:
• One-file Read, described in "Auto Configuration (One File Read Method)"
on page 345. This method is used if a configuration file is found on the
TFTP server.
• Multi-file Read, described in "Auto Configuration (Multi File Read
Method)" on page 346. This method is used if a configuration file name is
not found on the DHCP server, or the configuration file is not found on
the TFTP server.
Auto Configuration (One File Read Method)
This method requires the following preparations on the DHCP and TFTP
servers:
• TFTP Server
Place a configuration file, for example config.txt in the main directory.
This file can be created by copying a configuration file from a device.
When the device is booted this becomes the Running configuration file.
• DHCP Server
– Configure the DHCP server with option 67 and the name of the
configuration file on the TFTP server (for example, config.txt).
– Configure the DHCP server with option -20 or 66. This is the IP
address of the TFTP server.346 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Device - On the device, one of the following cases may exist:
– If Configuration Auto-Config is selected, the device is configured
with the configuration file on the TFTP server only if the Startup
configuration file is empty.
– If Force Configuration Download at Next Startup is selected, the
device is configured with the configuration file on the TFTP server
whether the Startup configuration file is not empty or not.
Auto Configuration (Multi File Read Method)
If the one-file method has failed and the TFTP Server IP address has been
provided by the DHCP Server, the switch applies the multi-file method to
download the configuration file. The following steps are performed by the
switch:
• The switch gets the hostname, as described below.
– If the hostname was provided by the DHCP server, this hostname is
used.
– If the hostname has not been provided by a DHCP server, and if the
user has configured the sysName variable, its value is used as a
hostname.
– If neither of the above occurred, the switch uses the fp-net.cfg
Filename List on the TFTP server. Each file in this list is a text file
containing commands, each of which:
• Occupies one line.
• Has the following format: ip host hostname ip-addr. Each line
maps an IP address to a hostname. When the switch identifies its
own IP address in this list, the hostname associated with it is used.
• The switch tries to download a configuration file with the following names:
– hostname-config
– hostname.cfg if the previous file does not exist
– host.cfg if the previous files do not existDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 347
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Preparations for Firmware Image Download from TFTP
The image file download consists of the following steps:
• The switch downloads the Indirect Image File and extracts from it the
name of the image file.
Note: If the size of the image name bigger than 160 octets only the first
160 octets will be used
• If the image file version differs from the current image file version, then
the image file is loaded and the switch is rebooted.
The preparations on the DHCP and TFTP servers require the following:
• TFTP Server
– Create a sub directory in the main directory. Place a software image
file in it.
– Create an indirect file that contains a path and the name of the
software version (for example indirect-contax.txt that contains
contax\contax-version.ros).
– Copy this file to the TFTP server’s main directory
• DHCP Server
– Configure the DHCP server with option -20 or 66. This is the IP
address of the TFTP server.
– Configure the DHCP server with option 125. Enter the following
information:
• A2-02-00-00 — Enterprise Number 674 (Dell PowerConnet 55xx
value). It should be written from right to left. 674=02 a2
• 15 — Data Length
• 01 — Sub option code 1 (Dell PowerConnet 55xx value)
• 13 — Sub option length
• Conversion of the file name (in the above example: conversion of
indirect-contax.txt from ASCII to HEX - 69-6E-64-69-72-65-63-
74-2D-63-6F-6E-74-61-78-2E-74-78-74348 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Auto Update Configuration through the GUI
To set the auto update and configuration parameters:
. NOTE: For the automatic options in this page to work the following must be
implemented:
• Since Auto-Config depends on retrieving information from a DHCP server, the
startup configuration needs to include a DHCP IP interface. The device is
defined as a DHCP client, as described in "DHCP IPv4 Interface" on page 214.
After reboot, this command is not saved in the Startup configuration.
• Preparations described above must be completed on the DHCP server and
TFTP servers.
1 Click System > File Management > Auto Update of
Configuration/Image File in the tree view to display the Auto Update of
Configuration/Image File page.
Figure 9-54. Auto Update of Configuration/Image File
The auto-update-configuration options are displayed.
2 Modify the auto-update configuration parameters as required:
– Configuration Auto-Config (boot host auto-config)— Enable/disable
automatic download of the configuration parameters to the Running
Configuration file. By default, this occurs only if the Startup
Configuration file is empty.
– Firmware Auto-Update (boot host auto-update)— Enable/disable
automatic download of the image file. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 349
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Force Configuration Download at Next Startup (boot host dhcp) —
Enable/disable the Configuration Auto Update option to work even if
the Startup Configuration file is not empty.
– Auto-Copy Running Configuration to Startup Configuration After
Download (boot host auto-save)— Enable/disable the Running
Configuration file to be automatically copied to the Startup
Configuration file after downloading the Running Configuration file.
Auto Update Configuration Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the Auto Update of Configuration/Image File page.
Table 9-63. Auto Update of Configuration/Image File CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
boot host auto-config
no boot host auto-config
Enables the support of autoconfiguration via DHCP.
Use the no form of this command to
disable DHCP auto configuration.
boot host auto-update
no boot host auto-update
Enables the support of auto-update via
DHCP.
Use the no form of this command to
disable DHCP auto configuration
boot host dhcp
no boot host dhcp
Forces the mechanism used to
download a configuration file at the
next system startup.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the host configuration file to the
default.
boot host auto-save
no boot host auto-save
Enables automatic saving of Running
configuration in Startup configuration
after download.
Use the no form of this command
restore default behavior
show boot Shows the status of the IP DHCP Auto
Config process.350 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI command to view the Auto-Update
status:
The following is an example of the CLI command to configure auto-update
on the switch:
console# show boot
Auto Config
-----------
Config Download via DHCP: enabled
Next Boot Config Download via DHCP: force
Auto Update
-----------
Image Download via DHCP: enabled
console# configure
console(config)# boot host auto-save
console(config)# interface vlan 1
console(config-if)# ip address dhcp
console(config-if)# 01-Oct-2006 15:19:51 %BOOTP_DHCP_CL-WDHCPIPCANDIDATE: The device is waiting for IP address
verification on interface Vlan 1 , IP 10.5.225.47, mask
255.255.255.224, DHCP server 10.5.224.25
01-Oct-2006 15:20:03 %BOOTP_DHCP_CL-I-DHCPCONFIGURED: The
device has been configured on interface Vlan 1 , IP
10.5.225.47, mask 255.255.255.224, DHCP server 10.5.224.25
01-Oct-2006 15:20:03 %COPY-I-FILECPY: Files Copy - source
URL tftp://10.5.224.4/33.txt destination URL runningconfig
01-Oct-2006 15:20:03 %COPY-N-TRAP: The copy operation was
completed successfully
01-Oct-2006 15:20:03 %COPY-I-FILECPY: Files Copy - source
URL running-config destination URL flash://startup-config
01-Oct-2006 15:20:10 %COPY-N-TRAP: The copy operation was
completed successfullyDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 351
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
File Download
Software and configuration files can be downloaded from an external device
to the switch:
• To download from a USB port or when management computer uses HTTP
• To download files using TFTP
To download from a USB port or when management computer uses HTTP
1 Click System > File Management > File Download in the tree view to
display the File Download page.
Figure 9-55. File Download
2 For HTTP, enter the IP Format fields for the HTTP server IP address.
– Supported IP Format — Select whether IPv4 or IPv6 format is
supported.
– IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies
the type of static address supported. The possible options are:
• Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used
for communication on the same network only.
• Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable
from different subnets.352 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local
address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options
are:
• VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured.
• ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP
tunnel.
3 Select a Firmware/Configuration option. The possible options are:
– Firmware Download — A firmware file is downloaded.
– Configuration Download — A configuration file is downloaded.
4 Select to download firmware or a configuration file via a USB port or
HTTP in Download Protocol.
5 If the Firmware Download option was selected, enter the following:
– Source File Name (1-64 characters) — The file to be downloaded.
– Destination File Type — The destination file type to which the file is
downloaded. The possible options are:
• Software Image — Downloads the Image file. The image file
overwrites the non-active image. It is recommended to designate
that the non-active image becomes the active image after reset,
and then to reset the device following the download. During the
Image file download a dialog box opens that displays the
download progress, and browsing is disabled.
• Boot Code — Downloads the Boot file.
6 If the Configuration Download option was selected, enter the following:
– Server IP Address — Enter the IP address of the server.
– Source File Name (1-64 Characters) — Enter the source file name.
– Destination File Name — Select the destination file to which the
configuration file is downloaded. The possible options are:
• Running Configuration — Check to download commands into
the Running Configuration file. The current file is overwritten.
• Startup Configuration — Check to download commands into the
Startup Configuration file. The current file is overwritten.
• New File Name (1-64 Characters) — Check to copy commands
into a file in flash memory. Enter the filename.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 353
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
7 Click Activate to start the download process.
To download files using TFTP
1 Click System > File Management > File Download in the tree view to
display the File Download page.
Figure 9-56. File Download
2 Enter the IP Format fields for the TFTP server IP address.
– Supported IP Format — Select whether IPv4 or IPv6 format is
supported.
– IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies
the type of static address supported. The possible options are:
• Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used
for communication on the same network only.354 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable
from different subnets.
– Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local
address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options
are:
• VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured.
• ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP
tunnel.
3 Select a Firmware/Configuration option. The possible options are:
– Firmware Download — A firmware file is downloaded.
– Configuration Download — A configuration file is downloaded.
4 Select to download firmware or a configuration file via a TFTP server in
Download Protocol.
5 If the Firmware Download option was selected, enter the following:
– Server IP Address — The IP address of the server from which the
firmware file is downloaded.
– Source File Name (1-64 characters) — The file to be downloaded.
– Destination File Type — The destination file type to which the file is
downloaded. The possible options are:
• Software Image — Downloads the Image file. The image file
overwrites the non-active image. It is recommended to designate
that the non-active image becomes the active image after reset,
and then to reset the device following the download. During the
Image file download a dialog box opens that displays the
download progress. The window closes automatically when the
download is complete.
• Boot Code — Downloads the Boot file.
6 If the Configuration Download option was selected, enter the following:
– Server IP Address — The TFTP server IP address from which the
configuration files are downloaded.
– Source File Name (1-64 characters) — The configuration file to be
downloaded. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 355
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Destination File Name — The destination file to which the
configuration file is downloaded. The possible options are:
• Running Configuration — Check to download commands into
the Running Configuration file. The current file is overwritten.
• Startup Configuration — Check to download commands into the
Startup Configuration file. The current file is overwritten.
• New File Name (1-64 characters) — Check to download
commands into a configuration backup file. Enter the filename.
7 Click Activate to start the download process.
Downloading Files Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the File Download page.
The following is an example of the CLI command:
NOTE: Each exclamation mark (!) indicates that ten packets were successfully
transferred.
File Upload
Software and configuration files can be uploaded to an external device.
• To upload from a USB port or when management computer uses HTTP
• To upload a file or image using TFTP
Table 9-64. File Download CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
copy source-url destinationurl
Copies files from a source to a
destination.
console# copy tftp://10.6.6.64/pp.txt startup-config
....!
Copy: 575 bytes copied in 00:00:06 [hh:mm:ss]
01-Jan-2000 06:41:55 %COPY-W-TRAP:
The copy operation was completed successfully 356 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following methods can be used:
• To upload from a USB port or when management computer uses HTTP
• To upload a file or image using TFTP
To upload from a USB port or when management computer uses HTTP
1 Click System > File Management > File Upload in the tree view to
display the File Upload page.
Figure 9-57. File Upload
2 Configuration Upload is selected automatically.
3 Select to upload a configuration file when the management computer is
using HTTP or from a USB port in Download Protocol.
4 Enter the fields:
– Transfer File Name — The configuration file to which the
configuration is uploaded. The possible options are:
• Running Configuration — Uploads the Running Configuration
file.
• Startup Configuration — Uploads the Startup Configuration file.
5 Click Activate to start the upload process. A message will be displayed
asking where for the path of the destination file.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 357
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To upload a file or image using TFTP
1 Click System > File Management > File Upload in the tree view to
display the File Upload page.
Figure 9-58. File Upload
2 Enter the IP Format fields for the TFTP server IP address.
– Supported IP Format — Select whether IPv4 or IPv6 format is
supported.
– IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies
the type of static address supported. The possible options are:
• Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used
for communication on the same network only.
• Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable
from different subnets.358 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local
address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options
are:
• VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured.
• ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP
tunnel.
3 Select one of the options:
– Firmware Upload — A firmware file is uploaded.
– Configuration Upload — A configuration file is uploaded.
4 Select to upload firmware or a configuration file via a TFTP server in
Download Protocol.
5 If Firmware Upload was selected, enter:
– TFTP Server IP Address — The TFTP server IP address to which the
software image is uploaded.
– Destination File Name (1-64 Characters) — The file name to which
the file is uploaded.
6 If Configuration Upload was selected, enter:
– TFTP Server IP Address — The TFTP server IP address to which the
configuration file is uploaded.
– Destination File Name (1-64 Characters) — The configuration file
name/path to which the file is uploaded.
– Transfer File Name — The configuration file that is uploaded. The
possible options are:
• Running Configuration — Uploads the Running Configuration
file.
• Startup Configuration — Uploads the Startup Configuration file.
• User-defined Files —Uploads the selected file. A user-defined
file is only displayed in this list if one was previously created by a
user, for example, if the user copied the running configuration file
to a user-defined configuration file called BACKUP-SITE-1, the
BACKUP-SITE-1 configuration file is displayed in the list and can
be selected.
7 Click Activate to start the upload process.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 359
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Uploading Files Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the File Upload page.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 9-65. File Upload CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
copy source-url destination-url Copies any file from a source to a
destination.
console# copy image tftp://10.6.6.64/uploaded.ros
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
Copy: 4234656 bytes copied in 00:00:33 [hh:mm:ss]
01-Jan-2000 07:30:42 %COPY-W-TRAP:
The copy operation was completed successfully360 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Active Images
There are two firmware images, Image1 and Image2, stored on the switch.
One of these images is identified as the active image, and the other is
identified as the inactive image. The switch boots from the active image.
You can switch the inactive image to the active image, and then reboot the
switch.
The active image file for each unit in the stack can be individually selected.
To select the image file to be used after reset:
1 Click System > File Management > Active Images in the tree view to
display the Active Images page.
Figure 9-59. Active Images
The following fields are displayed:
– Unit ID — ID of the unit.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 361
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Active Image — The name of the image file that is currently active on
the unit in the stack.
– After Reset — The image file that will be active on the unit in the
stack after the device is reset. The possible options are:
• Image 1 — Activates Image file 1 after the device is reset.
• Image 2 — Activates Image file 2 after the device is reset.
2 Click Apply to select the image file to be used after reset in After Reset.
Working with the Active Image File Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing fields
displayed in the Active Images.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Copy Files
Firmware and configuration files can be copied between units in the stack.
Use the Copy Files page to perform the following:
• Copy the firmware on the Master unit to another unit in the stack.
• Copy the master Running Configuration file to the master sTartup
Configuration file, or copy the configuration to a user-defined
configuration file.
• Copy the master Startup Configuration file to a backup file on the Flash
file system or to a USB if available.
Table 9-66. Active Image CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
boot system {image-
1|image-2} [switch
number|all]
Sets the system image that the device loads at
startup.
show version [unit
unit]
Displays version information for the system
console# boot system image-1 all362 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Copy a configuration file to the Running Configuration file. It is
important to be aware that copying a file to the Running Configuration
file actually executes these commands, so some of the configuration
commands might fail (for example when trying to create a VLAN that is
already defined on the system).
• Restore configuration factory defaults.
To copy files:
1 Click System > File Management > Copy Files in the tree view to display
the Copy Files page.
Figure 9-60. Copy Files
2 To copy the firmware from the Master unit to the Backup Master unit or to
all other units, select Copy Master Firmware and select the options:
– Source— Select either the current Master unit’s software image file or
boot code file.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 363
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Destination Unit — Check to copy the firmware to either the Backup
Master unit or all units in the stack.
3 To copy the Running Configuration file of the Master unit to the Startup
Configuration file of the Master unit or vice versa, select Copy
Configuration Firmware and enter the options:
– Source — Select either the Running Configuration or the Startup
Configuration file.
– Destination — Select either the Running Configuration, Startup
Configuration file or user-created flash files, depending on the source
configuration file.
or
– New File Name (1-64 characters) — To copy the source file to a
user-named file, enter the name of a file. If this option is selected,
check where the file is stored: Flash or USB.
4 Select Restore Configuration Factory Defaults to replace the current
configuration settings by the factory configuration default settings.
5 Click Activate to initiate the selected process.
Copying Files Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for performing actions
provided by the Copy Files page.
Table 9-67. Copy Files CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
copy source-url destination-url Copies any file from a source to a
destination.
delete startup-config Deletes the startup-config file.
delete url Deletes a file from the FLASH
memory device.364 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console# delete startup-config
Delete startup-config [y/n]? y
console# 01-Oct-2006 16:10:51 %FILE-I-DELETE: File Delete -
file URL flash://startup-config
console# copy running-config startup-config
Overwrite file [startup-config] ?[Yes/press any key for
no]....01-Oct-2006 16:11
:47 %COPY-I-FILECPY: Files Copy - source URL running-config
destination URL flash://startup-config
01-Oct-2006 16:12:01 %COPY-N-TRAP:
The copy operation was completed successfully
Copy succeededDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 365
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
File System
Use the File System page to view information about files currently stored on
the system, including file names, file sizes, files modifications, and file
permissions. The files system permits managing up to two user-defined
backup configuration files.
To view information about files:
1 Click System > File Management > File System in the tree view to
display the File System page.
Figure 9-61. File System
2 Select the File Location. The possible options are:
– Flash — Files in flash memory are displayed.
– USB — Files on the USB device are displayed. 366 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following information is displayed for all files in the system:
– File Name — The name of the file currently stored in the file
management system.
– Size — The file size.
– Modified — The date the file was last modified.
– Permission — The permission type assigned to the file.
3 The following system-wide information is displayed if Flash was selected:
– Total Bytes — The total amount of the space currently being used.
– Free Bytes — The remaining amount of space currently free. Total
bytes and free bytes are not available when selecting USB.
4 To rename a file, click its Rename button. Change the File Name.
Managing Files Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI command for viewing system files.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 9-68. File Management CLI Command
CLI Command Description
dir [flash://|usb://] Display list of files on a flash file system
rename url new-url Renames a file
delete url Deletes a file
console# dir flash://
Directory of flash:
File Name Permission Flash Size Data Size Modified
-------------- ---------- ---------- --------- -----------------------
1.cfg rw 524160 14065 05-Oct-2006 21:20:36
2.cfg rw 524160 14065 7-Oct-2006 09:11:07
aaafile.prv -- 65520 -- 03-Oct-2006 15:45:41
dhcpdb.sys r- 65520 -- 01-Oct-2006 19:22:49
Total size of flash: 16121856 bytes
Free size of flash: 524768 bytesDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 367
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Stack Management
This section describes how to manage the stack.
It consists of the following topics:
• Stack Management Overview
• Stack Unit ID
• Versions
• Reset
• Unit Identification (Location)
Stack Management Overview
A stack consists of up to eight units, with support for up to 400 network ports.
Unit 1 usually acts as the stack master and Unit 2 is the backup master. All
other units act as slaves.
The entire stack, without regard to the stack topology or the number of units
in the stack, can be managed as a single switch.
For more information about stacking, see "Stacking Overview" on page 45.
The stacking pages described in this section enable the following actions:
• Switching from the Master unit to the Backup Master unit
• Changing unit IDs
• Viewing hardware and software versions on each unit
• Resetting either a unit or all the units in the stack
• Setting the Location LED on a unit(s)
Stack Unit ID
Use the Stack Unit ID pages to:
• Switch stack control from the Master unit to the Backup Master unit
• Change unit IDs, or enable them to be automatically numbered by the
system368 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To switch from the Backup Master unit to the Master Unit or set unit IDs:
1 Click System > Stack Management > Stack Unit ID in the tree view to
display the Stack Unit ID page.
Figure 9-62. Stack Unit ID
2 Enter the fields:
– Switch Stack Control from Unit 1 to Unit 2 — Check this field to
make unit 2 the Master unit.
– Unit ID After Reset — Select Auto if you want the system to assign
the unit ID after reset. Select a number to assign the unit an ID
manually.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 369
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Managing Stacks Using the CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields
displayed in the Stack Unit ID page.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 9-69. Stack Unit ID CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
stack master unit
no stack master
Makes the unit specified be the Master unit.
Use the no version to restore the default
Master unit.
switch current-unit-number
renumber new-unit-number
Changes the unit ID of a specific unit.
console(config)# stack master unit 2
console(config)# switch 3 renumber 6370 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Versions
To view the hardware and software versions currently running on the switch:
• Click System > Stack Management > Versions in the tree view to display
the Versions page.
Figure 9-63. Versions
The following fields are displayed:
– Unit ID — The unit number for which the device versions are
displayed.
– Software Version — The current software version running on the
device.
– Boot Version — The current Boot version running on the device.
– Hardware Version — The current device hardware version.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 371
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Displaying Device Versions Using the CLI
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing fields
displayed in the Versions page.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Reset
Use the Reset page to reset the device from a remote location.
To reset a unit in the stack:
1 If changes were made to the Running Configuration file, save them to the
Startup Configuration file before resetting the device. This prevents the
current device configuration from being lost. For more information about
saving Configuration files, see "Copy Files" on page 361.
Table 9-70. Versions CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show version [unit-id] Displays system version information for a
unit or for the whole stack.
console> show version 2
Unit SW Version Boot Version HW Version
---- ------------- ------------- ------------
2 1.0.0.8 1.0.0.02 00.00.01372 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
2 Click System > Stack Management > Reset in the tree view to display the
Reset page.
Figure 9-64. Reset
3 In the Reset Unit ID field, select either the unit ID to be reset or Stack to
reset all the units in the stack.
Resetting the Device Using the CLI
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for performing a reset of
the device via the CLI:
Table 9-71. Reset CLI Command
CLI Command Description
reload [slot unit]
Reloads the operating system of a single unit or of
all the units.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 373
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI command:
Unit Identification (Location)
The Location LED on a unit helps you to discover a specific unit, or indeed,
all the units in a stack.
To light up the Location LED:
1 Click System > Stack Management > Unit Identification in the tree
view to display the Unit Identification page.
Figure 9-65. Unit Identification
console# reload
You haven't saved your changes. Are you sure you want to
continue? (Y/N)[N] Y
This command will reset the whole system and disconnect
your current session. Do you want to continue? (Y/N)[N]374 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
2 Enter the fields:
– Identify Unit ID —Select a unit. This unit’s Location and Power LED
start blinking. Select All to cause the Location LEDs in all the units in
the stack to light up.
– Identification Duration (2-60) —Enter a time interval. The Location
and Power LED light up for this period of time.
Setting the Location LED Using the CLI
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the Location
LED:
The following is an example of the CLI command:
Table 9-72. Location LED CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
system light [unit unitnumber] [duration seconds]
system light stop
Lights the location LED on a specific unit.
Use the no form of this command to
turn off the light.
console# system light unit 1Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 375
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
sFlow
This section describes sFlow monitoring of traffic.
It contains the following sections:
• sFlow Overview
• Workflow
• sFlow Receiver Settings
• sFlow Interface Settings
• sFlow Statistics
sFlow Overview
The sFlow feature enables collecting statistics using the sFlow sampling
technology, based on sFlow V5.
This sampling technology is embedded within switches and routers. It
provides the ability to continuously monitor traffic flows on some or all the
interfaces, simultaneously.
The sFlow monitoring system consists of an sFlow agent (embedded in a
switch or router or in a stand alone probe) and a central data collector, known
as the sFlow receiver.
The sFlow agent uses sampling technology to capture traffic and statistics
from the device it is monitoring. sFlow datagrams are used to forward the
sampled traffic and statistics to an sFlow receiver for analysis.
sFlow V5 defines:
• How traffic is monitored.
• The sFlow MIB that controls the sFlow agent.
• The format of the sample data used by the sFlow agent when forwarding
data to a central data collector. The device provides support for two types
of sFlow sampling: flow sampling and counters sampling. The following
counters sampling is performed according to sFlow V5 (if supported by
the interface):
– Generic interface counters (RFC 2233)
– Ethernet interface counters (RFC 2358)376 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Workflow
By default, flow and counter sampling are disabled.
To enable sFlow sampling:
1 Set the IP address of a receiver (also known as a collector) for sFlow
statistics. Use the sFlow Receivers Settings page for this.
2 Enable flow and/or counter sampling, direct the samples to a receiving
interface, and configure the average sampling rate. Use the sFlow
Interface Settings pages for this.
3 View and clear the sFlow statistics counters. Use the sFlow Statistics page
for this.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 377
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
sFlow Receiver Settings
To set the sFlow receiver parameters:
1 Click System > sFlow > sFlow Receivers Settings in the tree view to
display the sFlow Receivers Settings: Summary page.
Figure 9-66. sFlow Receivers Settings: Summary
The sflow parameters are displayed.
2 To add a receiver (sflow analyzer), click Add and select one of the
pre-defined sampling definition indices in Index.
3 Enter the receiver’s address fields:
– Supported IP Format — Select whether IPv4 or IPv6 format is
supported. 378 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies
the type of static address supported. The possible options are:
• Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used
for communication on the same network only.
• Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable
from different subnets.
– Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local
address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options
are:
• None — Disable the ISATAP tunnel.
• ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP
tunnel.
– IP Address — Enter the receiver’s IP address.
4 Enter the fields:
– Syslog Port Number — Port to which SYSLOG message are sent.
– Maximum Header Size (Bytes) — Maximum number of bytes that
can be sent to the receiver in a single sample datagram (frame).
Adding an sFlow Receiver Using the CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for adding an sFlow
receiver.
Table 9-73. sflow Receiver CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
sflow receiver index {ipv4-
address|ipv6-address|hostname}
[port port] [max-datagram-size
bytes]
no sflow receiver index
Defines an sFlow receiver.
Use the no form of this command to
remove the definition of the receiver.
show sflow configuration
[port_id]
Displays the sFlow configuration for
ports that are enabled for Flow
sampling or Counters sampling.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 379
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console(config)# sflow receiver 2 1.1.1.1 port 6343
console# show sflow configuration
Receivers
Index IP Address Port Max Datagram Size
----- -------------------- -------- ----------------
1 0.0.0.0 6343 1400
2 172.16.1.2 6343 1400
3 0.0.0.0 6343 1400
4 0.0.0.0 6343 1400
5 0.0.0.0 6343 1400
6 0.0.0.0 6343 1400
7 0.0.0.0 6343 1400
8 0.0.0.0 6343 1400
Interfaces
Interface Flow Counters Max Header Collector Index
Sampling Sampling Interval Size Sampling Counters
--------- --------- ----------------- ------------ ----------- ---------
gi1/0/1 1/2048 60 sec 128 1 1
gi1/0/2 1/4096 Disabled 128 0 2380 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
sFlow Interface Settings
To sample datagrams or counters from a port, the port must be associated
with a receiver. sFlow port settings can be configured only after a receiver has
been defined in the sFlow Receiver Settings pages.
To enable sampling and configure the port from which to collect the sFlow
information:
1 Click System > sFlow > sFlow Interface Settings in the tree view to
display the sFlow Interface Settings: Summary page.
Figure 9-67. sFlow Interface Settings: Summary
The sflow interface settings are displayed.
2 To associate an sFlow receiver with a port, click Add, and enter the fields:
– Interface — Select the unit/port from which information is collected.
– Flow Sampling — Enable/disable flow sampling. Flow sampling
cannot be disabled if Counters Sampling is disabled.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 381
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Flow Sampling Average Sampling Rate(1024–1073741823) — If x is
entered, a flow sample will be taken for each x frames.
– Flow Sampling Receiver Index — Select one of the indices that was
defined in the sFlow Receivers Settings pages.
– Flow Sampling Maximum Header Size (20–256) — Maximum
number of bytes that should be copied from a sampled packet.
– Counters Sampling — Enable/disable counters sampling. Flow
sampling cannot be disabled if Flow Sampling is disabled
– Counters Sampling Interval (15–86400) — If x is entered, this
specifies that a counter sample will be taken for each x seconds.
– Counters Sampling Receiver Index — Select one of the indices that
was defined in the sFlow Receivers Settings pages.
Configuring sFlow Interfaces Using the CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring sFlow
interfaces.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 9-74. sflow Interface CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
sflow flow-sampling rate
receiver-index [max-header-size
bytes]
no sflow flow-sampling
Enables sFlow Flow sampling and
configure the average sampling rate
of a specific port.
Use the no form of this command to
disable Flow sampling.
sflow counters-sampling interval
receiver-index
no sflow counters-sampling
Enable sFlow counters sampling and
to configure the maximum interval of
a specific port.
Use the no form of this command to
disable sFlow Counters sampling.
console(config)# interface gi2/0/3
console(config-if)#sflow flow-sampling 1024 1 382 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
sFlow Statistics
To view sFlow statistics:
1 Click System > sFlow > sFlow Statistics in the tree view to display the
sFlow Statistics page.
Figure 9-68. sFlow Statistics
The following sflow statistics per interface are displayed:
– Interface — Port for which sample was collected.
– Packets Sampled — Number of packets sampled.
– Datagrams Sent to Receiver — Number of sFlow sampling packets
sent.
2 Click Clear Statistics to clear the counters.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 383
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Viewing sFlow Statistics Using the CLI
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing sFlow
statistics:
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 9-75. sFlow Statistics CLI Command
CLI Command Description
show sflow statistics
[port-id]
Displays sFlow statistics for ports that are
enabled for Flow sampling or Counters
sampling.
clear sflow statistics
[port-id]
Clears sFlow statistics for ports that are
enabled for Flow sampling or Counters
sampling.
console # show sflow statistics
Total sFlow datagrams sent to collectors: 100
Interface Packets Sampled Datagrams Sent to Collector
--------- ------- ------------------------------------
gi1/0/1 30 50
gi1/0/2 10 10
gi2/0/1 0 10
gi2/0/2 0 0384 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
10
Ports
This section describes how to configure port functionality.
It contains the following topics:
• Overview
• Jumbo Frames
• Green Ethernet Configuration
• Protected Ports
• Port Profile
• Port Configuration
• LAG Configuration
• Storm Control
• Port MirroringDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 385
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Overview
This section includes a description of port features and describes the
following:
• Auto-Negotiation
• MDI/MDIX
• Flow Control
• Back Pressure
• Port Default Settings
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-negotiation enables automatic detection of speed, duplex mode and
flow control on all switching 10/100/1000BaseT ports. Auto-negotiation is
enabled on all ports by default.
Auto-negotiation is a mechanism established between two link partners to
enable a port to advertise its transmission rate, duplex mode and flow control
abilities to its partner. Both ports then operate at the highest common
denominator.
If connecting a Network Interface Card (NIC) that does not support autonegotiation or is not set to auto-negotiation, both the device switching port
and the NIC must be manually set to the same speed and duplex mode.
If the station, on the other side of the link, attempts to auto-negotiate with a
device 100BaseT port that is configured to full duplex, the auto-negotiation
results in the station attempting to operate in half duplex.
MDI/MDIX
The device supports auto-detection of straight-through and crossed cables on
all 10/100/1000BaseT ports. This feature is part of auto-negotiation and is
enabled when Auto-negotiation is enabled.
When the MDI/MDIX (Media Dependent Interface with Crossover) is
enabled, the automatic correction of errors in cable selection is possible, thus
making the distinction between a straight-through cable and a crossover cable 386 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
irrelevant. The standard wiring for end stations is known as MDI (Media
Dependent Interface), and the standard wiring for hubs and switches is known
as MDIX.
Flow Control
The device supports 802.3x flow control for ports configured to Full Duplex
mode. By default, this feature is enabled on all ports, and it can be disabled
per port.
Flow control creates a lossless link with no packet loss. The flow control
mechanism enables the receiving side to signal to the transmitting side that
transmission must temporarily be halted to prevent buffer overflow. This
signaling is done by sending PAUSE frames. The ports that receives pause
frames stops transmitting traffic.
Flow control on the device works in Receive-Only mode, meaning that the
interfaces with enabled flow control receive PAUSE frames, but do not send
them.
When flow control is enabled, the system buffers are allocated per port so
that if the buffers of one port are consumed, other ports will still have their
free buffers.
Back Pressure
The device supports back pressure for ports configured to Half Duplex mode.
By default, this feature is disabled, and it can be enabled per port. The
back-pressure mechanism prevents the sender from transmitting additional
traffic temporarily. The receiver may occupy a link so it becomes unavailable
for additional traffic.
Port Default Settings
Table 10-1 describes the port default settings.
Table 10-1. Port Default Settings
Function Default Setting
Port speed and mode 10/100/1000 BaseT copper: auto-negotiation
SFP+1000/10G Mbps full duplex, auto discovery
Port forwarding state EnabledDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 387
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Port tagging No tagging
Flow Control On
Back Pressure Off
Table 10-1. Port Default Settings (Continued)
Function Default Setting388 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Jumbo Frames
Jumbo frames are frames of up to 10 Kb in size. If Jumbo frames are not
enabled, the system supports a packet size of up to 1,632 bytes.
To enable jumbo frames:
1 Click Switching > Ports > Jumbo Frames in the tree view to display the
Jumbo Frames page.
Figure 10-1. Jumbo Frames
The current jumbo frames setting is displayed
2 Enable/disable jumbo frames in the New Setting (after reset) field.
NOTE: You must save the configuration and reboot the device in order to make jumbo
frames operational.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 389
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring Jumbo Frames Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring Jumbo
frames.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 10-2. Jumbo Frames CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
port jumbo-frame
no port jumbo-frame
Enables jumbo frames on the device.
Use the no form of this command to disable
jumbo frames.
console(config)# port jumbo-frame390 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Green Ethernet Configuration
Green Ethernet is a name of a set of features that are designed to reduce the
power consumption of a device, and so make it environmentally friendly.
The Green Ethernet feature reduces overall power usage in the following
ways:
• Energy Efficient Ethernet — When using EEE, systems on both sides of
the link can disable portions of their functionality and save power during
periods of low link utilization. EEE is a hardware feature that is enabled by
default, and is transparent to users. This feature is defined per port,
regardless of their LAG membership.
• Short-Reach Mode — Power usage is adjusted to the actual cable length.
In this mode, the VCT (Virtual Cable Tester) length test is performed to
measure cable length. If the cable is shorter than a predetermined length,
the switch reduces the power used to send frames over the cable, thus
saving energy. This mode is only supported on RJ45 ports.
Power savings and current power consumption in Short Reach mode can
be monitored. The total amount of saved energy can be viewed as a
percentage of the power that would have been consumed by the physical
interfaces had they not been running in Green Ethernet mode.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 391
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The above two energy saving modes must be enabled globally and then
configured per port.
Green Ethernet Configuration
To configure Green Ethernet settings:
1 Click Switching > Ports > Green Ethernet Configuration in the tree view
to display the Green Ethernet Configuration: Summary page.
Figure 10-2. Green Ethernet Configuration: Summary
2 The amount of energy saved from the last switch reboot is displayed in the
Cumulative Energy Saved field. This value is updated each time there is
an event that affects power saving. Click Reset to reset its value.
3 Enter the fields:
• Energy Efficient Ethernet — Globally enable/disable the Energy
Efficient Ethernet feature.
• Link Short-Reach Energy Saving Mode — Globally enable/disable
Short Reach mode.392 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Current Power Consumption — Displays the current power
consumption.
• Power Savings — Displays the percentage of power saved by running
in Green Ethernet mode.
4 Select a unit in the stack to display its power consumption parameters. Its
ports are displayed along with the following settings.
– Energy Efficient Ethernet
• Oper — Enabled or not on the port
• Remote Peer —Enabled or not on the remote peer
– Short-Reach
• Oper — Enabled or not on the port
• Fault Reason —Reason that short reach is not enabled
– Cable Length (Meter) — Length of cable.
5 Click LLDP Interface Details.
6 Select a unit in the stack. The following is displayed for each port on the
unit:
– Port — Port number.
– Oper — Displays the operational status of Green Ethernet.
– Resolved Tx Timer(μsec) — Integer that indicates the current
Tw_sys_tx is supported by the local system.
– Local Tx Timer(μsec) — Indicates the time (in micro seconds) that
the transmitting link partner waits before it starts transmitting data
after leaving Low Power Idle (LPI mode).
– Resolved Rx Timer(μsec) — Integer that indicates the current
Tw_sys_tx supported by the remote system.
– Local Rx Timer(μsec) — Indicates the time (in micro seconds) that
the receiving link partner requests that the transmitting link partner
waits before transmission of data following Low Power Idle (LPI
mode).
– Remote Tx Timer(μsec) — Indicates the local link partner’s
reflection of the remote link partner’s Tx value.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 393
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Remote Rx Timer(μsec) — Indicates the local link partner’s
reflection of the remote link partner’s Rx value.
Configuring Green Ethernet Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring Green
Ethernet.
Table 10-3. Green Ethernet CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
green-ethernet short-reach
no green-ethernet short-reach
Enables/disables Green Ethernet short
reach mode.
green-ethernet short-reach
force
no green-ethernet short-reach
force
Forces short-reach mode on an
interface.
Use the no form of this command to
return to the default.
green-ethernet short-reach
threshold cable-length
no green-ethernet short-reach
threshold
Set the maximum cable length for
applying short-reach mode.
Use the no form of this command to
return to the default.
green-ethernet power-meter
reset
Resets the power save meter.
eee enable
no eee enable
Enables the EEE mode globally. Can
be used globally or per interface.
Use the no format of the command to
disable the mode.
eee lldp enable
no eee lldp enable
Enables EEE support by LLDP on an
Ethernet port.
Use the no format of the command to
disable the support.
show eee Displays EEE information.394 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Protected Ports
Protected Port Overview
Protected ports provide Layer 2 isolation between interfaces (Ethernet ports
and LAGs) that share the same Broadcast domain (VLAN) with other
interfaces. This can be used to set up a group of ports that receive similar
services.
A protected port does not forward traffic (Unicast, Multicast, or Broadcast) to
any other protected port on the same switch.
A community is a group of protected ports. Protected ports within the same
community can forward traffic to each other.
The following types of ports can be defined:
• Protected Port — Can send traffic only to uplink ports.
• Community Port — A protected port that is associated with a community.
It can send traffic to other protected ports in the same community and to
uplink ports.
• Uplink Port — An uplink port is an unprotected port that can send traffic
to any port.
• Isolated Port — A protected port that does not belong to a community.
Port Protection is independent of all other features and configuration
settings. Two protected ports in a common VLAN cannot communicate with
each other.
Protected Port Restrictions
The following restrictions apply to protected ports:
• When a protected port is placed in a LAG, it loses its protected port
attribute and takes upon itself the LAG's protection attributes. When the
port is removed from the LAG, its attributes are re-applied.
• Mirrored traffic is not subject to protected ports rules.
• Routing is not affected by the protected port forwarding rule, so that if a
packet enters a protected port, it can be routed by the device to another
protected port.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 395
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Protected Port Configuration
To configure protected ports and establish their communities:
1 Click Switching > Ports > Protected Ports in the tree view to display the
Protected Ports: Summary page.
Figure 10-3. Protected Ports: Summary
A summary of all the ports and their statuses is displayed.
2 Click Edit.
3 Select the unit and interface.
4 Enter values for the following fields:
• State — Select Protected/Unprotected to enable/disable port
protection.
• Community — Select the community to which to add the port, or
define the port as Isolated.396 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring Protected Ports Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring
protected ports.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 10-4. Protected Ports CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
switchport protected-port
no switchport protected-port
Isolates Unicast, Multicast, and Broadcast
traffic on a port at Layer 2 from other
protected ports on the same switch.
Use the no form of this command to
disable protection on the port.
switchport community
community
no switchport community
Associates a protected port with a
community
Use the no form of this command to
return to default.
show interfaces protectedports[gigabitethernet|tengiga
bitethernet] port-number
Displays protected ports configuration.
console(config)# interface gi1/0/3
console(config-if)# switchport protected-port
console(config-if)# switchport community 1Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 397
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Port Profile
Port profiles provide a convenient way to save and share a port configuration.
When a port profile, which is a set of CLI commands having a unique name,
is applied to a port, the CLI commands contained within the profile (macro)
are executed and added to the Running Configuration file.
Port profiles can be applied to a specific interface, a range of interfaces, or
globally.
There are two types of port profiles:
• User Defined — Enables the user to bundle configurations, as a port
profile, and then apply it to one or more interfaces at a time. Up to 20
user-defined macros can be supported. These can only be defined through
CLI commands.
• Built-In — Pre-defined macros that cannot be changed or deleted. The
device includes the following built-in macros:
– Global
– Desktop
– Phone
– Switch
– Router
– Wireless Configuration
Before a built-in profile can be applied to an interface, the global profile must
be applied. The global profile enables QoS Advanced mode, sets Advanced
mode parameters, CoS to queue mapping, and DSCP to queue mapping and
defines certain standard ACLs. Use the CLI command show parser macro
name profile-global to display the Global profile contents.398 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To assign a profile to a port:
1 Click Switching > Ports > Port Profile in the tree view to display the Port
Profiles: Summary page.
Figure 10-4. Port Profile: Summary
A summary of all the interfaces and their profiles is displayed.
2 To assign the Global profile to the system, check Run Global Profile.
Apply the global profile before applying a built-in interface profile.
3 To assign a profile to an interface, click Edit.
4 Select a unit/interface and a Assigned Profile. The Profile Description is
displayed.
5 Each profile requires entering various elements of VLAN information.
Enter the fields according to the profile:
– VLAN Port Mode — Displays the port mode applied to ports in the
profile.
– VLAN ID-Untagged (1-4094) — Enter the VLAN for untagged
traffic.
– VLAN ID-Tagged (1-4095) — Enter the VLAN for tagged traffic.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 399
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Native VLAN ID(1-4094) — Enter the VLAN ID used for untagged
traffic to trunk ports, or check None.
The remaining fields on this page are display-only, and describe the port
configuration of the profile. The following fields are described:
Port Security fields:
– Mode — Learning mode. The possible options are:
• Classic Lock — Locks the port using the classic lock mechanism.
The port is immediately locked, regardless of the number of
addresses that have already been learned.
• Limited Dynamic Lock — Locks the port by deleting the
dynamic MAC addresses associated with the port. The port learns
up to the maximum addresses allowed on the port. Both
relearning and aging MAC addresses are enabled.
– Max Entries — Displays the maximum number of MAC addresses
that can be learned on the port.
– Action on Violation — Action to be applied to packets arriving on a
locked port. The possible options are:
• Discard — Discard the packets from any unlearned source.
• Forward — Forward the packets from an unknown source,
without learning the MAC address.
• Shutdown — Discard the packet from any unlearned source, and
shut down the port. Ports remain shutdown until they are
reactivated, or the device is reset.
Spanning Tree fields:
– Point-to-Point Admin Status — Displays whether a point-to-point
links is established. The possible options are:
• Enable — Enables the device to establish a point-to-point link, or
specifies for the device to automatically establish a point-to-point
link. To establish communications over a point-to-point link, the
originating PPP first sends Link Control Protocol (LCP) packets
to configure and test the data link. After a link is established and
optional facilities are negotiated as needed by the LCP, the
originating PPP sends Network Control Protocols (NCP) packets
to select and configure one or more network layer protocols. 400 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
When each of the chosen network layer protocols has been
configured, packets from each network layer protocol can be sent
over the link. The link remains configured for communications
until explicit LCP or NCP packets close the link, or until some
external event occurs. This is the actual switch port link type. It
may differ from the administrative state.
• Disable — Disables point-to-point link.
• Auto — The device automatically establishes a point-to-point
link.
– Fast Link — Displays whether Fast Link mode is enabled for the port.
If this is enabled, the Port State is automatically placed in the
Forwarding statewhen the port is up.
– BPDU Guard — Displays whether BPDU Guard is enabled on the
port.
Miscellaneous fields:
– Policy Name — Displays the name of a policy if one is defined on the
port.
– Auto Negotiation — Displays whether auto-negotiation is enabled on
the port. Auto-Negotiation enables a port to advertise its transmission
rate, duplex mode, and Flow Control abilities to other devices.
6 Click Apply Profile to apply the profile to the specified interface.
Configuring Port Profile Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring port
profiles.
Table 10-5. Port Profiles CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
macro {apply|trace} macro-name
[parameter {value}] [parameter
{value}] [parameter {value}]
Applies a macro to an interface or
traces a macro configuration on an
interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 401
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Sample CLI Scripts
This section provides sample scripts of CLI commands. These particular
actions cannot be performed through the GUI, which only allows applying
built-in macros. These scripts describe how to create macros, display them
and apply them.
The following is a script that creates a global macro.
show parser macro
[{brief|description [interface
[gigabitethernet|tengigabitetherne
t] port-number|name macro-name}]
Displays the parameters for all
configured macros or for one
macro on the switch.
Switch(config) # interface gi1/0/2
Switch(config-if) # macro trace dup
Applying command… ‘duplex full’
Applying command… ‘speed auto’
Switch(config) # interface gi1/0/2
Switch(config-if) # macro apply duplex $DUPLEX full
$SPEED auto
Switch(config-if) # exit
Switch(config) # interface gi1/0/3
Switch(config-if) # macro apply dup
Switch(config-if) # exit
Table 10-6. Create a Global Macro Script
CLI Command Description
console#config
console(config)# macro name interswitch
Enter macro commands one per line. End
with the character '@'.
Create a macro called
interswitch.
Table 10-5. Port Profiles CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description402 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is a script that creates an interface macro.
vlan database
vlan 40-50
@
Enter the commands in
the macro, which create
VLANs 40 through 50.
console(config)# do show parser macro
name interswitch
Display the macro.
console(config)# macro global apply
interswitch
Apply the macro.
Table 10-7. Create an Interface Macro Script
CLI Command Description
console#config
console(config)# interface range gi1/0/1-
24
Enter Interface mode
for ports 1-24 on unit 1.
console(config-if-range)# macro name
access_port
Enter macro commands one per line. End
with the character '@'.
Create a macro called
access_port.
disable spanning-tree
@
Enter the commands in
the macro, disables
spanning tree on the
interfaces.
console(config)# do show parser macro
name access_port
Display the macro.
console(config)# macro global apply
access_port
Apply the macro to
ports 1-24 on unit 1.
Table 10-6. Create a Global Macro Script (Continued)
CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 403
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Port Configuration
If port configuration is modified while the port is a LAG member, the
configuration change is only effective after the port is removed from the
LAG.
To configure a port:
1 Click Switching > Ports > Port Configuration in the tree view to display
the Port Configuration: Summary page.
Figure 10-5. Port Configuration: Summary
All ports on the selected unit and their configuration settings are
displayed.
2 To modify the port settings, click Edit and select a port.
3 Enter the following fields:
– Description (1 - 64 Characters) — Enter a user identification
attached to the port.
– Port Type — Displays the type of port.
– Admin Status — Enable/disable traffic forwarding through the port.
• Up— Traffic is enabled through the port.404 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Down— Traffic is disabled through the port.
– Current Port Status — Displays whether the port is currently
operational or non-operational.
– Re-Activate Suspended Port — Check to reactivate a port if the port
has been disabled through the locked port security option.
– Operational Status — Displays the port operational status. The
possible options are:
• Suspended — Port is currently active, and is not receiving or
transmitting traffic.
• Active — Port is currently active, and is receiving and
transmitting traffic.
• Disable — Port is currently disabled, and is not receiving or
transmitting traffic.
– Admin Speed — Select the configured rate for the port. The port type
determines the available speed setting options. You can designate
Administrative Speed only when port auto-negotiation is disabled.
– Current Port Speed — Displays the actual synchronized port speed
(bps).
– Admin Duplex — Select the port duplex mode (this is only possible if
Auto Negotiation is not enabled). The options are:
• Full — The interface supports transmission between the device
and the client in both directions simultaneously.
• Half — The interface supports transmission between the device
and the client in only one direction at a time.
– Current Duplex Mode — Displays the synchronized port duplex
mode.
– Auto Negotiation — Select to enable auto-negotiation on the port.
Auto-Negotiation enables a port to advertise its transmission rate,
duplex mode, and Flow Control abilities to other devices.
• Energy Efficient Ethernet — Globally enable/disable Energy Efficient
Ethernet and the EEE LLDP advertisement feature.
– Current Auto Negotiation — Displays the current auto-negotiation
setting. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 405
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Admin Advertisement — Check the auto-negotiation setting the port
advertises. The possible options are:
• Max Capability — The port advertises all the options that it can
support.
• 10 Half — The port advertises for a 10 mbps speed port and half
duplex mode setting.
• 10 Full — The port advertises for a 10 mbps speed port and full
duplex mode setting.
• 100 Half — The port advertises for a 100 mbps speed port and
half duplex mode setting.
• 100 Full — The port advertises for a 100 mbps speed port and full
duplex mode setting.
• 1000 Full — The port advertises for a 1000 mbps speed port and
full duplex mode setting.
• 10000 Full — The port advertises for a 10000 mbps speed port
and full duplex mode setting.
– Current Advertisement — Displays the port advertises its speed to its
neighbor port to start the negotiation process. The possible field
values are those specified in the Admin Advertisement field.
– Neighbor Advertisement — Displays the neighboring port’s
advertisement settings. The field values are identical to the Admin
Advertisement field values.
– Back Pressure — Enable/disable Back Pressure mode that is used with
Half Duplex mode to disable ports from receiving messages.
– Current Back Pressure — Displays the current Back Pressure setting.
– Flow Control — Set flow control on the port. The following options
are available:
• Enable/Disable — Enable/disable flow control on the port
(Enabled is the default).
• Auto Negotiation — Enables auto-negotiation of flow control on
the port.
– Current Flow Control — Displays the current Flow Control setting.406 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– MDI/MDIX — Select one of the options that enables the device to
decipher between crossed and uncrossed cables. Hubs and switches
are deliberately wired opposite to the way end stations are wired, so
that when a hub or switch is connected to an end station, a straight
through Ethernet cable can be used, and the pairs are match up
properly. When two hubs/switches are connected to each other, or two
end stations are connected to each other, a crossover cable is used
ensure that the correct pairs are connected. The possible options are:
• Auto — Use to automatically detect the cable type.
• MDIX — Use for hubs and switches.
• MDI — Use for end stations.
– Current MDI/MDIX — Displays the current device MDIX settings.
– LAG — Displays whether the port is part of a LAG.
Configuring Ports Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring ports as
displayed in the Port Configuration pages.
Table 10-8. Port Configuration CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
eee enable
no eee enable
Enables the EEE mode globally.
Use the no format of the command
to disable the mode.
eee lldp enable
no eee lldp enable
Enables EEE support by LLDP on
an Ethernet port.
Use the no format of the command
to disable the support.
description string
no description
Adds a description to an interface
configuration.
Use the no form of this command to
remove the description.
shutdown
no shutdown
Disables an interfaces.
Use the no form of this command to
restart a disabled interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 407
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
set interface active
{[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe
rnet] interface|port-channel LAGnumber}
Reactivates an interface that is
shutdown.
speed {10|100|1000|10000}
no speed
Configures the speed of a given
Ethernet interface when not using
auto negotiation.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
duplex {half|full}
no duplex
Configures the full/half duplex
operation of a given Ethernet
interface when not using auto
negotiation.
negotiation [capability1
[capability2…capability5]
no negotiation
Enables auto negotiation operation
for the speed and duplex parameters
of a given interface.
Use the no form of this command to
disable auto-negotiation.
back-pressure
no back-pressure
Enables Back Pressure on a given
interface.
Use the no form of this command to
disable back pressure.
flowcontrol {auto|on|off}
no flowcontrol
Configures the flow control on a
given interface.
Use the no form of this command to
disable flow control.
mdix {on|auto}
no mdix
Enables automatic crossover on a
given interface or Port-channel.
Use the no form of this command to
disable cable crossover.
show interfaces configuration
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe
rnet] port-number|port-channel
LAG-number]
Displays the configuration for all
configured interfaces.
Table 10-8. Port Configuration CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description408 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
show interfaces advertise Displays the interface’s negotiation
advertisement settings.
show interfaces status
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe
rnet] port-number|port-channel
LAG-number]
Displays the status for all configured
interfaces.
show interfaces description
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe
rnet] port-number|port-channel
LAG-number]
Displays the description for all
configured interfaces.
console(config)# interface gi2/0/1
console(config-if)# description "RD SW#3"
console(config-if)# shutdown
console(config-if)# no shutdown
console(config-if)# speed 100
console(config-if)# duplex full
console(config-if)# negotiation
console(config-if)# back-pressure
console(config-if)# flowcontrol on
console(config-if)# mdix auto
console(config-if)# end
console# show interfaces configuration gi2/0/1
Flow Admin Back Mdix
Port Type Duplex Speed Neg control State Pressure Mode
-------- ------------ ------ ----- -------- ------- ----- -------- ----
gi2/0/1 1G-Copper Full 1000 Enabled Off Up Disabled Auto
console# show interfaces status gi2/0/1
Flow Link Back Mdix
Port Type Duplex Speed Neg ctrl State Pressure Mode
-------- ------------ ------ ----- -------- ---- ----------- -------- ----
gi2/0/1 1G-Copper -- -- -- -- Down -- --
Table 10-8. Port Configuration CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 409
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
LAG Configuration
Use the LAG Configuration pages to configure LAGs. The device supports
up to 32 LAGs per system, meaning for all units in the stack. For information
about Link Aggregated Groups (LAGs) and assigning ports to LAGs, see
"Link Aggregation" on page 508.
To configure LAGs:
1 Click Switching > Ports > LAG Configuration in the tree view to display
the LAG Configuration: Summary page.
Figure 10-6. LAG Configuration: Summary
The LAG parameters are displayed.
2 To configure a LAG, click Edit.
3 Select the LAG and enter the fields:
– LAG Mode — Select the LAG mode. The possible options are:410 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Static — The ports comprise a single logical port for high-speed
connections between networking devices.
• LACP — Link Aggregate Control Protocol. LACP-enabled LAGs
can exchange information with other links in order to update and
maintain LAG configurations automatically.
– Description (0 - 64 Characters) — Enter a user-defined description of
the configured LAG.
– LAG Type — Displays the port types that comprise the LAG.
– Admin Status — Enable/disable the selected LAG.
– Current Status — Displays the LAG is currently operating.
– Admin Speed — Select the configured speed at which the LAG is
operating. The possible options are:
• 10M— The LAG is currently operating at 10 Mbps.
• 100M — The LAG is currently operating at 100 Mbps.
• 1000M — The LAG is currently operating at 1000 Mbps.
• 10000 Full— The LAG is currently operating at 1000 Mbps.
– Current Speed — Displays the speed at which the LAG is currently
operating.
– Admin Auto Negotiation — Enable/disable auto-negotiation, which is
a protocol between two link partners that enables a LAG to advertise
its transmission rate, duplex mode and flow control abilities to its
partner.
– Current Auto Negotiation — Displays the current auto-negotiation
setting.
– Admin Advertisement — If auto-negotiation is enabled, select the
auto-negotiation setting the LAG advertises. The possible options are:
• Max Capability — All LAG speeds and Duplex mode settings are
accepted.
• 10 Full — The LAG advertises for a 10 mbps speed LAG and full
duplex mode setting.
• 100 Full — The LAG advertises for a 100 mbps speed LAG and
full duplex mode setting.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 411
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• 1000 Full — The LAG advertises for a 1000 mbps speed LAG and
full duplex mode setting.
– Current Advertisement — Displays the speed that the LAG advertises
to its neighbor LAG to start the negotiation process. The possible field
values are those specified in the Admin Advertisement field.
– Neighbor Advertisement — Displays the neighboring LAG
advertisement settings. The field values are identical to the Admin
Advertisement field values.
– Admin Flow Control — Enable/disable flow control on the LAG.
Flow Control mode is effective on the ports operating in Full Duplex
in the LAG. The possible options are:
• Enable — Enables flow control on the LAG (default).
• Disable — Disables flow control on the LAG.
• Auto Negotiation — Enables the auto-negotiation of flow control
on the LAG.
– Current Flow Control — Displays the current Flow Control setting.
Configuring LAGs Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring LAGs as
displayed in the LAG Configuration pages.
Table 10-9. LAG Configuration CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
interface port-channel LAGnumber
Enters the interface configuration
mode of a specific LAG.
channel-group port-channel mode
{on|auto}
no channel-group
Sets a mode for a LAG.
Use the no form of this command
restore the default configuration.
description string
no description
Adds a description to a LAG.
Use the no form of this command to
remove the description.412 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
shutdown
no shutdown
Disables the LAG.
Use the no form of this command to
restart the LAG.
speed {10|100|1000|10000}
no speed
Configures the speed of the LAG
when not using auto negotiation.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
negotiation [capability1
[capability2…capability5]
no negotiation
Enables auto negotiation operation for
the speed and duplex parameters of a
LAG.
Use the no form of this command to
disable auto-negotiation.
flowcontrol {auto|on|off}
no flowcontrol
Configures the flow control on a given
LAG.
Use the no form of this command to
disable flow control.
show interfaces configuration
[port-channel LAG-number]
Displays the configuration for the
LAGs.
show interface advertise Displays the LAG’s negotiation
advertisement settings.
show interfaces status [portchannel LAG-number]
Displays the status for all configured
LAGs.
show interfaces description
[port-channel LAG-number]
Displays the description for all
configured LAGs.
show interfaces port-channel
[LAG-number]
Displays LAG information.
Table 10-9. LAG Configuration CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 413
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console(config)# interface port-channel 1
console(config-if)# no negotiation
console(config-if)# speed 100
console(config-if)# flowcontrol on
console(config-if)# exit
console(config)# interface port-channel 2
console(config-if)# shutdown
console(config-if)# exit
console(config-if)# end
console# show interfaces port-channel
Channel Ports
--------- ---------
ch1 Inactive: gi/1/0/(11-13)
ch2 Active: gi/1/0/14414 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Storm Control
When Broadcast, Multicast, or Unknown Unicast frames are received, they
are duplicated, and a copy is sent to all possible egress ports. This means that
in practice, they are sent to all ports belonging to the relevant VLAN. In this
way, one ingress frame is turned into many, creating the potential for a storm.
Storm protection provides the ability to limit the number of frames entering
the switch, and to define the types of frames that are counted towards this
limit.
When a threshold (limit) is configured on the device, the port discards traffic
when that threshold is reached. The port remains blocked until the traffic rate
drops below this threshold. It then resumes normal forwarding.
To configure Storm Control:
1 Click Switching > Ports > Storm Control in the tree view to display the
Storm Control: Summary page.
Figure 10-7. Storm ControlDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 415
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Storm control parameters are displayed for all ports on the selected unit.
2 To configure Storm Control on a port, click Edit.
3 Select a port from the Port drop-down list and enter the following fields:
– Broadcast Control — Enable/disable forwarding Broadcast packets on
the specific interface.
– Broadcast Mode — Select the counting mode. The possible options
are:
• Multicast & Broadcast — Counts Broadcast and Multicast traffic
together towards the bandwidth threshold.
• Broadcast Only — Counts only Broadcast traffic towards the
bandwidth threshold.
– Broadcast Rate Threshold (3500-1000000) — Enter the maximum
rate (Kbits/sec) at which unknown packets are forwarded.
Configuring Storm Control Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring Storm
Control as displayed on the Storm Control pages.
Table 10-10. Storm Control CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
storm-control includemulticast [unknown-unicast]
no storm-control includemulticast
Counts Multicast packets in the
Broadcast storm control.
Use the no form of this command to
disable counting of multicast packets in
the Broadcast storm control.
storm-control broadcast enable
no storm-control broadcast
enable
Enables Broadcast storm control.
Use the no form of this command to
disable Broadcast storm control.
storm-control broadcast level
kbps
no storm-control broadcast
level
Configures the maximum Broadcast
rate.
Use the no form of this command to
return the Broadcast level to the default
value.416 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
show ports storm-control port Displays the storm control
configuration.
console(config)# interface gi1/0/1
console(config-if)# storm-control broadcast enable
console(config-if)# storm-control include-multicast
unknown-unicast
console# show ports storm-control gi1/0/1
Port State Rate [Kbits/Sec] Included
-------- -------- ---------------- ---------------------
gi1/0/1 Disabled 8500 Broadcast
Table 10-10. Storm Control CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 417
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Port Mirroring
Switches usually only forward frames to relevant ports. To monitor traffic,
either for information gathering, such as statistical analysis, or for
troubleshooting higher-layer protocol operation, the Mirroring feature
forwards frames to a monitoring port.
Mirroring provides the ability to specify that a desired destination (target)
port will receive a copy of all traffic passing through designated source ports.
The frames arriving at the destination port are copies of the frames passing
through the source port at ingress, prior to any switch action.
It is possible to specify several source ports to be monitored by a single target
port. However, in this case, the traffic sent to the target port is placed in the
target port's queues on a first come, first served basis, and any excess traffic is
silently discarded. This may mean that the traffic actually seen by any device
attached to the target port is an arbitrarily selected subset of the actual traffic
going through the source ports.
Port mirroring is only relevant to physical ports. Therefore, if you want a LAG
to function as the source of a port mirroring session, the member ports must
be individually specified as sources.
Up to four sources can be mirrored. This can be any combination of four
individual ports.
Before configuring Port Mirroring, note the following:
• Monitored ports cannot operate faster than the monitoring port.
• All Rx/Tx packets should be monitored to the same port.
Destination Port Restrictions
The following restrictions apply to destination ports:
• Destination ports cannot be configured as source ports.
• Destination ports cannot be a member of a LAG.
• IP interfaces cannot be configured on the destination port.
• GVRP cannot be enabled on the destination port.
• The destination port cannot be a member of a VLAN.
• Only one destination port can be defined.418 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• All QoS/CoS rules that apply to the destination port, as an egress, such as
traffic shaping, are suspended for the duration of the mirroring session.
Any such settings, configured on the port during the mirroring session,
take effect only after the port is no longer a destination port for a
mirroring session.
• Ingress mirrored packets may arrive at the ingress port either with an
802.1q tag or without. When the packets are mirrored to a port analyzer,
they should be transmitted as they are received on the ingress port.
However, in the device, the packet is transmitted out of the port analyzer
as always tagged or always untagged (user configurable), regardless of the
input encapsulation.
Source Port Restrictions
The following restrictions apply to ports specified as source ports:
• Source ports cannot be a member of a LAG.
• Source ports cannot be configured as a destination port.
• Up to four source ports can be mirrored.
NOTE: When a port is set to be a target port for a port-mirroring session, all normal
operations on it are suspended. This includes Spanning Tree and LACP. All currently
active protocols and services on that port are suspended.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 419
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Port Mirroring
To specify source and destination ports for port mirroring:
1 Click Switching > Ports > Port Mirroring in the tree view to display the
Port Mirroring: Summary page.
Figure 10-8. Port Mirroring: Summary
The previously-defined source ports for the selected Destination Port are
displayed, along with the fields defined in the Add page and their status.
– Status — Indicates if the port is currently being monitored (Active) or
not being monitored (notReady), because of some problem.
2 To add a port to be mirrored, click Add, and enter the fields:
– Source Port — The port number from which port traffic is copied.
– Type — Type of traffic (Tx or Rx or both) to be copied.420 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring Port Mirroring Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring Port
Mirroring.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 10-11. Port Mirroring CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
port monitor srcinterface-id [rx|tx]
no port monitor srcinterface-id
Starts a port monitoring session. This must
be performed in Interface Configuration
mode, which is the destination interface.
Use the no form of this command to stop a
port monitoring session.
show ports monitor Displays the port monitoring status.
console(config)# interface gi1/0/1
console(config-if)# port monitor gi1/0/8
console# show ports monitor
Source port Destination Port Type Status
----------- ---------------- ---- -----------
gi1/0/1 gi1/0/8 RX,TX ActiveDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 421
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY422 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
11
Address Tables
This section describes how MAC addresses are handled on the device.
It contains the following topics:
• Overview
• Static Addresses
• Dynamic AddressesDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 423
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Overview
MAC addresses, associated with ports, are stored in the Static Address or the
Dynamic Address tables. Packets, addressed to a destination stored in one of
these tables, are forwarded to the associated port.
MAC addresses are dynamically learned when packets arrive at the device.
Addresses are associated with ports by learning the source address of the
frame. Frames, addressed to a destination MAC address that is not associated
with any port, are flooded to all ports of the relevant VLAN. In order to
prevent the bridging table from overflowing, dynamic MAC addresses, from
which no traffic is seen for a certain period, are erased.
Static addresses are manually entered into the table.424 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Static Addresses
Static addresses are manually assigned to a specific interface and VLAN on
the switch. If a static address is seen on another interface, the address is
ignored and it is not written to the address table.
To define a static address:
1 Click Switch > Address Tables > Static Address Table in the tree view to
display the Static Address Table: Summary page.
Figure 11-1. Static Address Table
A list of the currently-defined static addresses is displayed.
2 To add a static address, click Add.
3 Enter the following fields:
• Interface — Select a port or LAG for the entry.
• MAC Address — Enter the interface MAC address.
• VLAN ID — Check and select the VLAN ID for the port.
or
• VLAN Name — Check and enter the VLAN name.
• Status — Select how the entry in the table will be treated. The
possible options are:Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 425
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Permanent — The MAC address is never aged out of the table
and, if it is saved to the Startup Configuration, it is retained after
rebooting.
• Delete on Reset — The MAC address is deleted when the device
is reset.
• Delete on Timeout — The MAC address is deleted when a
timeout occurs.
• Secure — The MAC address is secure when the interface is in
classic locked mode.
To prevent Static MAC addresses from being deleted when the Ethernet
device is reset, ensure that the port attached to the MAC address is locked.
Configuring Static Addresses Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring static
address parameters as displayed in the Static Address Table pages.
Table 11-1. Static Address CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
mac address-table static macaddress vlan vlan-id interface
{[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethern
et] port-number|port-channel LAGnumber} [permanent|delete-onreset|delete-on-timeout|secure]
no mac address-table static [macaddress] vlan vlan-id
Adds a MAC-layer station source
address to the MAC address
table.
Use the no form of this
command to delete the MAC
address.
show mac address-table
[dynamic|static|secure] [vlan
vlan]
[[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitether
net] port-number|port-channel LAGnumber]] [address mac-address]
Displays entries in the MAC
address table.426 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console(config-if)#bridge address 00:60:70:4C:73:FF
permanent gi1/0/8
console# show mac address-table static
Aging time is 300 sec
VLAN MAC Address Port Type
---- ------------------ -------- --------
1 00:60:70:4C:73:FF gi1/0/8 static
1 00:60:70:8C:73:FF gi1/0/8 static
200 00:10:0D:48:37:FF gi1/0/9 staticDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 427
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Dynamic Addresses
The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses acquired by
monitoring the source addresses of traffic entering the switch. When the
destination address for inbound traffic is found in the database, the packets
intended for that address are forwarded directly to the associated port.
Otherwise, the traffic is flooded to all ports in the VLAN of the frame.
To prevent the table from overflowing and to make room for new addresses,
an address is deleted from the table if no traffic is received from a dynamic
MAC address for a certain period. This period of time is called the aging
interval.
To configure dynamic addresses:
1 Click Switch > Address Tables > Dynamic MAC Address in the tree view
to display the Dynamic Address page.
Figure 11-2. Dynamic Address Table
The current address table is displayed along with other parameters.
2 Enter Address Aging (10-630). The aging time is a value between the userconfigured value and twice that value minus 1. For example, if you entered
300 seconds, the aging time is between 300 and 599 seconds.428 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
3 To clear the table, check Clear Table.
4 To display a subset of the addresses in a particular order, enter the query
criteria and sort key under Query By, and click Query. The following fields
are displayed for entries matching the query criteria:
– VLAN ID — VLAN ID in the entry.
– MAC Address — Interface MAC address.
– Interface — Port or LAG associated with the MAC address.
Configuring Dynamic Addresses Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring static
address parameters as displayed in the Dynamic Address Table pages.
Table 11-2. Dynamic Address CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
mac address-table aging-time
seconds
no mac address-table aging-time
Sets the aging time of the
address table.
Use the no form of this
command to restore the default.
clear mac address-table dynamic
[interface
[{[gigabitethernet|tengigabitether
net] port-number|port-channel LAGnumber}} [permanent|delete-onreset|delete-on-timeout|secure]]
clear mac address-table secure
interface
[gigabitethernet|tengigabitetherne
t] port-number|port-channel LAGnumber
Removes learned or secure
entries from the forwarding
database.
show mac address-table
[dynamic|static|secure] [vlan
vlan] [interface
[gigabitethernet|tengigabitetherne
t] port-number|port-channel LAGnumber] [address mac-address]
Displays entries in the MAC
address table.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 429
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console(config)# mac address-table aging-time 600
console# show mac address-table dynamic
Aging time is 300 sec
VLAN MAC Address Port Type
---- ------------------ -------- --------
1 00:60:70:4C:73:FF gi1/0/8 dynamic
1 00:60:70:8C:73:FF gi1/0/8 dynamic430 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_GARP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
12
GARP
This section describes how to configure Generic Attribute Registration
Protocol (GARP) on the device.
It contains the following topics:
• GARP Overview
• GARP TimersDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 431
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_GARP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
GARP Overview
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) is a general-purpose protocol
that registers network connectivity or membership-style information. GARP
defines a set of devices interested in a given network attribute, such as VLAN
or Multicast address.
The Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) provides a generic
framework whereby devices in a bridged LAN, such as end stations and
switches, can register and de-register attribute values, such as VLAN
Identifiers, with each other. In doing so, these attributes are propagated to
devices in the bridged LAN, and these devices form a reachability tree that is
a subset of an active topology. GARP defines the architecture, rules of
operation, state machines and variables for the registration and deregistration
of attribute values.
When configuring GARP, ensure the following:
• The leave time must be greater than or equal to three times the join time.
• The leave-all time must be greater than the leave time.
• Set the same GARP timer values on all Layer 2-connected devices. If the
GARP timers are set differently on the Layer 2-connected devices, GARP
application does not operate successfully.432 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_GARP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
GARP Timers
To enable a GARP timer on an interface:
1 Click Switching > GARP > GARP Timers in the tree view to open the
GARP Timers: Summary page.
Figure 12-1. GARP Timers: Summary
The GARP timers are displayed.
2 Click Edit.
3 Select an interface, and enter the fields:
– GARP Join Timer (10 - 2147483640) — Enter the time, in
milliseconds, during which Protocol Data Units (PDU) are
transmitted.
– GARP Leave Timer (10 - 2147483640) — Enter the time interval, in
milliseconds, which the device waits before leaving its GARP state.
Leave time is activated by a Leave All Time message sent/received,
and cancelled by the Join message received. Leave time must be
greater than or equal to three times the join time.
– GARP Leave All Timer (10 - 2147483640) — Enter time interval, in
milliseconds, which all devices wait before leaving the GARP state.
The leave all time must be greater than the leave time. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 433
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_GARP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Defining GARP Timers Using CLI Commands
This table summarizes the CLI commands for defining GARP timers as
displayed in the GARP Timers pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 12-1. GARP Timer CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
garp timer {join|leave|leaveall}
timer_value
Adjusts the GARP application join,
leave, and leaveall GARP timer values.
show gvrp configuration
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitether
net]port-number|vlan vlanid|port-channel LAG-number]
Displays GVRP configuration information, including timer values,
whether GVRP and dynamic VLAN
creation are enabled, and which ports
are running GVRP.
console(config)# interface gi1/0/1
console(config-if)# garp timer leave 900
console(config-if)# end
console# show gvrp configuration gi1/0/11
GVRP Feature is currently Disabled on the device.
Maximum VLANs: 223
Port(s) GVRP Registration Dynamic VLAN Timers (milliseconds)
Status Creation Join Leave Leave All
-------- ------- ------------ ----------- ------ ----- ---------
gi1/0/11 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 900 10000434 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
13
Spanning Tree
This chapter describes the Spanning Tree Protocol.
It contains the following topics:
• Spanning Tree Protocol Overview
• Global Settings
• STP Port Settings
• STP LAG Settings
• Rapid Spanning Tree
• Multiple Spanning TreeDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 435
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Spanning Tree Protocol Overview
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) provides tree topography for any bridge
arrangement. STP eliminates loops by providing a unique path between end
stations on a network.
Loops occur when alternate routes exist between hosts. Loops, in an extended
network, can cause bridges to forward traffic indefinitely, resulting in packets
not arriving at their destination, increased traffic, and reduced network
efficiency.
The device supports the following Spanning Tree versions:
• Classic STP — Provides a single path between end stations, avoiding and
eliminating loops. For more information on configuring Classic STP, see
"Global Settings" on page 437.
• Rapid STP (RSTP) — Provides faster convergence of the spanning tree
than Classic STP. RSTP is most effective when the network topology is
naturally tree-structured, and therefore faster convergence might be
possible. RSTP is enabled by default.
Although Classic STP is guaranteed to prevent Layer 2 forwarding loops, in
a general network topology, there might be an unacceptable delay before
convergence. This means that before convergence, each bridge or switch in
the network must decide if it should actively forward traffic or not, on each
of its ports.
For more information on configuring Rapid STP, see "Rapid Spanning
Tree" on page 450.
• Multiple STP (MSTP) — MSTP is based on RSTP. It detects Layer 2
loops, and attempts to mitigate them by preventing the involved port from
transmitting traffic.
Since loops exist on a per-Layer 2-domain basis, a situation can occur
where there is a loop in VLAN A and no loop in VLAN B. If both VLANs
are on Port X, and STP wants to mitigate the loop, it stops traffic on the
entire port, including VLAN B traffic, where there is no need to stop
traffic.
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) solves this problem by enabling
several STP instances, so that it is possible to detect and mitigate loops
separately in each instance. By associating instances to VLANs, each 436 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
instance is associated with the Layer 2 domain on which it performs loop
detection and mitigation. This enables a port to be stopped in one
instance, such as traffic from VLAN A that is causing a loop, while traffic
can remain active in another domain where no loop was seen, such as on
VLAN B.
MSTP provides full connectivity for packets allocated to any VLAN, and
transmits packets assigned to various VLANs, through different multiple
spanning tree (MST) regions.
MST regions act as a single bridge.
For more information on configuring Multiple STP, see "Multiple
Spanning Tree" on page 454.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 437
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Global Settings
To enable STP and select the STP mode on the device:
1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > Global Settings in the tree view to
display the Global Settings page.
Figure 13-1. Global Settings
The currently-defined settings are displayed.
2 Enter the fields:
– Spanning Tree State — Enable Spanning Tree on the device.
– STP Operation Mode — Select the STP mode enabled on the device.
The possible options are:
• Classic STP — Enables Classic STP on the device.
• Rapid STP — Enables Rapid STP on the device. This is the
default value.
• Multiple STP — Enables Multiple STP on the device.438 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– BPDU Handling — Select how Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU)
packets are managed when STP is disabled on the port/device. BPDUs
are used to transmit spanning tree information. The possible options
are:
• Filtering — Filter BPDU packets when spanning tree is disabled
on an interface.
• Flooding — Flood BPDU packets when spanning tree is disabled
on an interface.
– Path Cost Default Values — Select the method used to assign default
path costs to STP ports. The possible options are:
• Short — Specifies 1 through 65,535 range for port path costs.
• Long — Specifies 1 through 200,000,000 range for port path
costs.
The default path costs assigned to an interface vary according to the
selected method:
Bridge Settings
– Priority (0-61440 in steps of 4096) — Enter the bridge priority value.
When switches or bridges are running STP, each is assigned a priority.
After exchanging BPDUs, the device with the lowest priority value
becomes the Root Bridge. The default value is 32768. The port
priority value is provided in increments of 4096. For example, 4096,
8192, 12288, etc.
– Hello Time (1-10) — Check to use the device Hello Time, which is
the interval of time in seconds that a root bridge waits between
configuration messages. Enter a value.
– Max Age (6-40) — Check to use device Maximum Age Time, which is
the time interval in seconds that a bridge waits before sending
configuration messages. Enter a value.
Interface Long Cost Short Cost
LAG 20,000 4
1000 Mbps 20,000 4
100 Mbps 200,000 19
10 Mbps 2,000,000 100Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 439
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Forward Delay (4-30) — Check to use device forward delay time,
which is the interval of time in seconds that a bridge remains in a
listening and learning state before forwarding packets. Enter a value.
Designated Root — Displays the following:
– Bridge ID — The bridge priority and MAC address.
– Root Bridge ID — The root bridge priority and MAC address.
– Root Port — The port number that offers the lowest cost path from
this bridge to the Root Bridge. This is significant when the Bridge is
not the Root.
– Root Path Cost — The cost of the path from this bridge to the root.
– Topology Changes Counts — The total amount of STP state changes
that have occurred.
– Last Topology Change — The amount of time that has elapsed since
the bridge was initialized or reset, and the last topographic change
occurred.
Defining STP Global Parameters Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining STP global
parameters as displayed in the Global Settings pages.
Table 13-1. STP Global Parameter CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
spanning-tree
no spanning-tree
Enables spanning tree functionality.
Use the no form of this command to
disable the spanning-tree functionality.
spanning-tree mode
{stp|rstp|mstp}
no spanning-tree mode
Configures the mode of the spanning tree
protocol.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
spanning-tree bpdu
{filtering|flooding|bridging}
no spanning-tree bpdu
Defines BPDU handling when the
spanning tree is disabled globally or on a
single interface.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.440 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
spanning-tree pathcost method
{long|short}
no spanning-tree pathcost
method
Sets the default path cost method.
Use the no form of this command to return
to the default configuration.
spanning-tree priority
priority
no spanning-tree priority
Configures the spanning tree priority.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default device spanning-tree
priority.
spanning-tree hello-time
seconds
no spanning-tree hello-time
Configures the spanning tree bridge Hello
Time, which is how often the device
Broadcasts Hello messages to other
devices.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
spanning-tree max-age seconds
no spanning-tree max-age
seconds
Configures the spanning tree bridge
maximum age.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration
spanning-tree forward-time
seconds
no spanning-tree forward-time
Configures the spanning tree bridge
forward time, which is the amount of time
a port remains in the listening and learning
states before entering the forwarding state.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
show spanning-tree
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabite
thernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] [instance
instance-id]
Displays spanning tree configuration.
show spanning-tree [detail]
[active|blockedports]
[instance instance-id]
Displays detailed spanning tree
information on active or blocked ports.
show spanning-tree mstconfiguration
Displays spanning tree MST configuration
identifier.
Table 13-1. STP Global Parameter CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 441
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console(config)# spanning-tree
console(config)# spanning-tree mode rstp
console(config)# spanning-tree priority 12288
console(config)# spanning-tree hello-time 5
console(config)# spanning-tree max-age 12
console(config)# spanning-tree forward-time 25
console(config)# exit442 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
STP Port Settings
To assign STP properties to individual ports:
1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > STP Port Settings in the tree view to
display the STP Port Settings: Summary page.
Figure 13-2. STP Port Settings: Summary
The ports and their STP settings are displayed.
2 To modify STP settings on a port, click Edit.
3 Select the port, and enter the fields:
– STP — Enable/disable STP on the port.
– Fast Link — Check to enable Fast Link mode for the port. If this is
enabled, the Port State is automatically placed in the Forwarding state
when the port is up. Fast Link mode optimizes the time it takes for the
STP protocol to converge. STP convergence can take 30-60 seconds in
large networks. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 443
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– BPDU Guard — Check to enable BPDU Guard on the port.
– Root Guard — Check to prevent devices outside the network core
from being assigned the spanning tree root.
– Port State — Displays the current STP state of a port. If the port state
is not disabled, it determines what forwarding action is taken on
traffic. The possible port states are:
• Disabled — STP is currently disabled on the port. The port
forwards traffic while learning MAC addresses.
• Blocking — The port is currently blocked and cannot be used to
forward traffic or learn MAC addresses. Blocking is displayed
when Classic STP is enabled.
• Listening — The port is currently in the listening mode. The port
cannot forward traffic nor can it learn MAC addresses.
• Learning — The port is currently in the learning mode. The port
cannot forward traffic, however it can learn new MAC addresses.
• Forwarding — The port is currently in the forwarding mode. The
port can forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses.
– Role — Displays the port role assigned by the STP algorithm that
provides STP paths. The possible options are:
• Root — This port provides the lowest cost path to forward packets
to root switch.
• Designated — This port is the interface through which the bridge
is connected to the LAN, which provides the lowest cost path
from the LAN to the Root Bridge.
• Alternate — This port provides an alternate LAG to the root
switch from the root interface.
• Backup — This port provides a backup path to the designated
port. Backup ports occur only when two ports are connected in a
loop by a point-to-point link. Backup ports also occur when a LAN
has two or more connections connected to a shared segment.
• Disabled — This port is not participating in the Spanning Tree.444 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Speed — Displays the speed at which the port is operating.
– Path Cost (1-200000000) — Enter the port contribution to the root
path cost. The path cost is adjusted to a higher or lower value, and is
used to forward traffic when a path being rerouted.
– Default Path Cost — Check to use the default path cost.
– Priority — Select the priority value that influences the port choice
when a bridge has two ports connected in a loop. The priority value is
provided in increments of 16.
– Designated Bridge ID — Displays the bridge priority and the MAC
address of the designated bridge.
– Designated Port ID — Displays the designated port’s priority and
interface.
– Designated Cost — Displays the cost of the port participating in the
STP topology. Ports with a lower cost are less likely to be blocked if
STP detects loops.
– Forward Transitions — Displays the number of times the port has
changed from the Forwarding state to Blocking.
– LAG — Displays the LAG to which the port is attached.
Defining STP Port Settings Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining STP port
parameters as displayed in the STP Port Settings page.
Table 13-2. STP Port Settings CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
spanning-tree disable
no spanning-tree disable
Disables spanning tree on a specific
port.
Use the no form of this command to
enable the spanning tree on a port.
spanning-tree cost cost
no spanning-tree cost
Configures the spanning tree cost
contribution of a port
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 445
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
spanning-tree port-priority
priority
no spanning-tree port-priority
Configures port priority.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
show spanning-tree
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabiteth
ernet] port-number|port-channel
LAG-number][instance instanceid]
Displays spanning tree configuration.
spanning-tree portfast
no spanning-tree portfast
Enables Fast Link mode.
Use the no form of this command to
disable the PortFast mode.
spanning-tree bpduguard
{enable|disable}
no spanning-tree bpduguard
Shuts down an interface when it
receives a bridge protocol data unit
(BPDU).
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
spanning-tree guard root Enables root guard on all spanning tree
instances on the interface.
show spanning-tree [detail]
[active|blockedports] [instance
instance-id]
Displays detailed spanning tree
information on active or blocked ports.
Table 13-2. STP Port Settings CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description446 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console> enable
console# configure
console(config)# interface gi1/0/1
console(config-if)# spanning-tree enable
console(config-if)# spanning-tree cost 35000
console(config-if)# spanning-tree port-priority 96
console(config-if)# spanning-tree portfast
console(config-if)# exit
console(config)# exit
console# show spanning-tree gi1/0/15 instance 12
Port gi1/0/15 enabled
State: discarding Role: alternate
Port ID: 128.15 Port cost: 19
Type: P2p (configured: Auto) Internal Port Fast: No
(configured: No)
Designated bridge Priority :
32768
Address:
00:00:b0:07:07:49
Designated port ID: 128.11 Designated path cost: 0
Guard root: Disabled
Number of transitions to forwarding state: 3
BPDU: sent 482, received 1035Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 447
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
STP LAG Settings
To assign STP parameters to LAGs:
1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > LAG Settings in the tree view to
display the STP LAG Settings: Summary page.
Figure 13-3. STP LAG Settings: Summary
The LAGs and their STP settings are displayed.
2 To modify STP settings on a LAG, click Edit.
3 Select a LAG from the Select a LAG drop-down menu.
4 Enter the fields.
– STP — Enable/disable STP on the LAG.
– Fast Link — Check to enable Fast Link mode for the LAG. If Fast
Link mode is enabled for a LAG, the LAG State is automatically
placed in Forwarding when the LAG is up. Fast Link mode optimizes
the time it takes for the STP protocol to converge. STP convergence
can take from 30-60 seconds in large networks.
– BPDU Guard — Check to enable BPDU Guard on the LAG.
– Root Guard — Check to prevent devices outside the network core
from being assigned the spanning tree root. 448 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– LAG State — Displays the current STP state of the LAG. If enabled,
the LAG state determines what forwarding action is taken on traffic. If
the bridge discovers a malfunctioning LAG, the LAG is placed in the
Broken state. Possible LAG states are:
• Disabled — STP is currently disabled on the LAG. The LAG
forwards traffic while learning MAC addresses.
• Blocking — The LAG is blocked and cannot be used to forward
traffic or learn MAC addresses.
• RSTP Discarding State — The LAG does not learn MAC
addresses and does not forward frames. This state is union of
Blocking and Listening state introduced in STP (802.1.D).
• Listening — The LAG is in the listening mode, and cannot
forward traffic or learn MAC addresses.
• Learning — The LAG is in the learning mode, and cannot
forward traffic, but it can learn new MAC addresses.
• Forwarding — The LAG is currently in the forwarding mode, and
it can forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses.
• Broken — The LAG is currently malfunctioning, and cannot be
used for forwarding traffic.
– Role — Displays the LAG role assigned by the STP algorithm that
provides STP paths. The possible options are:
• Root — This LAG provides the lowest cost path to forward
packets to root switch.
• Designated — This LAG is the interface through which the
bridge is connected to the LAN, which provides the lowest cost
path from the LAN to the Root Bridge.
• Alternate — This LAG provides an alternate LAG to the root
switch from the root interface.
• Backup — This LAG provides a backup path to the designated
port. Backup ports occur only when two ports are connected in a
loop by a point-to-point link. Backup ports also occur when a LAN
has two or more connections connected to a shared segment.
• Disabled — This LAG is not participating in the Spanning Tree.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 449
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Path Cost (1-200000000) — Enter the amount the LAG contributes
to the root path cost. The path cost is adjusted to a higher or lower
value, and is used to forward traffic when a path is being rerouted.
The path cost has a value of 1 to 200000000.
– Default Path Cost — Check for the device to use the default path
cost.
– Priority — Select the priority value of the LAG. The priority value
influences the LAG choice when a bridge has looped ports. The
priority value is given in steps of 16.
– Designated Bridge ID — Displays the priority and the MAC address
of the designated bridge.
– Designated Port ID — Displays the ID of the selected interface.
– Designated Cost — Displays the cost of the port participating in the
STP topology. Ports with a lower cost are less likely to be blocked if
STP detects loops.
– Forward Transitions — Displays the number of times the LAG State
has changed from the Forwarding state to a Blocking state.
Defining STP LAG Settings Using CLI Commands
For information about CLI commands for defining STP LAG settings, see
Table 13-2.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console(config)# interface port-channel 1
console(config-if)# spanning-tree disable
console(config-if)# spanning-tree cost 35000
console(config-if)# spanning-tree port-priority 96
console(config-if)# spanning-tree portfast450 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Rapid Spanning Tree
While classic spanning tree prevents Layer 2 forwarding loops on a general
network topology, convergence can take from 30 to 60 seconds. This delay
provides time to detect possible loops, and propagate status changes.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) detects and uses network topologies
that enable a faster convergence of the spanning tree, without creating
forwarding loops.
To configure RSTP:
1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > Rapid Spanning Tree in the tree view
to display the Rapid Spanning Tree: Summary page.
Figure 13-4. Rapid Spanning Tree: Summary
2 To modify RSTP settings on an interface, click Edit and enter the fields:
– Interface — Select a port or LAG.
– State — Displays the RSTP state of the selected interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 451
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Role — Displays the port role assigned by the STP algorithm in order
to provide STP paths. The possible options are:
• Root — This port provides the lowest cost path to forward packets
to root switch.
• Designated — This port is the interface through which the bridge
is connected to the LAN, which provides the lowest cost path
from the LAN to the Root Bridge.
• Alternate — This port provides an alternate LAG to the root
switch from the root interface.
• Backup — This port provides a backup path to the designated
port. Backup ports occur only when two ports are connected in a
loop by a point-to-point link. Backup ports also occur when a LAN
has two or more connections connected to a shared segment.
• Disabled — This port is not participating in the Spanning Tree.
– Mode — Displays if RSTP is enabled.
– Fast Link Operational Status — Displays if Fast Link is enabled or
disabled for the port or LAG. If Fast Link is enabled for an interface,
the interface is automatically placed in the forwarding state. The
possible options are:
• Enable — Fast Link is enabled.
• Disable — Fast Link is disabled.
• Auto — Fast Link mode is enabled a few seconds after the
interface becomes active.
– Point-to-Point Admin Status — Select if a point-to-point links is
established, or permits the device to establish a point-to-point link.
The possible options are:
• Enable — Enables the device to establish a point-to-point link, or
specifies for the device to automatically establish a point-to-point
link. To establish communications over a point-to-point link, the
originating PPP first sends Link Control Protocol (LCP) packets
to configure and test the data link. After a link is established and
optional facilities are negotiated as needed by the LCP, the
originating PPP sends Network Control Protocols (NCP) packets
to select and configure one or more network layer protocols.
When each of the chosen network layer protocols has been 452 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
configured, packets from each network layer protocol can be sent
over the link. The link remains configured for communications
until explicit LCP or NCP packets close the link, or until some
external event occurs. This is the actual switch port link type. It
may differ from the administrative state.
• Disable — Disables point-to-point link.
• Auto — The device automatically establishes a point-to-point
link.
– Point-to-Point Operational Status — Displays the Point-to-Point
operating state.
– Active Protocol Migration Test — Check to run a Protocol Migration
test. This discovers whether the link partner using STP still exists, and
if so whether it has migrated to RSTP or MSTP. If it still exists as an
STP link, the device continues to communicate with it by using STP.
Otherwise, if it has been migrated to RSTP or MSTP, the device
communicates with it using RSTP or MSTP, respectively.
Defining Rapid STP Parameters Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining Rapid STP
parameters as displayed in the Rapid Spanning Tree pages.
Table 13-3. Rapid STP Parameters CLI Command
CLI Command Description
spanning-tree link-type {pointto-point|shared}
no spanning-tree spanning-tree
link-type
Overrides the default link-type setting
determined by the port duplex mode,
and enables RSTP transitions to the
forwarding state.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
clear spanning-tree detectedprotocols interface
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabiteth
ernet] port-number|port-channel
LAG-number]
Restarts the protocol migration
process.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 453
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
show spanning-tree
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabiteth
ernet] port-number|port-channel
LAG-number]
Displays spanning tree configuration.
console(config)# interface gi1/0/5
console(config-if)# spanning-tree link-type shared
Table 13-3. Rapid STP Parameters CLI Command (Continued)
CLI Command Description454 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Multiple Spanning Tree
This section describes Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP).
It contains the following topics:
• MSTP Overview
• MSTP Properties
• VLAN to MSTP Instance
• MSTP Instance Settings
• MSTP Interface SettingsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 455
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
MSTP Overview
MSTP maps VLANs into STP instances, using various load balancing
scenarios. As a result of this partitioning into instances, if port A is blocked in
one STP instance, the same port can be placed in the Forwarding State in
another STP instance.
In addition, packets assigned to various VLANs are transmitted along
different paths within Multiple Spanning Trees Regions (MST Regions).
Regions are one or more Multiple Spanning Tree bridges by which frames can
be transmitted.
MSTP Properties
To set an MSTP region:
1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > MSTP Settings in the tree view to
display the MSTP Properties: Summary page.
Figure 13-5. MSTP Properties: Summary456 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
2 Enter the following fields:
– Region Name (1-32 Characters) — Enter the user-defined MSTP
region name.
– Revision (0-65535) — Enter the unsigned 16-bit number that
identifies the current MST configuration revision. The revision
number is required as part of the MST configuration.
– Max Hops (1-40) — Enter the total number of hops that occur in a
specific region before the BPDU is discarded. Once the BPDU is
discarded, the port information is aged out.
– IST Master — Displays the Internal Spanning Tree Master ID. The
IST Master is the instance 0 root.
Configuring MST Properties Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring MST
properties in the MSTP Properties pages.
Table 13-4. MSTP Properties CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
spanning-tree mst
configuration
Enters MST Configuration mode.
spanning-tree mst max-hops
hop-count
no spanning-tree mst maxhops
Configures the number of hops in an MST
region before the BDPU is discarded and the
port information is aged out (in Global
Configuration mode).
Use the no form of this command to restore
the default configuration.
name string
no name
Sets the MSTP region name.
Use the no form of this command to restore
the default setting.
revision value
no revision
Defines the MST configuration revision
number.
Use the no form of this command to restore
the default configuration.
exit Exits the MST region configuration mode
after applying configuration changes.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 457
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
show {current|pending} Displays the current or pending MST region
configuration.
show spanning tree mstconfiguration
Displays the MSTP configuration.
console(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
console(config-mst)# instance 1 add vlan 10-20
console(config-mst)# name region1
console(config-mst)# revision 1
console(config)# interface gi1/0/1
console(config-if)# spanning-tree mst 1 port-priority 144
console(config)# spanning-tree mst max-hops 10
console(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
console(config-mst)# instance 2 add vlan 21-30
console(config-mst)# name region1
console(config-mst)# revision 1
console(config-mst)# show pending
Pending MST configuration
Name: Region1
Revision: 1
Instance VLANs Mapped
-------- ------------
0 1-9,31-4094
1 10-20
2 21-30
Table 13-4. MSTP Properties CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description458 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
VLAN to MSTP Instance
To map VLANs to MSTP instances:
1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > VLAN to MSTP Instance in the tree
view to display the VLAN to MSTP Instance: Summary page.
Figure 13-6. VLAN to MSTP Instance: Summary
The MSTP instances and their associated VLANs are displayed.
2 To associate a VLAN with an MSTP instance, click Edit.
3 Select the MSTP instance, the VLAN and whether to add or remove the
VLAN from the MSTP instance association.
4 Enter the fields:
– Select MST Instance ID — Select an MST instance.
– VLANs — Enter the VLANs being mapped to this instance.
– Action — Select the mapping action. The possible options are: Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 459
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Add —Add these VLANS to the MST instance.
• Remove —Remove these VLANS from the MST instance.
Mapping VLAN to MSTP Instances Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for mapping VLANs to
MSTP instances.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 13-5. Mapping VLAN to MSTP Instances Using CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
spanning-tree mst
configuration
Enters MST Configuration mode.
instance instance-id vlan
vlan-range
no instance instance-id
vlan vlan-range
Maps VLANs to an MST instance.
Use the no form of this command to restore
default mapping.
show spanning-tree detail Displays the spanning-tree configuration
console(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
console(config-mst)# instance 1 vlan 10-20460 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
MSTP Instance Settings
To configure MSTP instances:
1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > MSTP Instance Settings in the tree
view to display the MSTP Instance Settings page.
Figure 13-7. MSTP Instance Settings
The MSTP instances and their associated VLANs are displayed.
2 Select an Instance ID.
3 Enter the Bridge Priority (0-61440) of this bridge for the selected MSTP
instance.
4 The following fields are displayed:
– Included VLANs — Displays VLANs included in this instance.
– Designated Root Bridge ID — Priority and MAC address of the Root
Bridge for the MST instance.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 461
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Root Port — Root port of the selected instance.
– Root Path Cost — Root path cost of the selected instance.
– Bridge ID — Bridge priority and the MAC address of this switch for
the selected instance.
– Remaining Hops — Number of hops remaining to the next
destination.
Configuring MSTP Instances Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields
in the MSTP Instance pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 13-6. Configuring MSTP Instances CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
spanning-tree mst
configuration
Enters MST Configuration mode.
spanning-tree mst
instance-id priority
priority
no spanning-tree mst
instance-id priority
Configures the device priority for the specified
spanning-tree instance.
Use the no form of this command to restore
the default configuration.
show spanning-tree
detail
Displays the spanning-tree configuration
console(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
console(config-mst)# spanning-tree mst 1 priority 4096462 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
MSTP Interface Settings
To assign interfaces to MSTP instances:
1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > MSTP Interface Settings in the tree
view to display the MSTP Interface Settings: Summary page.
Figure 13-8. MSTP Interface Settings: Summary
MSTP interface settings for the selected instance is displayed.
2 To set MSTP settings for an interface, click Edit.
3 Select an instance, and enter the fields:
– Interface ID — Assign either ports or LAGs to the selected MSTP
instance.
– Port State — Displays whether the port is enabled or disabled in the
specific instance.
– Type — Displays whether MSTP treats the port as a point-to-point
port, or a port connected to a hub, and whether the port is internal to
the MST region or a boundary port. A Master port provides
connectivity from a MSTP region to the outlying CIST root. A Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 463
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Boundary port attaches MST bridges to LAN in an outlying region. If
the port is a boundary port, it also indicates whether the device on the
other side of the link is working in RSTP or STP mode.
– Role — Displays the port role assigned by the STP algorithm in order
to provide to STP paths. The possible options are:
• Root — This port provides the lowest cost path to forward packets
to root switch.
• Designated — This port is the interface through which the bridge
is connected to the LAN, which provides the lowest cost path
from the LAN to the Root Bridge.
• Alternate — This port provides an alternate LAG to the root
switch from the root interface.
• Backup — This port provides a backup path to the designated
port. Backup ports occur only when two ports are connected in a
loop by a point-to-point link. Backup ports also occur when a LAN
has two or more connections connected to a shared segment.
• Disabled — This port is not participating in the Spanning Tree.
– Interface Priority— Enter the interface priority for specified instance.
– Path Cost (1-200,000,000) — Enter the port contribution to the
Spanning Tree instance. If a loop occurs, the spanning tree considers
path cost when selecting an interface to put in the Forwarding state.
– Default Path Cost — Check to use the default path cost.
– Designated Bridge ID — Displays the bridge ID number that
connects the link or shared LAN to the root.
– Designated Port ID — Displays the Port ID number on the
designated bridge that connects the link or the shared LAN to the
root.
– Designated Cost — Displays the cost of the path from the link or the
shared LAN to the root.
– Forward Transitions — Displays the number of times the port
changed to the forwarding state.
– Remain Hops — Displays the number of hops remaining to the next
destination.464 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Defining MSTP Interfaces Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining MSTP
interfaces as displayed in the MSTP Interfaces pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 13-7. MSTP Interface CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
spanning-tree mst
instance-id cost cost
no spanning-tree mst
instance-id cost
Sets the path cost of the port for MST
calculations (in Interface Configuration
mode).
Use the no form of this command to restore
the default configuration.
spanning-tree mst
instance-id portpriority priority
Configures the device priority for the specified
spanning-tree instance (in Interface
Configuration mode).
Use the no form of this command to restore
the default configuration.
show spanning-tree mstconfiguration
Displays the MST configuration.
console(config)# interface gi1/0/9
console(config-if)# spanning-tree mst 1 cost 4Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 465
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY466 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
14
VLANs
This chapter describes how VLANs are configured on the device.
It contains the following topics:
• Virtual LAN Overview
• VLAN Membership
• Port Settings
• LAGs Settings
• Protocol Groups
• Protocol Port
• GVRP Parameters
• Private VLAN
• Voice VLANDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 467
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Virtual LAN Overview
A VLAN is a switched network that is logically segmented on an
organizational basis, by functions, project teams, or applications rather than
on a physical or geographical basis. For example, all workstations and servers
used by a particular workgroup team can be connected to the same VLAN,
regardless of their physical connections to the network, or the fact that they
might be intermingled with other teams. Reconfiguration of the network can
be done through software rather than by physically unplugging and moving
devices or wires.
A VLAN can be thought of as a Broadcast domain that exists within a defined
set of switches. A VLAN consists of a number of end systems, either hosts or
network equipment (such as bridges and routers), connected by a single
bridging domain. The bridging domain is supported on various pieces of
network equipment; for example, LAN switches that operate bridging
protocols between them with a separate bridge group for each VLAN.
VLANs are created to provide the segmentation services traditionally
provided by routers in LAN configurations. VLANs address scalability,
security, and network management. Routers in VLAN topologies provide
broadcast filtering, security, address summarization, and traffic flow
management.
None of the switches, within a defined group, will bridge any frames, not even
broadcast frames, between two VLANs. 468 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Frame Flow
Figure 14-1 describes the flow of VLAN frames from the Ingress port to the
Egress port:
Figure 14-1. Frame Flow Through a VLAN
When a frame is received, it must be assigned a VLAN. VLAN assignment is
accomplished by the following steps:
1 If the frame contains a VLAN tag, that tag is used, otherwise the frame is
classified by the port's default VLAN (PVID), if it is defined.
2 After classification, the frame may pass (if enabled) through ingress
filtering, where the frame is dropped if the frame's VLAN ID is not one of
the VLANs to which the ingress port belongs.
3 A forwarding decision is made, as a function of the VLAN ID and the
destination MAC address.
4 The egress rules define whether the frame is to be sent as tagged or
untagged.
Special-case VLANs
VLAN#1 and VLAN#4095 are special-case VLANs:
• VLAN1 — Defined as the default VLAN, and may only be used as a Ports
Default VLAN ID (PVID). This means that if the VLAN, whose VID is the
current port's PVID, is deleted from the port (or from the system), that
port's PVID is set to 1. VLAN#1 cannot be deleted from the system.
• VLAN #4095 — Defined (according to standard and industry practice) as
the "discard" VLAN. A frame classified to this VLAN is silently dropped.
Ingress Egress
VLAN
C lassification
Ingress
Filtering
Egress
Filtering
Progress
Forwarding
Decision
Filtering
Database
Received
Frame
T ransmitted
Frame
Ingress Egress
VLAN
C lassification
Ingress
Filtering
Egress
Filtering
Progress
Forwarding
Decision
Filtering
Database
Received
Frame
T ransmitted
FrameDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 469
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
QinQ Tagging
QinQ tagging enables you to add an additional tag to previously-tagged
packets. The added tag provides a VLAN ID to each customer, which ensures
private and segregated network traffic. The VLAN ID tag is assigned to a
customer port in the service provider network. The designated port then
provides additional services to the packets with the double-tags. This enables
administrators to expand service to VLAN users.
Port Modes
Ports participating in Layer 2 switching may be classified as:
• Access Ports
Ports set to Access mode belong to a single VLAN, whose VID is the
currently set PVID (default =1). These ports accept all untagged frames,
and all frames tagged with the VID, currently set as the port's PVID. All
traffic is sent untagged. If the VLAN, whose VID is set as the current PVID
of the port, is deleted from the system, or deleted from the port, the port's
PVID will be set to 1, meaning that the port will be made a member of
VLAN#1, the default VLAN.
Ingress filtering is always enabled for ports in Access mode.
Setting an Access port’s PVID to 4095 effectively shuts it down, as no
frames will be transferred in either direction.
Access mode ports are intended to connect end-stations to the system,
especially when the end-stations are incapable of generating VLAN tags.
• Trunk Ports
Ports set to Trunk mode may belong to multiple VLANs. The default
VLAN membership of a trunk port is all VLANs (1-4094). A PVID must be
set on the port (it can be a non-existing VLAN). Trunk ports accept tagged
and untagged frames. Untagged frames will be classified to the VLAN
whose VLAN ID (VID) is configured as the port’s PVID.
Frames, sent from the port in the VLAN, whose VID is the current PVID,
are sent untagged. Frames sent in all other VLANs active on the port are
sent tagged.470 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Ingress filtering is always enabled on Trunk-mode ports. Incoming frames
will undergo ingress filtering, and if correctly tagged, (tagged with a VID of
one of the VLANs to which the port currently belongs) are admitted.
The default PVID is 1 (the default VLAN). If another VID is configured as
the port’s PVID, and the corresponding VLAN is deleted from the port or
from the system, the port’s PVID reverts to 1, meaning that the port is
made a member of the default VLAN.
Setting a trunk-port’s PVID to 4095 limits traffic to tagged frames.
Incoming untagged frames are silently discarded, and no frames are sent
untagged.
Trunk-mode ports are intended for switch-to-switch links, where traffic is
usually tagged.
• General Ports
Ports set to General mode may be members of multiple VLANs. Each of
these VLANs may be configured to be tagged or untagged. This setting
applies to transmitted frames. Incoming untagged frames are classified
into the VLAN whose VID is the currently configured PVID.
Ingress filtering may be disabled on General ports. Ingress filtering is
enabled by default.
• Promiscuous Ports
A promiscuous port can communicate with all ports of the same Private
VLAN (PVLAN), including the isolated ports of the same PVLAN.
• Isolated
An isolated port has complete Layer 2 isolation from the other ports within
the same PVLAN, but not from the promiscuous ports. Isolated ports can
communicate with promiscuous ports.
In the factory default configuration, all ports are designated as Access ports,
and are associated with the default VLAN.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 471
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Acceptable Frame Type
The acceptable frame type can be set on a port to accept all frames (tagged
and untagged), tagged only, or untagged only. This setting takes precedence
over all other settings, so that if the acceptable frame type is tagged only,
incoming untagged frames are silently discarded, even if the port has a valid
PVID.472 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
VLAN Membership
The device supports up to 2-4094 VLANs.
Ports are assigned to a VLAN in the Port Settings pages.
To view the ports in a VLAN, and assign various parameters:
1 Click Switching > VLAN > VLAN Membership in the tree view to
display the VLAN Membership: Summary page.
Figure 14-2. VLAN Membership: Summary
The ports in the selected unit/VLAN are displayed along with their
statuses.
Each port/LAG is labeled with one of the following codes, regarding its
membership in the VLAN:Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 473
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– T — Tagged. The interface is a member of a VLAN. All packets
forwarded by the interface are tagged. The packets contain VLAN
information.
– U — Untagged. The interface is a member of a VLAN. Packets
forwarded by the interface are untagged.
– F — Forbidden. The interface is denied membership to a VLAN.
– Blank — The interface is not a VLAN member. Packets associated
with the interface are not forwarded.
2 Enter the fields:
– Show VLAN — Check one of the possible options:
• VLAN ID — Check VLAN ID, and select a VLAN ID to view.
• VLAN Name — Check VLAN Name, and select a VLAN ID to
view.
– VLAN Name (0-32 Characters) — Enter a new VLAN name.
– Status — The VLAN type. Possible values are:
• Dynamic — The VLAN was dynamically created through GVRP.
• Static — The VLAN is user-defined.
– Authentication Not Required — Enable/disable authentication on
the VLAN.
3 To define a new VLAN, click ADD, and enter the fields. The fields in this
page are described above.
Defining VLAN Membership Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining VLAN
membership as displayed in the VLAN Membership pages.
Table 14-1. VLAN Membership CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
vlan database Enters the VLAN configuration mode.474 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
vlan {vlan-range}[name vlanname]
no vlan vlan-range
Creates a VLAN.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration or
delete a VLAN.
name string Adds a name to a VLAN.
dot1x auth-not-req
no dot1x auth-not-req
Enables unauthorized devices access to
the VLAN.
Use the no form of this command to
disable access to the VLAN.
console(config)# vlan database
console(config-vlan)# vlan 1972
console(config-vlan)# end
console(config)# interface vlan 1972
console(config-if)# name Marketing
console(config-vlan)# dot1x auth-not-req
console(config-if)# end
Table 14-1. VLAN Membership CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 475
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Port Settings
After a VLAN has been defined, assign ports to it.
To assign a VLAN to untagged packets, arriving on the device, enter the port
default VLAN ID (PVID). All untagged packets arriving to the device are
tagged by the ports PVID.
All ports must have a defined PVID. If no other value is configured, the
default VLAN PVID is used. VLAN ID #1 is the default VLAN, and cannot
be deleted from the system.
To configure ports on a VLAN:
1 Click Switching > VLAN > Port Settings in the tree view to display the
Port Settings: Summary page.
Figure 14-3. Port Settings: Summary
All interfaces on the selected unit and their settings are displayed.
2 To modify the port settings, click Edit, and enter the fields:
– Interface — Enter the unit/port number to be modified.
– Switchport Mode — Select whether the port is in Layer 2 or Layer 3.
If the port is in Layer 2, enter the parameters described below,
otherwise the fields are not relevant.476 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Port VLAN Mode — Enter the port VLAN mode. The possible
options are:
• General — The port belongs to VLANs, and each VLAN is
user-defined as tagged or untagged (full 802.1Q mode).
• Access — The port belongs to a single untagged VLAN. When a
port is in Access mode, the packet types that are accepted on the
port cannot be designated. Ingress filtering cannot be
enabled/disabled on an access port.
• Trunk — The port belongs to VLANs on which all ports are tagged
(except for one port that can be untagged).
• Customer — When a port is in Customer mode, an added tag
provides a VLAN ID to each customer, ensuring private and
segregated network traffic for that customer.
• Private VLAN Promiscuous — The port is a promiscuous port.
• Private VLAN Host — The port is an isolated port
– Current Reserved VLAN — Displays the VLAN currently designated
by the system as the reserved VLAN.
– Reserve VLAN for Internal Use (1-4094) — Check to enter a reserved
VLAN, and enter its ID. If none is required, check None.
– PVID (1-4095) — Enter a VLAN ID to be added to untagged packets.
The possible values are 1-4095. VLAN 4095 is defined according to
standard and industry practice as the discard VLAN. Packets classified
to the discard VLAN are dropped.
– VLAN List (I - Inactive Configuration) — Enter the VLAN(s) to
which this port belongs, and indicate its type. The possible options are:
• T — Tagged. The port is a member of a VLAN. All packets
forwarded by the LAG are tagged. The packets contain VLAN
information.
• U — Untagged. The port is a member of a VLAN. Packets
forwarded by the LAG are untagged.
• F — Forbidden. The port is denied membership to a VLAN.
Click Add to move the port to the VLAN list together with its type.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 477
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Frame Type — Select the packet type accepted on the port. The
possible options are:
• Admit All — Both tagged and untagged packets are accepted on
the port.
• Admit Tagged Only — Only tagged packets are accepted on the
port.
• Admit Untagged Only — Only untagged packets are accepted on
the port.
– Ingress Filtering — Enable/disable ingress filtering, which discards
packets that are destined to VLANs of which the specific port is not a
member.
– Native VLAN ID(1-4094) — Enter VLAN used for untagged traffic to
trunk ports.
– Multicast VLAN ID(1-4094) — Enter VLAN used for Multicast TV
VLAN traffic on access ports.
– Customer VLAN ID(1-4094) — Enter VLAN used for customer
ports.
Assigning Ports to VLAN Groups Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for assigning ports to
VLAN groups.
Table 14-2. Port-to-VLAN Group Assignments CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
switchport general acceptableframe-type {tagged-only|untaggedonly|all}
no switchport general acceptableframe-type
Configures ingress filtering based
on packet type tagged/untagged.
Use the no form of this command
to return to default.
switchport mode
{access|trunk|general}
Configures the VLAN
membership mode of a port.478 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
switchport access vlan {vlanid|none}
no switchport access vlan
Configures the VLAN ID when
the interface is in access mode.
Use the no form of this command
to restore the default
configuration.
switchport trunk allowed vlan
{all|none|add vlan-list|remove
vlan-list|except vlan-list}
no switchport trunk allowed vlan
Sets the trunk characteristics
when the interface is in Trunking
mode.
Use the no form of this command
to reset a trunking characteristic
to the default.
switchport trunk native vlan {vlanid|none}
no switchport trunk native vlan
Defines the native VLAN when
the interface is in trunk mode.
Use the no form of this command
to restore the default
configuration.
switchport general allowed vlan
{add|remove} vlan-list
[tagged|untagged]
no switchport general allowed vlan
Sets the general characteristics
when the interface is in general
mode.
Use the no form of this command
to reset a general characteristic to
the default.
switchport general pvid vlan-id
no switchport general pvid
Configures the PVID when the
interface is in general mode.
Use the no form of this command
to restore the default
configuration.
switchport customer vlan vlan-id
no switchport customer vlan
Sets the port's VLAN when the
interface is in customer mode.
Use the no form of this command
to restore the default
configuration.
Table 14-2. Port-to-VLAN Group Assignments CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 479
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
switchport mode
{access|trunk|general|private-vlan
{promiscuous|host}|customer}
no switchport mode
Configure the VLAN membership
mode of a port.
Use the no form of this command
to restore the default
configuration.
Table 14-2. Port-to-VLAN Group Assignments CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description480 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console(config)# vlan database
console(config-vlan)# vlan 23-25
console(config-vlan)# end
console(config)# interface vlan 23
console(config-if)# name Marketing
console(config-if)# end
console(config)# interface gi1/0/8
console(config-if)# switchport mode access
console(config-if)# switchport access vlan 23
console(config-if)# end
console(config)# interface gi1/0/9
console(config-if)# switchport mode trunk
console(config-if)# switchport mode trunk allowed vlan add
23-25
console(config-if)# end
console(config)# interface gi1/0/11
console(config-if)# switchport mode general
console(config-if)# switchport general allowed vlan add
23,25 tagged
console(config-if)# switchport general pvid 25Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 481
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
LAGs Settings
VLANs can either be composed of individual ports or of LAGs. Untagged
packets entering the device are tagged with the LAGs ID specified by the
PVID.
To configure LAGS on a VLAN:
1 Click Switching > VLAN > LAG Settings in the tree view to display the
VLAN LAG Settings page.
Figure 14-4. VLAN LAG Settings
All LAGs and their settings are displayed.
2 To modify the LAG settings, click Edit, and enter the fields:
– LAG — Select the LAG to be modified.
– Switchport Mode — Select whether the LAG is in Layer 2 or Layer 3.
If the LAG is in Layer 2, enter the parameters described below,
otherwise the fields are not relevant.482 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Port VLAN Mode — Enter the port VLAN mode. The possible
options are:
• General — The port belongs to VLANs, and each VLAN is
user-defined as tagged or untagged (full 802.1Q mode).
• Access — The port belongs to a single untagged VLAN. When a
port is in Access mode, the packet types that are accepted on the
port cannot be designated. Ingress filtering cannot be
enabled/disabled on an access port.
• Trunk — The port belongs to VLANs on which all ports are tagged
(except for one port that can be untagged).
• Customer — When a port is in Customer mode, an added tag
provides a VLAN ID to each customer, ensuring private and
segregated network traffic for that customer.
• Private VLAN Promiscuous — The port is a promiscuous port.
• Private VLAN Host — The port is an isolated port
– Current Reserved VLAN — Displays the VLAN currently designated
as the reserved VLAN.
– Reserve VLAN for Internal Use (1-4094) — Enter the VLAN that is
designated as the reserved VLAN after the device is reset, or select
None.
– PVID (1-4095)— Assigns a VLAN ID to untagged packets. The possible
VLAN IDs are 1-4095. VLAN 4095 is defined as per standard and
industry practice, as the discard VLAN. Packets classified to this
VLAN are dropped.
– VLAN List (I - Inactive Configuration) — Enter the VLAN(s) to
which this LAG belongs, and indicate its type. The possible options are:
• T — Tagged. The LAG is a member of a VLAN. All packets
forwarded by the LAG are tagged. The packets contain VLAN
information.
• U — Untagged. The LAG is a member of a VLAN. Packets
forwarded by the LAG are untagged.
• F — Forbidden. The LAG is denied membership to a VLAN.
Click Add to move the LAG to the VLAN list together with its type.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 483
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Frame Type — Packet type accepted by the LAG. The possible options
are:
• Admit All — Tagged and untagged packets are both accepted by
the LAG.
• Admit Tag Only — Only tagged packets are accepted by the LAG.
• Admit Untagged Only — Only untagged packets are accepted on
the LAG.
– Ingress Filtering — Enable/disable Ingress filtering by the LAG.
Ingress filtering discards packets that are destined to VLANs of which
the specific LAG is not a member.
– Native VLAN ID (1-4094) — Enter VLAN used for untagged traffic
to trunk ports, or select None.
– Multicast VLAN ID (1-4094) — Enter VLAN used for Multicast TV
VLAN traffic on access ports, or select None.
– Customer VLAN ID (1-4094) — Enter VLAN used for customer
ports, or select None.
Assigning LAGs to VLAN Groups Using CLI Commands
Refer to Table 14-2 for a list of the LAG to VLAN CLI commands.484 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Protocol Groups
Protocol groups are based on protocol-based VLANs.
Protocol-based VLANs
Untagged frames received on a VLAN-aware switch can be classified by
methods others than source port, such as data-link-layer protocol
identification. This classification method is referred to as protocol-based
VLANs.
Protocol-based VLANs are useful for isolating Layer 2 traffic of various Layer
3 protocols. If, for example, a switch serves IP stations and IPX stations that
communicate with a single VLAN-unaware server, without using
protocol-based VLANs, all the Layer 2 Broadcast traffic would reach all the
stations. With protocol-based VLANs, the switch can forward incoming
traffic from the server to stations in a specific VLAN only.
Protocol-based VLANs are only available on General ports.
Classification rules are set on a per-port basis, and may be sensitive to the
frame's encapsulation. The default encapsulation assumed is Ethernet.
On each port, a user can define associations between groups of data-link layer
protocols and ports. For each group/port combination, the user may set the
VLAN to which frames incoming on that port will be classified if they belong
to any of the protocols in the group.
Several protocol-groups may be associated to a single port, and a protocol
group may be assigned to multiple ports, if so desired.
It is not guaranteed that the VLAN to which the frame is classified exists in
the system, or is active on that port.
Restrictions
The following frames (packet) types are supported: Ethernet, RFC 1042, and
LLC Other.
There may be dependencies between protocols and encapsulations, and
specifying one protocol may automatically add additional protocols to the
protocol-group, such as specifying IP implies ARP and vice-versa. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 485
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Similarly, there may be implied dependencies between encapsulations, so that
specifying an encapsulation implies defining the protocol group for related
encapsulations. An example of this is specifying the Ethernet encapsulation,
even by default, implies IEEE802 encapsulation, as per RFC 1042.
The following standards are relevant:
• IEEE802.1V defines VLAN assignment by protocol type.
• IETF RFC 10-2 defines a standard for the transmission of IP datagrams
over IEEE 802 Networks
Defining Protocol Groups
Define protocol groups in two steps:
1 Define a protocol group by assigning one or more protocols to the group
and giving it a protocol-group ID (any integer), using the Protocol Group
pages.
2 Associate the group with a desired VLAN classification, per port, using the
Protocol Port pages.486 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To define a protocol group:
1 Click Switching > VLAN > Protocol Group in the tree view to display
the Protocol Group: Summary page.
Figure 14-5. Protocol Group: Summary
The currently-defined protocol groups are displayed.
2 To add a new protocol group, click Add, and enter the fields:
– Frame Type — Select a frame type to be accepted in the protocol
group.
– Protocol Value — Select a protocol name.
or
– Ethernet-Based Protocol Value (0600 - FFFF) — Enter the Ethernet
protocol group type.
– Protocol Group ID — Assign a protocol group ID number.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 487
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Defining VLAN Protocol Groups Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining VLAN
Protocol groups.
The following is a sample of the CLI commands:
Table 14-3. VLAN Protocol Groups CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
map protocol protocol
[encapsulation] protocolsgroup group
no map protocol protocol
[encapsulation]
Maps a protocol to a protocol group.
Protocol groups are used for protocolbased VLAN assignment.
Use the no form of this command to
delete a protocol from a group.
console (config)# vlan database
console (config-vlan)# map protocol ip protocols-group 213488 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Protocol Port
A protocol port is a port assigned to a particular protocol group. Traffic from
particular types of frames may be assigned to a protocol group, which has a
port and VLAN associated with it.
To add an interface to a protocol group:
1 Click Switching > VLAN > Protocol Port in the tree view to display the
Protocol Port: Summary page.
Figure 14-6. Protocol Port: Summary
A list of previously-defined protocol groups is displayed.
2 To assign an interface to a protocol group, click Add, and enter the fields:
– Interface — Port or LAG number to be added to a protocol group.
– Group ID — Select a protocol group ID to which the interface is
added. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 489
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Protocol ports can either be attached to aVLAN ID or a VLAN name.
– VLAN ID (1- 4094) —Check and enter a VLAN ID.
or
– VLAN Name — Check and enter a VLAN name.
Defining Protocol Ports Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI command for defining protocol
ports.
The following is a sample of the CLI commands:
Table 14-4. Protocol Port CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
switchport general map
protocols-group group vlan
vlan-id
no switchport general map
protocols-group group
Sets a protocol-based classification rule.
Use the no form of this command to
delete a classification.
console (config-if)# switchport general map protocolsgroup 1 vlan 8490 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
GVRP Parameters
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) is provided for automatic
distribution of VLAN membership information among VLAN-aware bridges.
GVRP enables VLAN-aware bridges to automatically learn VLANs-to-bridgeports mapping, without having to individually configure each bridge and
register VLAN membership.
To ensure the correct operation of the GVRP protocol, it is advised to set the
maximum number of GVRP VLANs equal to a value which significantly
exceeds:
– The number of all static VLANs both currently configured and
expected to be configured.
– The number of all dynamic VLANs participating in GVRP, both
currently configured (initial number of dynamic GVRP VLANs is 128)
and expected to be configured.
To set GVRP parameters:
1 Click Switching > VLAN > GVRP Parameters in the tree view to display
the GVRP Parameters: Summary page.
Figure 14-7. GVRP Global Parameters
2 Enable/disable GVRP on the device in the GVRP Global Status field.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 491
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
3 Check Unit ID and select a unit ID to view ports on the unit, or select
LAGs to view the LAGs in the system.
4 To set GVRP for an interface, click Edit, and enter the fields:
– Interface — Specifies port or LAG for editing GVRP settings.
– GVRP State — Enable/disable GVRP on the interface.
– Dynamic VLAN Creation — Enable/disable Dynamic VLAN creation
on the interface.
– GVRP Registration — Enable/disable VLAN registration through
GVRP on the interface.
NOTE: GVRP functions only on ports in switchport general mode. If you enable it on
another type of port, GVRP does not function.
Configuring GVRP Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring GVRP as
displayed in the GVRP Global Parameters page.
Table 14-5. GVRP Global Parameters CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
gvrp enable
no gvrp enable
In Global Configuration mode, this
command enables GVRP globally. In
Interface Configuration mode, it
enables GVRP on the interface.
Use the no form of this command to
disable GVRP on the device.
gvrp vlan-creation-forbid
no gvrp vlan-creation-forbid
Enables or disables dynamic VLAN
creation.
Use the no form of this command to
enable dynamic VLAN creation or
modification.
gvrp registration-forbid
no gvrp registration-forbid
De-registers all dynamic VLANs, and
prevents dynamic VLAN registration on
the port.
Use the no form of this command to
allow dynamic registration of VLANs on
a port.492 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
show gvrp configuration
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet
hernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number]
Displays GVRP configuration
information, including timer values,
whether GVRP and dynamic VLAN
creation is enabled, and which ports are
running GVRP.
show gvrp error-statistics
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet
hernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number]
Displays GVRP error statistics.
show gvrp statistics
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet
hernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number]
Displays GVRP statistics.
clear gvrp statistics
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet
hernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number]
Clears all the GVRP statistics
information.
Table 14-5. GVRP Global Parameters CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 493
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
console(config)# gvrp enable
console(config)# interface gi1/0/1
console(config-if)# gvrp enable
console(config-if)# gvrp vlan-creation-forbid
console(config-if)# gvrp registration-forbid
console(config-if)# end
console# show gvrp configuration
GVRP Feature is currently Disabled on the device.
Maximum VLANs: 4094
Port(s) GVRP-Status Registration Dynamic VLAN Timers(milliseconds)
Creation Join Leave Leave All
-------- ----------- ------------ ------------ ---- ----- --------
gi1/0/1 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000
gi1/0/2 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000
gi1/0/3 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000
gi1/0/4 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000
gi1/0/5 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000
gi1/0/6 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000
gi1/0/7 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000
gi1/0/8 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000
gi1/0/9 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000494 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Private VLAN
Private VLANs (PVLANs) provide Layer 2 isolation between ports that share
the same Broadcast domain, or in other words, they create a
point-to-multipoint Broadcast domain. The ports can be located anywhere in
the Layer 2 network, as opposed to protected ports which must be in the same
stack.
The switch ports can be members of a Private VLAN (PVLAN) in the
following membership types:
• Promiscuous ports that can communicate with all ports of the same
PVLAN, including the isolated ports of the same PVLAN.
• Isolated ports that have complete Layer 2-isolation from the other ports
within the same PVLAN, but not from the promiscuous ports. Isolated
ports can communicate with promiscuous ports.
The PVLAN entity is implemented by allocating the following VLANs per PVLAN:
• Primary VLAN: Carries traffic from promiscuous ports.
• Isolated VLAN: Carries traffic from isolated ports.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 495
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To configure PVLANs:
1 Click Switching > VLAN > Private VLAN in the tree view to display the
Private VLAN: Summary page.
Figure 14-8. Private VLAN: Summary
The previously-defined private VLANs are displayed.
2 To query by Associated Primary VLAN ID, check that field, enter a VLAN
ID, and click Query. The associated VLANs are displayed.
3 To define a private VLAN, click Assign, and enter the fields:
– Private VLAN ID — Select a VLAN to be assigned.
– Private VLAN Type — Select one of the possible options:
• Primary — Traffic from promiscuous ports flow through this type
of VLAN. This is for the internet or shared servers.
• Isolated —Traffic from isolated ports flow through this type of
VLAN.496 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Associate Primary VLAN — If the Private VLAN type is Isolated,
check to associate the isolated VLAN with a primary VLAN, thus
allowing traffic between isolated and promiscuous ports.
– Primary VLAN ID — Select a VLAN to be associated with the
isolated VLAN.
4 To assign ports to the private VLAN, click Membership.
5 Select a Primary VLAN ID.
6 Select a Isolated VLAN ID.
7 Select the ports to be assigned to each VLAN, and assign each port/LAG a
port type in the Admin row of ports/LAGs. The possible options are:
– H - Host (Isolated) — Port is isolated.
– P - Promiscuous — Port is promiscuous.
– C - Conditional (operational state depends on Port VLAN Mode) —
Port receives the Port VLAN type set in the VLAN Port Settings page.
See "Port Modes" on page 469 for a description of the various port modes.
Configuring Private VLAN Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring private
VLANs.
Table 14-6. Private VLAN CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
private-vlan
{primary|isolated}
no private-vlan
Configures a private VLAN.
Use the no form of this command to
return the VLAN to normal VLAN
configuration.
private-vlan association
[add|remove] secondary-vlanlist
no private-vlan association
Configures the association between the
primary VLAN and the secondary
VLANs.
Use the no form of this command to
remove the association.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 497
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
switchport private-vlan
mapping primary-vlan-id
[add|remove] secondary-vlanlist
no switchport private-vlan
mapping
Configures the VLANs of the privatevlan promiscuous port.
Use the no form of this command to
reset to default
switchport private-vlan hostassociation primary-vlan-id
secondary-vlan-id
no switchport private-vlan
host-association
Configures the VLANs of the privatevlan host port.
Use the no form of this command to
reset to default.
show vlan private-vlan [tag
vlan-id]
Displays private VLAN information.
console# show vlan private-vlan
Primary Secondary Type Ports
-------- --------- ---------- ---------------------
20 Primary gi1/0/1-2
20 201 Isolated gi1/0/1-8
20 202 Isolated gi1/0/1-2 gi1/09-18
20 203 Isolated gi1/0/1-2 gi1/0/19-21
30 Primary gi1/0/22
30 301 Isolated gi1/0/22-28
30 302 Isolated gi1/0/22, gi1/0/29-38
30 303 Isolated gi1/0/22, gi1/0/39-41
Table 14-6. Private VLAN CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description498 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Voice VLAN
The Voice VLAN feature enables you to enhance VoIP service by configuring
ports to carry IP-voice traffic from IP phones on a specific VLAN. This VLAN
is configured with a QoS profile that ensures high voice quality.
Equipment, such as VOIP phones, transmits IP traffic with a pre-configured
Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI) prefix in the source MAC address.
This enables the switch to dynamically identify ports connected to the VoIP
equipment and automatically add these ports to the Voice VLAN.
IP phones use one of the following modes, both of which are supported by the
device:
• Use only tagged packets for all communications.
• Initially use untagged packets while retrieving the initial IP address
through DHCP. Then the phone uses the Voice VLAN and starts sending
tagged VoIP packets.
Non-VoIP traffic is dropped from the Voice VLAN when the device is in Auto
Voice VLAN secured mode.
The Voice VLAN feature also provides QoS actions to VoIP, ensuring that the
quality of voice does not deteriorate if the IP traffic is received unevenly.
To summarize, when Voice VLAN is enabled and configured, and VoIP
equipment is connected to one of the switch ports, the VoIP traffic triggers
the switch’s Voice VLAN feature to add this port to the Voice VLAN (a VLAN
that usually carries only voice traffic), and to assign traffic from this port a
specific QoS profile, ensuring high voice quality.
The device supports a single voice VLAN. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 499
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Properties
To set voice VLAN parameters that apply to the voice VLAN on the device:
1 Click Switching > VLAN > Voice VLAN > Properties in the tree view to
display the Properties page.
Figure 14-9. Properties
2 Enter the fields:
– Voice VLAN State — Select Enable to use the Voice VLAN feature on
the device.
– Voice VLAN ID — Select the VLAN that is to be the voice VLAN.
– Class of Service — Select to add a CoS level to untagged packets,
received on the voice VLAN. The possible values are 0 to 7, where 7 is
the highest priority. 0 is used as a best-effort, and is invoked
automatically when no other value has been set.
– Remark CoS — Displays whether the Remark CoS is enabled.500 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Voice VLAN Aging Time — Enter the interval of time after which the
port exits the voice VLAN, if no voice packets are received.
The aging time starts after the MAC address is aged out from the
Dynamic MAC Address table. The default time is 300 sec. For more
information on defining MAC address age out time, see "Dynamic
Addresses" on page 427.
Defining Voice VLAN Properties Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI command for defining voice VLAN
properties.
Table 14-7. Voice VLAN Properties CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
voice vlan enable
no voice vlan enable
Enables automatic voice VLAN
configuration for a port.
Use the no form of this command to
disable automatic voice VLAN
configuration.
voice vlan id vlan-id
no voice vlan id
Enables the voice VLAN and configures
the voice VLAN ID in Global
Configuration mode.
Use the no form of this command to
disable voice VLAN.
voice vlan cos cos-queue
[remark]
no voice vlan cos
Sets the voice VLAN Class of Service
(CoS) queue.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
voice vlan aging-timeout
minutes
no voice aging-timeout
Sets the voice VLAN aging timeout in
Global Configuration mode.
Use the no form of this command to
return to default.
show voice vlan
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabite
thernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number]
Use the show voice vlan EXEC command
to display the voice VLAN status.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 501
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
console# show
voice vlan
Aging timeout:
OUI table
1440 minutes
MAC Address -
Prefix
Description
00:E0:BB 3COM
00:03:6B Cisco
00:E0:75 Veritel
00:D0:1E Pingtel
00:01:E3 Siemens
00:60:B9 NEC/Philips
00:0F:E2 Huawei-3COM
00:09:6E Avaya
Voice VLAN VLAN
ID: 8
CoS: 6
Remark: Yes
Interface Enabled Secure Activated
--------- -------- ------ ---------
gi1/0/1 Yes Yes Yes
gi1/0/2 Yes Yes Yes
gi1/0/3 Yes Yes Yes
gi1/0/4 Yes Yes Yes502 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Port Setting
To configure voice VLAN ports properties:
1 Click Switching > VLAN > Voice VLAN > Port Setting in the tree view
to display the Port Setting: Summary page.
Figure 14-10. Voice VLAN Port Setting
A list of the ports and their voice VLAN settings is displayed.
2 To modify the voice VLAN settings for an interface, click Edit, and enter
the fields:
– Interface — Enter the specific port or LAG to which the Voice VLAN
settings are applied.
– Voice VLAN Mode — Select the Voice VLAN mode. The possible
options are: Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 503
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• None— Disables the selected port/LAG on the Voice VLAN. This
is the default.
• Static — Statically adds the port to the Voice VLAN. This is
usually done for VoIP uplink ports that connect the device to VoIP
PBX, for example.
• Auto — Indicates that if traffic with an IP phone MAC address is
transmitted on the port/LAG, the port/LAG joins the Voice
VLAN. The port/LAG is aged out of the voice VLAN if the IP
phone’s MAC address (with an OUI prefix) is aged out. If the
MAC address of the IP phones OUI was added manually to a
port/LAG in the voice VLAN, the user cannot add it to the Voice
VLAN in Auto mode, only in Static mode.
– Voice VLAN Security — Enable/disable security on the interface.
Security ensures that packets arriving with an unrecognized OUI are
dropped (for example data packets).
Defining Voice VLAN Port Settings Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI command for defining Voice VLAN
port settings.
Table 14-8. Voice VLAN Port Settings CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
voice vlan enable
no voice vlan enable
Enables automatic voice VLAN
configuration on a port.
Use the no form of this command to disable
automatic voice VLAN configuration on a
port.
voice vlan secure
no voice vlan secure
Configures secure mode for the voice VLAN.
Use the no form of this command to disable
secure mode.504 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
OUI
Organizationally Unique Identifiers (OUIs) are a 24-bit numbers assigned by
the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Incorporated (IEEE)
Registration Authority to equipment manufacturers.
Up to 16 OUIs can be stored on the switch. Nine specific OUIs of popular
VoIP phones manufacturers are stored by default.
Traffic from each type of IP phone contains the OUI for the phone
manufacturer. When frames are received, in which the source MAC address’s
first three octets match one of the OUIs in the OUI list, the port on which
they are received is automatically assigned to the Voice VLAN.
console(config)# interface gi1/0/1
console(config-if)# voice vlan enable
console(config-if)# voice vlan secure
console(config-if)#Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 505
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To view existing OUIs, and add new OUIs:
1 Click Switching > VLAN > Voice VLAN > OUI in the tree view to
display the OUI Summary.
Figure 14-11. OUI: Summary
The previously-defined OUIs are displayed.
2 To add a new OUI, click Add, and enter the fields:
– Telephony OUI — Enter a new OUI.
– Description — Enter an OUI description up to 32 characters. 506 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Defining Voice VLAN OUIs Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI command for defining Voice VLAN
OUIs.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 14-9. Voice VLAN OUIs CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
voice vlan oui-table {add
mac-address-prefix|remove
mac-address-prefix}
[text]
no voice vlan oui-table
Configures the voice OUI table.
Use the no form of this command to restore
the default configuration.
console(config)# voice vlan oui-table add 00:E0:BB
console(config)#Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 507
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY508 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
15
Link Aggregation
This section describes link aggregation of ports.
It contains the following topics:
• Link Aggregation Overview
• LACP Parameters
• LAG MembershipDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 509
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Link Aggregation Overview
Link Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to
form a single LAG (aggregated group). Aggregating ports multiplies the
bandwidth between the devices, increases port flexibility, and provides link
redundancy.
The device supports the following types of LAGs:
• Static LAGs — Manually-configured LAGs.
• Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) LAGs — LACP LAGs
negotiate aggregating a port’s links with other LACP ports located on a
different device. If the other device ports are also LACP ports, the devices
establishes a LAG between them.
When you aggregate ports, the ports and LAG must fulfill the following
conditions:
• All ports within a LAG must be the same media type.
• A VLAN is not configured on the port.
• The port is not assigned to another LAG.
• Auto-negotiation mode is not configured on the port.
• The port is in full-duplex mode.
• All ports in the LAG have the same ingress filtering and tagged modes.
• All ports in the LAG have the same back pressure and flow control modes.
• All ports in the LAG have the same priority.
• All ports in the LAG have the same transceiver type.
• The device supports up to 32 LAGs, and eight ports in each LAG.
• Ports can be configured as LACP ports only if the ports are not part of a
previously configured LAG.510 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Ports added to a LAG lose their individual port configuration. When ports are
removed from the LAG, the original port configuration is applied to the ports.
The device uses a hash function to assign packets to a LAG member. The
hash function statistically load-balances the aggregated link members. The
device considers an Aggregated Link to be a single logical port.
Aggregate ports can be linked into link-aggregation port-groups. Each group
comprises ports with the same speed, set to full-duplex operations.
Ports in a LAG can contain different media types if the ports are operating at
the same speed. Aggregated links can be manually or automatically
configured by enabling LACP on the relevant links.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 511
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
LACP Parameters
To define LACP LAGs, configure LACP global and port parameters, such as
LACP system priority, timeout, and port priority.
With all factors equal, when the LAG is configured with more candidate ports
than the maximum number of active ports allowed, the switch activates the
highest priority candidate ports from the dynamic LAG.
To set LACP parameters:
1 Click Switching > Link Aggregation > LACP Parameters in the tree
view to display the LACP Parameters page.
Figure 15-1. LACP Parameters
The LACP parameters for all ports are displayed.
2 Enter the global LACP System Priority (1-65535) value that determines
which candidate ports will become members of the LAG.
The page displays the LACP settings of the ports on the selected unit.
3 To modify LACP parameters for a particular port, click Edit, and enter the
following fields:
– Port — Select the port for which timeout and priority values are
assigned.512 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– LACP Port Priority (1-65535) — Enter the LACP priority value for
the port.
– LACP Timeout — Select the rate of periodic transmissions of LACP
PDUs. The possible options are:
• Long — Slow transmission rate
• Short — Fast transmission rate
Configuring LACP Parameters Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring LACP
parameters as displayed in the LACP Parameters page.
Table 15-1. LACP Parameters CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
lacp system-priority value Configures the system priority.
lacp port-priority value Configures the priority value for
physical ports.
lacp timeout{long|short} Assigns an administrative LACP
timeout.
show lacp
[gigabitethernet|tengigabitether
net] port-number
[parameters|statistics|protocolstate]
Displays LACP information for
ethernet ports.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 513
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console (config)# lacp system-priority 120
console (config)# interface gi1/0/11
console (config-if)# lacp port-priority 247
console (config-if)# lacp timeout long
console (config-if)# end
console# show lacp gi1/0/11 statistics
Port gi1/0/11 LACP Statistics:
LACP PDUs sent:2
LACP PDUs received:2514 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
LAG Membership
Each device supports up to 32 LAGs per system, and eight ports per LAG.
When you add a port to a LAG, the port acquires the LAG’s properties. If the
port cannot be configured with the LAG’s properties, it is not added to the
LAG and an error message is generated.
If the first port joining the LAG cannot be configured with the LAG settings,
the port is added to the LAG, using the port default settings, and an error
message is generated. Since this is the only port in the LAG, the entire LAG
operates with the port’s settings, instead of the LAG’s defined settings.
To assign ports to LAGs:
1 Click Switching Link Aggregation LAG Membership in the tree view
to display the LAG Membership: Summary page.
Figure 15-2. LAG Membership: SummaryDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 515
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The LACP and static LAGs on each unit are displayed along with their
member ports.
This page displays the following fields:
– LACP — Aggregates the port to a LAG, using LACP.
– LAG — Adds a port to a LAG, and indicates the specific LAG to
which the port belongs.
2 Click Edit to change the status of a port in a LAG.
3 Select the LAG.
4 In the LACP row (the first row), toggle the button under the port number
to assign either the LACP or the static LAG.
5 In the LAG row (the second row), toggle the button to a specific number
to aggregate or remove the port to that LAG number.
Adding Ports to LAGs Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for assigning ports to
LAGs as displayed in the LAG Membership pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 15-2. LAG Membership CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
channel-group LAG-number
mode {on|auto}
no channel-group
Associates a port with a port-channel with or
without a LACP operation.
Use the no form of this command to remove
the channel-group configuration from the
interface.
show interfaces portchannel [LAG-number]
Displays port-channel information for all port
channels or for a specific port channel.
console(config)# interface gi1/0/11
console(config-if)# channel-group 1 mode on516 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
16
Multicast
This chapter describes Multicast support on the device.
It contains the following topics:
• Multicast Support Overview
• Global Parameters
• Bridge Multicast Groups
• Bridge Multicast Forward All
• IGMP Snooping
• Unregistered Multicast
• Multicast TV VLAN
• Multicast TV VLAN MappingDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 517
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Multicast Support Overview
Multicast forwarding enables a single packet to be forwarded to multiple
destinations. Layer 2 Multicast service is based on a Layer 2 device receiving a
single packet addressed to a specific Multicast address. Multicast forwarding
creates copies of the packet, and transmits the packets to the relevant ports.
There are two types of Multicast groups:
• Registered Multicast Group — When traffic addressed to a registered
Multicast group is received, it is handled according to its entry in the
Multicast Filtering Database and forwarded only to the registered
ports.
• Unregistered Multicast Group — If traffic addressed to an
unregistered Multicast group is received, it is handled by a special
entry in the Multicast Filtering Database. The default setting of this is
to flood all such traffic (traffic in unregistered Multicast groups).
The device supports:
• Forwarding L2 Multicast Packets — Forwards Layer 2 Multicast
packets. Layer 2 Multicast filtering is enabled by default, and is not
user-configurable.
• Filtering L2 Multicast Packets — Forwards Layer 2 packets to
interfaces. If Multicast filtering is disabled, Multicast packets are
flooded to all relevant ports.
NOTE: The system supports Multicast filtering for 256 Multicast groups.
Layer 2 Switching
Layer 2 switching forwards Multicast packets to all relevant VLAN ports by
default, managing the packet as a single Multicast transmission. While
Multicast traffic forwarding is effective, it is not optimal, as irrelevant ports
also receive the Multicast packets. The excess packets cause increased
network traffic. Multicast forwarding filters enable forwarding of Layer 2
packets to a subset of ports instead of to all ports.518 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
IGMP
Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) adds IGMP packets to Multicast
traffic. When IGMP Snooping is enabled globally, all IGMP packets are
forwarded to the CPU. The CPU analyzes the incoming packets and
determines:
• Which ports want to join which Multicast groups.
• Which ports have Multicast routers generating IGMP queries.
• What routing protocols are forwarding packets and Multicast traffic.
Ports requesting to join a specific Multicast group issue an IGMP report,
specifying that the Multicast group is accepting members. This results in the
creation of an entry in the Multicast filtering database. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 519
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Global Parameters
To enable Multicast filtering and IGMP Snooping:
1 Click Switching > Multicast Support > Global Parameters in the tree
view to display the Global Parameters page.
Figure 16-1. Global Parameters
2 Enter the fields:
– Bridge Multicast Filtering — Enable/disable Multicast filtering.
Disabled is the default value.
– IGMP Snooping Status — Enable/disable IGMP Snooping on the
device. Disabled is the default value. 520 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Enabling Multicast Filtering and IGMP Snooping Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for enabling Multicast
Filtering and IGMP snooping as displayed on the Global Parameters page.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 16-1. Multicast Filtering and Snooping CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
bridge multicast filtering
no bridge multicast filtering
Enables filtering of Multicast addresses.
Use the no form of this command to
disable multicast address filtering.
ip igmp snooping
no ip igmp snooping
Enables Internet Group Membership
Protocol (IGMP) snooping.
Use the no form of this command to
disable IGMP snooping.
console(config)# bridge multicast filtering
console(config)# ip igmp snoopingDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 521
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Bridge Multicast Groups
The Bridge Multicast Group: Summary page displays the ports and LAGs
attached to a Multicast service group and the manner in which the port or
LAG joined it.
To add and configure a Multicast group:
1 Click Switching > Multicast Support > Bridge Multicast Group in the
tree view to display the Bridge Multicast Group: Summary page.
Figure 16-2. Bridge Multicast Group: Summary
The ports and LAGs in the selected Multicast Group are displayed.522 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
2 Select a VLAN and enter the Multicast group IP address in Bridge
Multicast Address.
Two rows of ports and LAGs are displayed: for each unit
– Static — Displays available static ports/LAGs. These port/LAGs can
be included or excluded from the Multicast groups, as described
below.
– Current — Displays status of ports/LAGs in the Multicast group, as
actually applied.
3 For each port in the VLAN, toggle to S to join the port to the selected
Multicast group as a static port. Toggle a port to F to indicate that it is
Forbidden to this group. Leave the field empty if it is not involved in the
VLAN.
4 To add a new Multicast group, click Add, and enter the fields:
– VLAN ID — Select the VLAN ID to set its forwarding method.
– New Bridge IP Multicast — Enter a Multicast group IP address.
– New Bridge MAC Multicast — Enter a Multicast group MAC
address.
– Ports — Select the ports to be added to a Multicast service. Toggle a
port to S to join the port to the selected Multicast group as a static
port. Toggle a port to F to indicate that it is Forbidden to this service.
Leave the field empty if it is not involved in the VLAN.
– LAGs — Select the LAGs to be added to a Multicast service. Toggle a
LAG to S to join the port to the selected Multicast group as a static
LAG. Toggle a port to F to indicate that it is Forbidden to this service.
Leave the field empty if it is not involved in the VLAN.
The following table describes the codes used for the interface in this page:
Table 16-2. IGMP Port/LAG Members Table Control Settings
Port Control Definition
S Attaches the port to the Multicast group as static member in the static row.
The port/LAG has joined the Multicast group statically in the current row.
F Forbidden. The port cannot belong to the Multicast group.
Blank The port is not attached to a Multicast group, but it is also not forbidden.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 523
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Managing Bridge Multicast Groups Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for managing Multicast
service members as displayed in the Bridge Multicast Group pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 16-3. Bridge Multicast Group CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
bridge multicast address {macmulticast-address|ip-multicastaddress}
no bridge multicast filtering
Registers MAC-layer Multicast
addresses to the bridge table, and
adds static ports to the group.
Use the no form of this command to
disable Multicast address filtering.
bridge multicast forbidden
address {mac-multicastaddress|ip-multicastaddress}[add|remove]
{[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe
rnet] interface-list|portchannel LAG-number-list}
no bridge multicast forbidden
address {mac-multicast-address}
Forbids adding a specific Multicast
address to specific ports. Use the no
form of this command to return to
default
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
show bridge multicast addresstable [vlan vlan-id] [address
{mac-multicast-address|ipmulticast-address}] [format
ip|mac]
Displays Multicast MAC address
table information.
console(config-if)# bridge multicast address 0100.5e02.0203
add gi1/0/11,gi1/0/12
console(config-if)# end
console # show bridge multicast address-table
VLAN MAC Address Type Ports
---- ----------- ----- ----------
1 0100.5e02.0203 static gi1/0/11,
gigi1/0/12
Forbidden ports for multicast addresses:524 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
VLAN MAC Address Ports
---- ----------- ----------
1 0100.5e02.0203 gi1/0/8
19 0100.5e02.0208 gi1/0/8
console # show bridge multicast address-table format ip
VLAN IP Address Type Ports
---- ----------- ----- ----------
1 224-239.130|2.2.3 static gi1/0/11, gi1/0/12
Forbidden ports for multicast addresses:
VLAN IP Address Ports
---- ----------- ----------
1 224-239.130|2.2.3 gi1/0/8Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 525
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Bridge Multicast Forward All
Use the BridgeMulticast Forward All page to attach ports or LAGs to a device
that is attached to a neighboring Multicast router/switch. After IGMP
Snooping is enabled, Multicast packets are forwarded to the appropriate port
or VLAN.
To attach interfaces to a Multicast service:
1 Click Switching > Multicast Support > Bridge Multicast Forward All in
the tree view to display the Bridge Multicast Forward All page.
Figure 16-3. Bridge Multicast Forward All
2 Select a unit/VLAN and click on the ports and LAGs to be attached to the
Multicast service. Toggle a port to S to join the port to the selected
Multicast group as a static port. Toggle a port to F to add it as a Forbidden
port.
Two rows of ports and LAGs are displayed:526 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Static — Displays available static ports/LAGs. These port/LAGs can
be included or excluded from the Multicast groups, as described
below.
– Current — Displays status of ports/LAGs, as actually applied, in the
Multicast group.
Managing LAGs and Ports Attached to Multicast Routers Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for managing LAGs and
ports attached to Multicast routers as displayed on the Bridge Multicast
Forward All page.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 16-4. Managing LAGs and Ports Attached to Multicast Routers CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show bridge multicast filtering
vlan-id
Displays the Multicast filtering
configuration.
bridge multicast forward-all
{add|remove}
{[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe
rnet] interface-list|portchannel LAG-number-list}
Enables forwarding of all Multicast
packets on a port.
Use the no form of this command to
return to default.
console(config)# interface vlan 1
console(config-if)# bridge multicast forward-all add
gi1/0/3
console(config-if)# end
console# show bridge multicast filtering 1
Filtering: Enabled
VLAN: Forward-All
Port Static Status
------- ----------------- -----------
gi1/0/11 Forbidden Filter
gi1/0/12 Forward Forward(s)
gi1/0/13 - Forward(d)Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 527
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
IGMP Snooping
IGMP Snooping can be enabled globally, as described in the Global
Parameters page. It can also be enabled per VLAN to support selective IPv4
Multicast forwarding. In this case, Bridge Multicast filtering must also be
enabled.
By default, a Layer 2 switch forwards Multicast frames to all ports of the
relevant VLAN, essentially treating the frame as if it were a Broadcast. When
IGMP Snooping is enabled per VLAN, the switch forwards Multicast frames
to ports that have registered as Multicast clients in the VLAN.
NOTE: The switch supports IGMP Snooping only on static VLANs. It does not
support IGMP Snooping on dynamic VLANs.528 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The IGMP Snooping Querier is used to support a Layer 2 Multicast domain
of snooping switches in the absence of a Multicast router, for example, where
Multicast content is provided by a local server, but the router (if one exists)
on that network does not support Multicast.
There should only be a single IGMP Querier in a Layer 2 Multicast domain.
The switch supports standards-based IGMP Querier election when more than
one IGMP Querier is present in the domain.
The speed of IGMP Querier activity should be aligned with the IGMPsnooping-enabled switches. Queries should be sent at a rate that is aligned to
the snooping table aging time. If queries are sent at a rate lower than the
aging time, the subscriber cannot receive the Multicast packets.
To enable IGMP Snooping on a VLAN:
1 Click Switching Multicast Support IGMP Snooping in the tree view
to display the IGMP Snooping page.
Figure 16-4. IGMP Snooping
The IGMP snooping information for the VLANs on the switch is
displayed.
2 To enable IGMP Snooping on a VLAN, click Edit and select the VLAN
from the VLAN ID drop down menu.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 529
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
3 Enter the fields:
• IGMP Snooping Status — Enable/disable the monitoring of network
traffic to determine which hosts have asked to be sent Multicast
traffic. The switch performs IGMP snooping only if IGMP snooping
and Bridge Multicast filtering are both globally enabled.
• Operational IGMP Snooping Status — Displays whether IGMP
Snooping is enabled.
• MRouter Ports Auto Learn — Enables or disables auto learning of the
ports to which the Mrouter is connected.
• Query Robustness (1-7) — Enter the Robustness variable value to be
used. The Robustness value enables tuning for the expected packet
loss on a link. If a link is expected to have losses, the Robustness Value
may be increased.
• Operational Query Robustness — Displays the robustness variable
sent by the elected querier.
• Query Interval (30-18000) — Enter the interval between general
queries sent by the querier .
• Operational Query Interval — The time interval in seconds between
general queries sent by the elected querier
• Query Max Response Interval (5-20) — Enter the amount of time in
which a host should respond to a query.
• Operational Query Max Response Interval — Displays the actual
delay.
• Last Member Query Counter (1-7) — Enter the number of IGMP
group-specific queries sent before the switch assumes there are no
local members. To use the default, check Use Default.
• Operational Last Member Query Counter — Displays the
operational value of the Last Member Query counter.
• Last Member Query Interval (100-25500)— Enter the time between
two consecutive group-specific queries that are sent by the querier.
• Operational Last Member Query Interval— Displays the Last
Member Query Interval sent by the elected querier.
• Intermediate Leave — Enable/disable an immediate timeout period.
The default timeout is 10 seconds.530 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• IGMP Querier Status — Enables or disables the IGMP Querier. The
IGMP Querier simulates the behavior of a Multicast router, enabling
snooping of the Layer 2 Multicast domain even though there is no
Multicast router.
• Querier Source IP Address — Select the IP address of the IGMP
Querier. Use either the VLAN’s IP address or define a unique IP
address that will be used as a source address of the querier.
• Operational Source Querier IP Address — Operational Querier IP
address.
Configuring IGMP Snooping Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring IGMP
snooping on a VLAN:
Table 16-5. IGMP Snooping CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id
no ip igmp snooping vlan vlanid
Enables IGMP snooping on a specific
VLAN.
Use the no form of this command to
disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN
interface.
ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id
mrouter learn pim-dvmrp
no ip igmp snooping vlan vlanid mrouter learn pim-dvmrp
Enables automatic learning of
Multicast router ports in the context of
a specific VLAN.
Use the no form of this command to
remove the configuration.
ip igmp robustness count
no ip igmp robustness
Changes the value of the IGMP
robustness variable.
Use the no format of the command to
return to default.
ip igmp query-interval seconds
no ip igmp query-interval
Configures the Query interval.
Use the no format of the command to
return to default.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 531
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
ip igmp query-max-responsetime seconds
no ip igmp query-max-responsetime
Configures the Query Maximum
Response time.
Use the no format of the command to
return to default.
ip igmp last-member-querycount count
no ip igmp last-member-querycount
Configures the Last Member Query
Counter.
Use the no format of the command to
return to default.
ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id
immediate-leave
no ip igmp snooping vlan vlanid immediate-leave
Enables the IGMP Snooping
Immediate-Leave processing on a
VLAN.
Use the no format of the command to
disable IGMP Snooping ImmediateLeave processing.
ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id
querier
no ip igmp snooping vlan vlanid querier
Enables the IGMP querier on a specific
VLAN.
Use the no form of this command to
disable the IGMP querier on a VLAN
interface.
ip igmp snooping querier
address source-ip-address
no ip igmp snooping querier
address
Defines the source IP address that the
IGMP Snooping querier would use.
Use the no form of this command to
return to default.
show ip igmp snooping groups
[vlan vlan-id] [address ipmulticast-address]
Displays the Multicast groups learned
by IGMP snooping.
show ip igmp snooping
interface vlan-id
Displays IGMP snooping configuration.
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
[interface vlan-id]
Displays information about
dynamically learned Multicast router
interfaces.
Table 16-5. IGMP Snooping CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description532 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console (config)# ip igmp snooping
console (config)# interface vlan 1
console (config-if)# ip igmp snooping mrouter learn-pim-dvmrp
console (config)# interface vlan 1
console (config-if)# ip igmp snooping leave-time-out 60
console # do show ip igmp snooping groups
VLAN IP Address Querier Ports
---- ---------- ------ ----------------------
1 224-239.130 |2.2.3 Yes gi1/0/1, gi1/0/2
console # show ip igmp snooping interface 1
IGMP Snooping is globaly disabled
IGMP Snooping admin: Enabled
IGMP Snooping oper mode: Disabled
Routers IGMP version: 3
IGMP snooping querier admin: disabled
IGMP snooping querier oper: disabled
IGMP snooping querier address admin:
IGMP snooping querier address oper: 10.5.234.232
IGMP snooping robustness: admin 2 oper 2
IGMP snooping query interval: admin 125 sec oper 125 sec
IGMP snooping query maximum response: admin 10 sec oper 10 sec
IGMP snooping last member query counter: admin 2 oper 2
IGMP snooping last member query interval: admin 1000 msec oper
1000 msec
IGMP snooping last immediate leave: disable
Automatic learning of Multicast router ports is enabledDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 533
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Unregistered Multicast
Multicast frames are generally forwarded to all ports in the VLAN. If IGMP
Snooping is enabled, the device learns about the existence of Multicast
groups and tracks which ports have joined what Multicast group.
Multicast groups can also be statically enabled. This enables the device to
forward the Multicast frames (from a registered Multicast group) only to
ports that are registered to that Multicast group.
Traffic from unregistered Multicast groups, which are the groups that are not
known to the device, can either be filtered or forwarded. After a port has been
set to Forwarding/Filtering, its configuration is valid for any VLAN of which it
is a member (or will be a member of).
To set the action for unregistered Multicast groups on a port:
1 Click Switching > Multicast Support > Unregistered Multicast in the
tree view to display the Unregistered Multicast: Summary page.
Figure 16-5. Unregistered Multicast: Summary534 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The action for each port is displayed.
2 To modify the forwarding action for an interface, click Edit, and enter the
fields.
• Interface — Select a port or LAG.
• Unregistered Multicast — Select the forwarding status of the selected
interface. The possible options are:
• Forwarding — Enables forwarding of unregistered Multicast
frames on the selected port or port-channel.
• Filtering — Enables filtering of unregistered Multicast frames on
the selected VLAN interface.
Configuring Unregistered Multicast Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring
Unregistered Multicast on the device:
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 16-6. Unregistered Multicast CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
bridge multicast unregistered Configures the forwarding state of
unregistered multicast addresses.
show bridge multicast unregistered Displays the unregistered multicast
filtering configuration.
console # show bridge multicast unregistered
Port Unregistered
------- --------
gi1/0/1 Forward
gi1/0/2 Filter
gi1/0/3 FilterDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 535
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Multicast TV VLAN
This section describes the Multicast TV VLAN feature.
It contains the following sections:
• Multicast TV VLAN Overview
• Multicast TV VLAN Membership
• Multicast TV VLAN Mapping
Multicast TV VLAN Overview
The Multicast TV VLAN feature provides the ability to supply Multicast
transmissions to Layer 2-isolated subscribers, without replicating the
Multicast transmissions for all subscriber VLANs. The subscribers are the
only receivers of the Multicast transmissions.
• A Multicast TV VLAN can be defined for an Access port (a port that is
in Access mode for VLAN membership).
• All static VLANs are permitted to be a Multicast-TV VLAN.
• The configuration is performed per port.
One or more IP Multicast address groups can be associated with a Multicast
VLAN. The source port must belong to the Multicast VLAN. Source and
receiver ports do not have to be members of the same VLAN.
An end port is defined as a receiver port for the Multicast VLAN. Receiving
ports can belong to a single user VLAN and additionally to one Multicast
VLAN. The receiver port can be an access member in any VLAN, but not in
the defined Multicast VLAN. In Multicast VLAN, the receiver port can only
receive traffic and not send traffic on it. Receivers of same Multicast VLAN
are isolated in different User (Access port) VLANs and therefore isolated from
each other.
If a Multicast-TV VLAN is defined on an access port, then:
• The access port joins the Multicast-TV VLAN.
• The Multicast-TV VLAN on the receiver port is always untagged.
• The acceptable frame type of the port is set to Admit Untagged Only.536 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Multicast TV VLAN Membership
To view Multicast TV VLANs:
• Click Switching > Multicast Support > Multicast TV VLAN
Membership in the tree view to display the Multicast TV VLAN
Membership page.
Figure 16-6. Multicast TV VLAN Membership
The receiver and transceiver ports in the selected TV VLAN are displayed.
Displaying Multicast TV VLAN Membership Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI command for displaying Multicast
TV VLAN membership:
Table 16-7. Multicast TV VLAN Membership CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show vlan multicast-tv
vlan vlan-id
Displays information on the source ports and
receiver ports of multicast-TV VLAN.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 537
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Multicast TV VLAN Mapping
To set the Multicast Group IP address for a TV VLAN:
1 Click Switching > Multicast Support > Multicast TV VLAN Mapping
in the tree view to display the Multicast TV VLAN Mapping: Summary
page.
Figure 16-7. Multicast TV VLAN Mapping: Summary
The Multicast Group IP addresses for the selected TV VLAN are displayed.
2 To add the Multicast Group IP address for a VLAN, click Add, and enter
the fields:
• VLAN ID — Enter a VLAN ID.
console # show vlan multicast-tv vlan 1
Source Ports
-------------------------------------
gi1/0/8, gi1/0/9
Receiver Ports
-------------------------------------
gi2/0/1-18, gi3/0/1-18, gi4/0/1-18538 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Multicast Group IP Address — Enter the Multicast group IP address
for which the IGMP Snooping is enabled.
Mapping Multicast TV VLANs to IP Addresses Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI command for mapping Multicast
TV VLANs to Multicast IP addresses:
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 16-8. Unregistered Multicast CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id
multicast-tv ip-multicast-address
[count number]
no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id
multicast-tv ip-multicast-address
[count number]
Defines the Multicast IP
addresses that are associated
with a Multicast-TV VLAN.
Use the no form of this
command to remove all
associations.
show ip igmp snooping multicast-tv
[vlan vlan-id]
Displays the IP addresses associated with Multicast TV VLANs.
console# show ip igmp snooping multicast-tv
VLAN IP Address
---- -----------
1000 239.255.0.0
1000 239.255.0.1
1000 239.255.0.2
1000 239.255.0.3
1000 239.255.0.4
1000 239.255.0.5Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 539
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY540 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
17
LLDP
The section describes the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP).
It contains the following topics:
• LLDP Overview
• LLDP Properties
• LLDP Port Settings
• MED Network Policy
• LLDP MED Port Settings
• Neighbors InformationDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 541
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
LLDP Overview
The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) enables network managers to
troubleshoot and enhance network management by discovering and
maintaining network topologies over multi-vendor environments. LLDP
discovers network neighbors by standardizing methods for network devices to
advertise themselves to other systems, and to store discovered information.
Discovery information includes:
• Device identification
• Device capabilities
• Device configuration
The advertising device transmits multiple advertisement message sets in a
single LAN packet. The multiple advertisement message sets are sent in the
packet’s Type Length Value (TLV) field.
LLDP devices must support chassis and port ID advertisements, as well as
system name, system ID, system description, and system capability
advertisements.
LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) increases network flexibility
by enabling various IP systems to co-exist on a single network, and provides
the following features:
• Detailed network topology information, including information on which
devices are located on the network and where the devices are located, for
example, which IP phone is connect to which port, which software is
running on which switch, and which port is connected to which device.
• Automatic deployment of policies over networks for:
– QoS Policies
– Voice VLANs
• Emergency Call Service (E-911) via IP phone location information.
• Troubleshooting information. LLDP MED sends network managers alerts
for:
– Port speed and duplex mode conflicts
– QoS policy misconfigurations542 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
LLDP Properties
To enable and configure LLDP:
1 Click System > LLDP > LLDP Properties in the tree view to display the
LLDP Properties page.
Figure 17-1. LLDP Properties
The current LLDP properties are displayed.
2 Enter the fields:
– Enable LLDP — Enable/disable LLDP on the device.
– Updates Interval (5-32768) — Enter the rate at which LLDP
advertisement updates are sent.
– Hold Multiplier (2-10) — Enter the hold time to be sent in the
LLDP update packets, as a multiple of the timer value.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 543
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Reinitializing Delay (1-10) — Enter the minimum time, in seconds,
that an LLDP port waits before reinitializing LLDP transmission.
– Transmit Delay (1-8192) — Enter the amount of time that passes
between successive LLDP frame transmissions, due to changes in the
LLDP local systems MIB.
To use the default values for any field, select Use Default.544 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring LLDP Using CLI Commands
The following commands are used to set the fields in the LLDP Properties
page.
Table 17-1. LLDP Properties CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
lldp run
no lldp run
Enables enable LLDP.
Use the no form of this command to
disable LLDP.
lldp timer seconds
no lldp timer
Specifies how often the software sends
LLDP updates.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
lldp hold-multiplier number
no lldp hold-multiplier
Specifies the time that the receiving
device should hold a Link Layer Discovery
Protocol (LLDP) packet before discarding
it.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
lldp reinit seconds
no lldp reinit
Specifies the minimum time an LLDP
port will wait before reinitializing.
Use the no form of this command to revert
to the default setting.
lldp tx-delay seconds
no lldp tx-delay
Specifies the delay between successive
LLDP frame transmissions.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 545
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console(config)# interface gi1/0/1
console(config-if)# lldp run
console(config)# lldp timer 30
console(config)# lldp hold-multiplier 3
console(config)# lldp reinit 4546 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
LLDP Port Settings
LLDP configuration of a port includes activating LLDP notification on it,
and selecting the optional TLVs that will be sent in the LLDP PDU, in
addition to the mandatory ones.
By setting these properties, it is possible to provide additional types of
information to those network devices that support the LLDP.
To configure LLDP per port:
1 Click System > LLDP > LLDP Port Settings in the tree view to display
the LLDP Port Settings: Summary page.
Figure 17-2. LLDP Port Settings: Summary
LLDP settings for all ports are displayed.
2 To modify the LLDP settings for a port, click Edit and select the port to be
configured.
3 Select the transmission type on which LLDP is to be configured in the
State field. The possible options are:
• Tx Only — Enables LLDP on transmitting LLDP packets only.
• Rx Only — Enables LLDP on receiving LLDP packets only. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 547
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Tx & Rx — Enables LLDP on transmitting and receiving LLDP
packets.
• Disable — LLDP is disabled on the port.
4 Move the optional TLVs that the switch should advertise from the
Available TLV list to the Optional TLV list. The TLVs advertise the
following:
– Port Description — Information about the port, including
manufacturer, product name, and hardware/software version.
– System Name — System's assigned name (in alpha-numeric format).
This value equals the sysName object.
– System Description — Description of the network entity (in alphanumeric format). This includes the system's name and versions of the
hardware, operating system, and networking software supported by the
switch. This value equals the sysDescr object.
– System Capabilities — Primary functions of the switch, and whether
or not these functions are enabled in the switch. The capabilities are
indicated by two octets. Bits 0 through 7 indicate Other, Repeater,
Bridge, WLAN AP, Router, Telephone, DOCSIS cable device, and
station respectively. Bits 8 through 15 are reserved.
– 802.3 MAC-PHY — Duplex and bit rate capability and the current
duplex and bit rate settings of the sending device. It also advertises
whether the current settings are due to auto-negotiation or manual
configuration.
An alternative way to select the TLVs is to select the Use Default field, in
which case only mandatory TLVs are used. These are: Chassis subtype
(MAC address), Port subtype (port number), and TTL (time-to-leave).
5 Enter the Management IP Address that is advertised from the interface.
Check Use Default to use the default Management IP address.548 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring LLDP Port Settings Using CLI Commands
The following commands are used to configure LLDP on ports.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 17-2. LLDP Port Settings CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
lldp transmit
no lldp transmit
Enables transmitting LLDP on an
interface.
Use the no form of this command to stop
transmitting LLDP on an interface.
lldp receive
no lldp receive
Enables receiving LLDP on an interface.
Use the no form of this command to stop
receiving LLDP on an interface.
lldp optional-tlv tlv1 [tlv2
… tlv5]
Specifies which optional TLVs
from the basic set should be
transmitted
console(config)# interface gi1/0/1
console(config-if)# lldp transmit
console(config-if)# lldp receive
console(config-if)# lldp optional-tlv port-descDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 549
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
MED Network Policy
An LLDP-MED network policy is a set of configuration settings that is
identified by a network policy number. Policies are loaded into LLDP-MED
TLVs, and sent to devices connected to the switch. A network policy instructs
the connected device as to how to send traffic, for example, a policy can be
created for VoIP phones that instructs them to:
• Send voice traffic on VLAN 10
• Tag voice traffic with DSCP=63
• Transmit data-traffic to the switch (from the PC connected to the switch
through the VoIP phone) without modification to traffic sent by the PC
(typically, Untagged).
For network policies to be implemented, they must be created and then
associated with ports.
Before policies are defined, the administrator must create the VLANs, and
configure memberships in the VLANs, based on the specification in the
LLDP-MED network policies. 550 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To add a MED network policy:
1 Click System > LLDP > MED Network Policy in the tree view to display
the MED Network Policy: Summary page.
Figure 17-3. MED Network Policy: Summary
Previously-defined network policies are displayed.
2 To add a network policy, click Add, and enter the fields:
– Network Policy Number — Select an available network policy
number.
– Application — Select the application (type of traffic) for which the
network policy is defined.
– VLAN ID — Enter the VLAN ID to which the traffic should be sent.
– VLAN Type —Select whether the traffic is Tagged or Untagged.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 551
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– User Priority — Select the traffic priority assigned to the network
application.
– DSCP Value — Select the value to be used by neighbors to mark the
traffic sent to the switch.
Configuring MED Network Policies Using CLI Commands
The following commands are used to configure MED network policies.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 17-3. LLDP MED Network Policies CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
lldp med network-policy number
application [vlan id] [vlan-type
{tagged|untagged}] [up
priority][dscp value]
no lldp med network-policy number
Defines an LLDP MED network
policy.
Use the no form of this command
to remove an LLDP MED
network policy.
console(config)# lldp med network-policy 1 voice-signaling
vlan 1552 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
LLDP MED Port Settings
To assign MED network policies to ports:
1 Click System > LLDP > MED Port Settings in the tree view to display
the MED Port Settings: Summary page.
Figure 17-4. MED Port Settings: Summary
2 Select the unit in the stack. All ports on that unit are displayed along with
the following fields:
– LLDP MED Status — Specifies if LLDP-MED is enabled on the
selected port.
– Network Policy — Specifies whether a network policy is assigned to
the port.
– Location — Specifies whether the location is advertised.
– PoE — Specifies whether PoE is enabled on the port.
3 To modify network policies on a port, click Edit.
4 Select the port to be configured, and enter the fields for the port:
– Enable LLDP-MED — Enable/disable LLDP-MED on the port.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 553
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Available TLVs — Contains a list of available TLVs that can be
advertised by the port. The possible options are:
• Network Policy — Advertises the network policy attached to the
port.
• Location — Advertises the port’s location.
• PoE-PSE — Indicates if the connected media is a PoE or PSE
(Power Sourcing Equipment) device.
Move the TLVs to be published to the Tx Optional TLVs list.
– Available Network Policy — Contains a list of network policies that
can be assigned to a port. Move the network policies to be assigned to
the port to the Network Policy list.
– Location Coordinate (16 Bytes in Hex) — Displays the device’s
location map coordinates.
– Location Civic Address (6-160 Bytes in Hex) — Displays the device’s
civic or street address location, for example 414 23rd Ave E.
– Location ECS ELIN (10-25 Bytes in Hex) — Displays the device’s
ECS ELIN location.
5 To view MED details for a port, click Details and select a port.
The following fields are displayed for the port:
– Auto-Negotiation Status — Enabled specifies that auto-negotiation is
enabled on the port; Disabled indicates that it is not.
– Advertised Capabilities — The list of port capabilities advertised for
the port.
– MAU Type — The Media Attachment Unit type. The MAU performs
physical layer functions, including digital data conversion from the
Ethernet interfaces' collision detection and bit injection into the
network, for example, 100BASE-TX full duplex mode.
– System Name — The system's assigned name (in alpha-numeric
format). This value equals the sysName object.
– System Description — A description of the network entity (in alphanumeric format). This includes the system's name and versions of the
hardware, operating system, and networking software supported by the
switch. This value equals the sysDescr object. 554 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Device ID — The device ID advertised, for example, the device MAC
address.
– Device Type — The type of device.
– LLDP MED Capabilities — The TLVs that are advertised by the
port.
– LLDP MED Device Type — Specifies whether a sender is a network
connectivity device or an endpoint device.
– Application — The following fields are displayed for each possible
application type:
• Application Type — The application type.
• Flags — The VLAN tagging status for the application type:
Tagged or Untagged.
• VLAN ID — The VLAN number for the application type.
• User Priority — The user priority for the application type.
• DSCP — The DSCP value assigned to the network policy.
– Location Type — Displays the port’s LLDP location type:
• Coordinates— Device’s location map coordinates.
• Civic Address — Device’s civic or street address location, for
example 414 23rd Ave E.
• ECS ELIN — Device’s ECS ELIN location.
– Location Address — Displays the port’s LLDP location, according to
the Location Type.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 555
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring MED on Ports Using CLI Commands
The following commands are used to set the fields in the MED Port Settings
pages.
Table 17-4. LLDP Properties CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
lldp med enable [tlv … tlv4]
no lldp med enable
Enables LLDP MED on an interface.
Use the no form of this command to
disable LLDP MED on an interface.
lldp med network-policy
{add|remove} number
no lldp med network-policy
number
Attaches or removes an LLDP MED
network policy on an interface.
Use the no form of this command to
remove all the LLDP MED network
policies from the interface
lldp med location
{{coordinate data}|{civicaddress data}|{ecs-elin
data}}
no lldp med location
{coordinate|civicaddress|ecs-elin}
configure the LLDP MED for an
interface.
Use the no form of this command to
delete location information for an
interface.
show lldp med configuration
[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet
hernet] port-number
Displays the LLDP MED configuration
for all interfaces or for a specific
interface.
show lldp local
[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet
hernet] port-number
Displays the LLDP information that is
advertised from a specific port.556 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console(config)# interface gi1/0/3
console(config)# lldp med location civic-address 6162636465
console# show lldp med configuration
Fast Start Repeat Count: 4.
Network policy 1
-------------------
Application type: voiceSignaling
VLAN ID: 1 untagged
Layer 2 priority: 0
DSCP: 0
Port Capabilities Network Location PoE Notif Inventory
Policy ications
--------- -------------- ---------------- ---------- ------
gi1/0/1 Yes Yes Yes No Enabled No
gi1/0/2 Yes Yes No No Enabled NoDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 557
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Neighbors Information
Use the Neighbors Information page to view information that was received in
LLDP advertisements from neighboring devices.
The neighbor’s information is deleted after timeout. Timeout is the
maximum interval that can pass without receiving an LLDP PDU from a
neighbor. The timeout value is computed from the neighbor’s Time to Live
TLV.
To view neighbors information:
1 Click System > LLDP > Neighbors Information in the tree view to
display the Neighbors Information page.
Figure 17-5. Neighbors Information
The following fields are displayed for each port on the device that has a
discovered neighbor:
– Port — Port number for which neighboring information is displayed 558 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Device ID — Neighboring device ID
– System Name — Name of the neighboring system
– Port ID — Neighboring port ID
– Capabilities — Neighboring device capabilities
2 Click Clear Neighbors Table to delete all the entries or select Remove to
delete a specific port entry.
3 Click the Details button of a port to display the Neighbors Information:
Details page for that port.
In addition to the fields displayed in the MED Port Settings: Details
Advertise Information page and the Green Ethernet Configuration pages,
the following fields are displayed for the neighbors of the selected port:
– Power Type — Port’s power type
– Power Source — Port’s power source
– Power Priority — Port’s power priority
– Power Value — Port’s power value, in Watts
– Hardware revision — Hardware revision
– Firmware revision — Firmware revision
– Software revision — Software revision
– Serial number — Device serial number
– Manufacturer name — Device manufacturer name
– Model name — Device model name
– Asset ID — Asset ID
Configuring LLDP Neighbors Using CLI Commands
The following commands are used to configure LLDP neighbors.
Table 17-5. LLDP Neighbors Information CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show lldp neighbors
[gigabitethernet|tengigabite
thernet] port-number
Displays information about neighboring
devices discovered using LLDPDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 559
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console# show lldp neighbors
Port Device ID Port ID System Capabili TTL
Name ties
--------- ----------------- -------- ------- ------- ----
gi2/0/17 00:75:73:71:72:55 1/e21 0 91
gi2/0/33 00:12:cf:7c:63:a0 1/e1 0 92
gi2/0/33 00:11:22:11:22:33 1/g39 0 107
gi2/0/33 00:aa:aa:aa:aa:aa 1/e37 0 106
gi2/0/41 a4:ba:db:57:7c:8d g13 O 97560 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
18
Dynamic ARP Inspection
This section describes dynamic ARP inspection.
It contains the following topics:
• Dynamic ARP Inspection Overview
• Global Settings
• Dynamic ARP Inspection List
• Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries
• VLAN Settings
• Trusted InterfacesDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 561
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Dynamic ARP Inspection Overview
ARP Inspection eliminates man-in-the-middle attacks, where false ARP
packets are inserted into the subnet. ARP requests and responses are
inspected, and their MAC-address-to-IP-address binding is checked according
to the ARP Inspection List defined by the user (in the Dynamic ARP
Inspection List and Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries pages). If the packet’s IP
address was not found in the ARP Inspection List, and DHCP Snooping is
enabled for a VLAN, a search of the DHCP Snooping database is performed.
See "How DHCP Snooping Works" on page 573 for an explanation of the
DHCP Snooping database. If the IP address is found the packet is valid, and is
forwarded.
Packets with invalid ARP Inspection bindings are logged and dropped.
Ports are classified as follows:
• Trusted — Packets are not inspected.
• Untrusted —Packets are inspected as described above.
The following additional validation checks may be configured by the user:
• Source MAC — Compares the packet’s source MAC address in the
Ethernet header against the sender’s MAC address in the ARP request.
This check is performed on both ARP requests and responses.
• Destination MAC — Compares the packet’s destination MAC address in
the Ethernet header against the destination interface’s MAC address. This
check is performed for ARP responses.
• IP Addresses — Compares the ARP body for invalid and unexpected IP
addresses. Addresses include 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255, and all IP Multicast
addresses. 562 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Global Settings
To enable ARP inspection on the device:
1 Click Switching > Dynamic ARP Inspection > Global Settings in the
tree view to display the Global Settings page.
Figure 18-1. Global Settings
2 Enter the fields:
• Enable ARP Inspection — Enable/disable ARP inspection.
• ARP Inspection Validate — Enable/disable the following checking
source MAC address, destination MAC address and IP addresses
against the respective addresses in the ARP body.
• Minimal Syslog Interval (0 – 86400) — Enter the minimum time
interval between successive ARP SYSLOG messages. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 563
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Setting Dynamic ARP Inspection Global Settings Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields
in the Global Settings pages.
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
Table 18-1. ARP Inspection Global Settings CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip arp inspection
no ip arp inspection
Enables ARP inspection.
Use the no form of this command to
disable ARP inspection.
ip arp inspection validate
no ip arp inspection
validate
Performs specific checks for dynamic ARP
inspection.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
ip arp inspection logging
interval {seconds |
infinite}
no ip arp inspection logging
interval
Sets the minimum time interval between
successive ARP SYSLOG messages.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
console(config)# ip arp inspection
console(config)# ip arp inspection validate564 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Dynamic ARP Inspection List
An ARP inspection list consists of entries where each entry is a pair of
MAC/IP addresses.
To create a new ARP inspection list and add the first entry to it:
1 Click Switching > Dynamic ARP Inspection > Dynamic ARP
Inspection List in the tree view to display the Dynamic ARP Inspection
List: Summary page.
Figure 18-2. Dynamic ARP Inspection List: Summary
The dynamic ARP lists are displayed.
2 To create a new list and enter the first address pair in it, click Add, and
enter the fields:
• List Name — Create and enter a list name.
• IP Address — Enter the IP address that will be mapped to the MAC
address entered below.
• MAC Address — Enter the MAC address that will be mapped to the
IP address entered above.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 565
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Creating a Dynamic ARP Inspection List Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields
in the Dynamic ARP Inspection List pages.
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
Table 18-2. Dynamic ARP Inspection List CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip arp inspection list
create name
no ip arp inspection list
create name
Creates a static ARP binding list and
enters the ARP list configuration mode.
Use the no form of this command to
delete the list.
console(config)# ip arp inspection list create servers
console(config-ARP-list)#566 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries
To add additional addresses to the lists defined in the Dynamic ARP
Inspection List page:
1 Click Switching > Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries > Dynamic ARP
Inspection Entries in the tree view to display the Dynamic ARP
Inspection Entries: Summary page.
Figure 18-3. Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries: Summary
The dynamic ARP entries for the selected list are displayed.
2 To add a new address pair to a list, click Add and select the list.
3 Enter the fields:
• IP Address — Enter the IP address that will be mapped to the MAC
address entered below.
• MAC Address — Enter the MAC address that will be mapped to the
IP address entered above.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 567
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Adding Entries to a Dynamic ARP Inspection List Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields
in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries pages.
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
Table 18-3. Dynamic ARP Inspection List Entries CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip ip-address mac-address
mac-address
no ip ip-address mac-address
mac-address
Creates a static ARP binding.
Use the no form of this command to
delete a static ARP binding..
show ip arp inspection list Displays the static ARP binding list.
console(config)# ip arp inspection list create servers
console(config-arp-list)# ip 172.16.1.1 mac-address
0060.704c.7321
console(config-arp-list)# ip 172.16.1.2 mac-address
0060.704c.7322
console(config-arp-list)# do show ip arp inspection list
List name: servers
Assigned to VLANs:
IP MAC
--------------- ------------------
172.16.1.1 00:60:70:4c:73:21
172.16.1.2 00:60:70:4c:73:22
console(config-arp-list)#568 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
VLAN Settings
To assign a list of IP/MAC address pairs, defined in the Dynamic ARP
Inspection List pages, to a VLAN:
1 Click Switching > Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries > VLAN Settings in
the tree view to display the VLAN Settings: Summary page.
Figure 18-4. VLAN Settings: Summary
The VLANs and their associated lists of IP/MAC address pairs are
displayed.
2 To designate a VLAN to be associated with an ARP inspection list, click
Add VLAN and enter the VLAN ID.
3 Click Assign and select the List Name to be associated with the VLAN.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 569
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Assigning IP/MAC Address Pairs to VLANs Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields
in the VLAN Settings pages.
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
Table 18-4. Assigning IP/MAC Address Pairs to VLANs CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip arp inspection vlan vlanid
Enables ARP inspection on a VLAN, based
on the DHCP Snooping database.
Use the no form of this command to
disable ARP inspection on a VLAN.
ip arp inspection list
assign vlan-id name
no ip arp inspection list
assign vlan
Assigns a static ARP binding list to a
VLAN.
Use the no form of this command to
delete the assignment.
console(config)# ip arp inspection list assign 37 servers570 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Trusted Interfaces
Interfaces are untrusted if the packet is received from an interface outside the
network or from an interface beyond the network firewall. Trusted interfaces
receive packets only from within the network or the network firewall.
To configure an interface to be trusted:
1 Click Switching Dynamic ARP Inspection Trusted Interface in the
tree view to display the Trusted Interface: Summary page.
Figure 18-5. Trusted Interface: Summary
The ports on the selected unit and their trusted status are displayed.
2 To modify the status of an interface, click Edit.
3 Select the interface and enable/disable its Trust Status, which is the
DHCP Snooping Trust mode.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 571
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring Trusted Interfaces Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields
in the Trusted Interface pages.
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
Table 18-5. Configuring Trusted Interface Parameters CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip arp inspection trust
no ip arp inspection trust
Configures an interface trust state that
determines if incoming ARP packets are
inspected.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
show ip arp inspection
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabit
ethernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number]
Displays the ARP inspection configuration
for all interfaces or a specific interface.
console(config)# interface gi1/0/3
console(config-if)# ip arp inspection trust572 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
19
DHCP Snooping
This section describes DHCP Snooping and DHCP Relay features.
It contains the following topics:
• DHCP Snooping
• DHCP RelayDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 573
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
DHCP Snooping
This section describes DHCP snooping.
It contains the following topics:
• DHCP Snooping Overview
• Global Parameters
• VLAN Settings
• Trusted Interfaces
• Snooping Binding Database
DHCP Snooping Overview
DHCP snooping expands network security by providing layer security
between untrusted interfaces and DHCP servers. By enabling DHCP
snooping, network administrators can differentiate between trusted interfaces
connected to end-users or DHCP Servers, and untrusted interfaces located
beyond the network firewall.
How DHCP Snooping Works
DHCP snooping filters untrusted messages, and stores these messages in a
database. Interfaces are untrusted if the packet is received from an interface
outside the network, or from an interface beyond the network firewall.
Trusted interfaces receive packets only from within the network or the
network firewall.
The DHCP Snooping Binding database contains the untrusted interfaces’
MAC address, IP address, Lease Time, VLAN ID, and interface information.
Table 19-1 describes how DHCP packets are handled when DHCP snooping
is enabled on an interface.
Table 19-1. DHCP Packet Handling when DHCP Snooping is Enabled
Packet Type Arriving from Untrusted
Ingress Interface
Arriving from Trusted
Ingress Interface
DHCPDISCOVER Forward to trusted
interfaces only.
Forwarded to trusted
interfaces only.574 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
DHCPOFFER Filter. Forward the packet
according to DHCP
information. If the
destination address is
unknown the packet is
filtered.
DHCPREQUEST Forward to trusted
interfaces only.
Forward to trusted
interfaces only.
DHCPACK Filter. Same as DHCPOFFER
and an entry is added to
the Binding database.
DHCPNAK Filter. Same as DHCPOFFER.
Remove entry if exists.
DHCPDECLINE Check if there is
information in the
database. If the
information exists and
does not match the
interface on which the
message was received, the
packet is filtered.
Otherwise the packet is
forwarded to trusted
interfaces only, and the
entry is removed from
database.
Forward to trusted
interfaces only
DHCPRELEASE Same as
DHCPDECLINE.
Same as
DHCPDECLINE.
DHCPINFORM Forward to trusted
interfaces only.
Forward to trusted
interfaces only.
DHCPLEASEQUERY Filtered. Forward.
Table 19-1. DHCP Packet Handling when DHCP Snooping is Enabled (Continued)
Packet Type Arriving from Untrusted
Ingress Interface
Arriving from Trusted
Ingress InterfaceDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 575
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
As shown in Table 19-1, the DHCP Snooping Binding database is updated by
interception of DHCPACK, DHCPDECLINE and DHCPRELEASE packets,
and is stored in non-volatile memory.
Even if a port is down, its entries are not deleted.
NOTE: Only DHCP requests on untrusted ports are maintained in the Binding
database.
Limitations
The following limitations apply:
• Enabling DHCP snooping uses TCAM resources.
• The switch writes changes to the binding database only when the switch
system clock is synchronized with SNTP.
• The switch does not update the Binding database when a station moves to
another interface.
Global Parameters
Use the Global Parameters page to:
• Enable/disable DHCP snooping globally.
• Determine whether to forward or filter DHCP packets received from
untrusted interfaces, whose source MAC address and the DHCP client
MAC address do not match.
• Determine whether to forward or filter DHCP packets, received from
untrusted interfaces, with option-82 information.
• Set Binding database update interval.576 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To configure DHCP snooping on the device:
1 Click Switching > DHCP Snooping > Global Parameters in the tree view
to display the Global Parameters page.
Figure 19-1. Global Parameters
2 Enable/disable DHCP snooping on the device in the DHCP Snooping
Status field.
3 If DHCP snooping is enabled, enter the fields:
– Option 82 Passthrough — Enable/disable whether to forward (enable)
or filter (disable) DHCP packets, received from untrusted interfaces,
with option-82 information.
– Verify MAC Address — Enable/disable MAC addresses verification.
This determines whether to forward (enable) or filter (disable) DHCP
packets received from untrusted interfaces, whose source MAC
address and the DHCP client MAC address do not match.
– Save Binding Database to File — Enable/disable saving the DHCP
snooping database to flash memory.
– Save Binding Database Internal(600-86400) — Enter how often, in
seconds, the Binding database is updated.
Configuring DHCP Snooping Global Parameters Using CLI CommandsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 577
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring DHCP
snooping global parameters.
Table 19-2. DHCP Snooping Global Parameters CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip dhcp snooping
no ip dhcp snooping
Globally enables DHCP snooping.
Use the no form of this command to
return to the default setting.
ip dhcp snooping information
option allowed-untrusted
no ip dhcp snooping information
option allowed-untrusted
Allows a device to accept DHCP
packets with option-82 information
from an untrusted port.
Use the no form of this command to
return to the default setting.
ip dhcp snooping verify
no ip dhcp snooping verify
Configures the switch to verify on an
untrusted port that the source MAC
address in a DHCP packet matches the
client hardware address.
Use the no form of this command to
configure the switch to not verify the
MAC addresses.
ip dhcp snooping database
no ip dhcp snooping database
Configures the DHCP snooping
binding file.
Use the no form of this command to
delete the binding file.
ip dhcp snooping database
update-freq seconds
no ip dhcp snooping database
update-freq
Configures the update frequency of
the DHCP snooping binding file.
Use the no form of this command to
return to default.
show ip dhcp snooping
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabiteth
ernet] port-number|port-channel
LAG-number]
Displays the DHCP snooping
configuration.578 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
console(config)# ip dhcp snooping
console(config)# ip dhcp snooping information option
allowed-untrusted
console(config)# ip dhcp snooping verify
console(config)# ip dhcp snooping database
console(config)# ip dhcp snooping database frequency 1200
console# show ip dhcp snooping
DHCP snooping is enabled
DHCP snooping database: enabled
Option 82 on untrusted port is allowed
Verification of hwaddr field is enabled
DHCP snooping file update frequency is configured to: 1200
seconds
Interface Trusted
--------- ----------
gi2/0/1 yes
gi2/0/2 yesDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 579
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
VLAN Settings
To separate ports in a VLAN, enable DHCP snooping on it.
Before you enable DHCP snooping on a VLAN, you must globally enable
DHCP snooping on the device.
When DHCP snooping is disabled for a VLAN, the Binding entries that were
collected for that VLAN are removed from the Binding database.
To enable/disable DHCP snooping on a VLAN:
1 Click Switching > DHCP Snooping > VLAN Settings in the tree view to
display the VLAN Settings page.
Figure 19-2. VLAN Settings
The list of existing VLANs are displayed in the VLAN ID list.
2 Click Add to move the VLANs, for which you want to enable DHCP
snooping, from the VLAN ID list to the Enabled VLANs list. To remove a
VLAN, click Remove to move it from the Enabled VLANs list to the
VLAN ID list.580 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring DHCP Snooping on VLANs Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring DHCP
snooping on VLANs .
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
Table 19-3. DHCP Snooping on VLANs CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan-id
no ip dhcp snooping vlan-id
Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN.
Use the no form of this command to
disable DHCP snooping on a VLAN.
console(config)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 1Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 581
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Trusted Interfaces
To define a trusted interface:
1 Click Switching > DHCP Snooping > Trusted Interface in the tree view
to display the Trusted Interface: Summary page.
Figure 19-3. Trusted Interfaces: Summary
A list of the interfaces is displayed.
2 To change the trust status of an interface, click Edit, and enter the fields:
– Interface — Select a unit and port or LAG.
– Trust Status — Enable/disable DHCP Snooping Trust mode on the
selected port or LAG. 582 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring DHCP Snooping Trusted Interfaces Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring DHCP
snooping trusted interfaces.
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
Snooping Binding Database
Entries in the DHCP Snooping Binding database consist of pairs of MAC/IP
addresses.
In addition to the entries added by DHCP snooping, entries to the Snooping
Binding database can be manually added or deleted. These entries are added
to the Snooping Binding database and Snooping Binding file, if it exists, but
they are not added to the configuration files.
A manually-added entry can be either dynamic or a static. When configuring
a dynamic entry, an expiration date must be assigned.
The refresh time (in seconds) of the binding table is added in the Global
Parameters pages.
Table 19-4. DHCP Snooping Trusted Interfaces CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip dhcp snooping trust
no ip dhcp snooping
trust
Configures an interface as trusted for DHCP
snooping purposes.
Use the no form of this command to return to the
default setting.
console(config)# interface gi1/0/5
console(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping trustDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 583
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To query and add IP addresses to the Binding database:
1 Click Switching > DHCP Snooping > Binding Database in the tree view
to display the Binding Database: Summary page.
Figure 19-4. Binding Database
A list of the database entries is displayed.
2 To query the database, enter query criteria and click Query. Database
entries matching the query are displayed.
3 To add a entry, click Add, and enter the fields:
– Type — Select the entry type. The possible options are:
• Static —IP address was statically configured.
• Dynamic —IP address was dynamically configured.
– MAC Address — Enter the MAC address to be recorded in the entry. 584 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– VLAN ID — Select the VLAN ID to which the IP address is
associated in the entry.
– IP Address — Enter the IP address to be recorded in the entry.
– Interface — Select the unit and port or LAG to be recorded in the
entry.
– Lease Time — If the entry is dynamic, enter the amount of time that
the entry will be active in the DHCP Database. If there is no Lease
Time, check Infinite.
Configuring DHCP Snooping Binding Database Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the
DHCP Snooping Binding database.
Table 19-5. DHCP Snooping Binding Database CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip dhcp snooping database
no ip dhcp snooping database
Enables the DHCP Snooping
binding database file.
Use the no form of this command
to delete the DHCP Snooping
binding database file.
ip dhcp snooping database updatefreq seconds
no ip dhcp snooping database
update-freq
Enables the DHCP Snooping
binding database file.
Use the no form of this command
to delete the DHCP Snooping
binding database file.
ip dhcp snooping binding macaddress vlan-id ip-address
[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethern
et] port-number|port-channel LAGnumber] expiry {seconds|infinite}
no ip dhcp snooping binding macaddress vlan-id
Configures the DHCP snooping
binding database and adds
binding entries to the database.
Use the no form of this command
to delete entries from the binding
database.
clear ip dhcp snooping database Clears the DHCP binding
database.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 585
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of some of the CLI commands:
show ip dhcp snooping binding
[mac-address mac-address] [ipaddress ip-address] [vlan vlanid][[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet
hernet] port-number|port-channel
LAG-number]]
Displays the DHCP snooping
binding database and
configuration information for all
interfaces or some interfaces on a
switch.
console(config)# ip dhcp snooping database
console(config)# ip dhcp snooping update-freq 3600
console# show ip dhcp snooping binding
Update frequency: 3600
Total number of binding: 2
MAC Address IP Address Lease
(sec)
Type VLAN Interface
----------- ---------- ------ -------- ----- ----------
0060.704C.73FF 10.1.8.1 7983 snooping 3 gi1/0/21
0060.704C.7BC1 10.1.8.2 92332 snooping (s)3 gi1/0/22
Table 19-5. DHCP Snooping Binding Database CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description586 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
DHCP Relay
This section describes DHCP relay.
It contains the following topics:
• DHCP Relay Overview
• Option 82
• Global Settings
• Interface Settings
DHCP Relay Overview
The device can act as a DHCP Relay agent that listens for DHCP messages,
and relays them between DHCP servers and clients, which reside in different
VLANs or IP subnets.
This functionality is intended to be used when the client ingress VLAN is
different than the VLAN on which DHCP servers are connected.
The switch can relay DHCP messages received from its IPv4 interfaces to one
or more configured DHCP servers. The switch puts the IPv4 address into the
message giaddr before relaying it to the servers. It uses the switch’s IPv4
address of the interface where the message is received. The switch uses the
giaddr from the response to determine how to forward the response back to
the DHCP client.
DHCP Relay must be enabled globally and per VLAN. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 587
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Option 82 Overview
The relay agent information option (Option 82) in the DHCP protocol
enables a DHCP relay agent to send additional client information when
requesting an IP address. Option 82 specifies the relaying switch's MAC
address, the port identifier, and the VLAN that forwarded the packet.
Both DHCP snooping and DHCP relay can insert option 82 into traversing
packets.
DHCP snooping with option 82 insertion provides transparent Layer 2 relay
agent functionality when the DHCP server is on the same VLAN as the
clients.
Limitations
The following limitations exist for DHCP Relay:
• It is not supported on IPv6.
• It is not relayed to servers on the client’s VLAN.
• Packets that have option-82 information, added by other devices, are
discarded.
• It does not support Option 82 on non-VLAN interfaces.
• It can be enabled only on a VLAN/Port/LAG that has an IP address defined
on it.588 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Option 82
To enable Option82 insertion:
1 Click Switching > DHCP Relay > Option 82 in the tree view to display
the Option 82 page.
Figure 19-5. Option 82
2 Enable/disable Option 82 insertion.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 589
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring Option 82 Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields
displayed in the Option 82 page.
The following is an example of the CLI command:
Global Settings
To set the DHCP Relay global settings:
1 Click Switching > DHCP Relay > Global Settings in the tree view to
display the Global Settings: Summary page.
Figure 19-6. Global Settings: Summary
The currently-define DHCP servers are displayed.
2 Enable/disable DHCP relay.
Table 19-6. CLI Option 82 Commands
CLI Command Description
ip dhcp information option
no ip dhcp information option
Enables DHCP option-82 data insertion.
Use the no form of this command to
disable DHCP option-82 data insertion.
console(config)# ip dhcp information option590 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
3 To add a DHCP server, click Add.
4 Enter the IP address of the DHCP server in the DHCP Server IP Address
field.
Defining Global Parameters Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields
displayed in the Global Settings pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 19-7. Global Parameters CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip dhcp relay enable
no ip dhcp relay enable
Enables DHCP relay features on the
device.
Use the no form of this command to
disable the DHCP relay agent.
ip dhcp relay address ipaddress
no ip dhcp relay address [ipaddress]
Defines the DHCP servers available for
the DHCP relay.
Use the no form of this command to
remove servers from the list.
show ip dhcp relay Displays the server addresses on the
DHCP relay.
console(config-if)# ip dhcp relay enable
console(config)# ip dhcp relay address 176.16.1.1
console(config)# do show ip dhcp relay
DHCP relay is Enabled
Option 82 is Disabled
Maximum number of supported VLANs without IP Address is 0
DHCP relay is not configured on any port.
DHCP relay is not configured on any VLAN.
Servers: 176.16.1.1
console(config)#Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 591
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Interface Settings
. NOTE: For DHCP Relay to function on an interface, it also must be activated
globally in the Global Settings page.
To enable DHCP relay on a port, LAG, or VLAN:
1 Click Switching > DHCP Relay > Interface Settings in the tree view to
display the Interface Settings: Summary page.
Figure 19-7. Interface Settings: Summary
The currently-define DHCP interfaces are displayed.
2 To enable DHCP relay on an interface, click Add.
3 Select the interface.592 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Defining Interface Settings Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields
displayed in the Interface Settings pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands that enable DHCP Relay
on VLAN 2, assign it an IP address and show the DHCP Relay status:
Interface Settings Parameters CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
ip dhcp relay enable
no ip dhcp relay enable
Enables the DHCP relay features on the
interface (in Interface Configuration
mode).
Use the no form of this command to
disable the DHCP relay agent feature on
the interface.
ip dhcp relay address ipaddress
no ip dhcp relay address
Defines a DHCP servers available for
DHCP relay.
Use the no form of this command to
remove servers from the list.
console(config)# interface vlan 2
console(config-if)# ip dhcp relay enable
console(config)# ip dhcp relay address 176.16.1.1
console> show ip dhcp relay
DHCP relay is Enabled
Option 82 is Disabled
Maximum number of supported VLANs without IP Address is 0
DHCP relay is not configured on any port.
DHCP relay is not configured on any vlan.
No servers configuredDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 593
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY594 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
20
iSCSI Optimization
This section describes iSCSI optimization.
It contains the following topics:
• Optimizing iSCSI Overview
• Global Parameters
• iSCSI Targets
• iSCSI Sessions
• Configuring iSCSI Using CLIDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 595
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Optimizing iSCSI Overview
The Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) is an IP-based
storage networking standard for linking data storage facilities. By carrying
SCSI commands over IP networks, iSCSI is used to facilitate data transfers
over intranets, and to manage storage over long distances.
iSCSI can be used to transmit data over local area networks (LANs), wide area
networks (WANs), or the Internet, and can enable location-independent data
storage and retrieval.
Unlike traditional Fiber channels, which requires special-purpose cabling,
iSCSI can be run over long distances, using existing network infrastructure.
The protocol enables clients (called initiators) to send SCSI commands
(CDBs) to SCSI storage devices (targets) on remote servers. This enables
organizations to consolidate storage into data center storage arrays, while
providing hosts (such as database and web servers) with the illusion of
locally-attached disks.
The targets listen on a well-known TCP port (or any other TCP port that has
been explicitly specified) for incoming connections. The login process is
started when the initiator establishes a TCP connection to the desired target,
through the TCP port that was explicitly specified.
The group of iSCSI TCP connections that link an initiator with a target is
called an iSCSI session.
When you connect an EqualLogic device to the switch, and iSCSI
optimization is enabled, the switch automatically recognizes the port to
which the EqualLogic equipment is connected to, and configures the STP
Mode to RSTP to support fast network convergence.
Optimizing iSCSI
iSCSI optimization provides the following features:
• Ability to assign a specific QoS profile to the iSCSI flows
• Display of iSCSI session details (connections, initiator, target, and so on)
• Identification of (self-discovered) iSCSI sessions
• Identification of iSCSI session termination
• Identification of non-active iSCSI sessions596 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Limitations
The following limitations exist:
• All iSCSI connections receive the relevant QoS, regardless of whether they
are being monitored or not. If, for example, a feature was disabled for some
period and was enabled again, it is possible that there are iSCSI TCP
connections that were established during this period of time. These cannot
be monitored, because all relevant information was already passed at the
beginning of the session. But these unidentified sessions will still be
assigned to iSCSI QoS.
• The maximum number of iSCSI TCP connections, which is also the
default setting, is 1K. This can be changed after reset.
• The number of iSCSI connections affects other system features.
iSCSI-aware, DHCP Snooping, and ACL rules all use the TCAM system
resource. If the number of iSCSI connections has been increased, the
other application rules (DHCP Snooping or ACL) can be removed after
reset.
• If the target uses redirect messages upon the initiator request, and, as a
result, the initiator opens a connection to a different target, the new target
must be configured as part of the general configuration.
• Only iSCSI flows to targets that use the iSCSI well-known port or other
explicit user-defined configuration are assigned QoS.
• The aging configuration works for each connection. The mechanism
checks connection activities in a group of 28 TCP iSCSI connections,
within the aging time. In the worst case, when the maximum number of
1K TCP connections are monitored and are not terminated gracefully, the
mechanism causes inaccuracy, namely, the last 28 TCP iSCSI connections
are aged out after (1K/28)*aging-time.
• In general, the greater the number of ungracefully terminated iSCSI TCP
connections, the greater the inaccuracy is. Not all iSCSI TCP connections
are monitored for aging at the same time. Sessions, whose associated TCP
connections are not being currently monitored, will show unchanged aging
time.
• Encryption (Ipsec) must not be applied on iSCSI traffic, otherwise a QoS
profile will not be assigned to iSCSI.
• iSCSI optimization does not work with IP fragmented frames.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 597
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Each session supports at most four TCP connections. If a new TCP
connection of an already opened iSCSI session arrives, and there are
already four TCP connections, the new connection replaces the oldest one,
within this specific iSCSI session.
• A short flow interruption, caused by STP topology change or
administrative port-down action, might cause the TCP connection to
reinitiate without closing the iSCSI session. If the actual iSCSI session
used only one TCP connection, the reinitiated one will be added to the
monitoring table, for an aging-time period. After that, it is removed from
the list.598 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Global Parameters
Use the Global Parameters page to enable iSCSI and to set iSCSI QoS frame
priority. You may also enable Remark to change the DSCP or CoS user
priority field in the packet. In the QoS Properties pages, you can then set the
queuing to strict priority or WRR, and map the CoS or DSCP to the desired
queue in the CoS to Queue or DSCP to Queue pages.
To enable iSCSI and set its QoS parameters:
1 Click System > iSCSI Optimization > Global Parameters in the tree
view to display the Global Parameters page.
Figure 20-1. Global Parameters
2 Enter the fields:
– iSCSI Status — Enable/disable iSCSI optimization.
– iSCSI COS Status — Enable/disable the Class of Service profile to
apply to iSCSI flows.
– Classification — Select whether the priority of iSCSI packets is
determined by CoS or DSCP. Check the classification, and select the
desired value.
– Remark — Enable/disable whether iSCSI frames will be remarked
with the CoS or DSCP value.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 599
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– iSCSI Aging Time — Enter how long the device will wait, after the
last received frame of an iSCSI session, before deleting the session
from the list.
Enabling iSCSI automatically enables Jumbo frames and enables Flow
Control on all interfaces. Jumbo frames are only enabled after copying the
Running configuration to the Startup configuration and resetting the device
(the Flow Control changes are effective immediately).
Defining iSCSI Global Parameters Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields
displayed in the iSCSI Global Parameters pages.
Table 20-1. iSCSI Global Parameters CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
iscsi enable
no iscsi enable
Enables iSCSI awareness.
Use the no form of the command to
disable iSCSI awareness.
iscsi cos {vpt vpt|dscp dscp}
[remark]
no iscsi cos
Sets the quality of service profile that will
be applied to iSCSI flows.
Use the no form of the command to
return to default.
iscsi aging time minutes
no iscsi aging time
Sets the aging time for iSCSI sessions.
Use the no form of the command to
cancel aging.
show iscsi Displays iSCSI settings.600 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console(config)# iscsi enable
console(config)# iscsi cos dscp 31
console(config)# iscsi aging time 10
console# show iscsi
Target: iqn.1993-11.com.disk-vendor:diskarrays.sn.45678
--------------------------------------------------------
Session 1:
---------
Initiator: iqn.1992-04.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.12.
storage:sys1.xyz
Time started: 23-Jul-2002 10:04:50
Time for aging out: 10 min
ISID: 11
Initiator Initiator Target Target
IP Address TCP Port IP Address IP port
---------- --------- ---------- -------
172.16.1.3 49154 172.16.1.20 30001 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 601
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
iSCSI Targets
To add an iSCSI target:
1 Click System > iSCSI Optimization > iSCSI Targets in the tree view to
display the iSCSI Targets: Summary page.
Figure 20-2. iSCSI Targets: Summary
The currently-defined targets are displayed.
2 To add a new target, click Add.
3 Enter the fields:
– TCP Port — TCP port used by the target for iSCSI communications.
– IP Address — IP address of the target. The IP address 0.0.0.0 is any IP
address.
– Target Name (0-223 characters) — Name of the target.602 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Defining iSCSI Targets Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields
displayed in the iSCSI Targets Table.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 20-2. iSCSI Targets Table CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
iscsi target port tcp-port-1
[tcp-port-2… tcp-port-8]
[address ip-address] [name
target-name]
no iscsi target port tcpport-1 [tcp-port-2… tcp-port-
8] [address ip-address]
Configures iSCSI port/s, target address
and name.
Use the no form of this command to
delete an iSCSI target.
show iscsi sessions Show the current iSCSI targets and
sessions.
console(config)# iscsi target port 30001 address
176.16.1.1 name iqn.1993-11.com.disk
vendor:diskarrays.sn.45678.tape:sys1.xyzDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 603
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
iSCSI Sessions
To display information about iSCSI communications to various targets:
1 Click System > iSCSI Optimization > iSCSI Sessions in the tree view to
display the iSCSI Sessions page.
Figure 20-3. iSCSI Sessions
2 Select a target and click Details. The following is displayed:
– Target Name — The name of the target.
– Initiator Name — The name of the initiator.
– ISID — The iSCSI session ID.
– Session Life Time — The amount of time that has passed since the
first frame of the session.
– Aging Time — The time left until the session ages out and is
removed.604 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Initiators/Targets — The IP address and TCP port used by each
initiator and target in the session is displayed.
Displaying iSCSI Sessions Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for displaying iSCSI
sessions.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 20-3. iSCSI CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show iscsi sessions
[detailed]
Displays iSCSI sessions
console(config)# show iscsi sessions
Target: iqn.1993-11.com.disk-vendor:diskarrays.sn.45678
-------------------------------------------------------------
Initiator: iqn.1992-04.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.12
ISID: 11
Initiator: iqn.1995-05.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.10
ISID: 222
--------------------------------------------------------------
Target: iqn.103-1.com.storage-vendor:sn.43338.storage.tape:sys1.xyz
--------------------------------------------------------------
Initiator: iqn.1992-04.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.12
ISID: 44
Initiator: iqn.1995-05.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.10
ISID: 65
--------------------------------------------------------------
console# show iscsi sessions detailed
Target: iqn.1993-11.com.disk-vendor:diskarrays.sn.45678
--------------------------------------------------------------
Session 1:
---------
Initiator: iqn.1992-04.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.12.storage:sys1.xyz
UP Time: 02:10:45 (DD:HH:MM)
Time for aging out: 10 min
ISID: 11
Initiator IP Address Initiator TCP Port Target IP Address Target IP Port
-------------------- ----------------- ---------------- -------------
172.16.1.3 49154 172.16.1.20 3001
172.16.1.3 49154 172.16.1.20 3001
1172.16.1.3 49154 172.16.1.20 3001
30001Initiator: iqn.1995-05.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.10
Status: Active
UP Time: 00:04:50 (DD:HH:MM)
Time for aging out: 2 min
ISID: 22Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 605
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring iSCSI Using CLI
The following is a sample procedure to configure the iSCSI feature using CLI:
Table 20-4. Sample CLI Script to Configure iSCSI
CLI Command Description
iscsi enable Enable iSCSI.
iscsi cos vpt 2 remark Set iSCSI flow to use VPT 2 (Layer 2
CoS). This VPT value replaces the
original VPT in the packet.
show iscsi sessions Verify that iSCSI is enabled and that the
iSCSI flows are displayed. Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 606
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
21
Statistics/RMON
This section describes many of the statistics available on the device. The only
exception is the QoS statistics described in "Quality of Service" on page 650.
It contains the following topics:
• Table Views
• RMON Components
• ChartsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 607
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Table Views
This section displays statistics in table form.
It contains the following topics:
• Denied ACEs Counters
• Utilization Summary
• Counter Summary
• Interface Statistics
• Etherlike Statistics
• GVRP Statistics
• EAP Statistics608 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Denied ACEs Counters
The Denied ACEs counters contain the number of packets that were dropped
(denied) because they did not meet ACL criteria expressed in some ACE.
To display the denied ACE counters:
1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > Denied ACEs Counters in the
tree view to display the Denied ACEs Counters page.
Figure 21-1. Denied ACEs Counters
The global number of dropped packets is displayed along with the number
of dropped packets on each interface.
2 To clear the counters, select either a stack unit and port or LAG. All
ports/LAGs in the unit are displayed.
3 Mark the counters to be cleared and click Clear Counters.
4 To clear all counters, click Clear All Counters. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 609
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Viewing Denied ACE Counters Statistics Using the CLI Commands
The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing denied ACE
counters statistics.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 21-1. Denied ACE Counters CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show interfaces access-lists
counters
[gigabitethernet|tengigabite
thernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number]
Displays Access List counters.
console# show interfaces access-lists counters
Interface Denied ACE hits
--------- -------------
gi1/0/1 55
gi1/0/2 33
gi1/0/3 32610 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Utilization Summary
Use the Utilization Summary page to display interface utilization. This page
is refreshed periodically to minimize impact on performance. Display may be
disrupted during this period.
To display interface utilization statistics:
1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > Utilization Summary in the tree
view to display the Utilization Summary page.
Figure 21-2. Utilization Summary
2 Select a unit and port/LAG.
The following fields are displayed:
– Port/LAG — The port/LAG number.
– Interface Status — The status of the interface: Up, Down or Not
Present when no port is attached to the LAG.
– % Interface Utilization — Network interface utilization percentage,
based on the duplex mode of the interface. The range of this reading is
from 0 to 200%. The maximum reading of 200% for a full duplex
connection indicates that 100% of bandwidth of incoming and
outgoing connections is used by the traffic travelling through the
interface. The maximum reading for a half duplex connection is 100%.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 611
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– % Unicast Received — Percentage of Unicast packets received on the
interface.
– % Non Unicast Packets Received — Percentage of non-Unicast
packets received on the interface.
– % Error Packets Received — Percentage of packets with errors
received on the interface.
3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to specify how frequently the
statistics should be refreshed.
The CPU utilization chart is displayed.612 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Counter Summary
To display the number of received and transmitted packets on ports, as
numeric figures and not percentages:
1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > Counter Summary in the tree
view to display the Counter Summary page.
Figure 21-3. Counter Summary
Counters for the selected units or LAG are displayed.
2 Select a port/LAG.
The following fields are displayed:
– Port/LAG — The interface number.
– Interface Status — Status of the interface: Up or Down.
– Received Unicast Packets — Number of received Unicast packets on
the interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 613
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Transmitted Unicast Packets — Number of transmitted Unicast
packets from the interface.
– Received Non Unicast Packets — Number of received non-Unicast
packets on the interface.
– Transmitted Non Unicast Packets — Number of transmitted nonUnicast packets from the interface.
– Received Errors — Number of received packets with errors on the
interface.
3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to specify how frequently the
counters should be refreshed.614 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Interface Statistics
To display the number of received and transmitted packets on an interface:
1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > Interface Statistics in the tree
view to display the Interface Statistics page.
Figure 21-4. Interface Statistics
2 Select a port/LAG.
3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to specify how frequently the
counters should be refreshed.
The following fields are displayed:
Receive Statistics
– Total Bytes (Octets) — Amount of octets received on the selected
interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 615
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Unicast Packets — Number of Unicast packets received on the
selected interface.
– Multicast Packets — Number of Multicast packets received on the
selected interface.
– Broadcast Packets — Number of Broadcast packets received on the
selected interface.
– Packets with Errors — Number of errors packets received on the
selected interface.
Transmit Statistics
– Total Bytes (Octets) — Number of octets transmitted from the
selected interface.
– Unicast Packets — Number of Unicast packets transmitted from the
selected interface.
– Multicast Packets — Number of Multicast packets transmitted from
the selected interface.
– Broadcast Packets — Number of Broadcast packets transmitted from
the selected interface.
4 Click Reset All Counters to clear these counters.616 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Etherlike Statistics
To display interface error statistics:
1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > Etherlike Statistics in the tree
view to display the Etherlike Statistics page.
Figure 21-5. Etherlike Statistics
2 Select a port/LAG.
The following fields are displayed:
– Frame Check Sequence (FCS) Errors — Number of frames received
that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the
FCS check.
– Single Collision Frames — Number of frames that are involved in a
single collision, and are subsequently transmitted successfully.
– Late Collisions — Number of collisions detected after the first 512
bits of data.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 617
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Excessive Collisions — Number of frames for which transmission fails
due to excessive collisions.
– Internal MAC Transmit Errors — Number of frames for which
reception fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error.
– Oversize Packets — Number of frames received that exceed the
maximum permitted frame size.
– Received Pause Frames — Number of MAC Control frames received
with a PAUSE operation code.
– Transmitted Pause Frames — Number of MAC Control frames
transmitted on this interface with a PAUSE operation code.
3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to clears the statistics for the
selected interface.
Viewing Interface Statistics Using the CLI Commands
The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing utilization,
counters and interface statistics.
Table 21-2. Interface Statistics CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show interfaces counters
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabit
ethernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number]
Displays traffic seen by the physical
interface.618 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI command for all ports:
The following is an example of the CLI command for a single port:
console# show interfaces counters
Port InUcastPkts InMcastPkts InBcastPkts InOctets
------- ------------ ----------- ----------- --------
gi2/0/1 0 0 0 0
gi2/0/2 0 0 0 0
gi2/0/3 0 0 0 0
gi2/0/4 0 0 0 0
gi2/0/5 0 0 0 0
Port OutUcastPkts OutMcastPkts OutBcastPkts OutOctets
--------- ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------
gi2/0/1 0 0 0 0
gi2/0/2 0 0 0 0
gi2/0/3 0 0 0 0
gi2/0/4 0 0 0 0
console# show interfaces counters gi1/0/1
Port InUcastPkts InMcastPkts InBcastPkts InOctets
-------- ------------- ------------ ------------ ------------
gi1/0/1 0 0 0 0
Port OutUcastPkts OutMcastPkts OutBcastPkts OutOctets
-------- ----------- ------------ ------------ ------------
gi1/0/1 0 0 0 0
Alignment Errors: 0
FCS Errors: 0
Single Collision Frames: 0
Multiple Collision Frames: 0
SQE Test Errors: 0
Deferred Transmissions: 0
Late Collisions: 0
Excessive Collisions: 0
Carrier Sense Errors: 0
Oversize Packets: 0
Internal MAC Rx Errors: 0
Symbol Errors: 0
Received Pause Frames: 0Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 619
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
GVRP Statistics
To display device GVRP statistics:
1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > GVRP Statistics in the tree view
to display the GVRP Statistics page.
Figure 21-6. GVRP Statistics
2 Select a port/LAG.
The number of received and transmitted packets in the following counters
is displayed:
GVRP Statistics Table
– Join Empty — The number of GVRP Join Empty packets.
– Empty — The number of GVRP empty packets.
– Leave Empty — The number of GVRP Leave Empty packets.
– Join In — The number of GVRP Join In packets.620 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Leave In — The number of GVRP Leave In packets.
– Leave All — The number of GVRP Leave All packets.
GVRP Error Statistics
– Invalid Protocol ID — The number of GVRP Invalid Protocol ID
errors.
– Invalid Attribute Type — The number of GVRP Invalid Attribute ID
errors.
– Invalid Attribute Value — The number of GVRP Invalid Attribute
Value errors.
– Invalid Attribute Length — The number of GVRP Invalid Attribute
Length errors.
– Invalid Event — The number of GVRP Invalid Events errors.
3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to specify how frequently the
statistics should be refreshed.
Viewing GVRP Statistics Using the CLI Commands
The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing GVRP statistics.
Table 21-3. GVRP Statistics CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show gvrp statistics
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethernet
] interface|port-channel LAG-number]
Displays GVRP statistics.
show gvrp error-statistics
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethernet
] interface|port-channel LAG-number]
Displays GVRP error
statistics.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 621
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console# show gvrp statistics
GVRP Statistics:
----------------
Legend:
rJE : Join Empty Received rJIn: Join In Received
rEmp : Empty Received rLIn: Leave In Received
rLE : Leave Empty Received rLA : Leave All Received
sJE : Join Empty Sent sJIn: Join In Sent
sEmp : Empty Sent sLIn: Leave In Sent
sLE : Leave Empty Sent sLA : Leave All Sent
Port rJE rJIn rEmp rLIn rLE rLA sJE sJIn sEmp sLIn sLE sLA
----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ---- ----- ---- --- ---- ---622 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
EAP Statistics
For information about EAP, see "Dot1x Authentication" on page 132.
To display EAP statistics:
1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > EAP Statistics in the tree view
to display the EAP Statistics page.
Figure 21-7. EAP Statistics
2 Select a port/LAG.
The following fields are displayed:
– Frames Received — The number of valid EAPOL frames received on
the port.
– Frames Transmitted — The number of EAPOL frames transmitted
via the port.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 623
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Start Frames Receive — The number of EAPOL Start frames received
on the port.
– Log off Frames Receive — The number of EAPOL Logoff frames
received on the port.
– Respond ID Frames Receive — The number of EAP Resp/ID frames
received on the port.
– Respond Frames Receive — The number of valid EAP Response
frames received on the port.
– Request ID Frames Transmit — The number of EAP Req/ID frames
transmitted via the port.
– Request Frames Transmitted — The number of EAP Request frames
transmitted via the port.
– Invalid Frames Receive — The number of unrecognized EAPOL
frames received on this port.
– Length Error Frames Receive — The number of EAPOL frames with
an invalid Packet Body Length received on this port.
– Last Frame Version — The protocol version number attached to the
most recently received EAPOL frame.
– Last Frame Source — The source MAC address attached to the most
recently received EAPOL frame.
3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to specify how frequently the
statistics should be refreshed.
Viewing EAP Statistics Using the CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing EAP
statistics.
Table 21-4. EAP Statistics CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show dot1x statistics Displays 802.1X statistics for the
specified interface.624 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console# show dot1x statistics gi1/0/1
EapolFramesRx: 11
EapolFramesTx: 12
EapolStartFramesRx: 1
EapolLogoffFramesRx: 1
EapolRespIdFramesRx: 3
EapolRespFramesRx: 6
EapolReqIdFramesTx: 3
EapolReqFramesTx: 6
InvalidEapolFramesRx: 0
EapLengthErrorFramesRx: 0
LastEapolFrameVersion: 1
LastEapolFrameSource: 0008.3b79.8787Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 625
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
RMON Components
This section describes Remote Monitoring (RMON), which enables network
managers to display network information from a remote location.
It contains the following topics:
• Statistics
• History Control
• History Table
• Events Control
• Events Log
• Alarms626 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Statistics
To display device utilization statistics and errors that occurred on the device:
1 Click Statistics/RMON > RMON > Statistics in the tree view to display
the Statistics page.
Figure 21-8. Statistics
2 Select a port/LAG.
The following fields are displayed:
– Received Bytes (Octets) — Number of bytes received on the selected
interface.
– Received Packets — Number of packets received on the selected
interface.
– Broadcast Packets Received — Number of good Broadcast packets
received on the interface since the device was last refreshed. This
number does not include Multicast packets. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 627
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Multicast Packets Received — Number of good Multicast packets
received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed.
– CRC&Align Errors — Number of packets received with a length
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and
1518 octets, inclusive, but with either a bad Frame Check Sequence
(FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS
with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
– Undersize Packets — Number of packets received, less than 64 octets
long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and
otherwise well formed.
– Oversize Packets — Number of packets received, longer than 1518
octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and
otherwise well formed.
– Fragments — Number of packets received, less than 64 octets in
length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets), which has
either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of
octets (FCS Error), or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets
(Alignment Error).
– Jabbers — Number of packets received, longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and having either
a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of
octets (FCS Error), or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets
(Alignment Error).
– Collisions — Number of collisions received on the interface, since the
device was last refreshed.
– Frames of 64 Bytes — Number of 64-byte frames received on the
interface, since the device was last refreshed.
– Frames of 65 to 127 Bytes — Number of 65-127-byte frames received
on the interface, since the device was last refreshed.
– Frames of 128 to 255 Bytes — Number of 128-255-byte frames
received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed.
– Frames of 256 to 511 Bytes — Number of 256-511-byte frames
received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed.
– Frames of 512 to 1023 Bytes — Number of 512-1023-byte frames
received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed.628 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Frames of 1024 to Max Octets — Number of 1024-Max Octet frames
received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed.
3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to specify how frequently the
statistics should be refreshed.
Configuring RMON Statistics Using the CLI Commands
The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing and enabling
RMON statistics.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 21-5. Configuring RMON Statistics Using CLI Command
CLI Command Description
show rmon statistics
{[gigabitethernet|tengigabiteth
ernet] interface|port-channel
LAG-number]
Displays RMON Ethernet statistics.
console# show rmon statistics gi1/0/1
Port te1/0/1
Dropped: 0
Octets: 0 Packets: 0
Broadcast: 0 Multicast: 0
CRC Align Errors: 0 Collisions: 0
Undersize Pkts: 0 Oversize Pkts: 0
Fragments: 0 Jabbers: 0
64 Octets: 0 65 to 127 Octets: 1
128 to 255 Octets: 1 256 to 511 Octets: 1
512 to 1023 Octets: 0 1024 to max Octets: 0Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 629
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
History Control
To display the requested RMON history group statistics or request a new
sample of interface statistics:
1 Click Statistics/RMON > RMON > History Control in the tree view to
display the History Control: Summary page.
Figure 21-9. History Control: Summary
Previously-defined samples are displayed.
2 To add a new entry, click Add. The New History Entry number, which
uniquely identifies the sample, is displayed.
3 Enter the fields for the entry:
– Source Interface — Sampled Ethernet interface.
– Owner (0-20 characters) — RMON station or user that configured the
entry.630 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Max No. of Samples to Keep (1-50) — Number of samples to be
saved.
– Sampling Interval (1-3600) — The time interval in seconds between
samples.
Configuring RMON History Control Using the CLI Commands
The following table contains the CLI commands for configuring RMON
history control.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 21-6. RMON History Control CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
rmon collection stats index
[owner ownername|bucket
bucket-number] [interval
seconds]
no rmon collection stats index
Enables and configures RMON on an
interface.
Use the no form of this command to
remove a specified RMON history
group of statistics.
show rmon collection history
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet
hernet] interface|port-channel
LAG-number]
Displays RMON collection history
statistics.
console(config)# interface gi1/0/8
console(config-if)# rmon collection stats 1 interval
2400Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 631
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
History Table
The History Table page displays interface-specific statistical network
samplings. Each table entry represents the counter values compiled during a
single sample.
To display RMON statistics for a specified sample:
1 Click Statistics/RMONRMONHistory Table in the tree view to
display the History Table page.
Figure 21-10. History Table
2 Select a History Entry No.
The following fields are displayed:
– Owner — RMON station or user that requested the RMON
information.
– Sample No. — Number of the specific sample the information in the
table reflects.632 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Drop Events — Number of dropped packets due to lack of network
resources during the sampling interval. This may not represent the
exact number of dropped packets, but rather the number of times
dropped packets were detected.
– Received Bytes (Octets) — Number of data octets, including bad
packets, received on the network.
– Received Packets — Number of packets received during the sampling
interval.
– Broadcast Packets — Number of good Broadcast packets received
during the sampling interval.
– Multicast Packets — Number of good Multicast packets received
during the sampling interval.
– CRC Align Errors — Number of packets received during the sampling
session, with a length of between 64-1632 octets, who had a bad
Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets, or a bad
FCS with a non-integral number.
– Undersize Packets — Number of packets, having less than 64 octets,
received during the sampling session.
– Oversize Packets — Number of packets having more than 1632 octets,
received during the sampling session.
– Fragments — Number of packets, having less than 64 octets and
having a FCS, received during the sampling session.
– Jabbers — Number of packets, having more than 1632 octets and who
had an FCS, received during the sampling session.
– Collisions — Estimated number of packet collision that occurred
during the sampling session. Collisions are detected when repeater
port detects two or more stations transmitting simultaneously.
– Utilization — Estimated main physical layer network usage on an
interface during the session sampling. The value is stated in
hundredths of a percent.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 633
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Viewing the RMON History Table Using the CLI Commands
The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing the RMON
history table.
The following is an example of a CLI command:
Table 21-7. RMON History Table CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show rmon history index
{throughput|errors|other
} [period seconds]
Displays RMON Ethernet statistics history.
console# show rmon history 1 throughput
Sample Set: 1
Interface: 1/0/1
Requested samples: 50
Owner: CLI
Interval: 1800
Granted samples: 50
Maximum table size: 500
Time
--------------------
Jan 18 2005 21:57:00
Octets
---------
303595962
Packets
--------
357568
Broadcast
---------
3289
Multicast
----------
7287
Util
--------
19%634 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Events Control
Events are actions that are performed when an alarm is generated (alarms are
defined in the Alarms page).
An event can be any combination of logs/traps. If the action includes logging,
then the events are logged in the Events Log page.
To define an RMON event:
1 Click Statistics/RMON > RMON > Events Control in the tree view to
display the Events Control: Summary page.
Figure 21-11. Events Control: Summary
The currently-defined events are displayed. Along with the fields described
in the Events Control: Add page, the following field is displayed for the
events:
– Time — The time that the event occurred.
2 To define a new event, click Add.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 635
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
3 Enter the fields:
– Event Entry — Displays a new event number.
– Community — Enter the community to which the event belongs or
keep the default community.
– Description — Enter the event description.
– Type — Select the event action. The possible options are:
• None — No action is taken.
• Log — When an alarm occurs, a log entry is recorded.
• Trap — When an alarm occurs, a trap is generated.
• Log and Trap — When an alarm occurs, a log entry is recorded
and a trap is generated.
– Owner — Enter the event owner.
Defining RMON Events Using the CLI Commands
The following table contains the CLI commands for defining RMON events.
Table 21-8. RMON Event Definition CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
rmon event index
{none|log|trap|log-trap}
[community text]
[description text] [owner
name]
no rmon event index
Configures an event.
Use the no form of this command to
remove an event.
show rmon events Displays RMON event table.636 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console(config)# rmon event 1 log
console(config)# exit
console# show rmon events
Index Description Type Community Owner Last Time
Sent
----- ----------- ------ --------- ----- -----------
1 Errors Log Default
Community
CLI Jan 18 2002
23:58:17
2 High
Broadcast
LogTrap
Router Manager Jan 18 2002
23:59:48Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 637
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Events Log
The Events log displays the log of events that occurred. An event is logged
when the type of the event is Log or Log and Trap. The action in the event is
performed when the event is bound to an alarm (see the Alarms page) and
the conditions of the alarm have occurred.
To display the events log:
• Click Statistics/RMON > RMON > Events Log in the tree view to
display the Events Control page.
Figure 21-12. Events Control
The following fields are displayed:
– Event — The event identifier.
– Log No. — The log number.
– Log Time — Time when the log entry was entered. 638 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Description — Description of the log entry.
Viewing Device Events Using the CLI Commands
The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing device events.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Alarms
RMON alarms provide a mechanism for setting thresholds and sampling
intervals to generate exception events on a counter or any other SNMP object
counter maintained by the agent.
Both the rising and falling thresholds must be configured in the alarm. After a
rising threshold is crossed, another rising event is not generated until the
companion falling threshold is crossed. After a falling alarm is issued, the next
Table 21-9. Device Event Viewing CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show rmon log [event] Displays the RMON logging table.
console(config)# rmon event 1 log
console> show rmon log
Maximum table size: 500
Event Description Time
----- --------------- --------------
1 Errors Jan 18 2002 23:58:17
2 High Broadcast Jan 18 2002 23:59:48Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 639
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
alarm is issued when a rising threshold is crossed. One or more alarms are
bound to an event. The event indicates the action to be taken when the alarm
occurs.
To add an RMON alarm:
1 Click Statistics/RMON > RMON > Alarms in the tree view to display
the Alarms: Summary page.
Figure 21-13. Alarms: Summary
The currently-defined alarms are displayed.
2 To add a new alarm, click Add and enter the fields:
– Alarm Entry — Displays a new alarm entry.
– Interface — Select the interface for which RMON statistics are
displayed.
– Counter Name — Select the selected MIB variable. 640 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Sample Type — Select the sampling method for the selected variable
and comparing the value against the thresholds. The possible options
are:
• Delta — Subtracts the last sampled value from the current value.
The difference in the values is compared to the threshold.
• Absolute — Compares the values directly with the thresholds at
the end of the sampling interval.
– Rising Threshold (0–2147483647) — Enter the rising counter value
that triggers the rising event alarm.
– Rising Event — Select one of the previously-defined events.
– Falling Threshold (0–2147483647) — Enter the falling counter value
that triggers the falling event alarm.
– Falling Event — Select one of the previously-defined events.
– Startup Alarm — Select the trigger that activates the alarm. The
possible options are:
• Rising Alarm — A rising counter value triggers the alarm
• Falling Alarm — A falling counter value triggers the alarm.
• Rising and Falling — Both rising and falling counter values
trigger the alarm.
– Interval (1–2147483647) — Enter the alarm interval time in seconds.
This is the interval in seconds over which the data is sampled and
compared with the rising and falling thresholds.
– Owner — Enter the name of the user or network management system
that receives the alarm.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 641
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Defining Device Alarms Using the CLI Commands
The following table contains the CLI commands for defining device alarms.
Table 21-10. Device Alarm CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
rmon alarm index
MIB_Object_ID interval
rthreshold fthreshold
revent fevent [type type]
[startup direction] [owner
name]
no rmon alarm index
Configures RMON alarm conditions.
Use the no form of this command to
remove an alarm.
show rmon alarm-table Displays summary of the alarm table.
show rmon alarm number Displays the RMON alarm
configuration.642 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console(config)# rmon alarm 1000
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1 360000 1000000 1000000 10 20
console# show rmon alarm-table
Index
-----
123
OID
----------------------
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.9
Owner
-------
CLI
Manager
CLIDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 643
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Charts
This section describes how to display statistics as charts.
It contains the following topics:
• Ports
• LAGs
• CPU Utilization
Ports
To display port statistics in chart format:
1 Click Statistics/RMON > Charts > Ports in the tree view to display the
Ports page.
Figure 21-14. Ports
2 Select the unit ID of a unit in the stack for which you want to display
statistics.644 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
3 Check the type of statistics to be displayed:
– Interface Statistics — Select the interface statistics to display.
– Etherlike Statistics — Select the frame error statistics to display.
– RMON Statistics — Select the RMON statistics to display.
– GVRP Statistics — Select the GVRP statistics type to display.
– Refresh Rate — Select the amount of time that passes before the
statistics are refreshed.
4 To draw a chart for the selected statistics, click Draw. The chart for the
selected statistic is displayed on the page.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 645
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Viewing Port Statistics Using the CLI Commands
The CLI commands for viewing port statistics are the same CLI commands
described above. The Ports page simply shows the same statistics in chart
form.
LAGs
To display LAG statistics in chart format:
1 Click Statistics/RMON > Charts > LAGs in the tree view to display the
LAGs page.
Figure 21-15. LAGs
2 Check the type of statistics to be displayed:
– Interface Statistics — Select the interface statistics to display.
– Etherlike Statistics — Select the frame error statistics to display.
– RMON Statistics — Select the RMON statistics to display.646 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– GVRP Statistics — Select the GVRP statistics type to display.
– Refresh Rate — Select the amount of time that passes before the
statistics are refreshed.
3 To draw a chart for the selected statistics, click Draw. The chart for the
selected statistic is displayed on the page.
Viewing LAG Statistics Using the CLI Commands
The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing LAG statistics.
Table 21-11. LAG Statistic CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show interfaces counters
[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet
hernet] interface|port-channel
LAG-number]
Displays traffic seen by the physical
interface.
show rmon statistics
{[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet
hernet] interface|port-channel
LAG-number}
Displays RMON Ethernet
statistics.
show gvrp statistics
{[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet
hernet] interface|port-channel
LAG-number}
Displays GVRP statistics.
show gvrp-error statistics
{[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet
hernet] interface|port-channel
LAG-number}
Displays GVRP error statistics.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 647
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
console# show rmon statistics gi1/0/1
Port gi1/0/1
Dropped: 0
Octets: 0 Packets: 0
Broadcast: 0 Multicast: 0
CRC Align Errors: 0 Collisions: 0
Undersize Pkts: 0 Oversize Pkts: 0
Fragments: 0 Jabbers: 0
64 Octets: 0 65 to 127 Octets: 1
128 to 255 Octets: 1 256 to 511 Octets: 1
512 to 1023 Octets: 0 1024 to max Octets: 0648 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
CPU Utilization
Use the CPU Utilization page to display the system’s CPU utilization and
percentage of CPU resources consumed by each unit in the stack. Each unit
in the stack is assigned a color on the graph.
To display CPU utilization in chart format:
1 Click Statistics/RMON > Charts > CPU Utilization in the tree view to
display the CPU Utilization page.
Figure 21-16. CPU Utilization
2 Select the Refresh Rate to specify how frequently the statistics should be
refreshed.
3 The CPU utilization chart is displayed. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 649
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Viewing CPU Utilization Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing CPU
utilization.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 21-12. CPU Utilization CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
show cpu utilization Displays CPU utilization.
console# show cpu utilization
CPU utilization service is on.
CPU utilization
--------------------------
five seconds: 5%; one minute: 3%; five minutes: 3%Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 650
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
22
Quality of Service
This section provides information for configuring Quality of Service (QoS).
It contains the following topics:
• QoS Features and Components
• General
• QoS Basic Mode
• QoS Advanced Mode
• QoS StatisticsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 651
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
QoS Features and Components
The QoS feature is used to optimize network performance. It provides
classification of incoming traffic into traffic classes, based on one or more
attributes, including:
– Device configuration
– Ingress interface
– Packet contents
QoS includes the following features:
• Traffic Classification — Classifies each incoming packet, as belonging to
a specific traffic flow, based on the packet contents and/or interface. The
classification is done by an ACL (Access Control List), and only traffic
that meets the ACL criteria is subject to classification.
• Assignment to Hardware Queues — Assigns incoming packets to
forwarding queues. Packets are sent to a particular queue for handling as a
function of the traffic class to which they belong.
• Other Traffic Class-Handling Attribute — Applies QoS mechanisms to
various classes, including bandwidth management.
QoS Modes
A single QoS mode is selected and applies to all interfaces in the system. The
modes are:
• Basic Mode — Class of Service (CoS).
– Traffic is divided into classes that determine how it is treated. All
traffic in a class is treated with the same QoS action. The QoS action
for the class of traffic determines the egress queue on the egress port,
based on the indicated QoS value in the incoming frame.
The QoS value in the incoming frame is:
• Layer 2 Packets — VLAN Priority Tag (VPT) 802.1p value
• Layer 3 IPv4 Frames — Differentiated Service Code Point
(DSCP) value
• Layer 3 IPv6 Frames —Traffic Class (TC) value
When operating in Basic mode, the switch trusts this
externally-assigned QoS value. 652 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
This is the default QoS mode.
• Advanced Mode — Per-flow Quality of Service (QoS).
In Advanced mode, a per-flow QoS consists of a class map and a policer:
– A class map defines the kind of traffic in a flow, and contains one or
more ACLs. Packets that match the ACLs belong to the flow.
– A policer applies the configured QoS to a flow. The QoS configuration
of a flow may consist of the egress queue, the DSCP or CoS value, and
actions on out-of-profile (excess) traffic.
• Disable Mode (QoS is not enabled)
In this mode, all traffic is mapped to a single best-effort queue, so that no
type of traffic is prioritized over another.
Only a single mode can be active at a time. When the system is configured to
work in QoS Advanced mode, settings for QoS Basic mode are not active and
vice versa.
When the QoS mode is changed, the following occurs:
• When changing from Advanced mode to any other mode, policy profile
definitions and class maps are deleted. ACLs, which are bonded directly to
interfaces, remain bonded.
• When changing from Basic mode to Advanced mode, the QoS Trust mode
configuration in Basic mode is not retained.
• When disabling QoS, the shaper and queue setting (WRR/SP bandwidth
settings) are reset to default values.
All other user configurations remain intact.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 653
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
General
This section contains the following topics:
• QoS Mode
• QoS Properties
• Queue
• Mapping to Queue
• Bandwidth
• TCP Congestion Avoidance
QoS Mode
To enable/disable the QoS mode:
1 Click Quality of Service > General >QoS Mode in the tree view to
display the QoS Mode page.
Figure 22-1. QoS Mode
2 Select the QoS Mode. The possible options are:
– Basic — QoS is enabled in Basic mode on the switch654 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Advanced — QoS is enabled in Advanced mode on the switch.
– Disable — QoS is not enabled on the switch.
Setting QoS Mode Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the QoS
mode.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 22-1. QoS Mode CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
qos [basic|advanced]
no qos
Enables QoS on the device.
Use the no form of this command to disable QoS
on the device
show qos Displays the QoS mode.
console(config)# qos basicDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 655
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
QoS Properties
To set the default CoS value on incoming, untagged packets:
1 Click Quality of Service > General > QoS Properties in the tree view to
display the QoS Properties: Summary page.
Figure 22-2. QoS Properties: Summary
The default CoS values for all interfaces on the selected unit are displayed.
2 To modify the CoS value for an interface, click Edit, and enter the fields:
– Interface — Select a port or LAG if required.
– Set Default CoS — Enter the default CoS tag value for untagged
packets.656 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring QoS Properties Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in
the QoS Properties: Summary page.
The following is an example of the CLI command:
Queue
The switch supports eight queues for each interface. Queue number eight is
the highest priority queue. Queue number one is the lowest priority queue.
Traffic Limitation Methods
There are two ways of determining how traffic in queues is handled, Strict
Priority and Weighted Round Robin (WRR):
• Strict Priority — Egress traffic from the highest-priority queue is
transmitted first. Traffic from the lower queues is processed only after the
highest queue has been transmitted, thus providing the highest level of
priority of traffic to the lowest-numbered queue.
• Weighted Round Robin (WRR) — In WRR mode, the number of packets
sent from the queue is proportional to the weight of the queue (the higher
the weight, the more frames are sent). For example, if all eight queues are
WRR and the default weights are used, queue 1 receives 1/15 of the
bandwidth (assuming all queues are saturated and there is congestion),
queue 2 receives 2/15, queue 3 receives 4/15, and queue 8 receives 8/15 of
the bandwidth. The type of WRR algorithm used in the device is not the
standard Deficit WRR (DWRR), but rather Shaped Deficit WRR
(SDWRR).
Table 22-2. QoS Properties CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
qos cos default-cos
no qos cos
Defines the default CoS value of a port.
Use the no form of this command to restore the
default configuration.
console(config)# interface gi1/0/15
console(config-if)# qos cos 3Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 657
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Combination of WRR and Strict Priority
The priority for handling traffic can be selected for each queue. When the
queuing mode is Weighted Round Robin for all queues, queues are serviced
according to their weights. If all queues are assigned strict priority, queues are
serviced according to that order.
The following is true if some queues are assigned strict priority and others are
assigned WRR:
• If one queue is assigned strict priority, all higher queues are also assigned
strict priority. Conversely, if a queue is assigned a WRR weight, all lower
queues must also have a WRR weight assigned to them.
• In the above case, traffic for the strict priority queues is always sent before
traffic from the WRR queues. Traffic from the WRR queues is forwarded
only after the strict priority queues have been emptied. The relative
portion from each WRR queue depends on its weight.658 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To select the priority method and enter WRR weights:
1 Click Quality of Service > General > Queue in the tree view to display
the Queue page.
Figure 22-3. Queue
The queues are displayed.
2 Enter the parameters for the queues:
– Strict Priority — Check to indicate that traffic scheduling for the
selected queue, and all higher queues, is based strictly on the queue
priority.
– WRR — Check to indicate that traffic scheduling for the selected
queue is based on WRR. The time period is divided between the
WRR queues that are not empty, meaning they have descriptors to
egress. This happens only if strict priority queues are empty. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 659
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Scheduling WRR Weight — If WRR is selected, enter the WRR
weight assigned to the queue.
– % of WRR Bandwidth — Displays the amount of bandwidth assigned
to the queue. These values represent the percent of the WRR weight.
Configuring Queue Settings Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in
the Queue page.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Mapping to Queue
This section provides information for mapping DSCP and CoS values to
service queues, and contains the following topics:
• CoS to Queue
• DSCP to Queue
Table 22-3. Queue Setting CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
priority-queue out num-ofqueues number-of-queues
no priority-queue out numof-queues
Configures the number of expedite
queues.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
wrr-queue bandwidth weight1
weight2 ... weight_n
no wrr-queue bandwidth
Assigns WRR weights to egress queues.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
console(config)# priority-queue out num-of-queues 2
console(config-if)# wrr-queue bandwidth 6 6 6 6 6 6660 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
CoS to Queue
The CoS to Queue page maps CoS priorities to an egress queue, meaning
that the egress queues of the incoming packets is based on the CoS priority in
their VLAN Tags. For incoming, untagged packets, the CoS priority is the
default CoS priority assigned to ingress ports.
By changing CoS to Queue mapping, Queue schedule method, and
bandwidth allocation, it is possible to achieve the desired quality of services in
a network.
The CoS to Queue mapping is applicable only if one of the following exists:
• The switch is in QoS Basic mode, and CoS is the trusted mode.
• The switch is in QoS Advanced mode, and the packets belong to flows that
are CoS trusted.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 661
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To map CoS values to egress queues:
1 Click Quality of Service > General > CoS to Queue in the tree view to
display the CoS to Queue page.
Figure 22-4. CoS to Queue
The CoS/queue mappings are displayed.
2 Enter the fields:
– Class of Service — The CoS priority tag values, where zero is the
lowest priority and 7 is the highest priority.
– Queue — The queue to which the CoS priority is mapped. 662 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Mapping CoS Priorities to Queues Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in
the CoS to Queue page .
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
DSCP to Queue
The DSCP to Queue mapping determines the egress queues of the incoming
IP packets, based on their DSCP values. The original VPT (VLAN Priority
Tag) of the packet is unchanged.
By changing the DSCP to Queue mapping, the Queue schedule method, and
bandwidth allocation, it is possible to achieve improved quality of service in a
network.
The DSCP to Queue mapping is applicable to IP packets when:
• The switch is in Basic mode and DSCP is the trusted mode
• The switch is in Advanced mode and the packets belongs to flows that are
DSCP trusted
Non-IP packets are always classified to the best-effort queue.
Table 22-4. CoS to Queue CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
wrr-queue cos-map queue-id
cos1 ... cos8
no wrr-queue cos-map [queueid]
Maps CoS values to the egress queues.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
console(config)# wrr-queue cos-map 4 7Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 663
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To map DSCP to queues:
1 Click Quality of Service > General > DSCP to Queue in the tree view to
display the DSCP to Queue page.
Figure 22-5. DSCP to Queue
The DSCP values in the incoming packet and its associated queues are
displayed.
2 Enter the fields:
– DSCP In — The values of the DSCP field in the incoming packet.
– Queue — The queue to which packets with the specific DSCP value is
assigned. The values are 1-8, where 1 is the lowest value, and 8 is the
highest.664 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Mapping DSCP Values to Queues Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in
the DSCP to Queue page.
The following is an example of the CLI command:
Bandwidth
The amount of traffic that can be received and transmitted on an interface
can be limited by the following:
• Ingress Rate Limit — Number of bits per second that can be received
from the ingress interface. Excess bandwidth above this limit is discarded.
• Egress Shaping Rates is defined by the following:
– Committed Information Rate (CIR) sets the average maximum
amount of data allowed to be sent on the egress interface, measured in
bits per second
– Committed Burst Shape (CBS) sets the maximum burst of data that
is allowed to be sent, even though it is above the CIR. This is defined
in number of bytes of data.
Table 22-5. DSCP to Queue CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
qos map dscp-queue dscp-list to
queue-id
no qos map dscp-queue [dscplist]
Modifies the DSCP to queue
mapping.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
console(config)# qos map dscp-queue 33 40 41 to 1Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 665
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To configure bandwidth limitation:
1 Click Quality of Service > General > Bandwidth in the tree view to
display the Bandwidth: Summary page.
Figure 22-6. Bandwidth: Summary
The ingress and egress rates are displayed for all ports on the selected unit.
2 To set interface parameters, click Edit.
3 Select an interface, and enter the fields:
– Enable Ingress Rate Limit — Enable/disable ingress traffic limit for
the interface. If this field is selected, enter the Ingress Rate Limit.
– Ingress Rate Limit — Enter the ingress traffic limit for the interface.666 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Egress Shaping Rate — Enable/disable egress traffic limitation. If this
field is selected, enter the following fields.
– Committed Information Rate (CIR) — Enter the average maximum
amount of data allowed to be sent on the egress interface, measured in
bits per second.
– Committed Burst Size (CBS) — Enter the maximum burst of data
that is allowed to be sent on the egress interface, even though it is
above the CIR. This is defined in number of bytes of data.
Configuring Bandwidth Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in
the Bandwidth pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 22-6. Bandwidth CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
traffic-shape committed-rate
[committed-burst]
no traffic-shape
Sets shaper on egress port.
Use no form in order to disable
the shaper.
rate-limit committed-rate-kbps
[burst committed-burst-byte]
no rate-limit
Limits the rate of the incoming
traffic.
Use the no form to disable rate
limit.
console(config)# interface gi1/0/5
console(config-if)# traffic-shape 124000 9600
console(config-if)# rate-limit 150000Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 667
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
TCP Congestion Avoidance
Use the TCP Congestion Avoidance page to activate a congestion avoidance
algorithm. The algorithm breaks up or prevents TCP global synchronization
in a congested node, where the congestion is due to various sources sending
packets with the same byte count.
To configure TCP congestion avoidance:
1 Click Quality of Service > General > TCP Congestion Avoidance in the
tree view to display the TCP Congestion Avoidance page.
NOTE: TCP Congestion Avoidance increases network reliability, but it also
increases network traffic. Continue only if you are sure it will improve overall
network performance. For this change to be effective you must save the
configuration and reboot the device.
Figure 22-7. TCP Congestion Avoidance
2 Check TCP Congestion Avoidance to enable the algorithm.668 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring TCP Congestion Avoidance Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in
the TCP Congestion Avoidance page.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 22-7. TCP Congestion Avoidance CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
qos wrr-queue wrtd
no qos wrr-queue wrtd
Enables Weighted Random Tail Drop (WRTD).
Use the no form of this command to disable
WRTD.
console(config)# qos wrr-queue wrtd
This setting will take effect only after copying running
configuration to startup configuration and resetting the
device.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 669
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
QoS Basic Mode
This section describes QoS Basic mode.
It contains the following topics:
• Basic Mode Overview
• Workflow to Configure Basic Mode
• Global Settings
• DSCP Rewrite
• Interface Settings
Basic Mode Overview
In QoS Basic mode, a specific domain in the network can be defined as
trusted. Within that domain, packets are marked with CoS priority and/or
DSCP values, to signal the type of service they require. Nodes within the
domain use these fields to assign the packet to a specific output queue. The
initial packet classification and marking of these fields is done in the ingress
of the trusted domain.
Workflow to Configure Basic Mode
To configure Basic QoS mode, perform the following:
1 Select Basic mode for the system in the QoS Mode page.
2 Select the trust-behavior in the Global Settings page.
3 If there is any port that, as an exception, should not trust the incoming
CoS mark, disable the QoS state on that port in the Interface Settings
pages.
If a port is disabled without trusted mode, all its ingress packets are
forwarded in best effort. It is recommended that you disable the trusted
mode at the ports where the CoS and/or DSCP values in the incoming
packets are not trustworthy. Otherwise, performance in the network might
be negatively affected.
4 If you selected DSCP Rewrite in the Global Settings page, set the DSCP
in/out values in the DSCP Rewrite page.670 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Global Settings
Use the Global Settings page to enable Trust on all interfaces on the switch.
This configuration is only active when the QoS mode is Basic. Packets
entering a QoS domain are classified at the edge of the QoS domain.
For more information on setting Trust mode on an interface, see "Interface
Settings" on page 674.
To define Trust configuration:
1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Basic Mode > Global Settings in the tree
view to display the Global Settings page.
Figure 22-8. Global SettingsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 671
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
2 Enter the fields:
– Trust Mode — Enable/disable Trust mode.
• CoS — Traffic is mapped to queues, based on the VPT field in the
VLAN tag, or based on the per-port default CoS value (if there is
no VLAN tag on the incoming packet). The mapping of the VPT
to queue can be configured in the CoS to Queue page.
• DSCP — All IP traffic is mapped to queues, based on the DSCP
field in the IP header. The mapping of the DSCP to queue is
configured in the DSCP to Queue page.
– Always Rewrite DSCP — Check to always rewrite the DSCP values in
the incoming packets with the new values set in the DSCP to Queue
page. When this field is enabled, the switch uses the new DSCP
values to select the egress queue.
Assigning Global Settings Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in
the Global Settings page.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 22-8. Global Settings CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
qos trust {cos|dscp}
no qos trust
Configures the system to either the
CoS or DSCP trust state.
Use the no form of this command to
return to the default configuration.
qos dscp-mutation
no qos dscp-mutation
Applies the DSCP Mutation map to
system DSCP trusted ports.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the trusted port with no
DSCP mutation.
console(config)# qos trust dscp
console(config)# qos dscp-mutation672 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
DSCP Rewrite
Use the DSCP Rewrite page to rewrite the DSCP tags for incoming traffic,
when different DSCP values are used in the incoming and outgoing domains.
Changing the DSCP value used in one domain to the DSCP value used in the
other domain preserves the priority of traffic used in the first domain.
As an example, assume that there are three levels of service: Silver, Gold, and
Platinum. The DSCP incoming values used to mark these levels are 10, 20,
and 30 respectively. If this traffic is forwarded to another service provider that
has the same three levels of service, but uses DSCP values 16, 24, and 48, the
values set in the DSCP Rewrite page are used to change the incoming values
to the outgoing values.
These settings are active globally when the system is in QoS Basic mode.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 673
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To map DSCP In values to DSCP Out values:
1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Basic Mode > DSCP Rewrite in the tree
view to display the DSCP Rewrite page.
Figure 22-9. DSCP Rewrite674 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
2 For each DSCP In value (DSCP value of the incoming packet) that needs
to be rewritten to an alternative value, set a DSCP Out value.
Assigning DSCP Rewrite Values Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in
the DSCP Rewrite page.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Interface Settings
QoS Trust mode can be configured on each port of the switch, as follows:
• QoS Trust State Disabled on an Interface — All inbound traffic on the
port is mapped to the best effort queue and no classification/prioritization
takes place.
• QoS Trust State Enabled on an Interface — Port prioritized traffic on
ingress is based on the system- wide configured trusted mode, which is
either CoS Trusted mode or DSCP Trusted mode.
Table 22-9. DSCP Rewrite CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
qos map dscp-mutation indscp to out-dscp
no qos map dscp-mutation
[in-dscp]
Configures the DSCP to DSCP Mutation
table.
Use the no form of this command to restore
the default configuration.
console(config)# qos map dscp-mutation 1 2 4 5 6 to 63Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 675
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To define QoS Trust for an interface:
1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Basic Mode > Interface Settings in the
tree view to display the Interface Settings: Summary page.
Figure 22-10. Interface Settings: Summary
Trust mode is displayed for each interface on the selected unit.
2 To change the QoS trust state for an interface, click Edit, and select an
interface on a unit.
3 Enable/disable the QoS Trust State.676 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Assigning Interface Settings Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in
the Interface Settings page.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Configuring QoS Basic Mode Using CLI Commands
The following is a sample script configuring QoS Basic mode.
Table 22-10. Interface Settings CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
qos trust
no qos trust
Enables each port trust state while the
system is in the basic QoS mode.
Use the no form of this command to
disable the trust state on each port.
show qos interface[buffers |
queueing | policers | shapers
| rate-limit] [interface-id]]
Displays QoS information on the
interface.
console(config)# interface gi1/0/15
console(config-if)# qos trust
Table 22-11. Sample CLI Script to Configure QoS Basic Mode
CLI Command Description
console#configure
console(config)# qos basic
Enable QoS in Basic mode.
console(config)#mac access-list
extended MAC1
Define an ACL named
"MAC1"
console(config-mac-a1)#deny
00:00:00:00:00:11 00:00:00:00:00:ff
any
MAC1 discards all traffic with
source MAC
00:00:00:00:00:XX addresses.
console(config-mac-a1)# permit any
any
MAC1 permits all other
traffic.
console(config-mac-a1)#exit Exit ACL mode.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 677
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
console(config)#interface gi1/0/1 Enter Interface mode on port
gi1/0/1.
console(config-if)#service-acl input
mac1
Bind MAC1 to port gi1/0/1.
Table 22-11. Sample CLI Script to Configure QoS Basic Mode (Continued)
CLI Command Description678 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
QoS Advanced Mode
This section describes QoS Advanced mode.
It contains the following topics:
• Advanced Mode Overview
• Workflow to Configure Advanced QoS Mode
• DSCP Mapping
• Class Mapping
• QoS Policers
• Policy Binding
Advanced Mode Overview
In Advanced mode, the switch uses policies to support per-flow QoS. A policy
and its components have the following characteristics and relationships:
• A policy contains one or more class maps.
• A class map defines a flow with one or more associated ACLs. Packets that
match the ACL rules (ACEs) in a class map with Permit (forward) action,
belong to the same flow, and are subject to the same quality of service
action. A policy can contain one or more flows, each with a user-defined
QoS action.
• The QoS of a class map (flow) may be enforced by the associated policer.
There are two type of policers, as described in "Defining Class Mapping
Using CLI Commands" on page 684.
• Per-flow QoS actions are applied to flows by binding the policy maps to the
desired ports. A policy map and its class maps can be bound to one or more
ports, but each port is bound with, at the most, one policy map.
The following points should be considered:
• An ACL can be configured to one or more class maps, regardless of
policies.
• A class map can belong to only one policy map.
• When a class map, using a single policer, is bound to multiple ports, each
port has its own instance of the policer. Each instance applies the QoS
actions on the class map (flow) at a port independent of each other.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 679
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• If you bind a policy map to more than one port and one of its classes
contains a single policer, all policy map rules will be multiplied per port
(using up more TCAM resources).
• An aggregate policer applies the QoS to all of its flows in aggregation,
regardless of policies and ports.
Advanced QoS settings consist of the following elements:
• Rules — All frames matching a single group of rules are considered to be a
flow.
• Actions — To be applied to frames in each flow that match the rules.
– Policers — See "Single Policers" on page 689
– Aggregate Policers — "Aggregate Policers" on page 687
– Trust —"Interface Settings" on page 674, "Policy Class Maps" on
page 692
– Set DSCP/CoS — "Policy Class Maps" on page 692
– Set Queue — "DSCP Mapping" on page 680
• Binding — Combination of rules and actions that are bound to one or
more interfaces.
Workflow to Configure Advanced QoS Mode
To configure Advanced QoS mode, perform the following:
1 Select Advanced mode for the system in the QoS Mode page.
2 If external DSCP values are different from those used on incoming
packets, map the external values to internal values in the DSCP Rewrite
page.
3 Create ACLs, as described in "Network Security" on page 97.
4 When ACLs are defined, create class maps and associate the ACLs with
them in the Class Mapping pages.
5 Create a policy map in the Policy Class Maps pages, and associate the
policy map with one or more class maps. Specify the QoS action, if needed,
for example by assigning a policer to a class map, when you associate the
class map to the policy.680 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
a Single Policer — Create a policy that associates a class map with a
single policer in the Policy Table pages and the Class Mapping pages.
Within the policy, define the single policer.
b Aggregate Policer — Create a QoS action for each flow. This action
sends all matching frames to the same policer (aggregate policer),
defined in the Aggregate Policer pages. Create a policy that associates
a class map with the aggregate policer in the Policy Table pages.
6 Bind the policy to an interface in the Policy Binding pages.
DSCP Mapping
When a policer is assigned to a class map (flow), you can specify the action to
take when the amount of traffic in the flow(s) exceeds the QoS-specified
limits. The portion of the traffic that causes the flow to exceed its QoS limit
is referred to as out-of-profile packets.
If the exceed action is Remark DSCP (as opposed to Drop), the switch
rewrites the original DSCP value of the out-of-profile IP packets to a new
value, based on the values entered in the DSCP Mapping page. The switch
uses the new values to assign resources and egress queues to these packets.
The switch physically replaces the original DSCP value in the out-of-profile
packets with the new DSCP value.
To use the Remark DSCP exceed action, set the DSCP Out value in the
DSCP Mapping page. Otherwise the action is null, because the DSCP value
in the packet is rewritten to the original DSCP value, set by factory default.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 681
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To set new DSCP values:
1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Advanced Mode > DSCP Mapping to
display the DSCP Mapping page.
Figure 22-11. DSCP Mapping
2 If the Exceed Action is Out-of-Profile (in the Policy Class Maps page) or
Remark DSCP (in the Aggregate Policy page), the DSCP In values are
rewritten with the DSCP Out values. Set the DSCP Out values as
required.682 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Configuring DSCP Mapping Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in
the DSCP Mapping page.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Class Mapping
A Class Map defines a traffic flow associated with ACL(s). A MAC-based
ACL, IP-based ACL, and an IPv6-based ACL can be combined into a class
map. Class maps are configured to match packet criteria on a match-all or
match-any basis. They are matched to packets on a first-fit basis, meaning
that the action associated with the first-matched class map is the action
performed by the system. Packets that match the same class map belong to
the same flow.
There are two possible types of matching:
• match-all — Traffic matches class map if it matches IP/IPV6 and MAC
ACLs
• match-any — Traffic matches class map if it matches at least one of the
ACLs
If a more complex set of rules is needed, several class maps can be grouped
into a super-group called a policy (see "Defining Class Mapping Using CLI
Commands" on page 684).
Table 22-12. DSCP Mapping CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
qos map policed-dscp dscp-list
to dscp-mark-down
no qos map policed-dscp [dscplist]
Configures the policed-DSCP map for
remarking purposes.
Use the no form of this command to
restore the default configuration.
console(config)# qos map policed-dscp 3 to 43Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 683
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To define a class map:
1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Advanced Mode > Class Mapping to
display the Class Mapping: Summary page.
Figure 22-12. Class Mapping: Summary
The previously-defined class maps are displayed.
2 To add a class map, click Add.
A new class map is added by selecting one or two ACLs and assigning them
a class map name. If a class map has two ACLs, specify that a frame must
match both ACLs, or that it must match either one or both of the ACLs
selected.
3 Enter the parameters.
– Class Map Name — Enter the name of a new class map.684 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Match ACL Type — Enter the criteria that a packet must match in
order to belong to the flow defined by the class map. The possible
options are:
• IP — A packet must match either of the IP-based ACLs in the
class map.
• MAC — A packet must match the MAC-based ACL in the class
map.
• IP and MAC — A packet must match the IP-based ACL and the
MAC-based ACL in the class map (match-all).
• IP or MAC — A packet must match either the IP-based ACL or
the MAC-based ACL in the class map (match-any).
– IPACL — Select the IPv4-based ACL or the IPv6-based ACL for the
class map.
– MAC ACL — Select the MAC-based ACL for the class map.
– Preferred ACL — Select whether packets are first matched to an
IP-based ACL or a MAC-based ACL.
Defining Class Mapping Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in
the Class Mapping pages.
Table 22-13. Class Mapping CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
class class-map-name [accessgroup acl-name]
no class class-map-name
Defines a traffic classification and
enters the Policy-map Class
Configuration mode.
Use the no form of this command to
detach a class map from the policy
map.
class-map class-map-name
[match-all|match-any]
no class-map class-map-name
Creates or modifies a class map and
enters the Class-map Configuration
mode.
Use the no form of this command to
delete a class map.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 685
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
QoS Policers
This section describes QoS policers.
It contains the following topics:
• QoS Policers Overview
• Aggregate Policers
• Single Policers
match access-group acl-name
no match access-group acl-name
Defines the match criteria for
classifying traffic.
Use the no form of this command to
delete the match criteria.
show class-map [class-map-name] Displays information about the class
map.
console(config)# qos advanced
console(config)# class-map class1 match-all
console(config-cmap)# match access-group enterprise
console(config-cmap)# do show class-map class1
Class Map matchAll class1
Match access-group enterprise
Table 22-13. Class Mapping CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description686 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
QoS Policers Overview
The rate of traffic that matches a pre-defined set of rules can be measured,
and limits, such as limiting the rate of file-transfer traffic that is allowed on a
port, can be enforced.
This is done by using the ACLs in the class map(s) to match the desired
pattern of traffic, and by using a policer to apply QoS on the matching traffic.
A policer is configured with a QoS specification. There are two kinds of
policers:
• Single Policer — A single policer applies the QoS to a single class map,
and to a single flow, based on the policer's QoS specification. When a class
map, using a single policer, is bound to multiple ports, each port has its
own instance of the single policer; each applying the QoS on the class map
(flow) at ports that are otherwise independent of each other. A single
policer is created in the Policy Table and Policy Class Maps pages.
• Aggregate Policer — An aggregate policer applies QoS to one or more class
maps, and to one or more flows. An aggregation policer can support class
maps from various policies. An aggregate policer applies QoS to all its
flow(s) in aggregation, regardless of policies and ports. An aggregate policer
is created in the Aggregate Policer pages.
An aggregate policer is defined if the policer is to be shared with more than
one class.
Each policer is defined with its own QoS specification, and is composed of a
combination of the following parameters:
• Committed Information Rate (CIR) — A maximum allowed rate of
traffic, measured in Kbps.
• Committed Burst Size (CBS) — An amount of traffic, measured in bytes,
which is allowed to pass as a temporary burst, even if it is above the
defined maximum rate.
• Exceed Action — An action to be applied to frames that are over the limits
(called out-of-profile traffic). These frames can be forwarded as is,
dropped, or forwarded, after rewriting their DSCP value with a value that
marks them as lower-priority frames for all subsequent handling within the
device.
A policer is assigned to a class map when a class map is added to a policy.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 687
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Aggregate Policers
To define an aggregate policer:
1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Advanced Mode > Aggregate Policer to
display the Aggregate Policer: Summary page.
Figure 22-13. Aggregate Policer: Summary
The existing aggregate policers are displayed.
2 To add an aggregate policer, click Add, and enter the fields.
– Aggregate Policer Name — Enter the name of the Aggregate Policer.
– Committed Information Rate (CIR) — Enter the maximum
bandwidth allowed in bits per second. See the description of this field
in "Bandwidth" on page 664.
– Committed Burst Size (CBS) — Enter the maximum burst size
(even if it goes beyond the CIR) in bytes. See the description of this in
the "Bandwidth" on page 664.688 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Exceed Action — Select the action to be performed on incoming
packets that exceed the CIR. The possible options are:
• None — No action is performed on packets exceeding the defined
CIR value.
• Drop — Packets exceeding the defined CIR value are dropped.
• Remark DSCP — The DSCP values of packets exceeding the
defined CIR value are rewritten to a value entered in the DSCP
Mapping pages.
Defining Aggregate Policers Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in
the Aggregate Policer pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 22-14. Aggregate Policer CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
qos aggregate-policer
aggregate-policer-name
committed-rate-kbps excessburst-byte[exceed-action
{drop|policed-dscp-transmit}]
no qos aggregate-policer
aggregate-policer-name
Defines the policer parameters that can
be applied to multiple traffic classes
within the same policy map.
Use the no form of this command to
remove an existing aggregate policer.
console(config)# qos aggregate-policer policer1 124000
9600 exceed-action dropDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 689
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Single Policers
Defining Aggregate Policers Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in
the Aggregate Policer pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Single policers are created by:
1 Create a policy in the Police Table pages
2 Configure the policy in the Policy Class Maps pages. Here the policy class
can be designated as containing a single policer, or it can be designated as
containing Aggregate policers.
Policy Table
A policy can consist of one of the following:
• One or more class maps of ACLs that define the traffic flows in the policy.
• One or more aggregate policers that apply the QoS to the traffic flows in
the policy.
Table 22-15. Aggregate Policer CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
qos aggregate-policer
aggregate-policer-name
committed-rate-kbps excessburst-byte[exceed-action
{drop|policed-dscp-transmit}]
no qos aggregate-policer
aggregate-policer-name
Defines the policer parameters that can
be applied to multiple traffic classes
within the same policy map.
Use the no form of this command to
remove an existing aggregate policer.
console(config)# qos aggregate-policer policer1 124000
9600 exceed-action drop690 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Only those policies that are bound to an interface are active (see the Policy
Binding pages).
After a policy has been added, class maps can be added in the Policy Table
pages.
To create a QoS policy:
1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Advanced Mode > Policy Table to
display the Policy Table: Summary page.
Figure 22-14. Policy Table: Summary
The previously-defined policies are displayed.
2 To create a policy, click Add.
3 Enter the name of the new policy in the Policy Name field.
4 Add class maps to the new policy in the Policy Class Maps page.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 691
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Defining Policies Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in
the Policy Table page.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 22-16. Policy Table CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
policy-map policy-map-name
no policy-map policy-mapname
Creates a policy map and enters the Policymap Configuration mode.
Use the no form of this command to
delete a policy map.
console(config)# policy-map policy1692 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Policy Class Maps
One or more class maps can be added to a policy. A class map defines the type
of packets that are considered to belong to the same traffic flow.
To add a class map to a policy:
1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Advanced Mode > Policy Class Maps to
display the Policy Class Maps: Summary page.
Figure 22-15. Policy Class Maps: Summary
2 Select a policy in the Policy Name field. The class maps in that policy are
displayed.
3 To add a class map, click Add.
4 Enter the parameters.
– Policy Name — Select the policy to which the class map is being
added.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 693
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Class Map Name — Select an existing class map to be associated with
the policy. Class maps are created in the Class Mapping pages.
– Action Type — Select the action regarding the ingress CoS and/or
DSCP value of all the matching packets.
• None — Ignore the ingress CoS and/or DSCP value. The
matching packets are sent as best effort.
• Trust CoS, DSCP — If this option is selected, the switch will
trust the CoS or DSCP value of the matching packet. If a packet
is an IP packet, the switch will put the packet in the egress queue,
based on its DSCP value and the DSCP to Queue mapping.
Otherwise, the egress queue of the packet is based on the packet's
CoS value and the CoS to Queue mapping.
• Set — See the description of this field below.
– Set — If this option is selected, enter a New Value, which determines
the egress queue of the matching packets:
• DSCP — If DSCP is selected, the new DSCP value and the
DSCP to Queue mapping determines the egress queue of the
matching packets.
• Queue — If Queue is selected, the new value is the egress queue
number for all matching packets.
• CoS — If CoS is selected, the CoS priority value and the CoS to
Queue mapping determines the egress queue of the matching
packets.
– Police Type — Available in Layer 2 Mode only. Select the policer type
for the policy. The possible options are:
• None — No policy is used.
• Single — The policer for the policy is a single policer.
• Aggregate — The policer for the policy is an aggregate policer.
– Aggregate Policer — Available in Layer 2 Mode only. If Police Type is
Aggregate, select a previously-defined aggregate policer.
If Police Type is Single, enter the following QoS parameters:
– Ingress Committed Information Rate (CIR) (Range: 100 - 1000000)
— Enter the CIR in Kbps. See its description in the Bandwidth pages.694 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Ingress Committed Burst Size (CBS) (Range: 3000 - 16769020) —
Enter the CBS in bytes. See its description in the Bandwidth pages.
– Exceed Action — Select the action assigned to incoming packets
exceeding the CIR. The possible options are:
• None — No action.
• Drop — Packets exceeding the defined CIR value are dropped.
• Out-of-Profile DSCP — Packets, exceeding the defined CIR, are
forwarded with a new DSCP, derived from the DSCP Mapping
pages.
Defining Policy Class Maps Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in
the Policy Class Maps pages.
Table 22-17. Policy Class Maps CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
class class-map-name [accessgroup acl-name]
no class class-map-name
Defines a traffic classification and
enters the Policy-map Class
Configuration mode.
Use the no form of this command to
detach a class map from the policy
map.
trust [cos-dscp]
no trust
Configures the trust state, which
selects the value that QoS uses as the
source of the internal DSCP value.
Use the no form of this command to
return to the default trust state.
set {dscp new-dscp|queue queueid|cos new-cos}
no set
Sets new values in the IP packet.
Use the no form of this command to
return to the default values.
police committed-rate-kbps
committed-burst-byte [exceedaction {drop|policed-dscptransmit}]
no police
Defines the policer for classified traffic.
Use the no form of this command to
remove a policer.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 695
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
qos aggregate-policer
aggregate-policer-name
committed-rate-kbps excessburst-byte [exceed-action
{drop|policed-dscp-transmit}]
no qos aggregate-policer
aggregate-policer-name
Defines the policer parameters that
can be applied to multiple traffic
classes.
Use the no form of this command to
remove an existing aggregate policer.
show policy-map [policy-mapname]
Displays all policy maps or a specific
policy map.
console(config)# policy-map policy1
console(config-pmap)# class class1 access-group enterprise
console(config-pmap)# trust cos-dscp
console(config-pmap)# set dscp 56
console(config-pmap)# class class1
console(config-pmap-c)# police 124000 9600 exceed-action
drop
console(config)# qos aggregate-policer policer1 124000
9600 exceed-action drop
Table 22-17. Policy Class Maps CLI Commands (Continued)
CLI Command Description696 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Policy Binding
After policies are created, they must be bound to interfaces (ports or
LAGs).When a policy is bound to a specific interface, it becomes active on it
(subject to time range restrictions). Only one policy can be active on a single
interface, but a single policy can be bound to more than one interface.
When a policy is bound to an interface, it filters and applies QoS to ingress
traffic that belongs to the flows defined in the policy. The policy does not
apply to traffic egress to the same port.
To edit a policy, it must first be removed (unbound) from all those ports to
which it is bound.
To define policy binding:
1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Advanced Mode > Policy Binding to
display the Policy Binding: Summary page.
Figure 22-16. Policy Binding: SummaryDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 697
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Previously-defined policy bindings are displayed.
2 To bind a policy to an interface, click Add.
3 Select the interface assigned to the policy.
4 Select the Policy Name to be activated on the interface.
Defining Policy Binding Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in
the Policy Binding pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 22-18. Policy Binding CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
service-policy input
policy-map-name
no service-policy
input
Applies a policy map to the input of a particular
interface.
Use the no form of this command to detach a
policy map from an interface.
console(config-if)# service-policy input policy1698 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
QoS Statistics
This section describes how to view and manage QoS statistics.
It contains the following topics:
• Policer Statistics
• Aggregated Policer
• Queues StatisticsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 699
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Policer Statistics
A Single Policer is bound to a class map from a single policy. An Aggregate
Policer is bound to one or more class maps from one or more policies.
Use the Policer Statistics pages to view the number of in-profile and out-ofprofile packets received from an interface that meet the conditions defined in
the class map of a policy.
To view policer statistics:
1 Click Quality of Service QoS Statistics Policer Statistics to display the
Policer Statistics: Summary page.
Figure 22-17. Policer Statistics: Summary
The following statistics for the previously-defined counters are displayed:
– Interface — Statistics are displayed for this interface.
– Policy— Statistics are displayed for this policy.700 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
– Class Map — Statistics are displayed for this class map.
– In-Profile Bytes — Number of in-profile bytes received.
– Out-of-Profile Bytes — Number of out-of-profile bytes received.
2 Click Add to add a new counter that applies to another policy-class map.
3 Enter the fields:
– Interface — Select the interface for which the counter is defined.
– Policy - Class Map Name — Select a policy class map pair.
Defining Policer Statistics Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in
the Policer Statistics pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 22-19. Policer Statistics CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
qos statistics policer policymap-name class-map-name
no qos statistics policer
policy-map-name class-map-name
Enables counting in-profile and out-ofprofile bytes vis-a-vis a policer.
Use the no form of this command to
disable counting.
clear qos statistics Clears the statistics
show qos statistics Displays the statistics
console(config-if)# qos statistics policer policy1 class1 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 701
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Aggregated Policer
To view aggregated policer statistics:
1 Click Quality of Service QoS Statistics Aggregate Policer to display
the Aggregate Policer: Summary page.
Figure 22-18. Aggregate Policer: Summary
The following statistics for the previously-defined counters are displayed:
– Aggregate Policer Name — Policer on which statistics are based.
– In-Profile Bytes — Number of in-profile packets that were received.
– Out-of-Profile Bytes — Number of out-of-profile packets that were
received.
2 To add a new counter that applies to another aggregate policer, click Add. 702 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
3 Select an aggregate policer in the Aggregate Policer Name field.
Defining Aggregate Policer Statistics Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in
the Aggregate Policer Statistics pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Queues Statistics
Queue statistics include statistics of forwarded and dropped packets, based
on interface, queue, and drop precedence. Lowest drop precedence has the
lowest probability of being dropped.
Table 22-20. Aggregate Policer Statistics CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
qos statistics aggregate-policer
aggregate-policer-name
no qos statistics aggregatepolicer aggregate-policer-name
Enables counting in-profile and
out-of-profile bytes vis-a-vis an
aggregate policer.
Use the no form of this command
to disable counting.
clear qos statistics Clears the statistics
show qos statistics Displays the statistics
console (config)# qos statistics aggregate-policer policer1 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 703
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
To view Queue Statistics:
1 Click Quality of Service QoS Statistics Queues Statistics to display
the Queues Statistics: Summary.
Figure 22-19. Queues Statistics: Summary
The statistics for previously-defined counters are displayed.
– Counter Set —Number of counter.
– Port —Number of port.
– Queue —Number of queue.
– Total Packets —Number of packets forwarded or tail dropped.
– Tail Drop Packets —Percentage of packets that were tail dropped.704 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
2 To add a new counter, click Add, and enter the fields:
– Counter Set—Select the counter set. The possible options are:
• Set 1 — Displays the statistics that contains all interfaces and
queues with a high DP (Drop Precedence).
• Set 2 — Displays the statistics that contains all interfaces and
queues with a low DP.
– Interface — Select the unit/interface for which Queue statistics are
displayed.
– Queue — Select the queue on which packets were forwarded or tail
dropped.
Defining QoS Statistics Using CLI Commands
The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in
the QoS Statistics pages.
The following is an example of the CLI commands:
Table 22-21. QoS Statistics CLI Commands
CLI Command Description
qos statistics queues set-number
{queue|all} {dp|all}
{[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe
rnet]port-number|all}
no qos statistics queues setnumber
Enables QoS statistics for output
queues.
Use the no form of this command to
disable QoS statistics for output
queues.
clear qos statistics Clears the statistics
show qos statistics Displays the statistics
console(config)# qos statistics queues 1 all all allDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 705
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Glossary
Figure 23-20. This glossary contains key technical words of interest.
A
Access Mode
Specifies the method by which user access is granted to the system.
Access Profiles
Allows network managers to define profiles and rules for accessing the switch
module. Access to management functions can be limited to user groups,
which are defined by the following criteria:
• Ingress interfaces
• Source IP address or Source IP subnets
ACL
Access Control List. Allow network managers to define classification actions
and rules for specific ingress ports.
Aggregated VLAN
Groups several VLANs into a single aggregated VLAN. Aggregating VLANs
enables routers to respond to ARP requests for nodes located on different subVLANs belonging to the same Super VLAN. Routers respond with their MAC
address.
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol. A protocol that converts IP addresses into
physical addresses.
ASIC
Application Specific Integrated Circuit. A custom chip designed for a specific
application.
Asset Tag
Specifies the user-defined switch module reference.
A BCDE F GHI L MNOP Q
RSTUVW706 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Authentication Profiles
Sets of rules which that enables login to and authentication of users and
applications.
Auto-negotiation
Allows 10/100 Mpbs or 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports to establish for the
following features:
• Duplex/Half Duplex mode
• Flow Control
• Speed
B
Back Pressure
A mechanism used with Half Duplex mode that enables a port not to receive
a message.
Backplane
The main BUS that carries information in the switch module.
Backup Configuration Files
Contains a backup copy of the switch module configuration. The Backup file
changes when the Running Configuration file or the Startup Configuration
file is copied to the Backup file.
Bandwidth
Bandwidth specifies the amount of data that can be transmitted in a fixed
amount of time. For digital switch modules, bandwidth is defined in Bits per
Second (bps) or Bytes per Second.
Bandwidth Assignments
The amount of bandwidth assigned to a specific application, user, or
interface.
Baud
The number of signaling elements transmitted each second.
Best Effort
Traffic is assigned to the lowest priority queue, and packet delivery is not
guaranteed.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 707
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Boot Version
The boot version.
BootP
Bootstrap Protocol. Enables a workstation to discover its IP address, an IP
address of a BootP server on a network, or a configuration file loaded into the
boot of a switch module.
BPDU
Bridge Protocol Data Unit. Provide bridging information in a message format.
BPDUs are sent across switch module information with in Spanning Tree
configuration. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses,
priorities, and forwarding costs.
Bridge
A device that connect two networks. Bridges are hardware specific, however
they are protocol independent. Bridges operate at Layer 1 and Layer 2 levels.
Broadcast Domain
device sets that receive Broadcast frames originating from any device within a
designated set. Routers bind Broadcast domains, because routers do not
forward Broadcast frames.
Broadcasting
A method of transmitting packets to all ports on a network.
Broadcast Storm
An excessive amount of Broadcast messages simultaneously transmitted
across a network by a single port. Forwarded message responses are heaped
onto the network, overloading network resources or causing the network to
time out.
For more information about Broadcast storms, see "LACP Parameters" on
page 511.
C
CDB
Configuration Data Base. A file containing a device’s configuration
information.708 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Class of Service
Class of Service (CoS). Class of Service is the 802.1p priority scheme. CoS
provides a method for tagging packets with priority information. A CoS value
between 0-7 is added to the Layer II header of packets, where zero is the
lowest priority and seven is the highest.
A overlapping transmission of two or more packets that collide. The data
transmitted cannot be used, and the session is restarted.
CLI
Command Line Interface. A set of line commands used to configure the
system. For more information on using the CLI, see Using the CLI.
Communities
Specifies a group of users which retains the same system access rights.
CPU
Central Processing Unit. The part of a computer that processes information.
CPUs are composed of a control unit and an ALU.
D
DHCP Client
A device using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters, such as a network
address.
DHCP Snooping
DHCP Snooping expands network security by providing firewall security
between untrusted interfaces and DHCP servers.
DSCP
DiffServe Code Point (DSCP). DSCP provides a method of tagging IP
packets with QoS priority information.
Domain
A group of computers and devices on a network that are grouped with
common rules and procedures.
Duplex Mode
Permits simultaneous transmissions and reception of data. There are two
different types of duplex mode:Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 709
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
• Full Duplex Mode — Permits for bisynchronous communication, for
example, a telephone. Two parties can transmit information at the same
time.
• Half Duplex Mode — Permits asynchronous communication, for
example, a walkie-talkie. Only one party can transmit information at a
time.
Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA)
• Allows automatic assignment of users to VLANs during the RADIUS
server authentication. When a user is authenticated by the RADIUS
server, the user is automatically joined to the VLAN configured on the
RADIUS server.
E
Egress Ports
Ports from which network traffic is transmitted.
End System
An end user device on a network.
Ethernet
Ethernet is standardized as per IEEE 802.3. Ethernet is the most common
implemented LAN standard. Supports data transfer rates of Mpbs, where 10,
100 or 1000 Mbps is supported.
EWS
Embedded Web Server. Provides device management via a standard web
browser. Embedded Web Servers are used in addition to or in place of a CLI
or NMS.
F
FFT
Fast Forward Table. Provides information about forwarding routes. If a packet
arrives to a device with a known route, the packet is forwarded via a route
listed in the FFT. If there is not a known route, the CPU forwards the packet
and updates the FFT.710 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
FIFO
First In First Out. A queuing process where the first packet in the queue is the
first packet out of the queue.
Flapping
Flapping occurs when an interfaces state is constantly changing. For example,
an STP port constantly changes from listening to learning to forwarding. This
may cause traffic loss.
Flow Control
Enables lower speed devices to communicate with higher speed devices, that
is, that the higher speed device refrains from sending packets.
Fragment
Ethernet packets smaller than 576 bits.
Frame
Packets containing the header and trailer information required by the physical
medium.
G
GARP
General Attributes Registration Protocol. Registers client stations into a
Multicast domain.
Gigabit Ethernet
Gigabit Ethernet transmits at 1000 Mbps, and is compatible with existing
10/100 Mbps Ethernet standards.
GVRP
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol. Registers client stations into a VLANs.
H
HOL
Head of Line. Packets are queued. Packets at the head of the queue are
forwarded before packets at the end of the line.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 711
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Host
A computer that acts as a source of information or services to other
computers.
HTTP
HyperText Transport Protocol. Transmits HTML documents between servers
and clients on the internet.
I
IC
Integrated Circuit. Integrated Circuits are small electronic devices composed
from semiconductor material.
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol. Allows gateway or destination host to
communicate with a source host, for example, to report a processing error.
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. An Engineering
organization that develops communications and networking standards.
IEEE 802.1d
Used in the Spanning Tree Protocol, IEEE 802.1d supports MAC bridging to
avoid network loops.
IEEE 802.1p
Prioritizes network traffic at the data-link/MAC sublayer.
IEEE 802.1Q
Defines the operation of VLAN Bridges that permit the definition, operation,
and administration of VLANs within Bridged LAN infrastructures.
IGMP Snooping
IGMP Snooping examines IGMP frame contents, when they are forwarded by
the device from work stations to an upstream Multicast router. From the
frame, the device identifies work stations configured for Multicast sessions,
and which Multicast routers are sending Multicast frames.712 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Image File
System images are saved in two Flash sectors called images (Image 1 and
Image 2). The active image stores the active copy; while the other image
stores a second copy.
Ingress Port
Ports on which network traffic is received.
IP
Internet Protocol. Specifies the format of packets and there addressing
method. IP addresses packets and forwards the packets to the correct port.
IP Address
Internet Protocol Address. A unique address assigned to a network device
with two or more interconnected LANs or WANs.
IP Version 6 (IPv6)
A version of IP addressing with longer addresses than the traditional IPv4.
IPv6 addresses are 128 bits long, whereas IPv4 addresses are 32 bits; allowing a
much larger address space.
ISATAP
Intra-Site Automatic Tunnel Addressing Protocol .
ISATAP is an automatic overlay tunneling mechanism that uses the
underlying IPv4 network as a non-Broadcast/multicast access link layer for
IPv6. ISATAP is designed for transporting IPv6 packets within a site where a
native IPv6 infrastructure is not yet available.
L
LAG
Link Aggregated Group. Aggregates ports or VLANs into a single virtual port
or VLAN.
For more information on LAGs, see Defining LAG Membership.
LAN
Local Area Networks. A network contained within a single room, building,
campus or other limited geographical area.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 713
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Layer 2
Data Link Layer or MAC Layer. Contains the physical address of a client or
server station. Layer 2 processing is faster than Layer 3 processing because
there is less information to process.
Layer 3
Establishes a connections and ensures that all data arrives to their
destination. Packets inspected at the Layer 3 level are analyzed and
forwarding decisions, based on their applications.
LLDP-MED
Link Layer Discovery Protocol - Media Endpoint Discovery. LLDP allows
network managers to troubleshoot and enhance network management by
discovering and maintaining network topologies over multi-vendor
environments. MED increases network flexibility by allowing different IP
systems to co-exist on a single network LLDP.
Load Balancing
Enables the even distribution of data or processing packets across available
network resources. For example, load balancing may distribute the incoming
packets evenly to all servers, or redirect the packets to the next available
server.
M
MAC Address
Media Access Control Address. The MAC Address is a hardware specific
address that identifies each network node.
MAC Address Learning
MAC Address Learning characterizes a learning bridge, in which the packet’s
source MAC address is recorded. Packets destined for that address are
forwarded only to the bridge interface on which that address is located.
Packets addressed to unknown addresses are forwarded to every bridge
interface. MAC Address Learning minimizes traffic on the attached LANs.
MAC Layer
A sub-layer of the Data Link Control (DTL) layer.714 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Mask
A filter that includes or excludes certain values, for example parts of an IP
address.
For example, Unit 2 is inserted in the first minute of a ten-minute cycle, and
Unit 1 is inserted in fifth minute of the same cycle, the units are considered
the same age.
MD5
Message Digest 5. An algorithm that produces a 128-bit hash. MD5 is a
variation of MD4, and increases MD4 security. MD5 verifies the integrity of
the communication, authenticates the origin of the communication.
MDI
Media Dependent Interface. A cable used for end stations.
MDIX
Media Dependent Interface with Crossover (MDIX). A cable used for hubs
and switches.
MIB
Management Information Base. MIBs contain information describing specific
aspects of network components.
Multicast
Transmits copies of a single packet to multiple ports.
N
NA
Neighbor Advertisement.
ND
Neighbor Discovery.
NS
Neighbor Solicitation.
NMS
Network Management System. An interface that provides a method of
managing a system.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 715
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Node
A network connection endpoint or a common junction for multiple network
lines. Nodes include:
• Processors
• Controllers
• Workstations
O
OID
Organizationally Unique Identifiers. Identifiers associated with a Voice
VLAN.
OUI
Object Identifier. Used by SNMP to identify managed objects. In the SNMP
Manager/Agent network management paradigm, each managed object must
have an OID to identify it.
P
Packets
Blocks of information for transmission in packet switched systems.
PDU
Protocol Data Unit. A data unit specified in a layer protocol consisting of
protocol control information and layer user data.
PING
Packet Internet Groper. Verifies if a specific IP address is available. A packet is
sent to another IP address and waits for a reply.
Port
Physical ports provide connecting components that allow microprocessors to
communicate with peripheral equipment.
Port Mirroring
Monitors and mirrors network traffic by forwarding copies of incoming and
outgoing packets from one port to a monitoring port.
For more information on port mirroring, see Defining Port Mirroring Sessions.716 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Protocol
A set of rules that governs how devices exchange information across networks.
PVE
Protocol VLAN Edge. A port can be defined as a Private VLAN Edge (PVE)
port of an uplink port, so that it will be isolated from other ports within the
same VLAN.
Q
QoS
Quality of Service. QoS allows network managers to decide how and what
network traffic is forwarded according to priorities, application types, and
source and destination addresses.
Query
Extracts information from a database and presents the information for use.
R
RA
RADIUS Advertisement.
RD
RADIUS Discovery.
RS
Router Solicitation.
RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service. A method for authenticating
system users, and tracking connection time.
RMON
Remote Monitoring. Provides network information to be collected from a
single workstation.
RouterDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 717
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
A device that connects to separate networks. Routers forward packets
between two or more networks. Routers operate at a Layer 3 level.
RSTP
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. Detects and uses network topologies that
allow a faster convergence of the spanning tree, without creating forwarding
loops.
Running Configuration File
Contains all startup configuration file commands, as well as all commands
entered during the current session. After the switch module is powered down
or rebooted, all commands stored in the Running Configuration file are lost.
S
Segmentation
Divides LANs into separate LAN segments for bridging. Segmentation
eliminates LAN bandwidth limitations.
Server
A central computer that provides services to other computers on a network.
Services may include file storage and access to applications.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol. Manages LANs. SNMP based
software communicates with network devices with embedded SNMP agents.
SNMP agents gather network activity and device status information, and send
the information back to a workstation.
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol. SNTP assures accurate network switch clock
time synchronization up to the millisecond.
SoC
System on a Chip. An ASIC that contains an entire system. For example, a
telecom SoC application can contain a microprocessor, digital signal
processor, RAM, and ROM.718 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Spanning Tree Protocol
Prevents loops in network traffic. The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) provides
tree topography for any arrangement of bridges. STP provides one path
between end stations on a network, eliminating loops.
SSH
Secure Shell. Permits logging to another computer over a network, execute
commands on a remote machine, and move files from one machine to
another. Secure Shell provides strong authentication and secure
communications methods over insecure channels.
Startup Configuration
Retains the exact switch module configuration when the switch module is
powered down or rebooted.
Subnet
Sub-network. Subnets are portions of a network that share a common address
component. On TCP/IP networks, devices that share a prefix are part of the
same subnet. For example, all devices with a prefix of 157.100.100.100 are
part of the same subnet.
Subnet Mask
Used to mask all or part of an IP address used in a subnet address.
Switch
Filters and forwards packets between LAN segments. Switches support any
packet protocol type.
T
TCP/IP
Transmissions Control Protocol. Enables two hosts to communicate and
exchange data streams. TCP guarantees packet delivery, and guarantees
packets are transmitted and received in the order their sent.
Telnet
Terminal Emulation Protocol. Enables system users to log in and use
resources on remote networks. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 719
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
TFTP
Trivial File Transfer Protocol. Uses User Data Protocol (UDP) without
security features to transfer files.
Trap
A message sent by the SNMP that indicates that system event has occurred.
Trunking
Link Aggregation. Optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together
to form a single trunk (aggregated groups).
U
UDP
User Data Protocol. Transmits packets but does not guarantee their delivery.
Unicast
A form of routing that transmits one packet to one user.
V
VLAN
Virtual Local Area Networks. Logical subgroups with a Local Area Network
(LAN) created via software rather than defining a hardware solution.
VoIP
Voice over IP.
W
WAN
Wide Area Networks. Networks that cover a large geographical area.
Wildcard Mask
Specifies which IP address bits are used, and which bits are ignored. A wild
switch module mask of 255.255.255.255 indicates that no bit is important. A
wildcard of 0.0.0.0 indicates that all the bits are important. 720
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Index
Numerics
24/48 G Ports 37
802.1ab (LLDP-MED) 28
802.1d 22
802.1Q 476, 482
A
AC unit 44
Acceptable Frame Type 471
Access Control Lists 31
Access mode 329
Access ports 469
Access Profile Rules (ACEs) 262
Access profiles 261, 272
Accessing the device through the
CLI 71
ACE, IPv4 110
ACL binding 123
ACL, IPv4 109
ACL, IPv6 118
ACLs 31, 103
Active users 275
Address pool 301
Address Resolution Protocol 249,
706
Address Tables 422
Administrator Buttons 91
Advanced QoS 25
Advanced Switch Configuration 67
Aggregate Policer 686, 701
Aggregated VLAN 706
Alarms 638
Anycast 178, 183
Apply&Save 91
ARP 249, 251, 706
ARP inspection 31
ARP, dynamic inspection 560
ARP, dynamic inspection list 564
ARP, dynamic inspection list
entries 566
ARP, global settings 562
ARP, trusted interfaces 570
ARP, VLAN settings 568
Asset 156
Assignment to hardware queues
651
Authentication methods 134
Authentication profiles 269721
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Auto update, configuration/image
file 338
Automatic aging for MAC
addresses 19
Auto-Negotiation 18
B
Back panel 39, 44
Back Pressure 17, 386
Bandwidth 664
Boot Image Download 85
Booting the Switch 60
BootP 24, 708
BootP and DHCP Clients 24
BPDU 438, 456, 708
BPDU Guard 23
BPDU Handling 438
Bridge Multicast Forward All 525
Bridge Multicast Groups 521
Bridge Protocol Data Unit 708
Broadcast 179, 183
Broadcast Storm Control 20
Buttons 38
C
Cables testing 256
CBC 315
Cipher Block-Chaining 315
Class Mapping 682
Class of Service 709
Classic lock 98
Classic STP 435
CLI 27, 68, 71, 261
CLI macro 31
Clock Source 181
Command Line Interface 27
Command Mode Overview 68
Configuration file 354
Configuration file download 352
Configuration using the Setup
Wizard 61
Configuration Work Flow 58
Configuring Login Banners 78
Configuring the Stack 61
Configuring the Switch 57
Connecting the Switch to the
Terminal 59
Console 269, 272
Console access 291
Copying files 361
CoS 709
CoS 802.1p support 24
CoS to Queue 660
Counter Summary 612
CPU Utilization 648722
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
D
Daylight Savings Times 170
Default domain names 245
Default Gateway, IPv6 226
Defining device information 156
Denied ACEs Counters 608
Device representation 89
Device structure 36
DHCP 572
DHCP client 24, 297
DHCP limitations 575
DHCP Relay 586
DHCP Relay, global settings 589
DHCP Relay, limitations 587
DHCP Relay, Option 82 Overview
587
DHCP server 32, 297, 299
DHCP server properties 298
DHCP server, retreiving an IP
address 72
DHCP Snooping 31, 573
DHCP, global parameters 575
DHCP, trusted interfaces 581
DHCP, VLAN settings 579
DiffServe Code Point 709
DNS 28, 242
Domain 709
Domain Name System 28, 242
Dot1x 29
Dot1x Authentication 132
Download, boot image 85
Download, system image 83
Download, TFTP 353
Download, USB/HTTP 351
Downloading software 80, 337
DSCP 709
DSCP Mapping 680
DSCP Rewrite 671
DST Times 170
Duplex mode 709
DVA 134, 710
Dynamic ACL
Assignment/Dynamic Policy
Assignment (DACL/DPA) 31
Dynamic Addresses 427
Dynamic addresses 428
Dynamic Policy/ACL Assignment
134
Dynamic VLAN Assignment 141
Dynamic VLAN Assignment
(DVA) 134, 710
E
E-911 541
EAP 29, 132
EAP Statistics 622723
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Egress ports 710
Egress Shaping Rates 664
Emergency Call Service 541
Enable 282
Enable passwords 281
End System 710
Erase FLASH File 81
Etherlike Statistics 616
Ethernet 710
Events 634
Events log 637
EWS 710
Excluded addresses 306
Excluding addresses 307
Extensible Authentication
Protocol 29, 132
F
Fans 160
Fast Forward Table 710
Fast link 23, 442, 447
FFT 710
FIFO 711
File information 365
Filtering 477, 483, 517
Filtering L2 Multicast Packets 517
Firmware download 352
First In First Out 711
Flapping 711
Flow Control 386, 711
Flow Control Support (IEEE
802.3X) 17
Flow Monitoring (sflow) 26
Forwarding L2 Multicast Packets
517
Fragment 711
Frame 711
Frame Flow 468
Front Panel 37
Full 802.1Q VLAN Tagging
Compliance 21
G
GARP 430, 433, 711
GARP timers 432
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol
21, 711
General Ports 470
General Switch Information 156
Generic Attributes Registration
Protocol 711
Giga Port LEDs 42
Gigabit Ethernet 711
Global Configuration Mode 69
Green Ethernet 17724
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Green Ethernet Configuration 390
Guest VLAN 22
GVRP 620, 711
GVRP parameters 490
GVRP statistics 619
GVRP Support 21
H
Hardware description 35
Hardware version 370
Hash 181
HDMI port LEDs 43
HDMI ports 37
Head of Line Blocking Prevention
17
Help 91
HMAC-SHA-96 326
HOL 17, 711
Host 712
Host name mapping 247
HTTP 261, 269, 286, 712
HTTP password, configuring 77
HTTPS 261, 264, 269, 286
HyperText Transport Protocol 712
I
IC 712
ICMP 712
Icons 91
Identifying a switch via LED 33
IEEE 712
IEEE 802.1d 712
IEEE 802.1p 712
IEEE 802.1Q 21, 712
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning
Tree 23
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree
23
IGMP 518
IGMP Snooping 20, 527, 712
Image file 713
Image files, active 360
Information Buttons 91
Ingress port 713
Ingress Rate Limit 664
Interface Configuration Mode 70
Interface Statistics 614
IP 713
IP address from a BOOTP Server
73
IP Addressing 209
IP Version 6 (IPv6) Support 16
IPv4 Interfaces 210
IPv6 Default Gateway 226
IPv6 Interfaces 221725
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
IPv6 Neighbors 235
IPv6 Routes Table 239
IPv6-based ACL 117
ISATAP 229
iSCSI 595
iSCSI Sessions 603, 605
iSCSI Targets 601
iSCSI, global parameters 598
iSCSI, limitations 596
iSCSI, optimization 32, 594
J
Jumbo Frames 388
L
LACP parameters 511
LAG configuration 409
LAG membership 514
LAG statistics 645
LAGs 24, 508, 525, 713
LAGs Settings 481
LAN 713
Layer 2 714
Layer 2 Features 20
Layer 2 Switching 517
Layer 3 714
LED Definitions 40
LEDs 38, 42
LEDs on Front Panel 38
Light Emitting Diodes 40
Limited dynamic lock 98
Line passwords 279
Link Aggregated Group 713
Link aggregation 24, 508, 510
Link Aggregation and LACP 24
Link Control Protocol (LCP)
packets 399, 451
Link Layer Discovery Protocol -
Media Endpoint Discovery 714
Link/Duplex/Activity LEDs 42
LLDP 540
LLDP MED Port Settings 552
LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery
541
LLDP Port Settings 546
LLDP properties 542
LLDP-MED 28, 541, 714
Load Balancing 714
Loading Software into Stack
Members 54
Local User Database 277
Location LED 373
Locked ports 29, 100, 105, 108,
110, 115, 118, 121, 124, 126,
130, 580, 582, 584726
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Log file in Flash 202
Logging Global Parameters 196
Logging Severity Level - Alert 196
Logging Severity Level - Critical
196
Logging Severity Level - Debug
196
Logging Severity Level -
Emergency 196
Logging Severity Level - Error 196
Logging Severity Level -
Informational 196
Logging Severity Level - Notice
196
Logging Severity Level - Warning
196
Login Banners 78
Login History 203
Logs 195
Loops 435
M
MAC Address Capacity Support 18
MAC address learning 714
MAC addresses 98, 714
MAC addresses, supported
features 18
MAC Layer 714
MAC Multicast Support 19
Mac-based ACE 106
Mac-based ACL 104
Management Access Lists 262
Management Access Methods 272
Management Information Base
314, 715
Management IP Address Conflict
Notification 26
Management methods 264
Management security 261
Managing configuration files on
the stack 54
Manual Time Setting 169
Mask 715
MD5 181, 715
MDI 406, 715
MDI/MDIX 18, 385
MDIX 406, 715
MED Network Policy 549
Media Endpoint Discovery 549
Message Digest 5 181, 715
MIB 314, 715
Monitoring users 146
MPS 44
MST Properties 456
MSTP 23, 455
MSTP Instance Settings 460
MSTP Interface Settings 462727
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Multicast 516, 525
Multicast TV VLAN 22
Multicast TV VLAN Mapping 537
Multicast TV VLAN Membership
535
Multiple STP (MSTP) 435
N
ND 715
Neighbor Advertisement 715
Neighbor Discovery. 715
Neighbor Solicitation 715
Neighbors 557
Neighbors, IPv6 235
Network Control Protocols 399,
451
Network Management System 715
Network pool 303
NMS 715
NS 715
O
Object ID 315
OID 315
Optical transciever diagnostics 258
Option 82 587
OUI 504
P
Packets 716
Password configuration 75
Password management 30, 286
Password recovery 82
Passwords 88, 282
Path Cost 438
PDU 716
PING 716
PoE 16, 162
Policer Statistics 699
Policers 685
Policy Binding 696
Policy Table 689
Port 716
Port Configuration 403
Port default settings 386
Port LEDs 40, 42
Port mirroring 20, 417, 716
Port modes 469
Port profile 31
Port representation 89
Port security 98
Port settings 475
Port-based Authentication 132
Port-based Authentication
(Dot1x) 29728
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Port-based Virtual LANs (VLANs)
21
Ports 37, 89, 384, 645
Ports, statistics 643
Power over Ethernet 16
Power supplies 44
Print 91
Private VLAN 22, 494
Privileged EXEC Mode 68
Proprietary Protocol Filtering 32,
125
Protected Port Configuration 395
Protected ports 32, 394
Protected ports, restrictions 394
Protocol 717
Protocol Group 484, 485
Protocol Ports 488
Protocol VLAN Edge 717
PVE 717
PVID 475, 482
Q
QinQ 469
QoS 24, 656, 717
QoS Advanced mode 676
QoS Basic mode 670
QoS Modes 653
QoS Properties 655
QoS, Advanced Mode, Workflow
679
QoS, Aggregate Policer 686
QoS, assignment to hardware
queues 651
QoS, Bandwidth 664
QoS, Basic mode 669
QoS, Basic Mode, Workflow 669
QoS, Class Mapping 682
QoS, DSCP Mapping 680
QoS, DSCP Rewrite 671
QoS, DSCP to Queue 662
QoS, Mapping to Queue 659
QoS, Policer Statistics 699
QoS, Policers 684
QoS, Policy Binding 696
QoS, Policy Class Maps 692
QoS, Policy Table 689
QoS, Queues 656
QoS, Single Policer 686
QoS, Statistics 697
QoS, Traffic Classification 651
QoS, Trust Mode 674
Quality of Service 650, 653, 717
R
RA 717
RADIUS 271, 291, 717729
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
RADIUS Advertisement 717
RADIUS client 29
RADIUS discovery 717
RADIUS server 291
RAM Log 200
Rapid Spanning Tree 450
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 450,
718
Rapid STP 435, 452, 464
RD 717
Rebooting the Stack 54
Refresh 92
Registered Multicast Group 517
Remote Authentication Dial-In
User Service 29, 717
Remote Authorization Dial-In
User Service 291
Remote Log Server 206
Remote Monitoring 27, 717
Reset button 38
Retrieving an IP Address 72
RMON 625, 628, 629, 717
RMON Statistics 625, 626
Router Solicitation 717
Routes Table, IPv6 239
RS 717
RS-232 Console Port 37
RSTP 23, 450, 718
Rules 262
Running Configuration File 337,
718
S
Secure Shell 291
Secure Telnet (SSH) 261, 272
Security Features 29
Security Management 75
Segmentation 718
Selecting the Master and Master
Backup Units 51
Self-Learning MAC Addresses 19
Server 718
Set Terminal Baud-Rate 82
Setup Wizard 61
sFlow 375
sFlow interface 380
sFlow receiver 377
sFlow statistics 382
SFP 44
SFP LEDs 44
Simple Network Management
Protocol 718
Simple Network Time Protocol 28,
178
Single Policer 686
SMMP groups 322730
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
SNMP 261, 264, 286, 314, 718
SNMP access rights 315
SNMP communities 327
SNMP global parameters 316
SNMP logs 25
SNMP Model OIDs 316
SNMP notification filters 330
SNMP notification recipients 333
SNMP users 324
SNMP Versions 1, 2, and 3 26
SNMP views 319
SNTP 28, 178
SNTP Authentication 184
SNTP Global Settings 183
SNTP Servers 187
Software Download 83
Software version 370
Spanning Tree Protocol 22, 435,
719
SPF LEDs 40, 42
SSH 30, 264, 269, 286, 719
SSH password, configuring 77
SSL 29
Stack ID LED 44
Stack management 46, 367
Stack Menu 82
Stack Support 16
Stacking 46
Stacking failover topology 49
Stacking, adding a unit to the stack
50
Stacking, assigning unit IDs 50
Stacking, automatic assignment of
unit IDs 50
Starting the Application 88
Startup Configuration 337, 719
Startup file 337
Startup Menu 80
Static addresses 424, 425
Static hosts 308, 310
Statistics 606
Statistics, alarms 638
Statistics, Counter Summary 612
Statistics, CPU Utilization 648
Statistics, Denied ACEs Counters
608
Statistics, EAP 622
Statistics, Etherlike 616
Statistics, events control 634
Statistics, events log 637
Statistics, GVRP 619
Statistics, history control 629
Statistics, history table 631
Statistics, Interface Statistics 614
Statistics, LAGs 645
Statistics, ports 643731
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
Statistics, QoS 698
Statistics, Utilization Summary
610
Storm control 414
STP 22, 444
STP BPDU Guard 23
STP mode 437
STP port settings 442
STP, bridge settings 438
STP, classic 437
STP, designated roots 439
STP, LAG settings 447
Subnet 719
Subnet Mask 719
Switch 719
Switching from the Master to the
Backup Master 53
SYSLOG 195
System Image Download 83
System LEDs 40
T
Table Views 607
TACACS+ 30, 271, 282
TCP Congestion Avoidance 25,
666
TCP/IP 719
TDR technology 256
Telnet 261, 264, 269, 272, 280, 286,
291, 719
Telnet Connection 71
Telnet password, configuring 76
Terminal Access Controller Access
Control System 282
Terminal Connection 72
TFTP 27, 720
Time Domain Reflectometry 256
Time range 127
Time range, absolute 128
Time range, recurring 129
Time synchronization 169
Traffic Classification 651
Traffic limitation methods 656
Traffic limitation, combination of
WRR and Strict Priority 657
Traffic limitation, Strict Priority
656
Traffic limitation, Weighted
Round Robin (WRR) 656
Trap 720
Tree view 88
Trivial File Transfer Protocol 720
Trunk Ports 469
Trunking 720
Tunnel, ISATAP 229732
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
U
UDP 720
UDP relay 253
Unauthenticated VLAN and Guest
VLANs 135
Understanding the interface 88
Unicast 178, 183
Unit ID 367
Unit identification 373
Unregistered Multicast Group 517
Uploading files 355
Uploading files, TFTP 357
Uploading files, USB/HTTP 356
USB File Transfer Protocol 27
USB port 38
User Data Protocol 720
User Security Model 314
Using Dell OpenManage Switch
Administrator 87
Using the CLI 68
USM 314
Utilization Summary 610
V
Ventilation System 40
Versions, hardware/software 370
Virtual Local Area Networks 720
VLAN 21, 466, 472, 473, 525, 720
VLAN frame flow 468
VLAN membership 472
VLAN settings, DHCP 579
VLAN Support 21
VLAN to MSTP Instance 458
VLAN, ARP settings 568
VLAN, LAG settings 481
VLAN, port settings 475
VLAN, private 494
VLAN, special cases 468
VLAN, voice 498
VLAN-aware MAC-based
Switching 19
Voice VLAN 21, 498
Voice VLAN OUI 504
VoIP 720
W
Warm standby 52
Web access 291
Web management system icons 91
Web-Based Management 26
Weighted Round Robin (WRR)
656733
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
X
XG Ports 37734
FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell
Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLYDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 735
DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY
25
Revision History
Rev Date Description
A7 Mar. 11, 2013 Made the following corrections:
• Added comment that GVRP is only operational on ports
in general mode.
A6 Sept. 3, 2012 Made the following corrections:
• Added Power Limit field in "Power over Ethernet" on
page 162
• Corrected number of ports that can be mirrored to 4
• Corrected number of OUIs from 128 to 16.
• Corrected parameters to show power inline command.
• Added description of when traps are generated in "Power
over Ethernet" on page 162.
A5 May 1, 2012 Added "Auto-Update/Configuration Feature" on page 338
A4 April 4, 2012 Made the following corrections:
• Put a the note (of the recommendation of using HDMI
cable version to 1.4 for stacking) more clearly.
• Fixed RDP description
A4 April 2, 2012 Following corrections made:
• Add description regarding the Egress ACL feature
• Enter comments regarding the PVLAN feature.
• Fixed RDP abbreviation to Reliable Data Protocol in
ACL section.
• Add the recommendation of using HDMI cable version
to 1.4 for stacking
A3 Jan 31, 2012 Corrected command in private VLAN CLI command.
A2 Sept 21, 2011 Entered comment that enabling iSCSI also enables flow
control on all interfaces.www.dell.com|support.dell.com
Printed in the U.S.A.
Dell PowerConnect
5500 Series
Getting Started Guide
Regulatory Models: PowerConnect 5524, 5524P, 5548, 5548P
ContaxGS.book Page 1 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMNotes, Cautions, and Warnings
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you
make better use of your system.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to
hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property
damage, personal injury, or death.
____________________
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written
permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, Dell Precision,
Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp, Dell
OpenManage and the YOURS IS HERE logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel,
Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S.
and other countries; Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, MS-DOS and
Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either
the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims
any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
Regulatory Models: PowerConnect 5524, 5524P, 5548, 5548P
September 2010 P/N JN2W1 A01
ContaxGS.book Page 2 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMContents 3
Contents
1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Unpacking the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Installing the Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Installing in a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Installing on a Flat Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Connecting the Switch to Power Supplies . . . . . . . . 8
2 Stacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Stacking Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Unit ID Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Automatic Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Manual Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
ContaxGS.book Page 3 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM4 Contents
3 Configuring the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Configuration Work Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Connecting the Switch to the Terminal . . . . . . . . . 14
Booting the Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Configuring the Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Configuration Using the Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . 16
ContaxGS.book Page 4 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMGetting Started Guide 5
Installation
Overview
This guide describes how to install and run the PowerConnect 5500 series
switches. For more information, see the Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series User
Guide, available on your Documentation CD, or check the Dell Support
website at support.dell.com/manuals for the latest updates on documentation
and software.
In this document, the word "switch" refers to either a single switch or a group
of stacked switches.
For a complete description of the PowerConnect 5500 series switch, see the
Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series User Guide, available on your Documentation
CD.
NOTE: Even though the graphics in this guide show the Dell PowerConnect 5524P
device, the instructions are the same for all models.
Site Preparation
PowerConnect 5500 series switches can be mounted in a standard 48.26-cm
(19-inch) equipment rack or placed on a tabletop. Before installing the unit,
verify that the chosen location for installation meets the following site
requirements:
• Power —
– The unit is installed near an easily accessible 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz
outlet.
– If a Redundant Power Supply (RPS) or a Modular Power Supply
(MPS) is being used, check that it is easily accessible.
• Clearance — There is adequate frontal clearance for operator access.
Allow clearance for cabling, power connections, and ventilation.
ContaxGS.book Page 5 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM6 Installation
• Cabling — The cabling is routed to avoid sources of electrical noise, such
as radio transmitters, broadcast amplifiers, power lines, and fluorescent
lighting fixtures.
• Ambient Requirements — The ambient unit operating temperature range
is 0 to 45ºC (32 to 113ºF) at a relative humidity of 10% to 90%, noncondensing.
Unpacking
Package Contents
While unpacking the switch, ensure that the following items are included:
• Switch
• AC power cable
• RS-232 cable with a male 8-pin RJ-45 connector
• Self-adhesive rubber pads
• Rack-mount kit for rack installation
• Documentation CD
Unpacking the Switch
NOTE: Before unpacking the switch, inspect the package and immediately report
any evidence of damage.
To unpack the switch:
1 Place the box on a clean flat surface.
2 Open the box or remove the box top.
3 Carefully remove the switch from the box and place it on a secure and
clean surface.
4 Remove all packing material.
5 Inspect the switch and accessories for damage. Report any damage
immediately to the dealer.
ContaxGS.book Page 6 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMInstallation 7
Installing the Switch
The PowerConnect 5500 Series switches can be:
• Installed on a rack
• Placed on a flat surface
Installing in a Rack
CAUTION: Disconnect all cables from the unit before mounting the switch in a
rack or cabinet.
CAUTION: When mounting multiple switches into a rack, mount the switches
from the bottom up.
To install the switch in a rack:
1 Place the supplied rack-mounting bracket on one side of the switch,
ensuring that the mounting holes on the switch line up to the mounting
holes on the rack-mounting bracket.
Figure 1-1 illustrates where to mount the brackets.
Figure 1-1. Bracket Installation for Rack Mounting
2 Insert the supplied screws into the rack-mounting holes and tighten with a
screwdriver.
ContaxGS.book Page 7 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM8 Installation
3 Repeat the process for the rack-mounting bracket on the other side of the
switch.
4 Insert the unit into the 48.26-cm (19-inch) rack, ensuring that the
rack-mounting holes on the switch line up to the mounting holes on the
rack.
5 Secure the unit to the rack with the rack screws (not provided). Fasten the
lower pair of screws before the upper pair of screws. Ensure that the
ventilation holes are not obstructed.
Installing on a Flat Surface
Install the switch on a flat surface if it is not installed on a rack. The surface
must be able to support the weight of the switch and the switch cables.
To install the switch on a flat surface:
1 Attach the self-adhesive rubber pads on each marked location on the
bottom of the chassis.
2 Set the switch on a flat surface, leaving 5.08 cm (2 inches) on each side
and 12.7 cm (5 inches) at the back.
3 Ensure that the switch has proper ventilation.
Connecting the Switch to Power Supplies
Each switch in the stack must be connected to an AC power supply.
The power connectors are positioned on the back panel. Connecting a
Redundant Power Supply (RPS) or Modular Power Supply (MPS) is optional,
but recommended. The RPS or MPS connector is on the back panel of the
switch. The RPS is used for non-PoE switches and MPS is used for PoE
switches.
Figure 1-2. Back-Panel Power Connector
RPS or MPS A/C Power Supply
ContaxGS.book Page 8 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMGetting Started Guide 9
Stacking
Overview
Each switch is a member in a stack, although the stack may consist of only a
single switch. Up to eight switches are supported per stack.
All stacks must have a Master unit, and may have a Master Backup unit. All
other switches are connected to the stack as members (slaves).
Stacking Switches
PowerConnect 5500 series switches use two HDMI 10G ports for stacking.
To connect the switches in the stack:
1 Insert one end of an HDMI cable into the left-hand HDMI port on the
switch at the top of the stack and the other end into the right-hand HDMI
port of the switch immediately below it.
2 Repeat this process until all switches are connected.
3 (Optional) Connect the left-hand HDMI port of the switch at the bottom
of the stack to the right-hand HDMI port of the switch at the top of the
stack. This step provides increased bandwidth and redundancy.
ContaxGS.book Page 9 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM10 Stacking
Figure 2-1 shows this process.
Figure 2-1. Stacking Cable Diagram
HDMI Ports
Front Panel
HDMI Ports
Front Panel
HDMI Ports
Front Panel
Front Panel
HDMI Ports
ContaxGS.book Page 10 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMStacking 11
Unit ID Assignment
Each switch in the stack has a unique unit ID that defines the unit’s position
and function in the stack.
Figure 2-2 describes the stacking LEDs on the front panel of the switch.
Figure 2-2. Stacking LEDs on Front Panel
The Unit ID of each switch can be either automatically assigned or manually
assigned, as described below.
Automatic Assignment
When you power-up the stack, each switch is assigned a unique Unit ID. This
is displayed on the front panel of the switch, as shown in Figure 2-2.
The switch that is assigned Unit ID 1 is the Master unit, by default. The
switch that is assigned Unit ID 2 is the Master Backup unit.
Unit ID Master
ContaxGS.book Page 11 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM12 Stacking
Manual Assignment
To assign unit IDs to the switches in the stack, do the following for each
switch in the stack:
1 Connect the switch to the terminal, as described in "Connecting the
Switch to the Terminal".
2 Turn on the switch to begin auto boot and press Return or Esc to abort and
enter the Start Up menu.
3 Select Stack menu to open the Stack Menu.
4 Select Set unit stack id. Enter either a Unit ID or 0. 0 indicates that the
unit ID will be assigned automatically.
NOTE: The entire stack should be installed, as shown in Figure 2-1, before powering
up the switches.
For more information on stacking, see the Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series User
Guide on the Documentation CD.
Startup Menu
[1]Download Software
[2]Erase Flash File
[3]Password Recovery Procedure
[4]Set Terminal Baud-Rate
[5]Stack menu
[6]Back
[1]Show unit stack id
[2]Set unit stack id
[3]Back
ContaxGS.book Page 12 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMGetting Started Guide 13
Configuring the Switch
This section describes the configuration that must be performed after the
switch is installed and connected to power supplies. Additional advanced
functions are described in the Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series User Guide on
the Documentation CD.
NOTE: Before proceeding further, read the release notes for this product. You can
download the release notes from the Dell Support website at support.dell.com.
NOTE: We recommend that you obtain the most recent revision of the user
documentation from the Dell Support website at support.dell.com.
Configuration Work Flow
To configure the switches:
1 For each switch in the stack:
a Connect it to a terminal, as described in the "Connecting the Switch
to the Terminal".
b Boot the switch, as described in the "Booting the Switch".
c Assign a unit ID to the switch, as described in "Unit ID Assignment".
2 Connect the units in the stack to each other, as described in "Configuring
the Stack".
3 Connect the Master unit to the terminal, reboot the unit and the Setup
Wizard is run automatically, as described in "Configuration Using the
Setup Wizard".
4 Respond to the Setup Wizard prompts.
5 Continue managing the switch, either through the console or Telnet, using
the CLI or the web GUI, as described in the Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series
User Guide.
ContaxGS.book Page 13 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM14 Configuring the Switch
Connecting the Switch to the Terminal
The switch is configured and monitored through a terminal desktop system
that runs terminal emulation software. The switch connects to the terminal
through the console port.
To connect the switch to a terminal:
1 Connect an RS-232 cable to a VT100-compatible terminal or the serial
connector of a desktop system running terminal emulation software.
2 Connect the RS-232 cable to the switch console port on the front panel of
the switch (see Figure 3-1) using an 8-pin RJ-45 male connector.
Figure 3-1. Front-Panel Console Port
3 Set the terminal emulation software as follows:
a Select the appropriate serial port to connect to the switch.
b Set the data rate to 9600 baud.
c Set the data format to 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.
d Set Flow Control to none.
e Select VT100 for Emulation mode within your communication
software.
f Select Terminal keys for Function, Arrow, and Ctrl keys. Ensure that
the setting is for Terminal keys (not Windows keys).
NOTE: You can connect a console to the console port on any unit in the stack, but
stack management is performed only from the stack master (Unit ID 1 or 2).
Console Port
ContaxGS.book Page 14 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMConfiguring the Switch 15
Booting the Switch
After the local terminal is connected, turn on power. The switch then goes
through power-on self-test (POST). POST runs every time the switch is
started and checks hardware components, to determine if the switch is
operational before completely booting. If the system detects a critical
problem, the boot process stops. If POST passes successfully, a valid
executable image is loaded into RAM. POST messages are displayed on the
terminal and indicate test success or failure.
The boot process runs for approximately 40-45seconds.
When the boot process completes, the following LEDs are lit, as shown in
Figure 3-2:
• Power
• Status
• Fan (should be green)
• RPS (if it is being used)
Figure 3-2. Initial LEDs
Power Status
Fan
RPS
ContaxGS.book Page 15 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM16 Configuring the Switch
Configuring the Stack
The switch is always considered to be a stack of switches even if the stack only
contains a single switch. If there is more than one switch in the stack, each
switch must be configured individually. See "Unit ID Assignment" for
instructions on how to configure the stack.
Configuration Using the Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard guides you through the initial switch configuration to get
the system up and running as quickly as possible. Note that you can skip the
Setup Wizard and configure the switch manually through the CLI.
The Setup Wizard configures the following fields:
• SNMP Community String and SNMP Management System IP address
(optional)
• Username and password
• Management switch IP address
• IP subnet mask
• Default gateway IP address
NOTE: The Setup Wizard assumes the following:
• The PowerConnect switch was never configured before and is in the same
state as when you received it.
• The PowerConnect switch booted successfully.
• The console connection is established and the console prompt is displayed on
the screen of a VT100 terminal switch.
Connect the Master unit to a terminal. You can identify the Master unit by
the illuminated Master LED on the front panel of the switch (see Figure 2-2).
To configure the system using the Setup Wizard:
1 Obtain the following information from the network administrator:
• SNMP Community String and SNMP Management System IP
address (optional)
• Username and password
ContaxGS.book Page 16 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMConfiguring the Switch 17
• The IP address to be assigned to the VLAN 1 interface through which
the switch is to be managed (by default, every external and internal
port is a member of the VLAN 1)
• The IP subnet mask for the network
• The default gateway (next hop router) IP address for configuring the
default route
2 Boot the Master unit. The system automatically prompts you to use the
Setup Wizard.
The Setup Wizard displays the following information:
Welcome to Dell Easy Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard guides you through the initial
switch configuration and gets you up and running
easily and quickly. You can skip the Setup Wizard
and enter CLI mode to manually configure the
switch. The system will prompt you with a default
answer; by pressing Enter, you accept the default
value.
You must respond to the next question to run the
Setup Wizard within 60 seconds, otherwise the
system will continue with normal operation using
the default system configuration.
Would you like to enter the Setup Wizard (you must
answer this question within 60 seconds)? (Y/N)
3 Enter [Y] to run the wizard. If you enter [N] or if you do not respond
within 60 seconds, the Setup Wizard automatically exits and the CLI
console prompt appears.
If you enter [Y] the wizard provides interactive guidance through the
initial switch configuration.
The following information is displayed:
You can exit the Setup Wizard at any time by
entering [ctrl+Z].
The system is not set up for SNMP management by
default.
ContaxGS.book Page 17 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM18 Configuring the Switch
To manage the switch using SNMP (required for Dell
Network Manager) you can:
• Setup the initial SNMP version 2 account now.
• Return later and set up the SNMP version account.
For more information on setting up a SNMP version
2 account, see the user documentation.
Would you like to set up the SNMP management
interface now? [Y/N]
4 Enter [N] to skip to Step 7 or enter [Y] to continue the Setup Wizard. If
you enter [Y] the following information is displayed:
To set up the SNMP management account you must
specify the management system IP address and the
"community string" or password that the particular
management system uses to access the switch. The
wizard automatically assigns the highest access
level [Privilege Level 15] to this account.
You can use Dell Network Manager or other
management interfaces to change this setting later
and to add additional management system later. For
more information on adding management systems, see
the user documentation.
To add a management station:
Please enter the SNMP community string to be used:
5 Enter the SNMP community string. You can use the default name "public"
Please enter the IP address of the Management
System (A.B.C.D) or wildcard (0.0.0.0) to manage
from any Management Station:[0.0.0.0].
6 Enter the SNMP Management System IP.
ContaxGS.book Page 18 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMConfiguring the Switch 19
7 Set up user account privilege level, as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Now we need to set up your initial privilege
(Level 15) user account. This account is used to
login to the CLI and Web interface. You may set up
other accounts and change privilege levels later.
For more information on setting up user accounts
and changing privilege levels, see the user
documentation.
To set up a user account:
Enter the user name:
Please enter the user password:
Please reenter the user password:
8 Enter the following:
• User name, for example "admin"
• Password and password confirmation.
9 Press Enter.
The following information is displayed:
Next, an IP address is setup. The IP address is
defined on the default VLAN (VLAN #1). This is the
IP address you use to access the Telnet, Web
interface, or SNMP interface for the switch.
To set up an IP address:
Please enter the IP address of the device
(A.B.C.D):
Please enter the IP subnet mask (A.B.C.D or nn):
10 Enter the management IP address and IP subnet mask, for example
192.168.2.100 as the IP address and 255.255.255.0 as the IP subnet mask.
ContaxGS.book Page 19 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM20 Configuring the Switch
11 Press Enter.
The following information is displayed:
Finally, set up the default gateway.
Please enter the IP address of the gateway from
which this network is reachable
(e.g. 192.168.2.1).Default gateway
(A.B.C.D):[0.0.0.0]
12 Enter the default gateway.
13 Press Enter. The following is displayed (example):
This is the configuration information that has
been collected:
SNMP Interface = "Dell Network
Manager"@192.168.2.10
User Account setup = admin
Password = **********
Management IP address = 192.168.2.100
255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = 192.168.2.1
The following information is displayed:
If the information is correct, please select (Y)
to save the configuration and copy to the start-up
configuration file. If the information is
incorrect, select (N) to discard configuration and
restart the wizard: [Y/N]
ContaxGS.book Page 20 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM
www.dell.com | support.dell.com
Dell™ Inspiron™ 640M/ E1405
Manuel du propriétaire
Modèle PP19LRemarques, avis et précautions
REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE fournit des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur.
AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d’un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le
problème.
PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle
ou de mort.
Abréviations et sigles
Pour la liste complète des abréviations et des sigles, reportez-vous à la section « Glossaire » à la page 171.
Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur Dell™ Série n, les références du présent document concernant les systèmes
d'application Microsoft® Windows® ne sont pas applicables.
____________________
Les informations de ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis.
© 2006–2007 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés.
La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite.
Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerConnect,
PowerVault, PowerApp, Dell TravelLite, ExpressCharge, Dell Media Experience et Strike Zone sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel et Pentium
sont des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation ; Microsoft, Outlook et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation ; Bluetooth
est une marque déposée appartenant à Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et est utilisée par Dell sous licence ; IBM est une marque déposée d'International
Business Machines Corporation ; EMC est une marque déposée d'EMC Corporation ; ENERGY STAR est une marque déposée de l'agence
américaine de protection de l'environnement (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency).
D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques
et de ces noms ou à leurs produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens.
Modèle PP19L
Mars 2007 Réf. XF808 Rév. A02Table des matières 3
Table des matières
Recherche d'informations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1 Présentation de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Vue frontale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Vue du côté gauche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Vue du côté droit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Vue arrière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Vue de dessous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2 Configuration de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Connexion à Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Configuration de votre connexion Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres avec
le CD Operating System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le
CD Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Configuration d'une imprimante. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Câble de l'imprimante. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Connexion d'une imprimante USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques. . . . . . . . 30
Parasurtenseurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Filtres de ligne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Onduleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3 Utilisation de l'écran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Réglage de la luminosité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Basculement de l'image vidéo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Réglage de la résolution d'affichage et du taux de rafraîchissement . . . . . 314 Table des matières
4 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile. . . . . . . . . . . 33
Pavé numérique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Combinaisons de touches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Fonctions système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Plateau du lecteur de CD ou DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Fonctions d'affichage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Radios (notamment le réseau sans fil et une carte interne dotée de la
technologie sans fil Bluetooth®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Gestion de l'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Fonctions des haut-parleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Fonctions de la touche du logo Microsoft® Windows® . . . . . . . . . . 35
Tablette tactile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Personnalisation de la tablette tactile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
5 Utilisation d'une batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Performances de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Vérification de la charge de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Jauge de batterie Dell™ QuickSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Microsoft® Windows® Jauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Indicateur de charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Alerte de batterie faible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Préservation de l'alimentation par batterie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Modes d'économie d'énergie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation . . . . . . . . 41
Chargement de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Remplacement de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Stockage de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports
multimédias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Lecture CD ou DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Table des matières 5
Réglage du volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Réglage de l'image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Microsoft® Windows® XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Utilisation de Dell Media Experience™ et de Dell MediaDirect™. . . . . . . 46
Si l'ordinateur est allumé ou en mode Veille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Si l'ordinateur est éteint ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée . . . . . . 46
Aide de Dell MediaDirect et Dell Media Experience. . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Utilisation du CD Repair Utility (Utilitaire de réparation) de Dell
MediaDirect™ ou du CD Reinstallation (Réinstallation) de Dell
MediaDirect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Réparation de Dell MediaDirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Réinstallation de Dell MediaDirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Connexion de votre ordinateur à un périphérique téléviseur ou audio . . . . 50
S-vidéo et audio standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
S-vidéo et audio numérique S/PDIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Vidéo composite et audio standard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Vidéo composite et audio numérique S/PDIF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Vidéo composante et audio standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Vidéo composante et audio numérique S/PDIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Configuration de la lecture de DVD via le casque . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7 Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Types de carte ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Caches pour carte ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Installation d'une carte ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Retrait d'une carte ExpressCard ou d'un cache. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Types de carte mémoire multimédia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Caches de carte mémoire multimédia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Installation d'une carte mémoire multimédia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Retrait d'une carte mémoire multimédia ou d'un cache . . . . . . . . . . . . 706 Table des matières
8 Configuration d'un réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Connexion physique à un réseau ou à un modem large bande . . . . . . . . . 71
Assistant Configuration réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Réseau local sans fil (WLAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Éléments requis pour établir une connexion WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Contrôle de votre carte réseau sans fil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Configuration d'un nouveau WLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Activation/désactivation de la carte réseau sans fil . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Surveillance de l'état des connexions réseau sans fil via
Dell™ QuickSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Réseau étendu large bande mobile ou sans fil (WWAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Éléments requis pour établir une connexion avec un réseau large
bande mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Connexion à un réseau large bande mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Réseau Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Configuration de votre connexion Bluetooth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Connexion à un réseau Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
9 Sécurisation de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Verrou du câble de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Mots de passe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Logiciel de suivi informatique. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
En cas de perte ou de vol de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
10 Dépannage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Service Dell Technical Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Quand utiliser Dell Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du disque dur. . . . . . . . . . . 81
Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities . . . . 82
Menu principal de Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Table des matières 7
Utilitaire de support de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Accès à l'utilitaire de support de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Clic sur l'icône de support de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Double-clic sur l'icône de support de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Problèmes de lecteur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Problèmes de lecteur de CD et de DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Si vous ne parvenez pas à éjecter le plateau du lecteur de CD, de
CD-RW, de DVD ou de DVD+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Si vous entendez un bruit grinçant ou un raclement inhabituel . . . . . . 86
Problèmes liés au disque dur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Problèmes liés à la messagerie électronique, au modem ou à Internet . . . . 86
Messages d'erreur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Problèmes liés à la carte ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Problèmes liés au périphérique IEEE 1394 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Problèmes liés au clavier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Problèmes liés au clavier externe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Caractères imprévus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Blocages et problèmes logiciels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
L'ordinateur ne démarre pas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
L'ordinateur ne répond plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Un programme ne répond plus ou se bloque régulièrement. . . . . . . . 94
Un programme est conçu pour un système d'exploitation
Microsoft® Windows® antérieur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Un écran bleu uni apparaît . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Problèmes Dell MediaDirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Autres problèmes logiciels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Problèmes liés à la mémoire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Problèmes liés au réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Problèmes d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Problèmes d'imprimante. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Problèmes liés au scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Problèmes de son et de haut-parleurs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Aucun son ne sort des haut-parleurs intégrés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Aucun son ne sort des haut-parleurs externes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Aucun son émis par le casque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008 Table des matières
Problèmes liés à la tablette tactile ou à la souris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Problèmes vidéo et d'affichage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Si l'écran est vide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Si l'écran est difficile à lire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Si seule une partie de l'écran est lisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Pilotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Qu'est-ce qu'un pilote ? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Identification des pilotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Résolution des incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles. . . . . . . . . . 104
Restauration du système d'exploitation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft
Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Utilisation de Dell PC Restore de Symantec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Utilisation du CD Operating system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
11 Ajout et remplacement de pièces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Avant de commencer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Outils recommandés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Disque dur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Retour de votre disque dur à Dell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Lecteurs optiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
À propos de la vis de fixation de périphérique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Retrait et installation des lecteurs optiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Mémoire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Installation d'un module de mémoire dans le connecteur DIMM B . . . 118
Installation d'un module de mémoire dans le connecteur DIMM A . . . 120
Modem (en option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Carte Mini . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Cache de la charnière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Retrait du cache de la charnière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Remise en place du cache de la charnière. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Table des matières 9
Clavier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Retrait du clavier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Remise en place du clavier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Carte interne dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . 130
Pile bouton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Retrait de la pile bouton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Remise en place de la pile bouton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
12 Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
13 Voyager avec votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Identification de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Emballage de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Conseils de voyage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Transport aérien . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
14 Contacter Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
15 Caractéristiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
16 Annexe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Utilisation du programme de configuration du système . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Affichage de l'écran de configuration du système. . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Programme de configuration du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Options fréquemment utilisées . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Nettoyage de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Ordinateur, clavier et écran. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Tablette tactile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Lecteur de disquette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
CD et DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16810 Table des matières
Règle de support technique de Dell (États-Unis uniquement) . . . . . . . . 168
Définition des logiciels et des périphériques installés par Dell . . . . . 169
Définition des logiciels et des périphériques tiers . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Réglementation FCC (États-Unis uniquement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Classe B de la FCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Caractéristiques Macrovision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Glossaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Recherche d'informations 11
Recherche d'informations
REMARQUE : Il se peut que certaines fonctionnalités et certains supports soient en option et ne soient pas livrés
avec votre ordinateur. Certaines fonctionnalités ne sont pas nécessairement disponibles dans tous les pays.
REMARQUE : Il est possible que des informations supplémentaires soient fournies avec votre ordinateur.
Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici
• Programme de diagnostic pour mon ordinateur
• Pilotes pour mon ordinateur
• La documentation concernant mon appareil
• NSS (Notebook System Software)
CD Drivers and Utilities (également appelé ResourceCD)
REMARQUE : Il se peut que le CD Drivers and Utilities soit
en option et qu'il ne soit pas livré avec tous les ordinateurs.
La documentation et les pilotes sont déjà installés sur
l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez utiliser le CD pour réinstaller les
pilotes (reportez-vous à la section « Réinstallation des
pilotes et utilitaires » à la page 102) ou pour exécuter Dell
Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics »
à la page 81).
Des fichiers « Lisez-moi »
peuvent être inclus sur
votre CD ; ces fichiers
fournissent des
informations sur les
modifications techniques
de dernière minute
apportées à votre système
ou des informations de
référence destinées aux
techniciens ou aux
utilisateurs expérimentés.
REMARQUE : Les dernières mises à jour des pilotes et de la
documentation se trouvent à l'adresse support.dell.com.
• Informations sur les garanties
• Termes et Conditions (États-Unis uniquement)
• Consignes de sécurité
• Informations sur les réglementations
• Informations relatives à l'ergonomie
• Contrat de licence pour utilisateur final
Guide d'information sur le produit Dell™12 Recherche d'informations
• Comment configurer mon ordinateur Schéma de configuration
• Numéro de service et code de service express
• Étiquette de licence Microsoft Windows
Numéro de service et licence Microsoft® Windows®
Ces étiquettes sont situées sur la base de votre ordinateur.
• Utilisez le numéro de service pour identifier votre
ordinateur lorsque vous accédez au site Web
support.dell.com ou lorsque vous appelez le service de
support technique.
• Entrez le code de
service express pour
orienter votre appel
lorsque vous contactez
le service de support
technique.
Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez iciRecherche d'informations 13
• Solutions — Conseils et astuces de dépannage, articles
de techniciens, cours en ligne et questions fréquemment
posées
• Forum clients — Discussion en ligne avec d'autres
clients Dell
• Mises à niveau — Informations sur les mises à niveau
des composants, comme la mémoire, l'unité de disque
dur et le système d'exploitation
• Service clientèle — Coordonnées, appels de service et
état des commandes, garantie et informations sur les
réparations
• Service et support — État des appels de service et
historique du support, contrat de service, discussions en
ligne avec le support technique
• Référence — Documentation de l'ordinateur, détails sur
la configuration de l'ordinateur, caractéristiques de
produit et livres blancs
• Téléchargements — Pilotes, correctifs et mises à jour
logicielles agréés
• Notebook Logiciel système (NSS)— Si vous réinstallez
le système d'exploitation de l'ordinateur, vous devez
également réinstaller l'utilitaire NSS. NSS fournit des
mises à jour essentielles pour le système d'exploitation et
la prise en charge des lecteurs de disquette USB Dell™
de 3,5 pouces, des processeurs Intel® Pentium® M, des
lecteurs optiques et des périphériques USB. NSS est
requis pour le bon fonctionnement de votre ordinateur
Dell. Ce logiciel détecte automatiquement votre
ordinateur et son système d'exploitation, et installe les
mises à jour appropriées à votre configuration.
Site Web de support de Dell — support.dell.com
REMARQUE : Sélectionnez votre région pour afficher le site
de support approprié.
REMARQUE : Les représentants des grandes entreprises,
du gouvernement et du domaine de l'éducation peuvent
également utiliser le site Web de support personnalisé
Premier de Dell à l'adresse premier.support.dell.com.
Pour télécharger NSS (Notebook System Software) :
1 Allez à l'adresse support.dell.com et cliquez sur
Téléchargements.
2 Saisissez votre numéro de service ou le modèle de
l'appareil.
3 Dans le menu déroulant Télécharger une catégorie,
cliquez sur All (Toutes).
4 Sélectionnez le système d'exploitation et la langue du
système d'exploitation de votre ordinateur, puis cliquez
sur Soumettre.
5 Sous Select a Device (Sélectionner un périphérique),
rendez-vous à System and Configuration Utilities
(Utilitaires de système et de configuration), puis cliquez
sur Dell NSS(Notebook System Software).
• Mises à niveau logicielles et astuces de dépannage —
Questions fréquemment posées, sujets d'actualité et
état général de votre environnement informatique
Utilitaire de support de Dell
L'utilitaire de support de Dell est un système de mise à
niveau et de notification automatique installé sur votre
ordinateur. Il permet de réaliser des balayages en temps réel
de l'état de votre environnement informatique et des mises
à jour logicielles et fournit des informations de support
automatique appropriées. Accédez à l'utilitaire de support
de Dell à l'aide de l'icône située dans la barre des
tâches. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section
« Utilitaire de support de Dell » à la page 84.
Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici14 Recherche d'informations
• Comment utiliser Windows XP
• Comment utiliser des programmes et des fichiers
• Comment personnaliser mon bureau
Centre d'aide et de support de Windows
1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support.
2Tapez un mot ou une expression qui décrit votre
problème, puis cliquez sur l'icône en forme de flèche.
3 Cliquez sur la rubrique qui décrit votre problème.
4 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran.
• Informations sur l'activité réseau, l'Assistant Gestion de
l'alimentation, les touches de raccourci et les éléments
contrôlés par Dell QuickSet
Aide Dell QuickSet
Pour afficher l'aide Dell QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton
droit de la souris sur l'icône , dans la barre des tâches
de Microsoft® Windows®.
Pour plus d'informations sur Dell QuickSet, reportez-vous
à la section « Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet » à la page 133.
• Comment réinstaller mon système d'exploitation CD Operating System
REMARQUE : Il se peut que le CD Operating System soit en
option et qu'il ne soit pas livré avec certains ordinateurs.
Le système d'exploitation
est déjà installé sur votre
ordinateur. Pour réinstaller
le système d'exploitation,
utilisez le CD Operating
System. Reportez-vous à la
section « Utilisation du
CD Operating system » à
la page 108. Une fois le
système d'exploitation
réinstallé, utilisez le CD
Drivers and Utilities (ResourceCD) pour réinstaller les
pilotes des périphériques accompagnant votre ordinateur.
REMARQUE : La couleur de votre CD dépend du système
d'exploitation que vous avez commandé.
Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez iciPrésentation de votre ordinateur 15
Présentation de votre ordinateur
Vue frontale
1 loquet de fermeture de l'écran 2 écran 3 bouton d'alimentation
4 voyants d'état de l'appareil 5 tablette tactile 6 boutons de commande
multimédia
7 haut-parleurs 8 boutons de la tablette tactile 9 clavier
10 voyants d'état du clavier et du
sans fil
11 loquets de l'écran (2)
1
9
2
5
8
3
7
10 4
6
1116 Présentation de votre ordinateur
LOQUET D E FERMETURE D E L'ÉCRAN — Faites glisser et maintenez ce loquet pour déverrouiller les dispositifs de
fermeture et ouvrir l'écran.
ÉCRAN — Pour plus d'informations sur l'écran, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de l'écran » à la page 31.
BOUTON D'ALIMENTATION — Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre l'ordinateur sous tension ou
quitter le mode d'économie d'énergie.
AVIS : Afin d'éviter de perdre des données, éteignez l'ordinateur à l'aide du menu Démarrer plutôt qu'en appuyant
sur le bouton d'alimentation.
VOYANTS D'ÉTAT D E L'APPAREIL
Si l'ordinateur est branché à une prise secteur, le voyant fonctionne comme suit :
• Vert fixe : la batterie est en cours de charge.
• Vert clignotant : la batterie est presque complètement chargée.
Si l'ordinateur fonctionne sur batterie, le voyant fonctionne comme suit :
• Éteint : la batterie est suffisamment chargée (ou l'ordinateur est éteint).
• Orange clignotant : le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible.
• Orange fixe : le niveau de charge de la batterie est critique.
S'allume lorsque vous mettez l'ordinateur sous tension et clignote lorsque l'ordinateur est en
mode d'économie d'énergie.
S'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données.
AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, n'éteignez jamais l'ordinateur lorsque le voyant
clignote.
Reste allumé ou clignote pour indiquer l'état de charge de la batterie.Présentation de votre ordinateur 17
TABLETTE TACTILE — Assure les mêmes fonctions que la souris.
BOUTONS D E COMMANDE MULTIMÉDIA — Contrôlent la lecture des CD, DVD et lecteurs multimédia.
HAUT-PARLEURS — Pour régler le volume des haut-parleurs intégrés, appuyez sur les boutons de commande
multimédia ou les raccourcis clavier du volume des haut-parleurs. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la
section « Fonctions des haut-parleurs » à la page 35.
BOUTONS D E L A TABLETTE TACTILE — La tablette tactile et ses boutons offrent les mêmes fonctionnalités que la
souris.
CLAVIER — Le clavier comporte un pavé numérique et la touche du logo Microsoft Windows. Pour plus
d'informations sur les raccourcis clavier pris en charge, reportez-vous à la section « Combinaisons de touches » à la
page 34.
Met le son en sourdine.
Diminue le son.
Augmente le son.
Lecture ou pause.
Revient à la plage précédente.
Passe à la plage suivante.
Arrêt.
Lancement de Dell MediaDirect ou Microsoft® Windows® Media Center
Edition. Reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de Dell Media Experience™ et de
Dell MediaDirect™ » à la page 46.18 Présentation de votre ordinateur
VOYANTS D'ÉTAT D U CLAVIER E T D U SANS FIL
Les voyants verts situés au-dessus du clavier indiquent ce qui suit :
LOQUETS D E L'ÉCRAN — Permettent de maintenir l'écran fermé.
S'allume lorsque le pavé numérique est activé.
S'allume lorsque la fonction Majuscules est activée.
S'allume lorsque la fonction Arrêt défil est activée.
S'allume lorsque le réseau sans fil est activé. Pour activer ou
désactiver le réseau sans fil, appuyez sur .
S'allume lorsqu'une carte dotée de la technologie sans fil
Bluetooth® est activée.
REMARQUE : La carte dotée de la technologie sans fil
Bluetooth est une fonctionnalité optionnelle, le voyant ne
s'allume donc que lorsque vous avez commandé la carte avec
votre ordinateur. Pour des informations supplémentaires,
reportez-vous à la documentation livrée avec votre carte.
Pour désactiver uniquement la fonctionnalité de
technologie sans fil Bluetooth, cliquez avec le bouton droit
de la souris sur l'icône de la zone de notification et
sélectionnez Désactiver radio Bluetooth.
Pour activer ou désactiver rapidement tous les périphériques
sans fil, appuyez sur .
9
APrésentation de votre ordinateur 19
Vue du côté gauche
PRÉCAUTION : Ne bloquez pas les entrées d'air de l'ordinateur et n'insérez pas d'objets dedans ; évitez
également toute accumulation de poussière. Ne placez pas l'ordinateur dans un environnement peu aéré, tel
qu'une mallette fermée, lorsque celui-ci fonctionne. Le manque de ventilation risquerait de causer un incendie
ou d'endommager l'ordinateur.
AVIS : Avant d'acheter un dispositif antivol, assurez-vous qu'il correspond au type d'emplacement pour câble de
sécurité de votre ordinateur.
EMPLACEMENT POUR CÂBLE D E SÉCURITÉ — Permet de rattacher à l'ordinateur un dispositif antivol disponible
dans le commerce. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux instructions fournies avec l'appareil.
ENTRÉE D'AIR — L'ordinateur utilise des ventilateurs pour garantir la circulation de l'air à travers les entrées d'air et
éviter tout risque de surchauffe.
1 emplacement pour câble
de sécurité
2 entrée d'air 3 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo
4 connecteur IEEE 1394 5 connecteur microphone 6 connecteur de casque
7 lecteur de carte mémoire
multimédia 5 en 1
8 logement de carte ExpressCard
1 2 6 3 45 7 820 Présentation de votre ordinateur
CONNECTEUR D E SORTIE TV S-VIDÉO
CONNECTEUR IEEE 1394 — Permet de relier des périphériques qui prennent en charge des vitesses de transfert
ultra rapides IEEE 1394, par exemple des caméras vidéo numériques.
CONNECTEURS AUDIO
LECTEUR D E CARTE MÉMOIRE MULTIMÉDIA 5 EN 1— Moyen pratique et rapide de visualiser et de partager des
photos numériques, de la musique et des vidéos stockées sur une carte mémoire. Le lecteur de carte mémoire
multimédia 5 en 1 lit les cartes mémoire multimédia numériques suivantes :
• Carte Secure Digital (SD)/SDIO
• MultiMediaCard (MMC)
• Memory Stick
• Memory Stick PRO
• Carte xD-Picture
LOGEMENT D E CARTE EXPRESSCARD — Prend en charge une carte ExpressCard. Votre ordinateur est livré avec un
cache en plastique dans le logement. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de cartes
ExpressCard » à la page 65.
REMARQUE : Le logement de carte ExpressCard ne prend PAS en charge les cartes PC.
Permet de relier l'ordinateur à un téléviseur. Permet également de relier des
périphériques audio numériques à l'aide d'un câble d'adaptateur audio
numérique/TV.
Raccordez un microphone au connecteur .
Raccordez un casque ou des haut-parleurs au
connecteur .Présentation de votre ordinateur 21
Vue du côté droit
BAIE D E LECTEUR OPTIQUE — Vous pouvez installer des périphériques, tels qu'un lecteur de DVD ou un autre
lecteur optique dans la baie de lecteur optique. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs
optiques » à la page 116.
BOUTON D'ÉJECTION D U PLATEAU D U LECTEUR OPTIQUE — Appuyez sur ce bouton pour éjecter un CD ou un
DVD du lecteur optique.
CONNECTEURS USB
CONNECTEUR MODEM (RJ-11)
AVIS : Le connecteur réseau est légèrement plus grand que le connecteur modem. Pour éviter d'endommager
l'ordinateur, ne connectez pas de ligne téléphonique au connecteur réseau.
1 baie de lecteur optique 2 bouton d'éjection du plateau
du lecteur optique
3 connecteurs USB (2)
4 connecteur modem (RJ-11) 5 connecteur réseau (RJ-45) 6 connecteur vidéo
Permettent de connecter des périphériques USB, tels qu'une souris, un clavier ou
une imprimante. Vous pouvez également relier le lecteur de disquette optionnel
directement à un connecteur USB à l'aide du câble pour lecteur de disquette
optionnel.
Pour utiliser le modem interne, connectez la ligne téléphonique au connecteur
modem.
Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation du modem, reportez-vous à la
documentation en ligne correspondante fournie avec votre ordinateur.
1 2 6 3 4522 Présentation de votre ordinateur
CONNECTEUR RÉSEAU (RJ-45)
CONNECTEUR VIDÉO
Vue arrière
CONNECTEURS USB
CONNECTEUR D'ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR — Sert à relier l'adaptateur secteur à l'ordinateur. Cet adaptateur convertit
l'alimentation CA en alimentation CC qui est celle requise par l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez connecter
l'adaptateur secteur à votre ordinateur, que ce dernier soit allumé ou éteint.
Permet de relier l'ordinateur à un réseau. Les voyants vert et jaune situés près du
connecteur indiquent l'activité de communication filaire.
Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de la carte réseau, consultez la
documentation en ligne de la carte réseau fournie avec votre ordinateur.
Permet de relier un moniteur externe compatible VGA.
1 connecteurs USB (2) 2 connecteur d'adaptateur secteur
Permettent de connecter des périphériques USB, tels qu'une souris, un clavier ou
une imprimante. Vous pouvez également relier le lecteur de disquette optionnel
directement à un connecteur USB à l'aide du câble pour lecteur de disquette
optionnel.
1 2Présentation de votre ordinateur 23
PRÉCAUTION : L'adaptateur secteur fonctionne avec les tensions secteur disponibles dans le monde entier.
Cependant, les connecteurs et les rampes d'alimentation varient selon les pays. L'utilisation d'un câble non
compatible ou le branchement incorrect du câble sur la rampe d'alimentation ou la prise secteur peut provoquer
un incendie ou endommager l'équipement.
AVIS : Lorsque vous déconnectez l'adaptateur secteur de l'ordinateur, tenez le connecteur du câble de
l'adaptateur, pas le câble lui-même, et tirez dessus fermement mais sans forcer, afin d'éviter de l'endommager.
Vue de dessous
BATTERIE — Quand une batterie est installée, vous pouvez utiliser l'ordinateur sans le brancher au secteur. Pour
plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation d'une batterie » à la page 37.
CACHE D U MODULE D E MÉMOIRE — Recouvre le compartiment des modules de mémoire. Pour de plus amples
informations, reportez-vous à la page 117.
LOQUET D E FERMETURE D E L A BAIE D E BATTERIE — Permet de retirer la batterie de la baie de batterie. Reportezvous à la section « Remplacement de la batterie » à la page 41.
1 batterie 2 cache du module de
mémoire
3 loquet de fermeture de la baie de
batterie
4 aération du ventilateur 5 cache du processeur et du
module thermique
6 cache du modem/de la carte/
du dispositif sans fil
7 vis de verrouillage du
lecteur optique
8 unité de disque dur 9 indicateur de charge de la batterie
6
5
7
1 3 2 4
8
924 Présentation de votre ordinateur
VENTILATEUR — L'ordinateur utilise un ventilateur pour garantir la circulation de l'air à travers les entrées d'air et
éviter tout risque de surchauffe.
CACHE D U PROCESSEUR E T D U MODULE THERMIQUE — Masque le processeur et le module thermique.
CACHE D U MODEM/D E LA CARTE MINI/D U DISPOSITIF SANS FIL — Recouvre le compartiment qui contient le
modem, la carte Mini et la carte interne dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth. Pour de plus amples informations,
reportez-vous à la page 123.
VIS D E VERROUILLAGE D U LECTEUR OPTIQUE — Sert à fixer le lecteur optique dans la baie du lecteur optique. Pour
plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116.
DISQUE DUR — Stocke les logiciels et les données. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux sections « Disque
dur » à la page 113 et « Problèmes liés au disque dur » à la page 86. La taille de votre disque dur affichée dans
l'Explorateur Windows est la capacité du lecteur avant l'installation de tout système d'exploitation ou tous
programmes.
INDICATEUR D E CHARGE D E L A BATTERIE — Donne des informations sur le niveau de charge de la batterie.
Reportez-vous à la section « Vérification de la charge de la batterie » à la page 38.Configuration de votre ordinateur 25
Configuration de votre ordinateur
Connexion à Internet
REMARQUE : Les fournisseurs d'accès Internet (FAI) et leurs offres varient selon les pays.
Pour vous connecter à Internet, vous devez disposer d'un modem ou d'une connexion réseau et d'un
fournisseur d'accès Internet (FAI). Votre fournisseur d'accès Internet vous proposera une ou
plusieurs des options de connexion Internet suivantes :
• Connexions d'accès à distance qui offrent un accès à Internet par l'intermédiaire d'une ligne
téléphonique. Ces connexions sont beaucoup plus lentes que les connexions DSL ou modem par
câble.
• Connexions DSL qui offrent un accès à Internet à haute vitesse par l'intermédiaire d'une ligne
téléphonique existante. Avec une connexion DSL, vous pouvez accéder à Internet et utiliser votre
téléphone sur la même ligne simultanément.
• Connexions modem par câble qui offrent un accès à Internet à haute vitesse par l'intermédiaire de
la ligne TV câblée locale.
Si vous utilisez une connexion d'accès à distance, connectez une ligne téléphonique au connecteur
du modem sur votre ordinateur et à la prise téléphonique murale avant de configurer la connexion
Internet. Si vous utilisez une connexion DSL ou modem par câble, contactez votre fournisseur
d'accès Internet pour obtenir les instructions de configuration.
Configuration de votre connexion Internet
Pour configurer une connexion Internet à l'aide du raccourci de bureau d'un fournisseur d'accès
Internet fourni :
1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes.
2 Double-cliquez sur l'icône d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet sur le bureau Microsoft® Windows®.
3 Pour effectuer la configuration, suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran.
Si aucune icône de fournisseur d'accès Internet n'apparaît sur votre bureau ou si vous souhaitez
configurer une connexion Internet avec un autre fournisseur d'accès Internet :
1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes.
2 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Internet Explorer.
L'Assistant Nouvelle connexion s'affiche.
3 Cliquez sur Connecter à Internet.
4 Dans la fenêtre suivante, cliquez sur l'option appropriée :
• Si vous ne disposez pas de fournisseur d'accès Internet et souhaitez en sélectionner un,
cliquez sur Choisir dans une liste de fournisseurs de services Internet.26 Configuration de votre ordinateur
• Si vous avez déjà reçu les informations de configuration de votre fournisseur de services Internet,
mais pas le CD de configuration, cliquez sur Configurer ma connexion manuellement.
• Si vous disposez d'un CD, cliquez sur Utiliser le CD fourni par mon fournisseur de services
Internet.
5 Cliquez sur Suivant.
Si vous sélectionnez Configurer ma connexion manuellement, passez à l'étape 6. Sinon, suivez les
instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour terminer la configuration.
REMARQUE : Si vous ne savez pas quel type de connexion sélectionner, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès
Internet.
6 Cliquez sur l'option appropriée sous Comment souhaitez-vous vous connecter à Internet ?, puis
cliquez sur Suivant.
7 Utilisez les informations fournies par votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour terminer la configuration.
Si vous rencontrez des problèmes de connexion à Internet, reportez-vous à la section « Problèmes liés à la
messagerie électronique, au modem ou à Internet » à la page 86. Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à
Internet alors que vous l'avez déjà fait auparavant, il est possible que le fournisseur d'accès Internet
subisse une interruption de services. Contactez-le pour vérifier l'état des services ou essayez de vous
connecter ultérieurement.
Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur
Le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP inclut un Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de
paramètres qui permet de déplacer des données d'un ordinateur à un autre. Vous pouvez transférer des
données telles que :
• Messages e-mail
• Paramètres de la barre d'outils
• Tailles de fenêtre
• Signets Internet
Vous pouvez transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur en utilisant une connexion réseau, ou les
stocker sur un support amovible, comme un CD inscriptible ou une disquette.
REMARQUE : Pour des instructions sur la configuration d'une connexion à câble directe entre deux ordinateurs,
reportez-vous à la base de connaissances de Microsoft Article nº 305621, intitulé How to Set Up a Direct Cable
Connection Between Two Computers in Windows XP (Comment configurer une connexion à câble directe entre
deux ordinateurs sous Windows XP). Ces informations peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans certains pays.
Pour transférer des informations vers un nouvel ordinateur, vous devez lancer l'Assistant Transfert de
fichiers et de paramètres. Pour ce faire, utilisez le CD Operating System en option ou créez un disque
Assistant à l'aide de l'utilitaire Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres.
Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres avec le CD Operating System
REMARQUE : Le CD Operating system est requis. Toutefois, ce CD est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement
expédié avec tous les ordinateurs.Configuration de votre ordinateur 27
Pour ouvrir l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres :
1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système,
puis cliquez sur Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres.
2 Lorsque l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres s'affiche, cliquez sur
Suivant.
3 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur, puis sur Suivant.
4 Dans l'écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur J'utiliserai l'Assistant du
CD-ROM de Windows XP, puis sur Suivant.
5 Lorsque l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur s'affiche, allez à l'ancien ordinateur ou
ordinateur source. Ne cliquez pas sur Suivant à ce moment.
Pour copier les données à partir de l'ancien ordinateur :
1 Sur l'ancien ordinateur, insérez le CD Operating System de Windows XP.
2 Dans l'écran Bienvenue dans Microsoft Windows XP, cliquez sur Effectuer des tâches supplémentaires.
3 Sous Que voulez-vous faire ?, cliquez sur Transférer des fichiers et des paramètres.
4 Dans l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, cliquez sur Suivant.
5 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien ordinateur, puis sur Suivant.
6 Dans l'écran Sélectionnez une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur la méthode de transfert de votre choix.
7 Dans l'écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à transférer, puis cliquez sur
Suivant.
Une fois les informations copiées, l'écran Fin de la phase de collecte des données apparaît.
8 Cliquez sur Terminer.
Pour transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur :
1 Dans l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur sur le nouvel ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant.
2 Dans l'écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?, sélectionnez la méthode de transfert de vos
paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur Suivant.
L'Assistant lit les paramètres et fichiers recueillis, puis les applique à votre nouvel ordinateur.
Lorsque tous les paramètres et fichiers ont été appliqués, l'écran Terminé s'affiche.
3 Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur.
Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le CD Operating System
Pour exécuter l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le CD Operating system en option,
vous devez créer un disque Assistant qui va permettre la création d'un fichier d'image de sauvegarde pour
supports amovibles.
Pour créer un disque Assistant, servez-vous de votre nouvel ordinateur doté de Windows XP et suivez les
étapes suivantes :
1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système,
puis cliquez sur Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres.
2 Lorsque l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres s'affiche, cliquez sur
Suivant.
3 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur, puis sur Suivant.28 Configuration de votre ordinateur
4 Dans l'écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur Je souhaite créer un disque
Assistant dans le lecteur suivant : , puis cliquez sur Suivant.
5 Insérez le support amovible, tel qu'une disquette ou un CD, puis cliquez sur OK.
6 Lorsque la création du disque est terminée et que le message Allez maintenant à votre ancien
ordinateur apparaît, ne cliquez pas sur Suivant.
7 Allez à votre ancien ordinateur.
Pour copier les données à partir de l'ancien ordinateur :
1 Insérez le disque Assistant sur l'ancien ordinateur.
2 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Exécuter.
3 Dans le champ Ouvrir de la fenêtre Exécuter, recherchez le chemin fastwiz (pour le support amovible
approprié) et cliquez sur OK.
4 Dans l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, cliquez sur Suivant.
5 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien ordinateur, puis sur Suivant.
6 Dans l'écran Sélectionnez une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur la méthode de transfert de votre choix.
7 Dans l'écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à transférer, puis cliquez sur
Suivant.
Une fois les informations copiées, l'écran Fin de la phase de collecte des données apparaît.
8 Cliquez sur Terminer.
Pour transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur :
1 Dans l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur sur le nouvel ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant.
2 Dans l'écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?, sélectionnez la méthode de transfert de vos
paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran.
L'Assistant lit les paramètres et fichiers recueillis, puis les applique à votre nouvel ordinateur.
Lorsque tous les paramètres et fichiers ont été appliqués, l'écran Terminé s'affiche.
3 Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur.
REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations sur cette procédure, rendez-vous sur le site Web dell.support.com pour
accéder au document nº PA1089586 (How Do I Transfer Files From My Old Computer to My New Dell Computer
Using the Microsoft® Windows® XP Operating System CD? [Comment transférer des fichiers à partir de mon
ancien ordinateur vers mon nouvel ordinateur Dell™ à l'aide du CD Operating System Microsoft® Windows®XP]).
REMARQUE : Certains pays peuvent ne pas avoir accès au document de la base de connaissances Dell.
Configuration d'une imprimante
AVIS : Effectuez la configuration du système d'exploitation avant de connecter une imprimante à l'ordinateur.
Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec l'imprimante pour obtenir des informations sur la
configuration, notamment :
• Obtenir et installer les pilotes mis à jour.
• Connecter l'imprimante à l'ordinateur.
• Charger le papier et installer la cartouche de toner ou d'encre.Configuration de votre ordinateur 29
Consultez le Manuel du propriétaire de l'imprimante pour obtenir une assistance technique ou
contactez le fabricant de l'imprimante.
Câble de l'imprimante
L'imprimante se connecte à l'ordinateur avec un câble USB ou un câble parallèle. Il est possible que
l'imprimante soit livrée sans câble. Par conséquent, si vous achetez un câble séparément, assurez-vous
qu'il est compatible avec votre imprimante et votre ordinateur. Si vous avez acheté un câble
d'imprimante en même temps que l'ordinateur, il est possible qu'il vous soit livré avec ce dernier.
Connexion d'une imprimante USB
REMARQUE : Vous pouvez connecter des périphériques USB pendant que l'ordinateur est sous tension.
1 Effectuez la configuration du système d'exploitation, si vous ne l'avez pas déjà fait.
2 Raccordez le câble USB de l'imprimante aux connecteurs USB de l'ordinateur et de l'imprimante. Les
connecteurs USB ne s'insèrent que dans un seul sens.
3 Allumez l'imprimante, puis l'ordinateur. Si la fenêtre Assistant Ajout de matériel apparaît, cliquez sur
Annuler.
4 Le cas échéant, installez le pilote d'imprimante. Consultez la documentation de l'imprimante.
1 connecteur USB de l'ordinateur 2 câble USB de l'imprimante 3 connecteur sur l'imprimante
2
1
330 Configuration de votre ordinateur
Périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques
Plusieurs périphériques peuvent vous protéger contre les fluctuations de la tension et les pannes
d'alimentation :
• Parasurtenseurs
• Filtres de ligne
• Onduleurs
Parasurtenseurs
Les parasurtenseurs et les rampes d'alimentation équipées d'une protection contre la surtension
réduisent les risques d'endommagement de votre ordinateur provoqués par les pointes de tension
pouvant survenir au cours d'un orage électrique ou suite à une coupure de courant. Certains fabricants
offrent également une garantie contre certains types de dégâts. Lisez attentivement la garantie du
parasurtenseur que vous achetez. Un protecteur doté d'une valeur nominale en joules plus élevée offre
une meilleure protection. Comparez les valeurs nominales, en joules, afin de déterminer l'efficacité
relative des différents dispositifs.
AVIS : La plupart des parasurtenseurs ne protègent pas contre les fluctuations de tension ou les coupures de
courant. Lorsqu'un orage est proche, débranchez la ligne téléphonique de la prise murale et déconnectez votre
ordinateur de la prise de courant.
De nombreux parasurtenseurs sont équipés d'une prise téléphonique pour assurer la protection du
modem. Consultez la documentation du parasurtenseur pour obtenir des instructions sur la connexion
du modem.
AVIS : Certains parasurtenseurs n'offrent pas de protection pour les cartes réseau. Déconnectez le câble de
réseau de la prise réseau murale pendant les orages.
Filtres de ligne
AVIS : Les filtres de ligne n'offrent pas de protection contre les coupures de courant.
Ils sont conçus pour maintenir la tension CA à un niveau relativement constant.
Onduleurs
AVIS : Une baisse de tension pendant l'enregistrement des données sur le disque dur peut provoquer une perte de
données ou la corruption du fichier.
REMARQUE : Pour optimiser le temps de fonctionnement de la batterie, connectez uniquement votre ordinateur à
un onduleur. Connectez les autres périphériques, tels que l'imprimante, à une rampe d'alimentation différente
équipée d'un parasurtenseur.
Les onduleurs protègent contre les fluctuations de tension et les coupures de courant. Ils incluent une
batterie qui alimente temporairement les périphériques connectés lorsque l'alimentation secteur est
coupée. La batterie se charge lorsque l'alimentation secteur est disponible. Consultez la documentation
fournie par le fabricant de l'onduleur afin d'obtenir des informations sur la durée de fonctionnement de
la batterie et vous assurer que le dispositif est approuvé par Underwriters Laboratories (UL).Utilisation de l'écran 31
Utilisation de l'écran
Réglage de la luminosité
Lorsque l'ordinateur Dell™ fonctionne avec une batterie, vous pouvez économiser de l'énergie en
réglant le paramètre de luminosité au minimum acceptable à l'aide de et la flèche haut ou
bas du clavier.
REMARQUE : Les combinaisons de touches pour la luminosité n'ont des répercussions que sur l'affichage
de l'ordinateur portable ; elles n'ont aucune répercussion sur les moniteurs ou les projecteurs que vous
connectez au portable ou à la station d'accueil. Si l'ordinateur est connecté à un moniteur externe et que vous
essayez de modifier le niveau de luminosité, il se peut que l'indicateur de luminosité s'affiche, mais le niveau
de luminosité du périphérique externe ne change pas dans tous les cas.
Appuyez sur les touches suivantes pour régler la luminosité de l'écran :
• Appuyez sur et sur la flèche haut pour augmenter la luminosité de l'écran intégré
uniquement (pas sur un moniteur externe).
• Appuyez sur et sur la flèche bas pour réduire la luminosité sur l'écran intégré uniquement
(pas sur un moniteur externe).
Basculement de l'image vidéo
Lorsque vous démarrez un ordinateur auquel un périphérique externe (tel qu'un moniteur externe
ou un projecteur) est connecté et que ce périphérique est sous tension, l'image peut s'afficher sur
l'écran intégré ou sur le périphérique externe.
Appuyez sur pour basculer entre les options d'affichage suivantes pour l'image vidéo :
écran seul, périphérique externe seul ou écran et périphérique externe simultanément.
Réglage de la résolution d'affichage et du taux de
rafraîchissement
Pour qu'un programme s'affiche à une résolution spécifique, le contrôleur vidéo et l'écran doivent
prendre tous deux en charge le programme sélectionné et les pilotes vidéo requis doivent être
installés.
Avant de modifier un paramètre d'affichage par défaut, prenez note du paramètre d'origine et
gardez-le pour référence ultérieure.32 Utilisation de l'écran
Si vous sélectionnez une résolution ou une palette de couleurs plus élevée que celle prise en charge par
l'écran, les paramètres se règlent automatiquement sur la configuration prise en charge la plus proche.
1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration.
2 Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Apparence et thèmes.
3 Sous Choisissez une tâche…, cliquez sur la zone à modifier, ou sous ou une icône du Panneau de
configuration, cliquez sur Affichage.
4 Essayez différents paramètres de Qualité couleur et Résolution d'écran.
REMARQUE : Lorsque vous augmentez la résolution de l'écran, les icônes et le texte apparaissent plus petits.Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile 33
Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile
Pavé numérique
Le pavé numérique fonctionne comme celui d'un clavier externe. Chaque touche du pavé
numérique a plusieurs fonctions. Les chiffres et les symboles du pavé numérique figurent en bleu à
droite de ces touches. Pour taper un chiffre ou un symbole, appuyez sur et sur la touche
désirée après activation du pavé.
• Pour activer le pavé numérique, appuyez sur . Le voyant indique que le pavé
numérique est activé.
• Pour désactiver le pavé numérique, appuyez de nouveau sur .
1 pavé numérique
1
934 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile
Combinaisons de touches
Fonctions système
Batterie
Plateau du lecteur de CD ou DVD
Fonctions d'affichage
Radios (notamment le réseau sans fil et une carte interne dotée de la technologie sans
fil Bluetooth®)
Ouvre la fenêtre Gestionnaire des tâches.
Affiche la jauge de batterie Dell™ QuickSet. Cette
fonctionnalité n'est pas prise en charge par Dell
MediaDirect. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la
section « Jauge de batterie Dell™ QuickSet » à la
page 38.
Éjecte le plateau du lecteur (si Dell QuickSet est
installé). Cette fonctionnalité n'est pas prise en charge
par Dell MediaDirect. Pour plus d'informations sur
QuickSet, reportez-vous à la section « Fonctions Dell™
QuickSet » à la page 133.
Bascule l'image vidéo vers l'option d'affichage suivante.
Les options comprennent l'écran intégré, un moniteur
externe et les deux écrans simultanément.
et la touche flèche
haut
Augmente la luminosité sur l'écran intégré uniquement
(non pas sur un moniteur externe).
et la touche flèche
bas
Diminue la luminosité sur l'écran intégré uniquement
(non pas sur un moniteur externe).
Active et désactive les radios, notamment le réseau sans
fil et la carte dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth.Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile 35
Gestion de l'alimentation
Fonctions des haut-parleurs
Fonctions de la touche du logo Microsoft® Windows®
Pour régler les options du clavier, telles que la vitesse de répétition des caractères, ouvrez le panneau de
configuration, cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques, puis sur Clavier. Pour plus
d'informations sur le panneau de configuration, contactez le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows.
Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la page 14.
Active un mode d'économie d'énergie. Vous pouvez
reprogrammer ce raccourci clavier pour activer un autre
mode d'économie d'énergie sous l'onglet Avancé de la
fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation. Reportezvous à la section « Modes d'économie d'énergie » à la
page 40.
Augmente le volume des haut-parleurs intégrés et des hautparleurs externes, si des haut-parleurs externes sont branchés.
Diminue le volume des haut-parleurs intégrés et des hautparleurs externes, si des haut-parleurs externes sont branchés.
Active et désactive les haut-parleurs intégrés et les hautparleurs externes, si des haut-parleurs externes sont branchés.
Touche du logo Windows et Réduit toutes les fenêtres ouvertes.
Touche du logo Windows et
Agrandit toutes les fenêtres.
Touche du logo Windows et Exécute l'Explorateur Windows. Cela ouvre la même
fenêtre que lorsque vous double-cliquez sur Poste de
travail sur le bureau.
Touche du logo Windows et Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Exécuter.
Touche du logo Windows et Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Search Results (Résultats
de la recherche).
Touche du logo Windows et
Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Search Results-Computer
(Résultats de la recherche - Ordinateur)
(si l'ordinateur est connecté à un réseau).
Touche du logo Windows et
Ouvre la boîte de dialogue System Properties
(Propriétés système).36 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile
Tablette tactile
La tablette tactile détecte la pression et le mouvement de vos doigts pour vous permettre de déplacer le
curseur à l'écran. Utilisez la tablette tactile et ses boutons de la même façon que vous utilisez la souris.
• Posez et déplacez votre doigt sur la surface de la tablette tactile pour déplacer le curseur.
• Pour sélectionner un objet, appuyez délicatement une fois sur la surface de la tablette tactile ou
appuyez avec le pouce sur le bouton gauche de la tablette tactile.
• Pour sélectionner et déplacer (ou faire glisser) un objet, placez le curseur sur l'objet et tapez deux fois
sur la tablette. Laissez votre doigt sur la tablette tactile la deuxième fois et déplacez l'objet sélectionné
en faisant glisser votre doigt sur la surface.
• Pour double-cliquer sur un objet, placez le curseur sur l'objet et appuyez doucement deux fois sur la
tablette tactile ou appuyez deux fois sur le bouton gauche à l'aide de votre pouce.
Personnalisation de la tablette tactile
Vous pouvez désactiver la tablette tactile ou régler ses paramètres à l'aide de la fenêtre de propriétés
Mouse Properties (Souris).
1 Ouvrez le Panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques, puis cliquez sur
Souris. Pour plus d'informations sur le panneau de configuration, contactez le Centre d'aide et de
support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la page 14.
2 Dans la fenêtre de propriétés Mouse Properties (Souris), cliquez sur l'onglet Tablette tactile pour
régler les paramètres de la tablette tactile.
3 Cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer les paramètres et fermer la fenêtre.
1 tablette tactile
1Utilisation d'une batterie 37
Utilisation d'une batterie
Performances de la batterie
REMARQUE : Pour obtenir des informations sur la garantie Dell de votre ordinateur, reportez-vous au Guide
d'information sur le produit ou au document de garantie livré avec votre ordinateur.
Pour un fonctionnement optimal et afin de préserver les paramètres du BIOS, laissez la batterie
principale installée en permanence dans votre ordinateur portable Dell™. Votre ordinateur est livré
avec une batterie, installée dans la baie.
REMARQUE : Lors de la première utilisation de votre ordinateur, la batterie n'étant pas obligatoirement
complètement chargée, utilisez l'adaptateur secteur pour raccorder votre nouvel ordinateur à une prise
secteur. Pour de meilleurs résultats, utilisez l'adaptateur secteur tant que la batterie n'est pas complètement
chargée. Pour afficher le niveau de charge de la batterie, accédez au Panneau de configuration, cliquez sur
Options d'alimentation, puis cliquez sur l'onglet Jauge d'alimentation.
REMARQUE : L'autonomie de la batterie (la période durant laquelle la batterie reste chargée) diminue avec
le temps. Selon la fréquence d'utilisation et les conditions de fonctionnement de la batterie, il est possible que
vous deviez en acheter une autre au cours de la durée de vie de votre ordinateur.
L'autonomie de la batterie varie en fonction des conditions de fonctionnement. Cette durée est
considérablement réduite par l'exécution de certaines opérations, notamment, sans que cela soit
limitatif :
• Utilisation des lecteurs optiques
• Utilisation de périphériques de communications sans fil, de cartes ExpressCard, de cartes
mémoire multimédia ou de périphériques USB
• Utilisation de paramètres élevés d'affichage et de luminosité, d'économiseurs d'écran en 3D ou
d'autres programmes gourmands en ressources, tels que des jeux en 3D
• Fonctionnement de l'ordinateur en mode de performances optimales (reportez-vous à la section
« Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41).
REMARQUE : Il est recommandé de connecter l'ordinateur à une prise électrique lorsque vous gravez un CD
ou DVD.
Vous pouvez vérifier le niveau de charge de la batterie (reportez-vous à la section « Vérification de la
charge de la batterie » à la page 38) avant d'insérer la batterie dans l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez
également définir des options de gestion de l'alimentation afin que l'ordinateur vous alerte lorsque le
niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. Pour des informations sur l'accès à Quickset ou à la fenêtre
Propriétés des options d'alimentation, reportez-vous à la section « Configuration des paramètres de
gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41.38 Utilisation d'une batterie
PRÉCAUTION : L'utilisation d'une batterie non compatible peut accroître le risque d'incendie ou d'explosion.
Ne remplacez la batterie que par une batterie compatible achetée auprès de Dell. La batterie est conçue pour
fonctionner avec votre ordinateur Dell. N'utilisez pas la batterie d'un autre ordinateur.
PRÉCAUTION : Ne jetez pas les batteries avec les ordures ménagères. Lorsque votre batterie ne tient plus sa
charge, contactez votre service municipal de traitement des déchets pour savoir comment vous en débarrasser.
Reportez-vous à la section « Mise au rebut de la batterie » du Guide d'information sur le produit.
PRÉCAUTION : Une utilisation inadéquate de la batterie peut augmenter le risque d'incendie ou de brûlure
chimique. Prenez soin de ne pas la percer, l'incinérer, la démonter ou l'exposer à une température supérieure à
65 °C (149 °F). Conservez la batterie hors de portée des enfants. Manipulez les batteries endommagées ou percées
avec d'extrêmes précautions. Les batteries endommagées peuvent fuir et causer des dommages personnels ou
matériels.
Vérification de la charge de la batterie
La jauge de batterie Dell QuickSet, la fenêtre de jauge de Microsoft® Windows®, l'icône , la jauge
de charge et la jauge d'état de la batterie, ainsi que l'alerte de batterie faible fournissent des informations
sur le niveau de charge de la batterie.
Jauge de batterie Dell™ QuickSet
Si Dell QuickSet est installé, appuyez sur pour afficher la jauge de batterie QuickSet. La
fenêtre Jauge de batterie affiche l'état, le niveau de charge et la durée nécessaire pour le chargement
complet de la batterie de votre ordinateur. Pour des informations sur QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton
droit de la souris sur l'icône de la barre des tâches, puis cliquez sur Aide.
Microsoft® Windows® Jauge
La jauge de Windows indique la charge de batterie restante. Pour consulter la jauge, double-cliquez sur
l'icône de la barre des tâches. Pour plus d'informations sur la jauge d'alimentation, reportez-vous à la
section « Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41.
Si l'ordinateur est relié à une prise secteur, l'icône apparaît.
Indicateur de charge
En appuyant une fois sur le bouton d'état de l'indicateur de charge de la batterie ou en appuyant et en
maintenant enfoncé ce bouton, vous pouvez vérifier les éléments suivants :
• Le niveau de charge de la batterie (appuyez et relâchez le bouton d'état)
• L'état de fonctionnement de la batterie (appuyez et maintenez enfoncé le bouton d'état)
L'autonomie de la batterie est déterminée en grande partie par le nombre de charges qu'elle reçoit. Après
des centaines de cycles de charge et de décharge, la capacité de charge des batteries diminue et l'état des
batteries se dégrade. C'est pourquoi, une batterie peut afficher l'état « chargé » tout en maintenant un
niveau de charge réduit (état). Utilisation d'une batterie 39
Vérification du niveau de charge de la batterie
Pour vérifier le niveau de charge de la batterie, appuyez sur le bouton d'état, situé sur l'indicateur de
charge de la batterie, et relâchez-le pour allumer les voyants de niveau de charge. Chaque voyant
représente environ 20 pour cent de la charge totale de la batterie. S'il reste, par exemple, 80 pour cent de
la charge de la batterie, quatre des voyants sont allumés. Si aucun voyant n'est allumé, la batterie est
complètement déchargée.
Vérification de l'état de fonctionnement de la batterie
REMARQUE : Vous pouvez vérifier l'état de fonctionnement de la batterie de l'une des deux manières suivantes :
en utilisant l'indicateur de charge de la batterie comme décrit ci-dessous ou en utilisant la jauge de batterie de Dell
QuickSet. Pour des informations sur QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de la barre
des tâches, puis cliquez sur Aide.
Pour vérifier l'état de fonctionnement de la batterie à l'aide de l'indicateur de charge, appuyez sur le
bouton d'état de l'indicateur de charge de la batterie et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins
3 secondes. Si aucun voyant ne s'allume, la batterie est en bon état et elle dispose encore de plus de
80 pour cent de sa capacité de charge d'origine. Chaque voyant représente une dégradation
incrémentielle. Si cinq voyants s'allument, la batterie dispose de moins de 60 pour cent de sa capacité de
charge et vous devez envisager son remplacement. Pour plus d'informations sur l'autonomie de la
batterie, reportez-vous à la section « Caractéristiques » à la page 157.
Alerte de batterie faible
AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre ou de corrompre des données, enregistrez votre travail juste après l'apparition de
l'alerte de batterie faible, puis branchez l'ordinateur sur une prise murale. Si la batterie est complètement
déchargée, l'ordinateur passe automatiquement en mode Mise en veille prolongée.
Par défaut, une fenêtre contextuelle vous avertit lorsque la batterie est déchargée à environ 90 pour cent.
Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres des alertes relatives à la batterie. Pour des informations sur l'accès à
Quickset ou à la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation, reportez-vous à la section
« Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41.
Préservation de l'alimentation par batterie
Procédez comme suit pour économiser l'alimentation de la batterie :
• Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise secteur aussi souvent que possible car la durée de vie de la batterie
est largement déterminée par le nombre d'utilisations et de recharges.
• Mettez l'ordinateur en mode Veille ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée lorsque vous le laissez allumé
sans l'utiliser pendant de longs laps de temps. Pour plus d'informations sur les modes Veille et Mise en
veille prolongée, reportez-vous à la section « Modes d'économie d'énergie » à la page 40.
• Vous pouvez sélectionner des options à l'aide de l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation afin d'optimiser
l'utilisation de l'énergie de votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez également configurer ces options pour changer
lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation, fermez l'écran ou appuyez sur <Échap>.
Reportez-vous à la section « Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41
pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation.
REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la section « Performances de la batterie » à la page 37 pour plus d'informations sur
la préservation de l'alimentation par batterie.40 Utilisation d'une batterie
Modes d'économie d'énergie
Mode Veille
Le mode Veille permet d'économiser l'énergie en désactivant l'affichage et le disque dur au terme d'une
période d'inactivité prédéterminée (délai d'attente). Lorsque l'ordinateur quitte le mode Veille, il
retourne à son état précédent.
AVIS : Si l'alimentation secteur ou sur batterie est coupée alors que l'ordinateur est en mode Veille, vous risquez
de perdre des données.
Pour passer en mode Veille :
• Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Arrêter l'ordinateur, puis sur Veille.
ou
• Selon les options de gestion de l'alimentation configurées sous l'onglet Avancé (reportez-vous à la
section « Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41) de la fenêtre
Propriétés des Options d'alimentation, utilisez l'une des méthodes suivantes :
– Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation.
– Fermez l'écran.
– Appuyez sur <Échap>.
En fonction de la configuration des options de l'onglet Avancé, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation
électrique ou ouvrez l'écran pour quitter le mode Veille. Vous ne pouvez pas quitter le mode Veille au
moyen d'une touche ou de la tablette tactile.
Mode Mise en veille prolongée
Le mode Mise en veille prolongée économise l'énergie en copiant les données système dans une zone
réservée du disque dur avant d'éteindre complètement l'ordinateur. Lorsque l'ordinateur quitte le mode
Mise en veille prolongée, il retourne à son état précédent.
AVIS : Vous ne pouvez ni retirer des périphériques ni déconnecter votre ordinateur de la station d'accueil lorsqu'il
est en mode Mise en veille prolongée.
Votre ordinateur passe en mode Mise en veille prolongée quand le niveau de charge de la batterie devient
insuffisant.
Pour passer en mode Mise en veille prolongée manuellement :
• Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Arrêter l'ordinateur, appuyez sur et maintenez la
touche enfoncée, puis cliquez sur Mise en veille prolongée.
ou
• Selon les options de gestion de l'alimentation configurées dans l'onglet Avancé de la fenêtre Propriétés
des options d'alimentation, utilisez l'une des méthodes suivantes pour passer en mode Mise en veille
prolongée :
– Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation.
– Fermez l'écran.
– Appuyez sur .Utilisation d'une batterie 41
REMARQUE : Certaines cartes ExpressCard peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement lorsque l'ordinateur sort du
mode Mise en veille prolongée. Retirez et réinsérez la carte (reportez-vous à la section « Retrait d'une carte
ExpressCard ou d'un cache » à la page 67) ou redémarrez tout simplement l'ordinateur.
Pour quitter le mode Mise en veille prolongée, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. L'ordinateur peut
mettre quelques instants à quitter le mode Mise en veille prolongée. Vous ne pouvez pas quitter le mode
Mise en veille prolongée au moyen d'une touche ou de la tablette tactile. Pour plus d'informations sur le
mode Mise en veille prolongée, consultez la documentation livrée avec votre système d'exploitation.
Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation
Vous pouvez utiliser l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation de QuickSet ou les propriétés des options
d'alimentation de Windows pour configurer les paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation sur votre
ordinateur.
• Pour accéder à l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation QuickSet, double-cliquez sur l'icône dans la
barre des tâches. Pour plus d'informations sur QuickSet, cliquez sur le bouton Aide dans l'Assistant
Gestion de l'alimentation.
• Pour accéder à la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer→
Panneau de configuration→ Performances et maintenance→ Options d'alimentation. Pour des
informations sur les champs de la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation, cliquez sur l'icône
Point d'interrogation dans la barre de titre, puis sur la zone sur laquelle vous souhaitez obtenir des
informations.
Chargement de la batterie
REMARQUE : Avec Dell™ ExpressCharge™, l'adaptateur secteur charge une batterie complètement déchargée
en 1 heure si l'ordinateur est éteint. La durée de chargement est plus longue lorsque l'ordinateur est sous tension.
Vous pouvez laisser la batterie dans l'ordinateur aussi longtemps que vous le souhaitez. Les circuits internes de la
batterie préviennent toute surcharge.
Lorsque vous branchez l'ordinateur sur une prise secteur ou que vous installez une batterie pendant que
l'ordinateur est branché sur une prise secteur, l'ordinateur vérifie le niveau de charge et la température de
la batterie. Au besoin, l'adaptateur secteur charge alors la batterie et maintient le niveau de charge.
Si la batterie est chaude parce qu'elle se trouvait dans l'ordinateur ou en raison de la température
extérieure, il est probable qu'elle ne se charge pas lorsque vous branchez l'ordinateur sur une prise
secteur.
Si le voyant clignote alternativement vert et orange, la batterie est trop chaude pour être chargée.
Débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise secteur et laissez refroidir l'ordinateur et la batterie jusqu'à ce qu'ils
atteignent la température ambiante. Branchez alors l'ordinateur sur une prise secteur et continuez à
charger la batterie.
Pour plus d'informations sur la résolution des problèmes liés à la batterie, reportez-vous à la section
« Problèmes d'alimentation » à la page 97.
Remplacement de la batterie
PRÉCAUTION : Avant d'exécuter ces procédures, éteignez votre ordinateur, débranchez l'adaptateur secteur de
la prise secteur et de l'ordinateur, débranchez le modem de la prise murale et de l'ordinateur et retirez les autres
câbles externes de l'ordinateur.42 Utilisation d'une batterie
AVIS : Vous devez retirer tous les câbles externes de l'ordinateur pour éviter d'endommager les connecteurs.
PRÉCAUTION : L'utilisation d'une batterie non compatible peut accroître le risque d'incendie ou d'explosion.
Ne remplacez la batterie que par une batterie compatible achetée auprès de Dell. La batterie est conçue pour
fonctionner avec votre ordinateur Dell™, n'utilisez pas la batterie d'un autre ordinateur.
AVIS : Si vous décidez de remplacer la batterie alors que l'ordinateur est en veille, vous disposez d'une minute
pour effectuer cette opération. Passé ce délai, l'ordinateur s'éteint et toutes les données non enregistrées sont
définitivement perdues.
Pour retirer la batterie :
1 Si l'ordinateur est connecté à une station d'accueil, déconnectez-le. Pour obtenir des instructions,
consultez la documentation qui accompagne la station d'accueil.
2 Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur est éteint ou en mode de gestion de l'alimentation.
3 Faites glisser en le maintenant le loquet de fermeture de la baie de la batterie, situé sous l'ordinateur,
puis retirez la batterie de la baie.
Pour remettre en place la batterie, suivez la procédure de retrait dans l'ordre inverse.
Stockage de la batterie
Retirez la batterie de l'ordinateur lorsque vous rangez ce dernier pendant une période prolongée. Sinon,
la batterie finira par se décharger. Après une longue période de stockage, rechargez complètement la
batterie avant de l'utiliser (reportez-vous à la section « Chargement de la batterie » à la page 41).
1 batterie 2 loquet de fermeture de la baie de batterie
2
1Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 43
Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports
multimédias
Lecture CD ou DVD
AVIS : N'exercez pas de pression vers le bas sur le plateau du lecteur de CD ou de DVD lorsque vous l'ouvrez
ou le fermez. Laissez le plateau fermé lorsque vous n'utilisez pas le lecteur.
AVIS : Ne déplacez pas l'ordinateur lors de la lecture de CD ou de DVD.
1 Appuyez sur le bouton d'éjection qui se trouve sur le devant du lecteur.
2 Tirez sur le plateau.
3 Placez le disque, étiquette vers le haut, au centre du plateau et enclenchez-le sur l'axe.
REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez un module expédié avec un autre ordinateur, installez les pilotes et les logiciels
nécessaires à la lecture de DVD ou à l'écriture de données. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au CD
Drivers and Utilities (le CD Drivers and Utilities est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement disponible pour votre
ordinateur ou dans certains pays).
4 Poussez le plateau du lecteur pour le refermer.44 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias
Pour formater les CD afin de stocker des données, créer des CD de musique ou copier des CD, reportezvous au logiciel du CD livré avec votre ordinateur.
REMARQUE : Assurez-vous d'être en règle avec les lois relatives aux droits d'auteur lorsque vous créez des CD.
Les lecteurs de CD sont dotés des boutons essentiels suivants :
Les lecteurs de DVD sont dotés des boutons essentiels suivants :
Pour plus d'informations sur la lecture de CD ou DVD, cliquez sur Aide sur le lecteur de CD ou DVD (si
disponible).
Lecture.
Marche arrière dans la plage en cours.
Pause.
Marche avant dans la plage en cours.
Arrêt.
Revenir à la plage précédente.
Éjecter.
Passer à la plage suivante.
Arrêt.
Redémarrer le chapitre en cours.
Lecture.
Avance rapide.
Pause.
Retour rapide.
Avancer d'une trame en mode Pause.
Passer au titre ou au chapitre suivant.
Lecture continue du titre ou du chapitre en cours.
Revenir au titre ou au chapitre précédent.
Éjecter.Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 45
Réglage du volume
REMARQUE : Lorsque les haut-parleurs sont mis en sourdine, vous ne pouvez pas entendre le son du CD ou
du DVD.
1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes (ou Programmes)→ Accessoires→
Divertissement (ou Multimédia), puis cliquez sur Contrôle du volume.
2 Dans la fenêtre Contrôle du volume, cliquez et faites glisser la barre située dans la colonne Contrôle
du volume, puis déplacez-la vers le haut ou le bas pour augmenter ou diminuer le volume.
Pour plus d'informations sur les options de contrôle du volume, cliquez sur Aide dans la fenêtre Contrôle
du volume.
L'indicateur de volume affiche le niveau du volume actuel, même lorsque le son est mis en sourdine, sur
votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez cliquer sur l'icône dans la barre des tâches et sélectionner ou
désélectionner Disable On Screen Volume Meter (Désactiver l'indicateur de volume à l'écran) ou
appuyer sur les boutons de contrôle du volume pour activer ou désactiver l'indicateur de volume à
l'écran.
Lorsque l'indicateur est activé, réglez le volume à l'aide des boutons de contrôle du volume ou en
appuyant sur les touches suivantes :
• Appuyez sur pour augmenter le volume.
• Appuyez sur pour réduire le volume.
• Appuyez sur pour mettre le volume en sourdine.
Pour plus d'informations sur QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône dans la
barre des tâches, puis cliquez sur Aide.
Réglage de l'image
Si un message d'erreur vous informe que la résolution et la profondeur de couleur en cours utilisent trop
de mémoire et empêchent la lecture du DVD, réglez les propriétés d'affichage.
1 icône du volume 2 indicateur de volume 3 icône de mise en sourdine
1
3
246 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias
Microsoft® Windows® XP
1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration.
2 Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Apparence et thèmes.
3 Sous Choisir une tâche..., cliquez sur Change the screen resolution (Modifier la résolution de l'écran).
4 Dans la fenêtre Propriétés de l'affichage, cliquez sur la barre de Résolution de l'écran et faites-la glisser
pour définir la résolution à 1024 sur 768 pixels.
5 Cliquez sur le menu déroulant sous Qualité couleur, puis cliquez sur Moyenne 16 bits.
6 Cliquer sur OK.
Utilisation de Dell Media Experience™ et de Dell MediaDirect™
REMARQUE : Dell MediaDirect™ est en option et peut ne pas être fourni avec votre ordinateur.
REMARQUE : Dell QuickSet est requis pour le bon fonctionnement de Dell MediaDirect. La modification ou la
désactivation des paramètres par défaut de QuickSet peuvent limiter les fonctionnalités de Dell MediaDirect. Pour
plus d'informations sur Dell QuickSet, reportez-vous à la section « Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet » à la page 133.
Appuyez sur le bouton Dell MediaDirect, situé à l'avant de l'ordinateur, pour lancer Dell Media
Experience ou Dell MediaDirect.
Si l'ordinateur est allumé ou en mode Veille
Si vous appuyez sur le bouton Dell MediaDirect tandis que l'ordinateur est sous tension ou en mode
Veille, Windows XP Media Center Manager ou Dell Media Experience s'exécute, en fonction de la
configuration de votre système.
Si l'ordinateur est éteint ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée
Lorsque votre ordinateur est hors tension ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée, vous pouvez appuyer sur
le bouton Dell MediaDirect pour le démarrer et lancer automatiquement l'application Dell MediaDirect.
1 bouton Dell MediaDirect
1Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 47
REMARQUE : Vous ne pouvez pas réinstaller la fonction Dell Media Experience ou Dell MediaDirect si vous
reformatez involontairement le disque dur. Le logiciel d'installation est requis pour réinstaller ces applications
multimédia. Contactez Dell pour obtenir une assistance. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la
page 137.
Aide de Dell MediaDirect et Dell Media Experience
L'application multimédia de Dell sur votre ordinateur contient des informations d'aide. Lorsque vous
lancez l'application multimédia, cliquez sur l'icône du bureau pour obtenir une aide supplémentaire.
Utilisation du CD Repair Utility (Utilitaire de réparation) de Dell MediaDirect™ ou du CD
Reinstallation (Réinstallation) de Dell MediaDirect
CD Repair Utility (Utilitaire de réparation)
REMARQUE : L'utilitaire de réparation peut être enregistré sur le CD Drivers and Utilities plutôt que sur le CD
Repair Utility, ou bien il peut être téléchargé.
Utilisez le CD Repair Utility pour réparer Dell MediaDirect lorsque :
• Votre ordinateur est encore équipé de son disque dur d'origine, mais que :
– Dell MediaDirect ne fonctionne par correctement.
– Dell MediaDirect ne s'exécute pas lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton Dell MediaDirect.
– Vous devez réinstaller le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows®.
• Vous recevez ce kit avec un nouvel ordinateur et vous souhaitez modifier la façon dont votre disque dur
est partitionné.
AVIS : Ne modifiez la façon dont votre disque dur est partitionné que si vous êtes sûr de ce que vous faites.
Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilitaire de réparation, reportez-vous à la section « Réparation de Dell
MediaDirect ».
1 bouton Dell MediaDirect
148 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias
CD Reinstallation (Réinstallation)
Utilisez le CD Reinstallation pour réinstaller Dell MediaDirect lorsque vous souhaitez remplacer votre
disque dur existant par un nouveau lecteur à l'aide de ce kit. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la
section « Réinstallation du logiciel Dell MediaDirect ».
Réparation de Dell MediaDirect
REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la section « CD Repair Utility (Utilitaire de réparation) » pour savoir si vous devez
plutôt réparer Dell MediaDirect au lieu de le réinstaller. Si vous utilisez le CD Repair Utility alors que vous devriez
réinstaller Dell MediaDirect, il se peut que le processus ne se termine pas correctement.
REMARQUE : L'utilitaire de réparation peut être enregistré sur le CD Drivers and Utilities plutôt que sur le CD
Repair Utility, ou bien il peut être téléchargé.
Pour réparer Dell MediaDirect sur votre disque dur :
1 Insérez le CD Repair Utility (ou le CD Drivers and Utilities, le cas échéant) dans le lecteur optique et
redémarrez votre ordinateur.
2 Appuyez sur la touche dès l'apparition du logo Dell pour entrer dans le menu d'amorçage.
3 Appuyez sur la flèche vers le bas pour mettre en surbrillance le premier CD de la liste.
4 Appuyez sur pour démarrer à partir du CD.
REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez le CD Drivers and Utilities, tapez après avoir démarré à partir du CD.
5 À l'invite, tapez la commande cd \MD2 et appuyez sur .
6 Saisissez Repair (réparer) et appuyez sur .
L'utilitaire de réparation de Dell MediaDirect s'ouvre. Pour lancer l'utilitaire pour réparer Dell
MediaDirect :
1 Utilisez les touches de direction pour sélectionner OK et appuyez sur .
2 Lorsque le message Terminé apparaît, retirez le CD du lecteur et appuyez sur le bouton
d'alimentation pour éteindre l'ordinateur.
Vous pouvez maintenant utiliser le bouton Dell MediaDirect de votre ordinateur pour lancer Dell
MediaDirect.
Réinstallation de Dell MediaDirect
REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la section « CD Reinstallation (Réinstallation) » pour savoir si vous devez plutôt
réinstaller Dell MediaDirect au lieu de le réparer. Si vous utilisez le CD Reinstallation alors que vous devriez réparer
Dell MediaDirect, il se peut que le processus ne se termine pas correctement.
Pour pouvoir réinstaller le logiciel Dell MediaDirect, vous devez préparer votre disque dur. Après avoir
remplacé le disque, suivez les instructions décrites à la section « Préparation du disque dur pour la
réinstallation de Dell MediaDirect » lorsque vous installez le système d'exploitation Windows XP.
Une fois votre disque dur prêt, vous pouvez réinstaller les pilotes matériels et les logiciels (consultez les
Guides de réinstallation de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com). Ensuite, suivez les instructions décrites à
la section « Réinstallation du logiciel Dell MediaDirect ».Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 49
Préparation du disque dur pour la réinstallation de Dell MediaDirect
Lorsque vous installez le système d'exploitation Windows XP, vous devez partitionner le disque dur et
réserver 1308 Mo d'espace non partitionné pour Dell MediaDirect.
REMARQUE : Vous pouvez créer trois partitions maximum, en plus de l'espace non partitionné réservé à Dell
MediaDirect.
Pour créer une partition sur votre disque dur :
1 Appuyez sur la touche pour accepter le contrat de licence lors de l'installation de Windows XP.
2 Sur la fenêtre de configuration des partitions, utilisez les touches de direction pour sélectionner
l'espace non partitionné.
3 Tapez C pour créer une nouvelle partition à l'aide de l'espace non partitionné.
REMARQUE : Pour créer suffisamment d'espace sur votre disque dur pour la partition de Dell MediaDirect, vous
devez calculer la taille de la partition en méga-octets (Mo), en soustrayant 1308 à la quantité d'espace disponible
en Mo sur le disque dur.
4 Entrez la taille désirée en Mo pour la nouvelle partition et appuyez sur .
5 Utilisez les touches de direction pour sélectionner la partition créée et appuyez sur .
6 Sélectionnez Formater la partition en utilisant le système de fichiers NTFS (Rapide) et appuyez sur
.
7 Consultez le guide d'installation de Windows XP pour terminer l'installation de Windows XP. Lorsque
toutes les étapes de l'installation de Windows XP sont passées et que le bureau apparaît, vous pouvez
réinstaller le logiciel Dell MediaDirect.
Réinstallation du logiciel Dell MediaDirect
REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la section « CD Reinstallation (Réinstallation) » pour savoir si vous devez plutôt
réinstaller Dell MediaDirect au lieu de le réparer.Si vous utilisez le CD Reinstallation alors que vous devriez réparer
Dell MediaDirect, il se peut que le processus ne se termine pas correctement.
REMARQUE : Suivez les instructions décrites à la section « Préparation du disque dur pour la réinstallation de
Dell MediaDirect » avant de réinstaller le logiciel Dell MediaDirect. Si vous ne le faites pas, vous recevrez un
message d'erreur lors de la réinstallation du logiciel. Si vous recevez un message d'erreur, réinstallez Windows XP
ou procurez-vous un utilitaire qui vous permettra de partitionner un disque dur à partition unique avec un système
d'exploitation déjà installé dessus.
Pour réinstaller le logiciel Dell MediaDirect :
1 Insérez le CD Reinstallation dans le lecteur optique.
La fenêtre Dell MediaDirect™ s'ouvre.
2 Appuyez sur pour réinstaller Dell MediaDirect.
Un message indiquant la fin du processus de réinstallation apparaît.
3 Retirez le CD Reinstallation du lecteur optique et appuyez sur